Bizhub361 421 501ServiceManual

SERVICE MANUAL
Date: 2011/12/27
Table of Contents
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS............................................................................A-1
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE.................................................................................................................................................A-2
2. DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION..........................................................................A-3
2.1 Description items in this Service Manual...................................................................................................................................A-3
2.2 Description items for safety and important warning items.........................................................................................................A-3
3. SAFETY WARNINGS..................................................................................................................................................A-4
3.1 MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC......................................A-4
3.1.1 Actions requiring special attention...................................................................................................................................A-4
3.2 POWER PLUG SELECTION.....................................................................................................................................................A-5
3.2.1 Power Cord Set or Power Plug.......................................................................................................................................A-5
3.3 CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE...................................................................................................A-6
3.3.1 Power Supply..................................................................................................................................................................A-7
3.3.2 Installation Requirements..............................................................................................................................................A-11
3.3.3 After Service..................................................................................................................................................................A-13
3.4 FUSE.......................................................................................................................................................................................A-18
3.5 Used Batteries Precautions.....................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.1 ALL Areas......................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.2 Germany........................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.3 France...........................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.4 Denmark........................................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.5 Finland, Sweden............................................................................................................................................................A-19
3.5.6 Norway..........................................................................................................................................................................A-19
4. WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE.........................................................................................................A-20
4.1 Warning indications inside the machine..................................................................................................................................A-20
4.2 Warning indications on the boards..........................................................................................................................................A-21
5. MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT...............................................................................................A-22
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS ...............................................................................................B -1
1. PRECAUTION ON HANDLING THIS MANUAL ........................................................................................................B -1
2. PRODUCT NAME .....................................................................................................................................................B -2
3. TRADEMARK ............................................................................................................................................................B -3
3.1 TRADEMARKS OF OTHER COMPANIES .............................................................................................................................B -3
3.2 OWN TRADEMARKS ..............................................................................................................................................................B -3
4. ELECTRICAL PARTS AND SIGNALS ......................................................................................................................B -4
5. PAPER FEED DIRECTION .......................................................................................................................................B -6
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................................................C-1
1. bizhub 501/421/361.....................................................................................................................................................C-1
1.1 Type..........................................................................................................................................................................................C-1
1.2 Functions...................................................................................................................................................................................C-1
1.3 Type of paper............................................................................................................................................................................C-2
1.4 Maintenance..............................................................................................................................................................................C-2
1.5 Machine data.............................................................................................................................................................................C-2
1.6 Operating environment..............................................................................................................................................................C-2
1.7 Note for the Specifications........................................................................................................................................................C-2
2. DF-613........................................................................................................................................................................C-3
2.1 Type..........................................................................................................................................................................................C-3
2.2 Functions...................................................................................................................................................................................C-3
2.3 Paper type.................................................................................................................................................................................C-3
2.4 Paper feed prohibited originals..................................................................................................................................................C-3
2.5 Paper feed not guaranteed originals.........................................................................................................................................C-3
2.6 Mixed original feed chart...........................................................................................................................................................C-4
2.7 Maintenance..............................................................................................................................................................................C-4
2.8 Machine data.............................................................................................................................................................................C-4
2.10 Note for the Specifications......................................................................................................................................................C-4
3. PC-206........................................................................................................................................................................C-5
3.1 Type..........................................................................................................................................................................................C-5
3.2 Paper type.................................................................................................................................................................................C-5
3.3 Maintenance..............................................................................................................................................................................C-5
3.4 Machine specifications..............................................................................................................................................................C-5
4. PC-407........................................................................................................................................................................C-6
i
4.1 Type..........................................................................................................................................................................................C-6
4.2 Paper type.................................................................................................................................................................................C-6
4.3 Maintenance..............................................................................................................................................................................C-6
4.4 Machine specifications..............................................................................................................................................................C-6
5. LU-203........................................................................................................................................................................C-7
5.1 Type..........................................................................................................................................................................................C-7
5.2 Functions...................................................................................................................................................................................C-7
5.3 Type of paper............................................................................................................................................................................C-7
5.4 Maintenance..............................................................................................................................................................................C-7
5.5 Machine data.............................................................................................................................................................................C-7
6. FS-522/PU-501/OT-602..............................................................................................................................................C-8
6.1 FS-522.......................................................................................................................................................................................C-8
6.1.1 Type................................................................................................................................................................................C-8
6.1.2 Functions.........................................................................................................................................................................C-8
6.1.3 Paper type.......................................................................................................................................................................C-8
6.1.4 Stapling...........................................................................................................................................................................C-8
6.1.5 Maintenance....................................................................................................................................................................C-9
6.1.6 Machine specifications....................................................................................................................................................C-9
6.1.7 Operating environment....................................................................................................................................................C-9
6.2 PU-501......................................................................................................................................................................................C-9
6.2.1 Type................................................................................................................................................................................C-9
6.2.2 Maintenance....................................................................................................................................................................C-9
6.2.3 Machine specifications....................................................................................................................................................C-9
6.2.4 Operating environment....................................................................................................................................................C-9
6.3 OT-602......................................................................................................................................................................................C-9
6.3.1 Type................................................................................................................................................................................C-9
6.3.2 Paper Type....................................................................................................................................................................C-10
6.3.3 Maintenance..................................................................................................................................................................C-10
6.3.4 Machine specifications..................................................................................................................................................C-10
6.3.5 Operating environment..................................................................................................................................................C-10
7. FS-523/RU-507.........................................................................................................................................................C-11
7.1 FS-523.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-11
7.1.1 Type..............................................................................................................................................................................C-11
7.1.2 Functions.......................................................................................................................................................................C-11
7.1.3 Type of paper................................................................................................................................................................C-11
7.1.4 Stapling.........................................................................................................................................................................C-12
7.1.5 Punch............................................................................................................................................................................C-12
7.1.6 Maintenance..................................................................................................................................................................C-12
7.1.7 Machine data.................................................................................................................................................................C-12
7.1.9 Note for the Specifications............................................................................................................................................C-13
7.2 RU-507....................................................................................................................................................................................C-13
7.2.1 Type..............................................................................................................................................................................C-13
7.2.2 Functions.......................................................................................................................................................................C-13
7.2.3 Type of paper................................................................................................................................................................C-13
7.2.4 Maintenance..................................................................................................................................................................C-13
7.2.5 Machine data.................................................................................................................................................................C-13
7.2.7 Note for the Specifications............................................................................................................................................C-13
8. SD-507......................................................................................................................................................................C-14
8.1 Type........................................................................................................................................................................................C-14
8.2 Paper type...............................................................................................................................................................................C-14
8.3 Maintenance............................................................................................................................................................................C-14
8.4 Machine specifications............................................................................................................................................................C-14
8.5 Operating environment............................................................................................................................................................C-14
9. MT-502......................................................................................................................................................................C-15
9.1 Type........................................................................................................................................................................................C-15
9.2 Maintenance............................................................................................................................................................................C-15
9.3 Machine specifcations.............................................................................................................................................................C-15
9.4 Operating environment............................................................................................................................................................C-15
10. JS-502.....................................................................................................................................................................C-16
10.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-16
ii
10.2 Paper type.............................................................................................................................................................................C-16
10.3 Maintenance..........................................................................................................................................................................C-16
10.4 Machine specifications..........................................................................................................................................................C-16
10.5 Operating environment..........................................................................................................................................................C-16
10.6 Note for the Specifications....................................................................................................................................................C-16
11. IC-207.....................................................................................................................................................................C-17
11.1 Type......................................................................................................................................................................................C-17
11.2 Functions...............................................................................................................................................................................C-17
11.3 Paper.....................................................................................................................................................................................C-17
11.4 Maintenance and Life............................................................................................................................................................C-17
11.5 Machine Data........................................................................................................................................................................C-18
11.6 Operating environment..........................................................................................................................................................C-18
12. JS-502.....................................................................................................................................................................C-19
12.1 Web browser function............................................................................................................................................................C-19
12.2 Photo registration function.....................................................................................................................................................C-19
D OVERALL COMPOSITION..........................................................................................................D -1
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION.....................................................................................................................................D -1
1.1 System configuration................................................................................................................................................................D -1
1.2 Configuration for optional device..............................................................................................................................................D -1
2. MAIN BODY UNIT CONFIGURATION......................................................................................................................D -3
3. PAPER PATH............................................................................................................................................................D -4
4. CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM...................................................................................................................................D -5
5. TIME CHART WHEN THE POWER IS TURNED ON................................................................................................D -6
E SERVICE TOOL ..........................................................................................................................E -1
1. bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc, bizhub PRO C6000L....................................................................................E -1
1.1 Service material list .................................................................................................................................................................E -1
1.1.1 Service material list........................................................................................................................................................E -1
1.2 Jig list........................................................................................................................................................................................E -1
1.2.1 Jig list.............................................................................................................................................................................E -1
1.3 Materials...................................................................................................................................................................................E -2
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE.......................................................................................................F-1
1. MAINTENANCE ITEM ................................................................................................................................................F-1
1.1 Replacing procedure of the periodical replacement parts.........................................................................................................F-1
1.1.1 Replacing procedure of the periodical replacement parts ..............................................................................................F-1
1.2 bizhub 501/421/361...................................................................................................................................................................F-1
1.2.1 Periodic maintenance 1 (Every 250,000 prints (bizhub501/421)/Every 225,000 prints (bizhub361))..............................F-1
1.2.4 Periodic maintenance 4 (Every 1,250,000 prints (bizhub501/421)/Every 900,000 prints (bizhub361)............................F-2
1.3 DF..............................................................................................................................................................................................F-3
1.3.1 Periodic maintenance 1 (Every 250,000 prints (bizhub501/421) / Every 225,000 prints (bizhub361))............................F-3
1.4 PC..............................................................................................................................................................................................F-3
1.5 LU..............................................................................................................................................................................................F-4
1.6 FS..............................................................................................................................................................................................F-4
1.7 MT..............................................................................................................................................................................................F-4
1.8 SD..............................................................................................................................................................................................F-4
1.9 RU..............................................................................................................................................................................................F-4
2. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS LIST ...............................................................................................................F-6
2.1 Periodical replacement parts ....................................................................................................................................................F-6
2.2 bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, bizhub PRO C6000L.......................................................................................F-6
2.2.1 Periodically replaced parts list (bizhub 501/421) ............................................................................................................F-6
2.2.2 Periodically replaced parts list (bizhub 361)....................................................................................................................F-7
3. LIFE VALUE ...............................................................................................................................................................F-9
3.1 Life value of materials/parts ......................................................................................................................................................F-9
4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE bizhub 501/421/361.........................................................................F-10
4.1 External section ......................................................................................................................................................................F-10
iii
4.1.1 Replacing the ozone filter..............................................................................................................................................F-10
4.1.2 Replacing the filter cover assy and the suction filter /A assy.........................................................................................F-10
4.1.3 Replacing the paper exit suction filter............................................................................................................................F-11
4.2 Write section ...........................................................................................................................................................................F-12
4.2.1 Replacing the write unit.................................................................................................................................................F-12
4.3 Photosensitive material section...............................................................................................................................................F-15
4.3.1 Replacing the drum unit.................................................................................................................................................F-15
4.3.2 Replacing the drum.......................................................................................................................................................F-15
4.4 Transfer/separation corona section.........................................................................................................................................F-19
4.4.1 Replacing the transfer/separation corona unit...............................................................................................................F-19
4.5 Developing section..................................................................................................................................................................F-19
4.5.1 Replacing the developing unit.......................................................................................................................................F-19
4.5.2 Replacing developer......................................................................................................................................................F-20
4.6 Toner supply section................................................................................................................................................................F-21
4.6.1 Replacing the filter mounting plate assy........................................................................................................................F-21
4.6.2 Replacing the suction cover /2 assy..............................................................................................................................F-22
4.7 Cleaning/toner recycle section.................................................................................................................................................F-23
4.7.1 Replacing the cleaning blade assy................................................................................................................................F-23
4.8 Paper feed section...................................................................................................................................................................F-24
4.8.1 Replacing the feed roller/pick-up roller (tray 1)..............................................................................................................F-24
4.8.2 Replacing the separation roller assy (tray 1).................................................................................................................F-28
4.8.3 Replacing the feed roller/pick-up roller (tray 2)..............................................................................................................F-29
4.8.4 Replacing the separation roller assy (tray 2).................................................................................................................F-34
4.9 Bypass tray section..................................................................................................................................................................F-36
4.9.1 Removing/reinstalling the bypass unit...........................................................................................................................F-36
4.9.2 Replacing the separation roller assy.............................................................................................................................F-38
4.9.3 Replacing the feed roller................................................................................................................................................F-39
4.10 Registration section...............................................................................................................................................................F-40
4.10.1 Cleaning the paper dust removing brush.....................................................................................................................F-40
4.10.2 Replacing the loop roller, the loop bearing, the registration roller /Rt, and the registration bearings /Rt and /Lt........F-41
4.10.3 Replacing the feed roller/pick-up roller (tray 2)............................................................................................................F-45
4.11 Fusing section........................................................................................................................................................................F-49
4.11.1 Removing/reinstalling the fusing unit...........................................................................................................................F-49
4.11.2 Replacing the fusing claw assy...................................................................................................................................F-50
4.11.3 Replacing the fusing web............................................................................................................................................F-52
4.11.4 Replacing the fusing driven roller assy /A and /B........................................................................................................F-53
4.11.5 Removing/reinstalling the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2 (L3)..............................................................................F-54
4.11.6 Replacing the fusing roller, the fusing pressure roller, the heat insulating sleeve /A, the fusing bearings /Up and /Lw
and the fusing input gear assy.................................................................................................................................................F-55
4.11.7 Replacing the fusing sensor assy................................................................................................................................F-57
4.11.8 Replacing the fuse holder assy...................................................................................................................................F-58
5. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE DF-613.............................................................................................F-60
5.1 Precautions on maintenance...................................................................................................................................................F-60
5.2.1 Replacing the Pick-up Roller and Feed Roller...............................................................................................................F-60
5.2.2 Replacing the Separation Roller....................................................................................................................................F-61
5.2.3 Cleaning of the Pick-up Roller, Feed Roller and Separation Roller...............................................................................F-61
5.2.4 Cleaning of Miscellaneous Rollers................................................................................................................................F-62
5.2.5 Cleaning of the Scanning Guide....................................................................................................................................F-64
5.2.6 Cleaning of the Reflective Sensor Section....................................................................................................................F-64
6. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PC-206............................................................................................F-65
6.2.1 Replacing the Separation Roller Assy...........................................................................................................................F-65
6.2.2 Replacing the Feed Roller.............................................................................................................................................F-66
6.2.3 Replacing the Pick-up Roller.........................................................................................................................................F-67
7. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PC-407............................................................................................F-69
7.2.2 Replacing the Feed Roller.............................................................................................................................................F-69
7.2.3 Replacing the Pick-up Roller.........................................................................................................................................F-71
8. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE LU-203.............................................................................................F-73
8.2.1 Replacing the Pick-up Roller and Feed Roller...............................................................................................................F-73
9. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FS-522/PU-501/OT-602..................................................................F-78
iv
9.2 Conveyance section, staple section, and Staple section.........................................................................................................F-78
9.2.1 Cleaning of the Roller....................................................................................................................................................F-78
10. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE SD-507..........................................................................................F-80
10.1 Precautions on maintenance.................................................................................................................................................F-80
10.2 Conveyance section..............................................................................................................................................................F-80
10.2.1 Cleaning of the Roller..................................................................................................................................................F-80
11. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE MT-502..........................................................................................F-81
11.1 Precautions on maintenance.................................................................................................................................................F-81
11.2 Conveyance section..............................................................................................................................................................F-81
11.2.1 Cleaning of the Roller..................................................................................................................................................F-81
G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY....................................................................................................G-1
1. ITEMS NOT ALLOWED TO BE DISASSEMBLED.....................................................................................................G-1
1.1 Scanner section........................................................................................................................................................................G-1
1.1.1 CCD unit.........................................................................................................................................................................G-1
1.1.2 Mirror unit/exposure unit.................................................................................................................................................G-1
1.2 Write section.............................................................................................................................................................................G-2
1.2.1 Write section cover.........................................................................................................................................................G-2
1.2.2 Write attaching plate.......................................................................................................................................................G-2
1.3 Developing unit.........................................................................................................................................................................G-3
(1) Parts not allowed to be removed........................................................................................................................................G-3
(2) Reason for prohibition........................................................................................................................................................G-3
1.4 Drum unit...................................................................................................................................................................................G-3
1.5 Registration section...................................................................................................................................................................G-3
2. bizhub 501/421/361....................................................................................................................................................G-5
2.1 List of parts to be disassembled and reassembled...................................................................................................................G-5
2.2 Disassembling/assembling procedure......................................................................................................................................G-5
2.2.1 Removing/reinstalling the rear cover /1..........................................................................................................................G-5
2.2.5 Removing/reinstalling the right cover /Up.......................................................................................................................G-7
2.2.6 Removing/reinstalling the right cover /Lw.......................................................................................................................G-8
2.2.7 Removing/reinstalling the left cover................................................................................................................................G-8
2.2.8 Removing/reinstalling the front door...............................................................................................................................G-9
2.2.9 Removing/reinstalling the original glass..........................................................................................................................G-9
2.2.10 Removing/reinstalling the upper covers /Fr and /Lt....................................................................................................G-10
2.2.11 Removing/reinstalling the upper cover /Rr..................................................................................................................G-11
2.2.12 Removing/reinstalling the front cover..........................................................................................................................G-11
2.2.13 Removing/reinstalling the operation panel..................................................................................................................G-12
2.2.14 Removing/reinstalling the CCD unit............................................................................................................................G-13
2.2.15 Replacing the exposure lamp.....................................................................................................................................G-14
2.2.16 Removing/reinstalling the exposure unit.....................................................................................................................G-15
2.2.17 Stretching the scanner wire........................................................................................................................................G-17
2.2.18 Removing/reinstalling the toner supply unit................................................................................................................G-18
2.2.19 Removing/reinstalling the trays 1 and 2......................................................................................................................G-21
2.3 Option counter.........................................................................................................................................................................G-22
2.3.1 Configuration of the key counter...................................................................................................................................G-22
2.3.2 Installation procedure of the key counter......................................................................................................................G-23
3. DF-613......................................................................................................................................................................G-24
3.1 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items..............................................................................................................................G-24
(1) Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied........................................................................................................G-24
(2) Red-painted screws..........................................................................................................................................................G-24
(3) Variable Resistors on Board.............................................................................................................................................G-24
(4) Removal of Boards...........................................................................................................................................................G-24
3.2 Disassembling and assembling list.........................................................................................................................................G-24
3.3 Disassembling and assembling procedure.............................................................................................................................G-24
3.3.1 Cover /Fr, Cover /Rr and Original Feed Tray Cover /Lw...............................................................................................G-24
3.3.2 DF Control Board (DFCB).............................................................................................................................................G-25
3.3.3 Original Size VR (VR1).................................................................................................................................................G-25
3.3.4 Complete Stamp Unit 2.................................................................................................................................................G-26
3.3.5 Replacing the Replace Stamp 2...................................................................................................................................G-26
3.3.6 DF.................................................................................................................................................................................G-27
4. PC-206......................................................................................................................................................................G-28
v
4.2 Disassembling, assembling and cleaning list..........................................................................................................................G-28
4.2.1 Disassembling and assembling list...............................................................................................................................G-28
4.2.2 Cleaning list..................................................................................................................................................................G-28
4.3.1 Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/Front Right Cover............................................................................G-28
4.3.2 Rear Cover....................................................................................................................................................................G-29
4.4 Cleaning procedure.................................................................................................................................................................G-29
4.4.1 Separation Roller..........................................................................................................................................................G-29
4.4.2 Feed Roller...................................................................................................................................................................G-29
4.4.3 Pick-up Roller................................................................................................................................................................G-30
4.4.4 Vertical Conveyance Roller...........................................................................................................................................G-30
5. PC-407......................................................................................................................................................................G-31
5.2 Disassembling, assembling and cleaning list..........................................................................................................................G-31
5.2.1 Disassembling and assembling list...............................................................................................................................G-31
5.2.2 Cleaning list..................................................................................................................................................................G-31
5.3.1 Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/Front Right Cover............................................................................G-31
5.3.2 Rear Cover....................................................................................................................................................................G-32
5.3.3 Tray...............................................................................................................................................................................G-32
5.3.4 Wire...............................................................................................................................................................................G-32
5.4 Cleaning procedure.................................................................................................................................................................G-34
5.4.1 Separation Roller..........................................................................................................................................................G-34
5.4.2 Feed Roller...................................................................................................................................................................G-35
5.4.3 Pick-up Roller................................................................................................................................................................G-35
5.4.4 Vertical Conveyance Roller...........................................................................................................................................G-35
6. LU-203......................................................................................................................................................................G-36
6.2.1 Removal and reinstallation of the right cover, the front cover and the rear cove..........................................................G-36
6.2.2 Replacing the wires.......................................................................................................................................................G-38
7. FS-522/PU-501/OT-602............................................................................................................................................G-44
7.3.1 Conveyance Front Cover /Up, /Rt, /Lw.........................................................................................................................G-44
7.3.2 Conveyance Upper Cover.............................................................................................................................................G-45
7.3.3 Front Door.....................................................................................................................................................................G-45
7.3.4 Conveyance Front Cover /Lt.........................................................................................................................................G-45
7.3.5 Paper Exit Front Cover, Rear Cover, Connector Cover................................................................................................G-45
7.3.6 Tray /2...........................................................................................................................................................................G-46
7.3.7 OT-602..........................................................................................................................................................................G-46
7.3.8 Tray /1...........................................................................................................................................................................G-47
7.3.9 Lift Tray.........................................................................................................................................................................G-47
7.3.10 Conveyance Unit.........................................................................................................................................................G-47
7.3.11 Stapler.........................................................................................................................................................................G-47
7.3.12 PU...............................................................................................................................................................................G-48
7.3.13 Stacker Paddle Drive Clutch Assy..............................................................................................................................G-49
7.3.14 Paper Holding Paddle Drive Clutch Assy....................................................................................................................G-49
8. FS-523/RU-507.........................................................................................................................................................G-51
8.2.1 Removal/reinstallation of the upper cover.....................................................................................................................G-51
8.2.2 Removal/reinstallation of the front cover /Up................................................................................................................G-52
8.2.3 Removal/reinstallation of the front cover /Lw................................................................................................................G-52
8.2.4 Removal/reinstallation of the rear cover.......................................................................................................................G-53
8.2.5 Removal/reinstallation of the punch unit.......................................................................................................................G-53
vi
8.2.6 Replacing the stapler unit.............................................................................................................................................G-54
9. SD-507......................................................................................................................................................................G-57
9.3.1 Paper Output Tray/Front Cover....................................................................................................................................G-57
9.3.2 Rear Cover....................................................................................................................................................................G-58
9.3.3 Upper Cover..................................................................................................................................................................G-58
9.3.4 Saddle Unit...................................................................................................................................................................G-58
9.3.5 Folding Unit...................................................................................................................................................................G-59
9.3.6 Stapler Unit...................................................................................................................................................................G-60
9.3.7 Paper Guide Motor (M13).............................................................................................................................................G-63
9.3.8 Folding Roller................................................................................................................................................................G-65
10. MT-502....................................................................................................................................................................G-71
10.1 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items............................................................................................................................G-71
10.2 Disassembling and assembling list.......................................................................................................................................G-71
10.3 Disassembling and assembling procedure...........................................................................................................................G-71
10.3.1 Rear Cover/Right Door...............................................................................................................................................G-71
10.3.2 Front Cover/Upper Cover/Paper Output Tray.............................................................................................................G-71
11. JS-502.....................................................................................................................................................................G-72
11.1 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items............................................................................................................................G-72
11.1.1 ....................................................................................................................................................................................G-72
11.2 Disassembling and assembling list.......................................................................................................................................G-72
11.3 Disassembling and assembling procedure...........................................................................................................................G-72
11.3.1 Upper Cover................................................................................................................................................................G-72
12. IC-207.....................................................................................................................................................................G-73
12.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling....................................................................................................................G-73
12.2 Tools Required......................................................................................................................................................................G-73
12.3 Removal / Installation of Printer key control board................................................................................................................G-73
H CLEANING/LUBRICATION ........................................................................................................H -1
1. CLEANING/LUBRICATION PROCEDURES ............................................................................................................H -1
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING.................................................................................................................I-1
1. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT/SETTING SECTION............................................................................................I-1
1.1 Composition................................................................................................................................................................................I-1
(1) Checking before starting work..............................................................................................................................................I-1
(2) Checkpoints when conductions on-site service....................................................................................................................I-1
2. UTILITY MENU.............................................................................................................................................................I-2
2.1 List of utility mode.......................................................................................................................................................................I-2
3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS...................................................................................................................................I-6
3.1 Priority for Adjustment/Setting after replacing parts ...................................................................................................................I-6
4. SERVICE MODE..........................................................................................................................................................I-8
4.1 List of service mode....................................................................................................................................................................I-8
4.2 Setting Method..........................................................................................................................................................................I-10
4.2.1 Start and exit of the service mode..................................................................................................................................I-10
4.3 Machine Adjust.........................................................................................................................................................................I-10
4.3.1 Print Positioning: Leading Edge (Printer Area)...............................................................................................................I-10
4.3.2 Print Positioning: Side Edge (Printer Area).....................................................................................................................I-11
4.3.3 Paper Feed Direction Adj. (Printer Area)........................................................................................................................I-11
4.3.4 Printer Resist Loop.........................................................................................................................................................I-12
4.3.5 Bypass Tray Adjustment.................................................................................................................................................I-13
4.3.6 Image Position: Leading Edge (Scan Area)....................................................................................................................I-13
4.3.7 Image Position: Side Edge (Scan Area).........................................................................................................................I-14
4.3.8 Cross Direction Adjustment (Scan Area)........................................................................................................................I-14
4.3.9 Feed Direction Adjustment (Scan Area).........................................................................................................................I-14
4.3.10 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment.......................................................................................................................................I-15
4.3.11 Non-Image Area Erase Check......................................................................................................................................I-16
4.4 Imaging Process Adjustment....................................................................................................................................................I-16
4.4.1 Charging Main Manual Adj.............................................................................................................................................I-16
vii
4.4.2 Transfer Manual Adj.......................................................................................................................................................I-16
4.4.3 Separation (AC) Manual Adj...........................................................................................................................................I-16
4.4.4 Separation (DC) Manual Adj...........................................................................................................................................I-16
4.4.5 Grid Charging Manual Adj..............................................................................................................................................I-16
4.4.6 Bias Voltage Manual Adj.................................................................................................................................................I-16
4.4.7 TCR Adjustment.............................................................................................................................................................I-16
4.4.8 Toner Auto Supply..........................................................................................................................................................I-17
4.4.9 Toner Density Adjustment..............................................................................................................................................I-17
4.4.10 Laser Diameter Adjustment..........................................................................................................................................I-17
4.4.11 LD1 Offset Adj. / LD2 Offset Adj...................................................................................................................................I-17
4.4.12 LD1 Bias Adj. / LD2 Bias Adj........................................................................................................................................I-18
4.4.13 Copy Protect Density Adj..............................................................................................................................................I-18
4.5 System 1...................................................................................................................................................................................I-18
4.5.1 Marketing Area...............................................................................................................................................................I-18
4.5.2 Tel/Fax Number..............................................................................................................................................................I-19
4.5.3 Serial Number.................................................................................................................................................................I-19
4.5.4 Trouble Isolation.............................................................................................................................................................I-19
4.5.5 No Sleep.........................................................................................................................................................................I-19
4.5.6 Foolscap Size Setting.....................................................................................................................................................I-20
4.5.7 Original Size Detection...................................................................................................................................................I-20
4.5.8 Detected Size Setting.....................................................................................................................................................I-20
4.5.9 Install Date......................................................................................................................................................................I-20
4.5.10 Initialization...................................................................................................................................................................I-20
4.5.11 Machine State LED Setting...........................................................................................................................................I-21
4.6 Counter.....................................................................................................................................................................................I-21
4.6.1 Display of the Counter....................................................................................................................................................I-21
4.6.2 Present Parts Life...........................................................................................................................................................I-27
4.6.3 PM..................................................................................................................................................................................I-28
4.7 State Confirmation....................................................................................................................................................................I-28
4.7.1 Sensor Check.................................................................................................................................................................I-28
4.7.2 Load Check.....................................................................................................................................................................I-28
4.7.3 backup and recovery of adjustment data........................................................................................................................I-29
4.7.4 Memory/HDD Condition..................................................................................................................................................I-29
4.7.5 Memory Check (Memory/HDD Adjustment)...................................................................................................................I-29
4.7.6 HDD R/W Check (Memory/HDD Adjustment).................................................................................................................I-29
4.7.7 HDD Format (Memory/HDD Adjustment).......................................................................................................................I-29
4.7.8 Adj. Data Table...............................................................................................................................................................I-30
4.7.9 Adj. Data Table...............................................................................................................................................................I-30
4.7.10 IO check mode list........................................................................................................................................................I-34
4.8 ADF...........................................................................................................................................................................................I-47
4.8.1 Paper Feed Direction......................................................................................................................................................I-47
4.8.2 Lead Edge......................................................................................................................................................................I-48
4.8.3 Side Edge.......................................................................................................................................................................I-48
4.8.4 Resist Loop Adj...............................................................................................................................................................I-48
4.8.5 Original Size Adj.............................................................................................................................................................I-49
4.8.6 Density Adj......................................................................................................................................................................I-49
4.8.7 Scan Position Adjustment...............................................................................................................................................I-49
4.8.8 Sensor Auto Adjust.........................................................................................................................................................I-50
4.9 Finisher.....................................................................................................................................................................................I-50
4.9.1 Center Staple Position (SD-507)....................................................................................................................................I-50
4.9.2 Half-Fold Position (SD-507)............................................................................................................................................I-51
4.9.3 Punch Horizontal Position (PU)......................................................................................................................................I-51
4.9.4 Punch Resist Loop (PU).................................................................................................................................................I-52
4.10 Firmware Version....................................................................................................................................................................I-52
4.10.1 Procedure.....................................................................................................................................................................I-52
4.11 CS Remote Care.....................................................................................................................................................................I-53
4.11.1 Outlines.........................................................................................................................................................................I-53
4.11.2 Setting Up the CS Remote Care...................................................................................................................................I-53
4.11.3 Software SW setting for CS Remote Care....................................................................................................................I-55
4.11.4 Setup confirmation........................................................................................................................................................I-59
4.11.5 Calling the Maintenance...............................................................................................................................................I-59
4.11.6 Calling the Center from the Administrator.....................................................................................................................I-59
4.11.7 Checking the transmission log......................................................................................................................................I-59
4.11.8 Detail on settings..........................................................................................................................................................I-59
4.11.9 Detail on settings (Server Setting)................................................................................................................................I-61
4.11.10 List of the CS Remote Care error code......................................................................................................................I-64
4.11.11 Troubleshooting for CS Remote Care........................................................................................................................I-66
4.12 System 2.................................................................................................................................................................................I-66
4.12.1 Data Capture................................................................................................................................................................I-66
4.12.2 Paper Size Setting........................................................................................................................................................I-66
viii
4.12.3 Software DIPSW setting procedures............................................................................................................................I-67
4.12.4 Software DIPSW setting list..........................................................................................................................................I-67
4.12.5 Software DIPSW (1_10)...............................................................................................................................................I-79
4.12.6 Software DIPSW (11_20).............................................................................................................................................I-79
4.12.7 Software DIPSW (21_30).............................................................................................................................................I-79
4.12.8 Software DIPSW (31_40).............................................................................................................................................I-79
4.12.9 Software DIPSW (41_45).............................................................................................................................................I-79
4.12.10 ISW.............................................................................................................................................................................I-79
4.12.11 Option.........................................................................................................................................................................I-79
4.12.12 Network FAX Setting..................................................................................................................................................I-79
4.12.13 Driver Install................................................................................................................................................................I-80
4.12.14 Trouble Reset.............................................................................................................................................................I-80
4.12.15 Counter recovery........................................................................................................................................................I-80
4.12.16 Internet ISW................................................................................................................................................................I-81
4.13 List Output...............................................................................................................................................................................I-81
4.13.1 List output.....................................................................................................................................................................I-81
4.14 Test Mode...............................................................................................................................................................................I-82
4.14.1 Test pattern output........................................................................................................................................................I-82
4.14.2 Running Mode..............................................................................................................................................................I-82
4.14.3 Test Mode No.1 Overall halftone (8-bit output).............................................................................................................I-83
4.14.4 Test Mode No.2 Gradation pattern...............................................................................................................................I-83
4.14.5 Test Mode No.3 Gradation pattern (8-bit output)..........................................................................................................I-83
4.14.6 Test Mode No.5 Gradation pattern (8-bit output)..........................................................................................................I-84
4.14.7 Test Mode No.11 Beam check (8-bit output)................................................................................................................I-84
4.14.8 Test Mode No.16 Linearity evaluation pattern (1-bit error diffusion output)..................................................................I-85
4.15 Fax setting..............................................................................................................................................................................I-85
4.16 Enhanced Security..................................................................................................................................................................I-85
4.16.1 Enhanced Security function setting procedure.............................................................................................................I-85
4.16.2 Enhanced Security function tree...................................................................................................................................I-85
4.16.3 CE Password................................................................................................................................................................I-85
4.16.4 Administrator Password................................................................................................................................................I-86
4.16.5 Administrator Feature Level..........................................................................................................................................I-86
4.16.6 CE Authentication.........................................................................................................................................................I-86
4.16.7 Operation Ban release time..........................................................................................................................................I-86
4.16.8 Administrator unlocking................................................................................................................................................I-87
4.16.9 Initialize Flash Memory Lock PW..................................................................................................................................I-87
4.16.10 Counter backup setting...............................................................................................................................................I-89
4.17 Billing Setting..........................................................................................................................................................................I-90
4.17.1 Billing Setting function setting procedure......................................................................................................................I-90
4.17.2 Billing Setting function tree...........................................................................................................................................I-90
4.17.3 Counter Setting.............................................................................................................................................................I-91
4.17.4 Management Function Choice......................................................................................................................................I-91
4.17.5 License management...................................................................................................................................................I-95
5. BILLING SETTING.....................................................................................................................................................I-96
5.1 Outline.......................................................................................................................................................................................I-96
5.2 Billing Setting function setting procedure..................................................................................................................................I-96
5.3 Billing Setting function tree.......................................................................................................................................................I-96
5.4 Settings in the License management........................................................................................................................................I-97
5.4.1 Activation........................................................................................................................................................................I-97
5.4.2 Deactivation....................................................................................................................................................................I-97
5.4.3 Repair.............................................................................................................................................................................I-97
5.4.4 Initialize...........................................................................................................................................................................I-97
5.4.5 Request Code.................................................................................................................................................................I-97
5.4.6 List..................................................................................................................................................................................I-98
5.5 License Management function setting procedure.....................................................................................................................I-98
5.5.1 Activation........................................................................................................................................................................I-98
5.5.2 Deactivation..................................................................................................................................................................I-100
5.5.3 Repair...........................................................................................................................................................................I-103
5.5.4 Initialize.........................................................................................................................................................................I-105
6. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT bizhub 501/421/361................................................................................................I-106
6.1 Mis-centering adjustment of the trays 1 and 2........................................................................................................................I-106
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-106
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-106
6.2 Mis-centering adjustment of the bypass tray..........................................................................................................................I-106
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-106
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-107
7. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT DF-613....................................................................................................................I-108
7.1 Leading Edge Skew Adjustment.............................................................................................................................................I-108
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-108
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-108
ix
7.2 Height Adjustment...................................................................................................................................................................I-109
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-109
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-109
8. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PC-206....................................................................................................................I-111
8.1 Mis-centering adjustment of the Trays 3 and 4.......................................................................................................................I-111
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-111
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-111
9. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PC-407....................................................................................................................I-112
9.1 Mis-centering adjustment........................................................................................................................................................I-112
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-112
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-112
9.2 Shifter Movement Timing Belt Adjustment..............................................................................................................................I-112
(1) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-112
10. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT LU-203..................................................................................................................I-114
10.1 Adjusting the tilt of the lift plate.............................................................................................................................................I-114
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-114
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-114
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT FS-522/PU-501/OT-602........................................................................................I-116
11.1 Staple Position Adjustment...................................................................................................................................................I-116
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-116
(2) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-116
11.2 Adjustment of the Installation Position of the Shutter Drive Gear.........................................................................................I-116
(1) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-116
11.3 Punch Mis-centering Adjustment (PU-501)...........................................................................................................................I-117
(1) Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................................I-117
12. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT FS-523/RU-507.....................................................................................................I-118
12.1 Output check mode...............................................................................................................................................................I-118
12.1.1 Switches provided inside the board............................................................................................................................I-118
12.1.2 Output check mode.....................................................................................................................................................I-118
12.2 Adjusting the punch hole position in the vertical direction....................................................................................................I-122
(1) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-122
12.3 Adjusting the solenoid...........................................................................................................................................................I-123
12.3.1 Adjustment of the bypass gate solenoid (SD1)...........................................................................................................I-123
12.3.2 Adjustment of the main gate solenoid (SD2)..............................................................................................................I-124
12.4 Adjusting the belt tension......................................................................................................................................................I-125
12.4.1 Adjustment of the timing belt of the conveyance motor /Up (M4)...............................................................................I-125
12.4.2 Adjustment of the timing belt of the conveyance motor /Lw (M2)...............................................................................I-126
12.4.3 Adjustment of the timing belt of the paper exit motor (M3).........................................................................................I-126
12.5 Adjusting the tray upper surface detection position..............................................................................................................I-126
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-126
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-127
12.6 Adjusting the tray overload detection level...........................................................................................................................I-128
(1) Usage ..............................................................................................................................................................................I-128
(2) Procedure.........................................................................................................................................................................I-128
13. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT SD-507..................................................................................................................I-132
13.1 Fold Skew Adjustment..........................................................................................................................................................I-132
13.2 Center Staple Skew Adjustment...........................................................................................................................................I-132
J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE.........................................................................................................J-1
1. ISW..............................................................................................................................................................................J-1
1.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................J-1
(1) ISW (In-System Writer)........................................................................................................................................................J-1
1.2 Firmware data flow.....................................................................................................................................................................J-1
1.3 Settings on the main body side while in ISW.............................................................................................................................J-1
(1) Types of the setting.............................................................................................................................................................J-1
(2) When upgrading the firmware.............................................................................................................................................J-1
(3) When writing the firmware afresh (When replacing the board or when failed in rewriting the firmware..............................J-1
1.4 Board to be rewritten and Rewritable firmware..........................................................................................................................J-1
2. USB ISW......................................................................................................................................................................J-3
2.1 Outline........................................................................................................................................................................................J-3
2.2 Specifications.............................................................................................................................................................................J-3
(1) Parts required to conduct the USB ISW..............................................................................................................................J-3
2.3 USB ISW in the service mode....................................................................................................................................................J-3
(1) Checking the firmware version............................................................................................................................................J-3
(2) ISW execution.....................................................................................................................................................................J-3
(3) Checking the firmware version and the checksum..............................................................................................................J-7
2.4 Error list......................................................................................................................................................................................J-8
(1) Overall control board firmware abnormality.........................................................................................................................J-8
x
(2) Main body error list..............................................................................................................................................................J-9
3. Internet ISW...............................................................................................................................................................J-10
3.1 Outline......................................................................................................................................................................................J-10
3.2 Service environment................................................................................................................................................................J-10
3.3 Preparations for Firmware rewriting.........................................................................................................................................J-10
(1) Internet ISW Set................................................................................................................................................................J-10
(2) Protocol Setting.................................................................................................................................................................J-10
(3) Forwarding Access Setting................................................................................................................................................J-11
3.4 Firmware rewriting....................................................................................................................................................................J-11
(1) Conducting rewriting on the control panel.........................................................................................................................J-11
(2) During Firmware Updating.................................................................................................................................................J-12
(3) Completed or failed...........................................................................................................................................................J-12
(4) Confirming the Firmware Version......................................................................................................................................J-13
3.5 Error list....................................................................................................................................................................................J-13
(1) Overall control board firmware abnormality ......................................................................................................................J-13
(2) Error list ............................................................................................................................................................................J-14
3.6 Error Code List for the Internet ISW.........................................................................................................................................J-14
4. Internet ISW Setting...................................................................................................................................................J-16
4.1 Outline......................................................................................................................................................................................J-16
4.2 Internet ISW Set.......................................................................................................................................................................J-16
4.3 HTTP Setting............................................................................................................................................................................J-16
(1) Data Input Setting..............................................................................................................................................................J-16
(2) Connect Proxy...................................................................................................................................................................J-16
(3) Proxy Server......................................................................................................................................................................J-16
(4) Proxy Authentication..........................................................................................................................................................J-16
(5) Connection Time-Out........................................................................................................................................................J-16
4.4 FTP Setting..............................................................................................................................................................................J-16
(1) Data Input Setting..............................................................................................................................................................J-16
(2) Connect Proxy...................................................................................................................................................................J-17
(3) Proxy Server......................................................................................................................................................................J-17
(4) Connection Setting............................................................................................................................................................J-17
4.5 Forwarding Access Setting......................................................................................................................................................J-17
(1) User ID..............................................................................................................................................................................J-17
(2) Password...........................................................................................................................................................................J-17
(3) URL...................................................................................................................................................................................J-17
(4) FileName...........................................................................................................................................................................J-18
4.6 Download.................................................................................................................................................................................J-18
K TROUBLESHOOTING...................................................................................................................K-1
1. JAM INDICATION.......................................................................................................................................................K-1
1.1 Jam code list..............................................................................................................................................................................K-1
2. MALFUNCTION CODE...............................................................................................................................................K-9
2.1 Malfunction code list..................................................................................................................................................................K-9
2.2 Function to detach defective sections.....................................................................................................................................K-31
(1) DIPSW setting ..................................................................................................................................................................K-31
2.3 C-0201.....................................................................................................................................................................................K-32
2.4 C-0202.....................................................................................................................................................................................K-32
2.5 C-0203.....................................................................................................................................................................................K-33
2.6 C-0204.....................................................................................................................................................................................K-33
2.7 C-0205.....................................................................................................................................................................................K-33
2.8 C-0206.....................................................................................................................................................................................K-34
2.9 C-0207.....................................................................................................................................................................................K-34
2.10 C-0301...................................................................................................................................................................................K-34
2.11 C-1001...................................................................................................................................................................................K-35
2.12 C-1002...................................................................................................................................................................................K-35
2.13 C-1003...................................................................................................................................................................................K-35
2.14 C-1101...................................................................................................................................................................................K-36
2.15 C-1102...................................................................................................................................................................................K-36
2.16 C-1102...................................................................................................................................................................................K-36
2.17 C-1103...................................................................................................................................................................................K-37
2.18 C-1103...................................................................................................................................................................................K-37
2.19 C-1104...................................................................................................................................................................................K-37
2.20 C-1104...................................................................................................................................................................................K-38
2.21 C-1105...................................................................................................................................................................................K-38
2.22 C-1106...................................................................................................................................................................................K-38
2.23 C-1106...................................................................................................................................................................................K-39
2.24 C-1107...................................................................................................................................................................................K-39
2.25 C-1108...................................................................................................................................................................................K-39
2.26 C-1108...................................................................................................................................................................................K-40
2.27 C-1109...................................................................................................................................................................................K-40
xi
2.28 C-1110...................................................................................................................................................................................K-40
2.29 C-1111...................................................................................................................................................................................K-41
2.30 C-1112...................................................................................................................................................................................K-41
2.31 C-1113...................................................................................................................................................................................K-41
2.32 C-1114...................................................................................................................................................................................K-42
2.33 C-1115...................................................................................................................................................................................K-42
2.34 C-1116...................................................................................................................................................................................K-42
2.35 C-1117...................................................................................................................................................................................K-43
2.36 C-1118...................................................................................................................................................................................K-43
2.37 C-1119...................................................................................................................................................................................K-43
2.38 C-1120...................................................................................................................................................................................K-44
2.39 C-1121...................................................................................................................................................................................K-44
2.40 C-2001...................................................................................................................................................................................K-44
2.41 C-2201...................................................................................................................................................................................K-45
2.42 C-2202...................................................................................................................................................................................K-45
2.43 C-2301...................................................................................................................................................................................K-45
2.44 C-2302...................................................................................................................................................................................K-46
2.45 C-2303...................................................................................................................................................................................K-46
2.46 C-2401...................................................................................................................................................................................K-46
2.47 C-2402...................................................................................................................................................................................K-46
2.48 C-2403...................................................................................................................................................................................K-47
2.49 C-2701...................................................................................................................................................................................K-47
2.50 C-2702...................................................................................................................................................................................K-47
2.51 C-2703...................................................................................................................................................................................K-48
2.52 C-2801...................................................................................................................................................................................K-48
2.53 C-2802...................................................................................................................................................................................K-48
2.54 C-2803Error code 3...............................................................................................................................................................K-49
2.55 C-2803Error code 4...............................................................................................................................................................K-49
2.56 C-2803Error code 5...............................................................................................................................................................K-49
2.57 C-2803Error code 6...............................................................................................................................................................K-49
2.58 C-2804...................................................................................................................................................................................K-50
2.59 C-3201...................................................................................................................................................................................K-50
2.60 C-3301...................................................................................................................................................................................K-50
2.61 C-3302...................................................................................................................................................................................K-51
2.62 C-3501...................................................................................................................................................................................K-51
2.63 C-3502...................................................................................................................................................................................K-51
2.64 C-3801...................................................................................................................................................................................K-52
2.65 C-3802...................................................................................................................................................................................K-52
2.66 C-3803...................................................................................................................................................................................K-52
2.67 C-3804...................................................................................................................................................................................K-52
2.68 C-3805...................................................................................................................................................................................K-53
2.69 C-3806...................................................................................................................................................................................K-53
2.70 C-3807...................................................................................................................................................................................K-53
2.71 C-3808...................................................................................................................................................................................K-54
2.72 C-3901...................................................................................................................................................................................K-54
2.73 C-3902...................................................................................................................................................................................K-54
2.74 C-3903...................................................................................................................................................................................K-55
2.75 C-3904...................................................................................................................................................................................K-55
2.76 C-4001...................................................................................................................................................................................K-55
2.77 C-4101...................................................................................................................................................................................K-56
2.78 C-4401...................................................................................................................................................................................K-56
2.79 C-4701...................................................................................................................................................................................K-56
2.80 C-5001...................................................................................................................................................................................K-56
2.81 C-5002...................................................................................................................................................................................K-57
2.82 C-5003...................................................................................................................................................................................K-57
2.83 C-5301...................................................................................................................................................................................K-57
2.84 C-5302...................................................................................................................................................................................K-58
2.85 C-5303...................................................................................................................................................................................K-58
2.86 C-5401...................................................................................................................................................................................K-58
2.87 C-5402...................................................................................................................................................................................K-58
2.88 C-6001...................................................................................................................................................................................K-59
2.89 C-6002...................................................................................................................................................................................K-59
2.90 C-6003...................................................................................................................................................................................K-59
2.91 C-6101...................................................................................................................................................................................K-60
2.92 C-6201...................................................................................................................................................................................K-60
2.93 C-6701...................................................................................................................................................................................K-60
2.94 C-6702...................................................................................................................................................................................K-61
2.95 C-8001...................................................................................................................................................................................K-61
2.96 C-8301...................................................................................................................................................................................K-61
2.97 C-B001..................................................................................................................................................................................K-62
xii
2.98 C-B002..................................................................................................................................................................................K-62
2.99 C-B003..................................................................................................................................................................................K-62
2.100 C-B110................................................................................................................................................................................K-62
2.101 C-B111................................................................................................................................................................................K-63
2.102 C-B112................................................................................................................................................................................K-63
2.103 C-B113................................................................................................................................................................................K-63
2.104 C-B114................................................................................................................................................................................K-64
2.105 C-B115................................................................................................................................................................................K-64
2.106 C-B116................................................................................................................................................................................K-64
2.107 C-B117................................................................................................................................................................................K-64
2.108 C-B118................................................................................................................................................................................K-65
2.109 C-B119................................................................................................................................................................................K-65
2.110 C-B120................................................................................................................................................................................K-65
2.111 C-B122................................................................................................................................................................................K-66
2.112 C-B123................................................................................................................................................................................K-66
2.113 C-B125................................................................................................................................................................................K-66
2.114 C-B126................................................................................................................................................................................K-67
2.115 C-B127................................................................................................................................................................................K-67
2.116 C-B128................................................................................................................................................................................K-67
2.117 C-B129................................................................................................................................................................................K-67
2.118 C-B130................................................................................................................................................................................K-68
2.119 C-B131................................................................................................................................................................................K-68
2.120 C-B132................................................................................................................................................................................K-68
2.121 C-B133................................................................................................................................................................................K-69
2.122 C-B134................................................................................................................................................................................K-69
2.123 C-B135................................................................................................................................................................................K-69
2.124 C-B136................................................................................................................................................................................K-69
2.125 C-B137................................................................................................................................................................................K-70
2.126 C-B140................................................................................................................................................................................K-70
2.127 C-B141................................................................................................................................................................................K-70
2.128 C-B142................................................................................................................................................................................K-71
2.129 C-B143................................................................................................................................................................................K-71
2.130 C-B144................................................................................................................................................................................K-71
2.131 C-B145................................................................................................................................................................................K-72
2.132 C-B146................................................................................................................................................................................K-72
2.133 C-B150................................................................................................................................................................................K-72
2.134 C-B151................................................................................................................................................................................K-72
2.135 C-B152................................................................................................................................................................................K-73
2.136 C-B153................................................................................................................................................................................K-73
2.137 C-B154................................................................................................................................................................................K-73
2.138 C-B160................................................................................................................................................................................K-74
2.139 C-B161................................................................................................................................................................................K-74
2.140 C-B162................................................................................................................................................................................K-74
2.141 C-B163................................................................................................................................................................................K-74
2.142 C-B164................................................................................................................................................................................K-75
2.143 C-B165................................................................................................................................................................................K-75
2.144 C-B166................................................................................................................................................................................K-75
2.145 C-B167................................................................................................................................................................................K-76
2.146 C-B168................................................................................................................................................................................K-76
2.147 C-B169................................................................................................................................................................................K-76
2.148 C-B170................................................................................................................................................................................K-77
2.149 C-B171................................................................................................................................................................................K-77
2.150 C-B172................................................................................................................................................................................K-77
2.151 C-B173................................................................................................................................................................................K-77
2.152 C-B174................................................................................................................................................................................K-78
2.153 C-B175................................................................................................................................................................................K-78
2.154 C-B176................................................................................................................................................................................K-78
2.155 C-B177................................................................................................................................................................................K-79
2.156 C-B178................................................................................................................................................................................K-79
2.157 C-B180................................................................................................................................................................................K-79
2.158 C-B181................................................................................................................................................................................K-79
2.159 C-B182................................................................................................................................................................................K-80
2.160 C-B183................................................................................................................................................................................K-80
2.161 C-B184................................................................................................................................................................................K-80
2.162 C-B185................................................................................................................................................................................K-81
2.163 C-B186................................................................................................................................................................................K-81
2.164 C-B187................................................................................................................................................................................K-81
2.165 C-B188................................................................................................................................................................................K-82
2.166 C-C103................................................................................................................................................................................K-82
2.167 C-C181................................................................................................................................................................................K-82
xiii
2.168 C-C182................................................................................................................................................................................K-82
2.169 C-C183................................................................................................................................................................................K-83
2.170 C-C190................................................................................................................................................................................K-83
2.171 C-C191................................................................................................................................................................................K-83
2.172 C-C192................................................................................................................................................................................K-83
2.173 C-C193................................................................................................................................................................................K-84
2.174 C-C194................................................................................................................................................................................K-84
2.175 C-C1A0................................................................................................................................................................................K-84
2.176 C-C1A1................................................................................................................................................................................K-85
2.177 C-C1A2................................................................................................................................................................................K-85
2.178 C-C1A3................................................................................................................................................................................K-85
2.179 C-C1A4................................................................................................................................................................................K-85
2.180 C-C284................................................................................................................................................................................K-86
2.181 C-C285................................................................................................................................................................................K-86
2.182 C-C286................................................................................................................................................................................K-86
2.183 C-C287................................................................................................................................................................................K-87
2.184 C-C288................................................................................................................................................................................K-87
2.185 C-C289................................................................................................................................................................................K-87
2.186 C-D001................................................................................................................................................................................K-87
2.187 C-D002................................................................................................................................................................................K-88
2.188 C-D005................................................................................................................................................................................K-88
2.189 C-D201................................................................................................................................................................................K-88
2.190 C-D202................................................................................................................................................................................K-89
2.191 C-D203................................................................................................................................................................................K-89
2.192 C-D281................................................................................................................................................................................K-89
2.193 C-D282................................................................................................................................................................................K-89
2.194 C-D301................................................................................................................................................................................K-90
2.195 C-D302................................................................................................................................................................................K-90
2.196 C-D303................................................................................................................................................................................K-90
2.197 C-Dxxx except for the above...............................................................................................................................................K-91
2.198 C-D401................................................................................................................................................................................K-91
2.199 C-D501................................................................................................................................................................................K-91
2.200 C-D601................................................................................................................................................................................K-91
2.201 C-E001................................................................................................................................................................................K-92
2.202 C-E002................................................................................................................................................................................K-92
2.203 C-E003................................................................................................................................................................................K-92
2.204 C-E004................................................................................................................................................................................K-93
2.205 C-E005................................................................................................................................................................................K-93
2.206 C-E006................................................................................................................................................................................K-93
2.207 C-E007................................................................................................................................................................................K-93
2.208 C-E081................................................................................................................................................................................K-94
2.209 C-E082................................................................................................................................................................................K-94
2.210 C-E083................................................................................................................................................................................K-94
2.211 C-E084................................................................................................................................................................................K-95
2.212 C-E085................................................................................................................................................................................K-95
2.213 C-E086................................................................................................................................................................................K-95
2.214 C-E087................................................................................................................................................................................K-95
2.215 C-E088................................................................................................................................................................................K-96
2.216 C-E089................................................................................................................................................................................K-96
2.217 C-E08A................................................................................................................................................................................K-96
2.218 C-E08B................................................................................................................................................................................K-96
2.219 C-E08C................................................................................................................................................................................K-97
2.220 C-E08D................................................................................................................................................................................K-97
2.221 C-E08E................................................................................................................................................................................K-97
2.222 C-E08F................................................................................................................................................................................K-98
2.223 C-E090................................................................................................................................................................................K-98
2.224 C-E091................................................................................................................................................................................K-98
2.225 C-E092................................................................................................................................................................................K-98
2.226 C-E093................................................................................................................................................................................K-99
2.227 C-E094................................................................................................................................................................................K-99
2.228 C-E095................................................................................................................................................................................K-99
2.229 C-E096..............................................................................................................................................................................K-100
2.230 C-E097..............................................................................................................................................................................K-100
2.231 C-E098..............................................................................................................................................................................K-100
2.232 C-E099..............................................................................................................................................................................K-100
2.233 C-E09A..............................................................................................................................................................................K-101
2.234 C-E09B..............................................................................................................................................................................K-101
2.235 C-E09C..............................................................................................................................................................................K-101
2.236 C-E09E..............................................................................................................................................................................K-102
2.237 C-E09F..............................................................................................................................................................................K-102
xiv
2.238 C-E0A0..............................................................................................................................................................................K-102
2.239 C-E0A1..............................................................................................................................................................................K-102
2.240 C-E0A2..............................................................................................................................................................................K-103
2.241 C-E0A3..............................................................................................................................................................................K-103
2.242 C-E0A4..............................................................................................................................................................................K-103
2.243 C-E0A5..............................................................................................................................................................................K-103
2.244 C-E0A6..............................................................................................................................................................................K-104
2.245 C-E0A7..............................................................................................................................................................................K-104
2.246 C-E0A8..............................................................................................................................................................................K-104
2.247 C-E0A9..............................................................................................................................................................................K-105
2.248 C-E0AA..............................................................................................................................................................................K-105
2.249 C-E0AB..............................................................................................................................................................................K-105
2.250 C-E0AC.............................................................................................................................................................................K-105
2.251 C-E0AD.............................................................................................................................................................................K-106
2.252 C-E0AE..............................................................................................................................................................................K-106
2.253 C-E0AF..............................................................................................................................................................................K-106
2.254 C-E0B0..............................................................................................................................................................................K-107
2.255 C-E0B1..............................................................................................................................................................................K-107
2.256 C-FA50..............................................................................................................................................................................K-107
2.257 C-FA51..............................................................................................................................................................................K-107
3. TROUBLESHOOTING (IC-207)..............................................................................................................................K-109
3.1 Toubleshooting the printing system.......................................................................................................................................K-109
3.1.1 Toubleshooting the printing system.............................................................................................................................K-109
3.1.2 Troubleshooting of the print controller and copier.......................................................................................................K-109
3.2 Data Capture.........................................................................................................................................................................K-109
4. TROUBLESHOOTING (i-Option LK-101/102/103)..................................................................................................K-112
4.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................K-112
4.1.1 Structure of license management................................................................................................................................K-112
4.1.2 License management information...............................................................................................................................K-112
4.2 Error message.......................................................................................................................................................................K-112
4.2.1 License management error.........................................................................................................................................K-112
L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING..................................................................................L-1

1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING.......................................................................................................................................L-1
1.1 bizhub 501/421/361...................................................................................................................................................................L-1
1.1.1 Main body rear side (Switch/sensor)(Main body)............................................................................................................L-1
1.1.2 Main body front side (Switch/sensor)...............................................................................................................................L-1
1.1.3 Main body upper surface (Switch/sensor).......................................................................................................................L-1
1.1.4 Developing section (Switch/sensor).................................................................................................................................L-2
1.1.5 Tray1 (Switch/sensor)......................................................................................................................................................L-2
1.1.6 Tray2 (Switch/sensor)......................................................................................................................................................L-2
1.1.7 Registration (Main body)..................................................................................................................................................L-3
1.1.8 Bypass tray section (Switch/sensor)................................................................................................................................L-3
1.1.9 ADU section (Switch/sensor)...........................................................................................................................................L-3
1.1.10 Fusing section (Switch/sensor)......................................................................................................................................L-4
1.1.11 Reverse/paper exit section (Switch/sensor)..................................................................................................................L-4
1.1.12 Lower area (Main body rear side) (Load) (Main body)..................................................................................................L-4
1.1.13 Upper area (Load).........................................................................................................................................................L-5
1.1.14 Main body inside (Load)................................................................................................................................................L-5
1.1.15 Main body right side (Load)...........................................................................................................................................L-5
1.1.16 Write section (Load).......................................................................................................................................................L-6
1.1.17 Photo conductor section (Load) ....................................................................................................................................L-6
1.1.18 Tray1 (Load)..................................................................................................................................................................L-6
1.1.19 Tray2 (Load)..................................................................................................................................................................L-7
1.1.20 Registration (Load)........................................................................................................................................................L-7
1.1.21 Bypass tray section (Load)............................................................................................................................................L-7
1.1.22 ADU section (Load).......................................................................................................................................................L-8
1.1.23 Reverse/paper exit section (Load).................................................................................................................................L-8
1.1.24 Main body rear side (Boards and others) (Main body)..................................................................................................L-8
1.1.25 Main body front side (Boards and others)......................................................................................................................L-9
1.1.26 Main body inside (Boards and others)...........................................................................................................................L-9
1.1.27 Operation panel and main body upper surface (Boards and others).............................................................................L-9
1.1.28 Write section (Boards and others)...............................................................................................................................L-10
1.1.29 Photo conductor section (Boards and others).............................................................................................................L-10
1.1.30 ADU section (Boards and others)................................................................................................................................L-10
1.1.31 Fusing section (Boards and others).............................................................................................................................L-11
1.2 DF............................................................................................................................................................................................L-11
1.2.1 Front side (DF)...............................................................................................................................................................L-11
1.2.2 Rear side (DF)...............................................................................................................................................................L-11
1.2.3 Upper surface (DF)........................................................................................................................................................L-12
xv
1.2.4 Paper feed tray (DF)......................................................................................................................................................L-12
1.3 PC............................................................................................................................................................................................L-13
1.3.1 PC-206...........................................................................................................................................................................L-13
1.3.2 PC-407...........................................................................................................................................................................L-13
1.4 LU-203.....................................................................................................................................................................................L-14
1.5 FS............................................................................................................................................................................................L-15
1.5.1 FS-522...........................................................................................................................................................................L-15
1.5.2 Front side (FS-523)........................................................................................................................................................L-15
1.5.3 Rear side (FS-523)........................................................................................................................................................L-16
1.5.4 Punch section (FS-523).................................................................................................................................................L-16
1.5.5 Conveyance section (FS-523).......................................................................................................................................L-17
1.5.6 Stapler section (FS-523)................................................................................................................................................L-18
1.5.7 Main tray section (FS-523)............................................................................................................................................L-19
1.6 PU-501.....................................................................................................................................................................................L-19
1.7 SD-507.....................................................................................................................................................................................L-20
1.8 MT-502.....................................................................................................................................................................................L-20
1.9 RU-507.....................................................................................................................................................................................L-21
1.10 JS-502....................................................................................................................................................................................L-21
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING..........................................................................................................................L-22
2.1 Main body................................................................................................................................................................................L-22
2.1.1 Connector in the board..................................................................................................................................................L-22
2.2 DF-613.....................................................................................................................................................................................L-27
2.3 PC............................................................................................................................................................................................L-27
2.4 LU............................................................................................................................................................................................L-28
2.5 FS............................................................................................................................................................................................L-29
2.6 SD-507.....................................................................................................................................................................................L-30
2.7 MT-502.....................................................................................................................................................................................L-30
M TIMING CHART............................................................................................................................M-1
1. bizhub 501/421/361....................................................................................................................................................M-1
1.1 A4, 2 single sided originals, single sided copy (1 copy), paper feed tray 1 (Main body)..........................................................M-1
1.2 A4, 3 double sided original, double sided copy (1 copy), paper feed tray 1 (Main body).........................................................M-1
2. DF-613........................................................................................................................................................................M-2
2.1 Single sided original mode (A4, 2 sheets feed) (DF)................................................................................................................M-2
2.2 Double sided original mode (A4, 2 sheets feed) (DF)...............................................................................................................M-2
2.3 FAX fine mode (A4, 2 sheets feed) (DF)...................................................................................................................................M-3
2.4 FAX immediate send mode (A4, 2 sheets feed) (DF)...............................................................................................................M-4
3. LU-203........................................................................................................................................................................M-5
3.1 A4, life size, 1-1 mode, 3 originals (LU)....................................................................................................................................M-5
4. FS-522........................................................................................................................................................................M-6
4.1 Non-sort, A4, 1 sheet setting (FS-522).....................................................................................................................................M-6
4.2 1 stapling, punch, A4, 2 originals, 2 copies setting (FS-522)....................................................................................................M-6
5. FS-523........................................................................................................................................................................M-7
5.1 No-sort, 1 original, 1 copy setting (FS-523)..............................................................................................................................M-7
5.2 Sort, 2 originals, 2 copies setting (FS-523)...............................................................................................................................M-7
5.3 1 staple /Rr, A4S, 2 originals, 2 copies setting (FS-523)..........................................................................................................M-8
5.4 Non-sort, punch, 1 original, 1copy setting (FS-523).................................................................................................................M-8
N WIRING DIAGRAM........................................................................................................................N-1
1. bizhub 501/421/361.....................................................................................................................................................N-1
1.1 Main body..................................................................................................................................................................................N-1
2. Option..........................................................................................................................................................................N-2
2.1 Reverse automatic document feeder DF-613...........................................................................................................................N-2
2.2 Paper feed cabinet PC-206.......................................................................................................................................................N-3
2.3 Paper feed cabinet PC-407.......................................................................................................................................................N-4
2.4 Large capacity unit LU-203.......................................................................................................................................................N-5
2.5 Finisher FS-522/PU-501............................................................................................................................................................N-6
2.6 Finisher FS-523.........................................................................................................................................................................N-7
2.7 Saddle stitcher SD-507.............................................................................................................................................................N-8
2.8 Mail bin kit MT-502....................................................................................................................................................................N-9
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 501/421/361...........................................................................O-1

1. SCANNER SECTION.................................................................................................................................................O-1
xvi
1.1 Composition..............................................................................................................................................................................O-1
1.2 Drive..........................................................................................................................................................................................O-1
1.3 Operation..................................................................................................................................................................................O-1
1.3.1 Scan/exposure lamp control...........................................................................................................................................O-1
1.3.2 Original size detection control.........................................................................................................................................O-3
1.3.3 AE control.......................................................................................................................................................................O-3
1.3.4 Image processing............................................................................................................................................................O-4
2. WRITE SECTION.......................................................................................................................................................O-5
2.1 Composition..............................................................................................................................................................................O-5
2.2 Operation..................................................................................................................................................................................O-5
2.2.1 Laser beam path.............................................................................................................................................................O-5
2.2.2 Write control....................................................................................................................................................................O-6
2.2.3 Image stabilization control..............................................................................................................................................O-6
2.2.4 Image processing............................................................................................................................................................O-6
3. PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION..............................................................................................................................O-7
3.1 Composition..............................................................................................................................................................................O-7
3.2 Drive..........................................................................................................................................................................................O-7
3.2.1 Drum drive......................................................................................................................................................................O-7
3.2.2 Drum claw drive..............................................................................................................................................................O-7
3.3 Operation..................................................................................................................................................................................O-8
3.3.1 Image creation control....................................................................................................................................................O-8
3.3.2 Drum claw control...........................................................................................................................................................O-8
3.3.3 Image stabilization control..............................................................................................................................................O-9
4. CHARGING SECTION..............................................................................................................................................O-10
4.1 Composition............................................................................................................................................................................O-10
4.2 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................O-10
4.2.1 Charging control............................................................................................................................................................O-10
4.2.2 Erase lamp (EL) control................................................................................................................................................O-10
5. TRANSFER/SEPARATION SECTION.....................................................................................................................O-11
5.1 Composition............................................................................................................................................................................O-11
5.2 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................O-11
5.2.1 Transfer guide control...................................................................................................................................................O-11
5.2.2 Transfer/separation control...........................................................................................................................................O-11
5.2.3 Transfer exposure lamp (TSL) control..........................................................................................................................O-11
6. DEVELOPING UNIT.................................................................................................................................................O-12
6.1 Composition............................................................................................................................................................................O-12
6.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................O-12
6.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................O-12
6.3.1 Developer conveyance.................................................................................................................................................O-12
6.3.2 Developing bias............................................................................................................................................................O-13
6.3.3 Developing suction control............................................................................................................................................O-13
6.3.4 Image stabilization control............................................................................................................................................O-14
7. TONER SUPPLY SECTION.....................................................................................................................................O-15
7.1 Composition............................................................................................................................................................................O-15
7.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................O-16
7.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................O-16
7.3.1 Toner level detection control.........................................................................................................................................O-16
7.3.2 Toner supply control to the toner hopper......................................................................................................................O-16
7.3.3 Toner supply control to the developing unit..................................................................................................................O-16
7.3.4 Toner conveyance control.............................................................................................................................................O-17
8. CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE SECTION...............................................................................................................O-18
8.1 Composition............................................................................................................................................................................O-18
8.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................O-18
8.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................O-18
8.3.1 Cleaning operation........................................................................................................................................................O-18
8.3.2 Toner collection mechanism.........................................................................................................................................O-19
8.3.3 Toner conveyance operation........................................................................................................................................O-19
9. PAPER FEED SECTION (Tray 1/2)..........................................................................................................................O-20
9.1 Composition............................................................................................................................................................................O-20
9.1.1 Tray 1............................................................................................................................................................................O-20
9.1.2 Tray 2............................................................................................................................................................................O-20
9.2 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................O-20
9.2.1 Paper feed drive............................................................................................................................................................O-20
9.2.2 Tray lift drive.................................................................................................................................................................O-21
9.3 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................O-21
9.3.1 Up/down control............................................................................................................................................................O-21
9.3.2 Paper size detection control..........................................................................................................................................O-22
9.3.3 Paper feed control.........................................................................................................................................................O-23
xvii
9.3.4 Paper empty control......................................................................................................................................................O-24
9.3.5 Paper remaining detection mechanism.........................................................................................................................O-25
10. BYPASS SECTION.................................................................................................................................................O-26
10.1 Composition..........................................................................................................................................................................O-26
10.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................O-26
10.2.1 Paper feed drive..........................................................................................................................................................O-26
10.2.2 Tray lift drive...............................................................................................................................................................O-26
10.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................O-26
10.3.1 Up/down control..........................................................................................................................................................O-26
10.3.2 Paper size detection control........................................................................................................................................O-27
10.3.3 Paper feed control.......................................................................................................................................................O-28
10.3.4 Paper empty control....................................................................................................................................................O-29
11. REGISTRATION SECTION....................................................................................................................................O-30
11.1 Composition..........................................................................................................................................................................O-30
11.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................O-30
11.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................O-30
11.3.1 Loop control................................................................................................................................................................O-30
12. ADU SECTION.......................................................................................................................................................O-32
12.1 Composition..........................................................................................................................................................................O-32
12.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................O-32
12.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................O-32
12.3.1 Conveyance path........................................................................................................................................................O-32
12.3.2 Conveyance control....................................................................................................................................................O-33
13. FUSING SECTION.................................................................................................................................................O-38
13.1 Composition..........................................................................................................................................................................O-38
13.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................O-38
13.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................O-38
13.3.1 Fusing roller drive control............................................................................................................................................O-38
13.3.2 Web drive control........................................................................................................................................................O-38
13.3.3 Fusing temperature control.........................................................................................................................................O-39
13.3.4 Fusing roller edge cooling control...............................................................................................................................O-39
13.3.5 Envelope conveyance mechanism.............................................................................................................................O-40
13.3.6 Protection against abnormality....................................................................................................................................O-40
13.3.7 Jam detection control..................................................................................................................................................O-41
14. REVERSE/EXIT SECTION.....................................................................................................................................O-42
14.1 Composition..........................................................................................................................................................................O-42
14.2 Drive......................................................................................................................................................................................O-42
14.3 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................O-42
14.3.1 Conveyance control....................................................................................................................................................O-42
14.3.2 Reverse control...........................................................................................................................................................O-43
15. INTERFACE SECTION...........................................................................................................................................O-45
15.1 Composition..........................................................................................................................................................................O-45
15.2 Specifications........................................................................................................................................................................O-45
16. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL......................................................................................................................O-46
16.1 Outline...................................................................................................................................................................................O-46
16.2 Operation flow.......................................................................................................................................................................O-46
16.2.1 Image stabilization control flow when the power switch (SW2) is turned ON.............................................................O-46
16.2.2 Image stabilization control flow while in the print and the idle....................................................................................O-47
17. IMAGE PROCESSING...........................................................................................................................................O-48
17.1 Image processing in the scanner section..............................................................................................................................O-48
17.1.1 Image processing flow in the scanner section............................................................................................................O-48
17.1.2 Shading correction......................................................................................................................................................O-48
17.1.3 AE control...................................................................................................................................................................O-48
17.1.4 Area discrimination.....................................................................................................................................................O-49
17.1.5 Brightness/density conversion....................................................................................................................................O-49
17.1.6 Filter/magnification......................................................................................................................................................O-50
17.1.7 Scanner gamma correction.........................................................................................................................................O-51
17.1.8 Halftone processing (error diffusion)...........................................................................................................................O-51
17.1.9 Compression...............................................................................................................................................................O-51
17.1.10 Storage of image data...............................................................................................................................................O-51
17.2 Image processing in the write section...................................................................................................................................O-51
(1) Rotation/elongation...........................................................................................................................................................O-51
(2) Frequency conversion......................................................................................................................................................O-51
(3) PWM.................................................................................................................................................................................O-51
18. OTHERS.................................................................................................................................................................O-52
18.1 Fan control............................................................................................................................................................................O-52
18.1.1 Composition................................................................................................................................................................O-52
18.1.2 Operation....................................................................................................................................................................O-52
xviii
18.2 Counter control......................................................................................................................................................................O-54
18.2.1 Composition................................................................................................................................................................O-54
18.2.2 Operation....................................................................................................................................................................O-54
18.3 Parts that operate when the power switch is turned ON.......................................................................................................O-56
18.3.1 Parts that operate when the main power switch (SW1) is turned ON.........................................................................O-56
18.3.2 Parts that operate when the power switch (SW2) is turned ON..................................................................................O-56
18.4 Authentication unit.................................................................................................................................................................O-56
18.4.1 Authentication unit (Biometric type) (AU-101).............................................................................................................O-56
18.4.2 Authentication unit (IC card type: AU-201).................................................................................................................O-57
PA THEORY OF OPERATION DF-613..........................................................................................PA-1

1. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................................................................PA-1
1.1 In 1-sided mode......................................................................................................................................................................PA-1
1.2 In 2-sided mode......................................................................................................................................................................PA-1
2. COMPOSITION........................................................................................................................................................PA-2
3. DRIVE.......................................................................................................................................................................PA-3
4. OPERATION.............................................................................................................................................................PA-4
4.1 Document pick-up mechanism................................................................................................................................................PA-4
4.1.1 Pick-up operation..........................................................................................................................................................PA-4
4.2 Document feed/conveyance mechanism................................................................................................................................PA-4
(1) Operation flow in the 1-sided mode..................................................................................................................................PA-5
(2) Operation flow in the 2-sided mode..................................................................................................................................PA-5
4.3 Raised/lowered position detecting mechanism.......................................................................................................................PA-6
4.3.1 DF 15° open/close detection mechanism.....................................................................................................................PA-6
4.3.2 DF open/close detection mechanism............................................................................................................................PA-6
PB THEORY OF OPERATION PC-206..........................................................................................PB-1

1. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................................................................PB-1
2. COMPOSITION........................................................................................................................................................PB-2
3. DRIVE.......................................................................................................................................................................PB-3
4. OPERATIONS..........................................................................................................................................................PB-4
4.1 Paper Feed Section................................................................................................................................................................PB-4
4.1.1 Paper feed mechanism.................................................................................................................................................PB-4
4.1.2 Paper lifting motion.......................................................................................................................................................PB-4
4.2 Tray Section............................................................................................................................................................................PB-5
4.2.1 Paper size detection.....................................................................................................................................................PB-5
4.2.2 Paper level indicator mechanism..................................................................................................................................PB-5
PC THEORY OF OPERATION PC-407..........................................................................................PC-1

1. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................................................................PC-1
2. COMPOSITION........................................................................................................................................................PC-2
3. DRIVE.......................................................................................................................................................................PC-3
4. OPERATIONS..........................................................................................................................................................PC-4
4.1 Paper Feed Section................................................................................................................................................................PC-4
4.1.1 Paper feed mechanism.................................................................................................................................................PC-4
4.2 Tray Section............................................................................................................................................................................PC-4
4.2.1 Up/down mechanism....................................................................................................................................................PC-4
4.2.2 Shift Gate drive mechanism..........................................................................................................................................PC-5
4.2.3 Shifter drive mechanism...............................................................................................................................................PC-5
4.2.4 Paper empty detection..................................................................................................................................................PC-6
PD THEORY OF OPERATION LU-203..........................................................................................PD-1

1. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................................................................PD-1
2. COMPOSITION........................................................................................................................................................PD-2
3. PAPER FEED SECTION..........................................................................................................................................PD-3
3.1 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PD-3
3.1.1 Paper feed drive...........................................................................................................................................................PD-3
3.2 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PD-3
3.2.1 Paper feed control........................................................................................................................................................PD-3
3.2.2 Remaining paper detection control...............................................................................................................................PD-4
4. TRAY SECTION.......................................................................................................................................................PD-6
4.1 Drive........................................................................................................................................................................................PD-6
4.1.1 Tray lift drive.................................................................................................................................................................PD-6
4.2 Operation................................................................................................................................................................................PD-6
4.2.1 Tray lift control..............................................................................................................................................................PD-6
PE THEORY OF OPERATION FS-522/PU-501/OT-602................................................................PE-1
xix
1. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................................................................PE-1
1.1 Exiting Paper to the Tray /1.....................................................................................................................................................PE-1
1.2 Exiting Paper to the Tray /2.....................................................................................................................................................PE-1
1.3 Exiting Paper to OT.................................................................................................................................................................PE-2
2. COMPOSITION........................................................................................................................................................PE-3
3. DRIVE.......................................................................................................................................................................PE-4
3.1 FS-522....................................................................................................................................................................................PE-4
3.2 PU-501....................................................................................................................................................................................PE-4
4. OPERATIONS..........................................................................................................................................................PE-5
4.1 Conveyance Section...............................................................................................................................................................PE-5
4.1.1 Configuration.................................................................................................................................................................PE-5
4.1.2 Entrance/Conveyance section......................................................................................................................................PE-5
4.1.3 Intermediate Conveyance Section................................................................................................................................PE-5
4.1.4 Exit Conveyance Section..............................................................................................................................................PE-6
4.2 Up/down Section.....................................................................................................................................................................PE-6
4.2.1 Up/down mechanism....................................................................................................................................................PE-6
4.2.2 Tray Up/Down operation...............................................................................................................................................PE-7
4.2.3 Tray Upper Limit Position Detection Mechanism..........................................................................................................PE-7
4.2.4 Shutter Open/Close Mechanism...................................................................................................................................PE-8
4.3 Stacker section........................................................................................................................................................................PE-9
4.3.1 Paper aligning mechanism (sub scan direction)...........................................................................................................PE-9
4.3.2 Paper aligning mechanism (main scan direction).......................................................................................................PE-10
4.3.3 Exit mechanism...........................................................................................................................................................PE-10
4.4 Stapling.................................................................................................................................................................................PE-11
4.4.1 Stapling mechanism....................................................................................................................................................PE-11
4.4.2 Stapling Unit moving mechanism................................................................................................................................PE-12
4.4.3 Stapling Position.........................................................................................................................................................PE-12
4.4.4 Staple empty detection...............................................................................................................................................PE-12
5. PU-501....................................................................................................................................................................PE-14
5.1 Composition..........................................................................................................................................................................PE-14
5.2 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PE-14
5.2.1 Registration mechanism.............................................................................................................................................PE-14
5.2.2 Punch mechanism......................................................................................................................................................PE-14
5.2.3 Punch status detection................................................................................................................................................PE-14
5.2.4 Punch Scraps Box full detection mechanism..............................................................................................................PE-15
6. OT-602....................................................................................................................................................................PE-16
6.1 Composition..........................................................................................................................................................................PE-16
6.2 Operation..............................................................................................................................................................................PE-16
6.2.1 Overview.....................................................................................................................................................................PE-16
PF THEORY OF OPERATION FS-523/RU-507THEORY OF OPERATION DF-613.....................PF-1

1. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................................................................PF-1
1.1 Non-sort mode (sub tray paper exit)........................................................................................................................................PF-1
1.2 Non-sort/sort/group mode.......................................................................................................................................................PF-1
1.3 Staple mode............................................................................................................................................................................PF-1
2. COMPOSITION.........................................................................................................................................................PF-3
3. DRIVE.......................................................................................................................................................................PF-4
3.1 FS-523.....................................................................................................................................................................................PF-4
3.2 RU-507....................................................................................................................................................................................PF-4
4. OPERATION.............................................................................................................................................................PF-5
4.1 RU conveyance section...........................................................................................................................................................PF-5
4.1.1 Conveyance mechanism...............................................................................................................................................PF-5
4.2 FS conveyance section...........................................................................................................................................................PF-5
4.2.1 FS conveyance section.................................................................................................................................................PF-5
4.2.2 Entrance conveyance mechanism................................................................................................................................PF-5
4.2.3 Gate mechanism...........................................................................................................................................................PF-6
4.2.4 Sub tray conveyance mechanism.................................................................................................................................PF-7
4.2.5 Main tray/handling tray conveyance mechanism..........................................................................................................PF-7
4.2.6 Roller separation mechanism........................................................................................................................................PF-9
4.2.7 Conveyance operation................................................................................................................................................PF-10
4.3 Main tray section...................................................................................................................................................................PF-11
4.3.1 Main tray up/down mechanism...................................................................................................................................PF-11
4.3.2 Main tray shift mechanism..........................................................................................................................................PF-12
4.4 Punch section........................................................................................................................................................................PF-12
4.4.1 Punch mechanism.......................................................................................................................................................PF-12
4.4.2 Punch hole switchover mechanism (for inch area).....................................................................................................PF-13
4.5 Staple section........................................................................................................................................................................PF-13
4.5.1 Alignment mechanism.................................................................................................................................................PF-13
xx
4.5.2 Stapler movement mechanism....................................................................................................................................PF-15
4.5.3 Stapling mechanism....................................................................................................................................................PF-15
4.5.4 Staple sheet empty control..........................................................................................................................................PF-15
PG THEORY OF OPERATION SD-507.........................................................................................PG-1

1. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................................................................PG-1
2. COMPOSITION........................................................................................................................................................PG-2
3. DRIVE.......................................................................................................................................................................PG-3
3.1 Half-fold section......................................................................................................................................................................PG-3
3.2 Saddle Stitching Section.........................................................................................................................................................PG-3
4. OPERATIONS..........................................................................................................................................................PG-4
4.1 Paper Conveyance mechanism..............................................................................................................................................PG-4
4.2 Conveyance roller pressure/release.......................................................................................................................................PG-4
4.2.1 Pressure/release mechanism.......................................................................................................................................PG-4
4.2.2 Operation......................................................................................................................................................................PG-4
4.3 Stapling mechanism...............................................................................................................................................................PG-5
4.4 Staple guide............................................................................................................................................................................PG-5
4.4.1 Staple guide mechanism..............................................................................................................................................PG-5
4.4.2 Operation timing...........................................................................................................................................................PG-6
4.5 Half-folding mechanism..........................................................................................................................................................PG-6
4.5.1 Operation......................................................................................................................................................................PG-6
4.6 Paper guide............................................................................................................................................................................PG-7
4.6.1 Paper guide mechanism...............................................................................................................................................PG-7
4.7 Tray paper detection...............................................................................................................................................................PG-7
PH THEORY OF OPERATION MT-502..........................................................................................PH-1

1. PAPER PATH...........................................................................................................................................................PH-1
2. COMPOSITION........................................................................................................................................................PH-2
3. DRIVE.......................................................................................................................................................................PH-3
4. OPERATIONS..........................................................................................................................................................PH-4
4.1 Paper conveyance mechanism...............................................................................................................................................PH-4
4.2 Paper path selection mechanism............................................................................................................................................PH-4
4.3 Paper detection.......................................................................................................................................................................PH-4
PI THEORY OF OPERATION JS-502..............................................................................................PI-1

1. PAPER PATH.............................................................................................................................................................PI-1
2. COMPOSITION..........................................................................................................................................................PI-2
3. OPERATIONS............................................................................................................................................................PI-3
3.1 Job Tray Conveyance/Exit........................................................................................................................................................PI-3
xxi
bizhub 501/421/361
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Read carefully the safety and important warning items described below to understand them
before doing service work.
A-1
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 1. IMPORTANT
bizhub 501/421/361 NOTICE
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE
• Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as
the risk of damage to the product, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
(hereafter called the KMBT) strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by
KMBT-trained service technicians.
• Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service
Manual was printed. Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that
the information contained in this service manual is complete and accurate.
• The user of this service manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to
the product while servicing the product for which this service manual is intended. Therefore,
this service manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of
technical training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the product
properly.
• Keep this service manual also for future service.
A-2
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 2. DESCRIPTION
bizhub 501/421/361 ITEMS FOR DANGE...
2. DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING

AND CAUTION
2.1 Description items in this Service Manual
In this Service Manual, each of three expressions “ DANGER”, “ WARNING”, and “
CAUTION” is defined as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning.
When servicing the product, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment,
repair, maintenance, etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care.
DANGER : Action having a high possibility of suffering

death or serious injury
WARNING : Action having a possibility of suffering death

or serious injury
: Action having a possibility of suffering a slight

CAUTION wound, medium trouble, and property
damage
2.2 Description items for safety and important warning items

Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:
: Precaution when
servicing the product.
General
Electric hazard High temperature
precaution
: Prohibition when
General Do not touch with Do not
prohibition wet hand disassemble
: Direction when
General
Unplug Ground/Earth
instruction
Illustrations representing the power plug and wall outlet used in the following descriptions are
only typical. Their shapes differ depending on the country or region.
A-3
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 3. SAFETY
bizhub 501/421/361 WARNINGS
3. SAFETY WARNINGS
3.1 MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA
BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
KONICA MINOLTA brand products are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is
achieved through high-quality design and a solid service network.
Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical,
physical, and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at
proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unauthorized modifications involve a high
risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore strictly
prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reasoning behind
this policy.
3.1.1 Actions requiring special attention
WARNING
• Do not make any modifications to the product
unless otherwise instructed by KMBT.
• Do not use any part not specified by KMBT.
• Do not use any power cord or power plug not

specified by KMBT.
• Use only the protective fuses specified by

KMBT.
Use of any type of fuse or related part not
specified by KMBT makes safety devices
inoperative which may result in a fire from
abnormal heat.
• Do not disable fuse functions or use a wire,
metal clip, solder, or other conductor in place
of the fuse.
Fire may result from abnormal heat.
• Do not disable relay functions (for example,
inserting a piece of paper between relay
contacts to hamper circuit action.)
Fire may result from abnormal heat.
A-4
WARNING
• Do not disable safety functions (for example,
interlocks and safety circuits).
Safety devices become inoperative, resulting
in fire from abnormal heat, electric shock, or
injury.
3.2 POWER PLUG SELECTION

In some countries or areas, the power plug provided with the product may not fit wall outlet used
in the area. In that case, it is obligation of customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) to attach
appropriate power plug or power cord set in order to connect the product to the supply.
3.2.1 Power Cord Set or Power Plug
WARNING
• Use power supply cord set which meets the
following criteria:
- provided with a plug having configuration
intended for the connection to wall outlet
appropriate for the product's rated voltage and
current, and kw
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- provided with three-conductor cable having
enough current capacity, and
- the cord set meets regulatory requirements for
the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to fire or electric
shock.
A-5
WARNING
• Attach power plug which meets the following criteria:
- having configuration intended for the connection
to wall outlet appropriate for the product’s rated
voltage and current, and
- the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and
- meets regulatory requirements for the area.
Use of inadequate cord set leads to the product
connecting to inadequate power supply (voltage,
current capacity, grounding), and may result in fire
or electric shock.
• The wires in the power supply cord shall be
connected to the terminals of the plug in accordance
with the following:
Color of the wire Terminal of the plug
Marked with "L", "A" or "W"
Brown Black
or colored RED
Marked with "N"
Light Blue White
or colored BLACK
Marked with "E", "PE" or " "

Green-and-Yellow
or colored GREEN
or GREEN-AND-YELLOW
• Wrong connection may cancel safeguards within the
product, and results in fire or electric shock.
3.3 CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

KONICA MINOLTA brand products are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all
applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and customer engineer
(hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, any electrical
equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety and
reliability, the CE must perform regular safety checks.
A-6
3.3.1 Power Supply

(1) Connection to Power Supply
WARNING
• The power outlet should have a capacity of at
least the maximum power consumption and
be dedicated only to the product.
The current that can be passed through the
outlet is limited and any current exceeding
the limit could result in fire.
• If the wall outlet has two or more receptacles kw
and the product and another electrical

appliance are plugged into this wall outlet,
make sure that the total load does not exceed
the rating of the wall outlet. The current that
can be passed through the outlet is limited
and any current exceeding the limit could
result in a fire.
• Do not use any conversion plug adapter even
if the power plug shape does not match your
wall outlet.
The shapes of the power plug and the wall
outlet are set according to the voltage and
allowable current. Use of a conversion plug
adapter could result in an abnormal voltage
or insufficient current capacity, leading to a
fire.” It may also result in an electric shock
due to a grounding failure.”
If the plug shape does not match the wall
outlet, request the user to perform power
source installation work.
A-7
WARNING
• Make sure the power cord is plugged into the
wall outlet securely.
If the power plug is left loose in the wall
outlet, contact failure may occur, leading to
abnormal heating of the power plug and a
risk of fire.
(2) Ground Connection
WARNING
• Check whether the product is grounded
properly.
If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded
product, you may suffer electric shock while
operating the product.
Connect power plug to grounded wall
outlet.
• Make sure of correct ground connection.
If the grounding wire is connected to an
inappropriate part, there is a risk of
explosion or electric shock. Do not connect
the grounding wire to any of the following
parts:
a. Gas pipe: Gas explosion or fire may
result.
b. Lightning rod: Risk of electric shock or
fire during lightning.
c. Grounding wire for telephone line: Risk of
electric shock or fire during lightning.
d. Water pipe and faucet: These parts do
not serve as a ground connection
because of a plastic part that is very
often installed midway within the water
pipe.
A-8
(3) Power Plug and Cord
WARNING
• When using the power cord set (inlet type)
that came with this product, make sure the
connector is securely inserted in the inlet of
the product.
When securing measure is provided,
secure the cord with the fixture properly.
If the power cord (inlet type) is not
connected to the product securely, a
contact problem may lead to increased
resistance, overheating, and risk of fire.
• Do not allow the power cord to be stepped on
or pinched by a table and so on.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a
risk of fire.
• Check whether the power cord is damaged.
Check whether the sheath is damaged.
If the power plug, cord, or sheath is
damaged, replace with a new power cord
(with plug and connector on each end)
specified by KMBT. Using the damaged
power cord may result in fire or electric
shock.
• Do not bundle or tie the power cord.
Overheating may occur there, leading to a
risk of fire.
• Check whether dust is collected around the
power plug and wall outlet.
Using the power plug and wall outlet
without removing dust may result in fire.
• Do not insert the power plug into the wall
outlet with a wet hand.
The risk of electric shock exists.
A-9
WARNING
• When unplugging the power cord, grasp the
plug, not the cable.
The cable may be broken, leading to a risk
of fire and electric shock.
(4) Wiring
WARNING
• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple
power cords in the same outlet.
If used, the risk of fire exists.
• When an extension cord is required, use one
that meets the rated current, rated voltage,
and the relevant safety standards of the
country.
Current that can be passed through the
extension cable is limited and fire may
result from the use of an inappropriate type
of an extension cable.
Do not use an extension cable reel with the
cable taken up. Fire may result.
A-10
3.3.2 Installation Requirements

(1) Prohibited Installation Places
WARNING
• Do not place the product near flammable
materials or volatile materials that may catch
fire.
A risk of fire exists.
• Do not place the product in a place exposed
to water such as rain.
A risk of fire and electric shock exists.
(2) When not Using the Product for a long time
WARNING
• When the product is not to be used for an
extended period of time (for holidays, for
example), instruct the user to turn OFF the
power switch and unplug the power cord from
the power outlet.
Dust collected around the power plug and
outlet may cause fire.
A-11
(3) Ventilation
CAUTION
• The product generates ozone gas during
operation.
If the smell of ozone is present in the
following cases, ventilate the room.
a. When the product is used in a poorly
ventilated room
b. When making a lot of copies
c. When using multiple products at the
same time
(4) Stability
CAUTION
• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers.
In the case of an earthquake, the product
may slide, leading to an injury.
A-12
3.3.3 After Service

(1) Inspection before Servicing
WARNING
• Before conducting an inspection, read all
relevant documentation (service manual,
technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the
inspection following the prescribed procedure
using the recommended personal safety
equipment and using only the prescribed
tools.
Do not make any adjustment not described
in the documentation.
If the prescribed procedure or tool is not
used, the product may break and a risk of
injury or fire exists.
• Before conducting an inspection, be sure to
disconnect the power plugs from the Main
Body and Accessories (Options).
When the power plug is inserted into the
wall outlet, some units are still powered
even if the POWER switch is turned OFF.
A risk of electric shock exists.
CAUTION
• The area around the fixing unit is hot.
You may get burned.
A-13
CAUTION
• Do not leave the machine unattended during
transportation, installation, and/or inspection.
If the machine is left unattended, face
protrusions toward the wall or take other
necessary precautions to prevent a user or
other person in the area from stumbling
over a protrusion of the machine or being
caught by a cable, possibly causing a fall to
the floor or other personal injury.
(2) Work Performed with the Product Powered On
WARNING
• Take every care when making adjustments or
performing an operation check with the
product powered.
If you make adjustments or perform an
operation check with the external cover
detached, you may touch live or high-
voltage parts or you may be caught in
moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a
risk of injury.
• Take every care when servicing with the
external cover detached.
High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A
risk of electric shock exists.
• If it is absolutely necessary to service the
machine with the door open or external
covers removed, always be attentive to the
motion of the internal parts.
A normally protected part may cause
unexpected hazards.
A-14
CAUTION
• Do not keep gazing at a lamp light during the
service procedure with the product powered
ON.
Eyestrain may result.
(3) Safety Checkpoints
WARNING
• When a product fault is reported from a user,
check parts and repair the fault appropriately
with safety in mind.
A damaged product, personal injury, or fire
may result.
• Whenever mounting an option on the
machine, be attentive to the motion of the
other workers performing the task.
Another worker may be injured by a pinch
point between the machine and the option.
• When mounting an option on the machine, be
careful about the clearance between the
machine and the option.
You may be injured with your finger or hand
pinched between the machine and the
option.
• When removing a part that secures a motor,
gear, or other moving part, disassembling a
unit, or reinstalling any of such parts and
units, be careful about moving parts and use
care not to drop any part or unit. During the
service procedure, give sufficient support for
any heavy unit.
You may be injured by a falling part or unit.
A-15
WARNING
• Check the external covers and frame for
possible sharp edges, burrs, and damage.
They can be a cause of injury during use or
servicing.
• When accessing a hard-to-view or narrow
spot, be careful about sharp edges and burrs
on the frame and parts.
They may injure your hands or fingers.
• Do not allow any metal parts such as clips,
staples, and screws to fall into the product.
They can short internal circuits and cause
electric shock or spark bursting into flame.
• Check wiring for squeezing and any other
damage.
Current can leak, leading to a risk of
electric shock or fire.
• Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for
any damage.
Damage may lead to product failure and/or
the risk of fire.
• Do not disassemble or adjust the write unit
(PH unit) incorporating a laser.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading
to a risk of loss of eyesight.
• Do not supply power with the write unit (PH
unit) shifted from the specified mounting
position.
The laser light can enter your eye, leading
to a risk of loss of eyesight.
• After replacing a part to which AC voltage is
applied (e.g., optical lamp and fixing lamp), be
sure to check the installation state.
A risk of fire exists.
A-16
WARNING
• Check the interlock switch and actuator for
loosening and check whether the interlock
functions properly.
If the interlock does not function, you may
receive an electric shock or be injured
when you insert your hand in the product
(e.g., for clearing paper jam).
• Make sure the wiring cannot come into
contact with sharp edges, burrs, or other
pointed parts.
Damage may lead to the risk of electric
shock or fire.
• Make sure that all screws, components,
wiring, connectors, etc. that were removed for
safety check and maintenance have been
reinstalled in the original location. (Pay
special attention to forgotten connectors,
pinched cables, forgotten screws, etc.)
A risk of product trouble, personal injury,
electric shock, and fire exists.
• Never use any flammable or combustible
spray, fluid, gas, or the like in and around the
product.
Do not use any flammable or combustible
dust spray, in particular, to clean the interior
of the product.
Fire or explosion may result.
CAUTION
• Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust
from electrical parts and electrode units such
as a charging corona unit.
Toner remnants and dust may lead to
product failure and/or the risk of fire.
A-17
CAUTION
• Check electrode units such as a charging
corona unit for deterioration and signs of
leakage.
Damage may lead to product failure and/or
the risk of fire.
• When replacing a battery, replace it with a
new one as specified.
Dispose of the used battery as instructed
on its packaging or by local ordinance.
There is a risk of explosion if the battery is
replaced with an incorrect type.
(4) Handling of Consumables
WARNING
• For handling of consumables (toner,
developer, photoconductor, etc.) and their
storage precautions, see MSDS.
(5) Handling of Service Materials
CAUTION
• Handle with care according to MSDS.
Use of solvent may involve explosion, fire,
or personal injury.
3.4 FUSE
CAUTION
Double pole / neutral fusing
ATTENTION
Double pôle / fusible sur le neutre.
A-18
3.5 Used Batteries Precautions

3.5.1 ALL Areas
CAUTION
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions.
3.5.2 Germany
VORSICHT!
Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemäßem Austausch der Batterie.
Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen gleichwertigen Typ.
Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers.
3.5.3 France
ATTENTION
Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie.
Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé
par le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant.
3.5.4 Denmark
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren.
3.5.5 Finland, Sweden

VAROlTUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin.
Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.
3.5.6 Norway
ADVARSEL
Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri.
Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten.
Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.
A-19
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 4. WARNING
bizhub 501/421/361 INDICATIONS ON THE ...
4. WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE

Caution labels shown are attached in some areas on/in the machine.
When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be
taken to avoid burns and electric shock.
4.1 Warning indications inside the machine
Finisher FS-522
50gap0e001nb
A-20
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 4. WARNING
bizhub 501/421/361 INDICATIONS ON THE ...
4.2 Warning indications on the boards
FS-523
50gap0e002nb
A-21
A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS > 5. MEASURES
bizhub 501/421/361 TO TAKE IN CASE OF...
5. MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT

1. If an accident has occurred, the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take
emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage.
2. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer, an on-site evaluation
must be carried out quickly and KMBT must be notified.
3. To determine the cause of the accident, conditions and materials must be recorded through
direct on-site checks, in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT.
4. For reports and measures concerning serious accidents, follow the regulations specified by
every distributor.
A-22
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 1. PRECAUTION ON
bizhub 501/421/361 HANDLING THIS MANUAL
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS

1. PRECAUTION ON HANDLING THIS MANUAL
Be sure to maintain the confidentiality of this manual.
Mishandling of this manual may make you face punishment according to the laws.
B -1
bizhub 501/421/361 B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 2. PRODUCT NAME
2. PRODUCT NAME
In this manual, each product is indicated as following names.
(1) IC board: Standard printer
(2) bizhub 501/421/361: Main body
(3) Microsoft Windows 95: Windows 95
Microsoft Windows 98: Windows 98
Microsoft Windows Me: Windows Me
Microsoft Windows NT 4.0: Windows NT 4.0 or Windows NT
Microsoft Windows 2000: Windows 2000
Microsoft Windows XP: Windows XP
Microsoft Windows Vista: Windows Vista
The combination of above OS: Windows 95/98/Me
Windows NT 4.0/2000
Windows NT/2000/XP
Windows 95 /98/Me / NT /2000/XP
B -2
bizhub 501/421/361 B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 3. TRADEMARK
3. TRADEMARK
3.1 TRADEMARKS OF OTHER COMPANIES
The indicated company and product names are the trademarks or registered trademarks of each company.
3.2 OWN TRADEMARKS

KONICA MINOLTA and KONICA MINOLTA logo are the registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA HOLDINGS, INC..
bizhub and bizhub PRESS are the registered trademarks of KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC..
© 2010 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
B -3
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 4. ELECTRICAL PARTS AND
bizhub 501/421/361 SIGNALS
4. ELECTRICAL PARTS AND SIGNALS

Those listed by way of example below are not exhaustive, but only some instances among many.
Classification Load symbol Ex. of signal name Description
Sensor PS IN Sensor detection signal
PS
Door PS1
SIG
102 PS
Solenoid SD 24V Power to drive the solenoid
DRV Drive signal
SOL
Clutch CL 24V Power to drive the clutch
DRV Drive signal
SOL
Motor M 24V Power to drive the motor
CONT Drive signal
DRV1 Drive signals of two kinds
DRV2
D1
D2
_U Drive signals (control signals) of three kinds
_V
_W
DRV1
DRV2
DRV3
D1 Drive signals (control signals) of four kinds
D2 Motor, phases A and B control signals
D3
D4
DRV A
DRV
DRV B
DRV
A
/A
B
/B
AB
BB
CLK, PLL PLL control signal
LCK, Lock, LD PLL lock signal
FR Forward/reverse rotation signal
EM, Lock, LCK, LD Motor lock abnormality
BLK Drive brake signal
P/S Power/stop
S/S Operating load start/stop signal
SS
CW/CCW, F/R Rotational direction switching signal
ENB Effective signal
TEMP_ER Motor temperature abnormality detection signal
Fan FM 24V Power to drive the fan motor
CONT, DRIVE Drive signal
HL Speed control signal (2 speeds)
EM, Lock, LCK, FEM Detection signal
Others TH1.S, ANG Analog signal
Ground SG, S.GND, S_GND Signal ground
B -4
B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 4. ELECTRICAL PARTS AND
bizhub 501/421/361 SIGNALS
PG, P.GND Power ground

Serial DCD Data carrier detection
communication SIN Serial input
SOUT Serial output
DTR Data terminal operation available
GND Signal ground (earth)
DSR, DSET Data set ready
RTS Transmission request signal
CTS Consent transmission signal
RI Ring indicator
TXD Serial transmission data
RXD Serial reception data
B -5
bizhub 501/421/361 B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS > 5. PAPER FEED DIRECTION
5. PAPER FEED DIRECTION

When the direction in which paper is fed is in parallel with the longer side of paper, the paper feed direction like this is referred to as the
longitudinal feed.
And the paper feed direction that is perpendicular to the longitudinal feed is referred to as the transverse feed.
When specifying the longitudinal feed, "S (abbreviation for Short Edge Feeding)" is added to the paper size. For the transverse feed, no specific
notation is employed.
However, when only the longitudinal feed is specified for one and the same paper size with no specification made for the transverse feed, "S" is
not added even when being fed longitudinally.
<Example>
Paper size Feed direction Notation
A4 Transverse feed A4
Longitudinal feed A4S
A3 Longitudinal feed A3
B -6
bizhub 501/421/361 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 1. bizhub 501/421/361
C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS
1. bizhub 501/421/361
1.1 Type
Type Desktop type
Copying method Indirect electrostatic method
Original stand Fixed
Original alignment Left rear standard
Photo conductor OPC
Sensitizing method Laser writing
Paper feed trays Two trays 500 sheet x 2, 80g/m2
Bypass feed 150 sheet x 1, 80g/m2
PC-407 *1 2,500 sheet x 1, 80g/m2
PC-206 *1 500 sheet x 2, 80g/m2
LU-203 *1 2,000 sheet x 1, 80g/m2
*1 PC-407, PC-206, and LU-203 are optional.
1.2 Functions
Original Sheet, book, solid object
Max. original size A3 or 11 x 17
Copy size Trays 1, 2 Inch: 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2S,
A3, A4, A4S, Foolscap
Metric: A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, A5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11,
81/2 x 11S, Foolscap, 8K*1, 16K*1
Bypass feed Inch: 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2S,
A4, Custom paper
(Max. 297.0 x 431.8mm, Min. 92.0 x 148.0mm)
Metric: A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S*2, A5S, B6S, 11 x 17*2,
81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, Foolscap, 8K*1, 16K*1, 16KS*1, Custom paper (Max. 297.0 x
431.8mm, Min. 92.0 x 148.0mm)
ADU Inch: 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2S,
Metric: A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S*2, A5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11,
81/2 x 11S, Foolscap, 8K*1, 16K*1, 16KS*1
Magnification Fixed magnification Inch:x 1.000, x 1.214, x 1.294, x 1.545, x 2.000
x 0.500, x 0.647, x 0.772, x 0.785
Metric:x 1.000, x 1.154, x 1.224, x 1.414, x 2.000
x 0.500, x 0.707, x 0.816, x 0.866
Special magnification x 0.930
setting
Preset zoom setting 3 types
Zoom magnification x 0.25 to x 4.00 (at the step of 0.1%)
Vertical magnification x 0.25 to x 4.00 (at the step of 0.1%)
Horizontal magnification x 0.25 to x 4.00 (at the step of 0.1%)
Warm-up time 60 seconds or less (bizhub 501)
30 seconds or less (bizhub 421/361)
First copy out time 3.2 seconds or less (bizhub 501)
3.6 seconds or less (bizhub 421/361)
Continuous copy speed 50 copies /min. (A4 / 81/2 x 11) (bizhub 501)
42 copies /min. (A4 / 81/2 x 11) (bizhub 421)
36 copies /min. (A4 / 81/2 x 11) (bizhub 361)
Continuous copy count Up to 999 sheets
Original density selection Auto density selection, Manual (9 steps), Manual underprint density (9 steps)
*1 Only supported in Taiwan.
*2 Supported in other than inch area and Taiwan.
Resolution Scan 600 x 600 dpi
Write 600 x 600 dpi
Image memory 205 MB
Interface section RJ45 Ethernet, Serial port (RS232-C), Serial port (USB TypeA x 3),
C-1
bizhub 501/421/361 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 1. bizhub 501/421/361
Serial port (USB TypeB) *1, RJ-11 *2

*1 When EK-703 is optionally installed.
*2 1 port when MK-708 and FK-502 are optionally installed.
2 ports when MK-708, ML-503 and FK-502 x 2 are optionally installed.
1.3 Type of paper

Plain paper *1 All trays High quality paper of 60 to 105 g/m2
Special paper *2 Bypass feed only OHP film, label paper *3, blueprint master paper *3
High quality paper of 50 to 59 g/m2 (thin paper)
All trays High quality paper of 91 to 105 g/m2 (thick paper)
Bypass feed only High quality paper of 106 to 210 g/m2 (thick paper)
*1 Standard specified paper
Plain paper Inch: Hammermill Tidal MP (20 lbs)
Metric: Konica Minolta Profi (80 g/m2)
Recycle paper Inch: Hammmermill Bond (20lbs), Domtar Recycled
Copy (20lbs)
Metric: Nautilus (80 g/m2)
*2 Special paper/recommended paper

Thick paper Inch: Cougar Cover 65 lb
Metric: Xerox colotech 200 g/m2
Thin paper Inch: Boise Cascade Bond 16 lbs
Label paper Inch: AVERY 5352
Metric: AVERY DPS 24
OHP film Inch: 3M CG3700
Metric: Folex overhead X-500, 3M CG3700
Envelope Inch: Preservation Wove (24 lbs) #6-3/4, #9, #10 (4-1/8
x 9-1/2)
Metric: Schneider Soehne Distinction 100 (100 g/m2)
#lang
Schneider Soehne Briefumschlage (100 g/m2)
#C5
Schneider Soehne Velin 80White (80 g/m2) #C6
*3 Label paper is loaded and fed one sheet at a time.
1.4 Maintenance
Maintenance Every 250,000 prints (bizhub 501/421)
Every 225,000 prints (bizhub 361)
1.5 Machine data

Power source Inch: AC120V 12A, 60Hz
Metric: AC220-240V 7A, 50Hz
Maximum power 1,560 W or less (full system)
consumption
Dimensions Main body 685 (W) x 823.7 (D) x 1,150 (H) mm *1
+ DF-613
+ PC or DK
Weight Approx. 97 kg (with DF-613 provided)
*1 Overturning prevention board is not included.
1.6 Operating environment

Temperature 10 to 30°C
Humidity 10 to 80%RH (with no condensation)
*1 PC-407, PC-206, and LU-203 are optional.
1.7 Note for the Specifications

Note
• The information herein may be subject to change for improvement without notice.
C-2
bizhub 501/421/361 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 2. DF-613
2. DF-613
2.1 Type
Name Reverse Automatic Document Feeder
Type Paper Feed Paper Feed from top of stack
Turnover Switch back system
Paper Exit Straight exit system
Installation Screw cramp to the main unit
Document Alignment Center
Document Loading Left image side up
2.2 Functions
Modes 1-Sided Mode / 2-Sided Mode
2.3 Paper type

Type of Document Standard Mode 1-Sided Mode
Plain Paper 35 to 128 g/m2 (9.25 to 34 lbs)
2-Sided Mode
50 to 128 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lbs)
Mixed Original Detection 1-Sided / 2-Sided Mode
Mode 50 to 128 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lbs)
Plain Paper
FAX Mode 1-Sided Mode
Plain Paper 35 to 128 g/m2 (9.25 to 34 lbs)
2-Sided Mode
50 to 128 g/m2 (13.25 to 34 lbs)
Detectable Document Inch area
Size*1 A3, A4S, A4, B4, B5S, B5
11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 51/2S, 81/2 x 51/2
Metric area
A3, A4S, A4, A5S, A5, B4, B5S, B5, B6S
11 x 17, 81/2 x 11S, 81/2 x 11
Capacity 80 sheets (80 g/m2 and load height of 11 mm or less)
*1: For the Combined Original Detection Mode, Refer to the Mixed Original Detection Enabled Size Combination Table.
2.4 Paper feed prohibited originals

• If fed, trouble occurrence will be highly possible.
Type of Original Possible Trouble
Original that is stapled or clipped. Feed failure, damage to the original, or drive failure due to clip clogging
Book original Feed failure, damage to the original, or drive failure
Original weighing less than 35g/ Feed failure
m2 or 128g/m2 or more
Torn original Feed failure, damaged sheet
Highly curled original (15 mm or Original misfeed due to dog-ear or skew
more)
OHP transparencies Feed failure
Label Sheet Feed failure
Offset master Feed failure
Sheets clipped or notched Damaged sheet
Sheets patched Patched part folded or torn sheet
2.5 Paper feed not guaranteed originals

• If fed, paper feed will be possible to some extent but trouble occurrence will be possible.
Type of Original Possible Trouble
Sheets lightly curled Dog-eared, exit failure
(Curled amount: 10 - 15 mm)
Heat Sensitive Paper Edge folded, exit failure, conveyance failure
Coated Paper (Ink Jet Paper) Take-up failure, conveyance failure
Translucent paper Take-up failure, conveyance failure
C-3
bizhub 501/421/361 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 2. DF-613
Paper immediately after paper Take-up failure, conveyance failure

exit from the main unit
Paper with many punched holes Multi-page feed due to flashes from holes
(e.g., loose leaf) limited to vertical
feeding
Sheets with 2 to 4 holes Conveyance failure
Sheets two-folded or Z-folded Take-up failure, conveyance failure, image deformation
(amount of non-flatness: 15 mm
or less)
Sheets folded Image deformation, multi-page feed, take-up failure
2.6 Mixed original feed chart

For Metric
Reference original (original with a maximum width)
A3 A4 B4S B5 A4S A5 B5S A5
Other A3 △ ○ - - - - - -
originals A4 ○ △ - - - - - -
B4S ◉ ◉ △ ○ - - - -
B5 ◉ ◉ ○ △ - - - -
A4S ◉ ◉ ◉ ◉ △ ○ - -
A5 ◉ ◉ ◉ ◉ ○ △ - -
B5S × × ◉ ◉ ◉ ◉ △ -
A5S × × × × × × × △
△: Same size ○: Same group ◉: Different group ×: Mix prohibited -: No need to set
For Inch
Reference original (original with a maximum width)
11 x 17 81/2 x 11 81/2 x 14 81/2 x 11S 51/2 x 811/2 51/2 x 81/2 S
Other 11 x 17 △ ○ - - - -
originals 81/2 x 11 ○ △ - - - -
81/2 x 14 ◉ ◉ △ ○ ○ -
81/2 x 11S ◉ ◉ ○ △ ○ -
51/2 x 81/2 ◉ ◉ ○ ○ △ -
51/2 x 81/2S × × × × × △
△: Same size ○: Same group ◉: Different group ×: Mix prohibited -: No need to set
2.7 Maintenance
Maintenance Same as the main body.
2.8 Machine data

Power Requirements 24V DC ± 10% (supplied from the main body)
Max. Power 48 W or less
Consumption
Dimensions 582 (W) x 558 (D) x 145 mm (H)
Weight Approx. 10 kg

Temperature 10 to 30°C
Humidity 10 to 80%RH (with no condensation)

Note
• These specifications are subject to change without notice.
C-4
bizhub 501/421/361 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 3. PC-206
3. PC-206
3.1 Type
Name 2 way Paper Take-Up Cabinet
Type Front loading type 2 way paper take-up device
Installation Desk type
3.2 Paper type

Paper Type Same as the main body.
Paper Size Metric: A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, A5S, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, Foolscap, 8K *1, 16K *1
Inch: 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 51/2 x 81/2S, A3, A4, A4S, Foolscap
Capacity Tray 3 500 sheets (80 g/m2)
Tray 4 500 sheets (80 g/m2)
*1: Only supported in Taiwan.
3.3 Maintenance
3.4 Machine specifications

Power Requirements 24V DC ± 10 %, 5V DC ± 5 % (supplied from the main body)
Power Consumption 15 W or less
Dimensions 570 mm (W) x 577 mm (D) x 300 mm (H)
Weight Approx. 26.0 kg

Temperature Same as the main body.
Humidity Same as the main body.

Note
C-5
bizhub 501/421/361 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 4. PC-407
4. PC-407
4.1 Type
Name 2500 sheets paper feed cabinet
Type Front loading type LCC
Installation Desk type
4.2 Paper type

Paper Type Same as the main body.
Paper Size Metric: A4
Inch: 81/2 x 11
Capacity 2500 sheets (80 g/m2)
4.3 Maintenance

Power Requirements 24V DC ± 10 %, 5V DC ± 5 % (supplied from the main body)
Dimensions 570 mm (W) x 577 mm (D) x 300 mm (H)


Note
C-6
bizhub 501/421/361 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 5. LU-203
5. LU-203
5.1 Type
Type Side mount type large volume paper feed tray
5.2 Functions
Maximum tray capacity 2,000 sheets (80 g/m2)
5.3 Type of paper

Paper type *1 Plain paper, recycled paper, high quality paper of 60 to 105 g/m2
Paper size A4, 81/2 x 11
*1 Recommended paper
Plain paper Inch: Hammermill Tidal MP (20 lbs)
Metric: Konica Profi (80 g/m2), Konica Minolta Original (80 g/m2)
Recycled paper Inch: Weyehaeuser Recycled Laser Copy (20 lbs)
Metric: Nautilus (80 g/m2)
5.4 Maintenance
5.5 Machine data

Power Requirements 24/5V DC (supplied from the main body)
Power Consumption 30 W or less (internal heater is not used)
Dimensions 424 (W) x 515 (D) x 295 (H) mm
Weight Approx. 16 kg


Note
C-7
bizhub 501/421/361 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 6. FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
6. FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
6.1 FS-522
6.1.1 Type
Name Multi tray finisher built into the main body
Installation Installed in the main body
Consumables Staples (5,000 staples/cartridge)
6.1.2 Functions
Modes Non sort, sort, group, sort staple, and punch (when PU-501 is mounted)
6.1.3 Paper type

(1) Non sort
Type Size Weight Max. Capacity
Plain paper Metric: 50 to 90 g/m2 Tray /1 200 sheets
A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S Tray /2
*2, A5S, B6S A4S, 81/2 x 11S 1000 sheets
or less
11 x 17, 81/2 x 11,
Recycled paper B4, 81/2 x 14 500 sheets
81/2 x 11S, Foolscap, 8K
*1, 16K *1, 16KS *1 or greater
Thick paper Inch: 91 to 210 g/m2 20 sheets
OHP transparencies 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, -
Envelope 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, -
Label paper 51/2 x 81/2S -
Letterhead A3, A4, A4S, Foolscap -
*2: Supported in other than inch area and Taiwan.
(2) Sort/Group
A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S Tray /2
*2 A4S, 81/2 x 11S 1000 sheets
or less
11 x 17, 81/2 x 11,
Inch:
11 x 17, 81/2 x 14,
81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S
(3) Sort Staple

A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S Tray /2
*2 A4S, 81/2 x 11S 1000 sheets
or less
11 x 17, 81/2 x 11,
Inch:
11 x 17, 81/2 x 14,
81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S
6.1.4 Stapling
Staple Filling Mode Dedicated Staple Cartridge (5000 staples)
Staple Detection Available (Nearly Empty: 20 remaining staples)
C-8
Stapling Position Front: Diagonal 45° 1 point *1 A3, B4, A4, B5

Rear: Diagonal 45° 1 point *1 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11
Front: Parallel 1 point A4S, B5S
Rear: Parallel 1 point 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S
Side: Parallel 2 point A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S
11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S
*1: Diagonal 30° for B5 and B4
6.1.5 Maintenance
6.1.6 Machine specifications

Power Requirements 24/5V DC (supplied from the main body)
6.1.7 Operating environment

6.2 PU-501
6.2.1 Type
Type FS built-in type punching operation device
Installation Screwed to the FS
Paper Size Metric:
A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5
11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 8K*1, 16K*1
Inch:
2 holes: 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S
3 holes: 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11
A3, A4
Paper Type Plain Paper (60 to 163 g/m2), Recycled Paper (60 to 163 g/m2)
Punch Hole Metric: 4 holes, Swedish 4 holes (f 6.5 mm)
Inch: 2 and 3 holes (can be switched) (f 8 mm)
Number of Stored Punch Metric (4 holes): For 1,500 sheets of paper (80 g/m2)
Wastes
Inch (2, 3 holes): For 1,000 sheets of paper (75 g/m2)
6.2.2 Maintenance

Power Requirements 24/5V DC (Supplied from FS)

6.3 OT-602
6.3.1 Type
Type Additional Tray to FS
C-9
Mode Non sort, sort, group, and sort staple

Number of Bins 1 bin
6.3.2 Paper Type

Mode Size Type Capacity
Non sort Metric: Plain Paper, Recycled Paper 200 sheets
A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S *2, A5S, B6S (50 to 90 g/m2)
11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, Special 20 sheets 20 sheets
81/2 x 11S, Foolscap, 8K *1, 16K *1, 16KS *1 Thick paper
Inch:
(91 to 210 g/m2)
11 x 17, 81/2 x 14,
Envelope
81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S,
Label paper
51/2 x 81/2S
Sort / group Metric: Plain Paper, Recycled paper 200 sheets
Sort staple A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S *2 (56 to 90 g/m2) 200 sheets or 20
11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, copies
81/2 x 11S, Foolscap, 8K *1, 16K *1, 16KS *1
Inch:
11 x 17, 81/2 x 14,
81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S
6.3.3 Maintenance



Note
C-10
bizhub 501/421/361 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 7. FS-523/RU-507
7. FS-523/RU-507
7.1 FS-523
7.1.1 Type
Type Multi staple finisher
Installation Floor-mounted type
Document alignment Center
Consumables Staples
7.1.2 Functions
Mode Normal Non-sort, sort, group, sort-staple
Punch Non-sort-punch, sort-punch, group-punch,
sort-staple-punch
7.1.3 Type of paper

Maximum load capacity: (80 g/m2) when loaded with paper of the same size.
(1) Non sort

Type of paper Size of paper Weight Max. capacity Exit tray Max. number of
sheets stapled
Plain paper Inch: 60 to 90 g/m2 250 sheets Sub tray -
Recycled paper A3, A4, A4S
Thick paper 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14,
91 to 210 g/m2 20 sheets
81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S,
Thin paper 50 to 59 g/m2
81/2 x 51/2S, Foolscap
OHP -
Metric:
transparencies Weight
A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S *2,
Envelope A5S, B6S 60 to 90 g/m2
Label paper 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11,
Letterhead 81/2 x 11S, Foolscap,
8K *1, 16K *1, 16KS *1
(2) Non-sort, sort, group

sheets stapled
Plain paper Inch: 50 to 210 g/m2 3000 sheets Main tray -
Recycled paper A3, A4, A4S (A4S or smaller)
Thick paper 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 1500 sheets
(B4 or larger)
Thin paper 81/2 x 11S, Foolscap
Metric:
A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5,
B5S *2
11 x 17, 81/2 x 11,
81/2 x 11S, Foolscap,
8K *1, 16K *1, 16KS*1
(3) Non-sort, sort, group

sheets stapled
Plain paper Inch: 60 to 90 g/m2 3000 sheets Main tray 50 sheets
Recycled paper A3, A4, A4S (A4S or smaller)
11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11, 1500 sheets
(B4 or larger)
81/2 x 11S, Foolscap
Metric:
A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5,
B5S *2
11 x 17, 81/2 x 11,
8K *1, 16K *1, 16KS *1
C-11

(4) Punch
(a) Metric/Swedish
sheets stapled
Plain paper A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, 60 to 90 g/m2 - Main tray -
Recycled paper 8K *1, 16K *1 Sub tray
(b) Inch 2 holes

sheets stapled
Plain paper 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11, 60 to 90 g/m2 - Main tray -
Recycled paper Sub tray
81/2 x 11S, 81/2 x 14,
51/2 x 81/2S, Foolscap
(c) Inch 2 holes

sheets stapled
Plain paper 81/2 x 11, 11 x 17 60 to 90 g/m2 - Main tray -
Recycled paper Sub tray
7.1.4 Stapling
Staple filling method Dedicated staple cartridge (5000 staples)
Staple detection Available (near empty: 20 remaining staples)
Staple position *1 Rear: Diagonal 45° 1 point Metric: A3, B4, A4, B5
Front: Diagonal 45° 1 point Inch: 81/2 x 11, 11 x 17
Rear: Diagonal 28° 1 point Metric: B4, B5
Front: Diagonal 28° 1 point Inch: -
Rear: Parallel 1 point Metric: A4S, B5S
Front: Parallel 1 point Inch: 81/2 x 11S, 81/2 x 14
Side: 2 points Metric: A4, A4S, A3, B5, B5S, B4
Inch: 81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S, 81/2 x 14, 11 x 17
Manual staple None
*1 In case of the 1-staple mode, conduct a parallel and a skew adjustment according to the length in the main scan direction.
Parallel: main scan direction 182 to 216 mm
Diagonal: main scan direction 216 to 297 mm
7.1.5 Punch
No. of holes Inch: 2 holes, 3 holes
Metric: 4 holes
Punch scraps full detection None
7.1.6 Maintenance
7.1.7 Machine data

Power source 24V DC ± 10 % (supplied from the main body)
Power consumption 63 W or less
Weight 39.2 kg

C-12
7.1.9 Note for the Specifications

Note
7.2 RU-507
7.2.1 Type
Type Roller method relay conveyance unit
7.2.2 Functions
Conveyance Conveyance Paper conveyance from the main body to FS
7.2.3 Type of paper

Paper size Same as the main body.
Paper type Same as the main body.
Amount of curling b = 10 mm or less
(5 sheets)
h
16fat1c001na
7.2.4 Maintenance
7.2.5 Machine data

Power source 5.1V DC ± 5 % (supplied from main body)

7.2.7 Note for the Specifications

Note
C-13
bizhub 501/421/361 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 8. SD-507
8. SD-507
8.1 Type
Type FS built-in saddle-stitching device
Stapling Function Center parallel two points
No. of sheets to be stapled together: 2 to 15
Consumables Staples (2000 staples/cartridge)
8.2 Paper type

Type Plain Paper, 56 to 90 g/m2
Recycled paper
Size Metric: A3, B4, A4S, B5S *2, 11 x 17, 81/2 x 11S, Foolscap,
8K *1, 16KS *1
Inch: 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, 81/2 x 11S, A3, A4S, Foolscap
Capacity 200 sheets or 20 copies
8.3 Maintenance

Power Requirements 24/5V DC (supplied from FS)
Power Consumption 9.5 W or less


Note
C-14
bizhub 501/421/361 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 9. MT-502
9. MT-502
9.1 Type
Type 4 bins Mailbin (available only for printing from PC)
Number of Bins 4 bins
Number of Sheets 125 sheets (80 g/m2)
Stored per Bin Plain Paper (56 to 90 g/m2), Recycled paper (56 to 90 g/m2)
Storable Paper Metric: A4, B5, 81/2 x 11
Inch: 81/2 x 11, 51/2 x 81/2S
9.2 Maintenance
9.3 Machine specifcations

Power Requirements 24V DC (supplied from FS)
Weight Approx. 8 kg


Note
C-15
bizhub 501/421/361 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 10. JS-502
10. JS-502
10.1 Type
Name Job Separator
Type Expansion tray
Installation Installed in the main body
10.2 Paper type

Exit Tray Size Type Capacity
Tray 2 Inch: Plain Paper (56 to 90 g/m2) 250 sheets
11 x 17, 81/2 x 14, Special OHP transparencies 20 sheets
81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S,
Thick paper (91 to 210g/m2)
51/2 x 81/2S Envelope
Label paper
Metric:
A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S*2, A5S, B6S Letterhead
11 x 17, 811/2 x 11,
81/2 x 11S, Foolscap, 8K*1, 16K*1, 16KS*1
Tray 1 Inch: Plain Paper (56 to 90 g/m2) 100 sheets
(Job Tray) 11 x 17, 81/2 x 14,
81/2 x 11, 81/2 x 11S,
51/2 x 81/2S
Metric:
A3, B4, A4, A4S, B5, B5S *2, A5S, B6S
11 x 17, 81/2 x 11,
8K *1, 16K *1, 16KS *1
10.3 Maintenance

Power Requirements 5V DC ± 5 % (supplied from the main body)
Power Consumption 0.2 W or less


Note
C-16
bizhub 501/421/361 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 11. IC-207
11. IC-207
11.1 Type
Type: Main body built-in controller
11.2 Functions
Resolution 600 x 600 dpi (Print, FAX)
400 x 400 dpi (FAX)
200 x 200 dpi (FAX)
Gradation binary
Blank area 4.23mm (left, right, top and bottom without variation)
Printable Area Same as copier
No. of Print 1 to 999
Continuous Print Speed bizhub 501: 50 ppm (A4, 8.5 x 11) / (600 x 600 dpi)
bizhub 421: 42 ppm (A4, 8.5 x 11) / (600 x 600 dpi)
bizhub 361: 36 ppm (A4, 8.5 x 11) / (600 x 600 dpi)
Printer Description PCL5e emulation
Language PCL XL Ver3.0 emulation
PostScript3 emulation
XPS Ver1.0
Printer Driver PCL6 (KONICA MINOLTA products)
*The driver for PCL5e is not supported.
• Windows NT4.0 (SP6a)
• Windows 2000 Professional (SP3 or later) /Server
• Windows XP Home Edition/Professional (SP2 or later)
• Windows Server 2003 Standard
• Windows Vista (All versions)
• Windows Server 2008 (All versions)
PS3 driver (KONICA MINOLTA products)
PostScript PPD driver
• Mac OS 9.2/10.2/10.3/10.4/10.5 (Intel Mac 10.4/10.5 also included)
• Linux
XPS driver (Konica Minolta)
Fax Driver
• Windows NT4.0 (SP6a)
*(For the XP (Professional)/Server 2003/Vista/Server 2008, x64 is also included.)
Network Functions
Printing Method lpd/lpr (TCP/IP), IPP (TCP/IP), AppleTalk (EtherTalk), PServer/RPrinter (IPX/SPX), RAW Port (TCP/IP)
Dedicated Utilities EMS Plug-in
NDPS Gateway
Direct Print
11.3 Paper
Paper Size Same as copier
Paper Type Same as copier
Paper Weight Same as copier
11.4 Maintenance and Life

Maintenance Same as copier
Maintenance Same as copier
C-17
bizhub 501/421/361 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 11. IC-207
11.5 Machine Data

System Memory Same as copier
Host Interface Ethernet, USB (Optional)
Hard Disk Drive Same as copier
Power Same as copier
Network Function
Network Interface Ethernet
Frame Type Auto/IEEE 802.2/802.3/Ethernet II/IEEE802.3 SNMP
Ethernet Connection 1000Base-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T
Network Connector RJ-45

Temperature Same as copier
Humidity Same as copier
Note
C-18
bizhub 501/421/361 C PRODUCT SPECIFICATIONS > 12. JS-502
12. JS-502
12.1 Web browser function
• Main specifications of the web browser installed are as follows.
Browser engine NetFront
Supported protocols HTTP, HTTPS, TCP/IP
Supported markup/script HTML, CSS, JavaSrcript
languages JPEG, BMP, PNG, GIF, Animation GIF, PDF, Flash
Supported image formats SSL2.0, SSL3.0, TLS1.0
Supported SSL/TLS Western (ISO-8859-1), Unicode (UTF-8), Simplified Chinese (GB2312), Traditional Chinese (Big5), Japanese
versions (Shift-JIS), Japanese (ISO-2022-JP), Japanese (EUC-JP)
Supported character codes Normal, Just-Fit Rendering, Smart-Fit Rendering
Display modes AdobeR ReaderR LE
PDF viewer AdobeR FlashR Player 7
NoteThe Flash player installed on the MFP does not support the following:
• The function to trigger an event caused by a key operation.
• The function to paste or acquire data such as character strings from the clipboard.
• The context menu.
• The Flash printing function.
• The function to execute JavaScript from Flash or to operate Flash by JavaScript.
• A screen that has no window (pop-up).
• The Flash bookmark function.
• The function to send/receive data in real time using the Flash Media Server.
• The function to communicate via the XMLSocket.
12.2 Photo registration function

• Main specifications of the web browser installed are as follows.
File type BMP format, 24-bit color, uncompressed
Image size 48 x 48 pixels
Data size 6,966 Byte
C-19
bizhub 501/421/361 D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
D OVERALL COMPOSITION
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
1.1 System configuration
[29] [33] [34] [35] [36] [8]
[9]
[30] [31] [32]
[10] [11]
[1] [12]
[2] [13]
[3]
[14]
[4]
[15]
[28] [5]
[27]
[6]
[7]
[26]
[25] [17]
[20]
[24] [21]
[23]
[16] [18]
[22]
[16] [19]
50gat1e001ne
[1] Reverse automatic document feeder (DF-613) (standard [2] Main body
equipment)
[3] Image controller (IC-207) [4] Upgrade kit (UK-202)
[5] Local Interface Kit (EK-703) [6] Hard disk (HD-509)
[7] Security kit (SC-505) [8] Stamp unit (SP-501)
[9] Spare TX marker stamp 2 [10] Authentication unit (Biometric type) (AU-101)
[11] Authentication unit (IC card type: AU-201) [12] Working table (WT-502)
[13] Key counter kit 4 *1 [14] Key counter *1
[15] Key counter mount kit *1 [16] Dehumidifier heater 1C
[17] Paper feed cabinet (PC-407) [18] Paper feed cabinet (PC-206)
[19] Desk (DK-506) [20] Large capacity unit (LU-203)
[21] Dehumidifier heater *2 [22] Relay unit (RU-507)
[23] Swedish punch kit G *3 [24] Finisher (FS-523)
[25] Job separator (JS-502) [26] Output tray kit (OT-504)
[27] Output tray (OT-602) [28] Finisher (FS-522)
[29] Mail bin kit (MT-502) [30] Saddle stitcher (SD-507)
[31] Folding unit (included in SD-507) [32] Punch unit (PU-501)
[33] FAX kit (FK-502) [34] Mount kit (MK-708)
[35] FAX multi line (ML-503) [36] i-option (LK-101/102/103) *4
*1 See "G.2.3 Option counter" for details.
*2 Dehumidifier heater is set up as service part.
*3 Swedish punch kit G is for Europe only.
*4 Upgrade kit (UK-202) is needed for using i-option.
1.2 Configuration for optional device

Note
• Any combination other than those listed below is not available.
No. Combinations for paper feeding Combinations for finishing Remarks
1 DK-506/PC-206/PC-407 *1 OT-504
2 DK-506/PC-206/PC-407 *1 OT-504 JS-502
3 DK-506/PC-206/PC-407 *1 RU-507 + FS-523
4 DK-506/PC-206/PC-407 *1 FS-522 *2*3
5 DK-506/PC-206/PC-407 *1 FS-522 *2*3 SD-507
6 DK-506/PC-206/PC-407 *1 FS-522 *2*3 MT-502
D -1
bizhub 501/421/361 D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
7 PC-206/PC-407 *4 LU-203 OT-504

8 PC-206/PC-407 *4 LU-203 OT-504 JS-502
9 PC-206/PC-407 *4 LU-203 RU-507 + FS-523 RU-507 + FS-523
10 PC-206/PC-407 *4 LU-203 FS-522 *2*3 FS-522 *2*3
11 PC-206/PC-407 *4 LU-203 FS-522 *2*3 FS-522 *2*3
12 PC-206/PC-407 *4 LU-203 FS-522 *2*3 FS-522 *2*3
*1 Either one of DK-506, PC-206 and PC-407 can be selected.
*2 FS-522 can be installed optionally with OT-602.
*3 FS-522 can be installed optionally with PU-501.
*4 Either one of PC-206 and PC-407 can be selected.
D -2
D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 2. MAIN BODY UNIT
bizhub 501/421/361 CONFIGURATION
2. MAIN BODY UNIT CONFIGURATION
[17]
[1]
[2]
[16]
[15] [3]
[14]
[4]
[5]
[13]
[6]
[12]
[7]
[8]
[11]
[9]
[10]
50gat1c002na
[1] Scanner section [2] Paper reverse/exit section

[3] Fusing section [4] Photo conductor section
[5] ADU [6] Transfer/separation section
[7] Registration section [8] Bypass tray section
[9] LU (option) [10] PC or DK (option)
[11] Paper feed section (tray 1/2) [12] Developing section
[13] Writing section [14] Charging section
[15] Toner supply section [16] Cleaning/toner recycle section
[17] DF -
D -3
bizhub 501/421/361 D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 3. PAPER PATH
3. PAPER PATH
[1]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[5] [4]
50gat1c003na
[1] Reverse conveyance [2] ADU conveyance

[3] Bypass paper feed [4] LU paper feed
[5] PC paper feed [6] Tray 2 paper feed
[7] Tray 1 paper feed [8] Registration conveyance
[9] Paper exit -
D -4
bizhub 501/421/361 D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 4. CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM
4. CONTROL BLOCK DIAGRAM

Operation
CCD HDD IC FK, MK USB RS232C LAN CF unit
I/F I/F I/F
OACB
SC
Write
Section DF
M FM CL SD PS
PRCB
SDB DCPU HV
M PS
JS LU PC FS, RU
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]

50gat2c090nc
[1] Image bus [2] Clock synchronous serial bus

[3] UART bus [4] Other buses
[5] Individual signal line [6] SATA
Board name Purpose of board ISW target
Overall control board (OACB) Overall condition control Target
Memory control board /1 (MCB1) Image memory (DRAM+HDD option) control Non-target
Printer image processing board (PRIPB) Image processing control for writing Non-target
Printer control board (PRCB) Load control of such as motor, fan, clutch, solenoid and sensor Target
Scanner image processing board (SCIPB) Scanner image processing board Non-target
Memory control board /H (MCB/H) I/F control of HDD option (option) Non-target
Memory control board /P (MCB/P) Image memory for thumbnail (DRAM+HDD option) control (option) Non-target
D -5
D OVERALL COMPOSITION > 5. TIME CHART WHEN THE POWER
bizhub 501/421/361 IS TURNED ON
5. TIME CHART WHEN THE POWER IS TURNED ON

[1] [2] [3][4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9]
Item
Normal
Scanner motor rotation
(M2) Reverse
rotation
Exposure lamp (L1)
Fusing heater lamp /1 (L2)
Fusing heater lamp /2 (L3)
Fusing motor (M11)
Drum motor (M1)
Developing motor (M3)
Polygon motor (M5)
Laser (LDB)
Paper lift motor /1 (M7)
Upper limit sensor /1 (PS6)
Paper lift motor /2 (M8)
Upper limit sensor /2 (PS13)
[1] Fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2 (L3) turn ON early [2] Power switch (SW2) turns ON
[3] Initial communication between the overall control board [4] Shading correction
(OACB) and the printer control board (PRCB)
[5] Drum motor (M1) turns ON [6] Dot diameter adjustment starts
[7] The fusing temperature gets to the prescribed temperature [8] Dot diameter adjustment completed
to start the preliminary rotation for fusing
[9] Warming up completed -
Note
• Each operation varies according to the setting of the software DipSW in the service mode.
• The power is turned ON with DF closed.
• The power is turned ON with the lift plate of the tray down.
D -6
E SERVICE TOOL > 1. bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc,
bizhub 501/421/361 bizhub PRO C60...
E SERVICE TOOL
1. bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc, bizhub PRO C6000L
1.1 Service material list
1.1.1 Service material list
Parts Number Name Shape Remark
000V-19-## Setting powder 25g
50gaf2c143na
000V-18-## Cleaning pad 10pcs/1 pack
50gaf2c144na
00GR0026## Multemp FF-RM 25g
50gaf2c145na
00GR0021 Solvest 240 Multemp FF-RM is recommended.
50gaf2c145na
1.2 Jig list

1.2.1 Jig list
26NA2134 Drum rotation member Quantity: 1
Mounted to the drum unit
26NAJG01 Optics unit positioning jig Quantity: 2
4040PJP1## Test chart (A3 size) Quantity: 1

With a KONICA MINOLTA logo
8050fs3005
4040PJP3## Test chart (A3 size) Quantity: 1

Without a KONICA MINOLTA
logo
8050fs3005
4040PJP2## Test chart (11 x 17 size) Quantity: 1
8050fs3005
120A9711 Adjustment chart (A3 size) Quantity: 1

For DF adjustment
8050fs3005
120AJG02 Adjustment chart (11 x 17 size) Quantity: 1

For DF adjustment
8050fs3005
120A9712 White chart (A4 size) Quantity: 1

For DF adjustment
8050fs3005
120AJG03 White chart (8 1/2 x 11 size) Quantity: 1

For DF adjustment
8050fs3005
00VC-2-0## Drum cover Quantity: 1
8050fs3017
E -1
E SERVICE TOOL > 1. bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc,
bizhub 501/421/361 bizhub PRO C60...

00VD-100## Blower brush Quantity: 1
8050fs3018
00VE-1005 Tester Quantity: 1
8050fs3019
45117901## Stapler unit positioning jig Quantity: 1

For SD staple adjustment
1.3 Materials
Parts name Useful sheets Type name
Toner bottle 32,190 prints TN511
Drum 250,000 prints (bizhub DR510
501/421)
225,000 prints (bizhub
361)
Developer 250,000 prints (bizhub DV511
501/421)
225,000 prints (bizhub
361)
E -2
bizhub 501/421/361 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 1. MAINTENANCE ITEM
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE
1. MAINTENANCE ITEM
1.1 Replacing procedure of the periodical replacement parts
1.1.1 Replacing procedure of the periodical replacement parts
Note
• For the replacement procedure of the periodically replaced parts, refer to F.4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE bizhub
501/421/361
• The alcohol described in this section represents the isopropyl alcohol.
1.2 bizhub 501/421/361

1.2.1 Periodic maintenance 1 (Every 250,000 prints (bizhub501/421)/Every 225,000 prints (bizhub361))
No. Unit classification Description Quantity Implementation classification Materials
Cleaning Check Lubrication Replace Tools used
1 Preparations Image check ●
Exterior ●
2 Photo conductor Drum 1 ●
section DR510
• Drum count reset
(Service mode)
Cleaning blade assy 1 ● Setting powder
50GA-209
Charge unit ● ● Cotton swab (wire),
Alcohol/cleaning pad
3 Transfer/separation Transfer/separation ● ● Cotton swab (wire)
section unit
4 Developing section Developer 1 ●
DV511
• TCR adjustment
(Service mode)
5 Main body Filter mounting plate 1 ●
assy
50GA-336
Ozon filter 1 ●
50GA1031
Suction filter /A assy 1 ●
40LAR70500
Filter cover assy 1 ●
A0R5R70100
Suction cover /2 assy 2 ●
50GA-311
6 Scanner section Original glass ● Alcohol/cleaning pad
(including slit glass)
Mirror 1 to mirror 3 ● Alcohol/cleaning pad
7 Paper feed section Pick-up roller, feed ● Alcohol/cleaning pad
roller (Tray 1, 2)
Separation roller assy ● Alcohol/cleaning pad
(Tray 1, 2)
8 Bypass tray section Feed roller ● Alcohol/cleaning pad
Separation roller ● Alcohol/cleaning pad
9 Fusing section Fusing roller 1 ●
50GE5303 (bizhub
501) 50GA5303
(bizhub 421/361)
Fusing pressure roller 1
50GA5304
Fusing web 2
50GA-540
Fusing counter reset
Heat insulating sleeve / 2
A
26NA5372
Fusing bearing /Up 2
26NA5371
Fusing bearing /Lw 2
50GA5359
F-1
Fusing driven roller /A 2

assy
4040R70600
Fusing driven roller /B 2
assy
4040R70700
Fusing sensor ● Alcohol/cleaning pad
Fusing claw ● Alcohol/cleaning pad
Thermostat ● Alcohol/cleaning pad
10 Paper reverse section Paper exit suction filter 1 ●
50GA4406
11 Registration section Paper dust removing ● Blower brush
brush
Registration roller /Rt ● Alcohol/cleaning pad
Registration roller /Lt ● Alcohol/cleaning pad
Loop roller ● Alcohol/cleaning pad
Reflective sensor ● Blower brush
12 Final check Paper through, Image ●
check
PM count reset ●
Exterior cleaning ●
1 Transfer/separation Transfer/separation unit 1 ●
section 50GA-260
2 Fusing section Fusing sensor assy 1 ●
50GA-544
Fuse holder assy 1 ●
SP00-0112
Fusing claw assy 1 ●
50GA-533
Fusing input gear assy 1 ●
50GA-546
1 Photo conductor Drum unit 1 ●
section 50GA-260
2 Developing section Developing unit 1 ●
50GA-300
3 Paper feed section Pick-up roller 2 ● Actual: 300,000
40303005 feeds
Feed roller 2 ● Actual: 300,000
40303005 feeds
Separation roller assy 2 ● Actual: 300,000
(Tray 1, 2) feeds
40300151
4 Bypass tray section Paper feed roller 1 ● Actual: 200,000
41313001 feeds
40340151 feeds
1.2.4 Periodic maintenance 4 (Every 1,250,000 prints (bizhub501/421)/Every 900,000 prints (bizhub361)
1 Registration section Registration bearing /Rt 2 ●
26NA4536
Registration bearing /Lt 2 ●
26NA4537
Loop roller 1 ●
50GA3865
F-2
Registration roller /Rt 1 ●

50GA3848
Loop bearing 2 ●
26NA4082
2 Write section Fusing input gear assy 1 ●
50GA-546
1.3 DF
1.3.1 Periodic maintenance 1 (Every 250,000 prints (bizhub501/421) / Every 225,000 prints (bizhub361))
1 Preparations Paper through, mage ●
condition
Appearance ●
2 Paper feed section Pick-up roller ● Alcohol/cleaning pad
Actual: 50,000 faces
Feed roller ● Alcohol/cleaning pad
Separation roller ● Alcohol/cleaning pad
Other rollers ● Alcohol/cleaning pad
Each sensor ● Alcohol/cleaning pad
3 Paper conveyance Scanning guide ● Alcohol/cleaning pad
section Actual: 50,000 faces
4 Final check Paper through, image ●
check
16EA56020 faces
45823014 faces
Separation roller 1 ● Actual: 200,000
45823047 faces
1.4 PC
1 Preparations Paper through check ●
2 Paper feed section Pick-up roller ●
Feed roller ●
Separation roller ●
3 Final check Paper through check ●
40303005 feeds
40303005 feeds
40300151 feeds
F-3
1.5 LU
2 Paper feed section Pick-up rubber ● Alcohol/cleaning pad
Feed rubber ● Alcohol/cleaning pad
Separation rubber ● Alcohol/cleaning pad
1 Paper feed section Pick-up rubber 1 ● Actual: 200,000
40LA4009 feeds
Feed rubber 1 ● Actual: 200,000
26NA4011 feeds
Separation rubber 1 ● Actual: 200,000
26NA4012 feeds
1.6 FS
2 Conveyance section, Each roller ● Alcohol/cleaning pad
staple section
3 Staple section Paddle ● Alcohol/cleaning pad
1.7 MT
2 Conveyance section Each roller ● Alcohol/cleaning pad
1.8 SD
1.9 RU
F-4
F-5
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 2. PERIODICALLY REPLACED
bizhub 501/421/361 PARTS LIST
2. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS LIST

2.1 Periodical replacement parts
Note
• For the replacement procedure of the periodically replaced parts, refer to F.4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE bizhub
501/421/361 to F.11. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE MT-502.
The parts count No. given in the following table represents the number of the special parts count in the service mode.
2.2 bizhub PRESS C7000/C7000P/C70hc/C6000, bizhub PRO C6000L

2.2.1 Periodically replaced parts list (bizhub 501/421)
(1) Main body
No. Classification Parts name Parts No. Quantity Actual Parts count No.
replacement
cycle
1 Photo conductor Drum DR510 1 250,000
2 section Cleaning blade assy 50GA-209 1 250,000
3 Drum unit (without drum) 50GA-200 1 600,000
4 Transfer/separation Transfer/separation unit 50GA-260 1 500,000
section
5 Developing section Developer DV511 1 250,000
6 Developing unit 50GA-300 1 750,000
7 Main body Filter mounting plate assy 50GA-336 1 250,000
8 Ozon filter 50GA1031 1 250,000
9 Suction filter /A assy 40LAR70500 1 250,000
10 Filter cover assy A0R5R70100 1 250,000
11 Suction cover /2 assy 50GA-311 2 250,000
12 Paper feed section Pick-up roller 40303005 2 300,000
13 Feed roller 40303005 2 300,000
14 Separation roller assy (Tray 1, 2) 40300151 2 300,000
15 Bypass tray section Paper feed roller 41313001 1 200,000
16 Separation roller assy 40340151 1 200,000
17 Registration section Loop roller 50GA3865 1 1,250,000
18 Registration roller /Rt 50GA3848 1 1,250,000
19 Registration bearing /Rt 26NA4536 2 1,250,000
20 Registration bearing /Lt 26NA4537 2 1,250,000
21 Loop bearing 26NA4082 1 1,250,000
22 Fusing section Fusing roller 50GE5303 1 250,000
(bizhub 501)
50GA5303
(bizhub 421)
23 Fusing pressure roller 50GA5304 1 250,000
24 Fusing web 50GA-540 1 250,000
25 Heat insulating sleeve /A 26NA5372 2 250,000
26 Fusing bearing /Up 26NA5371 2 250,000
27 Fusing bearing /Lw 50GA5359 2 250,000
28 Fusing sensor assy 50GA-544 1 500,000
29 Fuse holder assy SP00-0112 1 500,000
30 Fusing claw assy 50GA-533 1 500,000
31 Fusing driven roller /A assy 4040R70600 2 250,000
32 Fusing driven roller /B assy 4040R70700 2 250,000
33 Fusing input gear assy 50GA-546 1 500,000
34 Paper reverse Paper exit suction filter 50GA4406 1 250,000
section
35 Write section Write unit A0R5R70000 1 1,250,000
(2) Option
replacement
cycle
1 DF Pick-up roller 16EA56020 1 200,000
2 Feed roller 45823014 1 200,000
3 Separation roller 45823047 1 200,000
F-6
4 PC Pick-up roller 40303005 1 300,000

5 Feed roller 40303005 1 300,000
7 LU Pick-up rubber 40LA4009 1 200,000
8 Feed rubber 26NA4011 1 200,000
9 Separation rubber 26NA4012 1 200,000
2.2.2 Periodically replaced parts list (bizhub 361)

(1) Main body
replacement
cycle
1 Photo conductor Drum DR510 1 225,000
2 section Cleaning blade assy 50GA-209 1 225,000
3 Drum unit (without drum) 50GA-200 1 675,000
4 Transfer/separation Transfer/separation unit 50GA-260 1 450,000
section
5 Developing section Developer DV511 1 225,000
6 Developing unit 50GA-300 1 675,000
7 Main body Filter mounting plate assy 50GA-336 1 225,000
8 Ozon filter 50GA1031 1 225,000
9 Suction filter /A assy 40LAR70500 1 225,000
10 Filter cover assy A0R5R70100 1 225,000
11 Suction cover /2 assy 50GA-311 2 225,000
12 Paper feed section Pick-up roller 40303005 2 300,000
13 Feed roller 40303005 2 300,000
14 Separation roller assy (Tray 1, 2) 40300151 2 300,000
15 Bypass tray section Paper feed roller 41313001 1 200,000
17 Registration section Loop roller 50GA3865 1 900,000
18 Registration roller /Rt 50GA3848 1 900,000
19 Registration bearing /Rt 26NA4536 2 900,000
20 Registration bearing /Lt 26NA4537 2 900,000
21 Loop bearing 26NA4082 1 900,000
22 Fusing section Fusing roller 50GA5303 1 225,000
23 Fusing pressure roller 50GA5304 1 225,000
24 Fusing web 50GA-540 1 225,000
25 Heat insulating sleeve /A 26NA5372 2 225,000
26 Fusing bearing /Up 26NA5371 2 225,000
27 Fusing bearing /Lw 50GA5359 2 225,000
28 Fusing sensor assy 50GA-544 1 450,000
29 Fuse holder assy SP00-0112 1 450,000
30 Fusing claw assy 50GA-533 1 450,000
31 Fusing driven roller /A assy 4040R70600 2 225,000
32 Fusing driven roller /B assy 4040R70700 2 225,000
33 Fusing input gear assy 50GA-546 1 450,000
34 Paper reverse Paper exit suction filter 50GA4406 1 225,000
section
35 Write section Write unit A0R5R70000 1 900,000
(2) Option
replacement
cycle
1 DF Pick-up roller 16EA56020 1 200,000
2 Feed roller 45823014 1 200,000
3 Separation roller 45823047 1 200,000
4 PC Pick-up roller 40303005 1 300,000
5 Feed roller 40303005 1 300,000
F-7
7 LU Pick-up rubber 40LA4009 1 200,000

8 Feed rubber 26NA4011 1 200,000
9 Separation rubber 26NA4012 1 200,000
F-8
bizhub 501/421/361 F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 3. LIFE VALUE
3. LIFE VALUE
3.1 Life value of materials/parts
Item Number of prints Remarks
Drum Equivalent to 220,000 prints The life value is defined only by the number of prints.
(C7000/C7000P/C70hc)
Equivalent to 180,000 prints
(C6000/C6000L)
Developer Equivalent to 340,000 prints
(C7000/C7000P/C70hc)
Equivalent to 300,000 prints
(C6000/C6000L)
F-9
F PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE > 4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE
bizhub 501/421/361 PROCEDURE bizhub...
4. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE bizhub 501/421/361

4.1 External section
4.1.1 Replacing the ozone filter
(1) Periodically replacing parts/cycle
• Ozone filter
: Every 250,000 prints*1
*1 501/421
*2 361
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the right cover /Up.
G.2.2.2 Removing/reinstalling the rear cover /2
2. Remove the ozone filter [1].
NOTE
• When removing the ozone filter, be sure to pull it out by
holding it at the section indicated by [2].
3. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
[1]
[2]
50gaf2c014na
4.1.2 Replacing the filter cover assy and the suction filter /A assy
(1) Periodically replaced parts/cycle
• Filter cover assy
• Suction filter /A assy
*1 501/421
*2 361
F-10
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the filter cover assy [2].
[1]
[2]
50gaf2c015nb
2. Remove the suction filter /A assy [1].

[1] 50gaf2c016na
Note
• Be sure to install the suction filter /A assy with the white
filter face [1] inside.
[1] 50gaf2c017na
4.1.3 Replacing the paper exit suction filter

• Paper exit suction filter
*1 501/421
*2 361
F-11
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the paper exit suction filter
cover [2].
[1]
[2]
a0r5f2c001ca
2. Remove the paper exit suction filter [1].

[1]
50gaf2c019na
4.2 Write section

4.2.1 Replacing the write unit
WARNING
• Be sure not to turn on the write unit with it shifted from its regular installation position.
• Be absolutely sure not to remove the write unit cover. Otherwise, laser beams get in your eyes and you may suffer loss of sight.
• Be absolutely sure not to remove the write unit for about 2 minutes after you turn off the main power switch (SW1) or the power
switch (SW2).

• Write unit
: Every 1,250,000 prints*1
*1 501/421
*2 361
F-12
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the developing unit from the main body.
F.4.5.1 Replacing the developing unit
2. Remove the drum unit from the main body.
F.4.3.1 Replacing the drum unit
3. Pull out the dust-proof glass cleaning rod [1].
4. Remove the cleaning knob [4] from the dust-proof glass cleaning
rod [1] by rotating it in the arrow-marked direction [3] with the
section indicated by [2] as a fulcrum.
5. Replace the dust-proof glass cleaning rod [1] to its original
position.
Note
• Be sure to push in fully the dust-proof glass cleaning rod
[1] so that it does not come in contact with the main body
frame when removing the unit.
[2]
[4]
[3]
50gaf2c020na
[2] [1] 6. Remove the 6 screws [1] and then remove the write cover [2].
Note
• When installing the write cover, be sure to set the
projections of the positioning [3] at 2 places into each of
the holes of the frame.
[1] [3] 50gaf2c021nb
[1] [2] [3] 7. Remove the 2 screws [1].

8. Remove the connector [2] and then remove the drum cooling fan
assy [3].
50gaf2c022na
[1] 9. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and then remove the 2 write
section mounting member assy's [2].
Note
• When installing the write section mounting member assy
[2], be sure to install it so that the spring [3] gets straight.
[2] [3] 50gaf2c023na
F-13
10. Remove the 3 connectors [1].
11. Remove the 3 screws [2] and then remove the write unit [3].
Note
• When removing the write unit, be sure to avoid touching
the dust-proof glass.
[3] [2]
[1]
50gaf2c024na
Note
• When installing the write unit [1], be sure to take note of
the position into which the dust-proof sheet /A [2] is
inserted.
• When checking the insertion of the sheet, be sure to
check it with the drum unit removed.
[1] [2]
50gaf2c025na
[1]
Note
• When installing the write unit, be sure to set the
projections [1] at 2 places provided on the bottom to the 2
holes [2] of the main body frame for positioning.
[2] 50gaf2c026na
F-14
4.3 Photosensitive material section

4.3.1 Replacing the drum unit
NOTE
• When removing the drum unit, be sure to hold it at both ends.
• When removing the drum unit, be sure to avoid holding it at the separation claw unit section.
• Be sure to avoid touching the drum with bare hands, and also be careful not to damage it.
• Be sure to avoid turning the drum in any direction other than in the specified direction.
• When storing the drum unit, be sure to store it in the dark place with a drum cover attached.

• Drum unit
*1 501/421
*2 361
(2) Procedure
1. Open ADU.
G.2.2.5 Removing/reinstalling the right cover /Up
2. Pull the lock release lever [1] to open the conveyance unit [2].
[1] [2] 50gaf2c027na
[2] [1] 3. Remove the developing unit from the main body.
4. Loosen the screw [1] and remove the drum unit [2].
50gaf2c028na
4.3.2 Replacing the drum

Note
• Be sure to avoid touching the drum and the cleaning blade with bare hands, and also be careful not to damage them.
• When storing the drum, be sure to store it in the dark place with a drum cover attached.
• When installing the drum and the cleaning blade, be sure to apply setting powder to the circumference of the drum and the
cleaning blade, regardless of these parts being new or used ones.
• When setting powder is applied to the drum, be sure to conduct the following operations before installing the drum unit to the
main body.
1. With the charging corona unit removed, rotate the drum one full turn (to prevent setting powder from splashing onto the
charging corona unit and the image from getting defective.)
2. When installing a new drum, be sure to reset the drum counter in the service mode. Failing to reset it may result in image
fogging and toner splashing. I.4.6.2 Present Parts Life

• Drum
*1 501/421
*2 361
F-15
(2) Procedure
[1] 2. Remove the C-clip [1] and pull out the cleaning rod [2].
Note
• When installing the cleaning rod, be sure to take note of
the direction of the C-clip.
3. Remove the spring [3].
[2]
[3]
50gaf2c029na
4. Remove the connector [1].

5. Open the lock lever [2] and remove the charging corona unit [3].
[1] [3]
[2]
50gaf2c030na
F-16
6. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the shaft mounting plate
[2].
NG OK 7. Pull out the drum shaft [3] for removal.
Note
• When installing the drum shaft, be sure to insert the drum
shaft until the shaft mounting plate comes into contact
[2] [2] firmly with it as shown in the drawing.
8. Remove the 2 screws [4] and then remove the bearing [5].
[3] [3]
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
50gaf2c031nb
F-17
9. Remove the seal blocks [1] and [2].
10. Hold the drum [3] at both ends and remove it.
Note
• When removing the drum, be careful not to damage the
[1] photosensitive surface.
• When removing the drum, be careful not to hit it against
the metal frame section [4] of the cleaning blade.
[3]
[4]
[2]
50gaf2c032na
[1] 11. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
Note
• When installing the drum, using the attached jig [2] with
the drum unit cover [1] before installing the charging
corona unit, rotate the drum 1 full turn in the arrow-
[2]
marked direction [3]. And then check to see if setting
powder is not scraped off, and also if the toner collection
sheet and the cleaning blade do not turned up.
[2]
[3]
50gaf2c033nb
F-18
4.4 Transfer/separation corona section

4.4.1 Replacing the transfer/separation corona unit
• Transfer/separation corona unit
*1 501/421
*2 361
(2) Procedure
[3] 1. Open ADU.
(Refer to G.2.2.5 Removing/reinstalling the right cover /Up)
2. Open the conveyance unit.
(Refer to F.4.3.1 Replacing the drum unit)
3. Release the lock levers [1] and [2] and remove the transfer/
separation corona unit [3].
[1] [2] 50gaf2c034na
4.5 Developing section

4.5.1 Replacing the developing unit
• Developing unit
*1 501/421
*2 361
(2) Procedure
1. Open the front door [1].
2. Loosen the screw [2] and remove the developing unit [3].
[3] [1]
[2]
50gaf2c035na
F-19
4.5.2 Replacing developer

• Developer
*1 501/421
*2 361
(2) Procedure
[2] 1. Remove the developing unit from the main body.
(Refer toF.4.5.1 Replacing the developing unit)
2. Release the locks [1] at 2 places and remove the developing unit
cover /1 [2].
[1]
50gaf2c036na
Note
• When installing the developing unit cover /1 [1], be sure to
install it so that the splash prevention sheet [2] does not
get caught into the developing roller [3].
[1] [2] [3]
[3] [2]
50gaf2c037na
F-20
[1] [4] 3. Tilt the developing unit [1], and rotate the developing gear [2] in the
arrow-marked direction [3] to discharge thoroughly developer in
the developing unit [1].
4. Clean developer and toner that adhere to the developing roller [4].
Note
• Be absolutely sure not to turn the developing gear [2] in
any direction other than in the arrow-marked direction [3].
(Never rotate it clockwise as seen from the direction
indicated by [5].)
• If there remains any used developer on the developing
roller, this may cause image fogging.
[5] [3] [2] 50gaf2c041na
5. Put in new developer [1] evenly from above the agitator screw [2].
[1]
[3] 6. Rotate the developing gear [4] in the arrow-marked direction [5] so
that developer [1] gets deep into the developing unit [3].
7. Repeat steps 5 and 6 to put in the developer [1] thoroughly.
8. Rotate the developing gear [4] in the arrow-marked direction [5]
and check to see if the spiking of developer is found on the entire
[2] surface of the developing roller [6].
[6] Note
• When developer [1] is replaced, be sure to conduct the
TCR adjustment in the service mode.
(Refer to I.4.4.7 TCR Adjustment)
[5] [4]
50gaf2c042na
4.6 Toner supply section

4.6.1 Replacing the filter mounting plate assy
• Filter mounting plate assy
*1 501/421
*2 361
F-21
(2) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the developing unit from the main body.
2. Open ADU.
5. Release the lock levers [1] at 2 places and remove the filter
mounting plate assy [2].
6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal procedure in
reverse.
[1] [2]
50gaf2c043na
4.6.2 Replacing the suction cover /2 assy

• Suction cover /2 assy
*1 501/421
*2 361
F-22
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the developing unit from the main body.
(Refer toF.4.5.1 Replacing the developing unit)
2. Open ADU.
(Refer toG.2.2.5 Removing/reinstalling the right cover /Up)
(Refer toF.4.3.1 Replacing the drum unit)
[3] (Refer toF.4.3.1 Replacing the drum unit)
5. Remove the front cover from the main body.
(Refer toG.2.2.12 Removing/reinstalling the front cover)
6. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the rail [2].
Note
• When installing the rail, be sure first to insert the tip into
the notch [3].
[2]
[1]
50gaf2c044na
[1] 7. Remove the 2 suction cover /2 assy's [1].

50gaf2c045na
4.7 Cleaning/toner recycle section

4.7.1 Replacing the cleaning blade assy
Note
• Be sure to avoid touching the edge section of the cleaning blade assy with bare hands.
• When installing the cleaning blade assy, be sure to apply setting powder to the circumference of the drum and the cleaning blade,
regardless of these parts being new or used ones.
• When setting powder is applied to the drum, be sure to conduct the following operations before installing the drum unit to the
main body.
1. With the charging corona unit removed, rotate the drum 1 full turn (to prevent setting powder from splashing onto the
charging corona unit and the image from getting defective.)

• Cleaning blade assy
*1 501/421
*2 361
F-23
(2) Procedure
[1] (Refer to F.4.5.1 Replacing the developing unit)
2. Open ADU.
5. Remove the drum from the drum unit.
[2]
(Refer to F.4.3.2 Replacing the drum)
50gaf2c046na 6. Remove the 2 screws [1] and then remove the cleaning blade
presser plate [2].
7. Remove the cleaning blade assy [1].
[1]
50gaf2c047na
Note
• When installing the cleaning blade assy [1], be sure to
insert the transparent sheet section [2] of the unit the
between the collection screw [3] and the collection paddle
[4].
[3] [2]
[4]
[1]
50gaf2c048na
4.8 Paper feed section

4.8.1 Replacing the feed roller/pick-up roller (tray 1)
• Feed roller
: Every 750,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 300,000 prints)*1
• Pick-up roller
*1 501/421
*2 361
F-24
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the front cover.
G.2.2.12 Removing/reinstalling the front cover
2. Remove the tray 1.
G.2.2.19 Removing/reinstalling the trays 1 and 2
3. Remove the connector [1] and the 2 screws [2], and then remove
the paper feed unit /1 [3].
[2]
[1]
[3]
[2]
50gaf2c108na
[3] [2] Note

• When installing the paper feed unit /1 [1], be sure to set
the shafts [2] and [3] to the holes [4] and [5].
[5] [1]
[4] 50gaf2c109na
F-25
4. Remove the 2 screws [1] and then remove the separation roller
unit /1 [2].
[3][4]
Note
• When installing the separation roller unit /1, be sure to set
the projections [3], 1 each, to each of the holes [4].
[1]
[2] [3][4]
[1]
50gaf2c110na
5. Remove the 2 screws [1].

[2] 6. Detach the convex section [2] from the hole [3] and remove the
paper feed unit cover [4].
[3]
[1]
[4]
50gaf2c111na
F-26
7. Remove the C-ring [1] and then remove the bearing [2].
8. Detach the hook [4] of the spring [3] from the oblong hole [5].
[1] 9. Remove the bearing [6] and then remove the paper feed roller unit
[7].
Note
• When attaching the spring, be sure to put the hook into
[2] the oblong hole (not into the round hole [8]).
[8] [7]
[5]
[4]
[6]
[3]
50gaf2c161na
[4] [1] 10. Remove the E-ring [1] and then remove the bearing [2].
11. Remove the bearing [3] and then remove the feed roller assy [4].
[2]
[3] 50gaf2c162na
12. Remove the C-ring [1] and then remove the feed roller [2].
[1]
[2] 50gaf2c163na
F-27
13. Remove the C-rings [1], 1 each, and then remove the 2 bearings
[2].
14. Remove the pick-up roller assy [3].
[1] [2]
[1]
[3] [2] 50gaf2c164na
15. Remove the C-ring [1] and then remove the pick-up roller [2].
[2] [1]
50gaf2c113na
4.8.2 Replacing the separation roller assy (tray 1)

• Separation roller assy
*1 501/421
*2 361
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the tray 1.
[1]
G.2.2.19 Removing/reinstalling the trays 1 and 2
2. Remove the paper feed unit /1.
F.4.8.1 Replacing the feed roller/pick-up roller (tray 1)
3. Remove the separation roller unit /1.
[2] [3]
50gaf2c117na Note
• When installing the separation roller mounting plate assy,
be sure to fasten it with screws while pressing it in the
arrow-marked direction [3].
F-28
5. Remove the 2 C-rings [1] and pull out the shaft [2].
6. Remove the separation roller mounting plate [3].
[1]
Note
• When removing the separation roller mounting plate, be
careful that the spring [4] does not get lost since it is apt
[2] to come off.
[1] • When installing the separation roller mounting plate, be
sure to install it so that it comes under the projection [5].
[5] [4] [3]

50gaf2c118na
7. Remove the guide [1].

8. Remove the C-ring [2] and then remove the separation roller assy
[3].
[1] [3]
[2]
50gaf2c119na

• Feed roller
• Pick-up roller
*1 501/421
*2 361
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the bypass unit.
F.4.9.1 Removing/reinstalling the bypass unit
2. Pull out the tray 2 [1].
[1]
50gaf2c120na
F-29
3. Push the lever [1] to open the vertical conveyance door [2].
4. Detach the fulcrum [3] of the vertical conveyance door from the
mounting plate [4] and remove the vertical conveyance door.
[4]
[3]
[1] [2] 50gaf2c121na
5. Remove the 2 screws [1] and then remove the conveyance roller
cover [2].
[1] [2] [1]

50gaf2c122na
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the paper feed guide /2 [2]
[2] [3] in the arrow-marked direction [3].
[1]
[1]
50gaf2c123na
F-30
[2] 7. Remove the 2 connectors [1].

8. Remove the 3 screws [2] and then remove the paper feed unit /2
[3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
50gaf2c124na
unit /2 [2].
[1] Note
the projection [3] to the hole [4].
[3] [4]
[1] [3] [4] [2]

50gaf2c125na
F-31
[4] [1]
11. Detach the convex section [2] from the hole [3] and remove the
paper feed roller cover [4].
[2] [3]
50gaf2c126na

13. Remove the C-ring [2] and then remove the feed clutch /2 (CL5)
[3].
Note
• When installing CL5, be sure to set the stopper [4] to the
guide plate [5].
[3]
[2] [5]
[4]
[1]
50gaf2c127na
F-32
[3]
[7] 15. Remove the C-rings [4], 1 each, and then remove the 2 bearings
[5].
16. Remove the paper feed roller unit [6].
Note
[2] • When attaching the spring, be sure to put the hook into
the oblong hole (not into the round hole [7]).
[1]
[6]
[4]
[4] [5] 50gaf2c165na
[3] [2] 50gaf2c166na
[1]
[2] 50gaf2c167na
F-33
[2].
[1] [2]
[1]
[3] [2] 50gaf2c168na
[2] [1]
50gaf2c129na
4.8.4 Replacing the separation roller assy (tray 2)

*1 501/421
*2 361
(2) Procedure
2. Pull out the tray 2.
3. Remove the vertical conveyance door.
4. Remove the conveyance roller cover.
5. Remove the paper feed guide /2.
[1] [2] [1] F.4.8.3 Replacing the feed roller/pick-up roller (tray 2)
6. Remove the paper feed unit /2.
7. Remove the separation roller unit /2.
Note
• When installing the separation roller mounting plate assy,
be sure to fasten it with screws while pressing it in the
[3] arrow-marked direction [3].
50gaf2c133na
F-34
9. Remove the 2 C-rings [1] and pull out the shaft [2].
10. Remove the separation roller mounting plate [3].
[1]
Note
• When removing the separation roller mounting plate, be
careful that the spring [4] does not get lost since it is apt
[2] to come off.
[1] • When installing the separation roller mounting plate, be
sure to install it so that it comes under the projection [5].
11. Remove the guide [1].

12. Remove the C-ring [2] and then remove the separation roller assy
[3].
[5] [4] [3]

50gaf2c134na
[1] [3]
[2]
50gaf2c135na
F-35
4.9 Bypass tray section

4.9.1 Removing/reinstalling the bypass unit
(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the right cover /Lw.
(Refer toG.2.2.6 Removing/reinstalling the right cover /Lw)
2. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the bypass cover /Fr [2].
3. Loosen the screw [3] and then remove the screw [4] to remove the
bypass cover /Rr [5].
[5]
[3] [4] 50gaf2c001na
F-36

5. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the ground terminal [3].
6. Remove the 5 screws [4] and then remove the bypass unit [5].
[2] [3] [1]
[5]
[4] 50gaf2c002na

8. After installing the bypass unit, open the tray 2 paper feed guide
[1] and the bypass feed guide [2] in the arrow-marked direction [3]
to check to see if they operate smoothly.
[1] [3] [2]
50gaf2c003na
F-37
4.9.2 Replacing the separation roller assy

*1 501/421
*2 361
(2) Procedure
[3]
(Refer toF.4.9.1 Removing/reinstalling the bypass unit)
2. Remove the 2 springs [1].
4. Detach the hook [1] from the hole [2] and remove the push-up
plate assy [3].
[1] [2]
50gaf2c005na
Note
• When installing the push-up plate assy, be sure to install
it while pressing the push-up plate [3] so that each of the
springs [1] does not comes off each cross-headed boss
[2].
[1] [3] [1]
[2] [2] 50gaf2c006na
[2] [1] 5. Remove the 2 screws [1] and then remove the separation roller
fixing plate assy [2].
50gaf2c007na
F-38
[3] [5] [4] [1] 6. Detach the support axis [2] of the holder [1] from the mounting
plate [3] and remove the holder.
Note
• When removing the holder [1], the spring [4] provided
under the holder is apt to come off. Be careful that it does
not get lost.
• When installing the holder [1], be sure to install it so that it
comes under the projection [5].
[2] 50gaf2c008na
[3] [1] 7. Remove the C-ring [1] and then remove the separation roller assy
[3] from the holder [2].
[2] 50gaf2c009na
4.9.3 Replacing the feed roller

• Feed roller
*1 501/421
*2 361
(2) Procedure
2. Remove the push-up plate assy.
F.4.9.2 Replacing the separation roller assy
3. Press the conveyance guide [1] in the arrow-marked direction [2]
to remove the support axis [3] from the hole [4], and then remove
the conveyance guide.
[4] [3] [2]
[1] 50gaf2c010na
F-39
[3] 4. Open the lever [1]. Remove the 2 screws [2] and then remove the
paper roller cover [3].
[2] [1] 50gaf2c169na
[1] [2] [3] 5. Remove the C-ring [1] and then remove the feed clutch /BP (CL6)
[2].
Note
guide plate [4].
[4] 50gaf2c170na
6. Remove the gear [1].
[1] 50gaf2c171na
7. Remove the C-ring [1] and then remove the bearing [2].
8. Remove the bearing [3] and slide the shaft [4].
[3] [4] [2] [1]
50gaf2c172na
4.10 Registration section

4.10.1 Cleaning the paper dust removing brush
• Paper dust removing brush
F-40
*1 501/421
*2 361
(2) Procedure
[2] 1. Open ADU.
5. Remove the suction cover /2 assy.
F.4.6.2 Replacing the suction cover /2 assy
6. With the lever [1] pulled, remove the paper dust removing brush [2]
and clean the paper dust removing brush with a blower brush.
[1]
50gaf2c174na
4.10.2 Replacing the loop roller, the loop bearing, the registration roller /Rt, and the registration bearings /Rt and /Lt
• Loop roller
• Loop bearing
• Registration roller /Rt
• Registration bearing /Rt
• Registration bearing /Lt
*1 501/421
*2 361
(2) Procedure
1. Open ADU.
(Refer to F.4.5.1 Replacing the developing unit)
5. Remove the front cover from the main body.
(Refer to G.2.2.12 Removing/reinstalling the front cover)
6. Remove the suction cover /2 assy.
(Refer to F.4.6.2 Replacing the suction cover /2 assy)
[1]
50gaf2c175na
F-41
8. Remove the 5 screws [1] and then remove the ADU drive assy [2].
Note
• When installing the ADU drive assy, be sure to set the
stopper [4] of the registration clutch (CL1) [3] to the guide
plate [5].
[2] [1]
[3]
[1]
[3]
[4]
[5]
50gaf2c154nb
[5] [6] [1] 9. Remove the connector [1].

10. Remove the screw [2].
11. Remove the C-clip [3] and slide CL1 [4] in the arrow-marked
direction [5].
12. Remove the 2 C-clips [6] to release the bearing [7].
Note
• When installing the 2 C-clips [6], be sure to install them
with their collars come face to face each other.
13. Remove the C-clip [8] and then remove the bearing [9].
14. Remove the registration unit [10].
[10] [3] [4] [7]
[2] [9] [8]

50gaf2c155na
F-42
[6] [5] [4] [3] 15. Remove the bearing [1] and CL1 [2].
16. Remove the E-ring [3] and then remove the loop clutch (CL2) [4].
Note
screw [6].
17. Remove the screw [7] and then remove the registration main body
assy [8].
[7] [2] [1]
[8]
50gaf2c156na
[3] 18. Remove the E-rings [1] and release the 2 loop bearings [2].
19. Remove the loop roller [3].
20. Remove the 2 loop bearings from the loop roller.
[2] [1] [2]
50gaf2c157nb
F-43
21. Remove the 2 springs [1].
22. Remove the E-rings [2], 1 each, and then remove the 2 registration
bearings /Lt [3].
23. Remove the registration roller /Lt [4].
Note
• When attaching the spring, be sure to couple the hook [5]
of the spring at the position as shown in the drawing left.
[4] [5] [2] [3] [1]
[1] [3] [2]

50gaf2c158nb
24. Remove the E-rings [1], 1 each, and then remove the 2 registration
bearings /Rt [2].
25. Remove the registration roller /Rt [3].
[1] [2] [3]
[2] [1]
50gaf2c159nb
F-44

• Feed roller
• Pick-up roller
*1 501/421
*2 361
(2) Procedure
[1]
50gaf2c120na
3. Push the lever [1] to open the vertical conveyance door [2].
4. Detach the fulcrum [3] of the vertical conveyance door from the
mounting plate [4] and remove the vertical conveyance door.
[4]
[3]
[1] [2] 50gaf2c121na
5. Remove the 2 screws [1] and then remove the conveyance roller
cover [2].
[1] [2] [1]

50gaf2c122na
F-45
6. Remove 2 screws [1] and then remove the paper feed guide /2 [2]
[2] [3] in the arrow-marked direction [3].
[1]
[1]
50gaf2c123na

8. Remove the 3 screws [2] and then remove the paper feed unit /2
[3].
[1]
[3]
[2]
50gaf2c124na
F-46
unit /2 [2].
[1] Note
the projection [3] to the hole [4].
[3] [4]
[1] [3] [4] [2]

50gaf2c125na

[4] [1]
11. Detach the convex section [2] from the hole [3] and remove the
paper feed roller cover [4].
[2] [3]
50gaf2c126na

13. Remove the C-ring [2] and then remove the feed clutch /2 (CL5)
[3].
Note
guide plate [5].
[3]
[2] [5]
[4]
[1]
50gaf2c127na
F-47
[3]
[7] 15. Remove the C-rings [4], 1 each, and then remove the 2 bearings
[5].
16. Remove the paper feed roller unit [6].
Note
[2] • When attaching the spring, be sure to put the hook into
the oblong hole (not into the round hole [7]).
[1]
[6]
[4]
[4] [5] 50gaf2c165na
[3] [2] 50gaf2c166na
[1]
[2] 50gaf2c167na
F-48
[2].
[1] [2]
[1]
[3] [2] 50gaf2c168na
[2] [1]
50gaf2c129na
4.11 Fusing section

4.11.1 Removing/reinstalling the fusing unit
CAUTION
• Since the fusing section gets hot immediately after turning off the main power switch (SW1) or the power switch (SW2), you may
suffer a burn. Be sure to conduct the operations when the temperature goes down sufficiently.
(2) Procedure
[2] [1]
1. Open ADU.
4. Loosen the screw [1] and remove the front auxiliary cover [2].
50gaf2c085nb
F-49
[4] 6. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the filter cover [3].
8. Loosen the 2 screws [5]. And after sliding the entire reverse unit [6]
[1]
in the arrow-marked direction [7], tilt the front side in the arrow-
marked direction [8] for removal.
[8] [3] [2] [5]
[6] [5] [7]
[4]
50gaf2c086na
[2] 9. Remove the 2 screws [1] and then remove the fusing unit [2].
Note
• When lifting the fusing unit, be sure to hold it at both
ends.
• When installing/removing it, be careful not to damage
rollers.
[1] 50gaf2c087na
4.11.2 Replacing the fusing claw assy

• Fusing claw assy
*1 501/421
*2 361
F-50
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the fusing unit.
F.4.11.1 Removing/reinstalling the fusing unit
2. Remove the C-clip [1].
3. Open the fusing front guide assy [2].
[1] [2] 50gaf2c088na
4. Slide the fusing front guide assy [1] for removal.
[1] 50gaf2c089na

6. Remove the screw [2] and raise the fusing claw assy [3].
7. Remove the connector [4] from the fusing claw assy.
Note
• When installing the fusing claw assy, be careful not to
neglect attaching the connector [4].
• When installing the fusing claw assy, be sure to insert the
positioning sections [6] at 2 places into each of the
[1] projections [7].
• When installing the fusing claw assy, be careful not to
damage the roller surface with the tip of the claw.
[2] [5] [4]
[3] [7] [6]
50gaf2c091na
F-51
4.11.3 Replacing the fusing web

• Fusing web
*1 501/421
*2 361
(2) Procedure
[4] [2] 1. Remove the fusing unit.
2. Remove the fusing claw assy.
F.4.11.2 Replacing the fusing claw assy
5. Apply pressure from the inside of the ducts [3] at 2 places to
release the lock and remove the fusing web [4].
Note
• When installing the fusing web, be sure to install the
screw [1] first.
[1] [5] [3] 50gaf2c092na
[2] Note
• When installing the fusing web, be sure to insert the
projections [1] at 2 places into the positioning holes [2].
[1] 50gaf2c093na
[1] [2] [5] [8] 6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal step in reverse.
NOTE
• The performance of a new fusing web [1] is guaranteed
from the position at which a brown line [2] is broken.
When replacing the fusing web, be sure to take up the
fusing web up to the position at which the distance [5]
from the nip section [4] of the fusing roller [3] and the
fusing web to the brown line becomes 0 to 10 mm or less.
• When taking up the fusing web, be sure to bring down the
[4] [3] release lever [6] to release the cleaner lock gear [7] and
rotate the web drive gear [8].
• When replacing the fusing web, be sure to reset the fusing
web counter in the service mode.
I.4.6.2 Present Parts Life
[1]
[7] [6] [6] 50gaf2c094na
F-52
4.11.4 Replacing the fusing driven roller assy /A and /B

• Fusing driven roller assy /A
• Fusing driven roller assy /B
*1 501/421
*2 361
(2) Procedure
[1] [2] [4] [3] 1. Remove the fusing unit.
2. Remove the fusing claw assy from the fusing unit.
3. Remove the fusing web from the fusing unit.
F.4.11.3 Replacing the fusing web
4. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the fusing unit cover /Fr
[2].
5. Remove the 2 screws [3] and then remove the fusing unit cover /Rr
[4].
Note
• When removing the fusing unit cover /Rr, be careful that
the internal gear does not fall down.
[8]
6. Remove the 2 screws [5] and the 2 screws [6].
7. Release the 2 envelope levers [7].
8. Remove the fusing casing [8] without touching the envelope lever.
Note
• When installing the fusing casing [8], be sure to install
first the screw [5] (upper side).
[6] [7] [5] 50gaf2c095na
F-53
[3] [2] [3] 9. Remove the 4 screws [1].

10. Remove the 2 fusing driven roller assy's /A [2] and the 2 fusing
driven roller assy's /B [3].
Note
• The gear [4] is not fixed. Take care when moving it.
[1]
[4]
50gaf2c096na
4.11.5 Removing/reinstalling the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2 (L3)

Note
• Be careful not to touch the lamp sections of L2 and L3 with bare hands. When touched, be sure to clean them with a roller cleaner.
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the fusing unit.
4. Remove the fusing casing.
F.4.11.4 Replacing the fusing driven roller assy /A and /B
5. Remove the fastons [1] and [2], 2 each.
Note
• When removing the faston, be sure to remove it by
holding the connector section. Be absolutely sure not to
pull out by holding the wiring harness section.
[2] 50gaf2c097na
F-54
[8] [1] 6. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the lamp fixing plate /Fr
[2].
7. Pull out the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) [3] and /2 (L3) [4] in the
arrow-marked direction [5] and remove them.
Note
• When installing each of the fusing heater lamps, be sure
to set the projections [6] of each lamp to the notch [7] of
the lamp fixing plate /Fr [2].
• After installing each of the fusing heater lamps, be sure to
check to see if it is not in touch with the inner face of the
fusing roller [8].
• Be sure to install the fusing heater lamp L2 [3] (main) on
the upper side with L3 [4] (sub) on the lower side.

Note
• When installing the fusing heater lamp, be sure to take
[5] [3] [2]
note of the direction of installation.
Lamp Destination
North America Europe/Others
Fr Rr Fr Rr
L2 Red Red Blue Blue
L3 Red Black Blue Black
[7] [6] [4] 50gaf2c098na
4.11.6 Replacing the fusing roller, the fusing pressure roller, the heat insulating sleeve /A, the fusing bearings /Up
and /Lw and the fusing input gear assy
• Fusing roller
• Fusing pressure roller
• Heat insulating sleeve /A
• Fusing bearing /Up
• Fusing bearing /Lw
• Fusing input gear assy
*1 501/421
*2 361
F-55
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the fusing unit.
[7] [8] [6] [5]
[1] [4]
5. Remove the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2 (L3).
F.4.11.5 Removing/reinstalling the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2)
and /2 (L3)
6. Remove the 2 screws [1] and then remove the lamp fixing plate /Rr
[2].
7. Remove the 2 screws [3] and then remove the fusing input gear
assy [4].
Note
• When installing the fusing input gear assy, be sure to set
the D cut section [6] of the shaft [5] to the D cut hole [8] of
the frame [7].
8. Release the 2 envelope levers [9].

Note
• Be sure to release the envelope lever up to the limit.
[2] [3]
[9] 50gaf2c099na
[5] [2] [1] 9. Remove the C-ring [1] and then remove the gear [2].
10. Remove the heat insulating sleeve /A [3] and the fusing bearing /
Up [4].
Note
• When installing the heat insulating sleeve /A and the
fusing bearing /Up, be sure to install them with their
respective collar [5] outside.
• When installing the heat insulating sleeve /A, be sure to
[4] [3] [10] apply Multemp FF-RM to its inside and outside
peripheries.
11. Remove the C-ring [6] and then remove the heat insulating
sleeve /A [7] and the fusing bearing /Up [8].
Note
• When installing the heat insulating sleeve /A and the
fusing bearing /Up, be sure to install them with their
respective collar [9] outside.
• When installing the heat insulating sleeve /A, be sure to
apply Multemp FF-RM to its inside and outside
peripheries.
[12] [11] [7] [8]
12. After sliding once the fusing roller [10] in the arrow-marked
direction [11], remove it in the arrow-marked direction [12].
[9]
[6] 50gaf2c100na
F-56
13. Remove the fusing pressure roller [1].
[1] 50gaf2c101na
14. Remove the 2 fusing bearings /Lw [2] from the fusing pressure
roller [1].
Note
• When installing the fusing bearing /Lw, be sure to install it
with its collar section [3] inside. Coat the cored bar
section with grease.
[2] [3] [3] [2]
[1] 50gaf2c102na
4.11.7 Replacing the fusing sensor assy

CAUTION
• After installing the fusing sensor assy, be sure to check to see if it is in touch with the fusing roller.

• Fusing sensor assy
*1 501/421
*2 361
F-57
(2) Procedure
[1] [3] [2] 1. Remove the fusing unit.
and /2 (L3)
6. Remove the fusing roller and the fusing pressure roller.
F.4.11.6 Replacing the fusing roller, the fusing pressure roller, the
heat insulating sleeve /A, the fusing bearings /Up and /Lw and the
[4] fusing input gear assy
7. Remove the faston [1].
Note
holding its base section. Be absolutely sure not to pull it
out by holding the wiring harness section.

10. Remove the web support assy /2 [4] and pull it out in the arrow-
marked direction [5].
[5] [3]
50gaf2c104na
[2] 11. Remove the screws [1], 1 each, and then remove the fusing
sensor assy [2].
Note
• When installing the fusing sensor assy, be careful not to
deform the sensor section.
• After installing the fusing sensor assy, be sure to check to
see if the wiring harness is not in touch with the fusing
roller.
CAUTION
• After installing the fusing sensor assy, be sure to check to
see if the thermistors /1 (TH1) and /2 (TH2) are in touch
with the fusing roller.
[1] 50gaf2c105na
[1] Note
• The fusing sensor assy is made up of TH1 and TH2. The
sections of TH1 and TH2 have been adjusted when they
were assembled, and be absolutely sure not to loosen the
screw [1].
50gaf2c106na
4.11.8 Replacing the fuse holder assy

CAUTION
• After installing the fuse holder assy, be sure to check to see if it is in touch with the fusing roller.

• Fuse holder assy
F-58

*1 501/421
*2 361
(2) Procedure
[1] [4] [3] 1. Remove the fusing unit.
and /2 (L3)
6. Remove the fusing roller and the fusing pressure roller.
[2] 50gaf2c107na F.4.11.6 Replacing the fusing roller, the fusing pressure roller, the
heat insulating sleeve /A, the fusing bearings /Up and /Lw and the
fusing input gear assy
7. Pull out the web support assy /2.
8. Remove the faston [1].
Note
holding its base section. Be absolutely sure not to pull it
out by holding the wiring harness section.
9. Remove the 2 screws [2] and then remove the fuse holder assy
[3].
Note
• When installing the fuse holder assy, be careful not to
deform the thermostat section.
• After installing the fuse holder assy, be sure to check to
see if the wiring harness is not in touch with the fusing
roller.
CAUTION
• After installing the fuse holder assy, be sure to check to
see if the thermostat (TS) [4] is in touch with the fusing
roller.
F-59
bizhub 501/421/361 PROCEDURE DF-613
5. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE DF-613

5.1 Precautions on maintenance
CAUTION
• Be sure to unplug the power plug from the power outlet.
Note
• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of Maintenance represents the isopropyl alcohol.

5.2.1 Replacing the Pick-up Roller and Feed Roller
• Pick-up Roller
: Every 500,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 200,000 faces)*1
*1 501/421
*2 361
(2) Procedure
1. Open the Open/Close Cover [1].
[1]
16eaf2c001na
2. Remove two screws [2], and remove the cover [3].
[3]
[2]
16eaf2c002na
[5] 3. Remove two C-clips [4], and remove the Pick-up Roller Assy [5].
[4]
16eaf2c003na
[12] 4. Remove the connector [1].

[13] 5. Remove five C-rings [7].
[7] 6. Remove the arm /Fr [8].
7. Remove the belt [9].
[13] [9] 8. Remove the Pick-up Roller Shaft [11] from the Arm /Rr [10].
9. Remove the 2 Spacers [12] from the Pick-up Roller Shaft.
[12]
[11] 10. Remove two Pick-up Rollers [13].
Note
[6]
• Be sure to take note of the direction of the pick-up roller
[7] when installing it.
[8]
[10]
16eaf2c004na
[14] 11. Remove the C-ring [14].

12. Remove two pins [17].
[17]
[15] 13. Remove the gear [15] and the bearing [16].
14. Remove the Feed Roller [18].
[16] Note
• Use care not to lose the pin.
[18] 16eaf2c005na
F-60
5.2.2 Replacing the Separation Roller

• Separation Roller
*1 501/421
*2 361
(2) Procedure
[1]
16eaf2c006na
[2] 2. Hold the [2] sections in the figure, and remove the cover [3].
[3]
[2] 16eaf2c007na
3. Remove the Separation Roller Assy [4].

[4] Note
• Use care not to lose the spring at the bottom side of the
Separation Roller Assy.
16eaf2c008na
4. While opening up the holder [5], remove the Separation Roller

Shaft [6].
Note
• Opening the holder too much can break the holder.
[5] [6]
16eaf2c009na
5. Remove the Separation Roller [7] from the Separation Roller Shaft.
[7]
16eaf2c010na
5.2.3 Cleaning of the Pick-up Roller, Feed Roller and Separation Roller
• Pick-up Roller
• Feed Roller
*1 501/421
*2 361
F-61
(2) Procedure
[1]
16eaf2c011na
2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Pick-up Roller
[2], Feed Roller [3] and Separation Roller [4].
[3]
[4]
[2] 16eaf2c012na
5.2.4 Cleaning of Miscellaneous Rollers

• Miscellaneous Rollers
*1 501/421
*2 361
(2) Procedure
[2] 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the roller [2].
16eaf2c013na
[2]
[1]
16eaf2c017na
3. Lift up the Original Feed Tray [3].

[4]
16eaf2c014na
[4] [3]
16eaf2c018na
F-62
5. Open the DF.
[5] 6. Remove the Platen Guide [5].
16eaf2c015nb
7. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the roller [6].
[6]
[6]
16eaf2c016nb
[5] 8. Remove the Cover /Fr and Cover /Rr.

G.3.3.1 Cover /Fr, Cover /Rr and Original Feed Tray Cover /Lw
9. Disconnect eight connectors [5] on the DF Control Board (DFCB).
[5]
[5] 16eaf2c019na
10. Remove the lever [6].
[6]
16eaf2c020na
[7]
16eaf2c021nb
F-63
[8] 12. Remove seven screws [8], and remove the Paper Feed Unit [9].
[8]
[9]
16eaf2c022na
[10]
[10]
16eaf2c023na
5.2.5 Cleaning of the Scanning Guide

• Scanning Guide
*1 501/421
*2 361
(2) Procedure
1. Open the DF.
2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Scanning
[1] Guide [1].
16eaf2c024na
5.2.6 Cleaning of the Reflective Sensor Section

• Reflective Sensor
*1 501/421
*2 361
(2) Procedure
1. Clean the Original Size Sensor /2 (PS2) [1] using a brush or other similar tools.
[1]
16eaf2c025na
F-64
bizhub 501/421/361 PROCEDURE PC-206
6. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PC-206

CAUTION
Note

6.2.1 Replacing the Separation Roller Assy
• Separation Roller Assy
*1 501/421
*2 361
Note
• Replace the Separation Roller Assy, Feed Roller and Pick-up Roller at the same time.
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the Right Door.
[2] G.4.3.1 Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/Front
Right Cover
2. Remove two screws [1] and remove the Jam Access Cover [2].
[1] 4061f2c001na
3. Remove two screws [3] and remove the Separation Roller

[4] Mounting Plate Assy [4].
4. Remove two C-rings [5] and the shaft [6], and remove the
Separation Roller Fixing Plate Assy [7].
Note
• Be careful not to lose spring at this time.
[3]
4061f2c002na
[7]
[5] [6]
[5]
4061f2c003na
5. Remove the C-ring [8], the Guide [9], and remove the Separation
[9]
[10] Roller Assy [10].
6. Repeat steps 1 to 5 similarly for the Tray 4.
[8]
4061f2c004na
F-65
Note
• When installing the Separation Roller Mounting Plate
Assy, be sure to fix the holder with screws while holding it
down.
4061f2c005na
6.2.2 Replacing the Feed Roller

• Feed Roller
*1 501/421
*2 361
Note
(2) Procedure
[2] [1]
1. Remove the Rear Right Cover. (Remove the Right Lower Cover
for Tray 4.)
G.4.3.1 Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/Front
Right Cover
2. Remove the Tray.
3. Remove the Separation Roller Mounting Plate Assy.
F.6.2.1 Replacing the Separation Roller Assy
4. Disconnect the connector [1] (Tray 3), two connectors [2] (Tray 4)
and remove the harness from two wire saddles.
Note
• Be careful not to confuse the connector of the Tray 3 with
the connectors of the Tray 4.
4061f2c006na
[4] 5. Remove four screws [3] and remove the Paper Feed Unit [4].
[3]
[3] 4061f2c007na
6. Remove two screws [5] and remove the Mounting Frame [6] for the
Separation Roller Mounting Plate Assy.
[5]
[6]
4061f2c008na
7. Remove two screws [7] and remove the Feed Roller Cover [8].
[8]
[7]
4061f2c009na
F-66
8. Remove the C-ring [9] and remove the bearing [10].
[9] [10]
4061f2c010na
9. Shift the Shaft Assy [11] in the orientation as shown on the left,
[11]
and remove the C-ring [12] and the gear [13].
[13]
[12]
4061f2c011na
10. Remove the C-ring [14], the bearing [15], and remove the shaft
Assy [16].
[16]
[15]
[14]
4061f2c012na
11. Remove C-ring [17], E-ring [18] and the bearing [19], and remove
[21] the Pick-up Roller Fixing Plate Assy [20].
[22]
4061f2c014nb
12. Remove the C-ring [21] and remove the Feed Roller [22].
[21] 13. Repeat steps 1 to 12 similarly for the Tray 4.
[22]
4061f2c014nb
6.2.3 Replacing the Pick-up Roller

• Pick-up Roller
*1 501/421
*2 361
Note
F-67
(2) Procedure
[1]
1. Remove the Rear Right Cover. (Remove the Right Lower Cover
for Tray 4.)
(Refer to G.4.3.1 Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/
Front Right Cover)
2. Remove the Tray.
(Refer to F.6.2.1 Replacing the Separation Roller Assy)
4. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the harness from two
wire saddles.
4061f2c015na
[3] 5. Remove four screws [2] and remove the Paper Feed Unit [3].
[2]
[2] 4061f2c016na

Mounting Plate Assy [5] together with frame.
[4]
[5]
4061f2c017na
[7]
[6]
4061f2c018na
[8]
8. Remove two C-rings [8], two bearings [9], and remove the Pick-up
Roller Assy [10].
9. Remove the C-ring [11] and remove the Pick-up Roller [12].
10. Repeat steps 1 to 9 similarly for the tray 4.
[9]
[9]
[10] 4061f2c019na
[11]
[12]
4061f2c020na
F-68
7. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE PC-407

CAUTION
Note

*1 501/421
*2 361
Note
(2) Procedure
[2] 1. Remove the Right Door.
Mounting Plate Assy [2].
[1]
4061f2c201na
3. Remove two C-rings [3] and the shaft [4], and remove the
[5] Separation Roller Fixing Plate Assy [5].
[3] [4] Note
• Be careful not to lose spring at this time.
[3]
4061f2c202na
4. Remove the C-ring [6], the Guide [7], and remove the Separation
[8] Roller Assy [8].
[7]
[6]
4061f2c203na

Note
• When installing the Separation Roller Mounting Plate
Assy, be sure to fix the holder with screws while holding it
down.
4061f2c204na
7.2.2 Replacing the Feed Roller

• Feed Roller
*1 501/421
*2 361
Note
F-69
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the Rear Cover and the Rear Right Cover.
Right Cover
2. Remove the Tray.
F.7.2.1 Replacing the Separation Roller
4. Disconnect the connector [1] from the PC Control Board (PCCB).
4061f2c205na
5. Remove four screws [2] and remove the Paper Feed Unit [3].
[3]
[2]
[2]
4061f2c206na
6. Remove two screws [4] and remove the Mounting Frame [5] for the
Separation Roller Mounting Plate Assy.
[4]
[5]
4061f2c207na
[7]
[6]
4061f2c208na
8. Remove two C-rings [8] and remove the bearing [9].
[8]
[9]
4061f2c209na
F-70
9. Shift the Shaft Assy [10] in the orientation as shown on the left,
and remove the C-ring [11] and the gear [12].
[10] 10. Remove the Shaft Assy [10].
[12]
[11]
4061f2c210na
11. Remove C-ring [13], E-ring [14], and the bearing [15], and remove
[16] [14] the Pick-up Roller Fixing Plate Assy [16].
[13]
[15]
4061f2c211nb
12. Remove the C-ring [17] and remove the Feed Roller [18].
[17]
[18]
4061f2c212nb
7.2.3 Replacing the Pick-up Roller

• Pick-up Roller
*1 501/421
*2 361
Note
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the Rear Cover and the Rear Right Cover.
Right Cover
2. Remove the Tray.
F.7.2.1 Replacing the Separation Roller
4. Disconnect the connector [1] from the PC Control Board (PCCB).
4061f2c213na
F-71
5. Remove four screws [2] and the Paper Feed Unit [3].
[3]
[2]
[2]
4061f2c214na

Mounting Plate Assy [5] together with frame.
[4]
[5]
4061f2c215na
7. Remove two screws [6] and remove the Paper Feed Roller Cover
[7].
[7]
[6]
4061f2c216na
8. Remove two C-rings [8], two bearings [9], and the Pick-up Roller
[8]
[8] Assy [10].
[9]
[9]
[10]
4061f2c217na
9. Remove the C-ring [11] and remove the Pick-up Roller [12].
[12]
4061f2c218na
F-72
bizhub 501/421/361 PROCEDURE LU-203
8. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE LU-203

CAUTION
Note

8.2.1 Replacing the Pick-up Roller and Feed Roller
• Pick-up Roller
• Feed rubber
*1 501/421
*2 361
(2) Procedure
1. Open the upper door [1].
2. Remove the C-clips [2], 1 each, and release the 2 bearings [3].
[1] 3. Remove the paper feed roller unit [4].
[2] [3] [3] [2]
[4] 16aaf2c001na
F-73
Note
• When installing the paper feed roller unit, be sure to insert
[3] the shaft [1] into the ring of the actuator [2].
• When installing the paper feed roller unit, be sure to
[4] install it so that the hook [3] comes above the lift-up shaft
[4].
• When installing the paper feed roller unit, be sure to insert
the shaft [5] securely into the coupling [6].
[2] [6] [1] [5]
16aaf2c002na
[5] [6]
4. Remove the C-clip [1] and then remove the actuator [2].
5. Remove the C-clip [3] and then remove the bearing [4].
6. Release the claws [6] of the bearings [5], two each, and then
remove the two bearings [5].
7. Pull out the shaft [7] in the arrow-marked direction [8] and remove
the feed roller [9].
[8] [2]
[7] [9] [5] [4] [3] [1] 16aaf2c003nb
F-74
8. Remove the feed rubber [2] from the paper feed roller [1].
[3]
Note
• Be sure to install the feed rubber [2] so that the paint mark
[3] comes in the opposite direction of the gear [4].
• When setting the feed rubber, apply alcohol on the inside
of the feed rubber. By doing so, the feed rubber can be set
more easily.
[4] [2] [1] 16aaf2c004na
[4] [5] 9. Remove the screw [1] and then remove the handle [3] from the
roller mounting plate [2].
10. Remove the screw [4] and then remove the bearing holder [5] from
the roller mounting plate [2].
[2] [3] [1] 16aaf2c005na
[3] [1] 11. Remove the bearing [1] and then remove the pick-up roller [3] from
the shaft [2].
[2] 16aaf2c006na
12. Remove the pick-up rubber [2] from the pick-up roller [1].
Note
• When setting the pick-up rubber, apply alcohol on the
inside of the pick-up rubber. By doing so, the pick-up
rubber can be set more easily.
[2] [1]
16aaf2c007na

• Separation rubber
: Every 500,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 200,000 prints) *1
F-75
: Every 450,000 prints (Actual replacement cycle: Every 200,000 prints) *2

*1 501/421
*2 361
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out LU from the main body.
[1]
3. Lift up the paper feed roller unit [2].
4. Remove the 2 screws [3] and then remove the guide plate [4].
[2]
[4] [3] 16aaf2c008na
[1] 5. Remove the 2 screws [1] and then remove the left cover [2].
[2] 16aaf2c009na

[7]
Note
• When installing the separation roller assy, be sure to set
the upper section of the claw [2] at the center of the
marking-off [3] of the plate. In this way, the separation
roller assy can be horizontally positioned.
16eaf2c010na
[1] 7. Release the lock lever [1] and remove the separation roller assy
[2].
[2] 16aaf2c011na
F-76
8. Pull out the shaft [2] while pressing the lever [1] and remove the
[3] [2] separation roller [3].
[1] 16aaf2c012na
[4] [2] [1]

9. Remove the separation rubber [2] from the separation roller [1].
Note
• Be sure to install the separation rubber [2] so that the
paint mark [3] comes in the opposite direction of the
projection [4].
• When setting the separation rubber, apply alcohol on the
inside of the separation rubber. By doing so, the
separation rubber can be set more easily.
[3]
16aaf2c013na
F-77
bizhub 501/421/361 PROCEDURE FS-522...
9. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE FS-522/PU-501/OT-602

Note
9.2 Conveyance section, staple section, and Staple section

9.2.1 Cleaning of the Roller
• Various Rollers
: Every 250,000 prints *1
• Paper Holding Paddle
*1 501/421
*2 361
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the Lift Tray.
[1]
G.7.3.9 Lift Tray
2. Remove the Conveyance Unit.
G.7.3.10 Conveyance Unit
3. Remove the Conveyance Top Cover.
G.7.3.2 Conveyance Upper Cover
4349f2c001na
5. Lower Processing Guide FN1 [2].

[3]
[2]
4349f2c002na
7. Remove Punch Scraps Box FN3.1 [4]. (only when PU is installed)
[4]
4349f2c003na
8. Lower Processing Guide FN-3 [5].

[5]
4349f2c004na
10. Lower Processing Guide FN-4 [7].

[8]
[7]
4349f2c005na
F-78
bizhub 501/421/361 PROCEDURE FS-522...
12. While turning Processing Knob FN-5 [9], wipe the roller [10] using
[10] a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.
[9]
4349f2c006na
[11]
[11]
4349f2c007na
F-79
bizhub 501/421/361 PROCEDURE SD-507
10. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE SD-507

Note
10.2 Conveyance section

• Various Rollers
*1 501/421
*2 361
(2) Procedure
1. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Roller [1].
[1]
[1]
[1]
4511f2c001na
2. Remove the Folding Unit.

[2] G.9.3.5 Folding Unit
3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Roller [2].
[2]
4511f2c002na
F-80
bizhub 501/421/361 PROCEDURE MT-502
11. PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE MT-502

Note
11.2 Conveyance section

• Various Rollers
*1 501/421
*2 361
(2) Procedure
[1]
1. Open the Right Door.
2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the rollers [1].
[1]
[1]
[1]
[1]
4510f2c001na
F-81
G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 1. ITEMS NOT ALLOWED TO BE
bizhub 501/421/361 DISASSEMBLED
G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY
1. ITEMS NOT ALLOWED TO BE DISASSEMBLED
1.1 Scanner section
1.1.1 CCD unit
(1) Parts not allowed to be removed
• 7 screws that are used to assemble the CCD unit.
• 4 attaching screws of the lens reference plate assy
[3] [1]
[5]
[2]
[2]
[4] [3] 50gaf2c136na
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed [2] Screws not allowed to be removed
[3] CCD unit attaching screws (Can be removed when [4] CCD unit
replacing the CCD unit.)
[5] Lens reference plate assy -
(2) Reason for prohibition

Since the accuracy of the CCD unit is guaranteed as a unit, no accuracy is guaranteed if it is disassembled. Therefore, screws that lead to the
disassembly of the CCD unit must not be removed.
The lens reference plate assy becomes a reference for the installation of the CCD unit and removing it may cause the light axis to shift.
Therefore, the attaching screws of the lens reference assy must not be removed.
1.1.2 Mirror unit/exposure unit

(1) Positions not allowed to be adjusted
• Positions at which the mirror unit and the exposure unit are installed
[2] [1] 50gaf2c137na
[1] Mirror unit [2] Exposure unit

The distance between the mirror unit and the exposure unit has an effect on the magnification in the sub scan direction of the original to be
read. Accordingly, the positions at which the mirror unit and the exposure unit are installed must not be arbitrarily adjusted. However, when
G-1
removing the exposure unit and the scanner wire, the adjustments can be made only if they are reinstalled by using the optics unit positioning
jig.
1.2 Write section

1.2.1 Write section cover
• 4 attaching screws of the write section cover
[1]
[2]
50gaf2c138na
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed [2] Write section cover

The inside of the write section becomes a laser beam path. Opening the cover allows the entry of dust and dirt into the inside and they may
block the laser beam path. Therefore, the attaching screws of the write section cover must not be removed.
1.2.2 Write attaching plate

• 5 attaching screws of the write mounting board
[2]
[1]
[1] [1]
50gaf2c139na
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed [2] Write attaching plate

The write attaching plate is a reference for the attaching angle of the write section against the drum. Removing it may impair the parallelism of
the drum with the write section, thus resulting in the image being deformed. Therefore, the attaching screws of the write attaching plate must
not be normally removed.
G-2
1.3 Developing unit

• 2 attaching screws of the developer restriction blade
• 1 fixing screw of the magnet adjustment plate
• Ds adjustment screws
Developing unit at 2 places (inside the cover)
[6]
[4] [5]
[3]
[2] [1] 50gaf2c140na
[1] Developer restriction blade [2] Developing roller

[3] Screws not allowed to be removed [4] Magnet adjustment plate
[5] Screws not allowed to be removed [6] Screws not allowed to be removed
(Ds adjustment screws)

Each of the developer restriction blade and the magnet adjustment plate is used to determine the height of developer on the developing roller.
And the Ds adjustment screws are also used to determine the distance between the drum and the developing roller. These parts are adjusted
to an appropriate value in advance. Therefore do not remove these attaching screws and fixing screws.
1.4 Drum unit

• Ds adjustment screws, 2 pcs.
[1]
50gaf2c188na
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed (Ds adjustment -

screws)

The Ds adjustment screws are used to determine the distance between the drum and the developing roller and they are adjusted to an
appropriate value in advance. Therefore, do not remove these fixing screws.
1.5 Registration section

• 2 screws of registration unit fixing plate.
G-3
[2]
[1]
a0r5f2c003ca
[1] Screws not allowed to be removed [2] Registration unit fixing plate

The registration unit fixing plate is arranged to fix the registration unit firmly and to adjust the appropriate distance between the registration
clutch gear and the destination gear. The distortion of the registration unit may result in the irregularity of pitches. They are adjusted to an
appropriate value in advance. Therefore, do not remove these fixing screws.
G-4
bizhub 501/421/361 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 2. bizhub 501/421/361
2. bizhub 501/421/361
2.1 List of parts to be disassembled and reassembled
Note
• This list shows the explanation of the disassembly and reassembly of the parts which are considered necessary to replace (other
than periodically replaced parts). However, these parts except for the covers are not required to be disassembled while in normal
service operations.
• For the method of replacing the periodically replaced parts, see “F.4.1 External section” to “F.4.14 Fusing section”.
No. Section Part name
1 Cover Rear cover /1
2 Rear cover /2
3 Rear cover /3
4 Rear cover /4
5 Right cover /Up
6 Right cover /Lw
7 Left cover
8 Front door
9 Upper cover /Rt
10 Original glass
11 Upper cover /Fr
12 Upper cover /Lt
13 Upper cover /Rr
14 Front cover
15 Operation panel Operation panel
16 Scanner section CCD unit
17 Exposure lamp
18 Exposure unit
19 Scanner wire
20 Toner supply section Toner supply unit
21 Paper feed section Tray 1
22 Tray 2
2.2 Disassembling/assembling procedure

2.2.1 Removing/reinstalling the rear cover /1
CAUTION
• When disassembling or assembling the parts, be sure the power cord has been unplugged from the power outlet.
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the rear cover /4.
2. Remove the 6 screws [1] and then remove the rear cover /1 [2].
[2] [1] 50gaf2c049na
G-5

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the rear cover /4.
(See G.2.2.4 Removing/reinstalling the rear cover /4)
4. Remove the screws [1], 2 each, and then remove the 2 handles
[2].
[2]
[2]
[2] [1] 50gaf2c050na
[1] 50gaf2c051na

(1) Procedure
NOTE
• The screw [1] is attached with the washer [2]. Be careful
that it does not get lost.
[1][2]
[4] [3] 50gaf2c052na

(1) Procedure
1. Remove 2 screws [1] and turn to the arrow-marked direction [2], and then remove the rear cover /4 [3].
NOTE
• When installing the rear cover /4, be sure first to fit the installation hole [4] to the projection [5].
G-6
[5] [4]
[3] [2] [1]

a0r5f2c004ca
2.2.5 Removing/reinstalling the right cover /Up

(1) Procedure
1. Open the bypass tray.
(See G.2.2.6 Removing/reinstalling the right cover /Lw)
2. Pull the ADU release lever [1] to open ADU [2].
[2]
[1] 50gaf2c053nb
[1] [2] 3. Remove the 2 screws [1] and then remove the right cover /Up [2].
50gaf2c054na
G-7
2.2.6 Removing/reinstalling the right cover /Lw

(1) Procedure
1. Open the bypass tray [1].
2. Remove the 2 screws [2] and then remove the right cover /Lw [3].
[1]
[3]
[2] 50gaf2c055na
2.2.7 Removing/reinstalling the left cover

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the 6 screws [1] and then remove the left cover [2].
[2]
[1] 50gaf2c056nb
G-8
2.2.8 Removing/reinstalling the front door

(1) Procedure
2. Remove the front cover.
(See G.2.2.12 Removing/reinstalling the front cover)
3. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the support plate [3] and
the front door at the same time.
[5]
NOTE
• When installing the front door, be sure first to fit the
installation hole [4] to the shaft [5].
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
50gaf2c057na
2.2.9 Removing/reinstalling the original glass

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the 6 screws [1] and then remove the upper cover /Rt [2].
[2]
a0r5f2c005ca
2. Remove the 2 screws [1] and then remove the glass attaching
plate /Up [2].
[1] [2]
a0r5f2c006ca
G-9
[6] [1] [5] 3. Loosen the 2 screws [1] and slide the glass attaching plate /Lw [2].
4. Loosen the screw [3] and slide the glass holding plate [4].
5. Remove the original glass [5].
Note
• When removing the original glass, be careful not to stain
the position to which the shading correction plate [6] is
attached.
[2]
[3]
[4]
a0r5f2c007ca
[1] [3] 6. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
Note
• When installing the original glass [1], be sure to fix first
the glass attaching plate /Lw [2] while pressing it against
the original glass and then fix the glass holding plate [3]
while also pressing it against the original glass.
[2] a0r5f2c008ca
2.2.10 Removing/reinstalling the upper covers /Fr and /Lt

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the original glass.
(See G.2.2.9 Removing/reinstalling the original glass)
2. Loosen the 2 screws [1].
3. Remove the 2 screws [2]
4. Push up the lock levers [3] at 2 places from its lower position and release it from the holes [4], and then remove the upper cover /Fr [5].
5. Remove the connector [6] and then remove the upper cover /Fr [5].
NOTE
[2] [5] [1]
• When reinstalling the upper cover /Fr [5], be sure to insert
the lock levers [3] at 2 places into the holes [4] securely.
[6]
[5] [4]
[3]
a0r5f2c009ca
G-10

[1] [2]
7. Remove the 4 screws [2] and then remove the upper cover /Lt [3].
[3]
a0r5f2c010ca
2.2.11 Removing/reinstalling the upper cover /Rr

(1) Procedure
[2] 1. Remove the original glass.
2. Remove the upper covers /Fr and /Lt.
(See G.2.2.10 Removing/reinstalling the upper covers /Fr and /Lt)
3. Remove DF from the main body.
4. Remove the 4 screws [1] and then remove the upper cover /Rr [2].
[1] 50gaf2c063na
2.2.12 Removing/reinstalling the front cover

(1) Procedure
3. Remove the screw [3]
4. Push up the lock levers [4] at 2 places from the lower position of the front cover [5] and release it from the 2 holes [6].
5. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse, and then remove the front cover [5].
NOTE
[5] [1]
• When reinstalling the front cover [5], be sure to insert the
lock levers [4] at 2 places into the 2 holes [6] securely.
[2]
[6] [4] [3]

a0r5f2c011ca
G-11
2.2.13 Removing/reinstalling the operation panel

(1) Procedure
[1] [2] 1. Remove the front cover.
(See G.2.2.12 Removing/reinstalling the front cover)
2. Remove the front door.
(See G.2.2.8 Removing/reinstalling the front door)
3. Insert the edge of flat blade screwdriver into the hole [1], and
remove the wiring harness cover [2].
4. Remove the 2 screws [3] and then remove the front cover /Up1 [4].
[3]
[4] a0r5f2c012ca
[1] [2] 5. Remove the 2 screws [1] and then remove the front cover /Up2 [2].
6. Remove the 3 screws [3] and then remove the operation panel
cover /Lw [4].
[4] [3]
a0r5f2c013ca
G-12
[3] [4] 7. Loosen the 2 screws [1] and then remove the connector [2].
8. Remove the 6 screws [3] and then remove the operation panel [4].
[3] [1] [2]

a0r5f2c014ca

[3] [2] [1] NOTE
• When installing the operation panel [1], be sure to insert
the projection [2] into the hole [3].
a0r5f2c015ca
2.2.14 Removing/reinstalling the CCD unit

(1) Procedure
[2] [1] 1. Remove the original glass.
2. Remove the 2 screws [1] and the remove the lens light blocking
cover assy [2].
4. Remove the 8 screws [4] and then remove the lens light blocking
cover [5].
5. Remove the 3 screws [6] and then remove the ribbon cable cover
[7].
NOTE
• Be careful not to damage the scanner wire.
[4] [3] [5] [4] [6]
[4] [7] 50gaf2c066nb
G-13
6. Remove the ribbon cable [2] from the CCD board (CCDB) [1].
[1] [2] 50gaf2c065na
Note
• When removing the ribbon cable [1], be sure to bring
down the lock lever [3] of the connector [2] in the arrow-
marked direction to release the lock and pull out the
ribbon cable.
[2] [1] [3] 50gaf2c067na
• When installing the ribbon cable [1], be sure to check to

see if the lock lever [2] is released. And insert deep it into
connector [3] securely while taking note that the
conductor side of the ribbon cable comes to the opposite
side of the lock lever.
[3] [2] [1] 50gaf2c068na
• After that, bring the lock lever [1] back to its original
position and lock the ribbon cable [2].
[2] [1] 50gaf2c069na
7. Remove the 4 screws [1] and then remove the CCD unit [2].
NOTE
• After installing the CCD unit, be sure to conduct the image
adjustment in the service mode. (See I.4.3.6 Image
Position: Leading Edge (Scan Area) to I.4.3.11 Non-Image
Area Erase Check)
[1] [2] 50gaf2c070na
2.2.15 Replacing the exposure lamp

NOTE
• Be careful not to touch the lamp section of the exposure lamp (L1) with bare hands.
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the original glass. At this time, remove also the glass attaching plate /Lw.
G-14

3. Remove the harness clamp [2].
4. Remove the 2 screws [3] and slide the exposure lamp (L1) [4] for removal.
[3] [2] [1]
[4]
[3]
50gaf2c073na
2.2.16 Removing/reinstalling the exposure unit

NOTE
• When installing the exposure unit, be sure to use the optics unit positioning jig.
• When installing the exposure unit, be sure to conduct the image adjustment in the service mode. (See I.4.3.6 Image Position:
Leading Edge (Scan Area) to I.4.3.11 Non-Image Area Erase Check)
G-15
(1) Procedure for removal

[6] [4] 1. Remove the original glass. At this time, remove also the glass
attaching plate /Lw.
3. Remove the upper cover /Rr.
(See G.2.2.11 Removing/reinstalling the upper cover /Rr)
4. Move the exposure unit [1] to the notch [2] of the frame.
5. Remove the screws [3] and [4] and then remove the exposure unit
from the exposure unit mounting plates /Fr [5] and /Rr [6].
6. Slide the exposure unit [1] for removal.
[1] [2]
[3]
[5]
a0r5f2c016ca
[1] [2] 7. Reverse the exposure unit [1] and remove the connector [2].
8. Remove the screw [3] and remove the exposure unit.
[3]
a0r5f2c017ca
G-16
(2) Procedure for reinstallation

1. Move the V-mirror unit [1] to the vicinity of the V-mirror positioning
hole [2].
[8]
2. Insert the optics unit positioning jig [3] into the V-mirror positioning
hole and fix the V-mirror unit.
NOTE
• Be sure to insert the optics unit positioning jig from the
front side and pass it through the V-mirror unit.
[10]
3. Insert the optics unit positioning jig [5] into the exposure unit
positioning hole [4].
[6]
4. Hit the exposure unit [6] against the optics unit positioning jig [5].
5. Install the exposure unit to the exposure unit mounting plates /Fr
[7] and /Rr [8] with the screws [9] and [10].
6. Pull off the 2 optics unit positioning jigs.
7. For the parts to be installed in the succeeding steps, be sure install
them following the removal steps in reverse.
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
[9]
[7]
a0r5f2c018ca
2.2.17 Stretching the scanner wire

NOTE
• Be sure to wind the scanner wire around the pulley closely with no scanner wire overlapping each other.
• When restretching or replacing the scanner wire, be sure to use the optics unit positioning jig.
• When restretching or replacing the scanner wire, be sure to conduct the image adjustment in the service mode. (See I.4.3.6 Image
Position: Leading Edge (Scan Area) to I.4.3.11 Non-Image Area Erase Check)
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the original glass. At this time, remove also the glass
[4] [3] [5] [4] attaching plate /Lw.
2. Remove the upper covers /Fr and /Lt. (See G.2.2.10 Removing/
reinstalling the upper covers /Fr and /Lt)
3. Remove the upper cover /Rr. (See G.2.2.11 Removing/reinstalling
the upper cover /Rr)
4. Remove six screws [1] and remove the wiring harness cover [2].
5. Remove the wiring harness [3] from the wiring harness clamp.
6. Remove five screws [4] and remove the right side plate of the
[6] [1] [2]
scanner [5].
a0r5f2c019ca NOTE
• When removing the right side plate of the scanner [5],
change the direction of the operation panel and loosen the
wiring harness [6].
[1] 7. Move the V-mirror unit [1] to the vicinity of the V-mirror positioning
hole [2].
8. Insert the optics unit positioning jig [3] into the V-mirror positioning
hole and fix the V-mirror unit.
NOTE
• Be sure to insert the optics unit positioning jig [3] from the
operation panel side and pass it through the V-mirror unit.
[2] [3] a0r5f2c020ca
G-17
9. Loosen the 2 hexagon socket screws [3] of the drive pulley on the
[8] [7] [6] [1]
side so that the drive pulley [1] can rotate freely against the pulley
shaft [2].
10. Drop the metal ball [5] provided at the intermediate section of the
scanner wire [4] into the drive pulley installation hole and, with this
[3] as a starting point, wind the wire 6 turns [6] outwards and 5 turns
[7] inwards.
[4] 11. After completion of the winding of the scanner wire, be sure to fix it
[11]
with the tape [12] so that it does not come off.
[5] [9] NOTE
• The scanner wires are color-coded. Be sure to use the one
[2] painted black on the front side with the one with no paint
on the rear side.
[12] • For each scanner wire that is wound around the pulley, be
sure to use on the outside the one at the end of which the
metal ball [8] is provided and on the inside the one at the
end of which the screw thread [9] is provided.
[12]
• For each scanner wire, be sure to pull out the one that is
wound on the outside in the paper feed direction [10] from
the upper side of the drive pulley and the one wound on
[1] [6] [7] [8] the inside in the paper exit direction [11] from the upper
[10] side of the drive pulley.
[3]
[4]
[9] [5]
50gaf2c077na
12. Pass the scanner wire [2] provided with the metal ball [1] through
[1] the pulley [4] on the paper exit side after passing through under
[8]
[3] [4] the V-mirror unit [3], and pass further through the pulley [5] inside
[6] [2] the V-mirror unit. And then hook it to the notch [6] of the frame.
13. Pass the scanner wire provided with the screw thread through the
pulley [7] on the paper feed side. And then pass it from above
through the pulley [8] on the outside of the V-mirror unit and further
[5] through under the V-mirror unit and, with the nut [9] and the
[2]
washer [10], fix it at the tension of 1.3 kg to 1.7 kg.
[7]
[4]
[5]
[10] [9]
[8] 50gaf2c078na
14. Install the exposure unit.

(See P.152)
Note
• When fixing the screw thread side of the scanner wire, be
sure fix it with a tension of 1.3 to 1.7 kg applied by a
spring balance in the arrow-marked direction [1].
• When fixing the scanner wire, be sure to check to see if
the V-mirror unit has been fixed with the optics unit
positioning jig.
[1] • Be sure to tighten up the set screw of the drive pulley that
50gaf2c079na has been loosened.
• Be sure to peel off the tape that has been used for fixing.
Note
• Be sure to slide the exposure unit and check to see if it
operates smoothly.
2.2.18 Removing/reinstalling the toner supply unit

Note
• Be sure to remove the toner bottle in advance.
G-18
(1) Procedure
1. Remove the original glass.
[1]
3. Remove the upper cover /Rr.
(See G.2.2.11 Removing/reinstalling the upper cover /Rr)
(See G.2.2.5 Removing/reinstalling the right cover /Up)
7. Remove the 9 screws [1] and then remove the system unit cover
[2].
[1] [2]
a0r5f2c021ca
[3] [2] 8. Remove the connector [1].

9. Remove 3 screws [2] and remove the wiring harness cover [3].
Note
• Be sure to leave the removed wiring harness cover [3] as
installed to the cable [4].
[1]
a0r5f2c022ca
G-19
[5] [1] [2] [5] 10. Remove the 2 screws [1] and then remove the ribbon cable cover
[2].
11. Remove the ribbon cable [3].
13. Remove the 10 screws [5] and then remove the overall control
board mounting box [6].
[3] [4] [4]
[5] [6] [4]
[5]
a0r5f2c023ca

15. Remove the 3 screws [2] and then remove the ozone filter
mounting assy [3].
[2] [3]
[1]
50gaf2c082na
G-20

18. Remove the board support [3] and the remove the drum motor
(M1) [4].
[2]
[3]
[1]
[4] 50gaf2c083na
[2] [1] 19. Remove the 4 connectors [1].

20. Remove the 5 screws [2] and then remove the toner supply unit
[3].
[3] [2]
[2]
50gaf2c084na
2.2.19 Removing/reinstalling the trays 1 and 2

NOTE
• The trays 1 and 2 are of the same form and of the same mechanism. The procedure given here shows mainly the operations
employed for the tray 1.
• When there remains paper in the tray, be sure to remove it thoroughly before starting operations.
G-21
(1) Procedure
2. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the stopper [3].
Note
[6]
• When installing the stopper, be sure to set the positioning
hole [4] to the projection [5].
3. While holding down the stopper [6], pull out the tray 1 for removal.
NOTE
• When installing the tray 1, be sure to check to see if the
tray can be pulled out and pushed in smoothly.
• When installing the tray 1, be sure to check to see if the
tray is not thoroughly pulled out.
[1]
[4] [5]
[3]
[2]
50gaf2c141na
2.3 Option counter

2.3.1 Configuration of the key counter
As shown below, the key counter is configured as a product so that it can be supplied according to the application. In principle, the key counter
can be installed by obtaining the key counter kit 4.
[1] Cover [2] Mounting [3] Key [4] Counter [5] Screws for [6] Screws for [7] Screws for
plate counter socket the cover the counter the mounting
socket plate
Key counter kit 4* ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
Key counter mounting kit* ● ● ● ●
Key counter ●
* In the kit, parts (such as a mounting plate, mylar, wire saddle and screws) that are not used for 501/421/361 are included.
[1] [2] [3]
[4] [5] [6] [7]

50gaf2c183na
G-22
2.3.2 Installation procedure of the key counter

1. Remove the upper cover /Rt.
2. Remove the split cover [1] of the upper cover /Rt.
3. Put the harness [2] for the key counter through the upper cover /Rt.
4. Install the upper cover /Rt.
[1]
[2]
50gaf2c184na
5. Install the mounting plate [4] with the 3 screws [3].

[4]
[3]
50gaf2c185nb
6. Hook up the connector of the key counter socket.

7. Install the counter socket [6] with the 2 screws [5].
[5] [6]
50gaf2c186nb
8. Install the cover [8] with the 2 screws [7].
[8]
[7]
50gaf2c187nb
G-23
bizhub 501/421/361 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 3. DF-613
3. DF-613
3.1 Disassembly/Adjustment prohibited items
(1) Screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied
• Blue paint or green paint is applied to some screws to prevent them from coming loose.
• As a general rule, screws to which blue paint or green paint is applied should not be removed or loosened.
(2) Red-painted screws

• Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. It should also be noted that, when two or more screws are used for a
single part, only one representative screw may be marked with the red paint.
(3) Variable Resistors on Board

Note
• Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in ADJUSTMENT/SETTING.
(4) Removal of Boards

CAUTION
• When removing a circuit board or other electrical component, refer to "SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS" and follow
the corresponding removal procedures.
• The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or
circuit board.
• When it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board, be sure to ground your body.
3.2 Disassembling and assembling list

1 Cover Cover /Fr
2 Cover /Rr
3 Original Feed Tray Cover /Lw
4 Board and etc. DF Control Board (DFCB)
5 Original Size VR (VR1)
6 Others Complete Stamp Unit 2
7 Replace Stamp 2
8 DF DF main body
3.3 Disassembling and assembling procedure

3.3.1 Cover /Fr, Cover /Rr and Original Feed Tray Cover /Lw
[3]
[9]
[4]
[5] [7]
[2]
[6]
[8]
[1]
16eaf2c026na
1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the Cover /Fr [2].
2. Remove the 2 Screws [3] and raise the Original Feed Tray. Open DF to release the Lock Claws (at 2 places) and then remove the Cover /Rr
[4].
3. Remove the screw [5] and the washer [6], and remove the stopper [7].
4. Lift up the Original Feed Tray.
5. Remove four screws [8], and remove the Original Feed Tray Cover /Lw [9].
G-24
3.3.2 DF Control Board (DFCB)

[1] 1. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch (SW1).
2. Remove the Cover /Rr.
(See G.3.3.1 Cover /Fr, Cover /Rr and Original Feed Tray Cover /
Lw)
[1] 3. Disconnect all the connectors on the DF Control Board (DFCB).
4. Remove three screws [1], and then remove the DFCB [2].
[2]
16eaf2c027na
Note
• When DFCB is replaced, be sure to conduct the back-up data initialization, the original width detection adjustment and the rewrite
of the firmware.
3.3.3 Original Size VR (VR1)

(1) Removal Procedure
[1]
1. Turn OFF the Main Power Switch (SW1).
[2] 2. Remove the Original Feed Tray Cover
/Lw.
(See G.3.3.1 Cover /Fr, Cover /Rr and Original Feed Tray Cover /
[3] Lw)
[2] 3. Disconnect the connector [1].
4. Remove two screws [2] and the mounting plate [3].
16eaf2c028na
5. Remove the gear [4].

[4]
16eaf2c029na
[5] 6. Remove the nut [5] and the washer [6], and remove the Original
Size VR (VR1) [7].
[6]
[7] 16eaf2c030na
(2) Reinstallation Procedure

[1] 1. Close the Side Edge Stop [1] of the Original Feed Tray.
Note
• Be sure to perform document width detection adjustment
after replacing the Original Size VR (VR1).
(See "4.8 ADF" in I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING)
16eaf2c031nb
2. Use the nut [2] and the washer [3] to install the VR1 [4].
[2]
Note
[3]
• Align the protrusion of the VR1 and the cutout of the
mounting plate.
[4]
16eaf2c032na
3. Turn the protrusion of the VR1 [5] counterclockwise until it stops.
[5]
16eaf2c033na
G-25
4. Reinstall the gear [6].

[6]
Note
• Note the mounting position of the gear and the VR1.
16eaf2c034na
[8] 5. Connect the connector [7].

[7]
6. Use two screws [8] to install the VR1 [9].
Note
[10] [11] • Install the gear and rack gear by aligning the arrows [10]
and [11].
[8]
7. Install the Original Feed Tray Cover /Lw and turn ON the Main
Power Switch (SW1).
[9] 16eaf2c035na Note
• When VR1 is replaced, be sure to conduct the back-up
data initialization and the original width detection
adjustment.
3.3.4 Complete Stamp Unit 2

2. Open the Processing Guide [2].
[2]
[1]
16eaf2c036na
3. Remove the screw [3] and the cover [4].

[3]
[4]
16eaf2c037na
[5] 4. Remove the screw [5] and disconnect the connector [6], and
remove the Complete Stamp Unit 2 [7].
[6]
[7]
16eaf2c038na
3.3.5 Replacing the Replace Stamp 2

2. Open the Processing Guide [2].
[2]
[1]
16eaf2c039na
3. Remove the stamp.

[4] 4. Reinstall the new Replace Stamp 2 [3].
[3] Note
• Align the protrusion [4] of the stamp to the crevice [5] of
the holder.
[5]
5. Close the Processing Guide.
16eaf2c040na
G-26
6. Close the Open/Close Cover.
3.3.6 DF
1. Disconnect the connector [1].
[1]
a0ref2c001ca
[2] 2. Open the DF.

3. Remove two screws [2].
a0ref2c002ca
4. Slide allover the DF, and release the two holes [3] from two stepped
[3] screws [4], and then remove the DF.
[4]
a0ref2c003ca
G-27
bizhub 501/421/361 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 4. PC-206
4. PC-206


Note

CAUTION
circuit board.
4.2 Disassembling, assembling and cleaning list

4.2.1 Disassembling and assembling list
No Section Part name
1 Right Door
2 Rear Right Cover
3 Covers Lower Right Cover
4 Front Right Cover
5 Rear Cover
4.2.2 Cleaning list

1 Separation Roller
2 Feed Roller
Paper feed section
3 Pick-up Roller
4 Vertical Conveyance Roller

4.3.1 Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/Front Right Cover
[1] 1. Open the Right Door [1].
[3] 2. Remove the Right Door [1].
[2]
3. Remove two screws [2] and remove the Rear Right Cover [3].
4. Remove two screws [4] and remove the Lower Right Cover [5].
5. Remove two screws [6] and remove the Front Right Cover [7].
[4]
[5]
[7] [6] 4061f2c021na
G-28
4.3.2 Rear Cover

[1] 1. Remove four screws [1] and remove the Rear Cover [2].
[2]
[1] 4061f2c022na
4.4 Cleaning procedure

Note
• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol.
4.4.1 Separation Roller

(1) Periodically cleaning cycle
*1501/421
*2361
(2) Procedure
[2] (See G.4.3.1 Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/
Front Right Cover)
2. Remove two screws [1] and remove the Jam Access Cover [2].
[1] 4061f2c023na
3. Remove two screws [3] and remove the Paper Separation Roller
[4] Mounting Plate Assy [4].
[3]
4061f2c024na
4. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Separation

[5] Roller [5].
4061f2c025na
4.4.2 Feed Roller

• Feed Roller
*1501/421
*2361
G-29
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the Tray 3.
[1] 2. Remove the Separation Roller Mounting Plate Assy.
(See G.4.4.1 Separation Roller)
3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Feed Roller [1]
clean of dirt.
4061f2c026na
4.4.3 Pick-up Roller

• Pick-up Roller
*1501/421
*2361
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the Tray 3.
3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Pick-up Roller [1].
4.4.4 Vertical Conveyance Roller

• Vertical Conveyance Roller
*1501/421
*2361
(2) Procedure
2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Vertical
Conveyance Roller [1].
[1]
4061f2c028na
G-30
5. PC-407


Note

CAUTION
circuit board.
5.2 Disassembling, assembling and cleaning list

5.2.1 Disassembling and assembling list
1 Cover Right Door
2 Rear Right Cover
3 Lower Right Cover
4 Front Right Cover
5 Rear Cover
6 Tray section Tray
7 Wire
5.2.2 Cleaning list

1 Paper feed section Separation Roller
2 Feed Roller
3 Pick-up Roller
4 Vertical Conveyance Roller

5.3.1 Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/Front Right Cover
[1] 1. Open the Right Door [1].
[3]
[2] 2. Remove the Right Door [1].
3. Remove two screws [2] and remove the Rear Right Cover [3].
4. Remove two screws [4] and remove the Lower Right Cover [5].
5. Remove two screws [6] and remove the Front Right Cover [7].
[4]
[5]
[7] [6] 4061f2c219na
G-31
5.3.2 Rear Cover

1. Remove four screws [1] and remove the Rear Cover [2].
[2]
[1] 4061f2c220na
5.3.3 Tray
1. Press the Tray Release Key [1] and slide out the Tray [2].
[3] 2. Remove the paper.
3. Remove four screws [3] and slide out the Tray [2].
[2]
[3] [1] 4061f2c221na
4. Remove two screws [4], the connector [5], and remove the Relay
[4]
Board (RLB) [6].
5. Remove the Tray.
Note
• When removing the RLB, take care not to drop the Tray
from the guide rail.
[5]
[6]
4061f2c222na

CAUTION
• To prevent injuries, press the guide rail [7] inside the
machine.
[7]
4061f2c223na
5.3.4 Wire
1. Remove the Tray.
[3] [1]
(See G.5.3.3 Tray)
2. Remove four screws [1] and remove the Front Cover Assy [2].
3. Unplug the connector [3].
[1]
[2]
4061f2c224na
[4] 4. Remove two screws [4] and the Inner Cover Assy [5].
Note
• Do not peel off pulley protective mylar sheet.
[5]
[4]
4061f2c225na
G-32
5. Remove two screws [6] and remove the Driver Cover [7].
[7]
[6]
4061f2c226na
6. Remove three screws [8] and remove the Driver Mounting Plate
[9] Assy [9].
[8]
4061f2c227na
NOTE
• When assembling, be sure to engage rib of gear 1 [10] with
concave section of gear 2 [11].
[10]
[11]
4061f2c228na
[13] 7. Remove three screws [12] and remove the Reinforcement Plate
Assy [13].
[12]
[12]
4061f2c229na
8. Remove two C-clips [14].

[15] 9. Remove four Pulley Covers [15].
[16] 10. Unhook four pulleys [16].
[15]
[15]
[16]
[14]
[15]
[14]
4061f2c230na
[18]
11. Remove the Ground Plate [17].
12. Remove four Cable Holders [18] and remove the Main Tray [19].
[18] Note
[19] • Take care not to bend the wires.
[18]
[18]
[17]
4061f2c231na
[21] 13. Remove four screws [20] and remove the Side Guide Assy /Rr [21].
[20]
[20]
4061f2c232na
G-33
[23] [22] 14. Remove four screws [22] and remove the Side Guide Assy /Fr [23].
[22]
4061f2c233na
[24] [27]
15. Remove three C-rings [24], the bearing [25], and two gears [26].
16. Remove the Wire Pulley Assy [27].
[25]
[26]
[24]
4061f2c234na
17. Remove two C-rings [28] and the Wire Pulley [29].
[28] [29]
Note
• Take care not to lose fixing pins.
• When reinstalling the Wire Pulley, check that the direction
of the wire coming from both wire pulleys are the same.
• Install so that cut parts [30] at both ends of shaft face up.
[29]
[30]
4061f2c235na
5.4 Cleaning procedure

NOTE
• The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the isopropyl alcohol.
5.4.1 Separation Roller

(1) Periodic cleaning cycle
*1501/421
*2361
(2) Procedure
[2] (See G.5.3.1 Right Door/Rear Right Cover/Lower Right Cover/
Front Right Cover)
2. Remove two screws [1] and remove the Paper Separation Roller
Mounting Plate Assy [2].
[1]
4061f2c236na
3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Separation

[3] Roller [3].
4061f2c237na
G-34
5.4.2 Feed Roller

• Feed Roller
*1501/421
*2361
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the Tray.
3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Feed Roller [1].
4061f2c238na
5.4.3 Pick-up Roller

• Pick-up Roller
*1501/421
*2361
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the Tray.
3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Pick-up Roller
[1].
4061f2c239na
5.4.4 Vertical Conveyance Roller

• Vertical Conveyance Roller
*1501/421
*2361
(2) Procedure
[1] 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the Vertical
Conveyance Roller [1].
4061f2c240na
G-35
bizhub 501/421/361 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 6. LU-203
6. LU-203
NOTE
• This list shows the explanation of the disassembly and reassembly of the parts which are considered necessary to replace (other
than periodically replaced parts). However, these parts except for the covers are not required to be disassembled while in normal
service operations.
• For the method of replacing the periodically replaced parts, see “Precautions on maintenance”.
1 Cover Right cover
Front cover
Rear cover
2 Tray section Wire A
Wire B
Wire C
Wire D

6.2.1 Removal and reinstallation of the right cover, the front cover and the rear cove
CAUTION
• When connected to the main body, make sure that the power cord of the main body is unplugged from the power outlet.
(1) Procedure
1. Pull out LU from the main body side.
[1] [2]
3. Remove the 2 screws [2] and then remove the right cover [3].
Note
• When installing the right cover [3], be sure to take note of
the direction of the 2 casters [4].
[3]
[4] 16aaf2c014na
G-36
[1]
5. Remove the 2 screws [2] and then remove the front cover [3].
[3] [2] 16aaf2c015nb
[3] [1] 6. Loosen the 2 screws [1].

7. Remove the screw [2] and then remove the auxiliary cover /Rr [3].
[2] 16aaf2c016na
G-37
[3] 8. Remove the 3 screws [1] and then remove the cable cover [2].
9. Remove the 4 screws [3] and then remove the rear cover [4].
[4] [3]
[2]
[1] 16aaf2c017na
6.2.2 Replacing the wires

The length of the wires
Wire /A: 707.2 mm
Wire /B: 585.7 mm
Wire /C: 558.7 mm
Wire /D: 680.2 mm
Auxiliary wire: 706.3 mm
Detection wire: 609.6 mm
G-38
(1) Removing the wire

[6] [5]
1. Remove the right cover, the front cover and the rear cover.
(See G.6.2.1 Removal and reinstallation of the right cover, the
[3] front cover and the rear cove)
2. Remove the connectors [1] and [2], and pull out the wiring harness
[4] from the hole [3].
3. Remove the 2 connectors [5] and the connector [6].
[1]
[4]
[2]
16aaf2c018na
4. Remove two connectors [2] from the LU drive board (LUDB) [1].
[2]
[1]
16aaf2c019nb
G-39
5. Remove the 6 screws [1] and then remove the LU drive board unit
[1]
[2].
[1] [2] [1]
16aaf2c020na
NOTE
[1] [2] • When removing the LU drive board unit, the bearings [1]
and [2] may come off and fall. Be careful that they do not
get lost.
[4] [3]
16aaf2c021na
G-40
[2] 6. Remove the 3 screws [1] and then remove the paper lift motor
(M151) [2].
[1] 16aaf2c022na
7. Remove the 4 screws [1] and then remove the motor mounting
[2] [1]
plate [2].
[1] 16aaf2c023na
8. Remove the E-ring [1], and remove the wire stopper [2].
[6] [8] 9. Remove the assist wire [4] from the spring [3].
Note
[7] • Be careful that the lift plate [5] comes down by its own
weight.
10. Peel off the seal [7] from the detection reel [6].
11. Rotate the detection reel [6] clockwise as seen from the rear side,
and remove the detection wire [8] from the reel.
C
D
B
A
[3] [5]
[4]
[2]
[1]
16aaf2c024na
G-41
12. Remove the 2 E-rings [1] and the 2 wire stoppers [2].
13. Remove the 4 E-rings [4] and remove the 4 upper pulleys [5].
[2] [2]
[1] [1]
C
D
[5] [4]
[5]
[4]
16aaf2c025na
14. Remove the E-ring [1] and the drive pulley [2], then remove the
auxiliary wire [3], the wire A [4] and the wire B [5].
15. Remove the E-ring [6] and the drive pulley [7], then remove the
detection wire [8], the wire D [9] and the wire C [10].
C
D
B
A
[4] A [5] [10] D [9]

[3] [8]
B C
[2] [7]
[1] [6]
16aaf2c026na
(2) Stringing wires

1. Pass the wire A [1], the wire B [2], the wire C [3] and the wire D [4]
[6] [7] [6] [14] [15] [15] through the lift plate [5].
A
B
A
C
D D 2. Run the wire A [6] and the wire B [7] through the 2 upper pulleys
[8] and the 2 lower pulleys [9], and then through the adjustment
part [10].
3. Tighten the 2 upper pulleys [8] with the 2 E-rings [11].
[11] [8] [11] [8] [16] [17] [16] [17] 4. Install the wire stopper [12] to each of the 2 lower pulleys [9] in the
direction as shown in the drawing. And then fasten it with the 2 E-
Rings [13].
5. Run the wire C [14] and the wire D [15] through the groove of the
pulley [16].
[4] 6. Tighten the 2 pulleys [16] with each of the E-ring [17].
C
[10]
D
[3]
B
A
[2]
[1] [5]
[9] [9]
[12] [12]
[13] [13]
16aaf2c027na
G-42
7. After putting the auxiliary wire [1], the wire A [2] and the wire B [3]
into the holes in the front section of the drive shaft [4], install the
drive pulley [5] and tighten it with the E-ring [6].
8. After putting the detection wire [7], the wire D [8] and the wire C [9]
C into the holes in the rear section of the drive shaft [4], install the
D drive pulley [10] and tighten it with the E-ring [11].
B
A
[2] A [3] [9] D [8]

[1] [7]
B C
[5] [10]
[6] [11]
[4] [4]
16aaf2c028na
9. Hold the drive pulley [1] and the drive pulley [2] with both hands
[7] and rotate them counterclockwise as seen from the front side until
[9] there are no slacks found in the wires A, B, C, and D.
[10] 10. Rotate the coupling shaft [3] on the rear side to lift the lift plate [4]
to the upper limit.
[3] Note
[2] • Be sure to wind the wires from the inside of the LU to the
outside.
• At this time, the auxiliary wire [5] and the detection wire
C [11] should not have been wound around the drive pulleys
[1]
D [6] and [12].
B 11. Wind the auxiliary wire [5] about half turn counterclockwise around
A the drive pulley [6].
[4] 12. Wind the auxiliary wire [5] about 1.5 turn clockwise around the
[5] [8] pulley [7] and install it to the spring [8].
13. Install the wire stopper [9] to the pulley [7] in the direction as
shown in the drawing, and tighten it with the E-ring [10].
14. With the lift plate [4] lifted fully up to the upper limit, wind the
detection wire [11] about half turn clockwise around the drive
pulley [12].
[6] [5] [11] [12]
16aaf2c029na
15. Set the wire attaching notch [2] at the right above position with no
[2] tension applied on the detection reel [1], and wind the detection
wire [3] a full turn counterclockwise around the detection reel [1]
starting at the top side.
Note
• Be sure to wind the wire from the inside of the LU to the
outside.
16. Rotate the detection reel [1] clockwise to apply tension. After
[1] [4] [3] rotating about 3/4 turn, install the detection wire [3].
16aaf2c030na 17. Stick the seal [4] to the detection reel [1].
18. Follow Steps 1 to 7 in "A. Removing the wire" in reverse order.
Note
• After finishing wire replacement, move the lift plate up and
down to confirm that it moves smoothly.
• Make sure that the wires do not cross each other, or a
wire does not run on another wire.
• After installing the wires, adjust the tilt of the lift plate.
(See I.10.1 Adjusting the tilt of the lift plate
G-43
bizhub 501/421/361 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 7. FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
7. FS-522/PU-501/OT-602


Note

CAUTION
circuit board.

1 Conveyance Front Cover /Up
2 Conveyance Upper Cover
3 Conveyance Front Cover /Rt
4 Front Door
5 Conveyance Front Cover /Lw
6 Conveyance Front Cover /Lt
Cover
7 Paper Exit Front Cover
8 Tray /2
9 OT (Option)
10 Tray /1
11 Connector Cover
12 Paper Exit Rear Cover
13 Lift Tray
14 Conveyance Unit
Unit
15 Stapler Unit
16 PU (Option)
17 Stacker Paddle Drive Clutch Assy
Others
18 Paper Holding Paddle Drive Clutch Assy

7.3.1 Conveyance Front Cover /Up, /Rt, /Lw
[1] 1. Remove the Conveyance Upper Cover.
2. Unhook two claws [1], and remove the Conveyance Front Cover /
Up [1a].
3. Remove two screws [2], and remove the Conveyance Front Cover /
Rt [3].
[1a]
[2]
[3]
a0hnf2c001ca
G-44
4. Remove two screws [4], and remove the Conveyance Front Cover /
Lw [5].
Note
• At reinstallation, first fit the claw [6] into position.
[5]

[6]
[4] 4349f2c010na
7.3.2 Conveyance Upper Cover

[1]
1. Remove four screws [1], and remove the Conveyance Upper Cover
[2].
[2]
[1]
4349f2c011na
7.3.3 Front Door

1. Open the Front Door [1].
[5] [4] [3] [2] 2. Remove the screw [2], and remove the stopper [3].
3. Loosen two screws [4].
4. Slide up the Fulcrum /Up [5] and remove the Front Door.
[1] [3]
4349f2c036na
7.3.4 Conveyance Front Cover /Lt

1. Remove three screws [1], and remove the Conveyance Front
[2]
Cover /Lt [2].
[1]
4349f2c014na
7.3.5 Paper Exit Front Cover, Rear Cover, Connector Cover

1. Remove the Front Door.
(See G.7.3.3 Front Door)
2. Remove the Conveyance Front Cover
/Lt.
(See G.7.3.4 Conveyance Front Cover /Lt)
3. Remove four screws [1], and remove the Paper Exit Front Cover [2].
[1] [2] a0hnf2c002ca
G-45
[3] [4] 4. Remove the screw [3], and remove the Connector Cover [4].
5. Remove three screws [5] and remove the Paper Exit Rear Cover
[6].
[5]
[6]
[5]
4349f2c038na
7.3.6 Tray /2
[2] 1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the Tray /2 [2].
[1] 4349f2c016na
7.3.7 OT-602
[2] 1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the OT [2].
[1] 4625f2c001na
G-46
7.3.8 Tray /1
[2]
1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the Tray /1 [2].
[1] 4349f2c017na
7.3.9 Lift Tray

Note
• When removing the Lift Tray, be sure to bring the Tray down to the bottom in advance.
• If the OT is installed, remove it in advance.
[1] 1. Remove the Front Door.
[1]
(See G.7.3.3 Front Door)
/Lt.
(See G.7.3.4 Conveyance Front Cover /Lt)
3. Disconnect three connectors [1].
4. Remove two screws [2], and remove the ground wire.
5. Remove the Tray /1, Tray /2 and OT.
[2] 4349f2c019na (See G.7.3.6 Tray /2 to G.7.3.8 Tray /1)
6. Remove six screws [3], and lift the Lift Tray [4] upward and off from
[4] the Conveyance Unit.
Note
• The removal of the upper 2 screws [3] is not available when
the Lift Tray is not brought down to the bottom.
[3] [3]
4349f2c020na
7.3.10 Conveyance Unit

1. Remove the Lift Tray.
(See G.7.3.9 Lift Tray)
2. While holding down the lock release button [1], remove the
Conveyance Unit [2].
[2] [1]
4349f2c021na
7.3.11 Stapler
1. Open the Front Door.
2. Turn the knob [1], and move the stapler forward.
[3] 3. Remove the Staple Cartridge.
4. Remove the screw [2], and remove the cover [3].
[1]
[2]
4349f2c022na
5. Disconnect two connectors [4].
[4]
4349f2c023na
G-47
6. Remove two screws [5], and remove the Stapler Unit [6].
[6]
[5]
4349f2c024na
7. Remove two screws [7] and remove the Stapler [8].

[7]
4349f2c025na
7.3.12 PU
NOTE
• When the SD is provided, be sure to remove the Folding Unit in advance.
[1]
(See G.7.3.10 Conveyance Unit)
3. Remove the Conveyance Upper Cover.
(See G.7.3.2 Conveyance Upper Cover)
[2] /Lw.
4512f2c001na (See G.7.3.1 Conveyance Front Cover /Up, /Rt, /Lw)
5. Remove two screws [1], and remove the Reinforcement Plate [2].
6. Disconnect two connectors [3].
[3]
4512f2c002na
[6] 7. Remove two screws [6], and remove the PU [7].

[7]
[6]
4512f2c003nb
[8] 8. Remove nine screws [8], and the Punch Unit [9].
[8] NOTE
• The Guide Plate /Up [10] has a cut in its edge, while the
[10] Guide Plate /Lw [11] has no cut. Be careful not to confuse
one with the other.
• Be careful not to bend the Transparent Guide Plate.
[11]
[8]
[9]
[8]
4512f2c004nb
G-48
7.3.13 Stacker Paddle Drive Clutch Assy

[1] (See G.7.3.2 Conveyance Upper Cover)
4. Remove the E-ring [1].
4349f2c026na
5. Loosen two hexagonal socket head screws [2], and remove the
Stacker Paddle Drive Clutch Assy [3].
[3]
[2]
4349f2c027na
(2) Note to reinstallation procedure of the Stacker Paddle Drive Clutch Assy
1. Check that the 2-mm hole [2] of the stacker paddle drive shaft [1]
[3] and the cutout of the frame [3] are aligned and insert the Stacker
[1] Paddle Drive Clutch Assy [4] into the Stacker Paddle Drive Shaft
[2] [1].
2. Refer to the figure and check the paddle position [5].
3. Hook the Solenoid Flapper [7] to the claw [6] of the Stacker Paddle
Drive Clutch Assy [4].
4. Attach the E-ring.
5. Adjust the spacing between the E-ring and the Stacker Paddle
Drive Clutch Assy to 0.2 mm and tighten two hexagonal socket
head screws.
[5]
[4]
[7]
[6] 4349f2c028nb
7.3.14 Paper Holding Paddle Drive Clutch Assy

[1] (See G.7.3.9 Lift Tray)
[2] (See G.7.3.2 Conveyance Upper Cover)
4. Remove the C-ring [1].
5. Remove the bearing [2].
4349f2c029na
6. Loosen two hexagonal socket head screws [3], and remove the
[4] [3]
Paper Holding Paddle Drive Clutch Assy [4].
4349f2c030na
(2) Note to reinstallation Procedure of the Paper Holding Paddle Drive Clutch Assy
1. Insert the Paper Holding Paddle Drive Clutch Assy [1].
G-49
NOTE
• When inserting the Paper Holding Paddle Drive Clutch Assy [1] into the shaft, move the Paper Holding Paddle [4] at the
specified position [3], and be sure to install the edge [5] of Actuator in the position as shown in the drawing.
[4] [5] [1] [4]
[3]
[2] [6]
4349f2c032nb
[1] Paper Holding Paddle Drive Clutch Assy [2] Front side view
[3] 107 ± 3mm [4] Paper Holding Paddle
[5] Edge of Actuator [6] Solenoid Flapper
2. Install the bearing [2] and the C-ring [2a].
[2a]
[2]
4349f2c033nb
3. Hook the Solenoid Flapper [4] to the claw [3] of the Paper Holding
[4a]
Paddle Drive Clutch Assy.
NOTE
• Install the Paper Holding Paddle Drive Clutch Assy with
the side having a wider spacing between the claws facing
upward.
[3] • When hooking the Solenoid Flapper [4], make sure that
[4]
the edge of Actuator [4a] is vertical.
4349f2c034nb
[5] [6]
4. Adjust the spacing [7] between the bushing [5] and the Paper
Holding Paddle Drive Clutch Assy [6] to 0.2 mm and tighten two
hexagonal socket head screws.
[7]
4349f2c035na
G-50
bizhub 501/421/361 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 8. FS-523/RU-507
8. FS-523/RU-507
1 Cover Upper cover
2 Front cover /Up
3 Front cover /Lw
4 Rear cover
5 Punch section Punch unit
6 Staple section Stapler unit

8.2.1 Removal/reinstallation of the upper cover
(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Remove the sub tray [1].
4521f2c004na

4. Loosen 2 screws [4].
5. Loosen the screw [5] and remove the upper cover [6].
[3] [2]
[4] [6] [5]
4521f2c005na
G-51
8.2.2 Removal/reinstallation of the front cover /Up

(1) Procedure
[1] 1. Loosen 2 screws [1].
2. Loosen 2 screws [2] and remove the front cover
/Up [3].
[2]
[3] 4521f2c006na
8.2.3 Removal/reinstallation of the front cover /Lw

(1) Procedure
1. Loosen 2 screws [1] and remove the front cover
[1]
/Lw [2].
[2] 4521f2c007na
G-52
8.2.4 Removal/reinstallation of the rear cover

(1) Procedure
1. Remove the screw [1] and loosen the screw [2].
[1] 2. Loosen 2 screws [3] and remove the rear cover [4].
[2] [3]
[4] 4521f2c008na
8.2.5 Removal/reinstallation of the punch unit

(1) Installation of the Swedish punch kit G
When installing the Swedish punch kit G, be sure to remove the existing punch unit and follow the procedure given below.
G-53
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the upper cover.
(See G.8.2.1 Removal/reinstallation of the upper cover)
3. Remove the screws [2] and [3]. After sliding the punch unit [4] in
the arrow-marked direction [5], remove it in the arrow-marked
direction [6].
Note
• The screw [2] is provided with the spacer [7] and the
washer [8]. Be careful that they do not get lost.
[6] [1] [5]
[3] [4]
[2][7][8] 4521f2c009na
[9] [13] [14] 4. Reinstall the above parts following the removal steps in reverse.
Note
• When installing the punch unit, be sure to set the gear [9]
of the main body to the gear [10] of the punch unit, and
then insert the shaft [11] into the hole [12] of FS.
• When engaging the gears, be sure to engage them so that
the gear flange [13] of the main body comes inside the
gear flange [14] of the punch unit.
[10] [12] [11] 4521f2c010na
8.2.6 Replacing the stapler unit

(1) Procedure
[1]
1. Open the punch scraps box holder [1].
4521f2c001na
G-54
[5] [6a] 2. Rotate the dial [1] in the arrow-marked direction [2] to expand the
intervals of the stapler units /Fr [3] and /Rr [4].
NOTE
• After replacing the stapler units /Fr and /Rr, be sure to
return these intervals to their original widths.
3. While pressing both sides [6] of each of the stapler unit covers [5],
remove 2 stapler unit covers.
NOTE
• For each FS unit, 2 stapler units are provided. When
replacing these 2 stapler units, they are replaced at the
same time. So, be sure to remove both the covers.
• When installing the stapler unit covers, fit the claws [6a]
into the holes of the plate.
[6]
[3] [1] [2] [4] 4521f2c002nb
4. Remove 2 connectors [6].

[10] [6]
6. Remove the screw [9] and then remove the stapler unit /Rr [10].
7. Remove 2 connectors [11].
9. Remove the screw [14] and then remove the stapler unit /Fr [15].
[7][8] [9]
[15] [12][13]
[14] [11] 4521f2c003na
G-55
10. Remove 2 screws [16] and then remove the plate [17], 1 each,
[16] [17]
from each of the stapler units.
4521f2c029na
G-56
bizhub 501/421/361 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 9. SD-507
9. SD-507


Note

CAUTION
circuit board.

1 Paper Output Tray Paper Output Tray
2 Front Cover
3 Cover Upper Cover
4 Rear Cover
5 Saddle Unit
6 Unit Folding Unit
7 Stapler Unit
8 Paper Guide Motor (M13)
Others
9 Folding Roller

9.3.1 Paper Output Tray/Front Cover
[3]
[1]
[2]
4511f2c004na
1. Align the cutout and remove the Paper Output Tray [1].
2. Remove two screws [2], and remove the Front Cover [3].
G-57
9.3.2 Rear Cover
[2]
[1]
4511f2c005na
1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the Rear Cover [2].
9.3.3 Upper Cover

[1]
1. Remove the Front Cover.
[1] (See G.9.3.1 Paper Output Tray/Front Cover)
2. Remove the Rear Cover.
(See G.9.3.2 Rear Cover)
3. Remove four screws [1], and remove the Upper Cover [2].
[2]
4511f2c006na
9.3.4 Saddle Unit

1. Remove the screw [1], and remove the Connector Cover [2].
[1]
[2] 4511f2c007na
[4] 2. Remove the screw [3], and remove the two Ground Terminals [4].
[3] 3. Unplug two connectors [5].
[5]
4511f2c008nb
4. Remove the screw [6], and remove the Front Cover /Lw [7].
[7]
[6]
4511f2c009na
G-58
5. Pull the Lock Release Lever [8], and open the Saddle Unit.
[8] [9]
6. Remove the screw [9], and close the Saddle Unit.
4511f2c010nb
[11] 7. Remove two screws [10].

8. Pull up the Shutter [11], remove the two Claws [12] from the hole
[12] [13] and remove the Saddle Unit [14].
[13]
[14]
[10] 4511f2c011nb
9.3.5 Folding Unit

[1] 1. Remove the Saddle Unit.
(See G.9.3.4 Saddle Unit)
(See P.13 in G.7.3.9 Lift Tray)
3. Remove the Horizontal Conveyance Unit.
[2] (See P.13 in G.7.3.10 Conveyance Unit)
[1] 4. Remove four screws [1], and remove the Horizontal Conveyance
Upper Cover [2].
4511f2c012na
[3] 5. Remove two screws [3], and remove the Reinforcement Plate [4].
[4]
4511f2c013na
6. Remove two screws [5], and remove the Horizontal Conveyance

Front Cover /Lw [6].
Note
[6] • At reinstallation, first fit the claw [7] into position.
[7]
[5] 4511f2c014na
[8]
4511f2c015na
G-59
8. Remove the Shoulder Screw [9] and the screw [9a], and remove the
[10]
[9] Folding Unit [10].
[9a]
4511f2c016nb
9.3.6 Stapler Unit

1. Remove the Saddle Unit.
[4] (See G.9.3.4 Saddle Unit)
2. Remove the Paper Output Tray.
(See G.9.3.1 Paper Output Tray/Front Cover)
[3] 3. Remove the Front Cover.
[1]
[3] [2] (See G.9.3.2 Rear Cover)
4511f2c017na 5. Remove the Upper Cover.
(See G.9.3.3 Upper Cover)
6. Remove the screw [1], and remove the ground terminal [2].
7. Remove two screws [3], and remove the holder [4].
8. Release the Lock Release Lever [5], and slide the Saddle Unit
[6]
Mounting Plate [6].
9. Remove the screw [7] and the Washer [8], and remove the Saddle
Unit Mounting Plate [6].
[7]
[5] [8]
4511f2c018na
10. Remove the Harness Clamp [6] from the Metal Plate.
[6]
4511f2c019na
11. Unplug four connectors [7].

[7] [12] [10] 12. Remove the C-ring [8], and remove the bearing [9].
13. Remove three screws [10] and two screws [11], and remove the
Drive Unit [12].
[7]
[10] [9]
[8]
[11]
4511f2c020nb
G-60

15. Remove two screws [14] and two screws [15].
[13] 16. Remove the Tray [16].
[15]
[16]
[14]
a0phf2c001ca
17. Unplug all the connectors on the SD Control Board (SDCB) [17].
18. Remove the Board Support, and then remove the SDCB.
[17]
4511f2c024na
19. Remove the screw [18], and then remove the Mounting Bracket
[18a] and the Lock Release Lever [19].
NOTE
[19] • Be careful that when the Mounting Bracket [18a] is
removed, the spring [19a] is also removed.
[18a] • When installing the spring, install the end of spring [19a]
into the gap [19b] between the ribs.
[18]
[19]
[19a] [19b]
a0phf2c002ca
[20] 20. Remove four screws [20] and four screws [20a], and remove the
Lower Cover [21].
[20a]
[21]
[20a]
[20] 4511f2c026nb
[22a] 21. Remove the harness clamp and unplug the connector [22].
22. Remove three screws [22a], and remove the Clincher /1 [23].
[22]
[23] 4511f2c027nb
G-61
23. Remove the Staple Cartridge /1 [24].
[24]
4511f2c028na
24. Remove four screws [25], unplug the connector, and remove the
Stapler /1 [26].
[26] Note
[25] • To replace Clincher /2 and Stapler /2, repeat steps 21 to 24.
4511f2c029na
Precaution for Clincher Reinstallation

• When the Clincher is installed, the position of the Stapler and the Clincher will be misaligned. Be sure to perform the following adjustment.
1. Install the Stapler, and then install the Staple Cartridge.
[1]
2. Use three screws [1] to temporary fix the Clincher [2].
[2] 4511f2c030na
[3] 3. Loosen three screws [3] of the stopper.

4. Loosen three screws [4] of the Clincher.
[4]
[3]
4511f2c031na
5. Aligning the protrusions of the jig [6] with the recesses in the Stapler
[5], fit the jig to the Stapler.
Note
• Make sure that the protrusions of the jig properly rest in
[6] the recesses.
[6]
[5]
4511f2c032na
6. Turn the gear [7] of the Clincher to project the protrusions [9] of the
[7] [9] Clincher, and then slide to put into the Clincher as it fits into the
recesses [8] of the jig.
[8]
4511f2c033na
7. Tighten six screws [10].

[10]
Note
• Turn the gear again and check to see that the protrusion of
the Clincher smoothly fits into the recess in the jig.
8. Turn the gear and remove the jig.
[10]
4511f2c034na
G-62
9.3.7 Paper Guide Motor (M13)

1. Remove the Saddle Unit.
[4] (See G.9.3.4 Saddle Unit)
2. Remove the Paper Output Tray.
[3] 3. Remove the Front Cover.
[1] 4. Remove the Rear Cover.
[3] [2] (See G.9.3.2 Rear Cover)
4511f2c035na 5. Remove the Upper Cover.
(See G.9.3.3 Upper Cover)
6. Remove the screw [1], and remove the ground terminal [2].
7. Remove two screws [3], and remove the holder [4].
[6]
8. Release the lock release lever [5], and slide the Saddle Unit
Mounting Plate [6].
9. Remove the screw [7] and the washer [8], and remove the Saddle
Unit Mounting Plate [6].
[7]
[5] [8]
4511f2c036na
10. Remove the screw [9], and then remove the Mounting Bracket [9a]
and the Lock Release Lever [10].
NOTE
[10] • Be careful that when the Mounting Bracket [9a] is removed,
the spring [10a] is also removed.
[9a] • When installing the spring, install the end of spring [10a]
into the gap [10b] between the ribs.
[9]
[10]
[10a] [10b]
a0phf2c003ca
11. Remove four screws [11] and four screws [11a], and remove the
[11] Lower Cover [12].
[11a]
[12]
[11a]
[11]
4511f2c038nb
[15] [13] [14] [13] 12. Remove four screws [13], and remove the plate [14] and [15].
13. Unplug the connector [16] and remove the screw [17], and then
remove the Paper Guide Gear Assy [18].
[16] [18] [17] a0phf2c004ca
G-63
14. Remove the C-ring [19], and remove the bearing [20].
[23] 15. Remove the Wire Saddle [21], and unplug two connectors [22].
Remove the screw [23], and remove the Paper Guide Motor Assy
[24].
[19] [20] [24] [21] [22]

a0phf2c005ca
[25] [26] [28] [26] 16. Remove three C-rings [25], and remove three bearings [26].
17. Remove the Clutch Gear Drive Shaft [27], and remove the Clutch
Gear Assy [28].
18. Remove two screws [29], and then remove the Paper Guide Motor
M13 [30].
[27] [25]
a0phf2c006ca
[29]
[30]
a0phf2c007ca
Precaution for M13 Reinstallation
[2]
[1]
[4]
[3]
4511f2c043na
1. Press the two Paper Guides [1] in and check that they touch the stopper [2] simultaneously.
G-64
2. Check that pins [4] can be inserted through the positioning holes [3] (3 holes) of the Paper Guide Sensor Assy.
9.3.8 Folding Roller

[3] [2] 1. Remove the Folding Unit.
(See G.9.3.5 Folding Unit)
2. Remove the two springs [1].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the spring, put it through the hole [2] with
the end [3] faced out side.
[1] 3. Remove four screws [4] and then remove the Upper Plate [5].
[4]
[5]
[4] a0phf2c008ca
4. Remove two screws [6], and remove the Guide Plate [7].
NOTE
[8] • When reinstalling the Guide Plate, put it into the boss [8].
[7]
[6]
a0phf2c009ca
5. Remove two screws [9], and remove the Folding Blade Assy [10].
[10]
[9]
4511f2c046nb
G-65
[13] [16] [14] [17] NOTE

• Install the Folding Blade Assy in the direction shown in the
left figure.
[11] Front
[12] Rear
• Be sure to rotate the Crank Arm [13] one turn in counter
clockwise [15] (as seen from the front of device) from the
position that the spring [14] doesn't work (the spring hangs
down vertical), and then install the Folding Blade Assy in
the position that the spring can hook the Stopper [16].
• Be sure to install the edge [17] of Blade Support comes
outside of the metal plate [18].
[15] [18]
[12] [11]
a0phf2c010ca
[22] [20]
6. Unplug the connector [19] and remove the screw [20], and then
[21]
remove the sensor [21].
7. Release the spring [22].
NOTE
• When reinstalling the spring [22], insert the recess [23].
[23] [19]
a0phf2c011ca
G-66
8. Remove the C-ring [24] and remove the gear [25].

[25] [24] NOTE
• Install the gear [25] so that the marks [26] of gear are
aligned to the position shown in the left figure.
9. Remove two C-rings [27] and then remove the two gears [28].
NOTE
• Install the gears [28] so that the mark [29] of Folding
Roller /Rt comes half tooth above the mark [30] of Folding
Roller /Lt.
[26]
[27]
[28] [30] [29] [28]

a0phf2c012ca
[31] [32] 10. Remove the bearing [31], and remove the Lower Guide Plate /Lt
[32].
NOTE
• Install the Lower Guide Plate /Lt [32] so that the claw [34] of
Guide Plate Gear make sure to put into the hole [33].
• Install the bearing [31] so that the last tooth [35] of Guide
Plate Gear /LtFr comes half tooth above the last tooth [36]
of Guide Plate Gear /RtFr.
[36] [35] [34] [33] [34]

a0phf2c013ca
G-67
[37] [38] 11. Remove the C-ring [37], and remove the bearing [38].
NOTE
• Install the bearing [38] so that the last tooth [39] of Guide
Plate Gear /LtRr comes half tooth above the last tooth [40]
of Guide Plate Gear /RtRr.
[39] [40]
a0phf2c014ca
12. Remove the C-ring [41] and the bearing [42], and remove the Lower
[41] [42]
Guide Plate /Rt [43].
NOTE
• Install the Lower Guide Plate /Rt [43] so that the claw [45]
of Guide Plate Gear make sure to put into the hole [44].
13. Remove the C-ring [46] and the bearing [47].

NOTE
• Install the bearing [47] so that the marks [48] are aligned.
[46] [47] [43]
[48] [44] [45]

a0phf2c015ca
G-68
[49] [50] [51] 14. Remove the C-ring [49], and remove the Crank Plate [50] and the
bearing [51].
NOTE
• When reinstalling it, insert the Crank Shaft [52] into the
recess [53] of Guide Gear Plate. And, be sure not to insert
the Cam pin [54] into the Cam [55].
[52] [53]
[55] [54]
a0phf2c016ca
[58] [59] 15. Remove two screws [56], and remove the Side Plate [57].
16. Remove the Folding Roller Assy /Lt [58] and the Folding Roller
Assy /Rt [59].
[56] [57] a0phf2c017ca
17. Remove the two washers [60] and the Guide Plate Gear /LtFr [61],
[60] [61] [64] [63] [66] [67] [65] [68] [62] and remove the Guide Plate Gear /LtRr [62].
18. Remove two C-rings [63], and remove the Folding Roller A [64] and
C [65].
19. Remove the screw [66], and remove the Folding Roller B [67] from
the Folding Roller Shaft /Lt [68].
20. Remove the Guide Plate Gear /RtFr [69] and the Guide Plate Gear /
RtRr [70].
21. Remove two C-rings [71], and remove the Folding Roller A [72] and
C [73].
[69] [72] [76] [71] [75] [74] [73] [70] 22. Remove the screw [74], and remove the Folding Roller B [75] from
a0phf2c018ca the Folding Roller Shaft /Rt [76].
[81]
NOTE
• There is 1 each a groove of the both ends of the Folding
Roller Shaft /Lt [78]. However there is 2 each a groove of
the both ends of the Folding Roller Shaft /Rt [79]. Be
careful not to confuse one with the other.
• Be sure to place it with the D-cut [80] down, and install the
screw [81] from the top.
• Be sure to install the Folding Roller Shaft so that the screw
of Folding Roller Shaft /Lt [78] faced to the front side of
device and the screw of Folding Roller Shaft /Rt [79] faced
to the rear side of device.
[78] [79]
[80]
a0phf2c019ca
G-69
[82] [84] • Be careful not to confuse the Guide Plate Gear /LtRr [82], /
LtFr [83], /RtRr [84] and /RtFr [85]. The outward appearance
is identical for the Guide Plate Gear /LtFr [83], /RtRr [84]
and
/RtFr [85]. However, the mark [86] is provided on the Guide
Plate Gear /RtFr [85]. Install claw in facing.
[83] [86] [85]

a0phf2c020ca
• Be careful not to confuse the directions of Lower Guide

[87] [88] Plate /Lt [87] and
/Rt [88]. Be sure to install the direction (as seen from the
front of device) as shown in the figure.
a0phf2c021ca
G-70
bizhub 501/421/361 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 10. MT-502
10. MT-502


NOTE

NOTE
circuit board.

1 Rear Cover
2 Front Cover
Cover
3 Upper Cover
4 Right Door
5 Paper Output Tray Paper Output Tray

10.3.1 Rear Cover/Right Door
[5] [2] 1. Remove the screw [1] and remove the Rear Cover [2].
2. Remove the screw [3], the stopper [4], and remove the Right Door
[5].
[3] [4] [1] 4510f2c002na
10.3.2 Front Cover/Upper Cover/Paper Output Tray

[3] [2] 1. Remove the screw [1] and remove the Front Cover [2].
(See G.10.3.1 Rear Cover/Right Door)
3. Remove the Upper Cover [3].
4. Remove the Paper Output Trays [4].
[4] [1] 4510f2c003na
G-71
bizhub 501/421/361 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 11. JS-502
11. JS-502
11.1.1


NOTE

CAUTION
circuit board.

1 Cover Upper Cover

11.3.1 Upper Cover
[1]
[2]
4347f2c001na
1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the Upper Cover [2].
G-72
bizhub 501/421/361 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 12. IC-207
12. IC-207
12.1 Precautions on disassembling and assembling
CAUTION
• Assembly should be made in reverse order of disassembly unless otherwise noted.
Precautions against static electricity.
• Keep the image controller in an antistatic bag while transporting it or storing it.
• When working in places where static electricity tends to accumulate, such as on a carpet, discharge electricity from your body by touching
any metallic portion before handling the image controller.
• Do not touch the contacts on the image controller with your hands, as that may result in poor conductivity.
• Do not physically damage the image controller by dropping it, bending it, etc.
12.2 Tools Required

• Standard screwdriver
CAUTION
• Be sure to unplug the power cable, not only to turn the copier off, before attempting to make servicing.
CAUTION
• Before engaging in Disassembly/Reassembly, check to make sure that all the cables are unplugged from the copier.
• There may be occasions when boards are damaged if no appropriate grounding measures are taken. Wear a wrist strap or others
during servicing.
• Disassembly/Reassembly should be made on cushioning materials.
12.3 Removal / Installation of Printer key control board

1. Turn the Sub and Main power switches OFF of the main body, and
unplug the power cord from the outlet.
2. Remove the back cover (6 screws).
Back cover
3. Remove the board cover (5 screws).

Board cover
A0PAIXE002CA
G-73
bizhub 501/421/361 G DISASSEMBLY/REASSEMBLY > 12. IC-207
4. Remove the image controller in the location with the IC-207 mark on
the system control board.
NOTE
• You should be careful not to damage the board.
• Remove the image controller pulling it perpendicularly to
Align concave the system control board.
areas • Align the concave area on the left side of the image
controller and the concave area on left side of the slot in
the system control board when installing.
• Assembly should be made in reverse order from
disassembly.
Image controller
A0P8IXE001CA
G-74
H CLEANING/LUBRICATION > 1. CLEANING/LUBRICATION
bizhub 501/421/361 PROCEDURES
H CLEANING/LUBRICATION
1. CLEANING/LUBRICATION PROCEDURES
The descriptions of the cleaning and the lubrication are mentioned in the maintenance section of each device.
H -1
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 1. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT/
bizhub 501/421/361 SETTING SECTION
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING
1. HOW TO USE THE ADJUSTMENT/SETTING SECTION
1.1 Composition
This part "ADJUSTMENT/SETTING" describes items to be adjusted and the method of adjustment that is required by this machine, it also gives
detailed explanations.
(1) Checking before starting work

When conducting claims in the field, it is necessary to check first the following:
1. Are the power supply and voltage secured in accordance with the specifications?
2. Is the power supply properly grounded?
3. Is any equipment that repeatedly consumes a lot of electricity connected to the same power supply? (e.g.: Electric noise sources such as
elevator and air conditioner)
4. Are environmental conditions suitable for the machine?
• High temperature and high humidity, direct sunlight, air ventilation, etc.
• Levelness of the location on which the machine is installed.
5. Does the cause of poor images lie in the original itself?
6. Is density selected properly?
7. Is the original glass stained?
8. Is proper paper used for copy?
9. Are copy consumable replaced with new ones at their life? (e.g.: Developer, drum, cleaning blade, etc)
10. Is toner filled?
(2) Checkpoints when conductions on-site service

Due attention should be paid to the following when repairing the machine.
• Be sure to unplug the power cord from the power outlet. Also, when operating the machine with the power supplied, be careful of the scan
of the exposure unit and be sure not to get caught by the gear.
• The fusing section may be very hot. Be careful not to get burnt when handling it.
• The developing unit is strongly magnetized. Be careful not to bring a watch and instrument near to the unit.
• Be careful not to damage the drum with a tool.
• Be careful not to touch IC directly with bare hands.
I-1
bizhub 501/421/361 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 2. UTILITY MENU
2. UTILITY MENU
2.1 List of utility mode
This machine is provided with setting menu for various adjustments/settings. Data adjusted/set with this mode is stored in NVRAM board (NRB).
Note
• For details on the utility, refer to "User's guide."
• [1] One-Touch / User Box Registration
• [1] Create One-Touch Destination
• [1] Address Book
• [1] E-Mail
• [2] User Box
• [3] Fax
• [4] PC (SMB)
• [5] FTP
• [6] WebDAV
• [7] IP Address Fax
• [8] Internet Fax
• [2] Group
• [3] E-Mail Settings
• [1] E-Mail Subject
• [2] E-mail Body
• [2] Create User Box
• [1] Public/Personal User Box
• [2] Bulletin Board User Box
• [3] Relay User Box
• [3] Limiting Access to Destinations
• [1] Apply Levels / Groups to Destinations
• [2] Group
• [3] Program
• [2] User Settings
• [1] System Settings
• [1] Language Selection
• [2] Measurement Unit Settings
• [3] Paper Tray Settings
• [1] Auto Tray Selection Settings
• [2] Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF
• [3] No Matching Paper in Tray Setting
• [4] Print Lists
• [5] Paper Type
• [4] Power Save Settings
• [5] Output Settings
• [6] Blank Page Print Settings
• [7] Density for Original Type
• [8] Page Number Print Position
• [2] Custom Display Settings
• [1] Copier Settings
• [2] Scan/Fax Settings
• [3] Copy Screen
• [4] FAX Active Screen
• [5] Color Selection Settings
• [6] Left Panel Display Default
• [7] Search Option Settings
• [4] Scan/Fax Settings
• [5] Printer Settings
• [1] Basic Settings
• [2] Paper Setting
• [3] PCL Setting
• [1] Font Settings
• [2] Symbol Set
• [3] Font Size
• [4] Line/Page
• [5] CR/LF Mapping
• [4] PS Setting
• [5] XPS Settings
• [6] TIFF Image Paper Setting
• [7] Print Reports
• [8] Image Shift Settings
• [9] Stamp settings
• [1] Date/Time Print Position
• [2] Date/Time Text Size
• [4] Page Number Text Size
• [5] Insert Sheet Page Numbering
• [6] Change Password
• [7] Change E-Mail Address
I-2
• [3] Administrator Settings

• [1] System Settings
• [1] Power Save Settings
• [2] Output Settings
• [1] Print/Fax Output Settings
• [2] Output Tray Settings
• [3] Shift Output Each Job
• [3] Date/Time Settings
• [4] Daylight Saving Time
• [5] Weekly Timer Settings
• [1] Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings
• [2] Time Settings
• [3] Date Settings
• [4] Select Time for Power Save
• [5] Password for Non-Business Hours
• [6] Restrict User Access
• [1] Copy Program Lock Settings
• [2] Delete Saved Copy Program
• [3] Restrict Access to Job Settings
• [4] Restrict Operation
• [7] Expert Adjustment
• [1] Density for Original Type
• [2] Erase Adjustment
• [3] Finisher Adjustment
• [4] Copy Protect Density Adj.
• [8] List/Counter
• [1] Management List
• [1] Job Settings List
• [2] Paper Size/Type Counter
• [3] Sales Counter List
• [9] Reset Setting
• [1] System Auto Reset
• [2] Auto Reset
• [3] Job Reset
• [4] System Auto Reset for Proof Copy
• [0] User Box Settings
• [1] Delete Unused User Box
• [2] Delete Secure Print Documents
• [3] Auto Delete Secure Document
• [4] Encrypted PDF Delete Time
• [5] ID & Print Delete Time
• [6] Document Hold Setting
• [7] External Memory Function Settings
• [8] ID & Print Delete after print setting
• [9] Document Delete Time Setting
• [1] Standard Size Setting
• [1] Header/Footer Settings
• [2] Fax TX Settings
• [3] Blank Page Print Settings
• [5] Job Skip Setting
• [6] Application Key Settings
• [2] Administrator/Machine Settings
• [1] Administrator Registration
• [2] Input Machine Address
• [3] One-Touch/User Box Registration
• [1] Create One-Touch Destination
• [1] E-Mail
• [2] User Box
• [3] Fax
• [4] PC (SMB)
• [5] FTP
• [6] WebDAV
• [7] IP Address Fax
• [8] Internet Fax
• [2] Group
• [3] E-Mail
• [1] E-Mail Subject
• [2] E-Mail Body
• [2] Create User Box
• [1] Public/Personal Use Box
• [2] Bulletin Board User Box
• [3] Relay User Box
• [4] Annotation User Box
• [3] One-Touch/User Box Registration List
• [1] Address Book List
I-3
• [2] Group List

• [3] Program List
• [4] E-Mail Subject/Text List
• [4] Maximum Number of User Boxes
• [4] User Authentication/Account Track
• [1] General Settings
• [2] User Authentication Settings
• [3] Account Track Settings
• [4] Print without Authentication
• [5] Print Counter List
• [6] External Server Settings
• [7] Limiting Access to Destinations
• [1] Create Group
• [2] Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations
• [3] Apply Levels/Groups to Users
• [8] Authentication Device Setting
• [9] Auth/Acct Track Common Setting
• [5] Network Settings
• [1] Network Setting
• [2] TCP/IP Settings
• [3] Netware Settings
• [1] IPX Settings
• [2] NetWare Print Settings
• [3] User Authentication Setting (NDS)
• [4] HTTP Server Settings
• [5] FTP Settings
• [1] FTP TX Settings
• [2] FTP Server Settings
• [6] SMB Settings
• [1] Client Settings
• [2] Print Settings
• [3] WINS Settings
• [4] Direct Hosting Setting
• [7] LDAP Settings
• [1] Enabling LDAP
• [2] Setting Up LDAP
• [3] Default LDAP Server Setting
• [8] E-Mail Settings
• [1] E-Mail TX (SMTP)
• [2] E-Mail RX (POP)
• [3] S/MIME Communication Settings
• [9] SNMP Settings
• [0] AppleTalk Settings
• [1] Bonjour Setting
• [2] TCP Socket Settings
• [1] TCP Socket
• [2] TCP Socket (ASCII Mode)
• [3] Network Fax Settings
• [1] Network Fax Function Settings
• [2] SMTP TX Settings
• [3] SMTP RX Settings
• [4] WebDAV Client Settings
• [1] WebDAV Client Settings
• [2] WebDAV Server Settings
• [6] Web Service Settings
• [1] Web Service Common Settings
• [3] Scanner Settings
• [7] SSDP Settings
• [8] IEEE802.1x Authentication Settings
• [8] Fax Settings
• [1] Header Information
• [2] Header/Footer Position
• [3] Line Parameter Setting
• [4] TX/RX Settings
• [5] Function Settings
• [1] Function ON/OFF Setting
• [3] Memory RX Setting
• [4] Closed Network RX
• [5] Forward TX Setting
• [7] Incomplete TX Hold
• [8] PC-Fax RX Setting
• [9] TSI User Box Setting
• [6] PBX Connection Setting
• [7] Report Settings
• [8] Job Settings List
I-4
• [9] Multi Line Settings

• [1] Line Parameter Setting
• [2] Function Settings
• [3] Multi Line Settings
• [4] Sender Fax No.
• [0] Network Fax Setting
• [9] System Connection
• [1] Open API Settings
• [2] Call Remote Center
• [0] Security Settings
• [1] Administrator Password
• [2] User Box Administrator Setting
• [3] Administrator Security Levels
• [4] Security Details
• [5] Enhanced Security Mode
• [6] HDD Settings
• [1] Check HDD Capacity
• [2] Overwrite Temporary Data
• [3] Overwrite All Data
• [4] HDD Lock Password
• [5] Format HDD
• [6] HDD Encryption Setting
• [7] Function Management Settings
• [3] Network Function Usage Settings
• [1] Apply Stamps
• [2] Delete Registered Stamp
• [0] Driver Password Encryption Setting
• [1] Flash Memory Lock Password
• [1] License Settings
• [1] Get Request Code
• [2] Install License
• [3] List of Enabled Functions
I-5
bizhub 501/421/361 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS

3.1 Priority for Adjustment/Setting after replacing parts
Conduct the following adjustment on the items list in this order when replacing the parts on the list. Proper operation/image quality is not
guaranteed without conducting those adjustment after the parts replacement.
NOTE
• After changing developer, be sure to avoid the printing operation before completion of the TCR adjustment.
• When replacing the NVRAM board (NRB), be sure to conduct the TCR adjustment after changing developer.
• When replacing the overall control board (OACB) due to the board being damaged, the NRB and CF card that have been provided
on the damaged OACB should be reused on a new OACB in principle. When the NRB and the data in the CF card are considered
to be damaged, be sure to refer to the support division of the authorized distributor.
Replacement parts/Others Description
After completion of PM PM Counter (Reset)
Drum PM Counter (Reset)
(Refer to F.4.3.2 Replacing the drum) LD1 Offset Adj.
LD2 Offset Adj.
Present Parts Life (Reset)
Developer TCR Adjustment
(Refer to F.4.5.2 Replacing developer) Toner Density Adjustment
Laser Diameter Adjustment
LD1 Offset Adj.
LD2 Offset Adj.
PM Counter (Reset)
Replacement parts related to fusing unit Present Parts Life (Reset)
(Refer to F.4.11Fusing section PM Counter (Reset)
Write unit Toner Density Adjustment
(Refer to F.4.2.1 Replacing the write unit) Laser Diameter Adjustment
LD1 Offset Adj.
LD2 Offset Adj.
Paper Feed Direction Adj. (Printer Area)
Print Positioning: Leading Edge (Printer Area)
Print Positioning: Side Edge (Printer Area)
Lead Edge Erase Adjustment
Slit glass Density Adj. (ADF)
Scanner wire, exposure/mirror unit Feed Direction Adjustment (Scan Area)
(Refer to G.2.2.15 Replacing the exposure Image Position: Leading Edge (Scan Area)
lamp and G.2.2.17 Stretching the scanner
wire) Cross Direction Adjustment (Scan Area)
Image Position: Side Edge (Scan Area)
Scan Position Adjustment (ADF)
DF Resist Loop Adj. (ADF)
(Refer to G.3.3.6 DF) Paper Feed Direction (ADF)
Lead Edge (ADF)
Side Edge (ADF)
Original Size Adj. (ADF)
Sensor Auto Adjustment (ADF)
Density Adj. (ADF)
Roller parts related to paper feed Printer Resist Loop
(Refer to F.4.8 Paper feed section) Paper Feed Direction Adj. (Printer Area)
Print Positioning: Leading Edge (Printer Area)
Feed Direction Adjustment (Scan Area)
CCD unit Paper Feed Direction Adj. (Printer Area)
(Refer to G.2.2.14 Removing/reinstalling the Feed Direction Adjustment (Scan Area)
CCD unit)
Cross Direction Adjustment (Scan Area)
Image Position: Leading Edge (Scan Area)
Paper Feed Direction (ADF)
Lead Edge (ADF)
Side Edge (ADF)
Density Adj. (ADF)
I-6
bizhub 501/421/361 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS
NVRAM board Print Positioning: Leading Edge (Printer Area)

Paper Feed Direction Adj. (Printer Area)
Printer Resist Loop
Image Position: Leading Edge (Scan Area)
Cross Direction Adjustment (Scan Area)
Feed Direction Adjustment (Scan Area)
Lead Edge Erase Adjustment
Non-Image Area Erase Check
TCR Adjustment
Toner Density Adjustment
Laser Diameter Adjustment
LD1 Offset Adj.
LD2 Offset Adj.
PM Counter (Set)
Paper Feed Direction (ADF)
Lead Edge (ADF)
Side Edge (ADF)
Resist Loop Adj. (ADF)
Original Size Adj. (ADF)
Density Adj. (ADF)
Sensor Auto Adjustment (ADF)
Center Staple Position (Finish)
Half-Fold Position (Finish)
Punch Horizontal Position (Finish)
Punch Resist Loop (Finish)
Replacement of CF card Initialize Flash memory Lock PW
(Refer to I.4.16.9 Initialize Flash Memory Lock ISW (MFP controller)
PW)
I-7
bizhub 501/421/361 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 4. SERVICE MODE
4. SERVICE MODE
4.1 List of service mode
This machine is provided with a service mode for various adjustments/settings. Data adjusted/set with this mode is stored in NVRAM board
(NRB).
• Machine
• Printer Area
• Print Positioning: Leading Edge
• Print Positioning: Side Edge
• Paper Feed Direction Adj.
• Printer Resist Loop
• Bypass Tray Adjustment
• Scan Area
• Image Position: Leading Edge
• Image Position: Side Edge
• Cross Direction Adjustment
• Feed Direction Adjustment
• Lead Edge Erase Adjustment
• Non-Image Area Erase Check
• Imaging Process Adjustment
• Charging Main Manual Adj.
• Transfer Manual Adj.
• Separation (AC) Manual Adj.
• Separation (DC) Manual Adj.
• Grid Charging Manual Adj.
• Bias Voltage Manual Adj.
• TCR Adjustment
• Toner Auto Supply
• Toner Density Adjustment
• Laser Diameter Adjustment
• LD1 Offset Adj.
• LD2 Offset Adj.
• LD1 Bias Adj.
• LD2 Bias Adj.
• Copy Protect Density Adj.
• System 1
• Marketing Area
• Tel/Fax Number
• Serial Number
• Trouble Isolation
• No Sleep
• Foolscap Size Setting
• Original Size Detection
• Original Glass Original Size Detect
• ADF Original Size Detect
• Original Glass Small Size Detect
• Detected Size Setting
• Install Date
• Initialization
• Utility/Administrator Setting Data
• Job memory Setting Data
• FAX Setting Data
• Network Setting Data
• Destination Storage Data
• CS Remote Care Setting Data
• Service Mode Setting (Adj.) Data
• Image Process Adj. Data
• Machine and ADF Adjustment Data
• Counter Data
• Drum Counter
• Fixing Counter
• All History Data
• Machine State LED Setting
• Counter
• Total Service
• Fax Communication Error
• Mode
• ADF Counter
• Service Call
• JAM
• Present Parts Life
• Optional Parts Life
• PM
• Reuse
• Each Size
• Paper Jam History
• Jam Counter History
I-8
• Time Series Trouble (SC)

• Each Section Trouble (SC)
• State Confirmation
• Sensor Check
• Load Check
• Memory/HDD Condition
• Memory/HDD Adjustment
• Memory Check
• HDD R/W Check
• HDD Format
• Adj. Data Table
• ADF
• Paper Feed Direction
• ADF Adjustment:Lead Edge
• ADF Adjustment:Side Edge
• Resist Loop Adj.
• Original Size Adj.
• Density Adj.
• Scan Position Adjustment
• Sensor Auto Adjustment
• Finisher
• Center Staple Position
• Half-Fold Position
• Punch Horizontal Position
• Punch Resist Loop
• Firmware Version
• CS Remote Care
• System 2
• Data Capture
• Paper Size Setting
• DipSW Setting
• ISW
• Option Installation
• OEM ON/OFF
• Network Fax Setting
• Internet ISW
• Driver Install
• Trouble Reset
• List Output
• Machine Management List
• Adjustments List
• Service Parameter
• Protocol Trace
• Fax Setting List
• Fax Analysis List
• Test Mode
• Full Image Halftone
• Gradation Pattern (No.2)
• Beam Gap Check
• Line Check Pattern
• Test Pattern Output Mode
• Running Mode
• Test Fax
• FAX
• Modem/NCU
• NetWork
• System
• Fax File Format
• Communication
• List Output
• Function Parameter
• Initialization
• Enhanced Security
• CE Password
• NetWork
• System
• CE Authentication
• Operation Ban release time
• Administrator unlocking
• Initialize Flash Memory Lock PW
• Billing Setting
• Counter Setting
• Management Function Choice
• License Management
I-9
4.2 Setting Method

This machine is provided with a service mode for various types of adjustments/settings. Data adjusted and/or set in this mode are stored in the
NVRAM board (NRB).
4.2.1 Start and exit of the service mode

You can access the service mode while the power is both turned ON and OFF. In either way, the started service mode is the same, but how to
exit differs.
(1) Starting and exiting service mode while the power is ON

1. Check to see if the regular copy screen is displayed.
2. Press the Utility/Counter key.
3. "Meter Count/ Utility screen"
Press [Meter Count] → [Check Details].
4. "Meter Count screen"
Press the Stop key and key pad in the order shown below.
Stop → 0 → 0 → Stop → 0 → 1
Note
• When the CE password is set, a password is required to input to enter the service mode.
5. "Service Mode screen"

The service mode is in the start-up condition.
6. Select an item to set.
The setup screen of each item is displayed.
7. Conduct required operations, and press [END/OK] after completion of the operations.
The setting made at step 6 becomes effective.
Press [Exit] to return to the regular copy screen.
(2) Starting and exiting service mode while the power is OFF
1. While pressing the Utility/Counter key, turn ON the power switch (SW2).
2. Trouble reset screen appears.
3. Press the [Trouble reset].
NOTE
• If a particular malfunction code does not occur, it is not necessary to press the [Trouble reset].
• If a particular malfunction code occurs, See "I.4.12.14 Trouble Reset".
4. On the Operation panel, press the following keys.

Stop → 0 → 0 → Stop → 0 → 1
5. Service Mode screen appears.
Note
• When the CE password has been set, you must enter the password to enter the service mode.
6. Press the key for an item you want to configure.

The setting screen for each item appears.
7. Conduct necessary operations and turn OFF the SW2 after completion of operations.
8. The new settings become effective after restart.
4.3 Machine Adjust

4.3.1 Print Positioning: Leading Edge (Printer Area)
Adjusts the leading edge timing of the printer image.
This adjustment is used to change the restart timing of paper of the registration roller and adjust the relative position in the sub scan direction of
the image against the paper.
The adjustment can be made for each paper feed (each tray, bypass feed and ADU). And for the bypass feed, it is possible to make an
adjustment for each type of paper (plain paper, thick paper, thin paper, OHP, envelope and label).
Note
• Be sure to complete the Paper Feed Direction Adj. (Printer Area) before starting this adjustment.
(See I.4.3.3 Paper Feed Direction Adj. (Printer Area))
(1) Procedure
Press [Machine].
2. "Machine Adjust screen"
Press [Printer Area].
3. "Printer Area screen"
Press [Print Positioning: Leading Edge].
4. "Print Positioning: Leading Edge screen"
Select an item to adjust and then press [Test Copy].
Note
• When [Batch] is pressed, no test copy is available.
5. "Test Copy screen"

With paper set in the tray selected, press the Start key to output the test pattern (No. 16).
When paper is fed from the bypass feed, set the corresponding type of paper. And then press the Start key to output the test pattern (No.
16).
I-10
6. Press [END].
7. Measure the leading edge timing with a scale.
Standard value [1]: 20 ± 0.5 mm
[1]
50gaf3c001na
8. "Print Positioning: Leading Edge screen"

Enter a value through the [+]/[-] or numeric keys and press [Setting].
Setting range: - 12.8 (shorter) to + 12.7 mm (longer)
1 step = 0.1 mm
Press [Restore] to return to a value before change.
9. Repeat steps 4 to 8 until it gets within the standard value.
10. Press [END].
4.3.2 Print Positioning: Side Edge (Printer Area)

Changes the laser write timing and also changes the image position on the drum in the main scan direction to adjust the mis-centering of the
printer image.
For each paper feed (each tray, bypass feed, ADU) and for each paper size (common, small size, large size), the adjustment can be made.
Note
• Be sure to complete the Cross Direction Adjustment (Scan Area) before making this adjustment
(1) Procedure
Press [Machine].
Press [Printer Positioning: Side Edge].
4. "Print Positioning: Side Edge screen"
Select an item to adjust and press [Test Copy].
Note

With paper set in the tray selected, press the Start key to output the test pattern (No. 16).
6. Press [END].
7. Fold the output paper into two in the main scan direction to check it for any discrepancy against the center line of the print.
Standard value: 0 ± 1.5 mm or less
8. "Print Positioning: Side Edge screen"
Setting range: - 4.77 (image: to the rear) to + 4.77 (image: to the front) mm
1 step = 0.09 mm
10. Press [END].
4.3.3 Paper Feed Direction Adj. (Printer Area)

(1) Printer
Adjusts the magnification of the printer in the sub scan direction.
This adjustment is used to change uniformly the process speed of the drum and the registration roller and change the magnification in the sub
scan direction of the image on the drum.
The adjustment can be made for each type of paper (normal paper, OHP, thick paper, envelope, label and custom paper)
Note
• The background of the test pattern to be output is fogging. However, this is not abnormal.
• For thin paper, the setting of normal paper is applicable.
(a) Procedure
Press [Machine].
Press [Paper Feed Direction Adj.]
4. "Paper Feed Direction Adj. screen"
Press [Printer].
5. Select an item for the type of paper and press [Test Copy].
I-11

Set A3 (for metric) or 11 x 17 (for inch) paper that is the type of paper selected. And then press the Start key to output the test pattern
(No. 16).
7. Press [END].
8. Measure the magnification in the sub scan direction with a scale.
Standard value [1]: ± 0.5% or less (190 ± 1 mm or less)
[1]
50gaf3c002na

Setting range (normal paper): - 5.0 (smaller) to + 5.0 % (larger)
Setting range (other than the above): - 2.0 (smaller) to + 2.0 % (larger)
1 step = 0.1 %
11. Press [END].
(2) Printer
Makes appropriate a paper feed loop amount between the registration roller and the fusing roller to prevent the transfer slippage at the
position about 26 mm from the trailing edge of the transfer paper.
The adjustment can be made for each type of paper (normal paper, OHP, thick paper, envelope, label, custom paper and user paper).
Note
• This adjustment checks copy image to see if there occurs no transfer jitter. When it is difficult to check transfer jitter at copy
image, be sure to set "1" for DipSW37-2 before adjustment. By this setting, test pattern will be printed.
• Printer magnification in the paper through direction: The adjustment of the printer should have been completed. (See I.4.3.3.(1)
Printer)
• For thin paper, the setting of normal paper is applicable.
(a) Procedure
Press [Machine].
Press [Paper Feed Direction Adj.]
Press [Fixing Motor Clock].
5. Select an item for the type of paper and press [Test Copy].
• Place the original onto the original glass.
• Set A3 (for metric) or 11 x 17 (for inch) paper that is the type of paper selected. With the print count set at 5, press the Start key.
7. Press [END].
8. Check all of the 5 output sheets; copy or print, of paper to see if there occurs no transfer jitter.
Approx.26mm
50gaf3c018na

Setting range (normal paper): - 5.0 (smaller) to + 5.0 % (larger)
Setting range (user paper): - 0.5 (smaller) to + 0.5 % (larger)
Setting range (other than the above): - 2.0 (smaller) to + 2.0 % (larger)
1 step = 0.1 %
Press [Restore] to return to the value before change.
11. Press [END].
4.3.4 Printer Resist Loop

Adjusts the paper loop amount at the registration roller section to adjust a paper skew, wrinkles, or a jam at the registration section.
I-12
The adjustment can be made for each paper feed (each tray, bypass feed and ADU) and for each paper size (large size, intermediate size and
small size). And for the bypass feed, it is also possible to make an adjustment for each type of paper (normal paper, thick paper, thin paper,
OHP, envelope, and label).
(1) Procedure
Press [Machine].
Press [Printer Resist Loop].
3. "Printer Resist Adjustment screen"
Select an item to adjust and press [Test Copy].
Note

With the paper selected set in the tray, press the Start key to output the test pattern (No. 16).
5. Press [END].
6. Check to see if there occurs no paper skew, wrinkle, or jam at the registration section.
7. "Printer Resist Adjustment screen"
Setting range:
For bypass feed thick paper (large/small), bypass feed thin paper (large/small), bypass feed OHP (large/small), bypass feed envelope and
bypass feed label (large/small):
- 16.64 (smaller) to + 16.51 mm (larger)
1 step = 0.13 mm
For other than the above:
o Setting range for bizhub 501: - 32.00 to + 31.75 mm 1 step = 0.25 mm
9. Press [END].
4.3.5 Bypass Tray Adjustment

Conduct this adjustment when the paper size of the bypass tray is not detected correctly.
(1) Procedure
Press [Machine].
Press [Bypass Tray Adjustment].
3. "Bypass Tray Adjustment screen"
Press [Max. Width] to expand the guide plate of the bypass tray to the maximum, and then press the Start key.
4. When the adjustment is completed normally, "OK" is displayed in the "Result" area.
5. Press [Min. Width] to narrow the guide plate of the bypass tray to the minimum, and then press the Start key.
6. When the adjustment is completed normally, "OK" is displayed in the "Result" area.
7. Press [Test Copy].
Check to see if the size of paper set in the bypass tray is detected correctly and then press [END].
9. Repeat steps 3 to 8 when the paper size is not correct.
10. Press [END].
4.3.6 Image Position: Leading Edge (Scan Area)

Adjusts the leading edge timing while in the scan in the platen mode.
This adjustment is used to adjust the position at which the read is started in the sub scan direction while the original is being scanned by the
exposure unit.
(1) Procedure
Press [Machine].
Press [Scan Area].
3. "Scan Area screen"
Press [Image Position: Leading Edge].
4. "Scan Area (Image Position: Leading Edge) screen"
Press [Test Copy].
With the test chart set on the original glass, select A3 (for metric) or 11 x 17 (for inch) paper and press the Start key.
6. Press [OK].
7. Check the scanner leading edge position (original glass).
Standard value:a. Envelope 0 ± 2.5 mm or less
b. Other paper 0 ± 1.5 mm or less
8. "Scan Area (Image Position: Leading Edge) screen"
Setting range: - 2.0 (shorter) to +2.0 mm (longer)
I-13
1 step = 0.1 mm
10. Press [END].
4.3.7 Image Position: Side Edge (Scan Area)

Adjusts the mis-centering of the image in the main scan direction while in the scan in the platen mode.
Note
• Be sure that the adjustment of the Print Position: Side Edge has been completed.
(See I.4.3.2 Print Positioning: Side Edge (Printer Area))
(1) Procedure
Press [Machine].
Press [Scan Area].
Press [Image Position: Side Edge].
4. "Scan Area (Image Position: Side Edge) screen"
Press [Test Copy].
6. Press [OK].
7. Fold the output paper into two at the center in the main scan direction and check it for discrepancy against the center line of the print.
Setting range: - 2.96 (image: to the rear) to + 2.96 mm (image: to the front)
1 step = 0.04 mm
10. Press [END].
4.3.8 Cross Direction Adjustment (Scan Area)

Adjusts the magnification of the image in the main scan direction while in the scan in the platen mode and in the DF mode.
(1) Procedure
Press [Machine].
Press [Scan Area].
Press [Cross Direction Adjustment].
4. "Scan Area (Cross Direction Adjustment) screen"
Press [Test Copy].
With the test chart set on the original glass or ADF, select A3 (for metric) or 11 x 17 (for inch) paper and press the Start key.
6. Press [OK].
7. Measure the magnification in the main scan direction with a scale.
Standard value [1]: ± 0.5 % or less (200 ± 1 mm or less)
[1]
50gaf3c003na

Setting range: - 5,0 (smaller) to + 5.0% (larger)
1 step = 0.1%
10. Press [END].
4.3.9 Feed Direction Adjustment (Scan Area)

Adjusts the magnification of the image in the sub scan direction while in the scan on the original glass.
This adjustment is used to change the scan speed of the exposure unit.
(1) Procedure
I-14
Press [Machine].
Press [Scan Area].
Press [Feed Direction Adjustment].
4. "Scan Area (Feed Direction Adjustment) screen"
Press [Test Copy].
6. Press [OK].
7. Measure the magnification in the sub scan direction with a scale.
Standard value [1]: ± 0.5 % or less (200 ± 1 mm or less)
[1]
50gaf3c004na
8. "Scan Area (Feed Direction Adjustment) screen"

Setting range: - 1.00 (smaller) to + 1.00% (larger)
1 step = 0.05%
10. Press [END].
4.3.10 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment

Adjusts the leading edge erasure amount.
(1) Procedure
Press [Machine].
Press [Lead Edge Erase Adjustment].
3. "Lead Edge Erase Adjustment screen"
Press [Test Copy].
With A3 (for metric) or 11 x 17 (for inch) paper selected, press the Start key to output the test pattern (No. 16).
5. Press [OK].
6. Check the printer leading edge erasure amount.
Standard value [1]: 3.5 mm or less
[1]
50gaf3c005na
7. "Lead Edge Erase Adjustment screen"

Setting range: - 2.0 (erasure: smaller) to + 2.0 mm (erasure: larger)
1 step = 0.1 mm
9. Press [END].
I-15
4.3.11 Non-Image Area Erase Check

When installing this machine, or when moving its installation location, check to see if the non-image area erase check mechanism of the copy
applied setting operates correctly in its installation location, and adjust automatically the sensitivity with which the non-image area is detected.
Pre-arrangements:
• Open DF fully to the limit.
• Avoid putting anything on the original glass.
• Clean the original glass.
(1) Procedure
Press [Machine].
Press [Non-Image Area Erase Check].
3. "Non-Image Area Erase Check screen"
Press the Start key.
4. Check to see if "OK" is displayed.
5. Press [OK].
When anything other than "OK" is displayed, see "(2) Problems and their countermeasures" to check again the non-image area erase
setting.
(2) Problems and their countermeasures

When a problem is detected by checking the non-image area erase check, an error number is displayed as shown below.
(a) Error 1
Countermeasure - 1
When the non-image area erase function is not used very frequently, or when copy originals that have a dark background are not copied
very frequently in non-image area erase, the copier can be used in the current installation location. However, when copy originals that have
a dark background are frequently copied, install the copier in a location where less external light gets in (darker) than the present location,
and check the non-image area erase check mode again.
(b) Error 2
Countermeasure - 2
When the non-image area erase function is not used very frequently, the copier can be used in the current installation location. However, if
the non-image area erase function is frequently used, install the copier in a location where less external light gets in (darker) than the
present location, and check the non-image area erase check mode again. At this time, when there is a bright light source such as a
fluorescent light installed directly above the copier, reconsider the installation location, or take some measures to shield the light source and
check the mode again.
4.4 Imaging Process Adjustment

4.4.1 Charging Main Manual Adj.
Do not conduct this adjustment in the field.
4.4.2 Transfer Manual Adj.

4.4.3 Separation (AC) Manual Adj.

4.4.4 Separation (DC) Manual Adj.

4.4.5 Grid Charging Manual Adj.

4.4.6 Bias Voltage Manual Adj.

4.4.7 TCR Adjustment

When changing developer, conduct this adjustment before starting the copy operation. The developer counter is automatically reset.
Note
• When changing developer, be sure not to conduct the copy operation before completion of the TCR adjustment.
(1) Procedure
Press [Imaging Process Adjustment].
2. "Process screen"
Press [TCR Adjustment].
3. "TCR Adjustment screen"
Press the Start key.
4. Check to see if "OK is displayed, and also check the TCR adjustment data value.
I-16
Note
• The adjustment is completed in about 180 seconds.
• When there occurs a TCR adjustment error due to the developer agitating operation not completed successfully, the
message "operating ..." disappears and an error code is displayed.
(See I.4.3.1 Print Positioning: Leading Edge (Printer Area))
5. Press [OK].
4.4.8 Toner Auto Supply

Since this is normally conducted automatically, do not conduct this adjustment in the field.
4.4.9 Toner Density Adjustment

This adjustment can be used to increase and/or decrease the toner density of developer.
Use this adjustment when an image fogging occurs due to the increased toner density of developer and you want to decrease the toner density.
(1) Procedure
2. "Process screen"
Press [Toner Density Adjustment].
3. "Toner Density Adjustment screen"
Enter a value through the [+]/[-] or numeric keys.
Setting range: - 2 (toner density reduced) to + 2 (toner density increased)
1 step = 1
Note
• The set value is a value relative to the present set value. When the set value is set to "0," this returns the toner density back
to the normal level.
4. Press the Start key.

5. While in the adjustment, a message "operating ..." is displayed. And after completion of the adjustment, it disappears.
Note
• The toner density is automatically adjusted according to a value set.
• When an error code is displayed while in the toner density adjustment, be sure to check the expected defective parts given
in the error code list and then conduct again the toner density adjustment.
(See I.4.3.1 Print Positioning: Leading Edge (Printer Area))
6. Press [OK].
4.4.10 Laser Diameter Adjustment

The MPC value can be corrected by entering a set value to change the image density (dot diameter).
Major cases in which this adjustment is used.
• When you want to change the image density.
• When replacing the write unit or TCSB (toner control sensor board), or when cleaning the dust proof glass.
(1) Procedure
2. "Process screen"
Press [Laser Diameter Adjustment].
3. "Laser Diameter Adjustment screen"
Setting range: - 3 (thinner) to + 3 (denser)
1 step = 1
Note
• When an adjustment is made in the denser direction, this increases the dot diameter with the toner consumption also
increased.

5. While in the adjustment, a message "operating ..." is displayed. And after completion of the adjustment, it disappears.
6. Press [OK].
4.4.11 LD1 Offset Adj. / LD2 Offset Adj.

Adjusts the 2 laser beam amount (LD1/LD2) equally.
Be sure to make this adjustment when replacing the write unit, drum and developer.
Note
• Make sure that the TCR adjustment, the toner density adjustment and the dot diameter adjustment have been completed.
(1) Procedure
2. "Process screen"
With an item displayed by [▲]/[▼], press "LD1 Offset Adj." / "LD2 Offset Adj.".
3. "LD1 Offset Adj. screen" / "LD2 Offset Adj. screen"
Select "Normal Paper" or "Thick Paper" and press [Test Copy].
I-17

With corresponding A3 (for metric) or 11 x 17 (for inch) paper set, press the Start key to output the test pattern.
5. Press [END].
6. Check the test pattern.
Standard value: Check to see if the density of the image patterns created by LD1/LD2 is the same, and if the starts of the patterns in the
high-lighted section are aligned between the 2 reference lines [1] (± 1 gap is OK).
[1] Reference lines
[1]
LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2 LD1 LD2
50gaf3c006na
7. "LD1 Offset Adj. screen" / "LD2 Offset Adj. screen"

When outside the standard value, enter a value through the [+]/[-] or numeric keys and press [Setting].
Setting range: - 128 (thinner) to + 127 (denser)
1 step = 1 (Pressing the button for a long period allows the value to be changed in increments of 10 steps.)
8. Repeat steps 2 to 7 until it gets inside the standard value.
9. Press [OK].
4.4.12 LD1 Bias Adj. / LD2 Bias Adj.

4.4.13 Copy Protect Density Adj.

Adjusts the image density of the "disappeared side" when it is copied.
Since the image density of the disappeared side is changed by the installation environment or the toner density, adjust it to the best copy protect
image density.
(1) Procedure
2. "Process screen"
With an item displayed by [▲]/[▼], press "Copy Protect Density Adj.".
3. "Copy Protect Density Adj. screen"
Enter a density setting value and press [Setting].
Setting range: 64 (lighter) to 255 (darker)
Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
Note
• Since the density setting with [Lighter], [Normal], and [Darker] adjusts the image density entirely, set it to [Auto].
6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 until the density gets suitably adjusted.

7. Press [OK].
4.5 System 1
4.5.1 Marketing Area
Sets the marketing area of the main body and the fax.
• Marketing area of the main body:
By setting the marketing area, the definition of the original detection size and the paper size will be changed.
And the selectable languages in "Marketing Area screen" varies according to the marketing area of the firmware.
Japan US Europe Other1 Other2 Other3 Other4
Japan America Europe Saudi Arabia / Asia-Pacific China Taiwan
Brazil
• Fax Target:
US (America), CA (Canada), JP (Japan), AU (Australia), NZ (New Zealand), EU (Europe), DE (Germany), GB (England), FR (France), CH
(Switzerland), NL (Netherlands), BE (Belgium), AT (Austria), NO (Norway), SE (Sweden), FI (Finland), IE (Ireland), DK (Denmark), IT (Italy),
ES (Spain), PT (Portuguese), PL (Poland), ZA (South Africa), TW (Taiwan), SA (Saudi Arabia), CN (China), MY (Malaysia), SG (Singapore),
KR (Korea), HK (Hong Kong), BR (Brazil), AR (Argentine), OT (General)
I-18
(1) Procedure
Press [System 1].
2. "System Input screen"
Press [Marketing Area].
3. "Marketing Area screen"
Press [Japan] to [Other 4] to select a marketing area.
4. When no FK-502 is provided, press [END] to complete the marketing area.
When FK-502 is provided, press [Fax Target].
5. "Fax Target screen"
Select the marketing area of the fax by [+]/[-].
6. Press [END] for registration.
7. "Marketing Area screen"
Press [END] to complete the marketing area.
4.5.2 Tel/Fax Number

Sets the telephone number and the fax number of the service station that are displayed on the screen when a service call occurs.
These telephone and fax numbers are also displayed as the service center contact of the basic screen help of the user screen.
(1) Procedure
Press [System 1].
Press [Tel/Fax Number].
3. "Service Telephone/Fax Number Setting"
Press [TEL] or [FAX].
4. Enter the telephone number or fax number through the copy count setting key.
5. When setting both the telephone number and the fax number, repeat steps 3 to 4.
6. Press [END].
Note
• Pressing the Clear key erases all the figures of the items selected.
4.5.3 Serial Number

Sets and displays the serial numbers of the main body and the optional devices.
CAUTION
• Be absolutely sure not to change the serial numbers of the main body set when installing them. Otherwise, a fusing temperature
abnormality may result.
(1) Procedure
Press [System 1].
Press [Serial Number].
A serial number that is registered is displayed.
3. "Serial Number Input screen"
Press a device to be registered: [Printer (Body)], [Option Tray], [LCT], [Finisher], [Fax #1], [Fax #2], [Punch Kit], [Suddle Kit], [Mail Bin Kit].
4. "Soft Keyboard screen"
Enter a serial number through the alphabet and numeric keys.
Press the Start key to output the test pattern.
6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 to enter the serial number of each device.
7. Press [OK].
4.5.4 Trouble Isolation

When each function (device) is in trouble, isolating a trouble allows the limited use of this machine.
(1) Procedure
Press [System 1].
Press [Trouble Isolation].
3. "Trouble Isolation screen"
Press [1] or [2] to display an item and set the isolation by [Set] or [Unset] of each item.
4. Press [END].
4.5.5 No Sleep
Sets the availability/unavailability of the sleep while in the administrator mode.
(1) Procedure
Press [System 1].
Press [No Sleep].
I-19
3. "No Sleep screen"

Set the availability/unavailability of the sleep by [Permit] or [Prohibit].
4. Press [END].
4.5.6 Foolscap Size Setting

Sets the Foolscap size.
(1) Procedure
Press [System 1].
Press [Foolscap Size Setting].
3. "Foolscap Size Setting screen"
Press [81/2 x 13], [81/4 x 13], [81/8 x 131/4] or [8 x 13] to set a Foolscap size.
4. Press [END].
4.5.7 Original Size Detection

Sets the detection size of the original size on the original glass and ADF.
(1) Procedure
Press [System 1].
Press [Original Size Detection].
3. Press [Original Glass Original Size Detect] of the menu.
4. "Original Glass Original Size Detect screen"
Press one of the 4 types to set a size series to be detected on the original glass.
5. Press [ADF Original Size Detect] of the menu.
6. "ADF Original Size Detect screen"
Press one of the 4 types to set a size series to be detected on ADF.
7. Press [Original Glass Small Size Detect] of the menu.
8. "Original Glass Small Size Detect screen"
Press either [Detected Size] or [A4S / 81/2 x 11S] to set the minimum size to be detected on the original glass.
9. Press [OK].
4.5.8 Detected Size Setting

Sets the size detection of the bypass tray and those other than the bypass tray in B series or K size (8K/16K size).
(1) Procedure
Press [System 1].
Press [Detected Size Setting].
3. "8K/16K Select screen"
Press [B series] or [K size] to set the size series to be detected.
4. Press [END].
4.5.9 Install Date

Sets the start date of the total counter.
(1) Procedure
Press [System 1].
Press [Install Date].
3. "Install Date screen"
Press Year (4 digits), Month (2 digits), Day (2 digits) with the copy count setting key and press [Entry].
4. Check the display "The present contents of a setting" to see if it is replaced with a set value that has been input.
5. Press [END].
4.5.10 Initialization.
Initializes the setting/adjustment data controlled in non-volatile memory to the value set when shipped from the factory.
Data that can be initialized are as follows.
Data classification Data
Utility/Administrator Setting Data • Job Memory Setting Data
• FAX Setting Data
• Network Setting Data
Destination Storage Data
CS Remote Care Setting Data
Service Mode Setting (Adj.) Data • Image Process Adj. Data
I-20
• Machine and ADF Adjustment Data

Counter Data • Drum Counter
• Fixing Counter
All History Data
(1) Procedure
Press [System 1].
Press [Initialization].
3. "Initialize screen"
Press either one of the data items in the data classification.
4. "Utility / Administrator Setting Data" / "Destination Storage Data" / "CS Remote Care Setting Data" / "Service Mode Setting (Adj.) Data" /
"Counter Data" / "All History Data"
Select a data to initialize.
Pressing [All Select] selects all the data items in the data classification.
5. Pressing the Start key initializes the data selected of the data classification selected.
6. When initializing the data of each classification, repeat steps 3 to 5.
7. Press [OK].
4.5.11 Machine State LED Setting.

(1) Functions
• To set how to display main body statuses on the machine state LED.
(2) Use
• Type1 and Type2 has the following LED display forms.
Machine State LED Setting Type1 Type2
Warning statuses Attention Blinking Blinking
• Toner supply door open
• Improper toner cartridge placement
Near life Blinking Unlit
Alert code Unlit Unlit
Trouble isolation Blinking Blinking
Fatal error Lit Lit
• Trouble code
• Jam
• Door opened
Exit tray full Lit Lit
(3) Setting/ Procedure

• Each default setting is Type1.
"Type 1" Type 2
4.6 Counter
4.6.1 Display of the Counter
Displays the following data held by this machine on the touch panel.
The counter can be also checked by the output list, CSRemoteCare.
• Total Service
• Fax Communication Error
• Mode
• ADF Counter
• Service call
• JAM
• Present parts life
• Optional parts life
• PM
• Reuse
• Each size
• Paper Jam History
• Jam counter history
• Time series trouble (SC)
• Each section trouble (SC)
(1) Procedure
Press [Counter].
2. "Counter screen"
Press a counter item you want to check.
The counter spread over 2 pages. The displayed page can be switched over by [▲] or [▼].
I-21
3. Each "Counter screen"

When there are two or more pages of items, the page can be switched over by [▲] or [▼].
Note
• For the individual data check screens of "JAM Counter History" and "Each Section Trouble (SC)," [Clear Counter] is
displayed.
Pressing [Clear Counter] displays "Clear Counter Check screen" and pressing [Yes] clears the block data. Pressing [No] returns to the
previous screen with no block data cleared. While in the visit to the user for the PM execution, clear these data to check the JAM and SC
counts that have occurred since the previous visit.
4. Press [OK].
(2) Total Service

Displays the total copy count printed in the service mode and the user mode.
Note
• The maximum count is 99,999,999.
No. CSRC Item collected Count condition
parameter
1 - Total Service Number of paper printed and exited in the single and double
sided copy modes.
2 - Total Service (2-Sides) Of the above, the number of paper printed and exited in the
double sided print mode.
(3) FAX Communication Error

Displays the number of errors that occurred while in sending and receiving FAX with errors while in sending separated from those while in
receiving.
Note
• The maximum count is 999,999.
parameter
1 - FAX TX Error Number of errors that occurred while in the FAX sending.
2 - FAX RX Error Number of error that occurred while in the FAX receiving.
(4) Mode
Displays the use condition for each of the modes used by the copier/scanner/printer/FAX.
Note
No. CSRC Item Count condition
parameter
(F1)
1 01 No. of Prints in Half-Fold Mode 1 count made while in the folding exit.
2 02 No. of Prints in Center Staple Mode 1 count made while in the stitch-and-fold exit.
3 05 No. of Staples 1 1 count for 1 staple when stapling in the 1-staple mode.
4 06 No. of Staples 2 1 count for 1 staple when stapling in the 2-staple mode.
5 07 No. of Punches 1 count made while in the punch.
6 08 BOX Housing: Copy - Proof Print 1 count for each completion of a job.
7 09 BOX Housing: Copy - BOX Hold 1 count for each completion of a job.
8 0A BOX Housing: Print - Proof Print
9 0B BOX Housing: Print - BOX Hold
10 0C BOX Housing: Print
- Classified Document
11 0D BOX Housing: Scanner - BOX Hold
12 0F BOX Housing: FAX RX
- Distribute by F-Code
13 10 BOX Housing: FAX RX - Distribute by TSI
14 11 BOX Housing: FAX RX - BOX Hold 1 count for each completion of a job. F code and other than
TSI.
15 12 Output from Box: Copy Image - Print 1 count for each completion of a job. Except for the print for
checking.
16 13 Output from Box: Copy Image 1 count for each completion of a job.
- E-Mail TX
17 14 Output from Box: Copy Image - FTP TX
18 15 Output from Box: Copy Image - SMB TX
19 16 Output from Box: Print Image 1 count for each completion of a job. Except for the print for
- Print (Except Proof Print) checking.
20 17 Output from Box: Print Image - E-Mail TX 1 count for each completion of a job
21 18 Output from Box: Print Image - FTP TX
I-22
22 19 Output from Box: Print Image - SMB TX

23 1A Output from Box: Scan Image - Print (Except 1 count for each completion of a job. Except for the print for
Proof Print) checking.
24 1B Output from Box: Scan Image 1 count for each completion of a job
- E-Mail TX
25 1C Output from Box: Scan Image - FTP TX
26 1D Output from Box: Scan Image - SMB TX
27 1E Output from Box: FAX Scan Image 1 count for each completion of a job. Except for the print for
- Print (Except Proof Print) checking.
28 1F Output from Box: FAX Scan Image 1 count for each completion of a job
- FAX/IFAX TX
29 20 Output from Box: FAX Scan Image
- E-Mail/IFAX TX
30 21 Output from Box: FAX RX Image - Print (Except 1 count for each completion of a job. Except for the print for
Proof Print) checking.
31 22 Output from Box: FAX RX Image 1 count for each completion of a job
- FAX TX
32 23 Output from Box: FAX RX Image
- E-Mail/IFAX TX
(5) ADF Counter

Displays the number of the paper through by modes of ADF.
Note
• 1 count for the single sided copy and 2 counts for the double sided copy.
parameter
1 - N of originals fed in ADF mode
2 - N of originals fed in RADF mode
N of originals fed in RDH mode No count is made with "0" at all times.
N of originals fed in RRDH mode No count is made with "0" at all times.
N of originals fed in mixed original ADF mode
N of originals fed in mixed original RADF mode
N of 1-sided Z-Fold original fed
N of 2-sided Z-Fold original fed
N of 2 sided SDF original fed No count is made with "0" at all times.
(6) Service Call

Displays troubles that have occurred for each SC.
Note
• The block trouble count is not available for CSRC.
• When the service mode DipSW3-1 is set to "1" (latched), SC34, 35 and 36 make no count.
No. CSRC SC No. CSRC SC No. CSRC SC
parameter cord parameter cord parameter cord
(E0) (E0) (E0)
001 00 02 01 018 11 11 07 035 22 22 02
002 01 02 02 019 12 11 08 036 23 23 01
003 02 02 03 020 13 11 09 037 24 23 02
004 03 02 04 021 14 11 10 038 25 23 03
005 04 02 05 022 15 11 11 039 26 24 01
006 05 02 06 023 16 11 12 040 27 24 02
007 06 02 07 024 17 11 13 041 28 24 03
008 07 03 01 025 18 11 14 042 29 27 01
009 08 10 01 026 19 11 15 043 2A 27 02
010 09 10 02 027 1A 11 16 044 2B 27 03
011 0A 10 03 028 1B 11 17 045 2C 28 01
012 0B 11 01 029 1C 11 18 046 2D 28 02
013 0C 11 02 030 1D 11 19 047 2E 28 03
014 0D 11 03 031 1E 11 20 048 2F 28 04
015 0E 11 04 032 1F 11 21 049 30 32 01
016 0F 11 05 033 20 20 01 050 31 33 01
017 10 11 06 034 21 22 01 051 32 33 02
I-23
052 33 35 01 093 5D B1 12 134 86 B1 65

053 34 35 02 094 5E B1 13 135 87 B1 66
054 35 37 01 095 5F B1 14 136 88 B1 67
055 36 38 01 096 60 B1 15 137 89 B1 68
056 37 38 02 097 61 B1 16 138 8A B1 69
057 38 38 03 098 62 B1 17 139 8B B1 70
058 39 38 04 099 63 B1 18 140 8C B1 71
059 3A 38 05 100 64 B1 19 141 8D B1 72
060 3B 38 06 101 65 B1 20 142 8E B1 73
061 3C 38 07 102 66 B1 22 143 8F B1 74
062 3D 38 08 103 67 B1 23 144 90 B1 75
063 3E 39 01 104 68 B1 25 145 91 B1 76
064 3F 39 02 105 69 B1 26 146 92 B1 77
065 40 39 03 106 6A B1 27 147 93 B1 78
066 41 39 04 107 6B B1 28 148 94 B1 80
067 42 40 01 108 6C B1 29 149 95 B1 81
068 43 41 01 109 6D B1 30 150 96 B1 82
069 44 44 01 110 6E B1 31 151 97 B1 83
070 45 47 01 111 6F B1 32 152 98 B1 84
071 46 50 01 112 70 B1 33 153 99 B1 85
072 47 50 02 113 71 B1 34 154 9A B1 86
073 48 50 03 114 72 B1 35 155 9B B1 87
074 4A 53 01 115 73 B1 36 156 9C B1 88
075 4B 53 02 116 74 B1 37 157 9D C1 03
076 4C 53 03 117 75 B1 40 158 9E C1 81
077 4D 54 01 118 76 B1 41 159 9F C1 82
078 4E 54 02 119 77 B1 42 160 A0 C1 83
079 4F 60 01 120 78 B1 43 161 - C1 90
080 50 60 02 121 79 B1 44 162 - C1 91
081 51 60 03 122 7A B1 45 163 - C1 92
082 52 61 01 123 7B B1 46 164 - C1 93
083 53 62 01 124 7C B1 50 165 - C1 94
084 54 67 01 125 7D B1 51 166 - C1 A0
085 55 67 02 126 7E B1 52 167 - C1 A1
086 56 80 01 127 7F B1 53 168 - C1 A2
087 57 83 01 128 80 B1 54 169 - C1 A3
088 58 B0 01 129 81 B1 60 170 - C1 A4
089 59 B0 02 130 82 B1 61 171 A1 C2 84
090 5A B0 03 131 83 B1 62 172 A2 C2 85
091 5B B1 10 132 84 B1 63 173 A3 C2 86
092 5C B1 11 133 85 B1 64 174 A4 C2 87
175 A5 C2 88 200 B5 E0 83 225 CE E0 9C
176 E5 C2 89 201 B6 E0 84 226 CF E0 9D
177 A6 D0 01 202 B7 E0 85 227 D0 E0 9E
178 A7 D0 02 203 B8 E0 86 228 D1 E0 9F
179 - D0 05 204 B9 E0 87 229 D2 E0 A0
180 A8 D2 01 205 BA E0 88 230 D3 E0 A1
181 E4 D2 02 206 BB E0 89 231 D4 E0 A2
182 A9 D2 03 207 BC E0 8A 232 D5 E0 A3
183 AA D2 81 208 BD E0 8B 233 D6 E0 A4
184 AB D2 82 209 BE E0 8C 234 D7 E0 A5
185 E6 D3 01 210 BF E0 8D 235 D8 E0 A6
186 E7 D3 02 211 C0 E0 8E 236 D9 E0 A7
187 EA D3 03 212 C1 E0 8F 237 DA E0 A8
188 E8 D4 01 213 C2 E0 90 238 DB E0 A9
189 E9 D5 01 214 C3 E0 91 239 DC E0 AA
190 - D6 01 215 C4 E0 92 240 DD E0 AB
191 AC E0 01 216 C5 E0 93 241 DE E0 AC
192 AD E0 02 217 C6 E0 94 242 DF E0 AD
I-24
193 AE E0 03 218 C7 E0 95 243 E0 E0 AE

194 AF E0 04 219 C8 E0 96 244 E1 E0 AF
195 B0 E0 05 220 C9 E0 97 245 E2 E0 B0
196 B1 E0 06 221 CA E0 98 246 E3 E0 B1
197 B2 E0 07 222 CB E0 99 247 - FA 50
198 B3 E0 81 223 CC E0 9A FA 51
199 B4 E0 82 224 CD E0 9B
(7) Time Series Trouble (SC)

For the latest 50 SC's, displays the SC code of cause, the total count, the date of occurrence, the time of occurrence, and the firmware
version.
Note
• Press the corresponding SC item to display a firmware version.
(8) JAM Counter History

Displays the number of occurrences for each jam code. (Except for stationary jams)
Note
• Press the corresponding SC item to display a firmware version.
• The jam code is a code that is displayed when DipSW10-7 is set at "1."
No. CSRC Jam No. CSRC Jam No. CSRC Jam
parameter cord parameter cord parameter cord
(J0) (J0) (J0)
Upper Lower Upper Lower Upper Lower
01 00 10 0 30 1D 32 0 59 3A 63 8
02 01 11 0 31 1E 33 0 60 3B 66 1
03 02 12 0 32 1F 34 0 61 3C 66 2
04 03 12 1 33 20 50 1 62 3D 66 3
05 04 13 0 34 21 60 1 63 3E 66 4
06 05 13 1 35 22 60 2 64 3F 66 5
07 06 13 2 36 23 61 1 65 40 66 6
08 07 13 5 37 24 61 2 66 41 66 7
09 08 13 6 38 25 61 3 67 42 66 8
10 09 13 7 39 26 61 4 68 43 72 16
11 0A 13 8 40 27 61 5 69 51 72 1
12 0B 13 9 41 28 61 6 70 52 72 2
13 0C 13 11 42 29 61 7 71 53 72 3
14 0D 14 0 43 2A 61 8 72 54 72 4
15 0E 14 1 44 2B 62 1 73 55 72 5
16 0F 15 0 45 2C 62 2 74 44 72 17
17 10 15 1 46 2D 62 3 75 45 72 18
18 11 20 1 47 2E 62 4 76 46 72 21
19 12 20 2 48 2F 62 5 77 47 72 25
20 13 20 3 49 30 62 6 78 48 72 43
21 14 20 4 50 31 62 7 79 49 72 81
22 15 20 5 51 32 62 8 80 4A 72 82
23 16 20 6 52 33 63 1 81 4B 72 84
24 17 20 7 53 34 63 2 82 4C 72 85
25 18 20 8 54 35 63 3 83 4D 72 90
26 19 20 9 55 36 63 4 84 4E 97 1
27 1A 20 10 56 37 63 5 85 4F 97 2
28 1B 30 0 57 38 63 6 86 50 97 3
29 1C 31 0 58 39 63 7
(9) Paper Jam History

For the latest 100 jams, displays JAM code, Total Count, Date of Occurrence, Paper Tray, Paper Size, and Zoom.
(10) Reuse
Displays the accumulated hours of the parts and the number of occurrences of the job that uses the parts.
Note
No. CSRC Item Count condition
parameter (F5)
I-25
1 00 Power condition /1 (Total Power ON time) 1 count for 1 minute.

2 01 Power condition /2 (EN-5V ON time) 1 count for 1 minute.
3 02 Low power mode time 1 count for 1 minute.
4 03 WUP time Accumulated hours during which the fusing heater turns on in
the warm-up condition. 1 count for 1 second.
5 04 Print operating time (single sided mode) Accumulated hours from start to stop of the print. 1 count for 1
second (not including the time period during which the counter
stops due to a jam).
6 05 Print operating time (double sided mode) Accumulated hours from start to stop of the print. 1 count for 1
second (not including the time period during which the counter
stops due to a jam).
7 06 Correction operation count Number of counts the image stabilization control (the fusing
temperature lower than 50 °C) is executed. 1 count for each
execution.
8 07 APS sensor ON time Accumulated hours during which the APS sensor turns ON. 1
count for 1 second.
9 08 Platen scan count Counts the number of occasions in which the scan is made in
the platen mode.
10 09 The number of occurrences of the stop due to Counts the number of occasions in which the system stops
toner running out. due to no toner.
11 0A Polygon stop operation time
12 0B The number of occurrences of the Main Power Counts the number of NMI's.
OFF
13 0C The number of occurrences of the feed door 1 count is made each time the feed door is closed.
closed
14 0D The number of starting all print jobs
15 0E Tray 1 paper feed count 1 count is made when paper is fed from the tray 1 each time 1
sheet of paper is exited.
16 0F Tray 2 paper feed count 1 count is made when paper is fed from the tray 2 each time 1
17 10 Tray 3 paper feed count 1 count is made when paper is fed from the tray 3 each time 1
18 11 Tray 4 paper feed count 1 count is made when paper is fed from the tray 4 each time 1
19 12 The number of prints made by selecting the 1 count is made when paper is fed from the bypass tray each
bypass paper feed tray time 1 sheet of paper is exited.
20 13 The number of prints made by selecting the 1 count is made when paper is fed from LCT each time 1
LCT paper feed tray sheet of paper is exited.
(11) Each Size

Displays the number of print of each paper size.
Note
• 1 count each time paper is exited (0 count for a blank sheet and 2 counts for the double sided print).
No. CSRC Paper size Remarks
parameter
1 00 Others Not used
2 01 A3
3 02 A4
4 03 A5
5 04 A6
6 05 B4
7 06 B5
8 07 B6
9 08 12 x 18 Not used
10 09 11 x 17
11 0A 81/2 x 14
12 0B 81/2 x 11
13 0C 71/4 x 101/2 Not used
14 0D 51/2 x 81/2
15 0E Foolscap
16 0F Post card
17 10 4x6 Not used
I-26
18 11 8K
19 12 16K
20 13 Long Length Not used
4.6.2 Present Parts Life

Displays the counter of an intended part.
And, when replacing an intended part, the counter of the replaced part is reset to manage the service history.
(1) Procedure for the display/reset

Press [Counter].
2. "Counter/Data screen"
Press [Present Parts Life].
3. "Parts Counter (Fixed) screen"
Press [▲]/[▼] to check the counter or display a part to be reset.
4. "Parts Counter (Fixed) screen"
Check the count value of an intended part.
When resetting it, press a part to be reset and then press the Clear key.
5. Press [OK].
(2) Fixed parts counter list

No. CSRC Unit Parts name Parts No.
parameter (Z1)
1 00 DC (including charge unit) Drum -
2 01 Cleaning blade assy 50GA-209
3 02 Drum unit (including charge unit) 50GA-200
4 03 Transfer/separation section Transfer/separation unit 50GA-260
5 04 Developing unit Developer -
6 05 Developing unit 50GA-300
7 06 Main body Filter mounting plate assy 50GA-336
8 07 Ozon filter 50GA1031
9 08 Suction filter /A assy 40LA-318
10 09 Filter cover assy 50GA-314
11 0A Suction cover /2 assy 50GA-311
12 0B Paper feed unit Tray 1 pick-up roller 40303005
13 0C Tray 1 paper feed roller 40303005
14 0D Tray 1 separation roller 40300151
15 0E Tray 2 pick-up roller 40303005
16 0F Tray 2 paper feed roller 40303005
17 10 Tray 2 separation roller 40300151
18 11 Bypass unit Bypass paper feed roller 41313001
19 12 Bypass separation roller 40340151
20 13 Registration section Paper feed connection roller 50GA3865
21 14 Registration roller /A 50GA3848
22 15 Registration bearing /1 26NA4536
23 16 Registration bearing /2 26NA4537
24 17 Paper feed slide bearing 26NA4082
25 18 Fusing unit Fusing roller 50GE5303
(bizhub 501)
50GA5303
(bizhub 421/361)
26 19 Fusing pressure roller 50GA5304
27 1A Fusing cleaner assy 50GA-540
28 1B Heat insulating sleeve /A 26NA5372
29 1C Fusing bearing /Up 26NA5371
30 1D Fusing bearing /Lw 50GA5359
31 1E Fusing sensor assy 50GA-544
32 1F Fuse holder assy 26NA-535
33 20 Fusing claw assy 50GA-533
34 21 Fusing driven roller A assy 40400326
35 22 Fusing driven roller B assy 40400328
36 31 Fusing input gear assy 50GA-546
37 23 Reverse unit Paper exit suction filter 50GA4406
I-27
38 24 Write unit Write unit 50GA-650

39 25 LU-203 Pick-up rubber 40LA4009
40 26 Paper feed rubber 26NA4011
41 27 Separation rubber 26NA4012
42 28 DF-613 Pick-up roller 16EA56020
43 29 Paper feed roller 45823014
44 2A Separation roller 45823047
45 2B PC-206 (tray 3/tray 4) Tray 3 pick-up roller 40303005
46 2C PC-407 (tray 3 only) Tray 3 paper feed roller 40303005
47 2D Tray 3 separation roller 40300151
48 2E Tray 4 pick-up roller 40303005
49 2F Tray 4 paper feed roller 40303005
50 30 Tray 4 separation roller 40300151
4.6.3 PM
Sets the PM execution cycle or resets the PM counter.
Note
• The PM cycle setting has been input in advance and be sure not to change this setting normally.
(1) Procedure for the counter reset

Press [Counter].
Press [PM].
3. "PM Counter screen"
Check the PM counter.
When resetting it, press the Clear key.
4. Press [OK].
(2) Procedure for the cycle setting

Press [Counter].
Press [PM].
3. "PM Counter screen"
Enter a PM cycle value (1 to 999999) through the copy count setting button and press [Set].
4. Press [OK].
4.7 State Confirmation

4.7.1 Sensor Check
This machine is provided with an input/output check function as a self-diagnostic function. For the sensor check (input check), the state
confirmation of each signal can be made.
(1) Procedure
Press [State Confirmation].
2. "State Confirmation screen"
Press [Sensor check].
3. "Sensor Check screen"
Press [Check Code] and, when entering the sensor check code in 3 digit through the copy count setting button, a state (ON/OFF or value)
is displayed in the Result area.
4. For the multi mode, press [Multi Code] and enter a three-digit multi code through the copy count setting key.
5. When conducting the sensor check of other signal sources, repeat steps 3 to 4.
4.7.2 Load Check

This machine is provided with an input/output check function as a self-diagnostic function. For the load check, the check and adjustment (output
check) of the load operation can be made.
(1) Procedure
Press [Load check].
3. "Load Check screen"
Press [Check Code] and enter a load check code in 3 digits through the copy count setting key.
The load check operation starts with a message "Operating" displayed.
5. Press the Stop key.
The load check is completed with a message "End" displayed.
I-28
6. When conducting other load operations or the output check of signals, repeat steps 3 to 6.
4.7.3 backup and recovery of adjustment data

To prevent the data disappear by the trouble of NVRAM board (NRB), back up the "adjustment data" stored in NRB to the CF card. In case that
the data is erased by the trouble of NRB, conduct the data recovery following B. Recovery procedure.
(1) Backup procedure

Press [Check Code] and enter a load check code "97" through the copy count setting key.
Press [Multi Code] and enter a multi code any of 1 to 3 through the copy count setting key. Check that any of "97-01", "97-02", or "97-03"
is displayed on the message display.
Note
• The data that is backed up by multi code 1, 2, and 3 is the same.
• Multi code 1, 2, and 3 back up 3 adjustment data. Therefore, record the date when the backup is conducted.

(2) Recovery procedure

Press [Check Code] and enter a load check code "98" through the copy count setting key.
Press [Multi Code] and enter a multi code any of 1 to 3 through the copy count setting key. Check that any of "98-01", "98-02", or "98-03"
is displayed on the message display.
Note
• Recover it to the latest data that has been backed up by 97-1, 2, or 3.

4.7.4 Memory/HDD Condition

Displays the memory capacity and the hard disc capacity (total/free space).
(1) Procedure
Press [Memory/HDD condition]. The memory package capacity, and the total capacity and the free capacity of HDD are displayed.
3. Press [END].
4.7.5 Memory Check (Memory/HDD Adjustment)

Checks the memory operation.
(1) Procedure
Press [Memory/HDD Adjustment].
3. Press [Memory Check] from the menu.
4. "Memory Check screen"
Press [Rough Check] or [Detail Check].
When completed normally, it is displayed that the memory check result is "OK."
6. Press [END].
4.7.6 HDD R/W Check (Memory/HDD Adjustment)

Conducts the read/write check of the hard disc.
(1) Procedure
3. Press [HDD R/W Check] from the menu.
4. "HDD R/W Check screen"
Press the Start key. When completed normally after checking, it is displayed that the check result is "OK."
5. Press [END].
4.7.7 HDD Format (Memory/HDD Adjustment)

Formats HDD.
I-29
NOTE
• When formatting HDD, all the data stored in HDD gets lost and becomes unrecoverable.
(1) Procedure
3. Press [HDD Format] from the menu. The screen for confirmation is display.
4. Select the partition [1], [2], [3], [ALL] or [Erase Mode], and Press [Yes].
When formatting is executed and completed, a message "The formatting of HDD is completed" is displayed.
NOTE
• The following data are stored in each partition.
1: Data related to Ptinter (Fonts/spooling space)
2: Data related to the box (System/User box)
3: Reserved space (for next expansion of functions)
• When selecting [Erase Mode], the lock password which is set to HDD is canceled and the HDD formatting is executed for all
partitions. When the HDD lock password is not set, only the HDD formatting for each partition is executed.
• When the loadable device driver is installed, performing HDD format deletes the loadable device driver. When the HDD
format is performed, make sure to reinstall the loadable device driver to the machine.
5. Turn OFF the power switch (SW2) and the main power switch (SW1) in this order.
6. After waiting for 10 seconds or more, turn ON SW1 and SW2 in this order.
NOTE
• Turning ON SW1 not waiting for 10 seconds or more after turning it OFF may damage HDD. Be sure to turn ON SW1 10 seconds
or more after turning it OFF.
4.7.8 Adj. Data Table

Displays the adjustment data set for this machine.
(1) Procedure
Press [Adj. Data Table].
3. "Adj. Data Table screen"
Press [▼] or [▲] to display necessary items.
4. Pressing [NVRAM Value] switches the display into the step number display set and pressing also [Adjust Value] switches the display into
the adjustment value (the value of 1 step x the number of steps).
5. Press [OK].
4.7.9 Adj. Data Table

Display Adjustment item
1/29 Print position adjustment: leading edge (tray 1)
Print position adjustment: leading edge (tray 2)
Print position adjustment: leading edge (LCT)
Print position adjustment: leading edge (bypass (normal paper))
Print position adjustment: leading edge (bypass (thick paper: large))
2/29 Print position adjustment: leading edge (bypass (thick paper: small))
Print position adjustment: leading edge (bypass (thin paper))
Print position adjustment: leading edge (bypass (OHP))
Print position adjustment: leading edge (bypass (envelope))
Print position adjustment: leading edge (bypass (label: large))
Print position adjustment: leading edge (bypass (label: small))
Print position adjustment: leading edge (ADU)
3/29 Print position adjustment: side edge (tray 1 (common))
Print position adjustment: side edge (tray 1 (small size))
Print position adjustment: side edge (tray 1 (large size))
Print position adjustment: side edge (tray 2 (common))
4/29 Print position adjustment: side edge (tray 3 (small size))
I-30

Print position adjustment: side edge (LCT)
Print position adjustment: side edge (ADU (common))
5/29 Print position adjustment: side edge (ADU (small size))
Print position adjustment: side edge (ADU (large size))
Print position adjustment: side edge (bypass (common))
Print position adjustment: side edge (bypass (small size))
Print position adjustment: side edge (bypass (large size))
Magnification in the printer feed direction (printer: normal paper)
Magnification in the printer feed direction (printer: OHP (large))
6/29 Magnification in the printer feed direction (printer: OHP (small))
Magnification in the printer feed direction (printer: thick paper (large))
Magnification in the printer feed direction (printer: thick paper (small))
Magnification in the printer feed direction (printer: envelope)
Magnification in the printer feed direction (printer: label (large))
Magnification in the printer feed direction (printer: label (small))
Magnification in the printer feed direction (printer: custom paper)
7/29 Magnification in the printer feed direction (fixing motor clock: normal paper)
Magnification in the printer feed direction (fixing motor clock: OHP (large))
Magnification in the printer feed direction (fixing motor clock: OHP (small))
Magnification in the printer feed direction (fixing motor clock: thick paper (large))
Magnification in the printer feed direction (fixing motor clock: thick paper (small))
Magnification in the printer feed direction (fixing motor clock: envelope)
Magnification in the printer feed direction (fixing motor clock: label (large))
8/29 Magnification in the printer feed direction (fixing motor clock: label (small))
Magnification in the printer feed direction (fixing motor clock: custom paper)
Magnification in the printer feed direction (fixing motor clock: user paper)
Printer registration loop amount (tray 1 (small))
Printer registration loop amount (tray 1 (large))
Printer registration loop amount (tray 2 (middle1))
9/29 Printer registration loop amount (tray 2 (middle2))
Printer registration loop amount (tray 3 (middle))
Printer registration loop amount (tray 4 (middle))
10/29 Printer registration loop amount (tray 4 (large))
Printer registration loop amount (option tray)
Printer registration loop amount (LCT)
Printer registration loop amount (bypass (normal (small)))
Printer registration loop amount (bypass (normal (middle)))
Printer registration loop amount (bypass (normal (large)))
Printer registration loop amount (bypass (thick paper: small))
11/29 Printer registration loop amount (bypass (thick paper: large))
Printer registration loop amount (bypass (thin paper: small))
Printer registration loop amount (bypass (thin paper: large))
Printer registration loop amount (bypass (OHP: small))
Printer registration loop amount (bypass (OHP: large))
Printer registration loop amount (bypass (envelope))
Printer registration loop amount (bypass (label: small))
12/29 Printer registration loop amount (bypass (label: large))
Printer registration loop (bypass tray (post card))
Printer registration loop amount (ADU (small))
Printer registration loop amount (ADU (large))
Tray adjustment (maximum width)
Tray adjustment (minimum width)
I-31
Scan area (scanning position: leading edge)

13/29 Scan area (scanning position: side edge)
Magnification in the scanner feed crossover direction
Magnification in the scanner feed direction
Printer leading edge erasure amount adjustment
Charging main manual
Transfer manual
Separation AC manual
14/29 Separation DC manual
Carging grid manual
Developing grid manual
TCR
Toner density
Dot diameter
LD1 offset (normal paper)
15/29 LD1 offset (thick paper)
LD2 offset (normal paper)
LD2 offset (thick paper)
LD1 bias (normal paper)
LD1 bias (thick paper)
LD2 bias (normal paper)
LD2 bias (thick paper)
Copy Protect Density Adj .
16/29 Magnification in the ADF feed direction (single sided: 50%)
Magnification in the ADF feed direction (single sided: 100%)
Magnification in the ADF feed direction (double sided: 50%)
17/29 Magnification in the ADF feed direction (double sided: 200%)
ADF leading edge (single sided)
ADF leading edge (double sided (front side))
ADF leading edge (double sided (back side))
ADF side edge (single sided)
ADF side edge (double sided (front side))
18/29 ADF side edge (double sided (back side))
ADF registration loop amount (single sided)
ADF registration loop amount (double sided)
ADF original size (maximum width)
ADF original size (minimum width)
ADF density
ADF scan position
19/29 Center staple position (B5S)
Center staple position (A4S)
Center staple position (B4)
Center staple position (A3)
Center staple position (81/2 x 11S)
Center staple position (11 x 17)
Center staple position (8K)
20/29 Center staple position (81/2 x 14)
Half-fold position (B5S)
Half-fold position (A4S)
Half-fold position (B4)
Half-fold position (A3)
Half-fold position (81/2 x 11S)
Half-fold position (11 x 17)
21/29 Half-fold position (8K)
I-32
Half-fold position (81/2 x 14)

Punch horizontal position
Punch registration loop amount (B5S)
Punch registration loop amount (B5)
Punch registration loop amount (A4S)
Punch registration loop amount (A4)
22/29 Punch registration loop amount (B4)
Punch registration loop amount (A3)
Punch registration loop amount (81/2 x 11S)
Punch registration loop amount (81/2 x 11)
Punch registration loop amount (81/2 x 14S)

Punch registration loop amount (11 x 17)
Punch registration loop amount (8K)
23/29 Punch registration loop amount (16K)
Punch registration loop amount (16KS)
Punch registration loop amount (FLS)
Test pattern density
DipSW No.01
DipSW No.02
DipSW No.03
24/29 DipSW No.04
DipSW No.05
DipSW No.06
DipSW No.07
DipSW No.08
DipSW No.09
DipSW No.10
25/29 DipSW No.11
DipSW No.12
DipSW No.13
DipSW No.14
DipSW No.15
DipSW No.16
DipSW No.17
26/29 DipSW No.18
DipSW No.19
DipSW No.20
DipSW No.21
DipSW No.22
DipSW No.23
DipSW No.24
27/29 DipSW No.25
DipSW No.26
DipSW No.27
DipSW No.28
DipSW No.29
DipSW No.30
DipSW No.31
28/29 DipSW No.32
DipSW No.33
DipSW No.34
DipSW No.35
DipSW No.36
DipSW No.37
DipSW No.38
29/29 DipSW No.39
DipSW No.40
DipSW No.41
I-33
DipSW No.42
DipSW No.43
DipSW No.44
DipSW No.45
4.7.10 IO check mode list

Input check Output check
Co Mul
de ti Classific Symb
Name
Display and Classific Symb
Name
Restrictive
ation ol signal source ation ol conditions
0 0 Analog TCRS Drum temperature 0 to 255*1 High L1 Exposure lamp
signal voltage/
image
1 TCRS TCR sensor 0 to 255*1
2 TCRS TCR sensor 0 to 255*1
3 TH1 Thermistor /1 0 to 255*1
4 TH2 Thermistor /2 0 to 255*1
5 IDCS IDC sensor 0 to 255*1
6 HUMS Humidity sensor 0 to 255*1
7 VR1 Paper size VR/BP 0 to 255*1
(bypass)
1 0 High M4, Toner supply motor, toner Same as 55-003
voltage/ SD5 solenoid turn ON at the
image same time
10 1 Paper PS18 paper empty sensor /BP • ON: No paper
feed (bypass) • OFF: Paper
2 PS23 Lift sensor (bypass) • ON: Up
position
• OFF: Down
position
3 - Connect detection signal • ON:
(bypass) Connection
• OFF: Non-
connection
4 PS19 Paper size sensor /BP1 • ON: paper
(bypass) • OFF: No
Paper
Paper
Paper
Paper
11 1 PS5 Paper empty sensor /1 • ON: No paper
• OFF: Paper
2 PS9 Near-empty sensor /1 • ON: Near-
empty
• OFF: Non-
near-empty
3 PS6 Upper limit sensor /1 • ON: Upper
limit
• OFF: Not at
upper limit
4 PS8 Tray set sensor /1 • ON: Set
• OFF: Not set
5 PS10 Paper size sensor /Rr1 *2
6 PS11 Paper size sensor /Fr1 *2
• OFF: Paper
empty
• OFF: Non-
near-empty
I-34

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
limit
• OFF: Not at
upper limit
• OFF: Not set
(PC-206) • OFF: Paper
(PC-206) empty
• OFF: Non-
near-empty
(PC-206) limit
• OFF: Not at
upper limit
(PC-206) • OFF: Not set
5 PS116 Paper feed sensor /3 • ON: paper
(PC-206) • OFF: No
Paper
6 PS117 Vertical conveyance • ON: paper
sensor /3 (PC-206) • OFF: No
Paper
(PC-206)
(PC-206)
(PC206) • OFF: Paper
(PC-206) empty
• OFF: Non-
near-empty
(PC-206) limit
• OFF: Not at
upper limit
(PC-206) • OFF: Not set
5 PS125 Paper feed sensor /4 • ON: paper
(PC-206) • OFF: No
Paper
sensor /4 (PC-206) • OFF: No
Paper
(PC-206)
(PC-206)
15 1 PS153 Paper empty sensor (LU) • ON: No paper
• OFF: Paper
2 PS155 LU exit sensor (LU) • ON: Near-
empty
• OFF: Non-
near-empty
3 PS152 Upper limit sensor (LU) • ON: Upper
limit
• OFF: Not at
upper limit
4 PS154 Remaining paper sensor /1 *3
(LU)
5 PS151 Remaining paper sensor /2 *3
(LU)
I-35

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
6 MS15 Upper door interlock • ON: Open
1 switch (LU) • OFF: Close
7 PS156 LU set sensor (LU) • ON: Not set
• OFF: Set
8 - Connect detection signal • ON:
(LU) Connection
• OFF: Non-
connection
16 1 PS5 Right door open/close • ON: Open
sensor (PC-407) • OFF: Close
2 PS6 Tray set sensor (PC-407) • ON: Not set
• OFF: Set
3 PS7 Lower limit over run sensor • Over run
(PC-407) • Not over run
sensor (PC-407) • OFF: No
Paper
5 PS1 Paper feed sensor • ON: paper
(PC-407) • OFF: No
Paper
6 MEB Main tray empty board • ON: paper
(PC-407) • OFF: No
Paper
7 PS9 Sub tray empty sensor • ON: paper
(PC-407) • OFF: No
Paper
8 PS3 Paper empty sensor • ON: paper
(PC-407) • OFF: No
Paper
9 PS4 Upper limit sensor • ON: Upper
(PC-407) limit
• OFF: Not at
upper limit
10 PS13 Lower limit sensor • ON: Lower
(PC-407) limit
• OFF: Not at
lower limit
11 PS12 Shift home sensor • Home position
(PC-407) • Other than
home position
12 PS11 Shift position sensor • Shift position
(PC-407) • Not at shift
position
13 PS14 Shift gate position sensor • Gate lock
(PC-407) • Gate release
14 PS10 Paper lift motor encoder 0 to 255
sensor (PC-407)
15 SW1 Tray release switch • ON
• OFF
17 1 PS19, Paper size sensor /BP1, / 0 to 15*4
PS20, BP2, /BP3, /BP4 (bypass)
PS21,
PS22
2 PSB/1 Paper size board /1 0 to 15*5
3 PSB/2 Paper size board /2 0 to 15*5
4 PSDB Paper size detect board /3 0 to 15*5
3 (PC-206)
5 PSDB Paper size detect board /4 0 to 15*5
4 (PC-206)
20 1 Convey PS1 Registration sensor • ON: paper Paper CL4 Feed clutch /1
ance • OFF: No feed
Paper
2 PS2 Vertical conveyance • ON: paper CL5 Feed clutch /2
sensor • OFF: No
Paper
I-36

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
3 CL6 Feed clutch /BP
4 SD1 Pick-up solenoid /BP
5 SD151 Pick-up solenoid (LU)
21 1 M9 Feed motor (LS250)
2 M9 Feed motor (LS210)
3 M9 Feed motor (LS125)
4 M122 Paper feed motor /3 Valid only when
(LS250) (PC-206) the paper empty
sensor /3
(PS115) detects
a no paper
condition.
sensor /3
(PS115) detects
a no paper
condition.
sensor /4
(PS124) detects
a no paper
condition.
sensor /4
(PS124) detects
a no paper
condition.
8 M150 Feed motor (LS250) (LU)
11 M9, Feed motor (LS250),
CL1, registration clutch, loop
CL2 clutch turn ON at the same
time
sensor /3
(PS115) detects
a no paper
condition.
sensor /4
(PS124) detects
a no paper
condition.
22 0 PS3 Fusing exit sensor • ON: paper
• OFF: No
Paper
1 M120 Vertical conveyance
motor /3 (LS250) (PC-206)
motor /3 (LS210) (PC-206)
motor /3 (LS125) (PC-206)
motor /4 (LS250) (PC-206)
motor /4 (LS210) (PC-206)
motor /4 (LS125) (PC-206)
7 M120, Vertical conveyance
M121 motor /3, /4 (LS250)
(PC-206)
I-37

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
M121 motor /3, /4 (LS210)
(PC-206)
M121 motor /3, /4 (LS125)
(PC-206)
10 M2 Vertical conveyance motor
(LS250) (PC-407)
(LS210) (PC-407)
(LS125) (PC-407)
23 0 MS Interlock switch • ON: Open
• OFF: Close
1 M7 Paper lift motor /1 The upper limit
sensor /1 (PS6)
turns ON, or it is
stopped by the
stop button.
sensor /2 (PS13)
turns ON, or it is
stopped by the
stop button.
(PC-206) sensor /3
(PS114) turns
ON, or it is
stopped by the
stop button.
(PC-206) sensor /4
(PS123) turns
ON, or it is
stopped by the
stop button.
5 M151 Paper lift motor (LU) The upper limit
sensor (PS152)
turns ON, or it is
stopped by the
stop button.
6 M9, Feed motor, pick-up Valid only when
SD1 solenoid /BP turn ON at the paper empty
the same time sensor/BP
(PS18) detects a
no paper
condition.
24 0 PS7 Feed door open/close • ON: Open
sensor • OFF: Close
25 0 PS111 Right door open/close • ON: Open
sensor (PC-206) • OFF: Close
1 CL1 Registration clutch
2 CL2 Loop clutch
3 CL3 Vertical conveyance clutch
4 CL151 Feed clutch (LU)
29 0 SD2 Drum claw solenoid ON
31 1 Optical M2, L1 Scanner motor, exposure After home
device lamp position search,
A3 makes a
single scan
operation.
2 M2, L1 Scanner motor, exposure After home
lamp position search,
A3 makes a
continuous scan
operation.
I-38

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
8 M2 Scanner motor The exposure
unit is moved to
DF read
position.
9 M2 Scanner motor The exposure
unit is moved to
stand-by
position.
32 1 M5 Polygon motor (LS250)
2 M5 Polygon motor (LS210)
34 0 M2, L1 Shading correction
operation
36 0 LDB Laser PWM (0 to 255)
37 0 LDB, Laser turns ON forcibly The polygon
M5 motor (M5) turns
ON and OFF at
the same time.
38 0 LDB, LD alarm check The polygon
M5 motor (M5) turns
ON at the same
time and the
results are
displayed when
it turns OFF.
999 - LD alarm, data clear
39 0 L1 Platen stop APS The exposure
lamp turns ON
with APS
processed
forcibly.
40 1 Optical PS31 APS timing sensor • ON: DF close Main M11 Fusing motor (LS250)
device • OFF: DF open body
2 PS32 APS sensor • ON: Paper M11 Fusing motor (LS210)
• OFF: No
paper
3 M11 Fusing motor (LS125)
41 1 M1 Drum motor (LS250) The charging
corona turns ON
at the same
time.
2 M1 Drum motor (LS210) The charging
corona turns ON
at the same
time.
3 M1 Drum motor (LS125) The charging
corona turns ON
at the same
time.
4 M1 Drum motor (LS250)
42 1 FM3, Exhaust fan /Fr, /Rr turn
FM9 ON at the same time
2 FM4 Drum cooling fan
3 FM2, Fusing cooling fan /Fr, /Rr
FM8 turns ON at the same time
4 FM1 Power supply cooling fan
5 FM6 Developing suction fan
6 FM5 Coveyance suction fan
7 FM7 Developing cooling fan
43 1 TCT Total counter 1 count up
2 KCT Key counter 1 count up
44 1 - -
2 M3 Developing motor (LS210)
I-39

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
3 M3 Developing motor (LS125)
45 1 L2 Fusing heater lamp /1 CAUTION
Since no high
temperature
detection is
made, be careful
not to turn on for
more than 10
seconds.
Otherwise, the
fusing roller may
deform, thus
causing a fire.
2 L3 Fusing heater lamp /2 CAUTION
Since no high
temperature
detection is
made, be careful
not to turn on for
more than 10
seconds.
Otherwise, the
fusing roller may
deform, thus
causing a fire.
3 L2, L3 Fusing heater lamp /1, /2 CAUTION
turn ON at the same time Since no high
temperature
detection is
made, be careful
not to turn on for
more than 10
seconds.
Otherwise, the
fusing roller may
deform, thus
causing a fire.
4 L2, Fusing heater lamp /1, CAUTION
M11 fusing motor turn ON at Since no high
the same time temperature
detection is
made, be careful
not to turn on for
more than 10
seconds.
Otherwise, the
fusing roller may
deform, thus
causing a fire.
5 L3, Fusing heater lamp /2, CAUTION
detection is
made, be careful
not to turn on for
more than 10
seconds.
Otherwise, the
fusing roller may
deform, thus
causing a fire.
I-40

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
6 L2, L3, Fusing heater lamp /1, /2, CAUTION
detection is
made, be careful
not to turn on for
more than 10
seconds.
Otherwise, the
fusing roller may
deform, thus
causing a fire.
46 0 - Dehumidifier Heater 1C
48 0 Operati PKB Operation panel check
on (panel keyboard LEDs all
panel turm ON)
49 0 LCD Operation panel check
1 - -
50 1 Specific - Serial communication • OK Specific
function check when the power is • NG function
turned ON (DF)
2 - Serial communication • OK
check when the power is • NG
turned ON (FS)
turned ON (SubCPU)
turned ON (Main body)
51 1 - Main body identification • bizhub EL Only erase lamp 24V ON
signal 421/361
• bizhub 501
2 - Machine type code • "128" = bizhub EL Erase lamp
501
• "129" = bizhub
421
• "130" = bizhub
361
52 0 TSL Transfer exposure lamp
1 JS - JS connection detection • Connection
• Non-
connection
2 - - - SD4 Web solenoid
3 PS1 Paper full sensor • Full
• Other than full
53 0 M4 Toner supply motor
55 1 SD5 Toner solenoid
2 M4, Toner supply motor, toner
SD5 solenoid turn ON at the
same time
3 M10 Toner bottle motor (CW)
56 1 M10 Toner bottle motor (CCW)
2
57 0 PZS Toner remaining sensor
ON/OFF
1 Analog PZS Toner remaining sensor • Detected PZS Toner remaining sensor
signal • Not detected ON
2 Toner PS4 Toner bottle sensor • Detected
supply • Not detected
3 PS28 Toner bottle position • Home position
sensor • Other than
home position
58 0 Analog TH1/ The higher value of 0 to 255
signal TH2 thermistor /1 and
thermistor /2
I-41

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
59 0 RL1 Main relay
60 1 DF PS5 Original empty sensor • Original DF M1 Original feed motor
• No original
2 PS6 Original feed sensor • Original M2 Original conveyance motor
• No original
3 PS9 Original registration sensor • Original FM3 Cooling fan
• No original
4 PS8 Original detection sensor • Original SD1 Pressure roller release
• No original solenoid
5 PS10 Original exit sensor • Original SD2 Stamp solenoid
• No original
6 PS7 Cover open/close sensor • Close LB Print lamp (LED board)
• Open green ON
7 SW3 DF open/close switch • Close LB Print lamp (LED board) red
(Main body side) • Open ON
8 MOSD Mix original size detection • Original M1, 1 side original scan
B board • No original M2, continuous operation (no
SD1 original)
9 MOSD Mix original size detection • Original M1, 2 sides original scan
B board • No original M2, continuous operation (no
SD1 original)
10 MOSD Mix original size detection • Original M1, 1 side original scan Operates
B board • No original M2, continuous operation according to the
SD1 (original) original size set.
11 PS1 Original size sensor /1 • Original M1, 1 side mixed original scan Operates
• No original M2, continuous operation according to the
12 PS2 Original size sensor /2 • Original M1, 2 sides original scan Operates
• No original M2, continuous operation according to the
13 PS3 Original size sensor /3 • Original
• No original
14 PS4 Original size sensor /4 • Original
• No original
15 VR1 Original size VR 0 to 255*1
70 1 FS-522 PS4 Entrance sensor • Paper FS-522 M2 Conveyance motor (10
• No paper seconds ON)
2 PS5 Conveyance sensor • Paper - - -
• No paper
3 PS6 Alignment sensor /1 • Home position M4, After alignment motor /Rr, /
• Other than M5 Fr operation, home
home position position search
4 PS7 Alignment sensor /2 • Home position - - -
• Other than
home position
5 SW3 Tray overrun switch • Not at upper M11 Tray lift motor up Stops when the
limit/lower limit upper limit
• Upper limit/ sensor (PS15)
lower limit turns ON after
the tray position
sensor (PS3)
detects the tray
2.
6 SW2 Shutter switch • Not open M11 Tray lift motor initial After the tray
• Close operation goes down, it
goes up when
the lower limit
sensor (PS14)
turns ON and it
stops when
PS15 turns ON.
It becomes valid
after executing
the load check
70-5.
I-42

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
7 SW1 Door switch • Close M12 Shutter close/open At the same
• Open operation once time, the paper
exit roller
release/pressure
operation is
made by the
paper exit roller
release motor
(M6).
8 - - - - - -
9 PS4 Encoder sensor (PU) • Light blocking - - -
• Light passing
through
10 PS23 Paper guide home sensor • Home position - - -
(SD) • Other than
home position
11 PS14 Lower limit sensor • Lower limit M6 Release/press operation of
• Not at lower exit roller once
limit
12 PS15 Upper limit sensor • Upper limit M9 Open/close operation once
• Not at upper of paper exit opening (SD)
limit
13 - OT-602 connection • Connection - - -
detection • Non-
connection
14 PS3 Tray position sensor • Tray detected - - -
• Tray not
detected
15 PS16 Shutter home sensor • Close - - -
• Open
16 - - - - - -
17 PS11 Exit paddle home sensor • Home position M7 After 2-staple positioning,
• Other than home position search
home position
18 PS12 Exit roller home sensor • Home position - - -
• Other than
home position
19 PS8 Stacker sensor • Paper - - -
• No paper
20 PS10 Stapler home sensor • Home position - - -
• Other than
home position
21 - Stapler ready sensor • Ready - - -
• Unready
22 - Staple empty sensor • No staple - - -
• Staple
23 - Staple home sensor • Home position M10, Folding once (SD)
• Other than M14
home position
24 - - -
25 PS2 Punch position sensor /1 • Home position
(PU) at odd
numbered
times
• Home position
at initialization
26 PS3 Punch position sensor /2 • At the center
(PU) of stroke
• Not at the
center of
stroke
27 PS1 Punch scraps full sensor • Full
(PU) • Other than full
28 PS22 Folding roller home sensor • Home position
(SD) • Other than
home position
I-43

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
29 SW4 Guide plate switch • Close
• Open
30 PS23 Paper guide home sensor • Home position
(SD) • Other than
home position
31 PS20 Exit sensor (SD) • Paper
• No paper
32 PS21 Tray empty sensor (SD) • Paper
• No paper
33 - Staple home sensor /Rr • Home position
(SD) • Other than
home position
34 - Stapler ready sensor /Rr • Ready
(SD) • Unready
35 - Staple empty sensor /Fr • No staple
(SD) • Staple
36 - Staple home sensor /Fr • Home position
(SD) • Other than
home position
37 - Stapler ready sensor /Fr • Ready
(SD) • Unready
38 - Staple empty sensor /Fr • No staple
(SD) • Staple
39 SW4 SD interlock switch (SD) • Set
• Not set
40 PS18 Exit home sensor (SD) • Open
• Close
41 PS1 Paper detection sensor /1 • No paper
(MT) • Paper
42 PS5 Paper full sensor /1 (MT) • Full
• Other than full
(MT) • Paper
• Other than full
(MT) • Paper
• Other than full
(MT) • Paper
• Other than full
53 M1, Exit motor (1 second ON),
SD1 stacker paddle solenoid
ON/OFF
54 M1, Exit motor (1 second ON),
SD2 exit paddle solenoid ON/
OFF
78 M1 Punching once (PU)
79 M2 Switching the number of Inch only
punches
79 M2 Switching the number of Inch only
punches
1 FS-523 PS1 Sub tray exit sensor • Paper
• No paper
2 PS3 Intermediate conveyance • Paper
sensor • No paper
3 PS4 Main route conveyance • Paper
sensor • No paper
4 PS2 Bypass route conveyance • Paper
sensor • No paper
5 PS6 Sub tray full sensor • Full
• Other than full
I-44

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
6 PS7 Main tray full sensor • Full
• Other than full
7 PS9 Alignment home sensor • Home position
• Other than
home position
8 PS14 Stapler home sensor • Home position
• Other than
home position
9 PS12 Roller release home • Released
sensor • Pressed
10 PS13 Exit roller home sensor • Released
• Pressed
11 PS5 Alignment tray sensor • Paper
• No paper
12 PS22 Stapler home sensor /Rr • Home position
• Other than
home position
13 PS20 Staple empty sensor /Rr • No staple
• Staple
14 PS21 Stapler ready sensor /Rr • Ready
• Unready
15 PS25 Stapler home sensor /Fr • Home position
• Other than
home position
16 PS23 Staple empty sensor /Fr • No staple
• Staple
17 PS24 Stapler ready sensor /Fr • Ready
• Unready
18 PS19 Main tray upper limit • Paper surface
sensor detected
• Paper surface
not detected
19 PS8 Main tray reset sensor • Other than
paper removal
• Paper removal
20 SW2 Main tray upper limit • Upper limit
switch • Not at upper
limit
21 PS10 Shift home sensor • Front home
position
• Rear home
position
22 - - -
23 PS15 Punch encoder sensor • Light passing
through
• Light blocking
24 PS11 Shift encoder sensor • Light passing
through
• Light blocking
25 - - -
26 - - -
27 PS2 Path sensor (RU) • Paper
• No paper
80 1 ADU/ PS24 ADU conveyance sensor / • Paper ADU/ M6 Reverse motor (LS250)
Reverse 1 • No paper Reverse rotating forward
2 PS25 ADU conveyance sensor / • Paper M6 Reverse motor (LS210)
2 • No paper rotating forward
3 M6 Reverse motor (LS125)
rotating forward
rotating backward
rotating backward
rotating backward
I-45

Co Mul
Name
Name
Restrictive
81 1 PS27 Reverse sensor • Paper CL7 ADU conveyance clutch /
• No paper Up
2 PS26 ADU open/close sensor • Open CL8 ADU conveyance clutch /
• Close Lw
3 - - • Set M9, Feed motor, ADU
• Not set CL7 conveyance clutch
/Up turn ON at the same
time
4 M9, Feed motor, ADU
CL8 conveyance clutch
/Lw turn ON at the same
time
5 M9, Feed motor, ADU
CL7, conveyance clutch
CL8 /Up, /Lw turn ON at the
same time
83 0 SD3 Reverse solenoid
89 0 Adjustm - KM brand setting
1 ent/ - OEM setting (A-Type)
special
2 mode - OEM setting (B-Type)
3 - OEM setting (C-Type)
90 0 - PM counter clear
91 0 - Process counter clear No use allowed
in the field.
1 - Drum counter clear No use allowed
in the field.
92 - NVRAM board data reset No operation
available in the
field.
93 0 - Field initial set
95 99 - No use allowed
in the field.
97 1 - Adjustment data backup 1
2 - Adjustment data backup 2
3 - Adjustment data backup 3
98 1 - Recovery of adjustment
data backup 1
2 - Recovery of adjustment
data backup 2
3 - Recovery of adjustment
data backup 3
*1 Resolution 1024 is also displayed as resolution 256.
*2 The size in the main scan direction is shown by the combination of the ON/OFF of the paper size sensors /Rr and /Fr.
Sensor check Tray 1 11-5 11-6 Paper size
Tray 2 12-5 12-6
Tray 3 13-7 13-8
Tray 4 14-7 14-8
Sensor check display ON OFF A3, B4, A4, B5
ON ON 11 x 17
OFF ON A4S, 81/2 x 11S
OFF OFF A5S, B5S, 81/2 x 11S
*3 ON/OFF combination of remaining paper sensor /1 (PS154) and /2 (PS151) represents an amount of paper remained in LU.
Sensor check 15-4 15-5
Remaining paper sensor /1 (PS154) /2 (PS151)
Full amount ON OFF
Medium amount ON ON
Small amount OFF ON
*4 The combination of the ON/OFF of the paper size sensors /BP1 (PS19), /BP2 (PS20), /BP3 (PS21) and /BP4 (PS22) is shown in 4-bit data (0
to 15).
I-46
Sensor check PS19 PS20 PS21 PS22

display
0 OFF OFF OFF OFF
1 ON OFF OFF OFF
2 OFF ON OFF OFF
3 ON ON OFF OFF
4 OFF OFF ON OFF
5 ON OFF ON OFF
6 OFF ON ON OFF
7 ON ON ON OFF
8 OFF OFF OFF ON
9 ON OFF OFF ON
10 OFF ON OFF ON
11 ON ON OFF ON
12 OFF OFF ON ON
13 ON OFF ON ON
14 OFF ON ON ON
15 ON ON ON ON
*5 he combination of the ON/OFF of the paper size boards and the paper size detection boards (4 in all) is shown in 4-bit data (0 to 15).
Sensor check State of each of the 4 sensors
display on the paper size boards /1
17-2 (tray 1), (PSB /1) and /2 (PSB /2) and the
17-3 (tray 2), paper size detect boards /3
17-4 (tray 3), (PSDB /3) and /4 (PSDB /4)
17-5 (tray 4) 1 2 3 4
0 OFF OFF OFF OFF
1 ON OFF OFF OFF
2 OFF ON OFF OFF
3 ON ON OFF OFF
4 OFF OFF ON OFF
5 ON OFF ON OFF
6 OFF ON ON OFF
7 ON ON ON OFF
8 OFF OFF OFF ON
9 ON OFF OFF ON
10 OFF ON OFF ON
11 ON ON OFF ON
12 OFF OFF ON ON
13 ON OFF ON ON
14 OFF ON ON ON
15 ON ON ON ON
4.8 ADF
4.8.1 Paper Feed Direction
Adjusts the magnification in the sub scan direction while in the DF original scan.
This adjustment adjusts the magnification of the image data in the sub scan direction by changing the scan speed of DF.
The adjustment is made for each mode (single sided, double sided (front/rear)) and expansion/reduction ratio (50%, 100%, 200%, 400%).
Note
• Make sure that the adjustment of the magnification in the printer paper feed direction has been completed.
(1) Procedure
Press [ADF].
2. "ADF Adjustment screen"
Press [Paper Feed Direction].
3. "Paper Feed Direction screen"
Press the magnification that adjusts the 1-Sided or 2-Sided.
Select A3 (for metric) or 11 x 17 (for inch) paper, and press the Start key with the adjustment chart set to DF.
6. Press [OK].
7. Measure the magnification in the paper feed direction with a scale.
Standard value (while in the life size): ± 0.5% or less (200 ± 1 mm or less)
I-47
8. "Paper Feed Direction screen"

Setting range: - 2.0 (shorter) to + 2.0% (longer)
1 step = 0.1%
10. Repeat steps 3 to 9 for each magnification.
11. Press [OK].
4.8.2 Lead Edge

Adjusts the position at which the image read is started while in the DF original scan.
This adjustment adjusts the leading edge position of the image by changing the image read start timing after the leading edge of the original
passes through the read position.
The adjustment is made for each mode (1-Sided, 2-Sided (Front/Back)).
(1) Procedure
Press [ADF].
Press [Lead Edge].
3. "ADF Adjustment: Lead Edge screen"
Press [1-Sided], [2-Sided (Front)], or [2-Sided (Back)] to select the mode.
6. Press [END].
7. Measure the leading edge position of the image with a scale.
8. "ADF Adjustment: Lead Edge screen"
Setting range: - 5.0 (slower start of read) to + 5.0 mm (faster start of read)
1 step = 0.1 mm
10. Repeat steps 3 to 9 for each mode.
11. Press [OK].
4.8.3 Side Edge

Adjusts the mis-centering of the image in the main scan direction while in the DF original scan.
The adjustment is made for each mode (1-Sided, 2-Sided (Front/Back)).
Note
• Make sure that the adjustment of the printer position: side edge has been completed.
(See I.4.3.2 Print Positioning: Side Edge (Printer Area))
(1) Procedure
Press [ADF].
Press [Side Edge].
3. "ADF Adjustment: Side Edge screen"
Press [1-Sided], [2-Sided (Front)], or [2-Sided (Back)] to select the mode.
6. Press [END].
7. Fold the output paper into two at the center in the main scan direction, and check the discrepancy of the print center line.
Standard value: ± 3.0 mm or less
8. "ADF Adjustment: Side Edge screen"
Setting range: - 2.96 (image: to the rear) to + 2.96 mm (image: to the front)
1 step = 0.04 mm
11. Press [OK].
4.8.4 Resist Loop Adj.

Adjusts the original loop amount (1-Sided or 2-Sided) at the registration roller section of DF to adjust a paper skew, wrinkles or an original jam at
the registration section.
This adjustment adjusts the re-start timing of the DF registration roller.
(1) Procedure
Press [ADF].
Press [Resist Loop Adj.].
3. "Resist Loop Adj. screen"
I-48
Press [1-Sided] or [2-Sided] to select the mode.

5. Select paper according to the item selected at step 3. Set A3 (for metric) or 11 x 17 (for inch) original that is used more frequently set to
DF and press the Start key.
6. Press [END].
Return to the registration loop amount adjustment screen.
7. "Resist Loop Adj. screen"
Setting range: - 5.0 (smaller) to + 5.0 mm (larger)
1 step = 0.5 mm
8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 until it becomes appropriate.
10. Press [OK].
4.8.5 Original Size Adj.

This adjustment is made when the original size detection does not function properly at DF.
(1) Procedure
Press [ADF].
Press [Original Size Adj.].
3. "Original Size Adj. screen"
Press [Max. Width].
4. With A3 (for metric) or 11 x 17 (for inch) paper set to DF, press the Start key.
5. Check to see if the result is OK.
6. Press [Min. Width].
7. With B6S (for metric) or 5.5 x 8.5S (for inch) size paper set to DF, press the Start key.
8. Check to see if the result is "OK".
9. Press [OK].
4.8.6 Density Adj.

This adjustment is made when the slit glass is replaced.
The slit glass at the scanner section is coated, and therefore, its transmittance of the exposure lamp is different when compared to the original
glass.
Prearrangements
• Clean the slit glass.
• Check the whole area of the white chart to see if it is not soiled.
(1) Procedure
Press [ADF].
Press [Density Adj.].
3. "Density Adj. screen"
Set the white chart to DF.
Note
• Be sure to set the white chart in the A4 direction.

When the white chart is scanned and the auto adjustment of density is completed successfully, "OK" is displayed.
5. When an error message is displayed, turn OFF and ON the power switch (SW2) of the main body and repeat steps 3 to 4 until it is
completed successfully.
6. Press [OK].
4.8.7 Scan Position Adjustment.

Adjusts the read start position of the exposure unit in the sub scan direction.
(1) Procedure
Press [ADF].
Press [Scan Position Adjustment].
3. "Scan Position Adjustment screen"
Press [Test Copy].
Select A3 (for metric) or 11 x 17 (for inch) paper, and press the Start key with the adjustment chart set to ADF.
5. Press [END].
6. Check the read position.
I-49
[1]
50gaf3c012na
7. "Scan Position Adjustment screen"

Setting range: - 2.0 (faster) to + 2.0 mm (slower)
1 step = 0.1 mm
9. Press [OK].
4.8.8 Sensor Auto Adjust.

This adjustment is made when an erroneous detection occurs with the reflective sensor, or after the DF control board (DFCB) and each of the
reflective sensors are replaced. Conducting this adjustment backs up the sensitivity value of each of the reflective sensors to RAM in DFCB.
Prearrangement
• Clean each of the reflective sensors of DF.
Note
• After conducting [Initialization + Auto Adjust], the value of the original size VR (VR1) is reset. Be sure to conduct [Original Size
Adjustment].
(1) Procedure
Press [ADF].
Press [Sensor Auto Adjust].
3. "ADF Sendor Adjustment screen"
Press [Initialize And Sensor Auto Adj.] or [ADF Sensor Auto Adj.].
Check the check results, the initialization, and the sensors 1 to 4 to see if they are "OK."
5. Press [END].
4.9 Finisher
4.9.1 Center Staple Position (SD-507)
Adjusts the stapling position in the sub scan direction while in the stitch-and-fold by SD-507.
Note
• Before conducting this adjustment, make sure that the adjustment of the half-fold position has been completed.
(See I.4.9.2 Half-Fold Position (SD-507))
(1) Procedure
Press [Finisher].
2. "Finisher Adjustment screen"
Press [Center Staple Position].
3. "Center Staple Position Adj. screen"
Press each key and select the paper size to be adjusted.
With 5 or more originals (2 or more sheets at the finish of the stitch-and-fold) set to DF, select suitable paper and press the Start key.
6. Press [END].
7. Check the stitch-and-fold position of paper and the position of the staple in the sub scan direction.
I-50
[1]
4511f3c005na
8. "Center Staple Position Adj. screen"

Setting range: - 5.0 (to the right) to + 5.0 mm (to the left)
1 step = 0.5 mm
10. Press [OK].
4.9.2 Half-Fold Position (SD-507)

Adjusts the folding position while in the stitch-and-fold print by SD-507.
(1) Procedure
Press [Finisher].
Press [Half-Fold Position].
3. "Half-Fold Position Adjustment screen"
Press each key to select the paper size to be adjusted.
With the original set to DF, select a paper size and press the Start key.
6. Press [END].
7. Fold the output paper along the folding line and check the paper edge to see if it is not shifted [1].
[1]
4511f3c006na
8. "Half-Fold Position Adjustment screen"

Setting range: - 5.0 (to the right) to + 5.0 mm (to the left)
1 step = 0.5 mm
Note
• When there occurs a shift shown at step 7, enter a value on the minus (-) side.

10. Press [OK].
4.9.3 Punch Horizontal Position (PU).

Adjusts the position of the punch holes by PU-501 in the sub scan direction.
(1) Procedure
Press [Finisher].
2. "Finisher Adjustment"
Press [Punch Horizontal Position].
3. "Punch Horizontal Position Adj. screen"
Press [Test Copy].
4. With the original set to DF, select a suitable paper size and press the Start key.
5. Press [END].
Return to the punch horizontal position adjustment screen.
6. Check the distance between the paper edge and the center of the punch hole.
Standard value [1]: 11 mm (metric), 9.5 mm (inch) and 10.5 mm (swedish)
I-51
[1]
4512f3c003na
7. "Punch Horizontal Position Adj. screen"

Setting range: - 5.0 (shorter) to + 5.0 mm (longer)
1 step = 0.5 mm
9. Press [OK].
4.9.4 Punch Resist Loop (PU)

Adjusts the registration loop amount while in the punch by PU-501.
This adjustment is made when there occurs a tilt with the punch hole, or when a jam occurs frequently in the punch mode.
(1) Procedure
Press [Finisher].
Press [Punch Resist Loop].
3. "Punch Resist Loop screen"
Press [Test Copy].
4. With the original set to DF, select a suitable paper size and press the Start key.
5. Press [END].
6. Check the punch holes to see if they are parallel with the paper edge. And also check to see if a jam occurs.
4512f3c004na
7. "Punch Resist Loop screen"

Setting range: - 4 (longer) to + 4 mm (shorter)
1 step = 1 mm
Note
• When a jam occurs in the punch mode, set a value to the minus (-) side.
• When the line of punch holes is slanted, set a value to the plus (+) side.

9. Press [OK].
4.10 Firmware Version

Displays the version of the firmware (main body and optional).
• MFP Controller
• Image Controller
• Operation Panel Message Data
• Finisher
• ADF
• Fax board controller 1
• Fax board controller 2
• Image Controller BOOT Program
4.10.1 Procedure
Press [Firmware Version].
2. "Firmware Version screen"
Press [1] or [2] to display the intended item.
3. Press [END].
I-52
4.11 CS Remote Care

4.11.1 Outlines
• CS Remote Care enables the machine and the computer at CS Remote Care center to exchange data through telephone/fax line or e-mail
in order to control the machine.
• CS Remote Care enables the machine to call the computer at the center when trouble occurs. It also enables the computer at the center to
contact the machine for the necessary data.
• Data which CS Remote Care handles can be divided into the following groups.
a. Data which show the status of use of the machine such as Total count, PM count.
b. Data which show the abnormal situation on the machine such as where and how often errors occur.
c. Data on adjustment
d. Data on setting
Note
• It cannot be set when the following setting is set to "ON".
[Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode]
4.11.2 Setting Up the CS Remote Care

Note
• For resetting up the machine which CS Remote Care has already been set up, clear the RAM for CS Remote Care before resetting.
For clearing RAM, see I.4.11.8.(5) Detail Setting (RAM Clear)
• When using the telephone line for connection, use the recommended modem.
(For recommended modem, contact responsible person of KONICA MINOLTA.)
• When using a telephone line modem for connection, use the data modem which is based on the ITU-T recommendations V.34/V.32
bis/V.32 and AT command.
(1) Using the telephone line modem

1. Device registration at CS Remote Care center
Conduct the device pre-registration at the center.
(The device pre-registration at the center can be skipped. In this case, conduct the device ex-post registration at the center after the initial
connection.)
For the device registration method at the center, refer to the user's guide of CS Remote Care center application.
2. Connecting the modem
Turn the power for the modem OFF. Connect the machine and the modem with a modem cable. Connect the modem and the wall jack
with a modular cable.
* For connecting the modular cable, see the manual for the modem.
3. Clearing the RAM
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remove Care], and press [Detail Setting].
2. Press [RAM Clear].
3. Select Set, and press [OK].
(See I.4.11.8.(5) Detail Setting (RAM Clear))
4. Selecting the CS Remote Care function
Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remove Care] → [System Selection], and press [Modem].
5. Inputting the ID Code
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [ID Code], and press [ID Code].
2. Input the seven digits ID of the service person, and press [ID Code] again.
(See I.4.11.8.(2) ID Code)
6. Setting the date and time for CS Remote Care
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and press [Detail Setting].
2. Press [Date & Time Setting].
3. Input the date, time and the time zone using the 10-Key Pad, and press [Set].
(See I.4.11.8.(4) Detail Setting (Date & Time Setting))
7. Setting the Center ID
2. Press [Machine Setting] → [Center ID], and input the Center ID (five digits).
(See I.4.11.8.(3) Detail Setting (Basic Setting))
8. Proceed to step 8.
9. Setting the telephone number of the Center
2. Press [Machine Setting] → [Center Telephone Number].
3. Input the telephone number of the Center using the 10-Keys Pad and [P], [T], [W], [-].
10. Inputting the Device telephone number
2. Press [Machine Setting] → [Device Telephone Number].
3. Input the Device telephone number using the 10-Key Pad and [P], [T], [W], [-].
11. Inputting the AT command for initializing the modem
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → and press [Detail Setting].
2. Press [AT Command].
3. Input AT Command.
Note
• Change this Command only when it is necessary. (They do not need to be changed in normal condition.)
• For details on AT Command, see the manual for the modem.
12. Setting the DIPSW for CS Remote Care
Note
• This setting is not normally necessary. Take this step only when necessary in a specific connecting condition.
I-53
13. Executing the initial transmission

2. Press [initial transmission] key on the right bottom of the screen to start initial transmission.
3. When the machine is properly connected with the Center, CS Remote Care setting screen will be displayed.
Note
• The initial transmission key at the right bottom of the screen will be displayed only when the Center ID, the Device ID,
Telephone number of the Center and the Device telephone number have been input. (See I.4.11.8.(3) Detail Setting (Basic
Setting))
• In the case that the device pre-registration at the center is skipped, it gets into the pre-registered status once the center
receives the initial transmission. The initial connection is completed by conducting the device ex-post registration at the
center.
(2) Using the Fax line modem *1

(The device pre-registration at the center can be skipped. In this case, conduct the device ex-post registration at the center after the initial
connection.)
2. Be sure to remove the telephone line modem when the fax line is used.
3. Clearing the RAM
Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remove Care] → [System Selection], and press [Fax].
(See I.4.11.8.(2) ID Code)
9. Setting the telephone number of the Center
2. Press [Machine Setting] → [Center Telephone Number].
3. Input the telephone number of the Center using the 10-Keys Pad and [P], [T], [W], [-].
10. Inputting the Device telephone number
2. Press [Machine Setting] → [Device Telephone Number].
3. Input the Device telephone number using the 10-Key Pad and [P], [T], [W], [-].
12. Setting the DIPSW for CS Remote Care
Note
• This setting is not normally necessary. Take this step only when necessary in a specific connecting condition.
13. Executing the initial transmission

2. Press [initial transmission] key on the right bottom of the screen to start initial transmission.
3. When the machine is properly connected with the Center, CS Remote Care setting screen will be displayed.
Note
• The initial transmission key at the right bottom of the screen will be displayed only when the Center ID, the Device ID,
Telephone number of the Center and the Device telephone number have been input. (See I.4.11.8.(3) Detail Setting (Basic
Setting))
• In the case that the device pre-registration at the center is skipped, it gets into the pre-registered status once the center
receives the initial transmission. The initial connection is completed by conducting the device ex-post registration at the
center.
*1: This procedure is available only when the optional Fax kit (FK-502) is mounted.
(3) Using E-mail

(The device pre-registration at the center can be skipped in the case that the initial connection E-mail is sent from the machine to the
center. In this case, conduct the device ex-post registration at the center after the initial connection.)
2. Be sure to remove the telephone line modem
when e-mail is used.
I-54
3. Clearing the RAM

Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [System Setting], and press [E-Mail 1] or [E-Mail 2].
[E-Mail1]: Duplex
[E-Mail2]: Simplex (from machine to center)
(See I.4.11.8.(2) ID Code)
8. Encryption setting
2. Press [Basic Setting] and select either Encryption or No Encryption.
Retransmission interval on e-mail delivery error
• When selecting [E-mail2], set the retransmission interval on e-mail delivery error in software SW setting.
(See I.4.11.8.(7) Detail Setting (Software Switch Setting))
9. Setting the Respond Timeout
2. Press [Respond Timeout] and enter the response timeout using the 10-Key Pad.
Note
• Under normal conditions, there is no need to change the default setting.
10. Proceed to Step 10.

11. Setting the E-mail address
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and press [Server Set].
2. Press [Server for RX], and set POP3 server address, POP3 Login name, POP3 password and POP3 port number.
(See I.4.11.9.(1) Server for RX <POP3 server>)
3. Press [Receive], and set the E-Mail address, Mail Check, Connection Time Out and APOP Authentication.
(See I.4.11.9.(4) Receive <E-mail Address>)
4. Press [Send], and set the SMTP server address, SMTP port number, Connection Time Out, and APOP Authentication.
(See I.4.11.9.(8) Send <SMTP server>)
5. Press [TX/RX Test], and press Start key to carry out a transmission/reception test. If it fails to exchange messages, see the error
message to take necessary measure, and try again.
(See I.4.11.9.(12) TX/RX Test)
12. Proceed to Step 12.
13. Initial connection E-mail
Conduct the initial connection in one of the following steps. However, conduct the initial connection from the machine when [E-Mail2] is
selected.
1. Initial connection from the center
Send the initial connection mail from the center side to the mail address of the machine.
Once the machine receives the initial connection E-mail, the initial connection is completed.
2. Initial connection from the machine
Send the initial connection mail from the machine to the center. In this case, set the mail address of the center by [Basic setting] → [E-
Mail address] and press [Initial transmission]. In the case that the device pre-registration at the center is skipped, it gets into the pre-
registered status once the center receives the initial connection E-mail. The initial connection is completed by conducting the device
ex-post registration at the center.
Note
• When receiving the initial connection E-mail message from the Center while CS Remote Care-related screen is being
displayed, the current setting information will be deleted, and CS Remote Care setting will be displayed.
• For sending the initial connection E-mail, see the manual for CS Remote Care Center.
• Messages can be exchanged only between the Center with initial connection and the Copier.
• When the initial registration is complete, the E-mail address of the Center will be displayed by selecting [Service Mode] →
[CS Remote Care] → [Detail Setting], [Basic Setting] → [E-Mail address].
4.11.3 Software SW setting for CS Remote Care

Note
• SW bits data are written into the NVRAM every time a change is made. In case you changed bit data by accident, be sure to restore
the previous state.
(1) Input procedure

1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [Detail Setting], and press [Software Switch Setting].
2. Press [Switch No.], and input the SW number (two digits) using the 10-Key Pad.
3. Press [Bit Assignment], and select SW bit number using the arrow keys, and input 0 or 1 using the 10-Key Pad.
(For setting by hexadecimal numbers, press [HEX Assignment] key, and input using the 10-Key Pad or A to F keys.)
I-55
4. Press [Fix].
Note
• About functions of each switch, see to "I.4.11.3.(2) List of software SW for CS Remote Care".
(2) List of software SW for CS Remote Care

Note
• Do not change any bit not described on this table.
SW No. Bit Functions 0 1 Default
SW 01 0 Dial Mode Pulse Tone 1
1 Reservation - - 0
2 Reservation - - 0
3 Reservation - - 0
4 Baud rate *1 *1 0
5 *1 *1 0
6 *1 *1 0
7 *1 *1 1
SW 02 0 Emergency transmission Do not call Call 1
1 Auto call on date specification Do not call Call 1
2 Reservation - - 0
3 Reservation - - 0
4 Reservation - - 0
5 Auto call on the IC Life Do not call Call 1
6 Auto call on CCD Clamp/Gain Do not call Call 1
Adjustment failure
7 Reservation - - 0
SW 03 0 Trouble display setting *10 *10 0
1 Auto call on the toner empty Do not call Call 1
2 Reservation - - 0
3 Auto call on the waste toner bottle full Do not call Call 1
4 to 7 Reservation - - 0
SW 04 0 to 7 Reservation - - 0
SW 05 0 Modem redial interval *2 *2 1
1 *2 *2 1
2 *2 *2 0
3 *2 *2 0
SW 06 0 Modem redial times *3 *3 0
1 *3 *3 1
2 *3 *3 0
3 *3 *3 1
4 *3 *3 0
5 *3 *3 0
6 *3 *3 0
7 Reservation - - 0
SW 07 0 Redial for response time out Do not redial Redial 1
1 to 7 Reserved - - 0
SW 08 0 Retransmission interval on E-Mail delivery error *4 *4 0
1 *4 *4 1
2 *4 *4 1
3 *4 *4 0
SW 09 0 Retransmission times on E-Mail *5 *5 0
1 delivery error *5 *5 1
2 *5 *5 0
3 *5 *5 1
4 *5 *5 0
5 *5 *5 0
6 *5 *5 0
7 Reservation - - 0
I-56
SW 11 0 Timer 1
RING reception → CONNECT
reception *6 *6 0
1 *6 *6 0
2 *6 *6 0
3 *6 *6 0
4 *6 *6 0
5 *6 *6 1
6 *6 *6 0
7 *6 *6 0
SW 12 0 Timer 2 *7 *7 0
1 Dial request completed → CONNECT reception *7 *7 0
2 *7 *7 0
3 *7 *7 0
4 *7 *7 0
5 *7 *7 0
6 *7 *7 1
7 *7 *7 0
SW 14 0 Timer 4 *8 *8 0
1 Line connection → Start request *8 *8 0
telegram delivery
2 *8 *8 0
3 *8 *8 0
4 *8 *8 0
5 *8 *8 1
6 *8 *8 0
7 *8 *8 0
SW 15 0 Timer 5 *9 *9 0
1 Wait time for other side's response *9 *9 1
2 *9 *9 1
3 *9 *9 1
4 *9 *9 1
5 *9 *9 0
6 *9 *9 0
7 *9 *9 0
SW 18 0 Attention display Do not call Call 1
To set weather to give the alarm display when using the modem
but the power for the modem is OFF.
SW 19 to SW 0 to 7 Reservation - - 0
40
*1 Baud rate
Mode 01-7 01-6 01-5 01-4
9600 bps 0 1 1 0
19200 bps 0 1 1 1
"38400 bps" 1 0 0 0
*2 Modem redial interval
Mode 05-3 05-2 05-1 05-0
1 minute 0 0 0 1
2 minutes 0 0 1 0
"3 minutes" 0 0 1 1
4 minutes 0 1 0 0
5 minutes 0 1 0 1
6 minutes 0 1 1 0
7 minutes 0 1 1 1
8 minutes 1 0 0 0
9 minutes 1 0 0 1
10 minutes 1 0 1 0
I-57
*3 Modem redial times

Mode 06-6 06-5 06-4 06-3 06-2 06-1 06-0
0 to 9 times 000 0000 to 000 1001
"10 times" 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
11 to 99 times 000 1011 to 110 0011
*4 Retransmission interval on E-Mail delivery error
Mode 08-3 08-2 08-1 08-0
0 minute 0 0 0 0
10 minutes 0 0 0 1
20 minutes 0 0 1 0
30 minutes 0 0 1 1
40 minutes 0 1 0 0
50 minutes 0 1 0 1
"60 minutes" 0 1 1 0
70 minutes 0 1 1 1
80 minutes 1 0 0 0
90 minutes 1 0 0 1
100 minutes 1 0 1 0
110 minutes 1 0 1 1
120 minutes 1 1 0 0
*5 Retransmission times on E-Mail delivery error
Mode 09-6 09-5 09-4 09-3 09-2 09-1 09-0
0 to 9 times 000 0000 to 000 1001
"10 times" 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
11 to 99 times 000 1011 to 110 0011
*6 Timer 1 (RING reception → CONNECT reception)
Mode 11-7 11-6 11-5 11-4 11-3 11-2 11-1 11-0
0 to 31 sec 0000 0000 to 0001 1111
"32 sec" 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
33 to 255 sec 0010 0001 to 1111 1111
*7 Timer 2 (Dial request completed → CONNECT reception)
Mode 12-7 12-6 12-5 12-4 12-3 12-2 12-1 12-0
0 to 63 sec 0000 0000 to 0011 1111
"64 sec" 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
65 to 255 sec 0100 0001 to 1111 1111
*8 Timer 4 (Line connection → Start request telegram delivery)
Mode 14-7 14-6 14-5 14-4 14-3 14-2 14-1 14-0
0 to 31 (x 100 msec) 0000 0000 to 0001 1111
"32 (x 100 msec)" 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
33 to 255 (x 100 msec) 0010 0001 to 1111 1111
*9 Timer 5 (Wait time for other side's response)
Mode 15-7 15-6 15-5 15-4 15-3 15-2 15-1 15-0
0 to 29 sec 0000 0000
to 0001
1101
"30 sec" 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
31 to 255 sec 0001 1111
to 1111
1111
*10 Trouble display setting
• Select the message for the trouble automatic notification when the machine is connected to the CSRC from among the following two,
either the message when the machine is connected to the CSRC (The service representative will automatically be notified.) or the
message when the machine is not connected to the CSRC (Please contact your service representative.).
If the message when the machine is not connected to the CSRC is selected in the condition in which the machine is connected to the
CSRC, the CS Remote Care center is automatically notified of any trouble that may occur and the message given on the control panel is
that when the machine is not connected to the CSRC
Mode 03-0
The message when the machine is 0
not connected to the CSRC is given.
I-58
The message when the machine is 1

connected to the CSRC is given.
4.11.4 Setup confirmation

• Follow the steps below to make sure that CS Remote Care has been properly set up.
1. Call the Service Mode to the screen.
2. Press [CS Remote Care].
3. Check to make sure that only selected item, "E-Mail1", "E-Mail2", "Modem", or "Fax" is displayed.
4.11.5 Calling the Maintenance

• When CE starts maintenance, inputting the ID code of CE (seven digits: numbers which CE can identify. They are controlled by the
distributor.) will transmit the information to the Center side and tells that the maintenance has started. When the maintenance is finished,
touching [Maintenance Complete] key will transmit the information to the Center and tells that it is finished.
(1) When starting the Maintenance

1. Select Service Mode and press [CS Remote Care].
2. Press [ID Code], and input ID Code.
3. Press [ID Code].
* The Start key blinks while maintenance is being carried out.
(2) When finishing the Maintenance

1. Select Service Mode and press [CS Remote Care].
2. Press [Maintenance Complete].
4.11.6 Calling the Center from the Administrator

• When the CS Remote Care setup is complete, the administrator can call the CS Remote Care center.
1. Select [Administrator Setting], and press [System Connection].
2. Press [Call Remote Center].
When the setup is not complete or another transmission is being carried out, the Call Remote Center key will not be displayed, and the
transmission is not available.
Note
• For transmitting data of the machine by calling the center on the specified date and time, refer to the manual for CS Remote Care
Center.
4.11.7 Checking the transmission log

• The transmission log list will be output to be checked.
1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care], and press [Detail setting].
2. Press [Communication Log Print].
3. Load Tray 1 or Bypass tray with A4S paper.
4. Press the Start key to output transmission log.
4.11.8 Detail on settings

(1) System Selection
(a) Functions
• To select the system type for remote diagnosis.
(b) Use
• Use to newly build or change the system.
(c) Setting/Procedure
• Select E-Mail, Modem, or Fax.
• Fax is available only when the optional Fax kit is being installed.
E-Mail1 (Duplex) E-Mail2 (Simplex (from machine to center))
Modem Fax
(2) ID Code
(a) Functions
• To register the Service ID.
(b) Use
• Use when registering and changing Service ID.
• Enter a 7-digit code from the 10-Key Pad. (0000001 to 9999999)
<Registration>
• Press ID Code and enter the Service ID.
• Press [ID code] to register the ID.
I-59
• The [Detail Setting] will appear when the ID has been registered.
(3) Detail Setting (Basic Setting)

(a) Functions
• Execute the basic setting.
(b) Use
• Use to change the set contents.
• Use to register the machine to the CS Remote Care Center.
3. Touching the [Detail Setting] will display the basic setting.
Basic Setting
1. Set the Center ID and the phone No.
2. When e-mail is selected for system and all setup procedures are completed, E-mail address of the Center is displayed.
* When entering the phone No, 10-Keys and keys on the screen have following meanings.
[-] Pose : Waits to start transmitting after dialing
[W] Wait : Detects the dial tone of the other end
[T] Tone dial : Carry out tone dialing
[P] Pulse dial : Carry out pulse dialing
[*], [#] : To be used as necessary
<Schedule (Only when the [E-Mail2] is selected)>
• Set the schedule of notification to the center.
• Up to three different notification schedules can be registered.
• Select the notification cycle from [Day], [Week], or [Month].
When selecting [Day] for the notification cycle, set the Day Frequency.
When selecting [Week] for the notification cycle, set the Week Frequency and day of the week.
When selecting [Month], set the Month Frequency and the date of the month.
<Center Notification (Only when the [E-Mail2] is selected)>
• Select the items of data that will be sent to the center in one-way transmission through E-Mail2.
• The following table shows each of the notification item keys and corresponding data.
[1] Sales count data [7] EKC data
[2] Error count data [8] Adjustment data
[3] Service count data [9] Not used
[4] Life count data [10] Not used
Life cycle data
[5] CSRC-System data [11] Not used
Device config data
[6] History data [12] Not used
Note
• Multiple items of data can be selected and sent at one time. However, be sure that only EKC data cannot be sent together with
other items of data.
Initial Transmission
• Touching the Initial Transmission key will sent the information to the CS Remote Care Center to register the machine.
(Only when the Modem or Fax is selected on the system Input.)
(4) Detail Setting (Date & Time Setting)

(a) Functions
• To set the data and time-of-day
(b) Use
• Use to set or change the date and time-of-day.
3. Press [Detail Setting] to access Date & Time Setting.
4. Enter the date (month, day and year), time-of-day, and the time zone from the 10-Key Pad.
5. Press [SET] to start the clock.
(5) Detail Setting (RAM Clear)

(a) Functions
• To clear the following data at the Center
ID Code, Primary Setting, Date/Time Input (Time Zone), Software SW Setting and AT Command.
I-60
(b) Use
• To be used for setting CS Remote Care.
• To be used for reset the every data of the Center to default.
Note
• If RAM Clear is selected during transmission, RAM clear processing will be implemented at the time the transmission is
completed regardless of whether it is done properly or not.
• The default setting is "Unset."
Set "Unset"
(6) Detail Setting (Communication Log Print)

(a) Functions
• To print out the Communication Log.
(b) Use
• Use to output and use the Communication Log.
1. Call the Service Mode on the screen.
3. Press [Detail Setting] to access [Communication Log Print].
4. Load Tray 1 or Bypass Tray with A4S or 81/2 x 11 paper.
5. Press Start key to print out the Communication Log.
(7) Detail Setting (Software Switch Setting)

(a) Functions
• To change the CS Remote Care settings.
(b) Use
• To change the settings for CS Remote Care as necessary.
For procedures on settings, see "I.4.11.3 Software SW setting for CS Remote Care".
(8) Detail Setting (Response Time Out)

(a) Functions
• It sets the intervals for resending E-Mails when transmission error occurred.
• It can be set only when [E-Mail] is selected by System Setting.
(b) Use
• To use when changing the intervals for resending E-Mails when transmission error occurred.
• The default setting is 60 minute.
"60 minute" (10 to 1440)
(9) Detail Setting (AT Command)

(a) Functions
• To set the command to be issued at the time of Modem Initialization.
• This setting is available only when [Modem] is selected for the system setting.
(b) Use
• To set the command to be issued at the time of Modem Initialization.
• Enter the command and press [SET] to register.
4.11.9 Detail on settings (Server Setting)

• Server Setting can be set only when [E-Mail] is selected by System Setting.
(1) Server for RX <POP3 server>

(a) Functions
• To set the POP3 server address used for the CS Remote Care.
I-61
(b) Use
• To set the address of the POP3 Server.
• POP3 server address can be set with IP address or the domain name.
<Input IP Address>
• IP Address Version 4 format
[0 to 255].[0 to 255].[0 to 255].[0 to 255]
<Input FQDN>
• Enter the domain name.
(2) Server for RX <POP3 login name>

(a) Functions
• To set the logon name for the POP3 server used for the CS Remote Care.
(b) Use
• To set the logon name for the POP3 server.
• The default setting is No.
• Up to 64 characters (alphanumeric characters and symbols) can be used.
(3) Server for RX <POP3 password>

(a) Functions
• To set the logon password for the POP3 server used for the CS Remote Care.
(b) Use
• To set the logon password for the POP3 server.
(4) Receive <E-mail Address>

(a) Functions
• To set the e-mail address used for the CS Remote Care.
(b) Use
• To set the e-mail address.
(5) Receive <Mail Check>

(a) Functions
• To set whether or not to use Mail Check and the time interval for the POP server used for the CS Remote Care.
(b) Use
• To set whether or not to use Mail Check and the time interval for the POP server used for the CS Remote Care.
• To change the time interval for Mail Check.
“No” (1 to120 min., No)
(6) Receive <Connection timeout>

(a) Functions
• To set the timeout period for connection during reception.
(b) Use
• To change the timeout period for connection during reception.
• The default setting is 60 Sec.
I-62
“60 Sec” (30 to 300 Sec)
(7) Receive <APOP Authentication>

(a) Functions
• To set whether or not to authenticate the APOP during reception.
(b) Use
• To authenticate the APOP during reception.
Yes “No”
(8) Send <SMTP server>

(a) Functions
• To set the SMTP sever address for transmission used for the CS Remote Care.
(b) Use
• To set the SMTP server address
• SMTP server address can be set by the IP address or the domain name.
<Input IP Address>
• IP Address Version 4 format
[0 to 255].[0 to 255].[0 to 255].[0 to 255]
<Input FQDN>
• Enter the domain name.
(9) Send <SMTP port number>

(a) Functions
• To set the SMTP port number for transmission used for the CS Remote Care.
(b) Use
• To set the Port Number of the SMTP Server.
• The default setting is 25.
“25” (1 to 65535)
(10) Send <SMTP Connection Time-out>

(a) Functions
• To set the timeout period for transmission.
(b) Use
• To change the timeout period for connection during transmission.
“60 Sec” (30 to 300 Sec)
(11) Send <Authentication Setting>

(a) Functions
• To set whether or not to authenticate during transmission via SMTP server.
(b) Use
• To use when authenticating during transmission.
Available authentication mode: POP Before SMTP, SMTP authentication
• The default setting is OFF.
“OFF” POP Before SMTP SMTP Authentication
* Setting to “POP Before SMTP” will set the time for POP Before SMTP.
I-63
“60 Sec” (0 to 60 Sec)

* When setting to SMTP authentication, press the “Setting Check” key for authentication.
User ID : Enter the User ID for SMTP authentication.
Password : Enter the password for SMTP authentication.
Domain name : Enter the domain name for SMTP authentication.
(12) TX/RX Test

(a) Functions
• To determine the correct transmission and reception using CS Remote Care.
(b) Use
• Use to determine the correct transmission and reception using CS Remote Care.
• Press the Start key to let the machine start the transmission and reception test.
• The test procedure and result will be displayed on the screen.
(13) Receive <APOP Authentication>

(a) Functions
• To initialize the contents for the sever setting.
(b) Use
• Use to initialize the contents for the server setting.
Yes “No”
4.11.10 List of the CS Remote Care error code

(1) When Connecting by Modem
Error code Error Solution
0001 The line is busy (Busy detection) • Transmit again manually.
0002 Failure of the Modem default setting at transmitting (When the • Check if the power of the modem is ON.
transmission completes with modem initial setting failed) • Check the connecting condition between the
modem and the main unit.
0003 Timeout of CONNECT at transmitting • Transmit again manually
(No response to ATD) • Check if the power of the modem is ON.
• Check the connecting condition between the
0005 Timeout of CONNECT at receiving • Check if the power of the modem is ON.
(No response to ATA) • Check the connecting condition between the
0006 Shut down of the data modem line (Host) • No solution, because the line is shut down at
(Carrier OFF is detected) the host side.
0008 Timeout of start request telegram delivery • Transmit again manually.
(Start request telegram is not delivered after line connection)
0009 Timeout of finish request telegram delivery • Transmit again manually.
(Finish request telegram is not delivered (Start of shut down).)
000A Receiving rejection • Check the setting condition of the host side.
(Receiving is made when the main unit is set to reject receiving.) • Check the setting condition of the main unit
side.
000B RS232C Driver Over Run • If the same error is detected several times,
(When the modem detects Over Run.) turn the modem power OFF and ON.
000C If the same error is detected several times, turn the modem power • If the same error is detected several times,
OFF and ON. turn the modem power OFF and ON.
000D Break Interrupt (BI) Indicator • If the same error is detected several times,
(When the modem detects Break Interrupt (BI) Indicator.) turn the modem power OFF and ON.
0011 Baud Rate ERROR • Check the Baud rate of the software DipSW.
(When selected Baud Rate is out of the specification (9600 bps to
38400 bps).)
0018 Machine ID has already been registered • Set the initial registrations again for all
(Request telegram 2 (SET-UP) comes from the main unit that has including the host side.
already registered Machine ID.)
0019 Center ID Error • Check Center ID setting of the main unit side.
I-64
(Center ID of the host is not identical with the one of start request
telegram.)
Check Center ID setting of the main unit side.
001A Device ID inconsistency • Check Device ID setting of the main unit side.
(Device ID of the host is not identical with the one of start request
telegram.)
Check the setting of the host side.
001B Device ID Unregistered • Check Device ID setting of the main unit side.
(Request telegram 2 (Constant data transmitting, Emergency call)
comes from the main unit that has not registered Machine ID yet.)
Check the setting of the host side.
001E Impossible to change (During printing) • Try again when the machine is not printing.
(Setting cannot be changed because the setting change is made
during the machine is printing or starts printing.)
0020 Timeout of Telegram Delivery • Try communication again.
(At waiting mode of telegram delivery the machine fails to receive the
telegram in a given time.)
0027 Transmission / Receiving collision • Try communication again.
(Receiving is detecting during transmitting processing)
Note
• When a code other than the ones listed above is displayed, contact KMBT and inform the error code.
(2) When connecting by E-Mails

0001 Connection Timeout during transmission • Check the SMTP Server on User side.
0*** Transmission error • Check the SMTP Server on User side.
***: SMTP responding code (hexadecimal)
0003 Connection timeout when receiving • Check the POP3 Server on User side.
0005 Receiving error • Check the POP3 Server on User side.
1030 Machine ID mismatching • Check the Machine ID setting.
• Received an E-Mail which tells that Machine ID mismatches. • Check the Machine ID setting on host side.
1062 Modifying not available due to the copy job currently performing • Ask the host to send another instruction mail
• When informing the host that it cannot be modified due to the copy for modifying.
job currently performing.
1081 Frame No. error • Check the status of the Machine registration
• The last frame has not been received. on host side.
• There are missing frame No.
1084 Date expired • Ask the host to send another instruction mail
• Expiration date for data modification command has passed. for modifying.
1092 Received an error mail when Center setup is not complete • Check the status of the Machine registration
on host side.
2039 Socket is not connected. • Check the SMTP Server and POP3 Server
• LAN cable on the Copier side is detached. on User side.
203E Network is down. • Check the connection between the Copier on
• LAN cable on the Copier side is detached. the User's side and the Network connector.
• Check the Network environment on the
User's side.
3000 POP3_AUTHORIZATION_ERR • Check the POP3 Server environment on
User's side.
3001 POP3_TRANSACTION_ERR • Check the POP3 Server environment on
User's side.
3002 POP3_CONNECT_ERR • Check the POP3 Server environment on
User's side.
3003 POP3_TIMEOUT_ERR • Check the POP3 Server environment on
User's side.
3004 POP3_FORMAT_ERR • Check the POP3 Server environment on
User's side.
3005 POP3_MEMORY_ERR • Check the POP3 Server environment on
User's side.
3006 POP3_JOBID_ERR • Check the POP3 Server environment on
User's side.
3007 POP3_NO_DATA_ERR • Check the POP3 Server environment on
User's side.
3008 POP3_DELETE_FAIL_ERR • Check the POP3 Server environment on
User's side.
3009 POP3_MAILBOX_FULL • Check the POP3 Server environment on
User's side.
4103 Not Ready • Wait for a while and try transmitting again.
I-65
• Tried to transmit or receive an E-Mail when the machine was not

yet in the E-Mail receiving status after power was turned ON.
4104 SMTP Channel Not Ready • Wait for a while and try transmitting again.
4105 POP3 Channel Not Ready • Wait for a while and try transmitting again.
4106 Not Ready other than the ones listed above. • Wait for a while and try transmitting again.
Note
• When a code other than the ones listed above is displayed, contact KMBT and inform the error code.
(3) When connecting by Fax modem

T50 Host terminal ID not correct • Check the telephone number set for host.
R80 Serial number received from the host not correct. • Check the status of the Machine registration
on host side.
R81 Disconnection of writing instruction from host during machine is • Wait for a while and try transmitting again.
running.
R82 Disconnection of FAX-CSRC instruction when FASX-CSRC is not • Check the status of the Machine registration
allowed. on host side.
R83 Host command error. • Contact KONICA MINOLTA and inform the
error code.
R84 NVRAM writing error. • Contact KONICA MINOLTA and inform the
error code.
Note
• When a code other than the ones listed above is displayed, see the FK-502 Service Manual.
4.11.11 Troubleshooting for CS Remote Care

If communication is not done properly, check the condition by following the procedures shown below.
1. Shift the screen in the order of [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [Detail Setting].
At this time, in the cases of Initial transmitting / Administrator transmitting / Maintenance Start transmitting / Maintenance Finish transmitting,
the communication result will be displayed at the top of the screen.
* For the communication result, the following message will be displayed based on its success or failure.
Display of Cause Solution
Communication result - -
Communicating - -
Communication trouble Although the machine tries to communicate with the Center, there is • See the list of error message and confirm
with the Center any trouble and the communication completes unsuccessfully. the corresponding point.
(See I.4.11.10 List of the CS Remote Care
error code)
Complete successfully - -
Modem trouble Although the machine tries to communicate with the Center, there is • Check if the Power of modem in ON.
any trouble in the modem. • Check if there is any problem in connection
between the modem and the main unit.
Busy line Although the machine tries to communicate with the Center, the line • Communicate with the Center again.
to the Center is busy.
No response Although the machine tries to communicate with the Center, there is • Communicate with the Center again.
no response from the Center. • Check the communication environment of
the Center side.
4.12 System 2
4.12.1 Data Capture
Set the availability/unavailability of the capture of the print job data. Keeping the print data captured allows the reproduction of a print with which
a trouble occurred. (For particulars, see "TROUBLESHOOTING (IC-207).")
4.12.2 Paper Size Setting

Set the paper size of LU.
(1) Procedure
Press [System 2].
Press [Paper Size Setting].
3. "Paper Size Setting screen"
Select [Tray 3] or [LCT] and press [Paper size].
4. Press [A4] or [81/ x 11].
2
5. Press [OK] twice to return to [System Input screen].
I-66
4.12.3 Software DIPSW setting procedures

(1) OUTLINE
Set the software DIPSW.
Note
• Be sure not to change the setting of DipSW that is not given in this service manual.
(2) Procedure
Press [System 2].
Press [DipSW Setting].
3. "Software Switch Setting screen"
Press [SW No.].
4. Press the [+]/[-] or numeric keys to enter the DipSW No.
In "SW Setting value", 8-bit data of the DipSW number selected is displayed in binary digit and hexadecimal digit.
5. Press [Bit No.].
6. Press the [+]/[-] or numeric keys to enter the bit number.
7. Press either of [OFF (0)] or [ON (1)] of "Bit Data" to set a value.
8. Press [Set].
9. Repeat steps 3 to 8 to set necessary software DipSW.
10. Press [OK].
4.12.4 Software DIPSW setting list

NOTE
• Be sure not to change bits with no particular reference made of the function.
Default setting
DIPSW Bit Function Set value
Japan Inch Metric
1 0 Operation at key counter removal • 0: Ignore. 0 1 1
• 1: Decide promptly as a jam.
1 Total counting method of A3 (11 x 17) • 0: 1 count 0 1 1
• 1: 2 counts
2 - - 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 Restriction of the FS-522 stapled copy count • 0: None 0 0 0
• 1: Stop once at 20 copies.
2 0 • 0: Decided by DipSW3-2 0 0 0
• 1: Stop at once after paper exit.
1 - - 0 0 0
2 1 1 1
3 1 1 1
4 0 0 0
5 1 1 1
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
3 0 0 0 0
1 SC latch (fusing SC) • 0: Latch released 0 0 0
• 1: Latched
2 No toner stop condition 2 • 0: When a job completed 0 0 0
• 1: Stop at the break of the copy
print.
3 - - 0 0 0
4 1 1 1
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
4 0 Detection of the toner level (toner supply • After 0 print or its equivalent: 0 0 0
1 display) 4-1=0, 4-0=0 0 0 0
Set the copy count that is printed until the print • After 100 print or its equivalent:
operation is terminated from the toner near 4-1=0, 4-0=1
empty is displayed after the toner level sensor • After 200 print or its equivalent:
(PZS) detects toner empty for a certain period of 4-1=1, 4-0=0
time. • After 500 print or its equivalent:
4-1=1, 4-0=1
I-67
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
2 Print stop condition after toner supply display • 100 prints or its equivalent: 1 1 1
3 Set the copy count that is printed until the print is 4-3=0, 4-2=0 1 1 1
prohibited after a message set by DipSW4-0/1 is • 400 prints or its equivalent:
displayed. 4-3=0, 4-2=1
• 700 prints or its equivalent:
4-3=1, 4-2=0
• 1000 prints or its equivalent:
4-3=1, 4-2=1
4 proof copy • 0: Valid 0 0 0
• 1: Invalid
5 Job stop when there remains no toner • 0: Not stop 1 1 1
• 1: Stop
6 copy reservation • 0: Valid 0 0 0
• 1: Invalid
7 Detection of the toner bottle when installed • 0: Not detects 0 0 0
• 1: Detects
5 0 - - 0 1 0
1 0 0 1
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 Toner save setting • No adjustment made: 5-6=0, 0 0 0
6 Toner consumption can be reduced by bringing 5-5=0 0 0 0
the developing bias and the charging grid • Toner consumption increased
potential down below 50V (20 steps). And it is (Image density increased):
also possible to increase the image density a 5-6=0, 5-5=1
little by bringing the potential up above 50V (20 • Toner consumption reduced
steps). (Image density reduced): 5-6=1,
5-5=0
• No adjustment made: 5-6=1,
5-5=1
7 - - 0 0 0
6 0 Preliminary drum rotation of when the power is • 0: Not rotate 0 0 0
on • 1: Rotate
1 Selection of K size for machine dispatched to • 0: Metric size 0 0 0
Taiwan (original size) • 1: K size
2 Selection of K size for machine dispatched to 0 0 0
Taiwan (bypass)
3 - - 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 1 1 1
6 1 1 1
7 0 0 0
7 0 1 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 1 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 1 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
8 0 1 0 0
1 1 0 0
2 Print inhibition when getting at PM • 0: Invalid 0 0 0
• 1: Valid
3 - - 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 PM counting method of A3 (11 x 17) • 0: 1 count 0 0 0
• 1: 2 counts
7 - - 0 0 0
9 0 Copy quantity limit • No limit: 9-3=0, 9-2=0, 9-1=0, 0 0 0
1 9-0=0 0 0 0
I-68
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
2 • 1 print: 9-3=0, 9-2=0, 9-1=0, 0 0 0
9-0=1
3 0 0 0
• 3 prints: 9-3=0, 9-2=0, 9-1=1,
9-0=0
• 5 prints: 9-3=0, 9-2=0, 9-1=1,
9-0=1
• 9 prints: 9-3=0, 9-2=1, 9-1=0,
9-0=0
• 10 prints: 9-3=0, 9-2=1, 9-1=0,
9-0=1
• 20 prints: 9-3=0, 9-2=1, 9-1=1,
9-0=0
• 30 prints: 9-3=0, 9-2=1, 9-1=1,
9-0=1
• 50 prints: 9-3=1, 9-2=0, 9-1=0,
9-0=0
• 99 prints: 9-3=1, 9-2=0, 9-1=0,
9-0=1
• 250 prints: 9-3=1, 9-2=0, 9-1=1,
9-0=0
• No limit: 9-3=1, 9-2=0, 9-1=1,
9-0=1
• No limit: 9-3=1, 9-2=1, 9-1=0,
9-0=0
• No limit: 9-3=1, 9-2=1, 9-1=1,
9-0=0
• No limit: 9-3=1, 9-2=1, 9-1=1,
9-0=1
4 Copy protect image density setting • Normal: 9-5=0, 9-4=0 0 0 0
5 The density of the copy protects image tends to • Darker 1: 9-5=0, 9-4=1 0 0 0
be lighter entirely under the environment of high • Darker 2: 9-5=1, 9-4=1
temperature and high humidity. In this case, set
the density of the copy protect image to be
darker
6 - - 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
10 0 0 0 0
1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 Jam code display • 0: Not displayed 1 1 1
• 1: Displayed
11 0 - - 0 0 0
1 1 1 1
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
12 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 Print count setting up to the print inhibition when • 1000 prints: 12-5=0, 12-4=0, 0 0 0
4 getting at PM 12-3=0 0 0 0
When getting at DipSW8-2PM with the print • 2000 prints: 12-5=0, 12-4=0,
5 inhibition set to "1", the print stops after getting 12-3=1 0 0 0
at the PM count shown on the right. • 3000 prints: 12-5=0, 12-4=1,
12-3=0
• 4000 prints: 12-5=0, 12-4=1,
12-3=1
• 5000 prints: 12-5=1, 12-4=0,
12-3=0
6 - - 0 0 0
I-69
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
7 0 0 0
13 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 Jaggy filter selection • 0: OFF 0 0 0
• 1: ON
4 - - 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 Discrimination level of the non-image auto erase • Corresponding to dark original: 1 1 1
7 mode 13-7=0, 13-6=0 0 0 0
• Standard: 13-7=0, 13-6=1
• Corresponding to light
interference: 13-7=1, 13-6=0
• -: 13-7=1, 13-6=1
14 0 - - 0 1 0
1 0 1 0
2 0 1 0
3 0 1 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
15 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 Stop/non-stop due to overload when not • 0: Stop at 400 sheets 0 0 0
connected to FS/job tray. • 1: Not stop
7 - - 1 1 1
16 0 Fusing temperature while in the low power mode • The fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) 0 1 1
1 Set the fusing temperature while in the low and /2 (L3) turn on when the 0 0 0
power mode. thermistors /1 (TH1) and /2
(TH2) are respectively at 70
degrees, and turn OFF when
they are at 80 degrees.:
16-1=0, 16-0=0
• The fusing heater lamps /1 (L2)
and /2 (L3) turn ON when the
thermistors /1 (TH1) and /2
16-1=0, 16-0=1
16-1=1, 16-0=0
16-1=1, 16-0=1
2 Heater operation • 0: Heater turns ON at all times. 1 1 1
• 1: Heater is OFF while in the
sleep mode.
3 Print permission before conducting TCR • 0: Permit 1 1 1
adjustment • 1: Prohibit
4 - - 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
I-70
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
6 Dot diameter adjustment control • The humidity is 60% or more 1 1 1
7 Change the timing when the dot diameter and the power switch turns OFF 0/1 0 0
adjustment is made. for more than 8 hours.: 16-7=0,
16-6=0
• The power switch turns OFF for
more than 8 hours.: 16-7=0,
16-6=1
• At all times: 16-7=1, 16-6=0
• None: 16-7=1, 16-6=1
17 0 Foolscap size setting • 81/ x 13: 17-2=0, 17-1=0, 1 1 1
2
1 Set the definition of the foolscap size. 1 1 1
17-0=0
2 • 81/ x 13: 17-2=0, 17-1=0, 0 0 0
4
17-0=1
• 81/ x 13: 17-2=0, 17-1=1,
8
17-0=0
• 8 x 13: 17-2=0, 17-1=1, 17-0=1
3 - - 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 Separation claw operation OFF mode (for • 0: Normal 0 0 0
destination to China) • 1: OFF
18 0 Separation of a defective part from the tray 1 • 0: Normal 0 0 0
(upper stage of the main body) • 1: Separated
1 Separation of a defective part from the tray 2 0 0 0
(lower stage of the main body)
2 Separation of a defective part from the bypass 0 0 0
feed
3 - - 0 0 0
4 Separation of a defective part from the tray 3 • 0: Normal 0 0 0
(PC-206 upper stage/PC-407) • 1: Separated
(PC-206 lower stage)
(LU)
7 - - 0 0 0
19 0 Separation of a defective part from the printer • 0: Normal 0 0 0
controller (IC) • 1: Separated
1 Separation of a defective part from the FAX kit 0 0 0
(FK)
2 - - 0 0 0
3 Separation of a defective part from HDD • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Separated
4 - - 0 0 0
5 Separation of a defective part from the scanner • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Separated
6 - - 0 0 0
7 Separation of a defective part from DF • 0: Normal 0 0 0
20 0 Separation of a defective part from the network • 1: Separated 1 1 1
1 Separation of a defective part from IEEE1284 0 0 0
2 Separation of a defective part from USB 0 0 0
3 - - 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 Separation of a defective part from SD • 0: Normal 0 0 0
• 1: Separated
6 - - 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
21 0 1 0 1
1 Security print key display on the box initial • 0: Not displayed 0 0 0
screen • 1: Displayed
2 Platen/ADF size recognition switchover • 0: 81/ x 14 0 0 0
2
• 1: Foolscap
I-71
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
3 - - 0 0 0
4 Operation at key counter removal • 0: Destroy jobs 0 0 0
• 1: Not destroy jobs
5 Platen small size (81/2 x 11/A4 or less) setting • 0: A notice is made in a size 0 1 0
detected by APS.
Default setting is "1" for inch and "0" for metric.
• 1: A notice is made as A4
(Japan) /81/2 x 11 (inch) size.
6 Operation at key counter removal (printer) • 0: Ignore 0 0 0
• 1: (same as the) Setting of
DipSW1-0
7 - - 0 0 0
22 0 FAX print operation when a parallel vendor is • 0: Forced memory reception 0 0 0
connected • 1: Print all FAX jobs
1 FAX print fee collection control when a parallel • 0: Not collect for forced memory 0 0 0
vendor is connected reception
• 1: Collect for forced memory
reception, too
2 Printer operation when a parallel vendor is • 0: Permit to print 0 0 0
connected • 1: Prohibit printing
3 Printer operation when a parallel vendor is • 0: Permit confidential print only 0 0 0
connected (Confidential print) • 1: Permit all print
4 - - 0 0 0
5 Non-image area erase when copying with • 0: Not erase 0 0 0
magnification changed (original glass) • 1: Erase
6 Image rotation not at continuous scanning • 0: Rotate to 180 degrees 0 0 0
(original glass) • 1: Not rotate
7 - - 0 0 0
23 0 1 1 1
1 1 1 1
2 1 1 1
3 1 1 1
4 Tray full detection at the exit of 100 sheets while • 0: Not detected 0 0 0
in the FS non-staple (FS-522) • 1: Detected
5 Tray full detection at the exit of 100 sheets while 1 1 1
in the FS staple (FS-522)
6 - - 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
24 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 Stop setting between jobs in the continuous print • 0: Does not stop while printing 0 0 0
operation of small jobs. between jobs.
Set this setting to "1" when the problem which • 1: Stop while printing between
the power of the main body turns OFF/ON jobs.
occurs during printing the small jobs
continuously.
25 0 - - 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 File operation prohibit setting on the USB script • 0: Prohibit 0 0 0
file • 1: Permit
Note
·Regardless of this setting, file operation is
prohibited when Enhanced Security Mode is
specified to "Valid"
3 Switchover of the TSL control • 0: Normally ON/OFF 0 0 0
• 1: All OFF
4 - - 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
I-72
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
6 Image rotation when stapling is not selected • 0: Not rotate 0 0 0
• 1: Rotate to 180 degrees
7 - - 0 0 0
26 0 Polygon motor stop timer • 0: 15 seconds 0 0 0
• 1: 30 seconds
1 - - 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 Reference image position for bypass custom • 0: At the center 0 0 0
paper • 1: On the rear side of paper
4 RS-232C I/F setting • 0: Valid 0 0 0
• 1: Invalid
5 - - 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
27 0 0 0 0
1 Asterisk display on the job history screen • 0: No asterisk 0 0 0
Not to store the information of "User Name", • 1: "User Name", "Address
"Address Type", "Address", "Document Name", Type", "Address", "Document
and "Destination" on the job history screen, the Name", and "Destination"
information appears as asterisks by setting it to appear as asterisks
"1".
2 - - 0 0 0
3 Short paid warning display in double side setting • 0: Not displayed 0 0 0
when connecting to the old vender • 1: Displayed
4 - - 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
28 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
29 0 Transfer/separation output selection of the user • Normal paper (Japan): 29-2=0, 0 0 0
1 paper (tray) 29-1=0, 29-0=0 0 0 0
Set the transfer/separation output that is • Normal paper (except for
2 applicable when selecting the user paper in Japan): 29-2=0, 29-1=0, 29-0=1 1 1 1
[Paper type] of [Utility menu]. • Thick paper: 29-2=0, 29-1=1,
29-0=0
• Thin paper: 29-2=0, 29-1=1,
29-0=1
• Recycled paper: 29-2=1,
29-1=0, 29-0=0
• Envelope/Thick paper 2:
29-2=1, 29-1=0, 29-0=1
3 TSL (transfer exposure lamp) control of the user • Normal ON control: 29-4=0, 0 0 0
4 paper (tray) 29-3=0 0 0 0
Set the TSL control that is applicable when • All OFF: 29-4=0, 29-3=1
selecting the user paper in [Paper type] of [Utility • Switching over depending on
menu]. When selecting "Switch over depending the environment: 29-4=1,
on the environment," conduct the TSL control by 29-3=0
switching over "Normal ON control"/"All OFF"
according to the humidity detected by the
humidity sensor (HUMS).
5 - - 0 0 0
6 1 1 1
7 0 0 0
30 0 Transfer/separation output selection of the user • Normal paper (Japan): 30-2=0, 0 0 0
1 paper (bypass) 30-1=0, 30-0=0 0 0 0
When selecting the bypass tray, set the transfer/ • Normal paper (except for
separation output that is applicable when the Japan): 30-2=0, 30-1=0, 30-0=1
user paper is selected in [Specialty paper] of
I-73
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
2 "Change Tray settings" or when it is selected in • Thick paper: 30-2=0, 30-1=0, 0 0 0
[Paper type] of [Utility menu]. 30-0=0
• Thin paper: 30-2=0, 30-1=1,
30-0=1
• Recycled paper: 30-2=1,
30-1=0, 30-0=0
• Envelope/Thick paper 2:
30-2=1, 30-1=0, 30-0=1
3 TSL control of the user paper (bypass) • Normal control: 30-4=0, 30-3=0 0 0 0
4 When selecting the bypass tray, set the TSL • All OFF: 30-4=0, 30-3=1 0 0 0
control that is applicable when the user paper is • Switching over depending on
selected in [Specialty paper] of "Change Tray the environment: 30-4=1,
settings" or when it is selected in [Paper type] of 30-3=0
[Utility menu].
When selecting "Switch over depending on the
environment," conduct the TSL control by
switching over "Normal control"/"All OFF"
according to the humidity detected by the
humidity sensor (HUMS).
5 - - 0 0 0
6 Long paper print support • 0: Not supported 0 0 0
• 1: Supported
7 FCOT-EE setting • 0: No pre-scan 0 0 0
• 1: Pre-scan
31 0 - - 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 Audit log setting • 0: Invalid 0 0 0
• 1: Valid
7 - - 0 0 0
32 0 1 1 1
1 0 0 0
2 Output only by the driver setting when printing • 0: Print start after setting paper 0 0 0
custom size paper on the bypass on the bypass
When printing on the custom size paper from the • 1: Print start with the paper
printer driver, custom size setting on the touch setting specified by the driver
panel is skipped by setting it to "1". (No warning)
3 Image log transmission function key display • 0: Invalid 0 0 0
• 1: Valid
4 - - 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
33 0 Switchover of the punch hole number (PU) • 2 holes (Japan): 30-1=0, 0 1 0
1 While in the use of PU-501, set the number of 30-0=0 0 0 1
punch holes to be displayed on the operation • 3 holes (inch): 30-1=0, 30-0=1
board. This can be set regardless of the • 4 holes (metric): 30-1=1,
destination of the main body. 30-0=0
Default setting is 3 holes for inch and 4 holes for • 4 holes (Sweden): 30-1=1,
metric. 30-0=1
2 - - 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
34 0 System ON/OFF while in the sleep or the power • 0: ON 1 1 1
switch (SW2) OFF • 1: OFF
1 FS-522 paper exit tray position • Not fixed: 34-3=0, 34-2=0, 0 0 0
2 Set the stop position of the paper exit tray. 34-1=0 0 0 0
• Tray 1: 34-3=0, 34-2=0, 34-1=1
• Tray 2: 34-3=0, 34-2=1, 34-1=0
• Tray 3: 34-3=0, 34-2=1, 34-1=1
I-74
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
3 • Folding/stitch-and-fold tray 0 0 0
(SD): 34-3=1, 34-2=0, 34-1=0
• Not fixed: 34-3=1, 34-2=0,
34-1=1
• Not fixed: 34-3=1, 34-2=1,
34-1=0
• Not fixed: 34-3=10, 34-2=1,
34-1=1
4 Print start permission when SD-507 is supplied • 0: Permit 0 0 0
with paper. • 1: Prohibit
5 Scanned image storage to MS SharePoint • 0: In case of via Proxy, send 0 0 0
Server2007 by Scan To WebDav data by Chunk transfer OFF. In
When the scanned image to MS SharePoint case of not via Proxy, send
Server2007 cannot be stored by Scan To data by Chunk transfer ON.
WebDav, set the setting to "1".With this setting, • 1: In case of WebDAV transfer,
the problem is solved by sending data without send data by Chunk transfer all
being separated into Chunk. OFF.
6 - - 1 1 1
7 Operation improvement when the control unit • 0: Normal operation 0 0 0
(CU-1) is installed • 1: Personal user box appears
When the control unit (CU-1) is installed and the first and "Delete after print" or
document from the personal user box is used, "Not delete after print" can be
the document can be deleted at the same time selected when selecting
as printing if the print setting is not needed. document.
35 0 Custom original support • Does not support custom 0 0 0
1 Set when copying custom originals. originals: 35-1=0, 35-0=0 0 0 0
• Custom original mode: 35-1=0,
35-0=1
• Custom original size AMS
(center zoom): 35-1=1, 35-0=0
• Not allowed: 35-1=1, 35-0=1
2 - - 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 Address book password export permission • 0: Valid 0 0 0
setting • 1: Invalid
6 Address release setting after sending through • 0: Release 0 0 0
the scanner • 1: Not release/No pop-up
Set whether to release the address and the
settings or not after scanning/faxing.
When setting it to "1", the address and the
settings are stored without a display of pop-up.
7 - - 0 0 0
36 0 1 1 1
1 Telnet used or not used • 0: Not used 0 0 0
• 1: Used
2 Fusing temperature setting when normal paper • Standard: 36-3=0, 36-2=0 0 0 0
3 is selected • Standard + 10 degrees: 36-3=0, 0 0 0
When there occurs a problem (insufficient 36-2=1
fusing, large paper curl) with fusibility while in • Standard + 5 degrees: 36-3=1,
the selection of plain paper, change the fusing 36-2=0
set temperature. • Standard - 10 degrees: 36-3=1,
·Countermeasure 36-2=1
1) Increase the temperature: To suppress a jam
due to an insufficient fusing and the wind-up of
paper around the roller.
2) Decrease the temperature: To suppress a
paper curl and the undulation of paper.
4 Fusing temperature setting when thick paper, • 0: Standard 0 0 0
envelope or label is selected • 1: Standard + 10 degrees
When there occurs a problem (insufficient
fusing) with fusibility while in the selection of
thick paper, envelope and label, change the
fusing set temperature. (For countermeasure,
see DIPSW 36-2, 3.)
I-75
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
5 Fusing temperature setting when thin paper is 0 0 0
selected.
When there occurs a problem (insufficient
fusing) with fusibility while in the selection of thin
paper, change the fusing set temperature. (For
countermeasure, see DIPSW 36-2, 3.)
6 Fusing temperature setting when OHP is • Standard: 36-7=0, 36-6=0 0 0 0
7 selected. • Standard + 10 degrees: 36-7=0, 0 0 0
When there occurs a problem (insufficient 36-6=1
fusibility and large paper curl) with fusibility while • Standard - 20 degrees: 36-7=1,
in the selection of OHP, change the fusing set 36-6=0
temperature. (For countermeasure, see DIPSW • Standard - 10 degrees: 36-7=1,
36-2, 3.) 36-6=1
37 0 Operation when FS reaches the maximum • 0: Restore automatically 0 0 0
capacity • 1: Restore manually
1 FAX stamp setting • 0: Invalid 0 0 0
• 1: Valid
2 Image selection when fixing motor clock • 0: Copier image 0 0 0
adjusted • 1: Test pattern No.9
3 Switchover of the original glass and the ADF • No setting: 37-4=0, 37-3=0 0 0 0
4 size detection • Size detection setting of 81/ x 0 0 0
2
This setting is to support the originals of other
than the standard size. 131/2 (for Hong-Kong area):
37-4=0, 37-3=1
• Detection setting of 81/ x 14
2
(for Europe area): 37-4=1,
37-3=0
5 Size conversion of A4/81/2 x 11 when the • 0: Invalid 0 0 0
• 1: Valid
original glass is small size
This setting is to convert the size conversion of
the small originals which are detectable.
Note
·The size conversion of the small size
originals which are undetectable can be set
with Dipsw21-5.
6 Frame Erasure Setting when selecting [Minimal] 0 0 0
in the magnification
7 Paper selection of different direction when APS • 0: Priority to productivity 0 0 0
is ON • 1: Priority to the paper in same
directionValid
38 0 - - 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 Operation at setting paper onto the bypass feed • Reset size with selecting the 0 0 0
4 tray bypass feed tray: 38-4=0, 0 0 0
Set the operation when setting paper onto the 38-3=0
bypass feed tray.) • Does not reset size with
selecting the bypass feed tray:
38-4=0, 38-3=1
• Reset size without selecting the
bypass feed tray: 38-4=1,
38-3=0
• Reset size without selecting the
bypass feed tray: 38-4=1,
38-3=1
5 The number of copies stored in the box in • 0: 1 copy 0 0 0
printing • 1: Some copies specified with
the driver
6 - - 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
39 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 LDAP retrieval when manual input is prohibited • 0: Invalid 1 1 1
• 1: Valid
3 - - 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
I-76
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
5 Performance improvement when using the Scan • 0: Specify the resolution when 0 0 0
to HDD scanning
Set the converting resolution of the scanner. • 1: Convert the resolution with
Note software after scanning
·When set to "0", the image is converted at
the resolution specified with the press panel.
However with the default setting (200dpi), the
performance speed is high but the image
quality is degrated.
·When set to "1", the image is scanned at
600dpi.
·When set to "1", the resolution is converted
with the software so that the performance
speed is slowed down.
6 ScanToBox/FaxToBox Setting when the • 0: Invalid 0 0 0
management unit, the vender and the key • 1: Valid
counter are installed
7 Command support setting of Media Type • 0: Not support setting of Media 0 0 0
Emperor Type.
The countermeasure for the trouble that the A3 • 1: Support setting of Media
double-sided printing job is not performed Type.
nomally when orderd by PCL5.
This is default setting to prevent the trouble.
Note
·When "1" is selected for this setting, Media
Type is supported but print abnormality may
occur.
40*DIPS 0 Wake-up by the recovery of the link change • 0: Invalid 1 1 1
W 40 is It wakes up when the LAN cable is connected • 1: Valid
the and the LED on the LAN connecting port turns
setting of ON.
WakeOn (In case that the LAN cable is connected to be
Lan ready to communicate.)
function. 1 Wake-up by receiving magic packet 1 1 1
It wakes up when receiving the magic packet
that is sent from the software with Wake On Lan
function.
(In case of receiving a particular packet
communication via network.)
2 - - 0 0 0
3 Wake-up by receiving multi cast packet • 0: Invalid 0 0 0
It wakes up when receiving the broad cast • 1: Valid
packet (concurrent transmission that specifies
the multi communication partners) that is sent
from PC or the network device.
4 Wake-up by receiving broadcast packet 0 0 0
It wakes up when receiving the broad cast
packet (concurrent transmission to the
unspecified number of communication partners)
that is sent from PC or the network device.
5 Wake-up by receiving ARP/IPv4 request packet 0 0 0
It wakes up when receiving the ARP/IPv4
request packet (packet that is for specifying the
communication partner that has IPv4 address
setting to be sent) that is sent from PC or the
network device.
6 Wake-up by receiving IPv4 direct packet 1 1 1
It wakes up with the operation of PSWC or the
external application soft.
I-77
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
7 Wake-up by receiving IPv6 direct packet 1 1 1
It wakes up with the operation of PSWC or the
external application soft under the environment
being connected to IPv6 network.
41 0 - - 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
42 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
43 0 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
44 0 0 0 0
1 SSL connection setting • 0: Does not conduct the SSL 0 0 0
Set the SSL connection setting when the LDAP connection (port 636)
is connected to the AD server and the • 1: Conduct the SSL connection
communication error occurs. (port 636)
Note
·This function is available only when the
firmware with the PKI Card System Control
Software is installed.
2 AD server authentication setteing • 0: Does not perform AD server 0 0 0
Set whether to perform the authentication of authentication
Principal Name taken out of the PKI card by the • 1: Perform AD server
AD server. authentication
Note
3 Domain specification setting when AD server • 0: Domain Name 0 0 0
authentication is perfomed • 1: FQDN Name
Set the domain specification when AD server (HOST.DOMAIN)
authentication is perfomed.
Note
4 - - 0 0 0
5 Scan to Me/Scan to Home functions • 0: Invalid 0 0 0
Change Scan to Me/Scan to Home functions. • 1: Valid
Note
I-78
Default setting
Japan Inch Metric
6 Scan to Home function • 0: Valid 0 0 0
After the DIPSW 44-5 is set to "1", only Scan to • 1: Invalid
Me function will be enabled by setting this
DIPSW to "1", which disables Scan to Home
function.
Note
·This setting is available only when the
DIPSW 44-5 is set to "1".
7 - - 0 0 0
45 0 0 0 0
1 0 0 0
2 0 0 0
3 0 0 0
4 0 0 0
5 0 0 0
6 0 0 0
7 0 0 0
4.12.5 Software DIPSW (1_10)
4.12.10 ISW
For particulars, See "J. REWRITING OF FIRMWARE"
4.12.11 Option
Let the main body recognize the installing condition of the optional HDD and FAX.
(1) Procedure
Press [System 2].
Press [Option].
3. "Option screen"
Press [Installed] or [Not Installed] to select the installation or non-installation of the HDD, FAX and stamp.
4. Press [OK].
4.12.12 Network FAX Setting

Sets to use the network FAX.
NOTE
• At this moment on January 2007, "SIP FAX" is unavailable.
(1) Procedure
Press [System 2].
Press [Network FAX Setting].
3. " Network FAX Setting screen"
Press either [ON] or [OFF] to choose whether to use the network FAX (IP address FAX / SIP FAX / Internet FAX) or not.
NOTE
• When it is set to "ON", you can choose whether to use or not by performing the following setting.
• [Administrator Setting] →[Network Setting] →[Network FAX Setting] →[Network FAX Function Settings]
4. Press [OK].
I-79
4.12.13 Driver Install

To install the loadable device driver and the other software for PKI system.
e.g. Middleware for PKI system, Card reader driver for PKI system, Management file.
NOTE
• It will be displayed only when the firmware with the PKI Card System Control Software is installed.
(1) Procedure
1. Prepare a USB memory on which the driver data of the loadable device to be used was written.
2. Insert the USB memory into the USB port at the rear side of the main body.
3. Enter the Service Mode.
Press [System 2].
4. "System 2 screen"
Press [Driver Install].
Press [SET].
7. Check that the control panel shows the message indicating that the data has been installed correctly.
8. Turn OFF Main power switch (SW1) and wait 10 seconds, and then turn ON again.
9. Remove the USB memory from the USB port.
4.12.14 Trouble Reset

After completion of the handling of a trouble related to the fusing system, release the trouble.
NOTE
• When a trouble related to the fusing system occurs, the software DipSW3-1 (SC latch) is set to "1" ("0" for default). This
adjustment is used to return this to the default condition (normal operation).
• When an SC code is displayed on the touch panel, you cannot enter the service mode. Accordingly, the following shows the
method for resetting a trouble from the power-off condition.
(1) Procedure
1. Turn ON the main power switch (SW1).
2. With the Utility/Counter key pressed, turn ON the power switch (SW2).
3. Press [Trouble reset] to release a trouble with [OK] displayed.
4. Turn OFF and ON the power switch (SW2).
4.12.15 Counter recovery

When the error code that is related to NVRAM board (NRB) occurs, each type of counter data that is stored in NRB may be deleted. In this
case, the data that has been backed up regularly beforehand can be back to NRB by the following procedure.
Note
• Before conducting the recovery, check the "Latest counter backup time" to confirm that the file is appropriate for the recovery.
(1) Error code related to NRB

When any of the following error code occurs, recover the counter data by following "(2) Recovery procedure ".
C-D354, C-D359, C-D35A, C-D355

1. Enter the Service Mode.
Press [System 2].
2. " System2 screen"
Press [Trouble Reset].
3. "Trouble Reset screen"
Press [Counter Recovery].
I-80
NOTE
• [Counter Recovery] is displayed when the error code related to NRB occurs.
4. "Counter Recovery screen"

Press [Yes].
5. The message "Counter recovery is being processed." appears.
Note
• Do not turn OFF the main power switch (SW1) while this message appears.
6. Once the counter recovery completes, press [Yes] and turn the SW1 OFF/ON.
7. If the counter recovery does not complete, the trouble of NVRAM board (NRB) may be the reason. Contact the support division of the
authorized distributor.
4.12.16 Internet ISW

For details, See "J. REWRITING OF FIRMWARE"
4.13 List Output

4.13.1 List output
Outputs various types of lists.
Lists that can be output are as shown below.
• Machine Management List
• Adjustment List
• Service Parameter
• Protocol Trace Last
• Protocol Trace Error
• Fax Setting List
• FAX analysis list
(1) Procedure
Press [List Output].
2. "List Output screen"
I-81
Press the list to output for selection, then select [1-Sided/2-Sided] and [Paper Tray].
The list selected is output.
4. "List Output screen"
When outputting other lists, repeat steps 2 to 3.
5. Press [END].
Service Mode screen appears.
4.14 Test Mode

4.14.1 Test pattern output
There are two methods provided for the test pattern output.
• Output it by selecting the item of each test pattern. (Procedure A)
• Output it by specifying the test pattern number. (Procedure B)
Note
• Be sure not to output a test pattern that is not given in this service manual.
(1) Procedure for a test pattern output

Press [Test Mode].
Press [Test Mode].
"Test Mode screen"
Press either of the following: [Full Image Halftone], [Gradation Pattern (No. 2)], [Gradation Pattern (No. 3)], [Gradation Pattern (No. 5)],
[Beam Gap Check] and [Line Check Pattern].
3. Screen for each pattern
When specifying any density, enter a density value through [+]/[-] keys and press [Setting].
When selecting an overall halftone, it is possible to select a halftone density by [0 (White)], [70 (Halftone)] and [255 (Black)].
Select A3 (for metric) or 11 x 17 (for inch) paper and press the Start key.
6. Check the test pattern and press [END].
7. When outputting other test patterns, repeat steps 2 to 6.
8. Press [OK].
(2) Procedure for any test pattern output

Press [Test Mode].
2. "Test Mode screen"
Press [Test pattern output mode].
3. "Test Pattern Output Mode screen"
Press [Pattern No.] and specify a test pattern number through the [+]/[-] keys.
When specifying any density, press [Density Setting], enter a density value through the [+]/[-] keys and press [Setting].
With A3 (for metric) or 11 x 17 (for inch) paper selected, press the Start key.
6. Check the test pattern and press [END].
7. When outputting other test patterns, repeat steps 3 to 7.
8. Press [OK].
4.14.2 Running Mode

Conduct a continuous print operation test.
In this mode, the following items can be selected.
• Intermittent Copy Mode
The machine shifts into the ready condition after completion of the print operation of the set copy count and conducts the same operation
after waiting for 0.5 sec.
• Paperless Running Mode
In this mode, no paper is fed and none of the paper detection/jam detection is made while in the operation. The print operation is made
nearly at the same timing as the usual operation with no transfer/separation control made. The machine shifts into the ready condition after
completion of the print operation of the set copy count and conducts the same operation after waiting for 0.5 sec.
• Paperless Mode
With no paper fed and none of the paper detection/jam detection made, the print operation is made nearly at the same timing as the usual
operation.
• Paperless Endless Mode
The operation is made with the set copy count automatically set with no limit. Like the paperless mode, the print operation is made nearly at
the same timing as the usual operation with no paper fed and none of the paper detection/jam detection made.
• Progress Running Mode
The combined operation of the paperless endless mode plus the scan operation and the stepped change of the auto paper feed is made.
This is not use in the field.
(1) Procedure
Press [Test Mode].
2. "Test Mode screen"
Press [Running mode].
I-82
3. "Running Mode screen"

Press [Intermittent Copy] to [Paperless Endless] and select a test mode to be conducted.
4. Press the Start key to start the running test.
5. Press the Stop key to stop the running test.
6. Turn off and on the power switch (SW2) to exit the running test mode.
4.14.3 Test Mode No.1 Overall halftone (8-bit output)

(1) [Check item]
• When the density is set at 70 (halftone)
When there are white stripes or black stripes, check to see if an abnormality is found with the scanner system or process system
[Recommended sections to be checked]: Developing unit, cleaning glass, charging corona, transfer/separation corona, scanner mirror, slit
glass and original glass
• When the density is set at 0 (white)
When an image fogging occurs, check the process system to see if an abnormality is found with it.
[Recommended sections to be checked]: Charging corona, and the contact of a high voltage power source
• When the density is set at 255 (black)
When the density is thin, check the process system to see if an abnormality is found with it.
[Recommended sections to be checked]: Write unit
(2) Test pattern
50gaf3c007na
[1] When the density is set at 70. [2] When the density is set at 0.
[3] When the density is set at 255. -
4.14.4 Test Mode No.2 Gradation pattern

(1) [Check item]
When fogging appears or density is thin, check the process system and the gamma correction to see if which is defective.
Regardless of this test pattern being normal, any trouble is found with the print image, the image processing system or scanner system is
considered defective.
(2) Test pattern
50gaf3c013na
4.14.5 Test Mode No.3 Gradation pattern (8-bit output)

(1) [Check item]
• Check to see if the laser output of LD1/LD2 is uniform and if the gradation is reproduced without a break.
[Recommended sections to be checked]: Write unit, and LD offset adjustment
* For LD offset adjustment, see "I.4.4.11 LD1 Offset Adj. / LD2 Offset Adj.".
I-83
(2) Test pattern
LD1 LD2
50gaf3c008na
4.14.6 Test Mode No.5 Gradation pattern (8-bit output)

(1) [Check item]
• Check the pattern to see if the laser output of LD1/LD2 is uniform with the gradation continuously reproduced.
[Recommended checkpoints]: Write unit, LD offset adjustment
* For LD offset adjustment, see "I.4.4.11 LD1 Offset Adj. / LD2 Offset Adj.".
(2) Test pattern
LD1 LD2
50gaf3c009na
4.14.7 Test Mode No.11 Beam check (8-bit output)

(1) [Check item 1]
• Check to see if there is a difference in density found with the solid black pattern in the main scan and sub scan directions.
[Recommended sections to be checked]: Charging corona, transfer/separation corona, developing unit, and write dust-proof glass.
(2) [Check item 2]

• Check to see if an image crawling occurs with the gradation pattern at the leading edge and/or trailing edge of the test pattern in the sub
scan direction.
[Recommended sections to be checked]: Transfer/separation corona
(3) Test pattern
[1]
[2]
50gaf3c010na
[1] Solid black pattern [2] Gradation pattern
I-84
4.14.8 Test Mode No.16 Linearity evaluation pattern (1-bit error diffusion output)
(1) [Check item]
Judge from this test pattern whether the scanner system or the printer system is abnormal.
Items that can be checked include main scan magnification, sub scan magnification, image skew, and leading edge timing of the printer
system. If the copy image is defective despite no abnormality being visible on the test pattern, the scanner system is defective.
(2) Test pattern

[1]
31mm 237mm
20mm
[1]
190mm
m
0m
28
205.7mm
28
0m
m
190mm
190mm 50gaf3c011na
[1] Edge of paper -
4.15 Fax setting

For particulars of the setting, see FK-502 Service Manual.
4.16 Enhanced Security

4.16.1 Enhanced Security function setting procedure
(1) Procedure
2. Press the following keys in this order.
Stop → 0 → Clear
3. Select the mode.
(2) Exiting
1. Press the [Exit].
4.16.2 Enhanced Security function tree

Service Mode
Enhanced Security CE Password
Administrator Password
Administrator Feature Level
CE Authentication
Operation Ban release time
Administrator unlocking
Initialize Flash Memory Lock PW
Counter backup setting
4.16.3 CE Password
(1) Functions
• To set and change the CE password.
(2) Use
• Use to change the CE password.
(3) Setting/Procedure
• Enter the CE password (8 digits) on the on-screen keyboard.
• The initial setting is "92729272."
Current Password: Enter the currently using CE password.
New Password: Enter the new CE password.
Re-Input Password: Enter the new CE password again.
I-85
Note
• When the following setting leads to the Password Rules [ON], the password with the same letters as well as the password which
is same as the previous one cannot be changed.
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings]
• NEVER forget the CE password. When forgetting the CE password, call responsible person of KMBT.
4.16.4 Administrator Password

(1) Functions
• To set and change the administrator password.
(2) Use
• Use to change the administrator password.
• Use this function when the administrator forget the administrator password because a new password can be set without entering the
current administrator password with this.
• Enter the administrator password (8 digits) on the on-screen keyboard.
• The initial setting is "12345678."
New Password: Enter the new administrator password.
Re-Input Password: Enter the new administrator password again.
Note
• When the following setting leads to the Password Rules [ON], the password with the same letters, the password which is same
as the previous one and the password of less than eight digits cannot be changed.
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings]
4.16.5 Administrator Feature Level

(1) Functions
• Set the range of settings which are available to administrator.
(2) Use
• When [Level2] is selected on this function, the functions shown below can be set by the administrator.
Items can be set by administrator Level1 Level2 Prohibit
[System Settings]- Original Glass × ○ ×
[Standard Size Original Size Detect
Setting] ADF Original Size Detect × ○ ×
Original Glass × ○ ×
Small Size Detect
Foolscap Size Setting × ○ ×
Detect Size Setting × ○ ×
• The default setting is "Prohibit".
Level1 Level2 "Prohibit"
4.16.6 CE Authentication
• When the "ON" is selected in [Password Rules] or [Enhanced Security Mode] of [Utility] → [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings],
this function is not displayed.
(1) Functions
• Set the CE Password authentication when enter the Service mode.
(2) Use
• Use to activate the authentication with CE Password when enter the Service mode.
• Default setting is "OFF"
ON "OFF"
Note
• In case "Valid" is suitable for [Password Rules] or [Enhanced Security Mode] of [Utility] → [Administrator Settings] → [Security
Settings], be sure to set the CE Authentication "ON" in advance.
Also be sure to change in advance the CE Password from default setting.
4.16.7 Operation Ban release time

(1) Functions
• To set the time that elapses before the machine releases an access lock that is activated after the CE password authentication.
I-86
(2) Use
• To set the period of time that elapses before the machine releases the access lock, which aims to prevent the unintentional release of the
access lock.
• After the CE password authentication, if the access lock is activated, the lock release timer starts to operate by input the Stop → 0 → 9 →
3 → 1 → 7 in [Meter Count] → [Check Details] after the main power switch is turned OFF and On. When the timer reaches the time
specified in this setting, the access lock is released.
• The default setting is 1 (minutes).
1 - 60 (minutes)
Note
• When Enhanced Security Mode is set to ON in [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode], the
period of time that can be set in this setting is 5 minutes or more.
4.16.8 Administrator unlocking

(1) Functions
• To release an access lock that is activated after an administrator password authentication.
(2) Use
• To release the access lock with service authority when an administrator password authentication fails and the access lock is activated.
• When the main power switch is turned OFF and ON or the period of time set in the Release Time Settings elapses, the machine releases
the access lock that is activated after the administrator password authentication.
In addition to these operations, this setting provides another way to release the access lock.
1. Press [Administrator unlocking].
2. Press [unlocking] to release an access lock.
3. When [OK] is displayed, press [OK].
4.16.9 Initialize Flash Memory Lock PW

If the CF card is replaced for any reason when the Flash memory lock password is specified, the following two misalignments may occur.
• The misalignment of the Flash memory lock password between the CF card and the NVRAM board (NRB)
• The misalignment of the HDD model type and the HDD serial number between the installed HDD and the
• data of CF card. (In case HDD is installed.)
When the misalignments above are caused by replacing the CF card, use F Memory Lock PW Initialize function to initialize or reset the items
shown below.
(a) Flash memory lock password initialize

When the Flash lock password is misaligned between CF card and NVRAM board (NRB), C-D303 is displayed and the system stops. This
function is arranged to initialize the Flash memory lock password to solve this misalignment.
(b) HDD resetting

When the HDD model type and the HDD serial number are misaligned between the installed HDD and the data of CF card, HDD is not
recognized and the machine behaves as described below according to the setting of enhanced security mode.
• When [Enhanced Security Mode] is specified to "Valid" : Stops due to C-D001 ("HDD error")
• When [Enhanced Security Mode] is specified to "Invalid" : Starts without recognizing HDD.
This function is arranged to specify the model and the serial number of installed HDD to the CF card to make available the HDD which once
failed to be recognized.
Note
• When the HDD model type and HDD serial type specified to CF card are different from ones of installed HDD, the HDD
resetting does not function to prevent the fraud use of HDD. HDD resetting works only when the HDD model type and the HDD
serial number are not specified to CF card.
(1) Procedure when the HDD not installed

Be sure to prepare the CF card formatted normally in advance.
Note
• When the CF card is replaced for any reason, the stored data is not guaranteed. Therefore when executing this function, be sure
to use the CF card which has been formatted normally.
• As the flash memory lock password is canceled after executing this procedure, be sure to tell users to reconfigure the Flash
memory lock password.
1. Turn OFF the power switch (SW2) and the main power switch (SW1).
2. Remove the four screws [1] to remove the cover [2], then replace the CF card inserted to CF card slot [3] with another CF card which has
been formatted normally.
I-87
[2]
[3]
[1]
a0r5f3c001ca
Note
• When inserting the CF card, be sure to fully insert with its top side to the front side of the main body.
3. Turn ON the main power switch (SW1) and the power switch (SW2), and after startup the main body, check that the malfunction code "C-
D303" is displayed.
4. Enter the security mode.
5. "Enhanced Security screen"
Press [Initialize Flash Memory Lock PW].
6. To initialize the Flash memory lock password, press [Yes].
Press [No] when not initialize.
7. Turn OFF and ON again the power switch (SW2) and the main power switch (SW1) to start the main body.
8. Reconfigure each user information.
(2) Procedure when the HDD installed

Be sure to prepare the CF card formatted normally in advance.
Note
• When the CF card is replaced for any reason, the stored data is not guaranteed. Therefore when executing this function, be sure
to use the CF card which has been formatted normally.
• As the flash memory lock password is canceled after executing this procedure, be sure to tell users to reconfigure the flash
memory lock password.
1. Turn OFF the power switch (SW2) and the main power switch (SW1).
2. Remove the four screws [1] to remove the cover [2], then replace the CF card inserted to CF card slot [3] with another Flash memory card
which has been formatted normally.
[2]
[3]
[1]
a0r5f3c001ca
Note
• When inserting the CF card, be sure to fully insert with its top side to the front side of the main body.
• For information about procedure for formatting CF card, contact the support division of the authorized distributor.
3. Turn ON the main power switch (SW1) and the power switch (SW2), and after startup the main body, check that the malfunction code "C-
D303" is displayed.
4. Enter the service mode.
Press [Installed] in [System2] → [Option] → HDD to reset the HDD to installed condition.
6. Turn OFF and ON the main power switch (SW1) and the power switch (SW2), and after startup the main body, check that the malfunction
code "C-D303" is displayed again.
7. Enter the security mode.
8. "Enhanced Security screen"
Press [Initialize Flash Memory Lock PW].
9. To initialize the Flash memory lock password and reset the HDD, press [Yes].
Press [No] when not initialize.
10. Turn OFF and ON again the power switch (SW2) and the main power switch (SW1) to restart the main body.
I-88
11. Back up the address and image information.

Note
• Be sure to back up the address as PSDA/PSWC.
• The image information needs be printed to back up.
12. Enter the service mode.

Press [State Confirmation] → [Memory/HDD Adjustment] → [HDD Format].
14. Press [All] → [Yes] to format the HDD and align with the status of CF card.
15. Restore the data which is backed up at step 11 to the HDD.
16. Reconfigure each user information.
4.16.10 Counter backup setting

To prevent the data erase by the trouble related to NVRAM board (NRB), back up the "Counter data" stored in NRB to CF card. When the error
code that is related to NRB occurs, conduct the data recovery by following the procedure in "I.4.12.15 Counter recovery ".

1. "EnhancedSecurity screen"
Press [Counter Backup Settings].
2. "Counter Backup Settings screen"
Select the regular backup time from [1]9:00 [2]12:00 [3]15:00 [4]18:00 and press [ON] of the time.
Note
• To disable the regular backup, press [Disable].
3. Press [OK].
(2) Release procedure

Once the regular backup is conducted, [Backup file clear] appears on the "Counter Backup Settings screen".
If the backup data is old and the latest backup data is needed, use the backup file clear function.
The new backup data file is created by turning OFF/ON the main power switch (SW1) after the backup file clear.
1. "EnhancedSecurity screen"
Press [Counter Backup Settings].
2. "Counter Backup Settings screen"
Press [Backup file clear].
Note
• If the backup file is not cleared, conduct it again.
3. Once the backup file clear is completed, turn OFF/ON the main power switch (SW1).
I-89
4.17 Billing Setting

4.17.1 Billing Setting function setting procedure
(1) Procedure
Stop → 9
3. Select the mode.
(2) Exiting
1. Press the [Exit].
4.17.2 Billing Setting function tree

Service Mode
Billing Setting Counter Setting
Management Function Choice
License Management
I-90
4.17.3 Counter Setting

(1) Functions
• To set the counting method for the total counter and size counter.
• To set the size regarded as the large size (2 counts.)
(2) Use
Total Counter
• Use to change the counting method for the counters.
(3) Setting/ Procedure

• Default setting is"Mode1".
Mode1:1 count per 1 copy cycle (Default: Others4, Japan)
Mode2: Large size is double counts (Default: US, Europe, Others1, Others2, Others3)
Note
• The content of this setting is reflected in the count method with the key counter.
Size Counter
• A3/11 x 17: When it exceeds 279 mm in the main scan direction and 420 mm in the sub scan direction (exceeds 399 mm at fax scan), it is
regarded as the large size.
• A3/B4/11 x 17/81/ x 14: When it exceeds 215 mm in the main scan direction and 355 mm in the sub scan direction (exceeds 337 mm at
2
fax scan), it is regarded as the large size.
• A3/11 x 17/B4/81/ x 14/Foolscap: When it exceeds 203 mm in the main scan direction and 330 mm in the sub scan direction (exceeds
2
313 mm at fax scan), it is regarded as the large size (However the size in the main scan direction changes according to the foolscap size
setting.)
• Not counted (Default: Others 4, Japan)
• A3 and 11 x 17 (Default: US)
• A3, B4, 11 x 17, and 81/ x 14 (Default: Europe, Others 1, Others 2, Others 3)
2
• A3, B4, Foolscap, 11 x 17, 11 x 14, and 81/ x 14
2
*Count-up List
Copying 1-sided copy 2-sided copy
Size Sizes other than those Specified sizes Sizes other than those Specified sizes
specified specified
Mode Mode Mode Mode Mode
1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Total 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 4
Size 0 0 1 1 0 0 2 2
2-sided 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
total
0: No count; 1: 1 count; 2: 2 counts; 3: 3 counts; 4: 4 counts
4.17.4 Management Function Choice

• To set whether or not the following items are to be mounted.
Key Counter, Management Device (Data controller), Authentication Device, or Vendor
Note
• It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to "ON".
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode]
• When the setting shows that [Management Device 1], [Management Device 2] or [Vendor 2] is mounted, the following applications
will be invalid. PC FAX transmission / HDD TWAIN / PS Box Operator / PS Scan Direct / PS Job Spooler Also, the following setting
will be set to "Disable". [Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Management Function Setting] → [Network Function
Setting]
(1) Authentication Device 1

(a) Functions
• To set whether or not the authentication device 1 is installed.
(b) Use
• Set when the authentication device 1 (PageACSES) is mounted.
(c) Setting / Procedure

Note
• The setting is available only when user authentication and account track are set "OFF" with [Administrator Settings] → [User
Authentication/Account Track] → [General Setting].
• When the Authentication Device mount setting is set to "mount", make sure that the [IP Address Fax] and [Internet Fax]
settings are set to "OFF" with [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Network Fax Settings].
(2) Authentication Device 2

(a) Functions
• To set whether or not the authentication device 2 is installed.
I-91
(b) Use
• Set when the authentication unit (biometric type or card type) is mounted.
• Set Authentication Device (Finger Vein Biometrics type or IC card authentication type) installed.
Bio : Uses biometrics (finger vein) authentication system
Card1 : Uses IC card authentication system (standard)
Card2 : Uses non-contact IC card authentication system made by a third party (load)
• When selecting biometrics, set a film timeout interval.
• When selecting IC card authentication, a response timeout interval is displayed.
(The interval is unchangeable.)

<Authentication Mode>
Card1 Card2 Biometrics
Note
• When using Card2, conduct ISW of the "loadable device driver" in advance.
• Be sure to turn OFF/ON the main power switch (SW1) after setting Card2.
(3) Key Counter Only

(a) Functions
• To set whether or not the key counter is installed.
(b) Use
• Set when the key counter is mounted.
• Select [Color Mode] and [Message] when the key counter is mounted.
* Color Mode
• When [Mode 1] is set on [Total Counter Mode] after selecting [Billing Setting] → [Counter setting].
Mode 1: 1 count per 1 copy cycle
Mode 2: 2 counts per 1 copy cycle
• When [Mode 2] is set on [Total Counter Mode] after selecting [Billing Setting] → [Counter setting] and large size is selected on [Large
Size Counter Mode]
• When [Mode 2] is set on [Total Counter Mode] after selecting [Billing Setting] → [Counter setting] and sizes other than large size are
selected on [Large Size Counter Mode]
Mode 1: 1 count per 1 copy cycle
(d) Setting/Procedure
* Message
Select the message type when the administrative unit is mounted.
Type 1: Message for key counter
Type 2: Message for card scanning
Type 3: Message for ID management
Type 4: Message for remote SW
* Confirmation copy
• Set whether to allow a confirmation copy when a key counter is installed.
• The default setting is Ban.
License "Ban"
* The next job reservation
• Set whether to allow the reservation of the next job when a key counter is installed.
License "Ban"
Note
I-92
(4) Management Device 1

(a) Functions
• To set whether or not the management device 1 is installed.
(b) Use
• Set when the management device 1 is mounted.

Note
• The setting is available only when user authentication is set "OFF" and account track is set "Off" or "Account Name +
Password" with [Administrator Settings] → [User Authentication/Account Track] → [General Settings].
(5) Management Device 2

(a) Functions
• To set whether or not the management device 2 is installed.
(b) Use
• Set when the management device 2 is mounted.

* Management Setting
• Select the Management Setting Mode
Mode 1: Use contact type device (Logout with ID key is not allowed.)
Mode 2: Use non-contact type device (Logout with ID key is allowed.)
Note
• The setting is not available when either "External Server" of user authentication, "Password Only" of account track, "Do not
synchronize" of user authentication and account track or "Allow" of public user access has been set with [Administrator
Settings] → [User Authentication/Account Track] → [General Settings].
(6) Vendor 1
(a) Functions
• To set whether or not the vendor 1 is installed.
(b) Use
• Set when the vendor 1 (old vendor) is mounted.

• Select the message of the vendor 1
• Type 1: Select the message (for coin vendor).
• Type 2: Select the message (for card).
Note
• The setting is available only when user authentication is set "OFF" and account track is set "Off" with [Administrator Settings]
→ [User Authentication/Account Track] → [General Settings].
(7) Vendor 2
(a) Functions
• To set whether or not the vendor 2 is installed.
(b) Use
• Set when the vendor 2 is mounted.
Note
• When using the vendor along with the key counter, inserting the key counter will set it to the "Key Counter Mode" and
removing it will set it to the "Vendor Mode".
• Select color mode and message of key counter.
(Only for key counter, the type of the color mode and message are same after mounting.)
* Confirmation copy
• Set whether to allow a confirmation copy when a key counter is installed.
License "Ban"
* The next job reservation
• Set whether to allow the reservation of the next job when a key counter is installed.
License "Ban"
• Select message of vendor.
* Message
Type 1: Message for key counter
I-93
Type 2: Message for card scanning

Type 3: Message for ID management
Note
Note
• Performing the setup for each unit to be mounted will internally change the setting values below. It needs resetting when
cancelling the setting in order to set back to "not mounted" because the setting value will remain.
Setting Item Vendor 2 Authentication Key Counter Management Management
Device 1 Device 1 Device 2
Utility Default Copy Factory Default - -
Settings
Default Scan/Fax Factory Default - - -
Settings
Copy Operating [Yes] - - -
Screen
Fax Active Rx Display [Yes] - - -
Screen
Scan/Fax Direct Input - - - -
Settings Default
Tab
Left Panel [Job List] - -
Display Default
Administrator Each Function Copy, PC print, Copy, PC print, - Copy will be set Copy, PC print,
Settings Setting Send Data, and Send Data, and to "ON". Send Data, and
(When IC-207 is Print others will Print others will PC print, Send Print others will
not mounted) be set to "ON". be set to "ON". Data, and Print be set to "ON".
others will be set
to "OFF".
Each Function Send Data will be set to "ON".
Setting
(When IC-207 is
mounted)
Administrator Prohibit - - -
Security Level
Weekly Timer OFF - - - -
ON/OFF Setting
Restrict Access to Changing Job Priority, Deleting Other - - -
Job Settings User's Jobs, Registering and
Changing Addresses, Changing
Zoom Ratio will be set to "Restrict".
External Memory - Save Document and Print Document - -
Function Settings will be set to "OFF".
Forward TX OFF - -
Setting
OpenAPI Setting Access Setting Access Setting - - -
will be set to will be set to
"Restrict" and "Restrict".
Authentication will
be changed to
"OFF" setting.
IPP Setting - IPP Setting will be - - -
set to "OFF", and
Accept IPP job
will be set to
"OFF".
AppleTalk Setting - OFF - - -
SMB Setting - Scan Setting, - - -
Print Setting will
be set to "OFF".
E-mail TX - E-mail TX Setting, - - -
(SMTP) Scan to E-mail, E-
mail Notification,
Meter Count
Notification will be
set to "Restrict".
WebDAV Client - WebDAV Client - - -
Settings Settings will be
set to "OFF".
I-94
Web Service Printer Setting and Scanner setting - Printer Setting and Scanner setting
Settings will be set to "OFF". will be set to "OFF".
Printer setting/
Scanner setting
Status Notification - All setting items - - -
Setting will be set to
Notification Item "OFF".
Setting
Image Log [No] - - - -
Transfer Settings
4.17.5 License management

See: I.5.1 Outline
I-95
bizhub 501/421/361 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 5. BILLING SETTING
5. BILLING SETTING
5.1 Outline
• When using i-Option LK-101/102/103, license management is done with the following procedures. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] →
[License Management]
• [License Management] can set Activation/Deactivation of each i-Option functions, Repair/Initialize of functions for troubleshooting, or etc.
5.2 Billing Setting function setting procedure

1. Press the Utility/Counter key.
2. Touch [Check Details] on meter count display.
3. Press the following keys in this order.; Stop → 0 → 0 → Stop → 0 → 1
Note
• When selecting [CE Authentication] under [Enhanced Security] available from Service Mode, authentication by CE password is
necessary.
Enter the 8 digits CE password, and touch [END].
(The initial setting for CE password is "92729272.")
• When the following setting is set to "ON", CE password authentication is necessary.
[Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode]
• If a wrong CE password is entered, re-enter the right password. The machine will not enter Service Mode unless the CE
password is entered correctly. To return to the Basic screen, turn OFF the sub power switch and turn it ON again.
When the following setting is set to "Mode 2", operation will be prohibited since it indicates authentication failure by failing to
enter the correct CE password within the specified number of times.
if the access lock is activated, the lock release timer starts to operate by input the Stop → 0 → 9 → 3 → 1 → 7 in [Meter Count]
→ [Check Details] → [Coverage Rate] after the main power switch is turned OFF and On. When the timer reaches the time
specified in this setting, the access lock is released.
• The service code entered is displayed as "*."
4. The Service Mode menu will appear.
a0pdf3e003aa

Stop → 9
6. Billing Setting menu will appear.
a0pdf3e004aa
5.3 Billing Setting function tree

Service Mode
Billing Setting Counter Setting *1
I-96
Management Function Choice *1

License Management *2 Activation *2
Deactivation*2
Repair *2, 3
Initialize *2
Request Code *2
List *2
*1: For details, see the main body service manual.
*2: It is displayed only when the expanded memory furnished with the optional upgrade kit UK-202 is mounted.
*3: It is displayed only when "license management error" occurs. See K.4.2.1 License management error
5.4 Settings in the License management

5.4.1 Activation
(1) Functions
• To activate i-Option functions.
(2) Use
• To activate i-Option functions with CE.
• The functions can be activated by selecting the desired function and enter the appropriate license code.
• Administrators also can activate i-Option functions through Administrator Settings.
See I.5.5.1 Activation
5.4.2 Deactivation
(1) Functions
• To deactivate i-Option functions.
(2) Use
• To deactivate i-Option functions due to registration error, expiration of lease term, change to other MFP or etc.
• The functions can be deactivated by selecting the desired function and enter the appropriate deactivation code.
See I.5.5.2 Deactivation
5.4.3 Repair
(1) Functions
• To repair license management information.
(2) Use
• To be used when license management information is lost due to replacement of NVRAM board or CF card or any other trouble.
• License management information can be repaired by acquiring repair code with repair request code, and entering the repair code.
See I.5.5.3 Repair
5.4.4 Initialize
(1) Functions
• To initialize license management information.
(2) Use
• To be used when license management information cannot be repaired.
• License management information should be initialized when the machine fails to generate request code or repair request code due to any
trouble and the information cannot be repaired.
See I.5.5.4 Initialize
5.4.5 Request Code

(1) Functions
• To display and print request code and serial number.
(2) Use
• To check the request code and serial number.
I-97
• Set A4, A4S, 8 1/ x 11 or 8 1/ x 11S paper to the tray, and press start key at request code screen to print.
2 2
5.4.6 List
(1) Functions
• To display activated functions.
• To display and print deactivation complete code and serial number.
(2) Use
• To display activated functions.
• To display and print deactivation complete code and serial number.
• Set A4, A4S, 8 1/ x 11 or 8 1/ x 11S paper to the tray, and press start key at deactivation complete code screen to print.
2 2
5.5 License Management function setting procedure

• Each setting procedure of License Management function is as follows.
• You need to access License Management System (LMS) to implement each function setting.
5.5.1 Activation
1. Prepare "token certification."
2. Call the Billing Setting to the screen.
See I.5.2 Billing Setting function setting procedure
3. Display and confirm the serial number and request code with the following procedure.
[License Management] → [Request code]
Note
• When A4, A4S, 8 1/ x 11 or 8 1/ x 11S is set to the paper feed tray, the above-mentioned serial number and request code can
2 2
be printed out by pressing the start key.
• The function enhanced version firmware for i-Option is set at the factory before shipping, this procedure is not needed.
4. Access to LMS web site (for service).

5. Click [License Registration].
6. Select the language.
A0PDF3J510DA
7. Enter request code and serial number, and click [Next].
A0PDF3E524DA
8. Enter "token number" described in the "token certificate", and select the product name.
I-98
9. Click [Next].
A0PDF3E525DA
10. Confirm the registered information, and click [Generate License Code].
A0PDF3E526DA
11. LMS issues license code.
A0PDF3E527DA
12. Select [Activation] → [License code] at the MFP.

13. Enter the license code issued by LMS using the keyboard on the screen, and touch [END].
I-99
A0PDF3E537DA
14. Select i-Option to be activated, and touch [Apply].
A0PDF3E538DA
15. Follow the massage appearing on the screen and turn OFF and ON the main power switch.
5.5.2 Deactivation
2. Display and confirm the serial number with the following procedure.
[License Management] → [Request code]
See I.5.5.1 Activation.
4. Click [MFP] and select the language.
A0PDF3J515DA
5. Click [Nullification].
I-100
A0PDF3E528DA
6. Enter serial number, and click [Retrieval].
A0PDF3E529DA
7. Select i-Option to be deactivated, and click [Registration].
A0PDF3E530DA
8. Nullification code is issued.
A0PDF3E531DA
I-101
9. Select [Deactivation] → [Deactivation code] at the MFP.

10. Enter the nullification code issued by LMS using the keyboard on the screen, and touch [END].
A0PDF3E539DA
11. Select i-Option to be deactivated, and touch [Apply].
A0PDF3E540DA
12. When the deactivation is done appropriately, serial number and deactivation complete code are issued.
Serial Number 0123456789012

Deactivation
Complete Code
01234-56789-01234-56789-01234-56789-01234
Turn the main switch OFF and ON.
A0PDF3E542DA
Note
• When A4, A4S, 8 1/ x 11 or 8 1/ x 11S is set to the paper feed tray, the above-mentioned serial number and deactivation
2 2
complete code can be printed out by pressing the start key.
• Serial number and deactivation complete code can be confirmed in [List] available from [License Management].
13. Follow the message appearing on the screen and turn OFF and ON the main power switch.
14. Click [Nullification completion] at LMS web site (for service).
I-102
A0PDF3E532DA
15. Enter serial number and nullification code, and click [Registration].
A0PDF3E533DA
16. Message for nullification completion appears.
5.5.3 Repair
2. Display and confirm serial number, repair request code and request code with the following procedure.
[License Management] → [Repair] → [Repair Request Code]
See I.5.4.1 Activation
Note
• Do not turn OFF/ON the main power switch until the repair code is input after this procedure.

4. Click [MFP] and select the language.
A0PDF3J515DA
5. Click [Restoration demand].
I-103
A0PDF3E534DA
6. Enter serial number, restoration demand code and request code, and click [Registration].
A0PDF3E535DA
7. Request permission code is issued.

If any function needs to be activated, appropriate license code is also issued.
A0PDF3E536DA
8. Select [Repair] → [Repair Code] at the MFP.

9. Enter the request permission code issued by LMS using the keyboard on the screen, and touch [END].
I-104
Repair
Request Code
Repair Code
Repair
A0PDF3E543DA
10. Touch [Apply].
Repair
Request Code
Repair Code 01234-56789-01234-56789-01234-56789-01234
Repair
A0PDF3E544DA
11. Close Service Mode, confirm that the functions work correctly.
5.5.4 Initialize
• When license management information cannot be repaired, initialize the information with the following procedure.
1. Contact the license management section of sales company to report the information necessary to issue the initialize code.
2. The license management section of sales company supplies the initialize code.
4. Touch [License Management] → [Initialize].
5. Enter the initialize code issued by call center using the keyboard on the screen, and touch [Apply].
A0PDF3E541DA
6. After completing the initialization, follow the message appearing on the screen and turn OFF and ON the main power switch.
I-105
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT bizhub
bizhub 501/421/361 501/421/361
6. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT bizhub 501/421/361

6.1 Mis-centering adjustment of the trays 1 and 2
(1) Usage
This adjustment is made when there occurs a mis-centering that cannot be adjusted in the service mode.
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the tray [1].
2. If there remains any paper, remove it thoroughly.
3. When the paper guide [2] is set to the small size position, expand
it.
5. Move the paper guide [2] and adjust the center position with the
marking-off [4] as a guide.
6. Tighten the 2 screws [3].
[4] [3] [2]
[1] 50gaf3c014na
7. Set the tray with paper put in it.

8. Conduct the copy/print operation and check to see if the mis-
[2] centering between the center [1] of the paper and the center [2] of
the copied image is within a standard value (± 3 mm or less [3]).
[3] 9. When the value is not within the standard value, repeat steps 1 to
8 until the standard value can be obtained.
[1]
50gaf3c015na
6.2 Mis-centering adjustment of the bypass tray

(1) Usage
I-106
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 6. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT bizhub
bizhub 501/421/361 501/421/361
(2) Procedure
1. Open the bypass tray [1].
2. If paper is set, remove it.
3. When the paper guide [2] is set to the small size position, expand
it.
5. Move the paper guide [2] and adjust the center position with the
[4]
[2] [1]
[2] [3]
50gaf3c016na
7. Set paper in the bypass tray.

the copied image is within a standard value (? 3 mm or less [3]).
[1]
50gaf3c017na
I-107
bizhub 501/421/361 I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 7. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT DF-613
7. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT DF-613

7.1 Leading Edge Skew Adjustment
(1) Usage
(2) Procedure
1. Load the test chart [1] in the DF and make one 1-sided copy five
[1]
consecutive times.
16eaf3c001nb
2. Fold each of the sample copies as illustrated and check for any
deviation.
Specifications: 0 ± 3.0 mm
3. If the deviation does not fall within the specified range, perform the
following adjustment procedure.
16eaf3c002na
4. Open the DF.

5. Loosen the decorative screw [2] and the nut [3] in the back to the
right.
[2] [3]
16eaf3c003na
6. If there is a deviation as shown on the figure, turn the screw

counterclockwise to adjust it.
16eaf3c004na
7. If there is a deviation as shown on the figure, turn the screw

clockwise to adjust it.
8. After the adjustment procedure has been completed, tighten the
decorative screw and the nut which has been loosened in step 5.
9. Remove the Platen Guide[4] from the DF.
Note
• When removing the Platen Guide, pull apart the hook and
loop fastener one by one. Pulling them all at once may
damage the sponge.
10. With the rear edge of the Platen Guide pressed up against the
Original Length Scale, place it on the Original Glass so that its left
edge is 0.5 to 1.0 mm away from the Original Width Scale.
11. Gently lower the DF.
16eaf3c005na
Note
• When lowering the DF, use utmost care to prevent the
Platen Guide from deviating from its correct position.
12. Gently raise the DF and press the Platen Guide up against the DF
by hand so that it is affixed in position.
I-108
[4]
16eaf3c006nb
16eaf3c007na
7.2 Height Adjustment

(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when removing the DF
(2) Procedure
1. Loosen the far left side nut [1] in the arrow-marked direction[2].
2. Create the strip of paper [3] made by copy paper, set it on the
original glass, and then close the DF gently.
Note
[1]
• Creation points of the strip of paper.
size (20 x 210 mm)
weight (60 to 80 g/m2)
[1]
[2]
a0ref3c001ca
[3]
a0ref3c002ca
I-109
3. Rotate the far left side adjustment screw [5] to adjust, as you can
[5]
get a feeling of secure contact when you pull out the strip of paper
[4].
Note
• When the load is heavy, rotate the screw clockwise. When
the load is light, rotate the screw counter clockwise.
4. After the height adjustment, fasten the nut [6] securely.

5. Check the gap between the original glass face [7] and the
projection of DF [8].
[6] Note
• Check that there are no gaps between the projection of DF
and the original glass face.
[4]
• When there are gaps, loosen the far right side nut and
then rotate adjustment screw clockwise to adjust.
• After the adjustment, fasten the far right side nut securely.
a0ref3c003ca
[8]
[7]
a0ref3c004ca
I-110
I ADJUSTMENT/SETTING > 8. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT
bizhub 501/421/361 PC-206
8. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PC-206

8.1 Mis-centering adjustment of the Trays 3 and 4
(1) Usage
Conduct this adjustment when a mis-centering occurs that cannot be adjusted in the service mode.
(2) Procedure
1. Pull out the Tray [1].
2. If there remains any paper, remove it thoroughly.
4. Move the Paper Guide [3] and adjust the center position with the
[3] [4] [2]
[1] 4061f3c001na
6. Set the Tray with paper put it in.

the copied image is within a standard value (± 3 mm or less [3]).
[1]
4061f3c002na
I-111
bizhub 501/421/361 PC-407
9. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT PC-407

9.1 Mis-centering adjustment
(1) Usage
(2) Procedure
1. Press the Tray Release Key [1] and slide out the Tray [2].
[2]
[1]
4061f3c201na
[4] 2. Open the Right Door.

3. Loosen the adjustment screw [3] and turn screw D [4].
[3]
Note
• Do not damage the passage surface of the Right Door.
4061f3c202na
• When moving the center of the paper to the rear side, rotate
the screw D counterclockwise.
• When moving the center of the paper to the front side, rotate
the screw D clockwise.
4061f3c203na
4061f3c204na
4. Close the Right Door and set the Tray.

the copied image is within a standard value (? 3 mm or less [3]).
[1] 7. Slide out the Tray and tighten the adjustment screw.
4061f3c209na
9.2 Shifter Movement Timing Belt Adjustment

(1) Procedure
1. Slide out the Tray and remove it.
[2] 2. Lift the Main Tray [1], and remove two screws [2] fixing the Shift
[1] Tray.
Note
• When reinstalling, take care not to unfasten the wire of the
Main Tray.
3. Remove two screws [3] and remove the Shifter [4].
4061f3c205na
I-112
bizhub 501/421/361 PC-407
[4]
[3]
4061f3c206na
4. Push the tab [6] of the Shift Tray [5] as shown on the left and
[5]
release the lock.
5. Remove the Sub Tray [5].
[6]
4061f3c207na
6. Loosen the screw [7] as shown to the left and move it in the
direction of the arrow.
7. After moving the Shifter, tighten the screw [7].
[7]
4061f3c208na
I-113
bizhub 501/421/361 LU-203
10. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT LU-203

10.1 Adjusting the tilt of the lift plate
(1) Usage
When the lift plate is tilted, paper may not be fed correctly. Adjust the lift plate so that it becomes parallel to the paper feed roller shaft. When
replacing the wire, be sure to conduct this adjustment.
(2) Procedure
1. Remove the right cover and the front cover.
G.6.2.1 Removal and reinstallation of the right cover, the front
cover and the rear cove
2. Loosen the screw [1].
[1] 16aaf3c001na
I-114
bizhub 501/421/361 LU-203
[2] [5]
4. Stand the scale [3] on the upper surface of the lift plate [2].
5. Move and adjust the wire adjusting member [6] so that the
distance from each of the upper surfaces of the panels /Fr [4] and /
Rr [5] to the upper surface of the lift plate become identical.
6. After completion of the adjustment, tighten up the screw [7]
securely.
[1] [3]
[4] [7] [6]
16aaf3c002na
I-115
bizhub 501/421/361 FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
11. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT FS-522/PU-501/OT-602

11.1 Staple Position Adjustment
(1) Usage
(2) Procedure
B [1] 1. Set the staple and make a print.
A 2. Check the staple position of the paper.
C • Slant one point Staple [1]
D (Paper Width: 216 to 297 mm)
279 to 297 mm: 45º,
B5, B4: 30º
Measurement Specification Adjustment range
position
A, C 4.4 mm -
B, D 12.1 mm +1 to -2mm
A [2] • Parallel one point Staple [2]
(Paper Width: 182 to 216 mm)
B
position
A, C 4.4 mm -
B, D 12.1 mm +1 to -2mm
• Parallel two points Staple [3]
position
C
[3] C, F 6 mm +1 to -2mm
D Y -
D
E X -
3. If the staple position is misaligned, adjust with the following
E
procedure.
F 4349f3c001na
4. Open the Front Door.

5. Turn the knob [1], and move the stapler forward.
[3] 6. Loosen the screw [2], and remove the cover [3].
[1]
[2]
4349f3c002na
7. Loosen two adjustment screws [2] and move the Stapler Unit [3] in
the direction of the arrow to make the adjustment.
8. Make another print and check the staple position.
[5]
[4]
4349f3c003na
11.2 Adjustment of the Installation Position of the Shutter Drive Gear

(1) Procedure
[1] [3] 1. Remove the Lift Tray.
G.7.3.9 Lift Tray
2. Remove the Connector [1] and six screws [2], and then remove the
Shutter Drive Assy [3].
[2] a0hnf3c001ca
I-116
bizhub 501/421/361 FS-522/PU-501/OT-602
3. Set three gears.
[6] Note
• When the Crank Pins [4] are the bottom position, set the
[5] [5] gears so that the marks [5] on Gears 1 and 3 are aligned
with the rib [6] of Gear 2 as shown on the left.
[4]
4349f3c004nb
Note
• When installing the Shutter Drive Assy, make sure to
insert the two Crank Pins into the Slit of Shutter [7].
a0hnf3c002ca
11.3 Punch Mis-centering Adjustment (PU-501)

(1) Procedure
1. Set the copier into the Punch mode and make a 1-sided print from
a 1-sided original.
2. Fold the output paper in half and check whether the punch hole
positions are aligned.
Specification: 0 ± 2 mm
3. If the punch hole position is misaligned, adjust with the following
4512f3c001na
procedure.
4. Remove the Conveyance Front Cover /Lw.
G.7.3.1 Conveyance Front Cover /Up, /Rt, /Lw
5. Loosen the adjustment screw [1], and move the Punch Unit [2]
[2] forward or backward to make the adjustment.
[1] 6. Make another print and check the punch displacement.
4512f3c002na
I-117
bizhub 501/421/361 FS-523/RU-507
12. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT FS-523/RU-507

12.1 Output check mode
12.1.1 Switches provided inside the board
Test switch [1] Dipswitch used for the mode setting of the output check mode. (All
settings are off in the initial condition.)
Output check switch /1 [2] Used to execute the output check mode.
Output check switch /2 [3]
LED1 to 4 [4] Display the conditions while in the output check mode.
[4]
[1] [2] [3]

a0phf3c001ca
12.1.2 Output check mode

(1) Setting of the output check mode.
(a) Procedure for setting
Note
• Before executing the output check mode, be sure to remove the upper cover, the front cover /Up and the rear cover of FS in
advance.
(Refer to G.8.2.1 Removal/reinstallation of the upper cover, G.8.2.2 Removal/reinstallation of the front cover /Up, G.8.2.3
Removal/reinstallation of the front cover /Lw)
• When removing the covers of FS, be sure to block the light that strikes on the front door sensor (PS17) and the upper door
sensor (PS18).
I-118
bizhub 501/421/361 FS-523/RU-507
1. Turn OFF the power switch (SW2) of the main body.
2. Switch the test switch [1] to the output check mode.
3. Turn ON SW2.
4. The output check mode is set.
[1] 4521f3c002na
(b) Method for release

1. Turn OFF the power switch (SW2) of the main body.
2. Set the test switch [1] to the initial condition (all OFF).
3. Turn ON SW2.
[1] 4521f3c003na
(2) Types of the output check modes

Output check Test switch LED1 to 4
mode 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Sub tray ON OFF OFF OFF ● ○ ○ ○
paper exit
mode
Main tray OFF ON OFF OFF ○ ● ○ ○
paper exit
mode
Alignment tray ON ON OFF OFF ● ● ○ ○
paper exit
mode
Shift ON OFF ON OFF ● ○ ● ○
operation
mode
I-119
bizhub 501/421/361 FS-523/RU-507
Alignment OFF ON ON OFF ○ ● ● ○

plate
operation
mode
Stapler unit ON ON ON OFF ● ● ● ○
CD movement
mode
Paper exit OFF OFF OFF ON ○ ○ ○ ●
roller release
mode
Intermediate ON OFF OFF ON ● ○ ○ ●
conveyance
roller release
mode
Main tray OFF ON OFF ON ○ ● ○ ●
operation
mode
Punch hole ON ON OFF ON ● ● ○ ●
operation
mode
Sensor output ON OFF ON ON The sensor conditions are displayed.
check mode
● : Blink ○ : Off
(3) Operation of each of the output check modes

(a) Sub tray paper exit mode
Output check switch /1 : ON The motor and the solenoid turn ON.
Entrance conveyance motor (M1)
Conveyance motor /Up (M4)
Bypass gate solenoid (SD1)
Main gate solenoid (SD2)
Output check switch /2 : ON The motor and the solenoid turn OFF.
(b) Main tray paper exit mode
Output check switch /1 : ON The motor turns ON.

Conveyance motor /Lw (M2)
Paper exit motor (M3)
Shift motor (M8)
Output check switch /2 : ON The motor turns OFF.

Shift motor (M8)
(c) Alignment tray paper exit mode
Paddle motor /Up (M15)
Paper exit roller release motor (M13)
Paddle motor /Up (M15)
Paper exit roller release motor (M13)
I-120
bizhub 501/421/361 FS-523/RU-507
(d) Shift operation mode

Output check switch /1 : ON
The main tray shifts to the front side.

The shift motor (M8) turns ON.
The main tray shifts to the rear side.

The shift motor (M8) turns ON.
(e) Alignment plate operation mode

The alignment plate moves to the home position for the 1st time.
The alignment plate moves to the A4 alignment position for

the 2nd time.
The alignment plate moves to the 81/2 x 11 alignment position

for the 3rd time.
The alignment plate moves to the A4S alignment position for

the 4th time.
The alignment plate moves to the 81/2 x 11S alignment position

for the 5th time.
(f) Stapler unit CD moving mode

The stapler unit moves to the home position for the 1st time.
The stapler unit moves to the A4 corner for the 2nd time.
(g) Paper exit roller release mode

The paper exit roller is in the pressure/release operation.
(h) Intermediate conveyance roller release mode

The intermediate conveyance roller is pressured.
The intermediate conveyance roller is released.
(i) Main tray operation mode

The main tray goes up until the light of the main tray upper limit
LED (LED19) is blocked.
The main tray goes down until the main tray upper limit sensor
(PS19) receives the light.
I-121
bizhub 501/421/361 FS-523/RU-507
(j) Punch hole operation mode

The punch motor (M11) drives.
The punch clutch (CL1) turns ON.
The punch motor (M11) drives.
(k) Sensor output check mode

Sensor Status LED
1 2 3 4
Main tray upper limit Light pass through ○ ○ ○ ●
sensor (PS19)
Intermediate Light blocked ○ ○ ● ○
conveyance sensor
(PS3)
Bypass route Light blocked ○ ● ○ ○
conveyance sensor
(PS2)
Main route Light blocked ● ○ ○ ○
conveyance sensor
(PS4)
● : Blink ○ : Off
12.2 Adjusting the punch hole position in the vertical direction

(1) Procedure
1. Set the punch hole mode, and make a copy in the single sided
original -> single sided print mode.
2. Fold the copy exited into two and check the position of the punch
holes to see if the discrepancy "A" [1] is 2 mm or less.
3. When "A" is in excess of 2 mm, adjust the punch hole position in
the vertical direction.
[1]
4521f3c004na
I-122
bizhub 501/421/361 FS-523/RU-507
[6] [5] [2] 4. Open the upper door [2].

5. Loosen the screw [3] and move the handle [4] in the arrow-marked
direction [5] to adjust the position of the punch unit [6].
6. Repeat steps 1 and 2 and check the punch holes to see if the
discrepancy "A" is 2 mm or less.
7. When "A" is in excess of 2 mm, repeat steps 3 to 6 until "A" gets
inside 2 mm.
[4]
[3] 4521f3c005na
12.3 Adjusting the solenoid

12.3.1 Adjustment of the bypass gate solenoid (SD1)
(1) Procedure
G.8.2.1 Removal/reinstallation of the upper cover
2. Remove the rear cover.
G.8.2.4 Removal/reinstallation of the rear cover
3. Loosen the screw [1].
4. Move the bypass gate solenoid (SD1) [2] in the arrow-marked
direction [3] and tighten the screw [1] when the length of "A" [4]
comes to the specified value.
Specified value "A" = 4.4 mm
[1]
4521f3c004na
I-123
bizhub 501/421/361 FS-523/RU-507
6. Loosen the screw [3] and move the handle [4] in the arrow-marked
direction [5] to adjust the position of the punch unit [6].
7. Repeat steps 1 and 2 and check the punch holes to see if the
discrepancy "A" is 2 mm or less.
8. When "A" is in excess of 2 mm, repeat steps 3 to 6 until "A" gets
inside 2 mm.
[1] [2] [3] [4]
4521f3c006na
12.3.2 Adjustment of the main gate solenoid (SD2)

(1) Procedure
[1] [2]
G.8.2.1 Removal/reinstallation of the upper cover
2. Remove the front cover /Up.
G.8.2.2 Removal/reinstallation of the front cover /Up
4. Move the main gate solenoid (SD2) [2] and tighten the 2 screws [1]
when the length of "A" [3] comes to the specified value.
Note
• With the plunger of SD2 pressed in the arrow-marked
direction [4] in advance, be sure to adjust the clearance
with no play.
[4] [3]
4521f3c007na
I-124
bizhub 501/421/361 FS-523/RU-507
12.4 Adjusting the belt tension

12.4.1 Adjustment of the timing belt of the conveyance motor /Up (M4)
(1) Procedure
[2] 1. Remove the upper cover.
[4] G.8.2.1 Removal/reinstallation of the upper cover
2. Remove the rear cover.
G.8.2.4 Removal/reinstallation of the rear cover
4. Press the timing belt at the center section [2] with a spring balance
[3] from above. And when the amount of the deflection [4] comes
[3] to 4 mm, tighten 2 screws [1] at the position in which the scale of
the spring balance points to the specified value "A."
Specified value "A" = 200 ± 100 gf
Note
• With the plunger of SD2 pressed in the arrow-marked
direction [4] in advance, be sure to adjust the clearance
with no play.
[1]
4521f3c008na
I-125
bizhub 501/421/361 FS-523/RU-507
12.4.2 Adjustment of the timing belt of the conveyance motor /Lw (M2)
(1) Procedure
[2] [4] [3] G.8.2.1 Removal/reinstallation of the upper cover
2. Remove the rear cover /Up.
G.8.2.2 Removal/reinstallation of the front cover /Up
4. Pull the square hole [3] provided on the conveyance motor /Lw
mounting plate [2] with the spring balance [4] and tighten 2 screws
[1] at the position in which the scale of the spring balance points to
the specified value "A."
Specified value "A" = 800 ± 50 gf
[1]
4521f3c009na
12.4.3 Adjustment of the timing belt of the paper exit motor (M3)
(1) Procedure
1. Loosen the screw [1] and 2 screws [2].
[2] [3] [1]
2. Tighten the screw [1] and 2 screws [2] at the position [5] in which
the external form of the screw [1] and that of the oblong hole [4]
[5] provided on the paper exit motor mounting plate [3] coincide each
other.
[4] [1]
4521f3c010na
12.5 Adjusting the tray upper surface detection position

(1) Usage
This adjustment is made when replacing the FS control board (FSCB), or the main tray upper limit LED (LED19) or the main tray upper limit
sensor (PS19).
I-126
bizhub 501/421/361 FS-523/RU-507
(2) Procedure
1. Set the output check mode "Sensor output check mode."
(Refer to I.12.1 Output check mode)
2. Rotate VR1 [1] provided on the FS control board (FSCB) up to the
limit counterclockwise.
[1] 4521f3c011na
3. Place the paper [3] on the main tray [2] to block the light of the
[4] [3] main tray upper limit LED (LED19) [4].
[2] 4521f3c012na
I-127
bizhub 501/421/361 FS-523/RU-507
4. Check to see if LED4 [5] on FSCB turns OFF from ON. If it is left
ON, rotate VR1 [1] slowly clockwise and stop the rotation of VR1 at
the position in which LED4 turns OFF.
[5]
[1] 4521f3c013na
12.6 Adjusting the tray overload detection level

(1) Usage
This adjustment is made when replacing the FS control board (FSCB) or replacing the tray lift motor (M7).
(2) Procedure
[1] 1. Set the output check mode "Main tray operation mode."
(Refer to I.12.1 Output check mode)
2. Rotate VR2 [1] on the FS control board (FSCB) counterclockwise
up to the limit.
4521f3c014na
I-128
bizhub 501/421/361 FS-523/RU-507
3. Place the paper [3] to block the light of the main tray upper limit
[2] [3]
LED (LED19) [2].
4521f3c015na
4. Press the output check switch /2 [4] to bring down the main tray.
[4]
a0phf3c002ca
I-129
bizhub 501/421/361 FS-523/RU-507
5. Load 1500 sheets of A3 paper (80 g/m2) on the main tray.
[1]
6. Remove the paper that was put in step 3 to block the light and let
the light of LED19 pass through.
Note
• When letting the light of LED19 pass through, the main
tray starts to go up. Be sure to conduct the following
steps 7 and 8 while in the up drive of the main tray.
7. While in the up drive of the main tray, rotate VR2 [1] on FSCB
clockwise.
LED3 [5] on FSCB turns ON.
8. When LED3 [5] on FSCB turns ON, rotate VR2 [1]
counterclockwise, and stop VR2 at the position in which LED3
changes to OFF from ON.
[5] 4521f3c017na
I-130
bizhub 501/421/361 FS-523/RU-507
[1]
[5] 4521f3c018na
I-131
bizhub 501/421/361 SD-507
13. MECHANICAL ADJUSTMENT SD-507

13.1 Fold Skew Adjustment
Note
Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed.
• When the Folding Unit has been replaced.
• When skew occurs in the crease.
1. Enter the Half-fold mode and make a copy. (A3 or 11 x 17 Size)
2. Fold the output paper along the crease [2].
A 3. Fold the output paper and measure the width A of the paper.
Specification: 0 ± 1.5 mm
[1] 4. If the fold position is skewed as shown on the left, make the
following adjustment.
[2] [1] Center
[2] Crease
[3] Exit direction
[3]
4511f3c001na
5. Open the Front Door, loosen the adjustment screw [4], and move
the Folding Unit to the left to make the adjustment.
Graduated in 1 mm divisions.
• If the fold position is skewed opposite to the figure of step 4,
move the Folding Unit to the right to make the adjustment.
6. Make another copy and check the fold position.
[4]
4511f3c002na
13.2 Center Staple Skew Adjustment

Note
Make this adjustment after any of the following procedures has been performed.
• When Staple Unit 1 or 2 has been replaced.
• When skew occurs in the position of the center staple.
A 1. Set to Fold & Staple mode and make a copy. Measure the width A
of the paper.
Specification: 0 ± 1.5 mm
2. If the staple position is skewed as shown on the left, make the
following adjustment.
[1] Exit direction
[1]
4511f3c003na
3. Release the lock release lever [2] of the Saddle Unit.

[4]
4. Loosen the adjustment screw [3] and move the lock member [4] to
the left to make the adjustment.
[3] • If the staple position is skewed opposite to the figure of step 2,
move the lock member to the right to make the adjustment.
5. Make another copy and check the staple position.
[2]
4511f3c004na
I-132
bizhub 501/421/361 J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 1. ISW.
J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE
1. ISW.
1.1 Outline
(1) ISW (In-System Writer)
The operation to rewrite firmware stored in the flash ROM that is built in each control board in the main body with the board left built in the
main body is called an ISW. Executing ISW allows you to upgrade the firmware version without replacing the board, or install the latest
firmware when replacing the board. ISW can be executed by both ways; USB ISW using local USB memory and Internet ISW using the
internet.
1.2 Firmware data flow

The following shows the flow of the ISW data.
USB memory Overall control board (OACB) Printer control board (PRCB) DF control board (DFCB)
Network FS control board (FSCB)
FAX control board (FK-502)

When executing the ISW over the entire system, be sure to execute it in the order given below. (To minimize the occurrence of troubles resulting
from the mismatch of the firmware version)
Step Type of programs
1 Fax board controller 1, Fax board controller 2, Finisher, DF, Loadable device driver
2 Image controller
3 Operation panel message data
4 MFP controller
Note
• When replacing the OACB, be sure to conduct the ISW of the MFP controller first. When the firmware of the MFP controller is not
contained in the OACB, no display is shown on the touch panel.
• The finisher above refers to the FS-522. The ISW of the FS-523 is conducted by changing the EPROM.
1.3 Settings on the main body side while in ISW

Following the description given below, be sure to make appropriate settings on the main body side to conduct the operations of the firmware
version upgrade and writing.
(1) Types of the setting

• Service mode
This mode is used when the firmware of the MFP controller is installed properly. Selecting [ISW] or [Internet ISW] of [System 2] in the
service mode allows you to write the firmware.
(2) When upgrading the firmware

Applicable board Display when the power is turned ON Mode
Overall control board Normal Service mode
Other boards Normal Service mode
(3) When writing the firmware afresh (When replacing the board or when failed in rewriting the firmware
Applicable board Display when the power is turned ON Mode
Other boards ISW error displayed Service mode
For the overall control board (OACB), when something is wrong with the firmware or no firmware is written, the normal start-up cannot be
made. In a case like this, when the power switch is ON, the power LED turns ON with nothing shown on the touch panel, and the system is
placed in the firmware stand-by mode. In this case, contact the service manager of the authorized distributor.
For other boards, when the firmware of the MFP controller is normal and something is wrong with other firmware, an ISW error is shown on
the touch panel section when the power is turned ON.
1.4 Board to be rewritten and Rewritable firmware

Item Specifications
Board to be rewritten Overall control board (OACB), Printer control board (PRCB), FAX
control board (FK-502), FS control board (FSCB), DF control board
(DFCB)
Rewritable firmware MFP controller
Operation panel message data
Image controller
FAX board controller 1
FAX board controller 2
Finisher
ADF
Loadable device driver
J-1
bizhub 501/421/361 J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 1. ISW.
Following the description given below, be sure to make appropriate settings on the main body side to conduct the operations of the firmware
version upgrade and writing.
Note
• For boards other than the above, ROM replacement is required.
J-2
bizhub 501/421/361 J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 2. USB ISW.
2. USB ISW.
2.1 Outline
Conduct the ISW locally by connecting the USB memory to the USB port of the main body.
2.2 Specifications
(1) Parts required to conduct the USB ISW
• USB memory: 1 pcs
Note
• Create the bizhub501, bizhub421, bizhub361 or LoadableDeviceDriverROM folder directly under the USB memory route.
• When copying the firmware to the memory, be sure to copy ".bin" file and ".sum" file or ".drv" file and ".sum" file at the same
time.
• Be sure to copy the files of each firmware to the USB memory in the configuration of the folders shown in the below.
• If the copying is not completed correctly, a message "The data is not found" is displayed on the panel when the ISW files are
selected.
bizhub501 bizhub421 bizhub361
MFP_controller MFP_controller MFP_controller
Operation_message Operation_message Operation_message
Image_controller Image_controller Image_controller
Df_controller Df_controller Df_controller
Finisher_controller Finisher_controller Finisher_controller
Fax_controller Fax_controller Fax_controller
LoadableDeviceDriverROM LoadableDeviceDriverROM LoadableDeviceDriverROM
2.3 USB ISW in the service mode

This mode is used when the OACB operates properly.
Note
• To execute the ISW, be sure to turn ON the Main power switch (SW1) of the main body and the Sub-power switch (SW2). If the
power were turned ON after the connection had done while the power OFF, USB Memory may not be recognized.
(1) Checking the firmware version

Before rewriting firmware, be sure to check the current firmware version following the procedure given below.
1. Enter the Service mode.
2. Press the [Firmware Version] in "Service mode screen".
3. Indication of "Firmware Version screen.
(2) ISW execution

1. Insert the USB memory into the USB port /1 [1] or 2 [2] at the rear side of the main body.
J-3
2. Check the USB connect icon on the operation panel screen.
[1]
a0r5f2e001ca

4. Press the [System 2] in "Service mode screen".
5. Press [ISW].
6. "ISW screen"
Press the [Board Type Selection].
7. e.g.: MFP controller

Select [MFP controller] and press [OK].
J-4
8. Press the [Marketing Area Selection].

Select the marketing area.
9. Press the [File Selection].

Select the relevant firmware version and press [OK].
J-5
10. Press the [Execution Check screen].
11. "Execution Check screen".

Press the [Start].
Note
• Press [OK] to stop the ISW.
J-6
Note
• When the message "Writing data. Do not turn off the power source" displayed and flashing the data lamp (blue) during
executing the ISW, never turn OFF the Main power switch (SW1) and Sub-power switch (SW2). It may damage the firmware
in the ROM.
12. Check to see the message "ISW was completed.
13. To execute the ISW of other firmware, press [OK] and repeat steps 6 to 12.
14. To execute the ISW of other firmware, press [OK] and repeat steps 6 to 12.
(3) Checking the firmware version and the checksum

After executing the ISW, check each firmware is updated.
About the firmwares of MFP Controller and Operation Panel Message Data, check the [Check Sum] to see if the ROM has been rewritten
normally.
2. Press the [Firmware Version] in "Service mode screen".
J-7
3. Indication of "Firmware Version screen"

Check the version information and press [Check Sum].
4. Check whether the checksum value of 4 digits is same as the alphanumeric code shown in the PRI (Program Release Information).
[1]
a0r5f2e002ca
NOTE
• The checksum value of the MFP controller is always same regardless of the destination.
• The checksum value of the operation panel message data varies according to the destination.
2.4 Error list

(1) Overall control board firmware abnormality
When the main body detects an overall control board firmware abnormality after turning ON the power switch, the power LED turns ON with
nothing displayed on the LCD of the operation panel (ISW stand-by condition). For details of the power LED display, refer to the table below.
No. Operation Power LED
1 CPU in initialization when the power is turned on OFF
2 Flash memory in checking OFF
3 When an error is detected while in memory check (ISW standby ON
status)
4 ISW processing (flash memory being written) While in the data reception:
5 When an abnormality is detected while in data transmission It flashes at high speed.
6 When an error is detected while in writing flash memory While in the flash memory write:
7 Memory check successfully completed: while in rebooting It flashes at low speed.
J-8
(2) Main body error list

When a trouble occurred while conducting the ISW and it was not normally connected, the message on the status and the error code will be
displayed on the control panel.
When an abnormality occurs while executing or completed the ISW, turning the start key (LED, red) on and the following message is
displayed on the panel.
Error code Description
Finisher not The finisher is in the condition in which no connection is made.
connected
Parameter error A parameter abnormality occurs on the program.
Sequence error An abnormality occurs with the processing sequence on the program.
Memory full The memory is full.
error
Device A USB or parallel device initialization error occurs.
initialization
error
Machine type/ The data transferred from the PC is not the data for bizhub 501/421/361, or
board not for the board selected from the panel.
incompatible
Time-out error While in the file transfer from the PC, a time-out error occurs.
Checksum error A checksum error occurs with the ROM file.
Flash erasure An abnormality occurs while in the flash erasure.
error
Engine power Printer control board (PRCB) power source abnormality. Other
source error abnormalities occur with PRCB (when selecting the image controller,
finisher or ADF).
Write error An error occurs with the write answer check (when selecting the fax board
Task controller 1 or the fax board controller 2).
generation error A task generation error occurs.
Other errors Errors other than the above occur, such as an OS error.
J-9
bizhub 501/421/361 J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 3. Internet ISW.
3. Internet ISW.
3.1 Outline
• Internet ISW is the function which enables the main body to acquire the firmware for rewriting automatically from the program server through
the Internet when the updating is ordered from the operation panel.
By using Internet ISW, the firmware can be updated at the customer without taking firmware data.
3.2 Service environment

The following conditions are necessary for using the Internet ISW function.
• The main body is located at the environment in which the firmware can be downloaded through the internet with ftp or http Protocol.
The "Internet ISW" will not operate under the following conditions.
• Main power switch(SW1) is set to OFF.
• Sub-power switch(SW2) is set to OFF.
• When the following setting is set to "ON":
• The main body has the job currently performing.
• In case of not attaching Option Harddisk(HD-509).
• When HDD Encryption is set.
• When HDD Lock password is set.
• When the i-Option (LK-101/102/103) is installed.
3.3 Preparations for Firmware rewriting

Note
• For using the Internet ISW, the Network parameter, Program Server Address as well as Firewall Address need to be set to the main
body.
• For details of each setting item, refer to J.4. Internet ISW Setting.
(1) Internet ISW Set

2. Press [Internet ISW Set] which is available from [System 2] ? [Internet ISW].
a0r5f2e003ca
3. Press [ON], and press [END].

Note
• Settings such as Server setting, etc. will be available by selecting "ON" on this setting.
• When the following setting is set to "ON", "ON" cannot be selected on this setting.
(2) Protocol Setting

• It performs the setting concerning the Protocol (ftp or http) for connecting to the Internet ISW.
• When connecting to the Program Server using a proxy server, perform the setting for a Proxy Server.
(a) Connecting by http

1. Select [Internet ISW] which is available from [Service Mode] → [System 2].
2. Data Input Setting
• Press [HTTP Setting], and select [ON].
3. Connect Proxy
• For connecting via Proxy Server, select [ON].
4. Proxy Server
• For connecting via Proxy Server, set the Proxy Server Address and the Port Number.
1. Select the [Server Address], and set the Proxy Server Address by IP addressing scheme or FQDN scheme.
2. Select [Port Number], and set the Port Number for the Proxy Server from 1 through 65535.
5. Proxy Authentication
• Set the Login name and the Password which may be necessary for Authentication when accessing to the Proxy Server.
1. When Authentication is necessary for accessing to the Proxy Server, select [Authentication], and select [ON].
2. Select [Log-in Name], and enter the Login name on the on-screen keyboard.
J-10
3. Select [Password], and enter the Password on the on-screen keyboard.

6. Connection Time-Out
• Select [Connection Time-Out], and set the time for the Connection Time Out between 30 and 300 seconds.
(b) Connecting by ftp

2. Data Input Setting
• Press [FTP Setting], and select [ON].
3. Connect Proxy
• For connecting via Proxy Server, select [ON].
4. Proxy Server
• For connecting via Proxy Server, set the Proxy Server Address and the Port Number.
1. Select the [Server Address], and set the Proxy Server Address by IP addressing scheme or FQDN scheme.
2. Select [Port Number], and set the Port Number for the Proxy Server from 1 through 65535.
5. Connection Setting
• Perform the setting for accessing FTP server.
1. Select [Port Number], and set the Port Number for FTP server from 1 through 65535.
2. Select [Connection Time Out], and set the time for the Connection Time Out from 1 through 60.
3. When connecting in PASV mode, select [PASV Mode], and select [ON].
*PASV Mode:
This mode is for transferring the file with FTP under the condition where communication is restricted such as inside the Firewall. Since
with PASV mode, the client with restriction sets the Port Number, data transmission port can be secured to enable the file transmission.
(3) Forwarding Access Setting

• To make the access setting for the Program Server which stores the Firmware data.
2. Press [Forwarding Access Setting].
a0r5f2e004ca
3. Select [User ID], and enter the user ID which is necessary for connecting to the Program Server on the on-screen keyboard, and press
[END].
4. Select [Password], and enter the Password which is necessary for connecting to the Program Server on the on-screen keyboard, and
press [END].
5. Select [URL], and enter the directory which stores the Program Server Address and the Firmware on the on-screen keyboard by URL
method, and press [END].
Note
• Enter the URL which matches to the Protocol to be used.
When connecting to http http://(host name or IP address)/directory name or https://(host name or IP address)/directory name
When connecting to ftp ftp://(host name or IP address)/directory name
*PASV Mode:
This mode is for transferring the file with FTP under the condition where communication is restricted such as inside the Firewall. Since
with PASV mode, the client with restriction sets the Port Number, data transmission port can be secured to enable the file transmission.
6. Select [File Name], and enter the file name of the Firmware data to be downloaded on the on-screen keyboard, and press [END].
7. Press [END] to finish setting.
3.4 Firmware rewriting

Note
• When performing the Internet ISW, ask the administrator for permission beforehand.
• Do not turn OFF Main power switch(SW1) and Sub-power switch(SW2) while downloading.
(1) Conducting rewriting on the control panel

1. Perform the following setting.
[Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Internet ISW] → [Download]
2. Select Board Type Selection.
J-11
a0r5f2e005ca
3. Press [ISW Start].
a0r5f2e006ca
4. The main body automatically start running, and it starts accessing the server.
a0r5f2e007ca
(2) During Firmware Updating

1. The message to indicate the status is displayed on the screen while connecting or transferring data.
(3) Completed or failed

(a) Firmware updated normally
1. When the Firmware is normally updated, restart the main body in auto mode to display the outcome, and press [OK] to return to the
Main screen.
J-12
a0r5f2e008ca
(b) Failing to update the Firmware due to the Network trouble

1. When updating failed to complete due to the trouble on connecting to the network, an error code and the message is displayed.
2. The main body is automatically rebooted and displays the result screen, then press [OK]. It can be used with the Firmware Version
before conducting updating.
a0r5f2e009ca
3. Check the settings for the network by error codes, and try updating again.
Note
• For error codes, J.3.6 Error Code List for the Internet ISW.
(c) Failing to update the Firmware after downloading has started

1. Once Firmware updating has started, the ROM in the main body is deleted.
When it failed right after updating has started, restart the main body, and shift to the standby screen to retry downloading.
2. When updating on the control panel, press [settings] on the standby screen, and check the Network settings again.
Press [Download], and restart the Internet ISW.
Note
• Return to the standby screen without fail after turning the Main power OFF/ON if the Firmware is not updated.
(4) Confirming the Firmware Version

2. Select the [Firmware Version].
3. Check if the Firmware Version is updated.
3.5 Error list

When an error occurs during USB memory ISW operation, the malfunction code is displayed on the touch panel.
(1) Overall control board firmware abnormality

When the main body detects an overall control board firmware abnormality after turning ON the power switch, the power save LED turns ON
with nothing displayed on the LCD of the operation panel (ISW stand-by condition). For details of the power save LED display, refer to the
table below.
No. Operation Power save LED status
1 CPU in initialization when the power is turned on OFF
2 Flush memory in checking OFF
3 When an error is detected while in memory check (ISW standby Blinks in orange
status)
J-13
4 Reading file from USB memory Lighting in green

5 ISW processing (deleting flash memory and writing firmware) Lighting in green (deleting flash memory)
Blinks in green (writing)
6 When abnormality is detected while in data transmission Flashing alternately in red and green
7 The type name of transferred data is abnormal Blinks in red
8 When an error is detected while in writing firmware Blinks in red
9 Memory check successfully completed: while in rebooting OFF
(2) Error list

The following table shows error codes.
Error code Description Applicable program
41 Input data format abnormality Common
42 Input data model name abnormality
43 Input data board name abnormality
64 Rewritten address error F (DFCB)
81 Input device abnormality, such as input time-out Common
C1 Flash ROM deletion failure I (OACB)
C2 Flash ROM writing error
C3 Checksum abnormality
C4 Output device abnormality, such as output time-out Common
E0 No completion of writing the Flush ROM F (DFCB)
E1 Program SUM check error
Flash ROM deletion failure C (PRCB) /H (FDCB) /B (SDCB) /N
E2 Flash ROM writing error (FNSCB) /S (LSCB)
E3 Blanc check error F (DFCB)
Communication error C (PRCB) /H (FDCB) /B (SDCB) /N
(FNSCB) /S (LSCB)
F6 Output device abnormality, such as output time-out Common
100 Network/USB memory connection error
101 Network/USB memory file error
102 Communication error with the USB memory
4xx HTTP error (protocol regulations error, was able to connect to network, but
an error was returned from the server)
5xx FTP error (protocol regulations error, was able to connect to network, but
an error was returned from the server)
3.6 Error Code List for the Internet ISW

• When a trouble occurred while conducting the Internet ISW and it was not normally connected, the message on the status and the error
code will be displayed on the control panel.
When updating with CS Remote Care, the error code will be sent to the CS Remote Care center.
Error code Description Applicable program
Control panel
0x00000001 [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Internet ISW] → [Internet ISW setting] • Check if the following setting is set to
"Valid".
[Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Internet
ISW] → [Internet ISW setting]
• Check the status of the following setting.
ISW] → [Transfer access setting]
• If the above process does not solve the
problem, inform the corresponding error
code to the KONICA MINOLTA.
0x00000010 Parameter error • Check if the following setting is set to
"Valid".
ISW] → [Internet ISW setting]
problem, inform the corresponding error
code to KONICA MINOLTA.
0x00111000 Connection has been completed. • Check the User's network environment.
• Error concerning the network (LAN cable's connection)
• Check the status of the following setting.
ISW] → [Transfer access setting]
J-14
• Check to see if the FTP server operates

normally.
0x00111001 Error concerning the network • Check the network environment of the User.
• It cannot be connected to the server. • Check to see if the FTP server operates
0x00111100 Error concerning the network normally.
• Communication Timeout.
0x00111101 Error concerning the network • Check the network environment of the User.
• Disconnection occurred • Check to see if the FTP server operates
0x00111110 Error concerning the network normally.
• The network is not connected.
0x00110010 Error concerning the network
• Others
0x00001### FTP error • Check to see if FTP server normally
• Reply code when it failed to be connected operates.
• Check the IP address, User's name, etc.
0x00002### FTP error • Check to see if FTP server operates
• Error reply code for the User command or Pass command normally.
0x00003### FTP error
• Error reply code for CWD command
• Error reply code for the TYPE command normally.
0x00005### FTP error
• Error reply code for the PORT command
• Error reply code for the PASV command normally.
• Set the PASV mode to "Invalid", and try it
again.
• Error rely code for the RETR command normally.
• Wait for about 30 minutes and try it again.
0x10000100 • It cannot be accepted because of the job currently being executed. • Wait for the current job to be completed and
• ISW being executed by other method. try it again.
0x10000101 • It cannot be accepted because the sub-power is OFF. • Turn sub-power ON and try it again.
0x10000102 • The Internet ISW is already being executed. • Wait for the current Internet ISW to be
completed.
0x10000103 • It failed to prohibit the job. (It failed to lock the operation.) • Check if the following setting is set to
→ It failed to lock the job because the operation is already locked with "Valid".
PSWC, etc. [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Internet
0x10000104 • There is no space for F/W data to be downloaded. ISW] → [Internet ISW setting]
0x10000106 • Check sum error problem, inform the corresponding error
code to the KONICA MINOLTA.
0x10000107 File access error • Check to see if the downloaded F/W is of
• The file downloaded has an error. the correct type.
• The header of the file which has been read has an error.
• The size of the file to be downloaded is too large.
• When it is identified to be the different type of F/W.
0x10000108 • The area F/W is stored is destroyed, and another ISW is necessary. • Wait until ISW is automatically executed on
0x20000000 The temporary error when running the subset the main body side.
• When starting the Internet ISW in a normal program, the rebooting will
start and the Internet ISW will be executed with the subset program.
During the process by the subset program, it has to be in the "Failed"
status unless the Internet ISW is successfully conducted. This code is
used temporarily to make it in error status.
Note
• If the above process does not solve the problem, inform the corresponding error code to the KONICA MINOLTA.
J-15
bizhub 501/421/361 J REWRITING OF FIRMWARE > 4. Internet ISW Setting.
4. Internet ISW Setting.

4.1 Outline
• By using this setting, the Firmware stored in the Server can be downloaded over internet for upgrading.
4.2 Internet ISW Set

Functions • To set whether or not to enable each setting for Internet ISW.
Use • To use when upgrading the Firmware by Internet ISW.
• Each setting such as Server setting will be valid by setting this to "ON".
Note
• When the following setting is set to "ON", this setting will automatically be set to "OFF" and cannot be
changed.
Setting/Procedure • The default setting is "OFF".
ON "OFF"
4.3 HTTP Setting

• It will be displayed only when [Internet ISW Set] is set to "ON".
(1) Data Input Setting

Functions • To set whether or not to enable downloading using the HTTP Protocol.
Use • To use when accessing the Server using the HTTP Protocol.
• Setting on the Proxy Server will be valid when this setting is "ON".
ON "OFF"
(2) Connect Proxy

Functions • To set whether or not to connect via Proxy Server when accessing the Server.
Use • To use when accessing the Server via Proxy Server.
ON "OFF"
(3) Proxy Server

Functions • To set the Address and the Port Number for the Proxy Server.
Setting/Procedure <Server Address>
• Enter the IP Address using the Version 4 method / Version 6 method or FQDN method.
<Port Number>
• Enter the value between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.
(4) Proxy Authentication

Functions • To set the Login name or Password when Authentication is necessary for accessing the Proxy Server.
Use • To use when Authentication is necessary for accessing the Proxy Server.
Setting/Procedure <Authentication>
• The default setting is "OFF".
ON "OFF"
<Log-in Name>
• Enter the Login name (up to 32 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard.
<Password>
• Enter the Password (up to 32 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard.
(5) Connection Time-Out

Functions • To set the time for the Timeout for accessing the Server.
Use • To use when changing the time for the Timeout for accessing the Server.
Setting/Procedure • The default setting is "60 sec".
30 to 300 sec
4.4 FTP Setting

(1) Data Input Setting

Functions • To set whether or not to enable downloading using FTP Protocol.
J-16
Use • To use when accessing the Server with FTP Protocol.

• Setting this to "ON" will enable the Proxy Server setting.
ON "OFF"
(2) Connect Proxy

Functions • To set whether or not to access the Server via Proxy Server.
ON "OFF"
(3) Proxy Server

Functions • To set the Address and the Port No. of the Proxy Server.
Setting/Procedure <Server Address>
• Enter the IP Address using the Version 4 method / Version 6 method or FQDN method.
<Port Number>
(4) Connection Setting

Functions • To set the Port No. and the time for Timeout when accessing the FTP Server, and also to set whether or not to
enable PASV Mode.
Use • To use when accessing the FTP Server.
• To use when connecting by the PASV (passive) Mode (FTP Server side will inform the connection port before
connecting).
Setting/Procedure <Port Number>
<Connection Time Out>
• Enter the value between 1 and 60 (min.) using the 10-key pad.
<PASV Mode>
ON "OFF"
4.5 Forwarding Access Setting

(1) User ID
Functions • To register the User ID for accessing the Program Server where Firmware is to be stored.
Use
Setting/Procedure Select [User ID].
Enter the User ID (up to 64 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard.
(2) Password
Functions • To register the Password for accessing the Program Server where Firmware is to be stored.
Use
Setting/Procedure Select [URL].
Enter the URL (up to 256 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard.
•
Note
• Enter the URL which format suits the Protocol to be used.
• When connecting to http:
• http:// (Host name or IP Address)/ Directory name or https:// (Host name or IP Address)/Directory name
• When connecting to ftp:
• ftp:// (Host name or IP Address) / Directory name
(3) URL
Functions • To register the Address and Directory of the Program Server where the Firmware is to be stored in URL.
Use
Setting/Procedure • Select [FileName].
• Enter the File Name (up to 46 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard.
J-17
(4) FileName
Functions • To set the Port No. and the time for Timeout when accessing the FTP Server, and also to set whether or not to
enable PASV Mode.
Use • To use when accessing the FTP Server.
• To use when connecting by the PASV (passive) Mode (FTP Server side will inform the connection port before
connecting).
Setting/Procedure <Port Number>
<Connection Time Out>
• Enter the value between 1 and 60 (min.) using the 10-key pad.
<PASV Mode>
ON "OFF"
4.6 Download
Functions • Access the Program Server according to the Internet ISW setting, and download the Firmware.
Use • To use when updating the Firmware via network.Each setting such as Server setting will be valid by setting this to
"ON".
Setting/Procedure Select [Download].
Select the board type.
Press [ISW Start] to start downloading the Firmware.
The message to show the status will be displayed on the screen while connecting and transferring data.
•
Note
• When it failed to connect to the Program Server, or failed to download, the error code and the message will
be displayed. Check the cause of the error by the error code, and follow the message for resetting. J.3.6
Error Code List for the Internet ISW
When the Firmware is normally upgraded, the main body automatically is restarted to complete the Internet ISW.
J-18
bizhub 501/421/361 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 1. JAM INDICATION
K TROUBLESHOOTING
1. JAM INDICATION
1.1 Jam code list
Classificatio
JAM Code Cause Resulting operation Correction
n
Bypass J-1000 During operation: The vertical conveyance If there is a sheet of paper Pull out the paper from the
sensor (PS2) does not turn ON within a being printed when a jam bypass tray and remove jammed
specified period of time after the feed clutch /BP occurs, the main body paper if any.
(CL6) turns ON. completes the paper exit
Tray 1 J-1100 During operation: The registration sensor (PS1) before stopping Open the vertical conveyance
does not turn ON within a specified period of operations. door and ADU and remove
time after the feed clutch /1 (CL4) turns ON. jammed paper if any.
Pull out the tray and remove
jammed paper if any.
Tray 2 J-1200 During operation: The vertical conveyance Open the vertical conveyance
sensor (PS2) does not turn ON within a door and ADU and remove
specified period of time after the feed clutch /2 jammed paper if any.
(CL5) turns ON. Pull out the tray and remove
J-1201 During operation: The registration sensor (PS1) Open the vertical conveyance
does not turn ON within a specified period of door and ADU and remove
time after the vertical conveyance sensor (PS2) jammed paper if any.
turns ON. Pull out the tray and remove
PC-206 J-1300 During operation: The vertical conveyance Open the right door of PC and the
sensor /3 (PS117) does not turn ON a specified vertical conveyance door of the
period of time after the paper feed motor /3 main body and remove jammed
(M122) turns ON. paper if any.
sensor (PS2) does not turn ON a specified vertical conveyance door of the
period of time after the paper feed motor (M1) main body and remove jammed
turns ON. paper if any.
sensor (PS2) of the main body does not turn ON vertical conveyance door of the
within a specified period of time after the vertical main body and remove jammed
conveyance sensor /3 (PS117) of PC-206 turns paper if any.
ON. Pull out the tray and remove
sensor (PS2) of the main body does not turn ON vertical conveyance door of the
within a specified period of time after the vertical main body and remove jammed
conveyance sensor (PS2) of PC-407 turns ON. paper if any.
J-1305 During operation: The paper feed sensor (PS1) Open the right door of PC and the
does not turn ON within a specified period of vertical conveyance door of the
time after the paper feed motor (M1) turns ON. main body and remove jammed
paper if any.
does not turn OFF within a specified period of vertical conveyance door of the
time after the PS1 turns ON. main body and remove jammed
paper if any.
J-1307 During operation: The vertical conveyance Open the right door of PC and the
sensor (PS2) does not turn ON within a vertical conveyance door of the
specified period of time after the paper feed main body and remove jammed
sensor (PS1) turns ON. paper if any.
K-1
Classificatio
n
does not turn OFF within a specified period of vertical conveyance door of the
time after the PS2 turns ON. main body and remove jammed
paper if any.
J-1309 During operation: When a paper feed start signal Open the right door of PC and the
is sent out to PC-407 from the main body, a vertical conveyance door of the
receive signal from PC-407 is not sent out within main body and remove jammed
a specified period of time after that. paper if any.
J-1311 During operation: The shift position sensor Open the right door of PC and the
(PS11) does not turn ON within a specified vertical conveyance door of the
period of time after shift home sensor (PS12) main body and remove jammed
turns OFF. paper if any.
sensor /4 (PS126) does not turn ON within a vertical conveyance door of the
specified period of time after the paper feed main body and remove jammed
motor /4 (M123) turns ON. paper if any.
J-1401 During operation: The vertical conveyance Open the right door of PC and the
sensor /3 (PS117) does not turn ON within a vertical conveyance door of the
specified period of time after the vertical main body and remove jammed
conveyance sensor /4 (PS126) turns ON. paper if any.
LU J-1501 During operation: The LU exit sensor (PS155) Open the upper door of LU and
does not turn ON within a specified period of the vertical conveyance door of
time after the feed clutch (CL151) turns ON. the main body and remove
J-1501 During operation: The vertical conveyance Open the upper door of LU and
sensor (PS2) of the main body does not turn ON the vertical conveyance door of
within a specified period of time after the LU exit the main body and remove
sensor (PS155) turns ON. jammed paper if any.
Other J-2001 During operation: Emergency stop jam of the The main body and the Remove jammed paper if any
system optional device stop from optional device / main body.
J-2002 During operation: While in the print, the vertical immediately. Remove jammed paper if any
conveyance door opens. from optional device / main body.
J-2003 During operation: The ADU door is opened while Remove jammed paper if any
in printing. from optional device / main body.
J-2004 During operation: The ADU is opened while in Remove jammed paper if any
printing. from optional device / main body.
PC J-2005 During operation: While in the print, the right Remove jammed paper if any
door opens. from optional device / main body.
FS J-2006 During operation: While in the print, the front Remove jammed paper if any
FS-522 J-2007 During operation: While in the print, the guide Remove jammed paper if any
plate switch (SW4) turns OFF. from optional device / main body.
FS-523 J-2007 During operation: While in the up drive operation Remove jammed paper if any
of the tray, the shutter switch (SW2) turns ON. from optional device / main body.
J-2008 During operation: While in the print, FS-523 Remove jammed paper if any
comes off from the main body. from optional device / main body.
RU J-2009 During operation: While in the print, the front Remove jammed paper if any
FS-523 J-2010 During operation: While in the print, the upper Remove jammed paper if any
MT J-2010 During operation: While in the print, the right Remove jammed paper if any
SD J-2010 During operation: While in the print, the saddle- Remove jammed paper if any
stitching section opens. from optional device / main body.
Conveyance J-3000 During operation: The registration sensor (PS1) The printer section stops Open ADU and remove jammed
does not turn OFF within a specified period of immediately. paper if any.
time after the registration clutch (CL1) turns ON.
K-2
Classificatio
n
J-3100 During operation: The fusing exit sensor (PS3) Open ADU and remove jammed
does not turn ON within a specified period of paper if any.
time after the registration clutch (CL1) turns ON.
Fusing J-3200 During operation: The fusing exit sensor (PS3) Open ADU and remove jammed
does not turn OFF within a specified period of paper if any.
time after the PS3 turns ON.
Reversing J-3300 During operation: The reverse sensor (PS27) Open ADU and remove jammed
time after the fusing exit sensor (PS3) turns ON.
J-3400 During operation: The reverse sensor (PS27) Open ADU and remove jammed
does not turn OFF within a specified period of paper if any.
Other J-5001 During operation: A print start signal is not sent The main body and the Open the right door of PC, the
out from the overall control board (OACB) within optional device stop vertical conveyance door of the
a specified period of time after the registration immediately. main body and ADU and remove
sensor (PS1) turns ON. jammed paper if any.
DF J-6001 During operation: The DF open/close switch The DF stops immediately. Open the open/close cover and
(SW3) turns OFF while in the DF operation. If there is paper being remove jammed paper if any.
J-6002 During operation: The cover open/close sensor transferred or having been Open the open/close cover and
(PS7) turns OFF while in the DF operation. transferred, the main body remove jammed paper if any.
completes the paper exit
J-6101 During operation: While in the single sided before stopping Open the open/close cover and
mode, the original feed sensor (PS6) does not operations. remove jammed paper if any.
turn ON within a specified period of time after
the original feed motor (M1) turns ON.
J-6102 During operation: When feeding the first original Open the open/close cover and
in the mode other than the single sided mode, remove jammed paper if any.
the original feed sensor (PS6) does not turn ON
within a specified period of time after the original
feed motor (M1) turns ON.
J-6103 During operation: When feeding the second Open the open/close cover and
original in the mode other than the single sided remove jammed paper if any.
mode, the original feed sensor (PS6) does not
the original feed motor (M1) turns ON.
J-6104 During operation: When feeding the third original Open the open/close cover and
the original feed sensor (PS6) does not turn ON
feed motor (M1) turns ON.
J-6105 During operation: While in the single sided Open the open/close cover and
mode, the original feed sensor (PS6) does not remove jammed paper if any.
turn OFF within a specified period of time after
the PS6 turns ON.
the original feed sensor (PS6) does not turn
OFF within a specified period of time after the
PS6 turns ON.
mode, the original feed sensor (PS6) does not
the PS6 turns ON.
the original feed sensor (PS6) does not turn
PS6 turns ON.
mode, the original registration sensor (PS9) remove jammed paper if any.
does not turn ON within a specified period of
time after the feed motor (M1) turns ON.
the original registration feed sensor (PS9) does
not turn ON within a specified period of time
after the feed motor (M1) turns ON.
K-3
Classificatio
n
mode, the original registration sensor (PS9)
does not turn ON within a specified period of
time after the feed motor (M1) turns ON.
the original registration sensor (PS9) does not
the feed motor (M1) turns ON.
mode, the original registration sensor (PS9) remove jammed paper if any.
does not turn OFF within a specified period of
the PS9 turns ON.
mode, the original registration sensor (PS9)
does not turn OFF within a specified period of
the PS9 turns ON.
mode, the original detection sensor (PS8) does remove jammed paper if any.
after the original coveyance motor (M2) turns
ON.
the original detection sensor (PS8) does not turn
ON within a specified period of time after the
original coveyance motor (M2) turns ON.
mode, the original detection sensor (PS8) does
after the original coveyance motor (M2) turns
ON.
ON within a specified period of time after the
original coveyance motor (M2) turns ON.
mode, the original detection sensor (PS8) does remove jammed paper if any.
not turn OFF within a specified period of time
after the PS8 turns ON.
PS8 turns ON.
mode, the original detection sensor (PS8) does
not turn OFF within a specified period of time
after the PS8 turns ON.
PS8 turns ON.
J-6501 When idling: While in the idle, the original feed Open the open/close cover and
sensor (PS6) is ON. remove jammed paper if any.
K-4
Classificatio
n
J-6502 When idling: While in the idle, the original Open the open/close cover and
registration sensor (PS9) is ON. remove jammed paper if any.
J-6503 When idling: While in the idle, the original feed Open the open/close cover and
sensor (PS6) or the original registration sensor remove jammed paper if any.
(PS9) is ON.
J-6504 When idling: While in the idle, the original exit Open the open/close cover and
sensor (PS10) is ON. remove jammed paper if any.
registration sensor (PS6) or the original exit remove jammed paper if any.
sensor (PS10) is ON.
registration sensor (PS9) or the original exit remove jammed paper if any.
J-6507 When idling: While in the idle, any of the original Open the open/close cover and
feed sensor (PS6), the original registration remove jammed paper if any.
sensor (PS9) or the original exit sensor (PS10)
is ON.
detection sensor (PS8) is ON. remove jammed paper if any.
registration sensor (PS6) or the original remove jammed paper if any.
detection sensor (PS8) is ON.
registration sensor (PS9) or the original remove jammed paper if any.
detection sensor (PS8) is ON.
sensor (PS9) or the original detection sensor
(PS8) is ON.
detection sensor (PS8) or the original exit remove jammed paper if any.
feed sensor (PS6), the original detection sensor remove jammed paper if any.
(PS8) or the original exit sensor (PS10) is ON.
registration sensor (PS9), the original detection remove jammed paper if any.
sensor (PS8) or the original exit sensor (PS10)
is ON.
sensor (PS9), the original detection sensor
(PS8) or the original exit sensor (PS10) is ON.
mode, the original exit sensor (PS10) does not remove jammed paper if any.
the original coveyance motor (M2) turns ON.
the original exit sensor (PS10) does not turn ON
coveyance motor (M2) turns ON.
mode, the original exit sensor (PS10) does not
the original coveyance motor (M2) turns ON.
the original exit sensor (PS10) does not turn ON
coveyance motor (M2) turns ON.
mode, the original exit sensor (PS10) does not remove jammed paper if any.
the PS10 turns ON.
K-5
Classificatio
n
the original exit sensor (PS10) does not turn
PS10 turns ON.
mode, the original exit sensor (PS10) does not
the PS10 turns ON.
the original exit sensor (PS10) does not turn
PS10 turns ON.
FS-522 J-7201 When idling: While in the idle, the entrance FS, RU, MT, SD, main Remove jammed paper if any
sensor (PS4) is ON. body stop immediately. from the FS/main body.
FS-523 J-7201 When idling: While in the idle, the passage Remove jammed paper if any
sensor (PS2) of RU turns ON. from the FS/main body.
FS-522 J-7202 When idling: While in the idle, the conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
sensor (PS5) or the stacker sensor (PS8) is ON. from the FS/main body.
FS-523 J-7202 When idling: While in the idle, any of the sub Remove jammed paper if any
tray exit sensor (PS1), the bypass route from the FS/main body.
conveyance sensor (PS2), the intermediate
conveyance sensor (PS3), the main route
conveyance sensor (PS4) or the alignment tray
sensor (PS5) is ON.
FS-522 J-7203 When idling: While in the idle, the stacker sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS8) is ON. from the FS/main body.
SD J-7204 When idling: While in the idle, the paper exit Remove jammed paper if any
sensor (PS20) is ON. from the FS/main body.
MT J-7205 When idling: While in the idle, the conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
sensor /Up (PS9) or /Lw (PS10) is ON. from the FS/main body.
FS-522 J-7216 During operation: The entrance sensor (PS4) of Remove jammed paper if any
FS does not turn ON within a specified period of from the FS/main body.
time after the fusing exit sensor (PS3) of the
main body turns ON.
FS-523 J-7216 During operation: The path sensor (PS2) of RU Remove jammed paper if any
does not turn ON within a specified period of from the FS/main body.
time after the fusing exit sensor (PS3) of the
main body turns ON.
FS-522 J-7217 During operation: The entrance sensor (PS4) Remove jammed paper if any
does not turn OFF within a specified period of from the FS/main body.
J-7217 During operation: The conveyance sensor (PS5) Remove jammed paper if any
does not turn ON within a specified period of from the FS/main body.
time after the entrance sensor (PS4) turns ON.
FS-523 J-7217 During operation: The path sensor (PS2) of RU Remove jammed paper if any
J-7217 During operation: The sub tray paper exit sensor Remove jammed paper if any
(PS1) of FS does not turn ON within a specified from the FS/main body.
period of time after the path sensor (PS2) of RU
turns ON.
J-7217 During operation: The main route conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
sensor (PS4) of FS does not turn ON within a from the FS/main body.
specified period of time after the path sensor
(PS2) of RU turns ON.
J-7217 During operation: The bypass route conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
sensor (PS2) of FS does not turn ON within a from the FS/main body.
specified period of time after the path sensor
(PS2) of RU turns ON.
J-7217 During operation: The main route conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
sensor (PS4) does not turn OFF within a from the FS/main body.
specified period of time after the PS4 turns ON.
J-7217 During operation: The bypass route conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
K-6
Classificatio
n
J-7217 During operation: The intermediate conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
sensor (PS3) does not turn ON within a from the FS/main body.
specified period of time after the main route
conveyance sensor (PS4) turns ON.
J-7217 The intermediate conveyance sensor (PS3) Remove jammed paper if any
time after the bypass route conveyance sensor
(PS2) turns ON.
FS-522 J-7218 During operation: The conveyance sensor (PS5) Remove jammed paper if any
FS-523 J-7218 During operation: The sub tray exit sensor (PS1) Remove jammed paper if any
J-7218 During operation: The intermediate conveyance Remove jammed paper if any
FS-522 J-7221 During operation: After completion of stapling, Remove jammed paper if any
the stacker sensor (PS8) does not turn OFF from the FS/main body.
within a specified period of time after the paper
exit motor (M1) turns ON.
FS-523 J-7221 During operation: After completion of stapling, Remove jammed paper if any
the alignment tray sensor (PS5) does not turn from the FS/main body.
paper exit motor (M3) turns ON.
SD J-7225 During operation: Folding jam Remove jammed paper if any
from the FS/main body.
PU J-7243 During operation: Punch jam Remove jammed paper if any
from the FS/main body.
FS-522 J-7281 During operation: The stapler motor does not Remove jammed paper if any
return to the home position within a specified from the FS/main body.
period of time after the stapler motor turns ON.
FS-523 J-7281 During operation: The stapler home sensor /Fr Remove jammed paper if any
(PS22) does not turn ON within a specified from the FS/main body.
period of time after the stapler motor /Fr (M16)
turns ON.
J-7282 During operation: The stapler home sensor /Rr Remove jammed paper if any
(PS25) does not turn ON within a specified from the FS/main body.
period of time after the stapler motor /Rr (M17)
turns ON.
SD J-7284 During operation: The clincher motor /Fr does Remove jammed paper if any
not return to the home position within a specified from the FS/main body.
period of time after the clincher motor /Fr turns
ON.
J-7285 During operation: The clincher motor /Rr does Remove jammed paper if any
not return to the home position within a specified from the FS/main body.
period of time after the clincher motor /Rr turns
ON.
MT J-7290 During operation: The conveyance sensor /Up Remove jammed paper if any
(PS9) or /Lw (PS10) of MT does not turn ON from the FS/main body.
within a specified period of time after the
conveyance sensor (PS5) of FS turns ON.
J-7290 During operation: The conveyance sensor /Up Remove jammed paper if any
(PS9) or /Lw (PS10) do not turn OFF within a from the FS/main body.
specified period of time after PS9 or PS10 turn
ON.
Paper feed J-8100 When idling: The registration sensor (PS1) turns The printer section stops Open the vertical conveyance
ON while in idling. immediately. door and ADU and remove
J-8200 When idling: The vertical conveyance sensor Open the vertical conveyance
(PS2) turns ON while in idling. door and ADU and remove
PC-206 J-8300 When idling: The vertical conveyance sensor /3 Open the right door and remove
(PS116) turns ON while in idling. jammed paper if any.
PC-407 J-8300 When idling: The vertical conveyance sensor Open the right door and remove
PC-206 J-8400 When idling: The vertical conveyance sensor /4 Open the right door and remove
K-7
Classificatio
n
LU J-8500 When idling: The LU exit sensor (PS155) turns Open the upper door and remove
ON while in idling. jammed paper if any.
Fusing J-9000 When idling: The fusing exit sensor (PS3) turns Open ADU and remove jammed
ON while in idling. paper if any.
Reverse J-9100 When idling: The reverse sensor (PS27) turns Open ADU and remove jammed
ON while in idling. paper if any.
ADU J-9200 When idling: The ADU conveyance sensor /1 Open ADU and remove jammed
(PS24) turns ON while in idling. paper if any.
J-9300 When idling: The ADU conveyance sensor /2 Open ADU and remove jammed
(PS25) turns ON while in idling. paper if any.
J-9701 During operation: The ADU conveyance sensor / Open ADU and remove jammed
1 (PS24) does not turn ON within a specified paper if any.
period of time after the reverse motor (M6) turns
ON for reverse rotation.
J-9702 During operation: The ADU conveyance sensor / Open ADU and remove jammed
2 (PS25) does not turn ON within a specified paper if any.
period of time after the ADU conveyance
sensor /1 (PS24) turns ON.
J-9703 During operation: The registration sensor (PS1) Open ADU and remove jammed
time after the ADU conveyance sensor /2
(PS25) turns ON.
K-8
bizhub 501/421/361 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 2. MALFUNCTION CODE
2. MALFUNCTION CODE
2.1 Malfunction code list
Control
Malfunction Resulting Faulty part
Classification Cause Estimated abnormal parts when
code operation isolation DIPSW
detached
Main body: Drive C-0201 The upper limit sensor /1 The main body • Upper limit sensor /1 DipSW18-0 Paper feed
(PS6) does not turn ON stops (PS6) in tray 1 is
within a specified period of immediately to • Printer control board unavailable
time after the paper lift turn OFF the (PRCB) (There
motor /1 (M7) turns ON. main relay remains no
(RL1). paper, and
on the
operation
panel, the
tray 1 is
displayed in
hatching.)
C-0202 The upper limit sensor /2 • Paper lift motor /2 (M8) DipSW18-1 Paper feed
(PS13) does not turn ON • Upper limit sensor /2 in tray 2 is
within a specified period of (PS13) unavailable
time after the paper lift • Printer control board (There
motor /2 (M8) turns ON. (PRCB) remains no
paper, and
on the
operation
panel, the
tray 2 is
displayed in
hatching.)
PC-206: Drive C-0203 The upper limit sensor /3 • Paper lift motor /3 DipSW18-4 Paper feed
(PS114) does not turn ON (M124) in tray 3 is
within a specified period of • Upper limit sensor /3 unavailable
time after the paper lift (PS114) (There
motor /3 (M124) turns ON. • PC control board remains no
(PCCB) paper, and
on the
operation
panel, the
tray 3 is
displayed in
hatching.)
C-0204 The upper limit sensor /4 • Paper lift motor /4 DipSW18-5 Paper feed
(PS123) does not turn ON (M125) in tray 4 is
within a specified period of • Upper limit sensor /4 unavailable
time after the paper lift (PS123) (There
motor /4 (M125) turns ON. • PC control board remains no
(PCCB) paper, and
on the
operation
panel, the
tray 4 is
displayed in
hatching.)
LU: Drive C-0205 The upper limit sensor • Paper lift motor (M151) DipSW18-6 Paper feed
(PS152) does not turn ON • Upper limit sensor in LU is
within a specified period of (PS152) unavailable
time after the paper lift • LU drive board (LTDB) (There
motor (M151) turns ON. remains no
paper, and
on the
operation
panel, LU is
displayed in
hatching.)
K-9
Control
detached
PC-407: Drive C-0206 Paper lift motor (M5) • Paper lift motor (M5) DipSW18-4 Paper feed
abnormality. • Shift motor (M4) in tray 3 is
Shift motor (M4) • Shift gate motor (M3) unavailable
abnormality. • PC control board (There
Shift gate motor (M3) (PCCB) remains no
abnormality. paper, and
on the
operation
panel, the
tray 3 is
displayed in
hatching.)
Bypass: Drive C-0207 While in the paper feed, • Pick-up solenoid /BP
there occurs a condition (SD1)
twice in succession in • Lift sensor (PS23)
which the lift sensor • Feed motor (M9)
(PS23) does not turn ON • Printer control board
within a specified period of (PRCB)
time after the pick-up
solenoid /BP (SD1) turns
ON.
While in the power switch
(SW2) ON, there occurs a
condition twice in
succession in which PS23
does not turn OFF within a
specified period of time
after SD1 turns ON.
Main body: Fan C-0301 Conveyance suction fan • Conveyance suction fan
abnormality (FM5) abnormality. (FM5)
• Printer control board
(PRCB)
Main body: C-1001* Communication • Overall control board
Communication abnormality between the (OACB)
abnormality engine control of the • Printer control board
overall control board (PRCB)
(OACB) and that of the
printer control board
(PRCB).
While in the stand-by, an
FS Ready signal cannot be
detected for a specified
period of time.
FS: FS C-1002 FS communication • FS control board (FSCB)
abnormality. • Printer control board
A serial communication is (PRCB)
unavailable between the
FS control board (FSCB)
and the printer control
board (PRCB).
FS: FS-522 C-1003 Flash ROM abnormality. FS control board (FSCB)
A checksum error of the
flash ROM is detected.
FS: FS-523 C-1101 Shift motor (M8) drive • Shift motor (M8)
abnormality. • Shift home sensor
•When starting the home (PS10)
position movement, the • FS control board (FSCB)
shift home sensor (PS10)
does not turn ON a
after M8 turns ON.
•When starting the shift
position movement, PS10
does not turn OFF a
after M8 turns ON.
K-10
Control
detached
FS: FS-522 C-1102 Tray lift motor (M11) drive • Tray lift motor (M11)
abnormality. • Upper limit sensor
•While in the main tray up (PS15)
drive, the upper limit • FS control board (FSCB)
sensor (PS15) does not
turn ON within a specified
period of time after M11
turns ON.
•While in the main tray
down drive, the lock signal
of M11 is detected.
down drive, it does not
reach the target position
within specified time.
FS: FS-523 C-1102 Tray lift motor (M7) drive • Tray lift motor (M7)
abnormality. • Main tray upper limit
•While in the main tray up sensor (PS19)
drive, the main tray upper • FS control board (FSCB)
limit sensor (PS19) does
not turn ON within a
after M7 turns ON.
down drive, the lock signal
of M7 is detected.
•While in the M7 ON, the
main tray upper limit
switch (SW2) or the main
tray lower limit switch
(SW3) turns ON.
FS: FS-522 C-1103 Alignment motor /Rr (M4) • Alignment motor /Rr
drive abnormality. (M4)
•While in the alignment • Alignment sensor /Rr
home position search, the (PS6)
alignment home sensor • FS control board (FSCB)
(PS6) does not turn ON
within a specified period of
time after M4 turns ON.
•While in the alignment
operation, PS6 does not
turn OFF within a specified
turns ON.
FS: FS-523 C-1103 Alignment motor (M5) • Alignment motor (M5)
drive abnormality. • Alignment home sensor
•While in the alignment (PS9)
home position search, the • FS control board (FSCB)
alignment home sensor
•While in the alignment
turns ON.
FS: FS-522 C-1104 Exit roller release motor • Exit roller release motor
(M6) drive abnormality. (M6)
•When starting the • Exit roller home sensor
pressure position drive, the (PS12)
exit roller home sensor • FS control board (FSCB)
•When starting the
separation position drive,
PS12 does not turn OFF
K-11
Control
detached
FS: FS-523 C-1104 Paper exit roller release • Paper exit roller release
motor (M13) drive motor (M13)
abnormality. • Exit roller home sensor
•When starting the (PS13)
pressure position drive, the • FS control board (FSCB)
exit roller home sensor
C-1105 Intermediate conveyance • Intermediate
roller release motor (M12) conveyance roller
drive abnormality. release motor (M12)
•When starting the • Roller release home
pressure position drive, the sensor (PS12)
roller release home sensor • FS control board (FSCB)
FS: FS-522 C-1106 Stapler movement motor • Stapler movement motor
•While in the home • Stapler home sensor
position search, the stapler (PS10)
home sensor (PS10) does • FS control board (FSCB)
after M7 turns ON.
•While in the 1-staple
after M7 turns ON.
FS: FS-523 C-1106 Stapler movement motor • Stapler movement motor
•While in the home • Stapler home sensor
position search, the stapler (PS14)
after M6 turns ON.
•While in the 1-staple
after M6 turns ON.
C-1107 Stapler motor /Fr (M17) • Stapler motor /Fr (M17)
drive abnormality. • Stapler home sensor /Fr
•The stapler home sensor / (PS25)
Fr (PS25) does not turn • FS control board (FSCB)
OFF within a specified
turns ON.
•PS25 does not turn ON
time after the OFF of PS25
is detected.
time after M17 turns ON
for reverse rotation.
K-12
Control
detached
FS: FS-522 C-1108 Stapler drive failure. • Stapling motor
•Staple motor does not • FS control board (FSCB)
move from home position
within specified time from
start of staple driving.
•Staple motor does not
reach the home position
within specified time from
start of staple reverse
driving.
FS: FS-523 C-1108 Stapler motor /Rr (M16) • Stapler motor /Rr (M16)
drive abnormality. • Stapler home sensor /Rr
•The stapler home sensor / (PS22)
Rr (PS22) does not turn • FS control board (FSCB)
OFF within a specified
turns ON.
time after the OFF of PS22
is detected.
time after M16 turns ON
for reverse rotation.
FS:SD C-1109 Saddle stapler motor /Fr • Saddle stapler motor /Fr DipSW20-5 SD is
drive abnormality. • SD control board unavailable
•When the saddle stapler (SDCB) (SD
motor /Fr is ON, it does not connection
get off from the home is not
position within a specified recognized)
period of time.
•After its getting off from
the home position is
detected, it does not get to
the home position within a
specified period of time.
•After the saddle stapler
motor /Fr turns ON for
reverse rotation, it does
not get to the home
position within a specified
period of time.
C-1110 Saddle stapler motor /Rr • Saddle stapler motor /Rr DipSW20-5 SD is
•When the saddle stapler (SDCB) (SD
motor /Rr turns ON, it does connection
not get off from the home is not
position within a specified recognized)
period of time.
•After its getting off from
the home position is
detected, it does not get to
the home position within a
•After the saddle stapler
motor /Rr turns ON for
reverse rotation, it does
not get to the home
position within a specified
period of time.
C-1111 Paper guide motor (M13) • Paper guide motor DipSW20-5 SD is
drive abnormality. (M13) unavailable
•When M13 turns ON for • Paper guide home (SD
protrusion, the paper guide sensor (PS23) connection
home sensor (PS23) does • SD control board is not
not turn OFF within a (SDCB) recognized)
•When M13 turns ON for
evacuation, PS23 does not
period of time.
K-13
Control
detached
C-1112 Staple guide motor (M14) • Staple guide motor DipSW20-5 SD is
•While in the home • Staple guide home (SD
position return operation, sensor (PS26) connection
the staple guide home • SD control board is not
sensor (PS26) does not (SDCB) recognized)
turns ON.
•When starting a retraction
turns ON.
C-1113 Exit open/close motor (M9) • Exit open/close motor DipSW20-5 SD is
•When starting a pressure • Saddle exit home sensor (SD
contact operation, the (PS18) connection
saddle exit home sensor • SD control board is not
(PS18) does not turn ON (SDCB) recognized)
•When starting a
separation operation,
C-1114 Folding motor (M10) drive • Folding motor (M10) DipSW20-5 SD is
abnormality. • Folding roller home unavailable
The folding roller home sensor (PS22) (SD
sensor (PS22) does not • SD control board connection
turn ON within a specified (SDCB) is not
period of time after M10 recognized)
turns ON.
C-1115 Conveyance motor (M8) • Conveyance motor (M8) DipSW20-5 SD is
•Within a specified period (SDCB) (SD
of time after M8 turns ON, connection
the ON of a motor lock is not
signal is detected for a recognized)
prescribed period of time
in succession.
•A specified period of time
after M8 turns OFF, the
OFF of a motor lock signal
is detected for a
prescribed period of time
in succession.
FS:FS-522 C-1116 Exit roller release motor • Exit roller release motor
•When the shutter is • Shutter home sensor
closed, the shutter home (PS16)
sensor (PS16) does not • FS control board (FSCB)
turns ON.
•When the shutter is open,
C-1117 Alignment motor /Fr (M5) • Alignment motor /Fr
drive abnormality. (M5)
•While in the home • Alignment home
position search, the sensor /Fr (PS7)
alignment home sensor /Fr • FS control board (FSCB)
•While in the home
position search, PS7 does
not turn OFF within a
after M5 turns ON.
K-14
Control
detached
C-1118 Exit paddle solenoid (SD2) • Exit paddle solenoid
drive abnormality. (SD2)
•While in the paddle • Exit paddle home sensor
evacuation, the exit paddle (PS11)
after SD2 turns ON.
•While in the paper hold-
down operation, PS11
after SD turns ON.
FS:FS-523 C-1119 Punch motor (M11) drive • Punch motor (M11)
abnormality. • FS control board (FSCB)
The punch encoder sensor
(PS15) does not turn OFF
C-1120 Hole punch selector motor • FS control board (FSCB)
(M14) drive abnormality • Hole punch selector
(inch system only) motor (M14)
•When starting the punch
2-hole position switch
drive, the hole punch
position switch (SW4) is
not turned ON in the
after the M14 is turned
ON.
•When starting the punch
3-hole position switch
drive, the SW4 is not
turned OFF in the
after the M14 is turned
ON.
FS:PU C-1121 Punch motor (M1) drive • Punch motor (M1)
abnormality. • Punch position sensor /1
The punch position (PS2)
sensors /1 (PS2) and /2 • Punch position sensor /2
(PS3) do not turn OFF (PS3)
within a specified period of • FS control board (FSCB)
Main body: C-2001 Communication • Overall control board
Image process abnormality between the (OACB)
communication engine control of the • Printer control board
abnormality overall control board (PRCB)
(PRCB)
While in the stand-by, a
process Ready signal
cannot be detected for a
Main body: C-2201 Developing motor (M3) • Developing motor (M3)
Motor speed speed abnormality. • Printer control board
abnormality While M3 is ON, an EM (PRCB)
error signal has been
detected 5 times in
succession within a
C-2202 Drum motor (M1) speed • Drum motor (M1)
While M1 is ON, an EM (PRCB)
detected 5 times in
succession within a
K-15
Control
detached
Main body: Fan C-2301 Drum cooling fan (FM4) • Drum cooling fan (FM4)
lock abnormality abnormality. • Printer control board
While FM4 is ON, an EM (PRCB)
detected 5 times in
succession within a
C-2302 Developing suction fan • Developing suction fan
motor (FM6) abnormality. motor (FM6)
While FM6 is ON, an EM • Printer control board
error signal has been (PRCB)
detected 5 times in
succession within a
C-2303 Developing cooling fan • Developing cooling fan
(FM7) abnormality. (FM7)
While FM7 is ON, an EM • Printer control board
error signal has been (PRCB)
detected 5 times in
succession within a
Main body: C-2401 High machine inside • TCR sensor (TCRS)
Abnormality temperature abnormality. • Printer control board
around the drum When the temperature (PRCB)
around the drum is above
58°C
C-2402 Erase lamp (EL) connector • Erase lamp (EL)
slip-off abnormality. • Printer control board
When EL turns ON before (PRCB)
starting an initial charging,
EL abnormality has been
detected 15 times in
succession at prescribed
intervals after a specified
period of time.
Main body: C-2403 Toner bottle phase • Toner bottle motor
Toner bottle detection abnormality. (M10)
abnormality While in the power switch • Toner bottle position
(SW2) ON, the toner bottle sensor (PS28)
position sensor (PS28) • Printer control board
does not turn ON within a (PRCB)
after the toner bottle motor
(M10) turns ON.
Main body: High C-2701 Charging abnormality. If there is a • Charging corona
voltage power An error signal is detected sheet of paper • High voltage unit (HV)
source 5 times in succession at being printed, • Printer control board
abnormality prescribed intervals. the main body (PRCB)
completes the
paper exit to
stop operations.
The main relay
(RL1) turns OFF.
C-2702 Transfer lightning The main body • Transfer/separation
abnormality. stops charger
There occurs a immediately to • High voltage unit (HV)
phenomenon 5 times in a turn OFF the • Printer control board
job, in which an error main relay (PRCB)
signal is detected 3 times (RL1).
in succession at
prescribed intervals.
C-2703 Separation lightning • Transfer/separation
abnormality. charger
There occurs a • High voltage unit (HV)
phenomenon 5 times in a • Printer control board
job, in which an error (PRCB)
signal is detected 5 times
in succession at
prescribed intervals.
K-16
Control
detached
C-2801 TCR output abnormality. • TCR sensor (TCRS)
When the TCR output is in • Printer control board
excess of 3.0 V. (PRCB)
C-2802 TCR output abnormality. • TCR sensor (TCRS)
When the TCR sensor • Printer control board
(TCRS) maximum output (PRCB)
is 1.0 V or less.
C-2803Error TCR output abnormality. • TCR sensor (TCRS)
code 3 When the output ripple • Printer control board
voltage of the TCR sensor (PRCB)
(TCRS) is 0.5 V or less.
code 4 When the output ripple • Printer control board
voltage of TCR sensor (PRCB)
(TCRS) is 0.02 V or less.
code 5 When the TCR sensor • Printer control board
(TCRS) control voltage (PRCB)
cannot be adjusted within
7.6V to 6.2V.
C-2803Error When the detection of the • IDC sensor (IDCS)
code 6 toner control patch is • Printer control board
abnormal for the D/A (PRCB)
check.
C-2804 Toner density abnormality. • Toner remaining sensor
When the L detection (PZS)
output is in excess of 2.6 V • TCR sensor (TCRS)
before the toner remaining • Printer control board
sensor (PZS) detects a no (PRCB)
toner condition, toner
density does not recover
even when toner is
automatically supplied.
Main body: C-3201 Fusing motor (M11) speed • Fusing motor (M11)
Motor speed abnormality. • Printer control board
abnormality When M11 is ON, an EM (PRCB)
error signal is detected 30
times in succession within
a specified period of time.
Main body: Fan C-3301 Fusing cooling fan /Fr • Fusing cooling fan /Fr
lock abnormality (FM2) abnormality. (FM2)
When FM2 is ON, an EM • Printer control board
error signal is detected 3 (PRCB)
C-3302 Fusing cooling fan /Rr • Fusing cooling fan /Rr
(FM8) abnormality. (FM8)
When FM8 is ON, an EM • Printer control board
error signal is detected 3 (PRCB)
Main body: C-3501 Fusing main sensor high The main body • Thermistor /1 (TH1)
Fusing low temperature abnormality. stops • Printer control board
temperature The thermistor /1 (TH1) immediately to (PRCB)
abnormality detects a temperature turn OFF the • DC power supply
higher than 236°C for main relay (DCPS)
more than a specified (RL1). All the
period of time. keys are not
C-3502 Fusing sub sensor high taken in. • Thermistor /2 (TH2)
temperature abnormality. • Printer control board
The thermistor /2 (TH2) (PRCB)
detects a temperature • DC power supply
higher than 236°C for (DCPS)
more than a specified
period of time.
K-17
Control
detached
C-3801 Fusing main sensor low • Thermistor /1 (TH1)
While in the idle or in the (PRCB)
low power mode, the • DC power supply
fusing heater lamp /1 (L2) (DCPS)
turns on for more than 12
seconds in succession.
While in other than the (PRCB)
warm-up, the thermistor /1 • DC power supply
(TH1) detects a (DCPS)
temperature lower than
130°C for more than 10
seconds.
The detection temperature (PRCB)
of the thermistor /1 (TH1) • DC power supply
does not get to the (DCPS)
prescribed temperature
time after it starts the
warm-up.
C-3804 Fusing sub sensor low • Thermistor /2 (TH2)
While in the idle, the fusing (PRCB)
heater lamp /2 (L3) turns • DC power supply
on for more than 12 (DCPS)
seconds in succession.
While in other than the (PRCB)
warm-up, the thermistor /2 • DC power supply
(TH2) detects a (DCPS)
temperature lower than
130°C for more than 10
seconds.
The detection temperature (PRCB)
of the thermistor /2 (TH2) • DC power supply
does not get to the (DCPS)
prescribed temperature
time after it starts the
warm-up.
C-3807 Fusing main sensor high • Thermistor /1 (TH1)
temperature abnormality • Printer control board
(sub CPU detection) (PRCB)
In the sub CPU, the • DC power supply
thermistor /1 (TH1) detects (DCPS)
a temperature higher than
236°C for more than a
C-3808 Fusing sub sensor high • Thermistor /2 (TH2)
temperature abnormality • Printer control board
(sub CPU detection) (PRCB)
In the sub CPU, the • DC power supply
thermistor /2 (TH2) detects (DCPS)
a temperature higher than
236°C for more than a
K-18
Control
detached
Main body: C-3901 Inferior contact of the • Thermistor /1 (TH1)
Fusing sensor thermistor • Printer control board
abnormality /1 (TH1) (PRCB)
While in the warm-up
condition, when the
thermistor /2 (TH2)
detection temperature gets
to the Ready temperature
before the TH1 detection
temperature, the TH1
detection temperature
does not get to the Ready
temperature a specified
period of time after the
TH2 detection temperature
got to the Ready
temperature.
C-3902 Inferior contact of the • Thermistor /2 (TH2)
thermistor • Printer control board
/2 (TH2) (PRCB)
While in the warm-up
condition, when the
thermistor /1 (TH1)
detection temperature gets
to the Ready temperature
before the TH2 detection
temperature, the TH2
does not get to the Ready
temperature a specified
period of time after the
TH1 detection temperature
got to the Ready
temperature.
C-3903 Thermistor /1 (TH1) open • Thermistor /1 (TH1)
abnormality (sub CPU • Printer control board
detection) (PRCB)
In the sub CPU, the TH1
detects a temperature
between -8 and 20°C for
period of time.
C-3904 Thermistor /2 (TH2) open • Thermistor /2 (TH2)
abnormality (sub CPU • Printer control board
detection) (PRCB)
In the sub CPU, the TH2
detects a temperature
between -8 and 20°C for
period of time.
Main body: C-4001 Index board (INDEXB) The main body • Index board (INDEXB)
Image contact abnormality. stops • Overall control board
processing immediately to (OACB)
abnormality turn OFF the
Main body: C-4101 Polygon motor (M5) speed main relay • Polygon motor (M5)
Motor speed abnormality. (RL1). • Printer control board
abnormality When M5 is ON, an error (PRCB)
in succession within a
Main body: C-4401 Laser drive board (LDB) • Laser drive board (LDB)
Image abnormality. • Overall control board
processing When an overcurrent flows (OACB)
abnormality for laser output.
C-4701 Laser index abnormality. • Index board (INDEXB)
When the cycle of the • Overall control board
index is different from an (OACB)
expected value.
K-19
Control
detached
Main body: C-5001 Main body control board • Overall control board
Communication communication (OACB)
abnormality abnormality 1 • Scanner drive board
Communication (SDB)
abnormality between the
overall control board
(OACB) and the scanner
drive board (SDB).
C-5002 Main body control board Printer control board
communication (PRCB)
abnormality 2
Communication
abnormality, incoming
command abnormality,
platen operation sequence
abnormality to the sub
CPU in the overall control
board (OACB).
C-5003 Sub CPU A/D conversion Printer control board
abnormality. (PRCB)
There is no response 2
times in succession to the
A/D conversion request of
the overall control board
(OACB).
Main body: Fan C-5301 Exhaust fan /Fr (FM3) • Exhaust fan /Fr (FM3)
lock abnormality conversion abnormality. • Printer control board
When FM3 is ON, an error (PRCB)
C-5302 Exhaust fan /Rr (FM9) • Exhaust fan /Rr (FM9)
conversion abnormality. • Printer control board
C-5303 Power supply cooling fan • Power supply cooling
(FM1) conversion fan (FM1)
Main body: OS C-5401* There occurs an OS error Engine section Printer control board
error with the engine control power OFF. (PRCB)
section in the printer
control board (PRCB).
Main body: C-5402* Time out for tuning off the Engine section • Overall control board
System control power switch (SW2) power OFF. (OACB)
communication Operation panel • Printer control board
abnormality display all ON. (PRCB)
•
Main body: C-6001 CCD board (CCDB) Scanner section • CCD board (CCDB)
Image process connection abnormality. stops • Overall control board
communication immediately. (OACB)
abnormality C-6002* Communication Engine section • Overall control board
abnormality between the power OFF. (OACB)
engine control of the • Printer control board
(PRCB).
While in the stand-by, a
scanner Ready signal
cannot be detected for a
K-20
Control
detached
C-6003* Communication • Overall control board
abnormality between the (OACB)
engine control of the • Printer control board
(PRCB).
Time out for the notice
time of the platen original
size.
Main body: C-6101 While in the exposure unit Scanner section • Scanner motor (M2)
Scanner initial search, the scanner stops • Scanner home sensor
abnormality home sensor (PS30) does immediately. (PS30)
not turn on within a • Printer control board
specified period of time. (PRCB)
And also, while in the
return scan, PS30 does
not turn on within a
C-6201 Exposure lamp (L1) • Exposure lamp (L1)
abnormality. • L1 inverter (L1 INVVB)
A specified period of time • Printer control board
after L1 turns on, an L1 (PRCB)
abnormality signal is
detected in succession for
Main body: C-6701 AOC abnormality. • CCD board (CCDB)
Image AOC counter overflow • Exposure lamp (L1)
processing • L1 inverter (L1 INVVB)
abnormality • Scanner motor (M2)
• Overall control board
(OACB)
C-6702 AGC abnormality. • CCD board (CCDB)
AGC counter overflow • Exposure lamp (L1)
• L1 inverter (L1 INVVB)
• Scanner motor (M2)
• Overall control board
(OACB)
DF: C-8001 DF control board (DFCB) The main body • DF control board DipSW19-7 DF mode is
Communication communication stops (DFCB) unavailable
abnormality abnormality. immediately to • Printer control board (DF
Communication turn OFF the (PRCB) connection
abnormality between the main relay is not
printer control board (RL1). recognized)
(PRCB) and DFCB.
DF: Fan lock C-8301 Cooling fan (FM3) • Cooling fan (FM3)
abnormality abnormality. • DF control board
(DFCB)
FAX: FAX board C-B001 FAX ROM checksum error FAX breakdown FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
abnormality is
unavailable
C-B002 A FAX board hardware FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
error is detected. is
unavailable
C-B003 A FAX file initialization FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
abnormality is detected. is
unavailable
FAX: FAX driver C-B110 Instance generation error FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
error or an observer registration is
error unavailable
C-B111 Initialization failure of the FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
configuration space is
unavailable
C-B112 A semaphore is obtained; FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
release error is
unavailable
C-B113 Sequence error between FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
the tasks on the main body is
side. unavailable
K-21
Control
detached
C-B114 Message queue control FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
error is
unavailable
C-B115 Sequence error between FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
the main body and the is
FAX board unavailable
C-B116 FAX board no response FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
(no response after is
initialization) unavailable
C-B117 Time out error for ACK FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
standby is
unavailable
C-B118 Undefined frame reception FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
is
unavailable
C-B119 DMA transfer error FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
is
unavailable
FAX: JC C-B120 JC software error FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
is
unavailable
C-B122 Device error (GA LOCAL FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
SRAM) is
unavailable
C-B123 Device error (DRAM) FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
is
unavailable
C-B125 Device error (GA) FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
is
unavailable
C-B126 While in the interruption FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
processing, there occurs a is
time out error due to no unavailable
response from DC.
response from CC.
response from Line.
response from the File
system/File Driver.
FAX: MIF C-B130 Driver software error FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
software error is
unavailable
C-B131 Length error of the frame FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
received from the main is
side. unavailable
C-B132 Header error of the frame FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
receive from the main side. is
unavailable
C-B133 232C I/F sequence error FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
is
unavailable
C-B134 DPRAM I/F sequence FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
error is
unavailable
C-B135 DPRAM CTL/STS register FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
abnormality. is
unavailable
C-B136 Time out for ACK standby FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
is
unavailable
K-22
Control
detached
C-B137 DPRAM RESET received FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
is
unavailable
C-B140 MSG I/F error with JC FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
is
unavailable
C-B141 I/F error with driver FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
is
unavailable
FAX: I/F error C-B142 Undefined command FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
received is
unavailable
C-B143 Command frame length FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
error is
unavailable
C-B144 Command parameter FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
length error is
unavailable
C-B145 Undefined parameter FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
is
unavailable
C-B146 Command/response FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
sequence error is
unavailable
FAX: Line C-B150 External class instance FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
control acquisition error is
unavailable
C-B151 Job start-up error (start-up FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
JOB parameter/slave job is
generation error) unavailable
C-B152 Doc access error (report FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
Buf access error) is
unavailable
C-B153 Time out for a response FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
from the external task is
unavailable
C-B154 Internal Que table control FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
error (create/enque/deque) is
unavailable
FAX: 1 C-B160 Instance generation error FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
destination is
control unavailable
C-B161 Time out error FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
is
unavailable
C-B162 Interface error FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
is
unavailable
C-B163 Message queue control FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
error is
unavailable
C-B164 A semaphore is obtained: FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
release error. is
unavailable
C-B165 Observer registration error FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
is
unavailable
C-B166 Incoming resource check FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
error is
unavailable
C-B167 Outgoing image FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
information expansion is
error unavailable
C-B168 Incoming image FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
serialization error is
unavailable
K-23
Control
detached
C-B169 Quick memory data FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
access error is
unavailable
FAX: Page C-B170 Internal Que table control FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
control error (create/enque/deque) is
unavailable
C-B171 Instance generation error FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
is
unavailable
C-B172 Time out error FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
is
unavailable
C-B173 Interface error FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
is
unavailable
C-B174 A semaphore is obtained: FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
release error. is
unavailable
C-B175 Observer registration error FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
is
unavailable
C-B176 TTI area cannot be FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
secured. is
unavailable
C-B177 Error return from FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
TTI_Rasterizer is
unavailable
C-B178 Incoming Job generation FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
error is
unavailable
C-B180 Quick transfer memory FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
data access error is
unavailable
C-B181 Block Buff acquisition error FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
is
unavailable
C-B182 Outgoing block image FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
error (Req, Restore) is
unavailable
C-B183 Incoming block image FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
error (Req, Store) is
unavailable
C-B184 Incoming image FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
information storage error is
unavailable
C-B185 Incoming data size logic FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
error (The incoming data is is
not a multiple number of unavailable
DotLine.
C-B186 Image Buff acquisition FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
(alloc) error is
unavailable
C-B187 Error return from FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
Compressor is
unavailable
C-B188 Band Buff control error FK-502 DipSW19-1 FAX mode
(new Instance/get/free) is
unavailable
ISW: Operation C-C103 While in the completion of Engine section Overall control board
panel the reception from the power OFF. (OACB)
communication control of the operation
abnormality panel, either of the
following is detected or
after starting the
transmission, the
transmission cannot be
completed within a
K-24
Control
detached
•Data checksum error
•Communication GA
generates an error vector.
ISW: Machine C-C181 The machine type Overall control board
type detection mentioned in the software (OACB)
abnormality is different from the
machine type information
given on the main body
drive board.
ISW: Flash ROM C-C182 A flash ROM checksum Overall control board
abnormality error of the image control (OACB)
board is detected.
ISW: Software C-C183 The machine type Overall control board
abnormality mentioned in the software (OACB)
is different between the
overall control and the
image control.
ISW: Link error C-C190 Link error (AP0) occurs at • Overall control board
caused at the the start (OACB)
start • Extension memory
(UK-202)
C-C191 Link error (AP1) occurs at • Overall control board
the start (OACB)
• Extension memory
(UK-202)
the start (OACB)
(UK-202)
the start (OACB)
(UK-202)
the start (OACB)
(UK-202)
C-C1A0 Link error (LDR) occurs at • Overall control board
the start (OACB)
(UK-202)
C-C1A1 Link error (IBR) occurs at • Overall control board
the start (OACB)
(UK-202)
C-C1A2 Link error (IID) occurs at • Overall control board
the start (OACB)
(UK-202)
C-C1A3 Link error (IPF) occurs at • Overall control board
the start (OACB)
(UK-202)
C-C1A4 Link error (IMY) occurs at • Overall control board
the start (OACB)
(UK-202)
Main body: Non- C-C284 Non-volatile memory It stops • Overall control board
volatile memory abnormality *1 immediately. (OACB)
abnormality • NVRAM board (NRB)
C-C285 Non-volatile memory • Overall control board
abnormality *1 (OACB)
• NVRAM board (NRB)
K-25
Control
detached
destruction (OACB)
Disabled writing is • NVRAM board (NRB)
detected in the head
protect area of non-volatile
memory map.
Main body: HDD C-D001 HDD initialization Engine section HD-509 DipSW19-3 HDD is
abnormality. power OFF. unavailable
(HD-509 is
not
connected)
C-D002 JOB RAM retention HD-509 DipSW19-3 HDD is
abnormality. unavailable
(HD-509 is
not
connected)
C-D005 In case when HDD is HD-509
removed after activating i-
Option function or in case
when the function does not
work properly as the
setting has been changed
to HDD unmounted.
Main body: Fan C-D201 CPU cooling fan (FM11) The main body • Overall control board
lock abnormality abnormality. stops (OACB)
immediately to • CPU cooling fan (FM11)
Main body: C-D202 Memory access turn OFF the • Overall control board
operation control abnormality. main relay (OACB)
abnormality The standard memory size (RL1). • Standard memory
is smaller than the (DIMM)
specified size.
Main body: C-D203 Communication • Overall control board
abnormality main body control board • Printer control board
and the printer control (PRCB)
board.
Main body: Fan C-D281 Overall control board • Overall control board
lock abnormality cooling fan (FM10) (OACB)
abnormality. • Overall control board
cooling fan (FM10)
Main body: C-D282* Communication • Overall control board
abnormality overall control board • Printer control board
(OACB) and the printer (PRCB)
control board (PRCB).
When the power switch
(SW2) turns on, there is no
PRCB response.
Main body: C-D301 Checksum abnormality of Engine section • Overall control board
Operation CF card. power OFF. (OACB)
control • CF card (CF)
abnormality C-D302 Administration data of CF • Overall control board
card is deleted. (OACB)
• CF card (CF)
C-D303 CF lock password • Overall control board
abnormality. (OACB)
• CF card (CF)
C-Dxxx Non-volatile memory Engine section • Overall control board
except for abnormality power OFF. (OACB)
the above NOTE • NVRAM board (NRB)
•When C-D354, C-D355,
C-D359, or C-D35A
occurs, conduct [Service
mode] → [System2] →
[Trouble Reset] →
[Counter Recovery].
K-26
Control
detached
C-D401 Security kit abnormality. Engine section • Overall control board
power OFF. (OACB)
• CF card (CF)
C-D501 Hush check of system • Overall control board
control ROM abnormality. (OACB)
• CF card (CF)
Main body: C-D601 In case when the • Overall control board
Other extension memory is not (OACB)
mounted while the image • Extension memory
panel /Web browser is (UK-202)
enabled.
In case when the
extension memory is not
mounted while the PDF
cryptogram /PDF comment
insert function is enabled.
n case when the extension
memory is not mounted
while the my panel /my
address is enabled.
Main body: C-E001 Message queue Overall control board
System control abnormality. (OACB)
communication C-E002 Incorrect parameters of the Overall control board
abnormality message and the method (OACB)
C-E003 Incorrect task Overall control board
(OACB)
C-E004 Incorrect event Overall control board
(OACB)
C-E005 Memory access Overall control board
abnormality. (OACB)
C-E006 Header access Overall control board
abnormality. (OACB)
C-E007 DIMM initialization Overall control board
abnormality. (OACB)
C-E081 DRAM initialization Overall control board
abnormality. (OACB)
C-E082* Image abnormality. If there is a Overall control board
Image processing sheet of paper (OACB)
abnormality on the overall being printed,
control side the main body
completes the
paper exit to
stop operations.
The main relay
(RL1) turns OFF.
C-E083* Copy sequence Engine section Overall control board
abnormality. power OFF. (OACB)
Job object pointer
abnormality (For some
reason, the acquisition of
the page management
object is unavailable.)
C-E084* Copy sequence Overall control board
abnormality. (OACB)
Memory copy sequence
abnormality (the one the
cause of which cannot be
identified.)
abnormality. (OACB)
Through copy sequence
(FCOT) abnormality (the
one that the cause of
which cannot be
identified.)
K-27
Control
detached
abnormality. (OACB)
The memory scanner stop
is not completed. (A stop
completion notice is not
sent from the engine side.)
abnormality. (OACB)
The memory printer stop is
not completed. (A stop
completion notice is not
sent from the engine side.)
C-E088* Unrecoverable error (The Overall control board
count is made by C-5402.) (OACB)
An error occurs when the
timer is set.
timer is cancelled.
C-E08A* Unrecoverable error (The Overall control board
An abnormal operation
occurs when an interrupt
copy is made (printer user
job).
C-E08B* Unrecoverable error (The Overall control board
copy is made (printer job
0).
C-E08C Unrecoverable error (The Overall control board
copy is made (printer job
1).
C-E08D* Unrecoverable error (The Overall control board
copy is made (FCOT print
user job).
C-E08E* Unrecoverable error (The Overall control board
copy is made (FCOT print
job).
C-E08F* Unrecoverable error (The Overall control board
copy is made (copy print
user job).
job 0).
job 1).
K-28
Control
detached
task 0 is deleted with the
queue 1 generation not
allowed.
queue 0 is deleted with the
queue 1 generation not
allowed.
queue n is deleted with the
task n generation not
allowed.
task 0 is deleted with the
task 1 generation not
allowed.
queue 0 is deleted with the
task 1 generation not
allowed.
task n is started.
task n is deleted.
queue n is deleted.
C-E09A* Unrecoverable error (The Overall control board
A scheduling abnormality
occurs when the FAX print
cannot be started due to a
memory shortage (queue
operation abnormality).
C-E09B* Unrecoverable error (The Overall control board
A scheduling abnormality
occurs when the FAX print
cannot be started due to a
memory shortage
(message transmission
error).
C-E09C* Unrecoverable error (The Overall control board
A printer scheduling
abnormality occurs due to
memory being full
(message transmission
error)
C-E09E* Unrecoverable error (The Overall control board
copy is made (scanner
scan user job).
K-29
Control
detached
C-E09F* Unrecoverable error (The Overall control board
mixed original scan job 0).
C-E0A0* Unrecoverable error (The Overall control board
copy is made (scanner z-
folding scan job 0).
normal scan job 0).
scan job 1).
copy is made (FAX scan
user job).
copy is made (FAX mixed
original scan job 0).
copy is made (FAX z-
copy is made (FAX normal
scan job 0).
copy is made (FAX scan
job 1).
copy is made (FCOT scan
user job).
copy is made (FCOT scan
job).
K-30
Control
detached
C-E0AA* Unrecoverable error (The Overall control board
copy is made (copy scan
user job).
C-E0AB* Unrecoverable error (The Overall control board
copy is made (copy mixed
original scan job 0).
C-E0AC* Unrecoverable error (The Overall control board
copy is made (copy z-
C-E0AD* Unrecoverable error (The Overall control board
copy is made (copy normal
scan job 0).
C-E0AE* Unrecoverable error (The Overall control board
copy is made (copy scan
job 1).
C-E0AF* Unrecoverable error (The Overall control board
A SUSPEND occurs.
C-E0B0* Unrecoverable error (The Overall control board
An EXCEPTION occurs.
C-E0B1 Unrecoverable error (The Overall control board
Putting Job parameter
error.
Main body: IGC C-FA50 DB error Overall control board
control error (OACB)
C-FA51 IGC inside error Overall control board
(OACB)
*1 NVRAM board (NRB) error code display priority
When two or more error codes related to NRB occur at the same time, a code with the highest precedence is displayed according to the
priorities shown below.
1. C-C287 → 2. C-C288 → 3. C-C286 → 4. C-C284 → 5. C-C285
2.2 Function to detach defective sections

For setting of DipSW that is specified for the following items, it is possible to use them with a failed section separated. After setting DipSW,
however, no abnormality detection is made on the separated section.
Note
• This function is employed to make temporary use of sections that are not affected. So, be sure that this is limited only to a
provisional use until a defective section is repaired.
(1) DIPSW setting

Turning the main power switch (SW1) OFF and ON after setting the specified software DipSW bit allows you to make a limited use of it until
the bit setting is released next time.
Classification Malfunction code Causes Control while detached DipSW
Main body C-0201 Paper lift motor /1 Paper feed in tray 1 is DipSW18-0
(M7)abnormality unavailable (There
remains no paper, and on
the operation panel, the
tray 1 is displayed in
hatching.)
K-31
C-0202 Paper lift motor /2 Paper feed in tray 2 is DipSW18-1

(M8)abnormality unavailable
(There remains no paper,
and on the operation
panel, the tray 2 is
displayed in hatching.)
PC-206 C-0203 Paper lift motor /3 (M124) Paper feed in tray 3 is DipSW18-4
abnormality unavailable
C-0204 Paper lift motor /4 (M125) Paper feed in tray 4 is DipSW18-5
LU C-0205 Paper lift motor (M151) Paper feed in LU is DipSW18-6
panel, LU is displayed in
hatching.)
PC-407 C-0206 Paper lift motor (M5) Paper feed in tray 3 is DipSW18-4
Shift motor (M4) (There remains no paper,
abnormality and on the operation
Shift gate motor (M3) panel, the tray 3 is
abnormality displayed in hatching.)
FK C-B001 to B188 FK-502 abnormality FAX mode is unavailable DipSW19-1
HDD C-D001 to D002 HD-509 abnormality HDD is unavailable DipSW19-3
(HD-509 is not connected)
DF C-8001 DF communication DF mode is unavailable DipSW19-7
abnormality (DF connection is not
recognized)
SD C-1109 to 1115 SD drive abnormality SD is unavailable DipSW20-5
(SD connection is not
recognized)
2.3 C-0201
Code
C-0201
Classification
Main body: Drive
Cause
The upper limit sensor /1 (PS6) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the paper lift motor /1 (M7) turns ON.
Measures to take when alert occurs
The main body stops immediately to turn OFF the main relay (RL1).
Estimated abnormal parts
• Upper limit sensor /1 (PS6)
• Printer control board (PRCB)
Correction
Turn OFF/ON the power switch (SW2) of the main body when releasing an abnormal condition.
Note
• The message "Contact the service" is displayed on the touch panel.
Solution
Trouble isolation function DIPSW
DipSW18-0
Control of the trouble isolation function
Paper feed in tray 1 is unavailable
(There remains no paper, and on the operation panel, the tray 1 is displayed in hatching.)
2.4 C-0202
Code
C-0202
Classification
Main body: Drive
Cause
K-32

• Paper lift motor /2 (M8)
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW18-1
2.5 C-0203
Code
C-0203
Classification
PC-206: Drive
Cause
• PC control board (PCCB)
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW18-4
2.6 C-0204
Code
C-0204
Classification
PC-206: Drive
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW18-5
2.7 C-0205
Code
C-0205
Classification
LU: Drive
Cause
The upper limit sensor (PS152) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the paper lift motor (M151) turns ON.
K-33

• Paper lift motor (M151)
• Upper limit sensor (PS152)
• LU drive board (LTDB)
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW18-6
Paper feed in LU is unavailable
(There remains no paper, and on the operation panel, LU is displayed in hatching.)
2.8 C-0206
Code
C-0206
Classification
PC-407: Drive
Cause
Paper lift motor (M5) abnormality.
Shift motor (M4) abnormality.
Shift gate motor (M3) abnormality.
• Paper lift motor (M5)
• Shift motor (M4)
• Shift gate motor (M3)
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW18-4
2.9 C-0207
Code
C-0207
Classification
Bypass: Drive
Cause
While in the paper feed, there occurs a condition twice in succession in which the lift sensor (PS23) does not turn ON within a specified
period of time after the pick-up solenoid /BP (SD1) turns ON.
While in the power switch (SW2) ON, there occurs a condition twice in succession in which PS23 does not turn OFF within a specified
period of time after SD1 turns ON.
• Pick-up solenoid /BP (SD1)
• Lift sensor (PS23)
• Feed motor (M9)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.10 C-0301
Code
C-0301
Classification
Main body: Fan abnormality
K-34
Cause
Conveyance suction fan (FM5) abnormality.
• Conveyance suction fan (FM5)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.11 C-1001
Code
C-1001*
Classification
Main body: Communication abnormality
Cause
Communication abnormality between the engine control of the overall control board (OACB) and that of the printer control board (PRCB).
While in the stand-by, an FS Ready signal cannot be detected for a specified period of time.
• Overall control board (OACB)
Correction
Note
• The message "Turn off the power and turn it on again" is displayed on the touch panel.
Solution
2.12 C-1002
Code
C-1002
Classification
FS: FS
Cause
FS communication abnormality.
A serial communication is unavailable between the FS control board (FSCB) and the printer control board (PRCB).
• FS control board (FSCB)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.13 C-1003
Code
C-1003
Classification
FS: FS-522
Cause
Flash ROM abnormality.
A checksum error of the flash ROM is detected.
Correction
K-35
Note
Solution
2.14 C-1101
Code
C-1101
Classification
FS: FS-523
Cause
Shift motor (M8) drive abnormality.
•When starting the home position movement, the shift home sensor (PS10) does not turn ON a specified period of time after M8 turns ON.
•When starting the shift position movement, PS10 does not turn OFF a specified period of time after M8 turns ON.
• Shift motor (M8)
• Shift home sensor (PS10)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.15 C-1102
Code
C-1102
Classification
FS: FS-522
Cause
Tray lift motor (M11) drive abnormality.
•While in the main tray up drive, the upper limit sensor (PS15) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after M11 turns ON.
•While in the main tray down drive, the lock signal of M11 is detected.
•While in the main tray down drive, it does not reach the target position within specified time.
• Tray lift motor (M11)
• Upper limit sensor (PS15)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.16 C-1102
Code
C-1102
Classification
FS: FS-523
Cause
Tray lift motor (M7) drive abnormality.
•While in the main tray up drive, the main tray upper limit sensor (PS19) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after M7 turns
ON.
•While in the main tray down drive, the lock signal of M7 is detected.
•While in the M7 ON, the main tray upper limit switch (SW2) or the main tray lower limit switch (SW3) turns ON.
• Tray lift motor (M7)
• Main tray upper limit sensor (PS19)
Correction
K-36
Note
Solution
2.17 C-1103
Code
C-1103
Classification
FS: FS-522
Cause
Alignment motor /Rr (M4) drive abnormality.
•While in the alignment home position search, the alignment home sensor (PS6) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after
M4 turns ON.
•While in the alignment operation, PS6 does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after M4 turns ON.
• Alignment motor /Rr (M4)
• Alignment sensor /Rr (PS6)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.18 C-1103
Code
C-1103
Classification
FS: FS-523
Cause
Alignment motor (M5) drive abnormality.
•While in the alignment home position search, the alignment home sensor (PS9) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after
M5 turns ON.
•While in the alignment operation, PS9 does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after M5 turns ON.
• Alignment motor (M5)
• Alignment home sensor (PS9)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.19 C-1104
Code
C-1104
Classification
FS: FS-522
Cause
Exit roller release motor (M6) drive abnormality.
•When starting the pressure position drive, the exit roller home sensor (PS12) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after M6
turns ON.
•When starting the separation position drive, PS12 does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after M6 turns ON.
• Exit roller release motor (M6)
• Exit roller home sensor (PS12)
Correction
K-37
Note
Solution
2.20 C-1104
Code
C-1104
Classification
FS: FS-523
Cause
Paper exit roller release motor (M13) drive abnormality.
•When starting the pressure position drive, the exit roller home sensor (PS13) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after M13
turns ON.
• Paper exit roller release motor (M13)
• Exit roller home sensor (PS13)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.21 C-1105
Code
C-1105
Classification
FS: FS-523
Cause
Intermediate conveyance roller release motor (M12) drive abnormality.
•When starting the pressure position drive, the roller release home sensor (PS12) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after
M12 turns ON.
• Intermediate conveyance roller release motor (M12)
• Roller release home sensor (PS12)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.22 C-1106
Code
C-1106
Classification
FS: FS-522
Cause
Stapler movement motor (M7) drive abnormality.
•While in the home position search, the stapler home sensor (PS10) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after M7 turns ON.
•While in the 1-staple position movement, PS10 does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after M7 turns ON.
• Stapler movement motor (M7)
• Stapler home sensor (PS10)
Correction
K-38
Note
Solution
2.23 C-1106
Code
C-1106
Classification
FS: FS-523
Cause
Stapler movement motor (M6) drive abnormality.
•While in the home position search, the stapler home sensor (PS14) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after M6 turns ON.
•While in the 1-staple position movement, PS14 does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after M6 turns ON.
• Stapler movement motor (M6)
• Stapler home sensor (PS14)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.24 C-1107
Code
C-1107
Classification
FS: FS-523
Cause
Stapler motor /Fr (M17) drive abnormality.
•The stapler home sensor /Fr (PS25) does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after M17 turns ON.
•PS25 does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the OFF of PS25 is detected.
•PS25 does not turn ON within a specified period of time after M17 turns ON for reverse rotation.
• Stapler motor /Fr (M17)
• Stapler home sensor /Fr (PS25)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.25 C-1108
Code
C-1108
Classification
FS: FS-522
Cause
Stapler drive failure.
•Staple motor does not move from home position within specified time from start of staple driving.
•Staple motor does not reach the home position within specified time from start of staple reverse driving.
• Stapling motor
Correction
Note
K-39
Solution
2.26 C-1108
Code
C-1108
Classification
FS: FS-523
Cause
Stapler motor /Rr (M16) drive abnormality.
•The stapler home sensor /Rr (PS22) does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after M16 turns ON.
•PS22 does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the OFF of PS22 is detected.
•PS22 does not turn ON within a specified period of time after M16 turns ON for reverse rotation.
• Stapler motor /Rr (M16)
• Stapler home sensor /Rr (PS22)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.27 C-1109
Code
C-1109
Classification
FS:SD
Cause
Saddle stapler motor /Fr drive abnormality.
•When the saddle stapler motor /Fr is ON, it does not get off from the home position within a specified period of time.
•After its getting off from the home position is detected, it does not get to the home position within a specified period of time.
•After the saddle stapler motor /Fr turns ON for reverse rotation, it does not get to the home position within a specified period of time.
• Saddle stapler motor /Fr
• SD control board (SDCB)
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW20-5
SD is unavailable
(SD connection is not recognized)
2.28 C-1110
Code
C-1110
Classification
FS:SD
Cause
Saddle stapler motor /Rr drive abnormality.
•When the saddle stapler motor /Rr turns ON, it does not get off from the home position within a specified period of time.
•After its getting off from the home position is detected, it does not get to the home position within a specified period of time.
•After the saddle stapler motor /Rr turns ON for reverse rotation, it does not get to the home position within a specified period of time.
• Saddle stapler motor /Rr
Correction
Note
K-40
Solution
DipSW20-5
SD is unavailable
2.29 C-1111
Code
C-1111
Classification
FS:SD
Cause
Paper guide motor (M13) drive abnormality.
•When M13 turns ON for protrusion, the paper guide home sensor (PS23) does not turn OFF within a specified period of time.
•When M13 turns ON for evacuation, PS23 does not turn ON within a specified period of time.
• Paper guide motor (M13)
• Paper guide home sensor (PS23)
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW20-5
SD is unavailable
2.30 C-1112
Code
C-1112
Classification
FS:SD
Cause
Staple guide motor (M14) drive abnormality.
•While in the home position return operation, the staple guide home sensor (PS26) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after
M14 turns ON.
•When starting a retraction operation, PS26 does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after M14 turns ON.
• Staple guide motor (M14)
• Staple guide home sensor (PS26)
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW20-5
SD is unavailable
2.31 C-1113
Code
C-1113
Classification
FS:SD
Cause
Exit open/close motor (M9) drive abnormality.
•When starting a pressure contact operation, the saddle exit home sensor (PS18) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after
M9 turns ON.
•When starting a separation operation, PS18 does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after M9 turns ON.
K-41

• Exit open/close motor (M9)
• Saddle exit home sensor (PS18)
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW20-5
SD is unavailable
2.32 C-1114
Code
C-1114
Classification
FS:SD
Cause
Folding motor (M10) drive abnormality.
The folding roller home sensor (PS22) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after M10 turns ON.
• Folding motor (M10)
• Folding roller home sensor (PS22)
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW20-5
SD is unavailable
2.33 C-1115
Code
C-1115
Classification
FS:SD
Cause
Conveyance motor (M8) drive abnormality.
•Within a specified period of time after M8 turns ON, the ON of a motor lock signal is detected for a prescribed period of time in
succession.
•A specified period of time after M8 turns OFF, the OFF of a motor lock signal is detected for a prescribed period of time in succession.
• Conveyance motor (M8)
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW20-5
SD is unavailable
2.34 C-1116
Code
C-1116
Classification
FS:FS-522
Cause
K-42
Exit roller release motor (M6) drive abnormality.

•When the shutter is closed, the shutter home sensor (PS16) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after M6 turns ON.
•When the shutter is open, PS16 does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after M6 turns ON.
• Exit roller release motor (M6)
• Shutter home sensor (PS16)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.35 C-1117
Code
C-1117
Classification
FS:FS-522
Cause
Alignment motor /Fr (M5) drive abnormality.
•While in the home position search, the alignment home sensor /Fr (PS7) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after M5 turns
ON.
•While in the home position search, PS7 does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after M5 turns ON.
• Alignment motor /Fr (M5)
• Alignment home sensor /Fr (PS7)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.36 C-1118
Code
C-1118
Classification
FS:FS-522
Cause
Exit paddle solenoid (SD2) drive abnormality.
•While in the paddle evacuation, the exit paddle home sensor (PS11) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after SD2 turns
ON.
•While in the paper hold-down operation, PS11 does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after SD turns ON.
• Exit paddle solenoid (SD2)
• Exit paddle home sensor (PS11)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.37 C-1119
Code
C-1119
Classification
FS:FS-523
Cause
Punch motor (M11) drive abnormality.
K-43
The punch encoder sensor (PS15) does not turn OFF within a specified period of time after M11 turns ON.
• Punch motor (M11)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.38 C-1120
Code
C-1120
Classification
FS:FS-523
Cause
Hole punch selector motor (M14) drive abnormality (inch system only)
•When starting the punch 2-hole position switch drive, the hole punch position switch (SW4) is not turned ON in the specified period of
time after the M14 is turned ON.
•When starting the punch 3-hole position switch drive, the SW4 is not turned OFF in the specified period of time after the M14 is turned
ON.
• Hole punch selector motor (M14)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.39 C-1121
Code
C-1121
Classification
FS:PU
Cause
Punch motor (M1) drive abnormality.
The punch position sensors /1 (PS2) and /2 (PS3) do not turn OFF within a specified period of time after M1 turns ON.
• Punch motor (M1)
• Punch position sensor /1 (PS2)
• Punch position sensor /2 (PS3)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.40 C-2001
Code
C-2001
Classification
Main body: Image process communication abnormality
Cause
Communication abnormality between the engine control of the overall control board (OACB) and that of the printer control board (PRCB)
While in the stand-by, a process Ready signal cannot be detected for a specified period of time.
K-44

Correction
Note
Solution
2.41 C-2201
Code
C-2201
Classification
Main body: Motor speed abnormality
Cause
Developing motor (M3) speed abnormality.
While M3 is ON, an EM error signal has been detected 5 times in succession within a specified period of time.
• Developing motor (M3)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.42 C-2202
Code
C-2202
Classification
Cause
Drum motor (M1) speed abnormality.
While M1 is ON, an EM error signal has been detected 5 times in succession within a specified period of time.
• Drum motor (M1)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.43 C-2301
Code
C-2301
Classification
Main body: Fan lock abnormality
Cause
Drum cooling fan (FM4) abnormality.
While FM4 is ON, an EM error signal has been detected 5 times in succession within a specified period of time.
• Drum cooling fan (FM4)
Correction
Note
Solution
K-45
2.44 C-2302
Code
C-2302
Classification
Cause
Developing suction fan motor (FM6) abnormality.
• Developing suction fan motor (FM6)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.45 C-2303
Code
C-2303
Classification
Cause
Developing cooling fan (FM7) abnormality.
• Developing cooling fan (FM7)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.46 C-2401
Code
C-2401
Classification
Main body: Abnormality around the drum
Cause
High machine inside temperature abnormality.
When the temperature around the drum is above 58°C
• TCR sensor (TCRS)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.47 C-2402
Code
C-2402
Classification
Main body: Abnormality around the drum
Cause
Erase lamp (EL) connector slip-off abnormality.
K-46
When EL turns ON before starting an initial charging, EL abnormality has been detected 15 times in succession at prescribed intervals
after a specified period of time.
• Erase lamp (EL)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.48 C-2403
Code
C-2403
Classification
Main body: Toner bottle abnormality
Cause
Toner bottle phase detection abnormality.
While in the power switch (SW2) ON, the toner bottle position sensor (PS28) does not turn ON within a specified period of time after the
toner bottle motor (M10) turns ON.
• Toner bottle motor (M10)
• Toner bottle position sensor (PS28)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.49 C-2701
Code
C-2701
Classification
Main body: High voltage power source abnormality
Cause
Charging abnormality.
An error signal is detected 5 times in succession at prescribed intervals.
If there is a sheet of paper being printed, the main body completes the paper exit to stop operations. The main relay (RL1) turns OFF.
• Charging corona
• High voltage unit (HV)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.50 C-2702
Code
C-2702
Classification
Cause
Transfer lightning abnormality.
There occurs a phenomenon 5 times in a job, in which an error signal is detected 3 times in succession at prescribed intervals.
• Transfer/separation charger
K-47

Correction
Note
Solution
2.51 C-2703
Code
C-2703
Classification
Cause
Separation lightning abnormality.
There occurs a phenomenon 5 times in a job, in which an error signal is detected 5 times in succession at prescribed intervals.
• Transfer/separation charger
Correction
Note
Solution
2.52 C-2801
Code
C-2801
Classification
Cause
TCR output abnormality.
When the TCR output is in excess of 3.0 V.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.53 C-2802
Code
C-2802
Classification
Cause
When the TCR sensor (TCRS) maximum output is 1.0 V or less.
Correction
Note
Solution
K-48

2.54 C-2803Error code 3

Code
C-2803Error code 3
Classification
Cause
When the output ripple voltage of the TCR sensor (TCRS) is 0.5 V or less.
Correction
Note
Solution

Code
C-2803Error code 4
Classification
Cause
When the output ripple voltage of TCR sensor (TCRS) is 0.02 V or less.
Correction
Note
Solution

Code
C-2803Error code 5
Classification
Cause
When the TCR sensor (TCRS) control voltage cannot be adjusted within 7.6V to 6.2V.
Correction
Note
Solution

Code
C-2803Error code 6
Classification
Cause
K-49
When the detection of the toner control patch is abnormal for the D/A check.
• IDC sensor (IDCS)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.58 C-2804
Code
C-2804
Classification
Cause
Toner density abnormality.
When the L detection output is in excess of 2.6 V before the toner remaining sensor (PZS) detects a no toner condition, toner density does
not recover even when toner is automatically supplied.
• Toner remaining sensor (PZS)
Correction
Note
1.
2.59 C-3201
Code
C-3201
Classification
Cause
Fusing motor (M11) speed abnormality.
When M11 is ON, an EM error signal is detected 30 times in succession within a specified period of time.
• Fusing motor (M11)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.60 C-3301
Code
C-3301
Classification
Cause
Fusing cooling fan /Fr (FM2) abnormality.
When FM2 is ON, an EM error signal is detected 3 times in succession within a specified period of time.
• Fusing cooling fan /Fr (FM2)
Correction
K-50
Note
Solution
2.61 C-3302
Code
C-3302
Classification
Cause
Fusing cooling fan /Rr (FM8) abnormality.
When FM8 is ON, an EM error signal is detected 3 times in succession within a specified period of time.
• Fusing cooling fan /Rr (FM8)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.62 C-3501
Code
C-3501
Classification
Main body: Fusing low temperature abnormality
Cause
Fusing main sensor high temperature abnormality.
The thermistor /1 (TH1) detects a temperature higher than 236°C for more than a specified period of time.
The main body stops immediately to turn OFF the main relay (RL1). All the keys are not taken in.
• Thermistor /1 (TH1)
• DC power supply (DCPS)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.63 C-3502
Code
C-3502
Classification
Cause
Fusing sub sensor high temperature abnormality.
The thermistor /2 (TH2) detects a temperature higher than 236°C for more than a specified period of time.
Correction
Note
Solution
K-51
2.64 C-3801
Code
C-3801
Classification
Cause
Fusing main sensor low temperature abnormality.
While in the idle or in the low power mode, the fusing heater lamp /1 (L2) turns on for more than 12 seconds in succession.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.65 C-3802
Code
C-3802
Classification
Cause
While in other than the warm-up, the thermistor /1 (TH1) detects a temperature lower than 130°C for more than 10 seconds.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.66 C-3803
Code
C-3803
Classification
Cause
The detection temperature of the thermistor /1 (TH1) does not get to the prescribed temperature within a specified period of time after it
starts the warm-up.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.67 C-3804
Code
C-3804
Classification
K-52

Cause
Fusing sub sensor low temperature abnormality.
While in the idle, the fusing heater lamp /2 (L3) turns on for more than 12 seconds in succession.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.68 C-3805
Code
C-3805
Classification
Cause
While in other than the warm-up, the thermistor /2 (TH2) detects a temperature lower than 130°C for more than 10 seconds.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.69 C-3806
Code
C-3806
Classification
Cause
The detection temperature of the thermistor /2 (TH2) does not get to the prescribed temperature within a specified period of time after it
starts the warm-up.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.70 C-3807
Code
C-3807
Classification
Cause
Fusing main sensor high temperature abnormality (sub CPU detection)
In the sub CPU, the thermistor /1 (TH1) detects a temperature higher than 236°C for more than a specified period of time.
K-53
Correction
Note
Solution
2.71 C-3808
Code
C-3808
Classification
Cause
Fusing sub sensor high temperature abnormality (sub CPU detection)
In the sub CPU, the thermistor /2 (TH2) detects a temperature higher than 236°C for more than a specified period of time.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.72 C-3901
Code
C-3901
Classification
Main body: Fusing sensor abnormality
Cause
Inferior contact of the thermistor
/1 (TH1)
While in the warm-up condition, when the thermistor /2 (TH2) detection temperature gets to the Ready temperature before the TH1
detection temperature, the TH1 detection temperature does not get to the Ready temperature a specified period of time after the TH2
detection temperature got to the Ready temperature.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.73 C-3902
Code
C-3902
Classification
Cause
Inferior contact of the thermistor
/2 (TH2)
While in the warm-up condition, when the thermistor /1 (TH1) detection temperature gets to the Ready temperature before the TH2
detection temperature, the TH2 detection temperature does not get to the Ready temperature a specified period of time after the TH1
detection temperature got to the Ready temperature.
K-54

Correction
Note
Solution
2.74 C-3903
Code
C-3903
Classification
Cause
Thermistor /1 (TH1) open abnormality (sub CPU detection)
In the sub CPU, the TH1 detection temperature detects a temperature between -8 and 20°C for more than a specified period of time.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.75 C-3904
Code
C-3904
Classification
Cause
Thermistor /2 (TH2) open abnormality (sub CPU detection)
In the sub CPU, the TH2 detection temperature detects a temperature between -8 and 20°C for more than a specified period of time.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.76 C-4001
Code
C-4001
Classification
Main body: Image processing abnormality
Cause
Index board (INDEXB) contact abnormality.
• Index board (INDEXB)
Correction
Note
Solution
K-55
2.77 C-4101
Code
C-4101
Classification
Cause
Polygon motor (M5) speed abnormality.
When M5 is ON, an error signal is detected 3 times in succession within a specified period of time.
• Polygon motor (M5)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.78 C-4401
Code
C-4401
Classification
Cause
Laser drive board (LDB) abnormality.
When an overcurrent flows for laser output.
• Laser drive board (LDB)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.79 C-4701
Code
C-4701
Classification
Cause
Laser index abnormality.
When the cycle of the index is different from an expected value.
• Index board (INDEXB)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.80 C-5001
Code
C-5001
Classification
Cause
Main body control board communication abnormality 1
K-56
Communication abnormality between the overall control board (OACB) and the scanner drive board (SDB).
• Scanner drive board (SDB)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.81 C-5002
Code
C-5002
Classification
Cause
Main body control board communication abnormality 2
Communication abnormality, incoming command abnormality, platen operation sequence abnormality to the sub CPU in the overall control
board (OACB).
Correction
Note
Solution
2.82 C-5003
Code
C-5003
Classification
Cause
Sub CPU A/D conversion abnormality.
There is no response 2 times in succession to the A/D conversion request of the overall control board (OACB).
Correction
Note
Solution
2.83 C-5301
Code
C-5301
Classification
Cause
Exhaust fan /Fr (FM3) conversion abnormality.
When FM3 is ON, an error signal is detected 5 times in succession within a specified period of time.
• Exhaust fan /Fr (FM3)
Correction
Note
K-57
Solution
2.84 C-5302
Code
C-5302
Classification
Cause
Exhaust fan /Rr (FM9) conversion abnormality.
• Exhaust fan /Rr (FM9)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.85 C-5303
Code
C-5303
Classification
Cause
Power supply cooling fan (FM1) conversion abnormality.
• Power supply cooling fan (FM1)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.86 C-5401
Code
C-5401*
Classification
Main body: OS error
Cause
There occurs an OS error with the engine control section in the printer control board (PRCB).
Engine section power OFF.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.87 C-5402
Code
C-5402*
Classification
Main body: System control communication abnormality
Cause
K-58
Time out for tuning off the power switch (SW2)

Engine section power OFF. Operation panel display all ON.
•
Correction
Note
Solution
2.88 C-6001
Code
C-6001
Classification
Cause
CCD board (CCDB) connection abnormality.
Scanner section stops immediately.
• CCD board (CCDB)
Correction
Note
Solution
1.
2.89 C-6002
Code
C-6002*
Classification
Cause
While in the stand-by, a scanner Ready signal cannot be detected for a specified period of time.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.90 C-6003
Code
C-6003*
Classification
Cause
Time out for the notice time of the platen original size.
Correction
K-59
Note
Solution
2.91 C-6101
Code
C-6101
Classification
Main body: Scanner abnormality
Cause
While in the exposure unit initial search, the scanner home sensor (PS30) does not turn on within a specified period of time. And also,
while in the return scan, PS30 does not turn on within a specified period of time.
• Scanner home sensor (PS30)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.92 C-6201
Code
C-6201
Classification
Main body: Scanner abnormality
Cause
Exposure lamp (L1) abnormality.
A specified period of time after L1 turns on, an L1 abnormality signal is detected in succession for a specified period of time.
• Exposure lamp (L1)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.93 C-6701
Code
C-6701
Classification
Cause
AOC abnormality.
AOC counter overflow
Correction
Note
Solution
K-60

2.94 C-6702
Code
C-6702
Classification
Cause
AGC abnormality.
AGC counter overflow
Correction
Note
Solution
2.95 C-8001
Code
C-8001
Classification
DF: Communication abnormality
Cause
DF control board (DFCB) communication abnormality.
Communication abnormality between the printer control board (PRCB) and DFCB.
• DF control board (DFCB)
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-7
DF mode is unavailable
(DF connection is not recognized)
2.96 C-8301
Code
C-8301
Classification
DF: Fan lock abnormality
Cause
Cooling fan (FM3) abnormality.
• Cooling fan (FM3)
• DF control board (DFCB)
Correction
Note
Solution
K-61
2.97 C-B001
Code
C-B001
Classification
FAX: FAX board abnormality
Cause
FAX ROM checksum error
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
FAX mode is unavailable
2.98 C-B002
Code
C-B002
Classification
Cause
A FAX board hardware error is detected.
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.99 C-B003
Code
C-B003
Classification
Cause
A FAX file initialization abnormality is detected.
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.100 C-B110
Code
C-B110
Classification
FAX: FAX driver error
Cause
Instance generation error or an observer registration error
FAX breakdown
K-62

• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.101 C-B111
Code
C-B111
Classification
Cause
Initialization failure of the configuration space
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.102 C-B112
Code
C-B112
Classification
Cause
A semaphore is obtained; release error
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.103 C-B113
Code
C-B113
Classification
Cause
Sequence error between the tasks on the main body side.
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
K-63
DipSW19-1
2.104 C-B114
Code
C-B114
Classification
Cause
Message queue control error
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.105 C-B115
Code
C-B115
Classification
Cause
Sequence error between the main body and the FAX board
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.106 C-B116
Code
C-B116
Classification
Cause
FAX board no response (no response after initialization)
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.107 C-B117
Code
C-B117
Classification
K-64
Cause
Time out error for ACK standby
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.108 C-B118
Code
C-B118
Classification
Cause
Undefined frame reception
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.109 C-B119
Code
C-B119
Classification
Cause
DMA transfer error
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.110 C-B120
Code
C-B120
Classification
FAX: JC
Cause
JC software error
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
K-65
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.111 C-B122
Code
C-B122
Classification
FAX: JC
Cause
Device error (GA LOCAL SRAM)
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.112 C-B123
Code
C-B123
Classification
FAX: JC
Cause
Device error (DRAM)
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.113 C-B125
Code
C-B125
Classification
FAX: JC
Cause
Device error (GA)
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
K-66
2.114 C-B126
Code
C-B126
Classification
FAX: JC
Cause
While in the interruption processing, there occurs a time out error due to no response from DC.
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.115 C-B127
Code
C-B127
Classification
FAX: JC
Cause
While in the interruption processing, there occurs a time out error due to no response from CC.
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.116 C-B128
Code
C-B128
Classification
FAX: JC
Cause
While in the interruption processing, there occurs a time out error due to no response from Line.
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.117 C-B129
Code
C-B129
Classification
FAX: JC
Cause
While in the interruption processing, there occurs a time out error due to no response from the File system/File Driver.
FAX breakdown
K-67

• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.118 C-B130
Code
C-B130
Classification
FAX: MIF software error
Cause
Driver software error
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.119 C-B131
Code
C-B131
Classification
Cause
Length error of the frame received from the main side.
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.120 C-B132
Code
C-B132
Classification
Cause
Header error of the frame receive from the main side.
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
K-68
DipSW19-1
2.121 C-B133
Code
C-B133
Classification
Cause
232C I/F sequence error
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.122 C-B134
Code
C-B134
Classification
Cause
DPRAM I/F sequence error
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.123 C-B135
Code
C-B135
Classification
Cause
DPRAM CTL/STS register abnormality.
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.124 C-B136
Code
C-B136
Classification
K-69
Cause
Time out for ACK standby
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.125 C-B137
Code
C-B137
Classification
Cause
DPRAM RESET received
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.126 C-B140
Code
C-B140
Classification
Cause
MSG I/F error with JC
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.127 C-B141
Code
C-B141
Classification
Cause
I/F error with driver
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
K-70
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.128 C-B142
Code
C-B142
Classification
FAX: I/F error
Cause
Undefined command received
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.129 C-B143
Code
C-B143
Classification
FAX: I/F error
Cause
Command frame length error
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.130 C-B144
Code
C-B144
Classification
FAX: I/F error
Cause
Command parameter length error
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
K-71
2.131 C-B145
Code
C-B145
Classification
FAX: I/F error
Cause
Undefined parameter
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.132 C-B146
Code
C-B146
Classification
FAX: I/F error
Cause
Command/response sequence error
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.133 C-B150
Code
C-B150
Classification
FAX: Line control
Cause
External class instance acquisition error
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.134 C-B151
Code
C-B151
Classification
FAX: Line control
Cause
Job start-up error (start-up JOB parameter/slave job generation error)
FAX breakdown
K-72

• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.135 C-B152
Code
C-B152
Classification
FAX: Line control
Cause
Doc access error (report Buf access error)
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.136 C-B153
Code
C-B153
Classification
FAX: Line control
Cause
Time out for a response from the external task
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.137 C-B154
Code
C-B154
Classification
FAX: Line control
Cause
Internal Que table control error (create/enque/deque)
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
K-73
DipSW19-1
2.138 C-B160
Code
C-B160
Classification
FAX: 1 destination control
Cause
Instance generation error
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.139 C-B161
Code
C-B161
Classification
Cause
Time out error
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.140 C-B162
Code
C-B162
Classification
Cause
Interface error
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.141 C-B163
Code
C-B163
Classification
K-74
Cause
Message queue control error
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.142 C-B164
Code
C-B164
Classification
Cause
A semaphore is obtained: release error.
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.143 C-B165
Code
C-B165
Classification
Cause
Observer registration error
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.144 C-B166
Code
C-B166
Classification
Cause
Incoming resource check error
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
K-75
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.145 C-B167
Code
C-B167
Classification
Cause
Outgoing image information expansion error
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.146 C-B168
Code
C-B168
Classification
Cause
Incoming image serialization error
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.147 C-B169
Code
C-B169
Classification
Cause
Quick memory data access error
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
K-76
2.148 C-B170
Code
C-B170
Classification
FAX: Page control
Cause
Internal Que table control error (create/enque/deque)
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.149 C-B171
Code
C-B171
Classification
FAX: Page control
Cause
Instance generation error
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.150 C-B172
Code
C-B172
Classification
FAX: Page control
Cause
Time out error
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.151 C-B173
Code
C-B173
Classification
FAX: Page control
Cause
Interface error
FAX breakdown
K-77

• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.152 C-B174
Code
C-B174
Classification
FAX: Page control
Cause
A semaphore is obtained: release error.
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.153 C-B175
Code
C-B175
Classification
FAX: Page control
Cause
Observer registration error
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.154 C-B176
Code
C-B176
Classification
FAX: Page control
Cause
TTI area cannot be secured.
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
K-78
DipSW19-1
2.155 C-B177
Code
C-B177
Classification
FAX: Page control
Cause
Error return from TTI_Rasterizer
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.156 C-B178
Code
C-B178
Classification
FAX: Page control
Cause
Incoming Job generation error
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.157 C-B180
Code
C-B180
Classification
FAX: Page control
Cause
Quick transfer memory data access error
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.158 C-B181
Code
C-B181
Classification
FAX: Page control
K-79
Cause
Block Buff acquisition error
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.159 C-B182
Code
C-B182
Classification
FAX: Page control
Cause
Outgoing block image error (Req, Restore)
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.160 C-B183
Code
C-B183
Classification
FAX: Page control
Cause
Incoming block image error (Req, Store)
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.161 C-B184
Code
C-B184
Classification
FAX: Page control
Cause
Incoming image information storage error
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
K-80
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.162 C-B185
Code
C-B185
Classification
FAX: Page control
Cause
Incoming data size logic error (The incoming data is not a multiple number of DotLine.
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.163 C-B186
Code
C-B186
Classification
FAX: Page control
Cause
Image Buff acquisition (alloc) error
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.164 C-B187
Code
C-B187
Classification
FAX: Page control
Cause
Error return from Compressor
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
K-81
2.165 C-B188
Code
C-B188
Classification
FAX: Page control
Cause
Band Buff control error (new Instance/get/free)
FAX breakdown
• FK-502
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-1
2.166 C-C103
Code
C-C103
Classification
ISW: Operation panel communication abnormality
Cause
While in the completion of the reception from the control of the operation panel, either of the following is detected or after starting the
transmission, the transmission cannot be completed within a specified period of time.
•Data checksum error
•Communication GA generates an error vector.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.167 C-C181
Code
C-C181
Classification
ISW: Machine type detection abnormality
Cause
The machine type mentioned in the software is different from the machine type information given on the main body drive board.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.168 C-C182
Code
C-C182
Classification
ISW: Flash ROM abnormality
Cause
A flash ROM checksum error of the image control board is detected.
K-82

Correction
Note
Solution
2.169 C-C183
Code
C-C183
Classification
ISW: Software abnormality
Cause
The machine type mentioned in the software is different between the overall control and the image control.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.170 C-C190
Code
C-C190
Classification
ISW: Link error caused at the start
Cause
Link error (AP0) occurs at the start
• Extension memory (UK-202)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.171 C-C191
Code
C-C191
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2.172 C-C192
Code
C-C192
K-83
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2.173 C-C193
Code
C-C193
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2.174 C-C194
Code
C-C194
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2.175 C-C1A0
Code
C-C1A0
Classification
Cause
Link error (LDR) occurs at the start
Correction
K-84
Note
Solution
2.176 C-C1A1
Code
C-C1A1
Classification
Cause
Link error (IBR) occurs at the start
Correction
Note
Solution
2.177 C-C1A2
Code
C-C1A2
Classification
Cause
Link error (IID) occurs at the start
Correction
Note
Solution
2.178 C-C1A3
Code
C-C1A3
Classification
Cause
Link error (IPF) occurs at the start
Correction
Note
Solution
2.179 C-C1A4
Code
C-C1A4
Classification
K-85
Cause
Link error (IMY) occurs at the start
Correction
Note
Solution
2.180 C-C284
Code
C-C284
Classification
Main body: Non-volatile memory abnormality
Cause
Non-volatile memory abnormality *1
It stops immediately.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.181 C-C285
Code
C-C285
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2.182 C-C286
Code
C-C286
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
K-86
Solution
2.183 C-C287
Code
C-C287
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2.184 C-C288
Code
C-C288
Classification
Cause
Correction
Note
Solution
2.185 C-C289
Code
C-C289
Classification
Cause
Non-volatile memory destruction
Disabled writing is detected in the head protect area of non-volatile memory map.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.186 C-D001
Code
C-D001
Classification
Main body: HDD
Cause
HDD initialization abnormality.
K-87

• HD-509
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-3
HDD is unavailable
2.187 C-D002
Code
C-D002
Classification
Main body: HDD
Cause
JOB RAM retention abnormality.
• HD-509
Correction
Note
Solution
DipSW19-3
HDD is unavailable
2.188 C-D005
Code
C-D005
Classification
Main body: HDD
Cause
In case when HDD is removed after activating i-Option function or in case when the function does not work properly as the setting has
been changed to HDD unmounted.
• HD-509
Correction
Note
Solution
2.189 C-D201
Code
C-D201
Classification
Cause
CPU cooling fan (FM11) abnormality.
• CPU cooling fan (FM11)
Correction
K-88
Note
Solution
2.190 C-D202
Code
C-D202
Classification
Main body: operation control abnormality
Cause
Memory access abnormality.
The standard memory size is smaller than the specified size.
• Standard memory (DIMM)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.191 C-D203
Code
C-D203
Classification
Cause
Communication abnormality between the main body control board and the printer control board.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.192 C-D281
Code
C-D281
Classification
Cause
Overall control board cooling fan (FM10) abnormality.
• Overall control board cooling fan (FM10)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.193 C-D282
Code
C-D282*
Classification
K-89

Cause
Communication abnormality between the overall control board (OACB) and the printer control board (PRCB).
When the power switch (SW2) turns on, there is no PRCB response.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.194 C-D301
Code
C-D301
Classification
Main body: Operation control abnormality
Cause
Checksum abnormality of CF card.
• CF card (CF)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.195 C-D302
Code
C-D302
Classification
Cause
Administration data of CF card is deleted.
• CF card (CF)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.196 C-D303
Code
C-D303
Classification
Cause
CF lock password abnormality.
• CF card (CF)
Correction
K-90
Note
Solution
2.197 C-Dxxx except for the above

Code
C-Dxxx except for the above
Classification
Cause
Non-volatile memory abnormality
NOTE
•When C-D354, C-D355, C-D359, or C-D35A occurs, conduct [Service mode] → [System2] → [Trouble Reset] → [Counter
Recovery].
Correction
Note
Solution
2.198 C-D401
Code
C-D401
Classification
Cause
Security kit abnormality.
• CF card (CF)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.199 C-D501
Code
C-D501
Classification
Cause
Hush check of system control ROM abnormality.
• CF card (CF)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.200 C-D601
Code
K-91
C-D601
Classification
Main body: Other
Cause
In case when the extension memory is not mounted while the image panel /Web browser is enabled.
In case when the extension memory is not mounted while the PDF cryptogram /PDF comment insert function is enabled.
n case when the extension memory is not mounted while the my panel /my address is enabled.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.201 C-E001
Code
C-E001
Classification
Cause
Message queue abnormality.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.202 C-E002
Code
C-E002
Classification
Cause
Incorrect parameters of the message and the method
Correction
Note
Solution
2.203 C-E003
Code
C-E003
Classification
Cause
Incorrect task
Correction
K-92
Note
Solution
2.204 C-E004
Code
C-E004
Classification
Cause
Incorrect event
Correction
Note
Solution
2.205 C-E005
Code
C-E005
Classification
Cause
Memory access abnormality.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.206 C-E006
Code
C-E006
Classification
Cause
Header access abnormality.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.207 C-E007
Code
C-E007
Classification
Cause
DIMM initialization abnormality.
K-93

Correction
Note
Solution
2.208 C-E081
Code
C-E081
Classification
Cause
DRAM initialization abnormality.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.209 C-E082
Code
C-E082*
Classification
Cause
Image abnormality.
Image processing abnormality on the overall control side
If there is a sheet of paper being printed, the main body completes the paper exit to stop operations. The main relay (RL1) turns OFF.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.210 C-E083
Code
C-E083*
Classification
Cause
Copy sequence abnormality.
Job object pointer abnormality (For some reason, the acquisition of the page management object is unavailable.)
Correction
Note
Solution
K-94
2.211 C-E084
Code
C-E084*
Classification
Cause
Memory copy sequence abnormality (the one the cause of which cannot be identified.)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.212 C-E085
Code
C-E085*
Classification
Cause
Through copy sequence (FCOT) abnormality (the one that the cause of which cannot be identified.)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.213 C-E086
Code
C-E086*
Classification
Cause
The memory scanner stop is not completed. (A stop completion notice is not sent from the engine side.)
Correction
Note
Solution
2.214 C-E087
Code
C-E087*
Classification
Cause
The memory printer stop is not completed. (A stop completion notice is not sent from the engine side.)
K-95
Correction
Note
Solution
2.215 C-E088
Code
C-E088*
Classification
Cause
Unrecoverable error (The count is made by C-5402.)
An error occurs when the timer is set.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.216 C-E089
Code
C-E089*
Classification
Cause
An error occurs when the timer is cancelled.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.217 C-E08A
Code
C-E08A*
Classification
Cause
An abnormal operation occurs when an interrupt copy is made (printer user job).
Correction
Note
Solution
2.218 C-E08B
Code
C-E08B*
K-96
Classification
Cause
An abnormal operation occurs when an interrupt copy is made (printer job 0).
Correction
Note
Solution
2.219 C-E08C
Code
C-E08C
Classification
Cause
An abnormal operation occurs when an interrupt copy is made (printer job 1).
Correction
Note
Solution
2.220 C-E08D
Code
C-E08D*
Classification
Cause
An abnormal operation occurs when an interrupt copy is made (FCOT print user job).
Correction
Note
Solution
2.221 C-E08E
Code
C-E08E*
Classification
Cause
An abnormal operation occurs when an interrupt copy is made (FCOT print job).
Correction
K-97
Note
Solution
2.222 C-E08F
Code
C-E08F*
Classification
Cause
An abnormal operation occurs when an interrupt copy is made (copy print user job).
Correction
Note
Solution
2.223 C-E090
Code
C-E090*
Classification
Cause
An abnormal operation occurs when an interrupt copy is made (copy print job 0).
Correction
Note
Solution
2.224 C-E091
Code
C-E091*
Classification
Cause
An abnormal operation occurs when an interrupt copy is made (copy print job 1).
Correction
Note
Solution
2.225 C-E092
Code
C-E092*
Classification
K-98
Cause
An error occurs when the task 0 is deleted with the queue 1 generation not allowed.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.226 C-E093
Code
C-E093*
Classification
Cause
An error occurs when the queue 0 is deleted with the queue 1 generation not allowed.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.227 C-E094
Code
C-E094*
Classification
Cause
An error occurs when the queue n is deleted with the task n generation not allowed.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.228 C-E095
Code
C-E095*
Classification
Cause
An error occurs when the task 0 is deleted with the task 1 generation not allowed.
Correction
Note
K-99
Solution
2.229 C-E096
Code
C-E096*
Classification
Cause
An error occurs when the queue 0 is deleted with the task 1 generation not allowed.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.230 C-E097
Code
C-E097*
Classification
Cause
An error occurs when the task n is started.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.231 C-E098
Code
C-E098*
Classification
Cause
An error occurs when the task n is deleted.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.232 C-E099
Code
C-E099*
Classification
Cause
An error occurs when the queue n is deleted.
K-100

Correction
Note
Solution
2.233 C-E09A
Code
C-E09A*
Classification
Cause
A scheduling abnormality occurs when the FAX print cannot be started due to a memory shortage (queue operation abnormality).
Correction
Note
Solution
2.234 C-E09B
Code
C-E09B*
Classification
Cause
A scheduling abnormality occurs when the FAX print cannot be started due to a memory shortage (message transmission error).
Correction
Note
Solution
2.235 C-E09C
Code
C-E09C*
Classification
Cause
A printer scheduling abnormality occurs due to memory being full (message transmission error)
Correction
Note
Solution
K-101
2.236 C-E09E
Code
C-E09E*
Classification
Cause
An abnormal operation occurs when an interrupt copy is made (scanner scan user job).
Correction
Note
Solution
2.237 C-E09F
Code
C-E09F*
Classification
Cause
An abnormal operation occurs when an interrupt copy is made (scanner mixed original scan job 0).
Correction
Note
Solution
2.238 C-E0A0
Code
C-E0A0*
Classification
Cause
An abnormal operation occurs when an interrupt copy is made (scanner z-folding scan job 0).
Correction
Note
Solution
2.239 C-E0A1
Code
C-E0A1*
Classification
Cause
An abnormal operation occurs when an interrupt copy is made (scanner normal scan job 0).
K-102

Correction
Note
Solution
2.240 C-E0A2
Code
C-E0A2*
Classification
Cause
An abnormal operation occurs when an interrupt copy is made (scanner scan job 1).
Correction
Note
Solution
2.241 C-E0A3
Code
C-E0A3*
Classification
Cause
An abnormal operation occurs when an interrupt copy is made (FAX scan user job).
Correction
Note
Solution
2.242 C-E0A4
Code
C-E0A4*
Classification
Cause
An abnormal operation occurs when an interrupt copy is made (FAX mixed original scan job 0).
Correction
Note
Solution
2.243 C-E0A5
Code
K-103
C-E0A5*
Classification
Cause
An abnormal operation occurs when an interrupt copy is made (FAX z-folding scan job 0).
Correction
Note
Solution
2.244 C-E0A6
Code
C-E0A6*
Classification
Cause
An abnormal operation occurs when an interrupt copy is made (FAX normal scan job 0).
Correction
Note
Solution
2.245 C-E0A7
Code
C-E0A7*
Classification
Cause
An abnormal operation occurs when an interrupt copy is made (FAX scan job 1).
Correction
Note
Solution
2.246 C-E0A8
Code
C-E0A8*
Classification
Cause
An abnormal operation occurs when an interrupt copy is made (FCOT scan user job).
Correction
K-104
Note
Solution
2.247 C-E0A9
Code
C-E0A9*
Classification
Cause
An abnormal operation occurs when an interrupt copy is made (FCOT scan job).
Correction
Note
Solution
2.248 C-E0AA
Code
C-E0AA*
Classification
Cause
An abnormal operation occurs when an interrupt copy is made (copy scan user job).
Correction
Note
Solution
2.249 C-E0AB
Code
C-E0AB*
Classification
Cause
An abnormal operation occurs when an interrupt copy is made (copy mixed original scan job 0).
Correction
Note
Solution
2.250 C-E0AC
Code
C-E0AC*
Classification
K-105
Cause
An abnormal operation occurs when an interrupt copy is made (copy z-folding scan job 0).
Correction
Note
Solution
2.251 C-E0AD
Code
C-E0AD*
Classification
Cause
An abnormal operation occurs when an interrupt copy is made (copy normal scan job 0).
Correction
Note
Solution
2.252 C-E0AE
Code
C-E0AE*
Classification
Cause
An abnormal operation occurs when an interrupt copy is made (copy scan job 1).
Correction
Note
Solution
2.253 C-E0AF
Code
C-E0AF*
Classification
Cause
A SUSPEND occurs.
Correction
Note
K-106
Solution
2.254 C-E0B0
Code
C-E0B0*
Classification
Cause
An EXCEPTION occurs.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.255 C-E0B1
Code
C-E0B1
Classification
Cause
Putting Job parameter error.
Correction
Note
Solution
2.256 C-FA50
Code
C-FA50
Classification
Main body: IGC control error
Cause
DB error
Correction
Note
Solution
2.257 C-FA51
Code
C-FA51
Classification
Main body: IGC control error
Cause
IGC inside error
K-107

Correction
Note
Solution
K-108
bizhub 501/421/361 K TROUBLESHOOTING > 3. TROUBLESHOOTING (IC-207)
3. TROUBLESHOOTING (IC-207)
3.1 Toubleshooting the printing system
3.1.1 Toubleshooting the printing system
This table lists information about the symptoms, possible causes, and remedies for problems that may occur with the printing system
(combination of the print controller and copier). It is intended to help engineers find information as quickly as possible, and provide basic
solutions.
CAUTION
• See the “Copier Service Manual” for information about Error Cord List.
3.1.2 Troubleshooting of the print controller and copier

Symptoms Causes Actions
“Warming up” does not disappear. Copier is in trouble. Locate the cause of trouble of the copier.
Printout is defective, or nothing can be The system board or some boards of the Put the copier in service mode and perform
printed. copier are defective. test. If it operates properly, system board may
be failure.
Print controller does not start. The printer key control board is inactive. Check the connector of the controller board.
Or printer key control board is not installed. Replace the system board as necessary.
Software of the print controller is defective. Reinstall the software of the print controller.
Test print can be produced but not from the There is no USB port installed. Check the cables (internal/external). Perform
USB port. (Because of the USB being optional) test using a data generator or a well-proven
The USB port has something wrong or the PC/I/O cable. Replace the system board as
cable is wrong or, the problem is on the necessary.
computer side.
Test print can be produced and all ports are Some software error has happened. Print controller's software or application
good, but user jobs cannot be printed. program has something wrong. Save the file,
which failed to be printed, in the disk and
analyze the problem by suitable means.
3.2 Data Capture

If any fault is caused in relation with the printer, acquire the print job data for the fault analysis.
Capture data of up to 5 jobs can be saved. When new data is saved, oldest one is deleted.
CAUTION
• To enable this function, following conditions should be met.
• Hard disk should have been installed in the main body printer (copier).
• [Administrator Settings] - [Security Settings] - [Security Details] - [Print Data Capture] should be set to [Allow].
• [Administrator Settings] - [Network Settings] - [FTP Settings] - [FTP Server Settings] should be set to [ON].
1. Activate the service mode.
(Refer to I.4.2 Setting Method)
2. Press [System2] - [Data Capture] and select [ON]. Selecting [ON]
saves the job data transmitted from PC in the copier hard disk.
3. Confirm the IP address of the copier.
4. Connect the Windows PC and copier with the Ethernet cable.
5. Activate the command prompt, specify the IP address of the copier
and activate the FTP.
K-109
6. Enter User and Password.

• User: capture
• Password: sysadm
7. Display the list of files which can be captured with the [ls] or [dir]
command.
K-110
8. Set the file transfer mode to binary transfer with the [binary]
command.
9. Transfer the data to be captured to PC with the [get] or [mget]

command.
10. Exit from the command prompt.
Note
• If you set [Administrator Settings] - [Security Settings] -
[Security Details] - [Print Data Capture] to [Restrict] after
acquiring the capture data, the job data saved in the hard
disk will be deleted.
K-111
K TROUBLESHOOTING > 4. TROUBLESHOOTING (i-Option
bizhub 501/421/361 LK-101/102/103)
4. TROUBLESHOOTING (i-Option LK-101/102/103)

4.1 Outline
4.1.1 Structure of license management
• The functions available with i-Option can be activated by entering "License code" to the MFP.
• License code is issued and controlled by License Management System (LMS).
To prevent unauthorized use of the license code, each MFP is identified individually so that the license code cannot be activated unless it
matches with the authorized MFP.
4.1.2 License management information

• Since license code needs to identify each MFP, it is issued using the serial number of MFP and "unique value" that is generated inside MFP.
• The "unique value" is stored to the NVRAM board on the overall control board and at the same time some parts of it are memorized by CF
card. The activated function cannot be used unless the both figures conform.
Since these figures are out of target of NVRAM data back, when any trouble occurs at either nonvolatile memory or either of them is
replaced with new one, "license management error" is generated due to discordance of the figures.
4.2 Error message

4.2.1 License management error
(1)
• When abnormal value is detected in the license management information that is stored to the NVRAM board or CF card, or some values
are detected cleared, warning is issued to let the user know the abnormality.
• The abnormality is detected at the timing of start-up or restart due to any condition.
• When the abnormality is detected, the corresponding i-Option function cannot be used, other ordinal functions, however, such as copy,
scanning, print or etc., can be used without interruption.
(a) Example of error message
License management error occurred.
A0PDF4E502DA
(b) Main reasons of trouble

• The following shows the possible trouble factors and their countermeasure.
Board replacement Countermeasure
• When NVRAM board on overall control board is replaced with Repair => Activation
new one.
• When CF card is replaced with new one. Repair
• When NVRAM board and CF card are replaced with the new Initialize => Activation
ones at the same time.
• When mounting the NVRAM board of the machine whose Initialize => Activation
function(s) have already been activated.
• When mounting the CF card of the machine whose function(s) Initialize => Activation
have already been activated.
• When mounting the NVRAM board and the CF card of the Initialize => Activation
machine whose function(s) have already been activated.
(c) List of processing performed when boards of another machine are remounted during board replacement
procedure
• Remounting boards of machine B on machine A
Machine A Machine B Remarks:
Request code is not generated in Request code is generated in machine B Specific cases of machine A
machine B
(same as new board)
NVRAM CF card both NVRAM CF card both
K-112
K TROUBLESHOOTING > 4. TROUBLESHOOTING (i-Option
bizhub 501/421/361 LK-101/102/103)
Request code is no action no action no action Initialize Initialize Initialize • The firmware for i-Option is
not generated. *1 installed to the non i-Option
machine but the request
code is not generated.
Request code is Initialize Initialize no action Initialize Initialize Initialize • The firmware for i-Option is
generated. *1 installed to the machine
Request code is shipped as a non i-Option
not registered in machine and the request
LMS. code is generated.
Request code is Restore Restore Initialize Initialize Initialize Initialize • The machine is shipped as
generated. *1 an i-Option machine.
Request code is
registered in LMS.
*1: The following are the prerequisites;
The settings (serial number, etc.) of the i-Option machine, on which the boards are remounted, differ from those of the i-Option machine,
from which the boards are removed.
K-113
L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 1. PARTS LAYOUT
bizhub 501/421/361 DRAWING
L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

1. PARTS LAYOUT DRAWING
1.1 bizhub 501/421/361
1.1.1 Main body rear side (Switch/sensor)(Main body)
[4]
[3] [1] [2]
50gaf5c017na
[1] Toner bottle sensor (PS4) [2] Toner bottle position sensor (PS28)
[3] Humidity sensor (HUMS) [4] Toner remaining sensor (PZS)
1.1.2 Main body front side (Switch/sensor)
[1]
[3]
[2]
a0r5f5c001ca
[1] Power switch (SW2) [2] Interlock switch (MS)

[3] Main power switch (SW1) -
1.1.3 Main body upper surface (Switch/sensor)
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
a0r5f5c002ca
[1] APS timing sensor (PS31) [2] APS sensor (PS32)
L-1
[3] DF open/close switch (SW3) [4] Scanner home sensor (PS30)
1.1.4 Developing section (Switch/sensor)
[1]
50gaf5c020na
[1] TCR sensor (TCRS) -
1.1.5 Tray1 (Switch/sensor)

[5] [6] [1]
[2]
[4]
[3] 50gaf5c034na
[1] Upper limit sensor /1 (PS6) [2] Paper empty sensor /1 (PS5)
[3] Paper size sensor /Fr1 (PS11) [4] Paper size sensor /Rr1 (PS10)
[5] Tray set sensor /1 (PS8) [6] Near-empty sensor /1 (PS9)
1.1.6 Tray2 (Switch/sensor)

[7] [8] [1]
[2]
[3]
[6] [4]
[5] 50gaf5c035na
[1] Vertical conveyance sensor (PS2) [2] Feed door open/close sensor (PS7)
[3] Paper empty sensor /2 (PS12) [4] Upper limit sensor /2 (PS13)
L-2
1.1.7 Registration (Main body)
[1] 50gaf5c036na
[1] Registration sensor (PS1) -
1.1.8 Bypass tray section (Switch/sensor)

[6] [7] [1] [2]
[5] [4] [3] 50gaf5c037na
[1] Paper size VR/BP (VR1) [2] Paper empty sensor /BP (PS18)
[3] Lift sensor (PS23) [4] Paper size sensor /BP3 (PS21)
[5] Paper size sensor /BP4 (PS22) [6] Paper size sensor /BP2 (PS20)
[7] Paper size sensor /BP1 (PS19) -
1.1.9 ADU section (Switch/sensor)
[1]
[2]
[3]
50gaf5c038na
[1] ADU open/close sensor (PS26) [2] ADU conveyance sensor /1 (PS24)
[3] ADU conveyance sensor /2 (PS25) -
L-3
1.1.10 Fusing section (Switch/sensor)
[1] [4]
[3] [2]
50gaf5c021na
[1] Fusing exit sensor (PS3) [2] Thermistor /2 (TH2)

[3] Thermistor /1 (TH1) [4] Thermostat (TS)
1.1.11 Reverse/paper exit section (Switch/sensor)
[1]
50gaf5c039na
[1] Reverse sensor (PS27) -
1.1.12 Lower area (Main body rear side) (Load) (Main body)
[11]
[4]
[3] [2] [1]

a0r5f5c003ca
[1] Power supply cooling fan (FM1) [2] Overall control board cooling fan (FM10)
[3] Developing cooling fan (FM7) [4] CPU cooling fan (FM11)
L-4
1.1.13 Upper area (Load)
[8]
[7]
[6] [1]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
50gaf5c022nb
[1] Toner supply motor (M4) [2] Toner bottle motor (M10)
[3] Toner solenoid (SD5) [4] Feed motor (M9)
[5] Developing motor (M3) [6] Drum motor (M1)
[7] Fusing motor (M11) [8] Scanner motor (M2)
1.1.14 Main body inside (Load)
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
50gaf5c023na
[1] Fusing cooling fan /Rr (FM8) [2] Fusing cooling fan /Fr (FM2)
[3] Drum cooling fan (FM4) [4] Developing suction fan (FM6)
1.1.15 Main body right side (Load)
[1]
[2]
50gaf5c024na
[1] Web solenoid (SD4) [2] Coveyance suction fan (FM5)
L-5
1.1.16 Write section (Load)
[1]
50gaf5c025na
[1] Polygon motor (M5) -
1.1.17 Photo conductor section (Load)
[1]
a0r5f5c004ca
[1] Drum claw solenoid (SD2) -
1.1.18 Tray1 (Load)

[2] [1]
50gaf5c040na
[1] Feed clutch /1 (CL4) [2] Paper lift motor /1 (M7)
L-6
1.1.19 Tray2 (Load)

[3] [1]
[2] 50gaf5c041na
[1] Vertical conveyance clutch (CL3) [2] Feed clutch /2 (CL5)

[3] Paper lift motor /2 (M8) -
1.1.20 Registration (Load)
[1]
[2]
a0r5f5c005ca
[1] Registration clutch (CL1) [2] Loop clutch (CL2)
1.1.21 Bypass tray section (Load)
[1]
[2] 50gaf5c043na
[1] Feed clutch /BP (CL6) [2] Pick-up solenoid /BP (SD1)
L-7
1.1.22 ADU section (Load)
[1]
[2]
50gaf5c044nb
[1] ADU conveyance clutch /Up (CL7) [2] ADU conveyance clutch /Lw (CL8)
1.1.23 Reverse/paper exit section (Load)
[1]
[4] [3] [2] 50gaf5c045na
[1] Reverse motor (M6) [2] Reverse solenoid (SD3)

[3] Exhaust fan /Rr (FM9) [4] Exhaust fan /Fr (FM3)
1.1.24 Main body rear side (Boards and others) (Main body)
[1]
[2]
[10]
[3]
[9]
[8]
[7]
[4]
[6]
[5]
a0r5f5c006ca
[1] L1 inverter (L1 INVB) [2] Scanner drive board (SDB)

[3] Printer control board (PRCB) [4] Circuit breaker /1 (CBR1)
[5] Circuit breaker /2 (CBR2) [6] Paper size board /2 (PSB/2)
[7] Paper size board /1 (PSB/1) [8] NVRAM board (NRB)
[9] Overall control board (OACB) [10] Standard memory (DIMM)
L-8
1.1.25 Main body front side (Boards and others)
[1]
50gaf5c028na
[1] Total counter (TCT) -
1.1.26 Main body inside (Boards and others)
[1]
[2]
50gaf5c029na
[1] DC power supply (DCPS) [2] High voltage unit (HV2)
1.1.27 Operation panel and main body upper surface (Boards and others)
[12]
[11]
[10]
[1]
[9]
[8]
[7] [2]
[6]
[5] [3]
[4]
a0r5f5c007ca
[1] CCD board (CCDB) [2] Operation board/4 (PWB4)

[3] OB inverter (OB INVB) [4] Operation key board/3 (PWB3)
[5] Operation key board/2 (PWB2) [6] Operation board/1 (PWB1)
[7] LCD board (LCDB) [8] USB I/F board (USBIFB)
[9] Speaker (SP) [10] Status indicator LED board (SILB)
[11] Exposure lamp (L1) [12] L1 relay board (L1 RLB)
L-9
1.1.28 Write section (Boards and others)
[2]
[1]
50gaf5c031na
[1] Index board (INDEXB) [2] Laser drive board (LDB)
1.1.29 Photo conductor section (Boards and others)
[2]
[1]
50gaf5c032na
[1] IDC sensor (IDCS) [2] Erase lamp (EL)
1.1.30 ADU section (Boards and others)
[1]
50gaf5c046na
[1] Transfer exposure lamp (TSL) -
L-10
1.1.31 Fusing section (Boards and others)
[2]
[1]
50gaf5c033na
[1] Fusing heater lamp /2 (L3) [2] Fusing heater lamp /1 (L2)
1.2 DF
1.2.1 Front side (DF)
[1]
a0r5f5c008ca
[1] Pressure roller release solenoid (SD1) -
1.2.2 Rear side (DF)

[5]
[1]
[4] [2]
[3]
16eaf5c002na
[1] Cover open/close sensor (PS7) [2] Original conveyance motor (M2)
[3] Original feed motor (M1) [4] Cooling fan (FM3)
[5] DF control board (DFCB) -
L-11
1.2.3 Upper surface (DF)

[7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
[6] [5] [4] [3] [2] [1]

16eaf5c003na
[1] Original size sensor /2 (PS2) [2] Stamp solenoid (SD2)

[3] Original exit sensor (PS10) [4] Original detection sensor (PS8)
[5] Original feed sensor (PS6) [6] Mix original size detection board (MOSDB)
[7] Original empty sensor (PS5) [8] Original registration sensor (PS9)
[9] Original size sensor /1 (PS1) [10] Original size sensor /3 (PS3)
[11] Original size sensor /4 (PS4) -
1.2.4 Paper feed tray (DF)
[1]
[2]
16eaf5c004na
[1] Tray board (TB) [2] Original size VR (VR1)
L-12
1.3 PC
1.3.1 PC-206
[21]
[20]
[19] [22]
[18] [23]
[17] [24]
[16] [25]
[15] [26]
[14]
[1]
[13]
[12]
[2]
[11]
[3]
[10]
[9] [4]
[8]
[5]
[7]
[6]
4061f5c001na
[1] Vertical conveyance sensor /4 (PS126) [2] Paper feed sensor /4 (PS125)
[3] Paper empty sensor /4 (PS124) [4] Upper limit sensor /4 (PS123)
[5] Vertical conveyance motor /4 (M121) [6] Paper feed motor /4 (M123)
[7] Paper lift motor /4 (M125) [8] Near-empty sensor /4 (PS122)
[11] Paper size detect board /4 (PSDB4) [12] Tray set sensor /4 (PS121)
[13] PC control board (PCCB) [14] Paper size detect board /3 (PSDB3)
[15] Paper size sensor /Rr3 (PS118) [16] Paper size sensor /Fr3 (PS119)
[19] Paper lift motor /3 (M124) [20] Paper feed motor /3 (M122)
[21] Vertical conveyance motor /3 (M120) [22] Right door open/close sensor (PS111)
[23] Upper limit sensor /3 (PS114) [24] Vertical conveyance sensor /3 (PS117)
[25] Paper feed sensor /3 (PS116) [26] Paper empty sensor /3 (PS115)
1.3.2 PC-407
[20]
[19] [21]
[18]
[17]
[22]
[16]
[23]
[24]
[1]
[15]
[2]
[3]
[14]
[4]
[5]
[13]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[12] [9]
[11] [10]
4061f5c201na
L-13
[1] Paper empty sensor (PS3) [2] Main tray empty board (MEB)
[3] Paper lift motor (M5) [4] Paper lift motor encoder sensor (PS10)
[5] Lower limit over run sensor (PS7) [6] Shift motor encoder sensor (PS8)
[7] Shift motor (M4) [8] Tray release switch (SW1)
[9] Shift position sensor (PS11) [10] Lower limit sensor (PS13)
[11] Sub tray empty sensor (PS9) [12] Shift home sensor (PS12)
[13] Shift gate motor (M3) [14] Shift gate position sensor (PS14)
[15] Rely board (RLB) [16] PC control board (PCCB)
[17] Tray lock solenoid (SD1) [18] Tray set sensor (PS6)
[19] Paper feed motor (M1) [20] Vertical conveyance motor (M2)
[21] Right door open/close sensor (PS5) [22] Vertical conveyance sensor (PS2)
[23] Upper limit sensor (PS4) [24] Paper feed sensor (PS1)
1.4 LU-203
[8] [7] [10]

[11]
[12] [13]
[6]
[5]
[1]
[2]
[4] [3]
[9]
16aaf5c001na
[1] Remaining paper sensor /1 (PS154) [2] Remaining paper sensor /2 (PS151)
[3] Dehumidifier heater (HTR101) [4] Pick-up solenoid (SD151)
(Service parts setting
P/N 56AA-710#)
[5] Paper empty sensor (PS153) [6] LU exit sensor (PS155)
[7] Upper limit sensor (PS152) [8] Feed clutch (CL151)
[9] LU set sensor (PS156) [10] Paper lift motor (M151)
[11] Feed motor (M150) [12] LU drive board (LUDB)
[13] Upper door interlock switch (MS151) -
L-14
1.5 FS
1.5.1 FS-522
[27]
[26]
[28]
[20] [25]
[24] [29]
[21]
[23] [30]
[1]
[19] [22]
[18]
[17]
[16]
[2]
[13]
[12] [3]
[11] [4]
[10] [5]
[15] [9] [6]
[7]
[14]
[8]
4349f5c001na
[1] Registration clutch (CL1) [2] Guide plate switch (SW4)

[3] Door switch (SW1) [4] Stacker paddle solenoid (SD1)
[5] FS control board (FSCB) [6] Exit motor (M1)
[7] Stapler movement motor (M7) [8] Alignment sensor /Fr (PS7)
[9] Alignment motor /Fr (M5) [10] Alignment motor /Rr (M4)
[11] Exit paddle home sensor (PS11) [12] Stapler home sensor (PS10)
[13] Exit paddle solenoid (SD2) [14] Tray lift board (TLB)
[15] Tray position sensor (PS3) [16] Tray lift motor (M11)
[17] Lower limit sensor (PS14) [18] Upper limit sensor (PS15)
[19] Shutter switch (SW2) [20] Tray overrun switch (SW3)
[21] Shutter home sensor (PS16) [22] Shutter motor (M12)
[23] Conveyance motor (M2) [24] Exit roller release motor (M6)
[25] Alignment sensor /Rr (PS6) [26] Exit roller home sensor (PS12)
[27] Conveyance sensor (PS5) [28] Entrance motor (M3)
[29] Stacker sensor (PS8) [30] Entrance sensor (PS4)
1.5.2 Front side (FS-523)

[1]
[2]
[4]
[3] 4521f5c001na
L-15
[1] Main gate solenoid (SD2) [2] Front door sensor (PS17)
[3] Tray lift motor (M7) [4] Main tray upper limit LED (LED19)
1.5.3 Rear side (FS-523)

[10] [11] [12] [13] [14]
[1]
[9]
[2]
[8] [3]
[7] [4]
[6]
[5]
4521f5c002na
[1] Main tray lower limit switch (SW3) [2] Main tray upper limit sensor (PS19)
[3] Paddle motor /Up (M15) [4] Paper exit motor (M3)
[5] FS control board (FSCB) [6] Interlock switch (SW1)
[7] Intermediate conveyance roller release motor (M12) [8] Bypass gate solenoid (SD1)
[9] Entrance conveyance motor (M1) [10] Conveyance motor /Up (M4)
[11] Conveyance motor /Lw (M2) [12] Paper exit roller release motor (M13)
[13] Main tray full sensor (PS7) [14] Paddle solenoid /Up (SD3)
1.5.4 Punch section (FS-523)

[3] [1]
[2] 4521f5c003na
[1] Punch motor (M11) [2] Punch clutch (CL1)

[3] Punch encoder sensor (PS15) -
L-16
1.5.5 Conveyance section (FS-523)

[13]
[12] [14]
[15]
[16]
[11]
[1]
[10]
[2]
[9] [3]
[4]
[8]
[5]
[6]
[7]
4521f5e001na
[1] Hole punch position switch (SW4) [2] Hole punch selector motor (M14)
[3] Intermediate conveyance sensor (PS3) [4] Alignment tray sensor (PS5)
[5] Main tray reset sensor (PS8) [6] Alignment home sensor (PS9)
[7] Main tray upper limit switch (SW2) [8] Alignment motor (M5)
[9] Paddle motor /Lw (M9) [10] Roller release home sensor (PS12)
[11] Main route conveyance sensor (PS4) [12] Exit roller home sensor (PS13)
[13] Upper door sensor (PS18) [14] Sub tray full sensor (PS6)
[15] Sub tray exit sensor (PS1) [16] Bypass route conveyance sensor (PS2)
L-17
1.5.6 Stapler section (FS-523)
[1]
[2]
4521f5c005na
[1] Stapler home sensor (PS14) [2] Stapler moving motor (M6)
L-18
1.5.7 Main tray section (FS-523)
[3] [1]
[2]
4521f5c006na
[1] Shift home sensor (PS10) [2] Shift encoder sensor (PS11)
[3] Shift motor (M8) -
1.6 PU-501
[1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
4512f5c001na
[1] Punch scraps full sensor (PS1) [2] Punch position sensor /1 (PS2)
[3] Punch position sensor /2 (PS3) [4] Encoder sensor (PS4)
[5] Punch motor (M1) -
L-19
1.7 SD-507
[14]
[1]
[13]
[12]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8]
[2]
[7]
[3]
[6]
[5] [4]
4511f5c001na
[1] Folding motor (M10) [2] Folding roller home sensor (PS22)
[3] SD interlock switch (SW4) [4] Staple guide home sensor (PS26)
[5] Paper guide home sensor (PS23) [6] Exit sensor (PS20)
[7] Staple guide motor (M14) [8] Tray empty sensor (PS21)
[9] Paper guide motor (M13) [10] Exit motor encoder sensor (PS25)
[11] Conveyance motor (M8) [12] Saddle exit home sensor (PS18)
[13] Exit open/close motor (M9) [14] SD control board (SDCB)
1.8 MT-502
[11] [12]
[13]
[10] [14]
[15]
[16]
[9] [1]
[2]
[3]
[8]
[7]
[6]
[4]
[5]
4510f5c001na
[1] Conveyance sensor /Up (PS9) [2] Paper full sensor /1 (PS5)
[3] Conveyance sensor /Lw (PS10) [4] Paper detection sensor /1 (PS1)
[5] Paper detection sensor /2 (PS2) [6] Paper detection sensor /3 (PS3)
[7] Gate solenoid /1 (SD1) [8] MT control board (MTCB)
[9] Gate solenoid /2 (SD2) [10] Conveyance motor (M1)
[11] Gate solenoid /3 (SD3) [12] Right door open/close sensor (PS11)
[13] Paper full sensor /4 (PS8) [14] Paper detection sensor /4 (PS4)
[15] Paper full sensor /3 (PS7) [16] Paper full sensor /2 (PS6)
L-20
1.9 RU-507
[2] [1]
16faf5c001na
[1] Path sensor (PS2) [2] Door sensor (PS1)
1.10 JS-502
[1]
[2]
4347f5c001na
[1] Paper full sensor (PS1) [2] Not used
L-21
L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING > 2. CONNECTOR
bizhub 501/421/361 LAYOUT DRAWING
2. CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING

2.1 Main body
2.1.1 Connector in the board
(1) Overall control board (OACB)
2005 (Silver Metal : 4 pin)
46 (GY : 50 pin) 1302 (BK : 50 pin) 4602 (BN : 8 pin)
2401 (BN : 20 pin) 3902 (BK : 8 pin)
2304 (BK : 9 pin) 3601 (BN : 5 pin) 4603 (BN : 5 pin)

NC
2501 (BN : 2 pin) 3501 (BN : 24 pin)
2201 (W : 4 pin) 4601 (W : 4 pin)
NC NC
CF (BN : 50 pin) NC
NC
1000 (BN : 8 pin) 2002 (W : 4 pin)
NC
2001 (BK : 7 pin)
1301 (BN : 14 pin)
1901 (Silver Metal : 8 pin) 3901 (BK : 16 pin)
1001 (BN : 200 pin)
2003 (Silver Metal : 4 pin) 1101 (BN : 200 pin)
2004 (Silver Metal : 4 pin)
2602 (BN : 40 pin)
2701 (BK : 100 pin)
2303 (BK : 6 pin)

2601 (BN : 40 pin)
2702 (BK : 80 pin) 2302 (BN : 3 pin)

2301 (BN : 3 pin)
a0r5f5c018ca
(2) Printer control board (PRCB)
29 (BN : 28 pin) 34 (BN : 32 pin)

28 (BN : 24 pin) 27 (GY : 22 pin)
37 (W : 8 pin) 36 (W : 10 pin)
38 (BN : 20 pin)
91 (BN : 2 pin)
21 (W : 11 pin)
NC NC
35 (W : 5 pin) NC
NC
18 (BN : 12 pin)
20 (W : 6 pin)
90 (W : 8 pin)
69 (BN : 3 pin)
17 (BN : 10 pin)
25 (W : 6 pin) 24 (W : 7 pin) 16 (W : 6 pin)
11 (W : 3 pin)
26 (W : 13 pin) 23 (W : 12 pin) 39 (W : 5 pin)
12 (BK : 68 pin)
15 (BN : 17 pin) 22 (BN : 38 pin)

33 (W : 11 pin) NC
31 (BN : 34 pin) 32 (BN : 28 pin)

19 (BN : 24 pin) 30 (BN : 40 pin)
50gaf5c002na
L-22
(3) Scanner drive board (SDB)
62 (BK : 3 pin)
63 (W : 10 pin)
65 (W : 2 pin)
64 (W : 9 pin) 61 (BN : 24 pin)

50gaf5c003na
(4) CCD board (CCDB)
60 (BN : 50 pin)
50gaf5c004na
(5) DC power supply (DCPS)
10 (W : 2 pin)
9 (W : 3 pin)
1 (W : 4 pin) 4 (W : 8 pin) 5 (W : 10 pin) 6 (W : 8 pin)
2 (W : 5 pin) 3 (W : 12 pin) 7 (W : 6 pin)

50gaf5c005na
L-23
(6) High voltage unit (HV2)
71 (W : 11 pin)
70 (W : 6 pin)
72 (W : 3 pin)
50gaf5c006na
(7) Index board (INDEXB)
51 (BN : 5 pin)
50gaf5c007na
(8) L1 inverter (L1 INVB)
931 (W : 4 pin) 930 (W : 3 pin)

50gaf5c008na
(9) L1 relay board (L1 RLB)
97 (2 pin) 97(2 pin)
50gaf5c009na
L-24
(10) Laser drive board (LDB)
50 (BN : 24 pin) 50gaf5c010na
(11) Operation board/1 (PWB1)
5 (W : 6 pin) 2 (BN : 40 pin)
6 (W: 6 pin)
4 (W : 4 pin)
1 (BK : 50 pin)
3 (BK : 25 pin)
a0r5f5c009ca
(12) Operation key board/2 (PWB2)
10 (W : 10 pin)
a0r5f5c010ca
(13) Operation key board/3 (PWB3)
9 (W : 10 pin) 7 (BK : 25 pin)
a0r5f5c011ca
(14) Operation board/4 (PWB4)

8 (Y : 6 pin)
a0r5f5c012ca
L-25
(15) LCD board (LCDB)
(BN : 40 pin)
a0r5f5c013ca
(16) OB inverter (OB INVB)
2 (BN : 2 pin)
1 (W : 6 pin)
a0r5f5c014ca
(17) NVRAM board (NRB)
2 (W : 40 pin)
1 (W : 40 pin) a0r5f5c015ca
(18) Paper size board /1, /2 (PSB/1, /2)
87,88 (W : 5 pin)
50gaf5c015na
(19) Toner control sensor board

1 (W: 7 pin)
50gaf5c016na
(20) Status indicator LED board (SILB)
1 (W : 4 pin) a0r5f5c016ca
L-26
(21) USB I/F board (USBIFB)
3 (GY : 4 pin)
1 (BN : 4 pin)
a0r5f5c017ca
2.2 DF-613
(1) DF control board (DFCB)
1 (W : 2 pin) 11 (W : 2 pin)
3 (W : 8 pin) 4 (W : 7 pin)
13 (W : N.C.)
2 (W : 14 pin)
6 (W : 13 pin)
5 (W : 12 pin)
16eaf5c005nb
(2) Tray board (TB)
3 (W : 3 pin) 2 (W : 12 pin)
1 (W : 7 pin)
16eaf5c006na
2.3 PC
(1) PC-206
(a) PC control board (PCCB)
5 (W : 8 pin) 3 (W : 14 pin)
6 (W : 15 pin) 4 (W : 5 pin)
1 (W : 12 pin)
8 (W : 13 pin)
2 (W : 2 pin)
7 (W : 7 pin)
9 (W : 9 pin) 11 (W : 6 pin) 10 (W : 10 pin)
4061f5c002na
L-27
(b) Paper size detect board /3, /4 (PSDB3, PSDB4)
1 (W : 5 pin)
4061f5c003na
(2) PC-407
(a) PC control board (PCCB)
3 (W : 11 pin) 5 (W : 15 pin)
4 (W : 13 pin) 7 (W : 5 pin) 6 (W : 8 pin)
1 (W : 12 pin)
2 (W : 2 pin)
4061f5c202nb
(b) Relay board (RLB)
1 (W : 22 pin) 2 (W : 22 pin)
4061f5c203na
(c) Main tray empty board (MEB)
1 (W : 3 pin)
4061f5c204na
2.4 LU
(1) LU drive board (LUDB)
112 (W : 12 pin)
114 (W : 4 pin)
113 (GY : 22 pin)
111 (W : 2 pin)
110 (GY : 19 pin)

16aaf5c002na
L-28
2.5 FS
(1) FS-522
(a) FS control board (FSCB)
7 (W : 5 pin) 5 (W : 3 pin) 3 (W : 10 pin)
8 (W : 2 pin)
10 (W : 3 pin)
6 (W : 7 pin) 4 (W : 4 pin) 1 (W : 6 pin)

12 (W : 11 pin)
2 (W : 8 pin)
11 (W : 6 pin)
9 (W : 7 pin)
14 (W : 9 pin)
22 (W : 2 pin)
13 (W : 10 pin)
16 (W : 11 pin) 18 (W : 6 pin) 20 (W : 10 pin)

15 (W : 8 pin)
25 (W : 5 pin)
17 (W : 7 pin) 19 (W : 4 pin)
4349f5c002nb
(b) Tray lift board (TLB)
2 (W : 15 pin)
1 (W : 7 pin)
4349f5c003na
L-29
(2) FS-523
(a) FS control board (FSCB)
8 (W : 6 pin) 10 (W : 4 pin) 12 (W : N.C.)
6 (W : 2 pin)
5 (W : 4 pin)
4 (W : 2 pin)
15 (W : 8 pin)
3 (W : 2 pin)
16 (W : 6 pin)
2 (W : 2 pin)
17 (W : N.C.)
1 (W : 6 pin)
18 (W : 12 pin)
22 (W : 3 pin) 19 (W : 15 pin)
24 (W : 7 pin) 20 (W : 9 pin)
25 (W : 15 pin) 23 (W : 7 pin) 21 (W : 4 pin)
4521f5c007na
2.6 SD-507
(1) SD control board (SDCB)
5 (W : 4 pin) 6 (W : 3 pin) 8 (W : 7 pin)
7 (W : 8 pin)
4 (W : 9 pin)
2 (W : 3 pin) 12 (W : 5 pin) 10 (W : 10 pin)

4511f5c002na
2.7 MT-502
(1) MT control board (MTCB)
101 (W : 9 pin) 100 (W : 13 pin)
102 (W : 12 pin)
103 (W : 7 pin)
107 (W : 8 pin)
104 (W : 2 pin)
105 (W : 2 pin) 106 (W : 2 pin)
4510f5c002na
L-30
bizhub 501/421/361 M TIMING CHART > 1. bizhub 501/421/361
M TIMING CHART
1. bizhub 501/421/361
1.1 A4, 2 single sided originals, single sided copy (1 copy), paper feed tray 1 (Main body)
Drum motor (M1)

Fusing motor (M11)
Feed motor (M9)
Feed clutch /1 (CL4)
Loop clutch (CL2)
Registration clutch (CL1)
P-VV (Valid)
Registration sensor (PS1)
Fusing exit sensor (PS3)
Erase lamp (EL)

Charging (HV)
Developing bias (HV)
Transfer (HV)
Separation (HV)
Guide plate bias (HV)
Transfer exposure lamp (TSL)
Drum claw solenoid (SD2)
Start key ON
50gaf5c047na
1.2 A4, 3 double sided original, double sided copy (1 copy), paper feed tray 1 (Main body)
Drum motor (M1)

Fusing motor (M11)
Feed motor (M9)
Forward
Reverse motor (M6)
Reverse
Loop clutch (CL2)
Reverse solenoid (SD3)
ADU conveyance clutch /Up (CL7)
ADU conveyance clutch /Lw (CL8)
P-VV (Valid)
Reverse sensor (PS27)
ADU conveyance sensor /1 (PS24)
ADU conveyance sensor /2 (PS25)
Erase lamp (EL)

Charging (HV)
Transfer (HV)
Separation (HV)
Start key ON
50gaf5c048na
M-1
bizhub 501/421/361 M TIMING CHART > 2. DF-613
2. DF-613
2.1 Single sided original mode (A4, 2 sheets feed) (DF)
Start key ON / 1st sheet feed start 2nd sheet feed start 2nd sheet scan start
Original set 2nd sheet scan complete
1st sheet scan start 1st sheet scan complete
Original empty sensor ON

(PS5)
OFF
Original feed sensor ON
(PS6) OFF
Original registration ON
sensor (PS9) OFF
Original detection sensor ON
(PS8) OFF
Original exit sensor ON
(PS10) OFF
Pressure roller release ON
solenoid (SD1) OFF
ON
Stamp solenoid (SD2)
OFF
DSET signal
ON
OFF
ON
VD signal
OFF
ON
NEXTPAGE signal
OFF
High speed
Original feed Low speed
motor (M1) Stop
Middle speed
High speed
Low speed
Original conveyance Stop
motor (M2) Low speed
High speed
16eaf5c009na
2.2 Double sided original mode (A4, 2 sheets feed) (DF)
Reverse 2nd sheet

Start key ON / 1st sheet feed start 1st sheet front face scan complete Reverse complete 1st sheet back face scan complete complete feed start 2nd sheet
Original set 1st sheet front face scan start Reverse start Reverse start 1st sheet exit start exit complete
1st sheet back face scan start
Original empty
ON
sensor (PS5)
OFF
Original feed ON
sensor (PS6) OFF
sensor (PS9) OFF
Original empty sensorON
(PS5) OFF
(PS10) OFF
Pressure roller release
ON
solenoid (SD1) OFF
Stamp solenoid ON
(SD2) OFF
ON
DSET signal
OFF
VD signal ON
OFF
ON
NEXTPAGE signal
OFF
High speed
motor (M1) Stop
Middle speed
High speed
Original Low speed
conveyance Stop
motor (M2) Low speed
High speed
16eaf5c010na
M-2
2nd sheet front face scan complete Reverse complete 2nd sheet back face scan complete Reverse complete 2nd sheet exit complete
2nd sheet front face scan start Reverse start Reverse start 2nd sheet exit start
2nd sheet back face scan start
Original empty ON
sensor (PS5) OFF
(PS6) OFF
sensor (PS9) OFF
Original detection ON
sensor (PS8) OFF
(PS10) OFF
solenoid (SD1) OFF
Stamp solenoid ON
(SD2) OFF
DSET signal ON
OFF
VD signal
ON
OFF
NEXTPAGE signal ON
OFF
High speed
motor (M1) Stop
Middle speed
High speed
motor (M2) Stop
Low speed
High speed
Continued from previous page

16eaf5c011na
2.3 FAX fine mode (A4, 2 sheets feed) (DF)
Start key ON / 1st sheet feed start 2nd sheet feed start 2nd sheet scan start
Original set 1st sheet scan start 1st sheet scan complete 2nd sheet scan complete

(PS5) OFF
(PS6) OFF
sensor (PS9) OFF
Original detection sensor ON
(PS8) OFF
(PS10) OFF
solenoid (SD1) OFF
ON
OFF
ON
DSET signal
OFF
ON
VD signal
OFF
ON
NEXTPAGE signal
OFF
High speed
Original feed motor Low speed
(M1) Stop
Middle speed
High speed
Low speed
motor (M2)
Low speed
16eaf5c012na
High speed
Stamp operation is executed only when "trailing edge" or "leading edge and trailing edge" specified.
M-3
2.4 FAX immediate send mode (A4, 2 sheets feed) (DF)
Start key ON / 1st sheet feed start Command received / 2nd sheet feed start 2nd sheet scan complete Command received
Original set 1st sheet scan start 1st sheet scan complete 2nd sheet scan start

(PS5)
OFF
(PS6)
OFF
sensor (PS9) OFF
Original detection ON
sensor (PS8) OFF
(PS10) OFF
solenoid (SD1)
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
DSET signal
OFF
ON
VD signal
OFF
ON
NEXTPAGE signal
OFF
High speed
Original feed motor Low speed

Stop
(M1)
Middle speed
High speed
Low speed
motor (M2)
Low speed
High speed
16eaf5c013na
Stamp operation is executed only when "trailing edge" or "leading edge and trailing edge" specified.
When the communication completes normally, the trailing edge is stamped on.
M-4
bizhub 501/421/361 M TIMING CHART > 3. LU-203
3. LU-203
3.1 A4, life size, 1-1 mode, 3 originals (LU)
LU feed motor (M150)

LU pick-up solenoid (SD151)
LU feed clutch (CL151)
PC vertical conveyance motor (M2)
Main body feed motor (M9)
Main body vertical conveyance clutch (CL3)
Main body loop clutch (CL2)
Loop Loop
Main body registration clutch (CL1) Loop
Print signal
PC vertical conveyance sensor (PS2)
Main body vertical conveyance sensor (PS2)
Main body registration sensor (PS1)
Main body fusing exit sensor (PS3)
Start key ON
16aaf5c003na
M-5
bizhub 501/421/361 M TIMING CHART > 4. FS-522
4. FS-522
4.1 Non-sort, A4, 1 sheet setting (FS-522)
ON
Conveyance sensor (PS5) OFF
Forward
Entrance motor (M3)
Stop
High speed
Conveyance motor Low speed
(M2) Stop
Forward
Exit motor (M1) Stop
4349f5c004na
4.2 1 stapling, punch, A4, 2 originals, 2 copies setting (FS-522)
Punch position
sensor /1 (PS2) ON
Punch position
sensor /2 (PS3) OFF
ON
Stacker sensor (PS8) OFF
Entrance motor Forward

(M3) Stop
High speed
Conveyance
Low speed
motor (M2) Stop
Forward
Exit motor (M1) Stop
Reverse
Registration clutch ON
(CL1) OFF
Punch motor Forward
(M1) Reverse
Exit roller Forward (release)

release motor Stop
(M6) Reverse (pressure)
Stacker paddle ON
solenoid (SD1) OFF
Forward
Alignment motor
Stop
/Rr (M4) Reverse
Alignment motor /Fr Forward

Stop
(M5) Reverse
Stapler movement Forward
motor (M7) Stop
Forward
Stapler motor Stop
4349f5c005na
M-6
5. FS-523
5.1 No-sort, 1 original, 1 copy setting (FS-523)
Item FS operation start signal ON
L
Fusing exit sensor (PS3) H
Entrance conveyance ON
motor (M1) OFF
Conveyance motor /Up ON

(M4) OFF
Bypass gate solenoid ON

(SD1) OFF
ON
Main gate solenoid (SD2) OFF
Sub tray exit sensor L

(PS1) H
4521f5c008na
5.2 Sort, 2 originals, 2 copies setting (FS-523)
L
Fusing exit sensor (PS3) H 1 2 1 2
motor (M1) OFF
Intermediate conveyance L 1 2 1 2
H
sensor (PS3)
ON
Shift motor (M8)
OFF
H Shift position
Shift home sensor (PS10) L
Forward
Paper exit motor (M3) Stop
Reverse
4521f5c009na
M-7
5.3 1 staple /Rr, A4S, 2 originals, 2 copies setting (FS-523)
L
H 1 2 1 2
motor (M1) OFF
Conveyance motor ON
/Up (M4) OFF
Switch back
Conveyance motor Forward
Stop
/Lw (M2) Reverse
Main route conveyance L 1 2 2
sensor (PS4) H
Bypass route conveyance H 1 1

sensor (PS2) L
Intermediate conveyance L 1 2 1 2
sensor (PS3) H
Alignment operation Alignment operation
Forward
Alignment motor (M5) Stop
Reverse
ON
Paddle motor /Up (M15) OFF
Paddle solenoid /Up ON

(SD3) OFF
Paddle motor /Lw (M9) ON

OFF
Forward
Paper exit motor (M3) Stop
Reverse
Stapler moving motor Conveyance to tray Conveyance to tray
ON
(M6) OFF
Staple Staple
ON
Stapler motor /Rr (M17)
OFF
Release Pressure Release Pressure
Paper exit roller release ON
motor (M13) OFF
Release
Intermediate conveyance ON
roller release motor (M12) OFF
Shift Shift
ON
Shift motor (M8)
4521f5c010na
OFF
5.4 Non-sort, punch, 1 original, 1copy setting (FS-523)
L
H
motor (M1) OFF
Conveyance motor /Up ON
(M4) OFF
Bypass gate solenoid ON
(SD1) OFF
ON
OFF
ON
Punch motor (M11)
OFF
Punch operation
ON
Punch clutch (CL1)
OFF
Sub tray exit sensor L
(PS1) H
4521f5c011na
M-8
bizhub 501/421/361 N WIRING DIAGRAM > 1. bizhub 501/421/361
N WIRING DIAGRAM
1. bizhub 501/421/361
1.1 Main body
• bizhub 501/421/361 Wiring diagram (0501m0ne001ca.pdf)

• bizhub 501/421/361 Wiring diagram A3 size (1/4) (0501m0ne002ca.pdf)
• bizhub 501/421/361 Wiring diagram A3 size (2/4) (0501m0ne003ca.pdf )
• bizhub 501/421/3613 Wiring diagram A3 size (3/4) (0501m0ne004ca.pdf )
• bizhub 501/421/361 Wiring diagram A3 size (4/4) (0501m0ne005ca.pdf)
N-1
bizhub 501/421/361 N WIRING DIAGRAM > 2. Option
2. Option
2.1 Reverse automatic document feeder DF-613
• DF-613 Wiring diagram (0613m0ne001ca)
N-2
2.2 Paper feed cabinet PC-206
• PC-206 Wiring diagram (0206m0ne001ca.pdf)
N-3
2.3 Paper feed cabinet PC-407
• PC-407 Wiring diagram (0407m0ne001ca.pdf)
N-4
2.4 Large capacity unit LU-203
• LU-203 Wiring diagram (0203m0ne001ca.pdf)
N-5
2.5 Finisher FS-522/PU-501
• FS-522/PU-501 Wiring diagram (0522m0ne001ca.pdf)
N-6
2.6 Finisher FS-523
• FS-523 Wiring diagram (0523m0ne001ca.pdf)
N-7
2.7 Saddle stitcher SD-507
• SD-507 Wiring diagram (0507m0ne001ca.pdf)
N-8
2.8 Mail bin kit MT-502
• MT-502 Wiring diagram (0502m0ne001ca.pdf)
N-9
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 501/421/361 > 1. SCANNER
bizhub 501/421/361 SECTION
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 501/421/361

1. SCANNER SECTION
1.1 Composition
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
50gat2c001na
[1] CCD unit (CCDB) [2] Exposure unit

[3] Shading correction plate [4] Mirror unit
1.2 Drive
[4]
[3]
[5]
[1]
[2]
50gat2c002na
[1] Scanner wire /Rr [2] Scanner wire /Fr

[3] V-mirror unit [4] Exposure unit
[5] Scanner motor (M2) -
1.3 Operation
1.3.1 Scan/exposure lamp control
(1) Operation when the power is turned ON
A specified period of time after the power switch (SW2) is turned on, the exposure unit conducts the home position search. At this time, the
exposure unit conducts the shading correction based on the white reference board attached to the original glass. For shading correction, 2
places on the white reference board are read for correction. The home position search varies according to the ON/OFF condition of the
scanner home sensor (PS30) when SW2 is turned ON.
(a) Home position search while in PS30 ON

[2] [1]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
50gat2c034na
[1] Exposure unit stand-by position [2] Scanner home sensor (PS30)
[3] Shading correction position 1 [4] Shading correction position 2
O-1
[5] Movement of the exposure unit [6] Exposure lamp (L1) ON
(b) Home position search while in PS30 OFF
[2] [1]
[3]
[6]
[4]
[5]
50gat2c035na
[5] Movement of the exposure unit [6] Exposure lamp (L1) ON
(2) Operation when the start key is turned ON

For the original read mode, the following two types are available: the platen mode and the DF mode. While in the platen mode, the exposure
unit scans the original for reading. And while in the DF mode, since DF conveys the original, the exposure unit remains at the prescribed
position (DF read position) to read the original.
(a) When the platen is used (when DF is opened)

The operation in the platen mode varies depending on which is selected for the print density, the AE print and the manual print.
• When the AE print is selected
[4] [3] [2] [1]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
50gat2c037na
[1] Exposure unit stand-by position [2] Position at which the image read is started
[3] Scanner home sensor (PS30) [4] Position at which the running-up of the exposure unit is
started
[5] AE scan range [6] Shading correction position 1
[7] Shading correction position 2 [8] Exposure lamp (L1) ON
• When the manual print is selected
[4] [3] [2] [1]
[5]
[6]
[7]
50gat2c036na
[1] Exposure unit stand-by position [2] Position at which the image read is started
[3] Scanner home sensor (PS30) [4] Position at which the running-up of the exposure unit is
started
[7] Exposure lamp (L1) ON -
Note
• When the tray 1 is selected by manual, not by APS, no shading correction is made.
(b) When DF is used (when DF is closed)
[3] [2] [1]
[4]
[5]
[6]
50gat2c038na
[3] DF read position [4] Shading correction position 1
O-2
[5] Shading correction position 2 [6] Exposure lamp (L1) ON
1.3.2 Original size detection control

(1) Detection method
The original size detection method varies for the DF mode and the platen mode.
(a) DF mode
See DF-613 Service Manual.
(b) Platen mode

• Main scan direction
Reading is made by the CCD sensor.
• Sub-scan direction
Detection is made according to the ON/OFF of the APS sensor (PS32).
Original size CCD sensor PS32
(Detection length: mm) (ON/OFF)
A3 297 ON
11 x 17 279.4 ON
B4 257 ON
81/2 x 14 *1 215.9 ON
81/2 x 11S 215.9 ON
A4S 210 ON
A4 297 OFF
81/2 x 11 279.4 OFF
B5 257 OFF
A5 210 OFF
B5S 182 OFF
A5 148 OFF
51/2 x 81/2 139.7 OFF
B6 128 OFF
*1 No discrimination is made between 81/2 x 14 and 81/2 x 11S. When the size is 81/2 x 14, this is detected as 81/2 x 11S.
(2) Detection timing

(a) Platen mode (while in DF closed)
When the APS timing sensor (PS31) turns on while in DF closed, the original size is detected.
(b) Platen mode (while in DF open

When the start key is pressed, the original size is detected.
1.3.3 AE control
When AE is selected, the density level of the original is detected to adjust it to an appropriate density automatically. The sampling range of the
original density in the AE control varies for the platen mode and the DF mode.
(1) AE sampling range in the platen mode
[5]
[1]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[2] [2]
[4]
[3]
50gat2c039na
[1] Original [2] L/100 mm

[3] L mm [4] 30 mm
[5] 10 mm [6] Leading edge of the original
O-3
[7] AE sampling range -
(2) AE sampling range in the DF mode
[4]
[1]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3] [2]
50gat2c040na
[1] Original [2] 2.9 mm

[3] 1.5 mm [4] 20 mm
[5] Leading edge of the original [6] AE sampling range
1.3.4 Image processing

The following items are provided for the image processing. For details, See “O.17. IMAGE PROCESSING”.
• AOC (Auto offset control)
• AGC (Auto gain control)
• Shading correction
• AE processing
• Range discrimination
• Brightness/density conversion
• Filter/magnification
• Density gamma (conversion)
• Halftone processing (error diffusion)
• Compression
• Storage of image data
O-4
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 501/421/361 > 2. WRITE
2. WRITE SECTION
2.1 Composition
[7] [8] [10] [1]

[6] [9] [11]
[5] [3]
[4] [2]
50gat2c003na
[1] Index lens [2] Index board (INDEXB)

[3] fθ lens [4] Polygon mirror
[5] CY1 lens [6] Laser drive board (LDB)
[7] Collimator lens unit Index lens [8] Cleaner
[9] Index mirror [10] CY2 lens
[11] Dust-proof glass -
2.2 Operation
2.2.1 Laser beam path
[10]
[9]
[8]
[7] [1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
50gat2c041na
[1] Dust-proof glass [2] CY2 lens

[3] Drum [4] Index board (INDEXB)
[5] fq lens [6] Polygon mirror
[7] CY1 lens [8] Collimator lens
[9] Laser diode [10] Index mirror
O-5
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 501/421/361 > 2. WRITE
2.2.2 Write control

Image data that has been processed is converted into laser beam on the laser drive board (LDB) to be irradiated on the drum. 1 laser diode
emits 2 beams and 2 lines are written per 1 scan.
To prevent the mis-centering of a written image, an INDEX signal detected by the index board (INDEXB) is used to decide the reference position
for writing in the drum shaft direction (main scan direction) to control the starting position of the laser irradiation onto the drum.
2.2.3 Image stabilization control

The following items are provided for the image stabilization control. For details, See “O.16. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL”.
• MPC (Maximum power control)
• APC (Auto power control)
• Dot diameter adjustment control
2.2.4 Image processing

The following items are provided for the image processing. For details, See “O.17.2 Image processing in the write section”.
• Rotation/elongation
• PWM
• Frequency conversion
O-6
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 501/421/361 > 3. PHOTO
bizhub 501/421/361 CONDUCTOR SECTION
3. PHOTO CONDUCTOR SECTION

3.1 Composition
[2] [3] [4] [1]
50gat2c004na
[1] IDC sensor (IDCS) [2] Drum

[3] Drum claw [4] PGC sensor
3.2 Drive
3.2.1 Drum drive
[1]
[2]
50gat2c005na
[1] Drum motor (M1) [2] Drum drive shaft
3.2.2 Drum claw drive
[1]
[2]
50gat2c006na
[1] Drum claw [2] Drum claw solenoid (SD2)
O-7
3.3 Operation
3.3.1 Image creation control
When the print start signal turns ON [1], various motors turn ON to place each unit in the operating condition. At the same time, the erase lamp
(EL) turns ON to neutralize the drum and the charging corona charges the drum. A specified period of time after the print start signal turns ON,
the developing bias turns ON [2] and then a high voltage is impressed [3] on the guide plate. When the preparation for image creation is made,
an image is created on the drum surface by laser irradiation and developing.
A specified period of time after the registration clutch (CL1) turns ON [4], a high voltage is impressed on the transfer corona [5] and the
separation corona [6] to turn ON the transfer exposure lamp (TSL) [8] and the drum claw solenoid (SD2) [9] sequentially. The ON timing [7] of
TSL varies according to the type of paper. And the ON time period of TSL also varies according to the setting environment. An image created on
the drum is transferred onto paper and then the paper is separated from the drum.
A specified period of time after the registration sensor (PS1) detects the trailing edge of paper and turns OFF [10], each operation turns OFF.
However, some operations turn OFF a specified period of time after PS1 detects the trailing edge of the last paper and turns OFF [11], or a
specified period of time after the fusing exit sensor (PS3) detects the trailing edge of the last paper and turns OFF [13]. For the charging corona,
the developing bias and the guide plate bias, with the OFF timing [12] by the last paper of the transfer corona used as a starting point, each of
the OFF timing is interlocked.
[1][2] [3] [4][5] [6] [10] [11]
Drum motor (M1)
Erase lamp (EL)
Charging corona (HV)
Transfer corona (HV)
Separation corona (HV)
[13]
[7] [8] [9] [12] 50gat2c103na
[1] Print start signal ON [2] Developing bias high voltage impressed
[3] Guide plate bias high voltage impressed [4] Registration clutch (CL1) ON
[5] Transfer corona high voltage impressed [6] Separation corona high voltage impressed
[7] Varies according to the type of paper. [8] Transfer exposure lamp (TSL) ON (This varies according
to the setting environment.)
[9] Drum claw solenoid (SD2) ON [10] Trailing edge of the 1st paper detected
[11] Trailing edge of the last paper detected [12] Transfer of the last paper OFF
[13] Trailing edge of the last paper detected -
3.3.2 Drum claw control

(1) Purpose
Two drum claws are employed to prevent paper from winding up around the drum (winding-up jam). The contact and severance of the drum
claws to and from the drum are made by the ON/OFF of the drum claw solenoid (SD2).
(2) Swing operation

To prevent paper from getting stained at specific points and the drum [3] from being damaged, the drum claw [2] makes a swing operation of
about 7 mm against the drum surface.
The drum claw unit [4] is provided with a projection [7]. This projection is pressed by the cam [6] provided on the gear [5] to push out the drum
claw unit backward. When the gear rotates to release the cam, the drum claw unit is sent back to the original position by the spring [1]. This
operation is repeated to swing the drum claw.
O-8
[5] [6] [7] [1]
[4] [3] [2]

50gat2c042na
[1] Spring [2] Drum claw

[3] Drum [4] Drum claw unit
[5] Gear [6] Cam
[7] Projection

The following items are provided for the image stabilization control. For details, See “O.16. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL”.
• Drum rotation control
• Dot diameter adjustment control
O-9
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 501/421/361 > 4. CHARGING
4. CHARGING SECTION
4.1 Composition
[2] [3] [1]
50gat2c007na
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
4.2 Operation
4.2.1 Charging control
(1) Charging wire
The high voltage unit (HV) pressurizes 24V DC to impress a minus (-) DC voltage on the charging wire for discharge.
Charging output range: -500 to -1100 μA
(2) Charging grid

To obtain a uniform charging wire discharge, a minus (-) high voltage is impressed from the high voltage unit (HV) to the charging grid.
Charging grid voltage output range: -450 to -1090 V
4.2.2 Erase lamp (EL) control

(1) Purpose
To neutralize a residual potential on the drum surface and to obtain a uniform potential on the drum surface, the erase lamp (EL) is irradiated
on the drum before charging.
(2) Execution timing

The erase lamp (EL) turns ON in synch with the print start signal turning ON. And it turns OFF a specified period of time after the fusing exit
sensor (PS3) detects the trailing edge of the last paper.
O-10
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 501/421/361 > 5. TRANSFER/
bizhub 501/421/361 SEPARATION SEC...
5. TRANSFER/SEPARATION SECTION
5.1 Composition
[3] [4]
[2] [1]
50gat2c008na
[1] Transfer exposure lamp (TSL) [2] Separation wire

[3] Plunging prevention plate [4] Transfer wire
5.2 Operation
5.2.1 Transfer guide control
(1) Purpose
To prevent the transfer guide plate from getting stained, a minus (-) DC voltage is impressed from the high voltage unit (HV).
Voltage impressed: -500 V

The impression of a voltage onto the transfer guide plate is made ON a specified period of time after the developing bias turns ON. And it
turns OFF a specified period of time after the developing bias turns OFF.
5.2.2 Transfer/separation control

(1) Transfer
The high voltage unit (HV) pressurizes a 24V DC to impress a plus (+) DC voltage on the transfer wire for discharging.
Transfer DC output range: 0 to -450 μA
(2) Separation
For separation, an AC high voltage and a minus (-) DC voltage are employed. The high voltage unit (HV) impresses a voltage onto the
separation wire for discharging.
Separation AC output range: 300 to 1000 μA
Separation DC output range: 0 to -200 μA
5.2.3 Transfer exposure lamp (TSL) control

(1) Purpose
The transfer exposure lamp (TSL) is turned ON to secure transferability and prevent a reverse charge to the drum.

The transfer exposure lamp (TSL) turns ON a specified period of time after the registration clutch (CL1) turns ON. And it turns OFF a specified
period of time after the registration sensor (PS1) turns OFF.
O-11
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 501/421/361 > 6. DEVELOPING
bizhub 501/421/361 UNIT
6. DEVELOPING UNIT
6.1 Composition
[4] [5]
[3] [2] [1]

50gat2c009na
[1] Agitator plate [2] Agitator screw

[3] TCR sensor (TCRS) [4] Developing roller
[5] Developer restriction blade -
6.2 Drive
[6]
[5]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
50gat2c010na
[1] Drum [2] Developing roller

[3] Developing motor (M3) [4] Agitator screw
[5] Developing unit [6] Agitator plate
6.3 Operation
6.3.1 Developer conveyance
Developer in the developing unit is supplied by the agitator plate [4] to the developing roller [2]. The thickness of developer attaching to the
developing roller is restricted by the developer restriction blade [5]. After completion of transfer to the drum [1], developer remaining on the
developing roller is sent back to the agitator screws [3]. The 2 agitator screws rotate in the same direction to obtain an improved conveyability
when developer is changed.
O-12
[3] [4] [5]
[1]
[2]
50gat2c043nb
[1] Drum [2] Developing roller

[3] Agitator screw [4] Agitator plate
[5] Developer restriction blade -
6.3.2 Developing bias

(1) Purpose
To make toner get easily attached to the drum while in developing, a developing bias is impressed onto the developing roller [1].
[2] [3] [4]
[1]
50gat2c044na
[1] Developing roller [2] Main pole position adjusting plate

[3] Developing bias shaft [4] Developing bias contact
(2) Timing
To prevent unnecessary carriers from attaching to the drum, a developing bias turns ON a specified period of time after the print start signal
turns ON, and it turns OFF a specified period of time after charging turns OFF.
6.3.3 Developing suction control

(1) Purpose
To prevent the splash of toner from the developing roller, the duct [4] is provided at 2 places of the developing unit [1]. Toner guided into the
duct is sucked in by the developing suction fan (FM6) [3] to be collected by the suction filter /A [2].
O-13
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1]
50gat2c045na
[1] Developing unit [2] Suction filter /A

[3] Developing suction fan (FM6) [4] Duct
(2) Developing suction fan (FM6) control

The developing suction fan (FM6) turns ON in synch with the developing motor (M3) turning ON. And it turns OFF a specified period of time
after M3 turns OFF. However, while in the TCR adjustment mode, it turns OFF in synch with M3 turning OFF.

The following item is provided for the image stabilization control. For details, See “O.16 IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL”.
• Toner density control
O-14
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 501/421/361 > 7. TONER
bizhub 501/421/361 SUPPLY SECTION
7. TONER SUPPLY SECTION

7.1 Composition
[5] [6] [7] [1]
[4] [2]
[3]
50gat2c011na
[1] Toner bottle sensor (PS4) [2] Toner hopper

[3] Toner bottle [4] Toner bottle motor (M10)
[5] Toner remaining sensor (PZS) [6] Toner supply motor (M4)
[7] Toner bottle position sensor (PS28) -
O-15
7.2 Drive
[5]
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
50gat2e003na
[1] Toner agitator plate [2] Toner conveyance screw

[3] Toner solenoid (SD5) [4] Toner supply motor (M4)
[5] Toner bottle motor (M10) -
7.3 Operation
7.3.1 Toner level detection control
(1) Toner level detection control
Toner remaining in the toner hopper is detected by the toner remaining sensor (PZS). When toner remaining in the hopper is found below the
prescribed amount, a toner supply signal is issued to the printer control board (PRCB). This signal is transmitted to the operation section
through the overall control board (OACB). Accordingly, OB displays a message in LCD on the LCD board (LCDB).
(2) Detection timing

• At all times while in printing.
7.3.2 Toner supply control to the toner hopper

(1) Operation
When the toner remaining sensor (PZS) detects the reduced level of remaining toner, the toner bottle motor (M10) turns ON and rotates the
toner bottle to supply toner in the toner bottle to the toner hopper.
When PZS detects the toner level being restored to its prescribed level, M10 turns OFF to get back to the stand-by condition.
(2) Toner bottle position detection

The toner supply section is provided with the toner bottle position sensor (PS28) to detect the rotational position of the toner bottle whether it
is at the home position.
7.3.3 Toner supply control to the developing unit

(1) When the power switch (SW2) is turned ON
A specified period of time after SW2 turns ON, the TCR sensor (TCRS) detects the toner density in the developing unit. At this time, when a
detected value is found below the initial density recorded in the CPU in the overall control board (OACB), the toner supply motor (M4) and the
toner solenoid (SD5) turn ON to supply toner from the toner hopper to the developing unit.
(2) While in printing

While in printing, the toner density is detected by the TCR sensor (TCRS). The ON time periods of the toner supply motor (M4) and the toner
solenoid (SD5) are decided according to the output voltage of TCRS to supply toner from the toner hopper to the developing unit.
TCRS output voltage Toner supply time period
Less than 2.01 V 0 second
2.01 to 2.14 V 0.10 seconds
2.14 to 2.22 V 0.15 seconds
2.22 to 2.28 V 0.20 seconds
O-16
2.28 to 2.32 V 0.25 seconds

2.32 to 2.39 V 0.40 seconds
2.39 V or more 0.50 seconds
7.3.4 Toner conveyance control

(1) Purpose
To convey toner in the toner bottle to the toner hopper.
(2) Operation
The exit [1] of the toner bottle is normally closed. However, by setting the bottle to the toner supply section, the accordion section is pushed
and compressed to let the exit open. A bottle set to the toner supply section rotates when the toner bottle motor (M10) turns ON. When the
toner bottle rotates, toner is conveyed to the exit of the bottle along the spiral groove engraved on the surface of the toner bottle and flows out
into the toner hopper.
[1]
D C B A
[2]
D C B
A
50gat2e002na
[1] Exit [2] Rotation
O-17
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 501/421/361 > 8. CLEANING/
bizhub 501/421/361 TONER RECYCLE ...
8. CLEANING/TONER RECYCLE SECTION

8.1 Composition
[5] [6] [1]
[3] [2]
[4]
50gat2c013nb
[1] Collection paddle [2] Neutralizing sheet

[3] Drum [4] Cleaning blade
[5] Collection screw [6] Scraper
8.2 Drive
[1]
[2]
[3]
50gat2c014na
[1] Drum motor (M1) [2] Cleaning/recycle section drive

[3] Developer agitation drive -
8.3 Operation
8.3.1 Cleaning operation
Toner scraped by the cleaning blade [4] is neutralized by the neutralizing sheet [2], then collected by the collection paddle [1], and finally guided
to the collection screw [5]. At this time, toner remaining on the collection paddle is scraped by the scraper [6].
O-18
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 501/421/361 > 8. CLEANING/
bizhub 501/421/361 TONER RECYCLE ...
[5] [6]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
50gat2c047na
[1] Collection paddle [2] Neutralizing sheet

[3] Drum [4] Cleaning blade
[5] Collection screw [6] Scraper
8.3.2 Toner collection mechanism

(1) Purpose
To reuse toner scraped by the cleaning blade, the toner collection mechanism is provided.

The collection paddle to be used to collect toner is driven by the drum motor (M1) and the toner collection operation is made in synch with the
ON/OFF of M1.
8.3.3 Toner conveyance operation

(1) Toner conveyance mechanism
Toner collected is conveyed to the hopper in the toner supply section by the collection screw of the cleaning section.

The collection screw is driven by the drum motor (M1) and the toner conveyance operation is made in synch with the ON/OFF of M1.
O-19
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 501/421/361 > 9. PAPER FEED
bizhub 501/421/361 SECTION (Tra...
9. PAPER FEED SECTION (Tray 1/2)

9.1 Composition
9.1.1 Tray 1
[4]
[3] [5]
[1]
[2]
50gat2c015na
[1] Separation roller [2] Tray 1Lift plateLift plate

[3] Lift plate [4] Pick-up roller
[5] Feed roller -
9.1.2 Tray 2
[5]
[4]
[6]
[3]
[1]
[2]
50gat2c104na
[1] Separation roller [2] Tray 2

[3] Lift plate [4] Pick-up roller
[5] Vertical conveyance roller [6] Feed roller
9.2 Drive
9.2.1 Paper feed drive
[1]
[13]
[12] [2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[11] [10]
[8]
[9]
50gat2c016na
O-20
[1] Feed motor (M9) [2] Feed clutch /1 (CL4)

[3] Feed roller /1 [4] Separation roller /1
[5] Vertical conveyance roller [6] Vertical conveyance clutch (CL3)
[7] Feed clutch /2 (CL5) [8] Feed roller /2
[9] Separation roller /2 [10] Pick-up roller /2
[11] Tray 2 [12] Tray 1
[13] Pick-up roller /1 -
9.2.2 Tray lift drive

[3][4]
[1]
[2] 50gat2c017na
[1] Lift arm [2] Lift plate

[3] Paper lift motor /1 (M7) [4] Paper lift motor /2 (M8)
9.3 Operation
9.3.1 Up/down control
(1) Up drive operation
The lift drive shaft [3] is rotated by the paper lift motors /1 (M7) [6] and /2 (M8) [7]. The lift drive shaft is provided with the lift arm [1] and the lift
plate [2] is pushed up when the lift drive shaft rotates. In this way, the up drive operation of the lift plate is conducted.
(2) Down drive operation

Pulling out the tray disengages the coupling [8] of the paper lift motors /1 (M7) and /2 (M8) from the lift drive shaft. In this way, the driving
force of M7 or M8 that holds the lift plate at the upper position is released and the lift plate goes down by its own weight.
[6] [7] [8]
[9][10]
[1]
[4] [5]
[3] [2] 50gat2c051na
[1] Lift arm [2] Lift plate

[3] Lift drive shaft [4] Tray set sensor /1 (PS8)
[5] Tray set sensor /2 (PS14) [6] Paper lift motor /1 (M7)
[7] Paper lift motor /2 (M8) [8] Coupling
[9] Upper limit sensor /1 (PS6) [10] Upper limit sensor /2 (PS13)
(3) Operation timing

When the tray is set, the tray set sensors /1 (PS8) and /2 (PS14) turn ON. In this way, the paper lift motors /1 (M7) and /2 (M8) turn ON to
raise the lift plate. When the lift plate goes up and the upper most paper that is loaded turns ON the upper limit sensors /1 (PS6) and /2
(PS13), M7 and M8 turn OFF to stop the up drive operation.
When the paper feed operation causes PS6 and PS13 to turn OFF from ON while in the print operation, M7 and M8 turn ON again to raise the
lift plate. In this way, when PS6 and PS13 turn ON again, M7 and M8 turn OFF to stop the up drive operation.
O-21
9.3.2 Paper size detection control

(1) Paper size detection mechanism
(a) Size detection in the main scan direction
The side guide plate [12] is provided with the size detection actuator [7]. And interlocked with the side guide plate, this actuator sticks out to
the rear side of the tray. The size detection actuator is provided with the 2 lines of notches, which are detected by the paper size sensors /
Fr1 (PS11) [11] and /Rr1 (PS10) [10], or the paper size sensors /Fr2 (PS17) [3] and /Rr2 (PS16) [4] equipped individually on the rear of the
main body. The notches of the size detection actuator vary for each paper size and the paper size is detected in the main scan direction by
the combination of the ON/OFF of PS10 and PS11, or PS16 and 17.
(b) Size detection in the sub scan direction

The rear guide plate [13] is provided with the size detection actuator [1], which rotates in interlock with the rear guide plate. The size
detection actuator is provided with a projection [2]. When this projection comes at the rear side of the tray, it pushes the detection levers [9]
and [6] of the paper size boards /1 (PSB/1) [8] and /2 (PSB/2) [6] equipped on the back of the main body. 4 detection levers are equipped
on each of the paper size board and they individually turn ON and OFF the paper size detection switches /1 (SW101) to /4 (SW104)
provided on each board. On the other hand, the projections of the size detection actuator vary in their circumference and the intervals
between each of these projections, and accordingly, either one of the 4 detection levers is to be pushed according to the position of the
guide plate. In this way, the paper size in the sub scan direction is detected by the combination of the ON/OFF of SW101 to SW104.
[12] [13] [1]
[8] [9] [10] [11]
[7] [6][5] [4] [3] [2] 50gat2c048na
[1] Size detection actuator [2] Projection

[5] Detection lever [6] Paper size board /2 (PSB/2)
[7] Size detection actuator [8] Paper size board /1 (PSB/1)
[9] Detection lever [10] Paper size sensor /Rr1 (PS10)
[11] Paper size sensor /Fr1 (PS11) [12] Side guide plate
[13] Rear guide plate -
(2) Paper size detection table

Paper size Paper size boards /1 (PSB/1), /2 (PSB/2) Paper size sensor Paper size sensor
SW101 SW102 SW103 SW104 /Rr1 (PS10), /Rr2 /Fr1 (PS11), /Fr2
(PS16) (PS17)
B5 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF
A5S ON/OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
A4 ON/OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF
81/2 x 11 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
81/2 x 11 ON OFF OFF ON OFF ON
B5S OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

A4S OFF ON/OFF ON ON OFF ON
81/2 x 14 ON ON ON OFF ON ON
B4 ON ON ON OFF ON OFF
A3 ON ON/OFF ON ON ON OFF
O-22
9.3.3 Paper feed control

(1) Pick-up mechanism
The pick-up roller [4] is brought up and down mechanically by the lever [6] provided on the rear side of the paper feed unit. When the tray is
set, the lever is pushed by the tray to bring down the pick-up roller. In this way, the pick-up roller comes in contact with paper to pick it up.
[6]
[1]
[5] [3]
[4] [2]
50gat2c098na
[1] Feed roller [2] Separation roller

[3] When the tray is set (with the pick-up roller brought down) [4] Pick-up roller
[5] When the tray is not set (with the pick-up roller brought [6] Lever
up)
(2) Pick-up control

(a) Tray 1 pick-up control
When the print start signal turn ON [1], the feed motor (M9) and the feed clutch /1 (CL4) also turn ON. In this way, the driving force of M9 is
transmitted to the pick-up roller and the feed roller to pick up [2] the 1st sheet of paper. When paper is conveyed and the registration sensor
(PS1) turns ON, CL4 turns OFF to complete the pick-up operation. The pick-up [4] operation of the 2nd and succeeding sheets of paper is
conducted using the paper feed request signal [3] as a starting point.
[1] [2] [3] [4]
Feed motor (M9)
50gat2c099na
[1] Print start signal ON [2] Pick-up of the 1st paper

[3] Paper feed request signal [4] Pick-up of the 2nd paper
(b) Tray 2 pick-up control

When the print start signal turns ON [1], M9, the feed clutch /2 (CL5), and the vertical conveyance clutch (CL3) turn ON. In this way, the
driving force of M9 is transmitted to the pick-up roller, the feed roller and the vertical conveyance roller to conduct the pick-up [2] and the
vertical conveyance [3] of the 1st sheet of paper. When paper is conveyed and the vertical conveyance sensor (PS2) turns ON, CL5 turns
OFF to complete the pick-up operation. However, since CL3 keeps turning ON, paper is conveyed to the registration section by the vertical
conveyance roller. In this manner, when PS1 turns ON, CL3 turns OFF a specified period of time after that. The pick-up [5] and the vertical
conveyance [6] of the 2nd and succeeding sheets of paper are conducted using the paper feed request signal [4] as a starting point.
O-23
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
Feed motor (M9)
Vertical conveyance sensor (PS2)
Vertical conveyance clutch (CL3)
50gat2c100na
[1] Print start signal ON [2] Pick-up of the 1st paper

[3] Vertical conveyance of the 1st paper [4] Paper feed request signal
[5] Pick-up of the 2nd paper [6] Vertical conveyance of the 2nd paper
(3) Separation mechanism

The separation roller [5] is pressed against the feed roller [8] by the operating pressure generated by the pressure [2] of the spring [4] and the
torque of the torque limiter [3]. This operating pressure of the feed roller, separation roller and torque limiter becomes a limit torque to prevent
the double feed of paper.
When there is no paper between the separation roller and the feed roller, or when only one sheet of paper is conveyed, the operating
pressure of the feed roller, the paper and the spring is in excess of the limit torque, and therefore, the separation roller rotates [6] following the
rotation of the feed roller. When two or more sheets of paper are conveyed between the separation roller and the feed roller, the limit torque is
greater than the frictional force between 2 sheets of paper, and accordingly, the separation roller stops and the lower side paper [7] in contact
with the separation roller is not conveyed.
[8] [1]
[2]
[3]
[7] [6] [5] [4]

50gat2c101na
[1] Paper conveyance direction [2] Pressing

[3] Torque limiter [4] Spring
[5] Separation roller [6] Driven rotation
[7] 2nd sheet of paper [8] Feed roller
9.3.4 Paper empty control

The paper empty of the tray is detected by the paper empty sensors /1 (PS5) [3] and /2 (PS12) [4]. And to prompt the supply of paper before
paper in the tray runs out completely, the paper near-empty sensors /1 (PS9) [7] and /2 (PS15) [8] are equipped. The lift drive shaft [2] that
brings up the lift plate [5] is provided with the actuator [1] and PS9 and PS15 are turned ON and OFF by this actuator. When a sufficient amount
of paper is loaded on the tray, the actuator turns ON PS9 and PS15. However, when the amount of paper gets reduced and the lift plate goes
up, the actuator turns OFF PS9 and PS15. In this way, it is detected that the paper loaded in the tray comes near to an end.
[7] [8]
[1]
[2]
[3][4]
[6] [5]
50gat2c050na
[1] Actuator [2] Lift drive shaft
O-24
[3] Paper empty sensor /1 (PS5) [4] Paper empty sensor /2 (PS12)
[5] Lift plate [6] Coupling
[7] Near-empty sensor /1 (PS9) [8] Near-empty sensor /2 (PS15)
9.3.5 Paper remaining detection mechanism

The front cover [4] of the tray is provided with the paper remaining display window [3], and the paper remaining in the tray can be checked
through this window. The inside of the paper remaining display window is provided with the display lever [2] which is interlocked with the up/
down position of the lift plate [1]. The display lever is red in color and it is indicated that the more the red portion that can be seen through the
paper remaining display window, the less paper there remains in the tray.
[4] [1]
[3]
[2] 50gat2c053nb
[1] Lift plate [2] Display lever

[3] Paper remaining display window [4] Front cover
O-25
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 501/421/361 > 10. BYPASS
10. BYPASS SECTION

10.1 Composition
[1]
[4]
[3] [2]
50gat2c019na
[1] Pick-up solenoid /BP (SD1) [2] Lift plate

[3] Separation roller [4] Feed roller
10.2 Drive
[4]
[1] [2]
[3]
50gat2c018na
[1] Feed clutch /BP (CL6) [2] Feed roller

[3] Separation roller [4] Feed motor (M9)
[4] [5] [1]
[3] [2]
50gat2c020na
[1] Cam [2] Lift plate

[3] Spring [4] Feed clutch /BP (CL6)
[5] Pick-up solenoid /BP (SD1) -
10.3 Operation
10.3.1 Up/down control
(1) Up drive operation
The lift plate [4] is of the construction in which it is pushed up by the spring [5] provided on the lower section. However, while in the stand-by
condition, it is hold down by the cam [3] provided on the lift drive shaft [6]. And the ON/OFF of the gear [7] of the lift drive shaft is controlled by
the stopper [1] that is driven by the pick-up solenoid /BP (SD1) [2]. When the feed motor (M9) is turned ON by a print start signal, SD1 turns
O-26
ON a specified period of time after that. In this way, the stopper is released and the driving force of M9 is transmitted to the lift drive shaft.
When the cam that holds down the lift plate is released by the rotation of the lift drive shaft, the lift plate is brought up by the force of the
spring. When the lift sensor (PS23) [8] is turned ON by the rotation of the lift drive shaft, SD1 turns OFF to stop the up drive of the lift plate.
This up drive operation causes paper loaded in the tray to come in contact with the feed roller to allow paper to be fed.
[7] [8] [6]
[2] [1]
[6]
[5] [4] [3] 50gat2c054na
[1] Stopper [2] Pick-up solenoid /BP (SD1)

[3] Cam [4] Lift plate
[5] Spring [6] Lift drive shaft
[7] Gear [8] Lift sensor (PS23)
(2) Down drive operation

When the vertical conveyance sensor (PS2) detects the leading edge of paper and turns ON, the pick-up solenoid /BP (SD1) turns ON a
specified period of time after that and turns OFF a specified period of time after the lift sensor (PS23) turns OFF. In this way, the cam of the lift
drive shaft presses down the lift tray to be placed in the stand-by condition.
10.3.2 Paper size detection control

(1) Size detection in the main scan direction
According to the position of the guide plate connected to the paper size VR/BP (VR1), the paper size is detected in the main scan direction.
(2) Size detection in the sub scan direction

The paper size is detected by the combination of the ON/OFF of the paper size sensors /BP1 (PS19), /BP2 (PS20), /BP3 (PS21) and /BP4
(PS22).
(3) Paper size detection table

Paper size Paper size sensors Paper size VR/BP (VR1)
BP1 BP2 BP3 BP4 detection width (mm)
(PS19) (PS20) (PS21) (PS22)
A6S OFF OFF OFF OFF 80 or more - less than 115
B6S 115 or more - 144 or less
A5 196 or more - 225 or less
B5 242 or more - 268 or less
A5S ON OFF OFF OFF 133 or more - 164 or less
B5S 169 or more - less than 196
A4S 196 or more - 225 or less
81/2 x 11 225 or more - less than 288
A4 288 or more - 330 or less
Foolscap ON ON ON OFF 188 or more - 235 or less
81/2 x 14 ON ON ON OFF 201 or more - 231 or less
B4 242 or more - less than 268
11 x 17 ON ON ON OFF 255 or more - less than 288
A3 288 or more - less than 301
O-27

(1) Pick-up control
When the feed motor (M9) is turned ON by the print start signal [1], the pick-up solenoid /BP (SD1) and the vertical conveyance clutch (CL3)
also turn ON a specified period of time after that. When SD1 turns ON, the lift plate goes up [2] and paper comes into contact with the feed
roller. After that, the feed clutch /BP (CL6) turns ON. Through these operations, the driving force of M9 is transmitted to the feed roller and the
vertical conveyance roller to conduct the pick-up [3] and the vertical conveyance [4] of the 1st sheet of paper. When paper is conveyed and
the vertical conveyance sensor (PS2) turns ON, CL6 turns OFF to complete the pick-up operation. However, since CL3 keeps turning ON,
paper is conveyed to the registration section by the vertical conveyance roller. In this way, when the registration sensor (PS1) turns ON, CL3
turns OFF a specified period of time after that. The pick-up [6] and the vertical conveyance [8] of the 2nd and succeeding sheets of paper are
conducted using the paper feed request signal [5] as a starting point. When the last paper turns ON PS2, SD1 turns ON to bring down [7] the
lift plate.
[1] [3] [4] [5] [6] [8]
Feed motor (M9)
Vertical conveyance sensor (PS2)
Pick-up solenoid /BP (SD1)
Feed clutch /BP (CL6)
Vertical conveyance clutch (CL3)
[2] [7] 50gat2c102na
[1] Print start signal ON [2] Lift plate goes up

[3] Pick-up of the 1st paper [4] Vertical conveyance of the 1st paper
[5] Paper feed request signal [6] Pick-up of the 2nd paper
[7] Lift plate goes down [8] Vertical conveyance of the 2nd paper
(2) Separation mechanism

The separation roller [7] is pressed against the feed roller [1] by the operating pressure generated by the pressure [4] of the spring [5] and the
torque of the torque limiter [6]. This operating pressure of the feed roller, separation roller and torque limiter becomes a limit torque to prevent
the double feed of paper.
When there is no paper between the separation roller and the feed roller, or when only one sheet of paper is conveyed, the operating
pressure of the feed roller, the paper and the spring is in excess of the limit torque, and therefore, the separation roller rotates [3] following the
rotation of the feed roller.
When two or more sheets of paper are conveyed between the separation roller and the feed roller, the limit torque is greater than the frictional
force between 2 sheets of paper, and accordingly, the separation roller stops and the lower side paper [2] in contact with the separation roller
is not conveyed.
[8] [1]
[7]
[6]
[5] [4] [3] [2]

50gat2c106na
[1] Feed roller [2] 2nd sheet of paper

[3] Driven rotation [4] Pressing
[5] Spring [6] Torque limiter
[7] Separation roller [8] Paper conveyance direction
O-28
10.3.4 Paper empty control
O-29
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub
bizhub 501/421/361 501/421/361 > 11. REGISTRATION SECTION
11. REGISTRATION SECTION

11.1 Composition
[2]
[1]
50gat2c021na
[1] Loop roller [2] Registration roller
11.2 Drive
[1]
[6]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[4]
50gat2c022na
[1] Registration roller [2] Feed motor (M9)

[3] Loop clutch (CL2) [4] Loop roller
[5] Tray 1 [6] Registration clutch (CL1)
11.3 Operation
11.3.1 Loop control
(1) Registration path
Paper fed from the tray 1 [10], the tray 2 [8], the by-pass tray [6], PC/LU [7] and ADU [4] hits against the registration roller [2] through the loop
roller [12]. And until the loop roller turns OFF, a loop is formed [3] and a paper skew is corrected.
The loop roller is driven by the feed motor (M9) and the loop of paper is controlled by the registration sensor (PS1) [13] equipped just before
the registration roller.
O-30
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub
bizhub 501/421/361 501/421/361 > 11. REGISTRATION SECTION
[1]
[13]
[2]
[12]
[3]
[11]
[4]
[10]
[5]
[9]
[6]
[8] [7]
50gat2c055na
[1] Drum [2] Registration roller

[3] Loop [4] ADU paper conveyance
[5] Vertical conveyance section [6] By-pass tray paper conveyance
[7] PC/LU paper conveyance [8] Tray 2 paper conveyance
[9] Paper feed unit /2 [10] Tray 1 paper conveyance
[11] Paper feed unit /1 [12] Loop roller
[13] Registration sensor (PS1) -
(2) Registration operation

The feed motor (M9) and the loop clutch (CL2) are turned ON by the print start signal [1]. In this way, the driving force of M9 is transmitted to
the loop roller and paper conveyed from each of the paper feed sections is conveyed to the registration roller. When the registration sensor
(PS1) detects the leading edge of paper and turns ON [3], CL2 turns OFF a specified period of time after that. At this time, since paper is
being conveyed for a specified period of time after being hit against the registration roller, a loop [4] is formed and a paper skew is corrected.
The print signal [5] turns ON the registration clutch (CL1) to transmit the driving force of M9 to the registration roller. At this time, CL2 also
turns ON to drive the loop roller for a loop assist [7].
When PS1 detects the trailing edge of paper and turns OFF [8], CL1 also turns OFF a specified period of time after that to complete the
registration operation. However, CL2 keeps tuning ON to conduct a loop formation [9] of the next paper. After that, the same operations are
repeated.
When PS1 detects the trailing edge of the last paper and turns OFF [11], M9, CL1 and CL2 also turn OFF a specified period of time after that
to complete a series of registration operations.
[1] [2] [3] [5] [7] [8] [10] [11]
Feed motor (M9)
Loop clutch (CL2)
[4] [6] [9] 50gat2c056na
[1] Print start signal [2] Conveyance of the 1st paper

[3] Detection of the leading edge of 1st paper [4] Loop formation of the 1st paper
[5] Print signal for the 1st paper [6] 1st paper registration roller ON
[7] Loop assist of the 1st paper, and conveyance of 2nd of [8] Detection of the trailing edge of the 1st paper
paper
[9] Loop formation of the 2nd paper [10] Print signal for the 2nd paper
[11] Detection of the trailing edge of the last paper -
O-31
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 501/421/361 > 12. ADU
12. ADU SECTION

12.1 Composition
[1]
[2]
50gat2c023na
[1] Conveyance roller /1 [2] Conveyance roller /2
12.2 Drive
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
[6]
[5] 50gat2c024na
[1] ADU conveyance clutch /Up (CL7) [2] Conveyance roller /1

[3] ADU conveyance clutch /Lw (CL8) [4] Conveyance roller /2
[5] Conveyance roller /3 [6] Feed motor (M9)
12.3 Operation
12.3.1 Conveyance path
Paper the one side of which has been printed is conveyed to ADU by the reverse roller [12]. The paper conveyed to ADU is also conveyed to
the loop roller [6], the registration roller [7] and the drum [8] by the conveyance rollers /1 [2], /2 [3] and /3 [5] and the other side is printed. Paper
both sides of which has been printed passes through the fusing roller [9] and fusing exit roller [10] to be exited from the main body paper exit
roller [11].
The conveyance rollers /1, /2 and /3 are driven by the feed motor (M9), but the ON/OFF of the conveyance roller /1 is controlled by the ADU
conveyance clutch /Up (CL7) and that of the conveyance rollers /2 and /3 controlled by the ADU conveyance clutch /Lw (CL8). This control is
O-32
used to prevent the interference of each sheet of paper that circulates through the conveyance path when two or more sheets of paper are
printed. And, to detect the position of paper that is circulating, the ADU conveyance sensor /1 (PS24) [1] and /2 (PS25) [4] are equipped.
[12]
[1]
[11]
[10] [2]
[9]
[3]
[8]
[7]
[4]
[6]
[5]
50gat2c057na
[1] ADU conveyance sensor /1 (PS24) [2] Conveyance roller /1

[3] Conveyance roller /2 [4] ADU conveyance sensor /2 (PS25)
[5] Conveyance roller /3 [6] Loop roller
[7] Registration roller [8] Drum
[9] Fusing roller [10] Fusing exit roller
[11] Main body paper exit roller [12] Reverse roller
12.3.2 Conveyance control

When printing two or more sheets of paper in the double sided print mode, the conveyance control in ADU varies according to the length of
paper in the sub scan direction. The following 3 control methods are provided for the conveyance control.
Conveyance control Length of applicable paper in the sub scan direction
1 sheet self-contained double sided print B4 (364 mm) to Ledger (431.8 mm)
2 sheets self-contained double sided print Letter (215.9 mm) to B4 (364 mm)
3 sheets self-contained double sided print B5 (182 mm) to Letter (215.9 mm)
(1) 1 sheet self-contained double sided print operation

Note
• A figure in the illustration (shown in the square) represents the page number.
1. With the 1st sheet of paper fed, the image of the 2nd page (the
back side of the 1st sheet of paper when the original is double
sided) is printed.
50gat2c058na
2. The 1st sheet of paper is conveyed to the paper reverse/exit

section, and then conveyed to ADU after being turned over.
2
50gat2c059na
O-33
3. The 1st sheet of paper in ADU is conveyed without interruption.
50gat2c060na
4. The 1st sheet of paper is fed again and the image of the 1st page
(the front side of the 1st sheet of paper when the original is double
sided) is printed.
1
2
50gat2c061na
5. With the 2nd sheet of paper fed while exiting the 1st sheet of
paper, the image of the 4th page (the back side of the 2nd sheet of
2 paper when the original is double sided) is printed.
6. After this, the procedure of steps 2 to 5 is repeated.
1
50gat2c062na
(2) 2 sheets self-contained double sided print operation

Note
1. With the 1st sheet of paper fed, the image of the 2nd page (the
sided) is printed.
50gat2c063na

section and then conveyed to ADU after being turned over. At this
2 time, the 2nd sheet of paper is fed.
50gat2c064na
3. The image of the 4th page (the back side of the 2nd sheet of paper
when the original is double sided) is printed on the 2nd sheet of
4 paper. At this time, the 1st sheet of paper is conveyed into ADU.
50gat2c065na
O-34
4 sided) is printed. At this time, the 3rd sheet of paper is fed and the
2nd sheet of paper is turned over at the paper reverse/exit section
to be conveyed into ADU.
1 2
50gat2c066na
5. While the 1st sheet of paper is being exited, the image of the 6th
page (the back side of the 3rd sheet of paper when the original is
double sided) is printed on the 3rd sheet of paper. At this time, the
2nd sheet of paper is standing by on this side of the conveyance
2
roller /3.
1
6
50gat2c067na
6. The 3rd sheet of paper is conveyed to ADU after being turned over
at the paper reverse/exit section. At this time, the 2nd sheet of
6 paper that has been standing by is fed again.
2
1
50gat2c068na
7. The image of the 3rd page (the front side of the 2nd sheet of paper
when the original is double sided) is printed on the 2nd sheet of
6 paper. At this time, the 3rd sheet of paper has been conveyed into
2
ADU and the 4th sheet of paper is fed at the same time.
1 3 4
50gat2c069na
8. While the 2nd sheet of paper is being exited, the image of the 8th
page (the back side of the 4th sheet of paper when the original is
double sided) is printed on the 4th sheet of paper. At this time, the
4
3rd sheet of paper is standing by on this side of the conveyance
roller /3.
3 8
2
1
6
50gat2c070na
9. The 4th sheet of paper is turned over at the paper reverse/exit

section to be conveyed to ADU. At this time, the 3rd sheet of paper
8 that has been standing by is fed again.
4
10. After this, the procedure of steps 7 to 9 is repeated.
3
2
1
6
50gat2c071na
(3) 3 sheets self-contained double sided print operation

Note
O-35
1. The 1st sheet of paper is fed and the image of the 2nd page (the
sided) is printed.
50gat2c072na

section and then conveyed to ADU after being turned over. At this
2 time, the 2nd sheet of paper is fed and the image of the 4th page
(the back side of the 2nd sheet of paper when the original is
double sided) is printed.
4
50gat2c073na
3. The 1st sheet of paper is standing by at the conveyance roller /3.

The 2nd sheet of paper is turned over at the paper reverse/exit
4 section to be conveyed to ADU. At this time, the 3rd sheet of paper
is fed and the image of the 6th page (the back side of the 3rd
sheet of paper when the original is double sided) is printed.
6
50gat2c074na
4. The 3rd sheet of paper is conveyed to the paper reverse/exit

section and the 2nd sheet of paper is conveyed in ADU without
6 4 interruption. However, the 1st sheet of paper remains standing by
at the conveyance roller /3.
50gat2c075na
6 sided) is printed. At this time, the 3rd sheet of paper is turned over
to be sent to ADU and the 2nd sheet of paper is standing by at the
conveyance roller /3. In this way, the 4th sheet of paper is fed.
1 2
50gat2c076na
6. While the 1st sheet of paper is being exited, the image of the 8th
6 double sided) is printed on the 4th sheet of paper. At this time,
since the 2nd sheet of paper is standing by at the conveyance
2 roller /3, the 3rd sheet of paper stops when the interval between
1 this sheet and the 2nd sheet of paper comes to the prescribed
8 distance.
4
50gat2c077na
O-36
7. The 4th sheet of paper is conveyed to the paper reverse/exit
section. At this time, the conveyance of the 2nd and the 3rd sheets
8 of paper resumes in ADU.
6
2
1
50gat2c078na
8. The 2nd sheet of paper is fed again and the image of the 3rd page
(the front side of the 2nd sheet of paper when the original is double
8 sided) is printed. The 4th sheet of paper is turned over to be sent
to ADU with the 3rd sheet of paper standing by at the conveyance
2
roller /3. In this way, the 5th sheet of paper is fed.
1
3 4
50gat2c079na
9. While the 2nd sheet of paper is being exited, the image of the 10th
8 double sided) is printed on the 5th sheet of paper. At this time,
since the 3rd sheet of paper is standing by at the conveyance
4 roller /3, the 4th sheet of paper stops when the interval between
3 this sheet and the 3rd sheet of paper comes to the prescribed
2 10 distance.
1 10. After this, the procedure of steps 7 to 9 is repeated.
6
50gat2c080na
O-37
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 501/421/361 > 13. FUSING
13. FUSING SECTION

13.1 Composition
[5] [6] [7] [8] [1]
[4] [3] [2]
50gat2c025na
[1] Decurler roller [2] Fusing claw

[3] Fusing pressure roller [4] Fusing heater lamp /2 (L3)
[5] Fusing web [6] Fusing heater lamp /1 (L2)
[7] Fusing roller [8] Paper exit roller
13.2 Drive
[1]
[2]
50gat2c026na
[1] Fusing unit drive [2] Fusing motor (M11)
13.3 Operation
13.3.1 Fusing roller drive control
(1) Speed switchover control
The process speed is switched over between the high speed and the low speed according to the type of paper selected in the paper setting of
the setup menu. However, the low speed is applicable in the thick paper, envelop, OHP, and label paper mode.
Machine type Normal Thick paper, envelop, OHP
and label paper mode
bizhub 501 250mm/s 125mm/s
bizhub 421/361 210mm/s
(2) Preliminary rotation control

While in the warm-up, the preliminary rotation is conducted for the fusing roller and the fusing pressure roller.
The time of preliminary rotation varies according to the detected temperature of the drum temperature sensor and the thermistors /1 (TH1)
and /2 (TH2). And the starting temperature of the preliminary rotation varies for bizhub 501 and 421/361.
(3) Rotation control while in the print

The fusing motor (M11) that drives the fusing roller and the fusing pressure roller is turned ON by the print start signal. And it turns OFF a
specified period of time after the fusing exit sensor (PS3) detects the trailing edge of the last paper.
While in the print with paper stopping at the registration section, the fusing roller and the fusing pressure roller run idle. In this way, the fusing
temperature gets near to the set temperature for each type of paper selected in the paper setting of the setup menu.
13.3.2 Web drive control

The fusing web is driven by the web solenoid (SD4).
The number of ON times is controlled by SD4 according to the web count of the fixed part counter so that the web shift amount per print
becomes constant.
O-38
13.3.3 Fusing temperature control

The fusing roller is heated by the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2 (L3). The fusing pressure roller is heated by the thermal conduction from the
fusing roller.
The surface temperature of the fusing roller is detected by the thermistors /1 (TH1) [2] and /2 (TH2) [1]. TH1 and TH2 monitor the surface
temperature of the fusing roller at specified intervals to control the ON/OFF of L2 and L3 through the AC drive circuit in the DC power supply
(DCPS) so that a prescribed temperature can be obtained.
[1] [2]
50gat2c081na
[1] Thermistor /2 (TH2) [2] Thermistor /1 (TH1)
(1) Warm-up
Warm-up is conducted when the main power switch (SW1), the power switch (SW2) and the interlock switch (MS) turn ON, and also when the
system returns from the low power mode or the sleep mode.
While in the warm-up, the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2 (L3) turn ON. And it turns OFF at the prescribed temperature. The temperature at
which the warm-up completes varies for bizhub 501 and 421/361.
(2) While in the print

The set temperature of the fusing roller varies according to the type of paper and the paper size. The ON/OFF of the fusing heater lamps /1
(L2) and /2 (L3) are controlled so that the prescribed temperature is obtained.
When plain paper or thick paper is selected, to prevent the set temperature from going down due to the passage of paper, the set temperature
is raised up to the prescribed temperature for a specified period of time from the start of printing for each print.
When the fusing roller and the fusing pressure roller are stopped due to the completion or interruption of the print, each roller is kept running
for a specified period of time after L2 and L3 turn OFF to avoid an overshoot.
(3) While in the stand-by

While in the stand-by condition, the temperature of the fusing roller is controlled in 3 steps according to the elapsed time after the completion
of warm-up or printing, whether DF is opened or closed, and whether each key is pushed down or not.
While in the stand-by, the ON/OFF of the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2 (L3) are controlled so that the fusing roller gets to the prescribed
temperature.
Through these control operations, an overshoot is avoided and fusibility immediately after the release from the stand-by condition is secured.
(4) Low power mode and sleep mode

When each key is not pressed within a specified period of time after the completion of the last print, the system changes into the low power
mode or the sleep mode. The starting time for operation can be set individually for the low power mode and the sleep mode. When the same
starting time for operation is set for both modes, the sleep mode takes precedence over the low power mode.
When the system changes into the low power mode, the ON/OFF of the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2 (L3) is controlled so that the fusing
roller gets to the prescribed temperature. The controlled temperature at this time becomes lower than other controlled temperatures. And
when the system changes into the sleep mode, the power supply to L2 and L3 is shut off to put the system in the stand-by condition.
13.3.4 Fusing roller edge cooling control

(1) Purpose
When printing continuously the sheets of paper the size of which is short in the main scan direction, the temperature gets high at both edges
of the fusing roller and the fusing pressure roller where no paper passages is made. So, to prevent the temperature from getting high, the
edges of each roller are cooled down by the fusing cooling fans /Fr (FM2) and /Rr (FM8). This control operation is also conducted to avoid a
fusing overshoot when the main body makes an emergency stop due to the occurrence of a jam.
(2) Fusing cooling fan control

The fusing cooling fans /Fr (FM2) and /Rr (FM8) vary depending on whether the size of paper in the main scan direction is large or small. And
their operations also vary when a jam occurs.
(a) Small size

Small size paper refers to the one the size of which is 200 mm or less in the main scan direction.
• ON timing
When the fusing exit sensor (PS3) detects the leading edge of paper exited and turns ON.
• OFF timing
When the fusing motor (M11) turns OFF.
O-39
(b) Large size

Large size paper refers to the one the size of which is 201 mm or more in the main scan direction.
• ON timing
When the detected temperature of the thermistor /2 (TH2) is over the prescribed temperature.
• OFF timing
When the detected temperature of TH2 goes down below the prescribed temperature.
(c) When a jam occurs.

• ON timing
A jam is detected inside the main body.
• OFF timing
A specified period of time after the fusing cooling fans /Fr (FM2) and /Rr (FM8) turn ON.
Note
• When the power switch (SW2) turns OFF due to the occurrence of a jam, or when the interlock switch (MS) is turned OFF by
opening ADU, the power supply to each fan is shut off and, even if it is within a specified period of time, the fan turns OFF.
However, when SW2 and MS are turned ON within a specified period of time, FM2 and FM8 turn ON again.
(3) Fusing cooling path

The air inside the machine is sucked in by the fusing cooling fans /Fr (FM2) [6] and /Rr (FM8) [1] to be blown against the edges of the fusing
roller [3] through the ducts [2] and [5]. In this way, the edges of the fusing roller are cooled down and the surface temperature of the edges of
the fusing pressure roller [4] that is in contact also goes down.
[1]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[4]
[5]
50gat2c082na
[1] Fusing cooling fan /Rr (FM8) [2] Duct

[3] Fusing roller [4] Fusing pressure roller
[5] Duct [6] Fusing cooling fan /Fr (FM2)
13.3.5 Envelope conveyance mechanism

When printing envelopes, to prevent the occurrence of paper crease due to the thickness of paper, it is possible to switch the nip pressure of the
fusing roller and the fusing pressure roller. The nip pressure is manually switched by the envelope lever [1].
[1]
50gat2c083na
[1] Envelope lever -
13.3.6 Protection against abnormality

When the thermistors /1 (TH1) and /2 (TH2) detects a stipulated temperature (233?C) 5 times at the prescribed intervals, this is deemed to be a
high temperature abnormality and the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2 (L3) are turned OFF. The thermostat (TS) also monitors an abnormal
temperature rise and, when the detected temperature gets to 220 ? 10?C, the AC power lines to L2 and L3 are shut off.
For each condition in the warm-up, print, stand-by and the low power modes, the detected temperatures of TH1 and TH2 and the number of
times when L2 and L3 turned ON are calculated. And it is considered that a low temperature abnormality occurs when certain conditions are
met. When a low temperature abnormality occurs, the power supply to L2 and L3 is cut off.
When these fusing temperature abnormalities occur, the system is placed in the SC latch condition with a message shown in the touch panel.
After repairing with the cause of abnormality identified, it is necessary to release the SC latch by the software DipSW3-1 for restoration.
O-40
RL1 DCPS
TS
CBR NF
RL2
AC L2
drive
section L3
PRCB
TH1
Control
section
RL RL1
drive
section RL2
TH2
50gat2c084na
13.3.7 Jam detection control

Only while in the print, when the detected temperatures of the thermistors /1 (TH1) and /2 (TH2) go down in a moment more than the prescribed
temperature, this is considered as a wind-up jam and the operation of the main body is stopped with a message shown in the touch panel.
O-41
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 501/421/361 > 14. REVERSE/
bizhub 501/421/361 EXIT SECTION
14. REVERSE/EXIT SECTION

14.1 Composition
[6] [7] [1]
[3] [2]
[5] [4]
50gat2c027na
[1] Exhaust fan /Fr (FM3) [2] Reverse roller

[3] Reverse gate [4] Reverse solenoid (SD3)
[5] Reverse gate [6] Reverse roller
[7] Exhaust fan /Rr (FM9) -
14.2 Drive
[4] [1]
[3] [2]
50gat2c028na
[1] Reverse motor (M6) [2] Reverse solenoid (SD3)

[3] Reverse gate [4] Reverse roller
14.3 Operation
14.3.1 Conveyance control
(1) Reverse gate
The reverse gate is driven by the ON/OFF of the reverse solenoid (SD3). Paper conveyed from the fusing section is switched by the reverse
gate between the paper exit section and the reverse section.
(2) Conveyance path

(a) Paper exit path
The reverse solenoid (SD3) is normally turned OFF and the reverse gate [1] is held in the position in which it blocks the conveyance path to
the reverse roller [4]. In this manner, paper conveyed from the fusing exit roller (decurler roller) [2] is guided to the main body paper exit
roller [3] along the internal form of the reverse gate to be exited.
O-42
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
50gat2c085na
[1] Reverse gate [2] Fusing exit roller (decurler roller)

(b) Reverse path

While in the double sided print, the reverse solenoid (SD3) turns ON when the print on the back side is completed, and the reverse gate [1]
is switched in the direction in which the conveyance path to the reverse roller [4] is opened. In this way, paper conveyed from the fusing exit
roller (decurler roller) [2] is guided to the reverse roller along the external form of the reverse gate.
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
50gat2c086na
[1] Reverse gate [2] Fusing exit roller (decurler roller)

14.3.2 Reverse control

(1) Switch-back mechanism
While in the double sided print, paper that passes through the reverse gate [3] is conveyed to the outside of the main body by the reverse
roller [5] and then sent back again to the inside of the main body. At this time, the paper is guided to the conveyance roller /1 [1] side, not to
the reverse gate side from the metal frame form of the conveyance path. In this way, the paper is turned over to be conveyed to the
registration section again through ADU.
The ON/OFF timing of the reverse solenoid (SD3) that drives the reverse gate is controlled by the fusing exit sensor (PS3) [2]. And the
switchover between the normal rotation and the reverse rotation of the reverse motor (M6) that drives the reverse roller is controlled by the
reverse sensor (PS27) [4].
[5]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
50gat2c087na
[1] Conveyance roller /1 [2] Fusing exit sensor (PS3)

[3] Reverse gate [4] Reverse sensor (PS27)
O-43
[5] Reverse roller -
(2) Reverse control

While in the double sided print, when the fusing exit sensor (PS3) detects the leading edge of paper of which the printing of the back side has
been completed and turns ON [1], the reverse solenoid (SD3) turns ON to switch the reverse gate a specified period of time after the
registration clutch (CL1) turns ON for back side printing. In this manner, the paper is conveyed to the reverse section. A specified period of
time after the reverse sensor (PS27) detects the leading edge of paper and turns ON [2], the reverse motor (M6) rotates in the normal
direction [3] and the reverse roller conveys the paper to the outside of the main body. And then, a specified period of time after PS3 detects
the trailing edge of the paper and turns OFF [4], SD3 turns OFF [5] to bring the reverse gate back to its original position. And when PS27
detects the trailing edge of the paper and turns OFF [6], the rotation of M6 is switched [7] from the normal rotation to the reverse rotation and
the reverse roller sends the paper back to the inside of the main body to convey it to ADU. In this manner, the paper is turned over.
[1] [3] [5] [7]
Normal
rotation
Reverse motor (M6)
Reverse
rotation
Reverse solenoid (SD3)
Reverse sensor (PS27)
[2] [4] [6] 50gat2c088na
[1] Switchover of the reverse gate [2] Detection of the leading edge of paper
[3] Normal rotation of the reverse roller ON [4] Detection of the trailing edge of paper
[5] Return to the reverse gate [6] Detection of the trailing edge of paper
[7] Switchover of the reverse roller from the normal rotation -
to the reverse rotation
O-44
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 501/421/361 > 15. INTERFACE
15. INTERFACE SECTION

15.1 Composition
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
a0r5t2c001ca
[1] Serial port (RS-232C) [2] CF card slot

[3] RJ45 Ethernet connector [4] USB port /1 (USB TypeA)
[5] USB port /2 (USB TypeA) [6] USB port /4 (USB TypeB)
[7] Service port [8] USB port /3 (USB TypeA)
15.2 Specifications
Item Specifications
Serial port (RS-232C) For CS Remote Care
CF card slot System management for CF card
CF card stored the following programs and the datas
• MFP controller program (Firmware)
• The datas (Utility/Administrator Setting Data,
Destination Storage Data, CS Remote Care
Setting Data, All History Data) that initialized in the
[System 1]-[Initialization] of the service mode
• HDD serial number
• HDD model type
RJ45 Ethernet connector Network connection, Internet for ISW
USB port /1 (USB TypeA) USB ISW, For authentication device
USB port /2 (USB TypeA) (Biometric type: AU-101 or IC card
type: AU-201)
USB port /3 (USB TypeA) Scan to USB, USB for print
USB port /4 (USB TypeB) For the local connection when
installed EK-703 (Option)
Service port For the production adjustment
This is not used in the field
O-45
O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 501/421/361 > 16. IMAGE
bizhub 501/421/361 STABILIZATION CO...
16. IMAGE STABILIZATION CONTROL

16.1 Outline
This machine employs various image stabilization controls to realize the top quality print image at all times. The operation of the image
stabilization control varies between while in the power switch (SW2) ON and while in the print.
16.2 Operation flow

16.2.1 Image stabilization control flow when the power switch (SW2) is turned ON
The following shows the operation flow of the image stabilization control when the SW2 is turned ON.
Power ON E. Environmental decision control
A. Fusing heater lamp early turn-ON
B. Drum rotation
D. Fusing preliminary rotation
C. Dot diameter adjustment control
Stand-by
(1) Fusing heater lamp early turn-ON

(a) Purpose
To meet the warm-up specifications, the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2 (L3) are turned ON early enough so that the surface
temperature of the fusing roller goes up to the prescribed temperature in its early stage.
(b) Execution timing

When the power switch (SW2) is turned ON, without waiting for the initialization of the overall control, the fusing heater lamp is turned ON
by the signal on the printer control board (PRCB). However, since turning ON the fusing heater lamps /1 (L2) and /2 (L3) at the same time
causes an excessive inrush current, turn ON L3 first, and then turn ON L2 a little after that. After turning ON L2 and L3, conduct the ON/
OFF control at specified intervals to maintain the prescribed temperature of the fusing roller that is stipulated in each operation mode.
(2) Drum rotation

(a) Purpose
• Prevent the drum charge leak such as an image flow at high humidity
• When left in the low/normal humidity condition, prevent the uneven density due to the difference in sensitivity between the section
facing the cleaner and the developing of the drum and other sections.

It turns ON a specified period of time after the power switch (SW2) turns ON, and turns OFF when the dot diameter adjustment is
completed. However, when the 30 seconds extension of the early morning drum rotation is selected in the software DipSW setting, it turns
OFF 30 seconds after the completion of the dot diameter adjustment.
Note
• For bizhub 421/361, since the early morning dot diameter adjustment is not selected by default, no drum rotation is made.
(3) Dot diameter adjustment control

(a) Purpose
Stabilize the image over a long period of time by preventing the change of the laser 1 dot diameter due to the write system being stained or
the change of developability.
(b) Method
• Create a dot pattern patch of a fixed density on the drum. The laser PWM at this time is maximum.
• Read this dot pattern patch with the IDC sensor (IDCS) and calculate the difference between the sensor output and the specified value.
• Determine the correction amount of the laser power based on a value calculated to make corrections of the laser power.
• Repeat several times the control operations described above.
(c) Execution timing

When left for more than 8 hours, executed a specified period of time after the power switch (SW2) is turned ON. However, this can be
changed with the software DipSW setting.
Note
• For bizhub 421/361, since the early morning dot diameter adjustment is not selected by default, no execution is made.
(4) Fusing preliminary rotation

(a) Purpose
Make uniform the surface temperature of the fusing roller and the fusing pressure roller.

When the detected temperature of the thermistors /1 (TH1) and /2 (TH2) gets to the stipulated temperature.
O-46
bizhub 501/421/361 STABILIZATION CO...
Note
• The stipulated temperature at which the fusing preliminary rotation is made varies for bizhub 501 and 421/361.
(5) Environmental decision control

(a) Purpose
To detect the environmental temperature and humidity to maintain the image quality, feedback is made to various controls.
(b) Method
A temperature sensor and a humidity sensor are equipped inside the machine.

When the power switch (SW2) is turned ON, and only when it has been left unused for more than 8 hours after the SW2 was turned OFF
last time and the fusing temperature is considered below the stipulated temperature, an environmental decision is made based on a value
measured by the sensor.
16.2.2 Image stabilization control flow while in the print and the idle
The following shows the image stabilization control flow while in the print and the idle.
Print start signal ON
Every 20 prints
Start of print
A. Toner density control

C. Dot diameter adjustment control
B. Developing potential adjustment control
End of print
Stand-by
(1) Toner density control

(a) Method
• Output value obtained through the TCR adjustment which is performed after developer replacement is used as the base.
• Toner density in the developing unit is always detected with the TCR sensor. The detected TCR sensor output value is compared with
the base value and if it is lower than the base, toner supply is started.
(2) Developing potential adjustment control

(a) Purpose
Because of developer and photosensitive material being deteriorated due to durability, it becomes difficult to secure the stable amount of
toner on the photosensitive material. For that reason, calculate the correction amount based on the machine inside temperature and the
time period during which the photosensitive material is driven and make corrections of the output values of the charging grid and the
developing bias to secure the stable amount of toner.
(b) Method
Detect the machine inside humidity with the humidity sensor (HUMS) when turning ON the power switch (SW2) 8 hours or more after
turning it OFF.
Calculate the correction amount based on the machine inside humidity detected and the time period during which the photosensitive
material is driven.
Make corrections of the output value of the charging grid and the developing bias based on the correction amount calculated.
When the time period during which SW2 is turned ON after OFF is less than 8 hours, use the value of the machine inside humidity detected
last time.

For each job print.
(3) Dot diameter adjustment

(a) Purpose
While in the continuous print, reduce the variance in image density for each print.
(b) Method
• Create a dot pattern patch between images of which more than 20 prints have been run off. The laser PWM at this time is maximum.
• Read this dot pattern patch with the IDC sensor (IDCS) and calculate the difference between the sensor output and the specified value.
• Determine the correction amount of the laser power based on a value calculated to make corrections of the laser power.
• Repeat several times the control operations described above.
O-47
bizhub 501/421/361 PROCESSING
17. IMAGE PROCESSING

17.1 Image processing in the scanner section
17.1.1 Image processing flow in the scanner section
A. Shading correction
B. AE control
C. Area discrimination
D. Brightness/density conversion
E. Filter/magnification
F. Density gamma (conversion)
G. Half tone processing (error diffusion)
H. Compression
I. Storage of image data (option)
17.1.2 Shading correction

This is the measure to obtain an even distribution from light of the CCD sensor. The following corrections are made at the prescribed timing.
(1) White correction

The output voltage of each pixel of the CCD sensor when the white reference plate is exposed to the exposure lamp is stored as the
maximum output of the pixel.
(2) Black correction

The output voltage of each pixel of the CCD sensor when the exposure lamp is turned off is stored as the minimum output of the pixel.
Conduct calculation to find out what step in this range falls on the image data read from the original based on the difference between the
black and white data for each pixel stored in the steps a. and b. above, and output the results of the calculation in the 10 bits accuracy.
Voltage at which the read is made

[1] White
+1.4
0V
Black
Width in which the read is made
After shading correction

[2]
1024 White
0
Black
Width in which the read is made
50gat2c091nb
[1] AD conversion input [2] Shading correction output
17.1.3 AE control
Through the AE control, a density suitable for the original density is automatically selected and the copy is made properly.
O-48
(1) Sampling area

(a) While in the platen mode
[5]
[1]
[7]
[6]
[5]
[2] [2]
[4]
[3]
50gat2c092na
[1] Original [2] L/100 mm

[3] L mm [4] 30 mm
[5] 10 mm [6] Leading edge of the original
[7] AE sampling range -
(b) While in the DF mode
[4]
[1]
[6]
[5]
[4]
[3] [2]
50gat2c093na
[1] Original [2] 2.9 mm

[3] 1.5 mm [4] 20 mm
[5] Leading edge of the original [6] AE sampling range

• While in the platen print: At the pre-scan before the actual scan when the print or the read starts.
• While in the DF print: At the same time as when the original is read.
17.1.4 Area discrimination

To make a copy of the original under the correct condition (to make a correct filter processing), check the read section to see if it is a character
or a dot picture, and use the results at the image processing unit at the later stage.
17.1.5 Brightness/density conversion

The signal obtained after the shading correction is a signal corresponding to the light reflected from the original, and this is generally called a
brightness signal. In this brightness/density conversion section, the brightness signal is converted in density as shown in the graph below.
255
Density
0 Brightness 1024 50gat2c094na
O-49
17.1.6 Filter/magnification
(1) Filter processing
An appropriate filter processing is made according to the type of an original and the magnification selected.
(1) Character: Make the shading of an original conspicuous.
(2) Dot section: Suppress moire.
(3) Picture: Increase the reproducibility of gradation.
(2) Magnification processing

For this machine, the sub scan direction magnification is made by the scan speed of the exposure unit (platen mode) or by the conveyance
speed of the DF (DF mode), and the main scan direction magnification is made by processing images electrically.
(a) Main scan magnification processing while in enlargement

As shown in the drawing below, if the data of each pixel obtained when the original is read by the CCD are D1 to D5, the positions of the
data read when enlarged are E1 to E5. However, when the write is made only with the data thus read, the following problems occur.
a. There occurs a clearance between data, and this results in a distorted image.
b. The data position does not fall in exactly with the write position.
As shown with dotted lines in the drawing below, when there is no read data that corresponds exactly to the write position, a density is
decided for the write as shown below and appropriate processing is made.
[1] D1 D2 D3 D4 D5
[2] E1 E2 E3 E4 E5
[3] W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8
50gat2c095na
[1] Position at which the original is read [2] Data position while in enlargement
[3] Write position -
(b) Main scan magnification processing while in reduction

As shown in drawing below, if the data of each pixel obtained when the original is read by the CCD are D1 to D5, the positions of the data
read when reduced are R1 to R5. They are overlapping each other and do not correspond to the write position. Therefore, a density is
decided for the write as shown below and an appropriate processing is made.
[1] D1 D2 D3 D4 D5
[2] R1 R2 R3 R4 R5
[3] W1 W2 W3 W4 W5
50gat2c096na
[1] Position at which the original is read [2] Data position while in reduction
[3] Write position -
(c) Density adjustment

With the density (256 gradation) shown in the axis of coordinate and the position shown in the axis of abscissas, when E2-E1 in the drawing
of "(1) Main scan magnification processing while in enlargement" is shown in 16 steps in the direction of the axis of abscissas, the following
drawing is obtained. When the position to the written data W2 is " ," the density S can be obtained in the following expression.
S = E1 + {(E2 - E1) / 16} x
O-50
255
E2
W2
S
Density
E1
0
0 Position 15 50gat2c097na
17.1.7 Scanner gamma correction

To the data obtained after the filter/magnification processing, select a density curve corresponding to the density button selected on the
operation panel. An appropriate density curve is provided for each of the character/picture/character and the picture/thin character modes.
17.1.8 Halftone processing (error diffusion)

To make effective use of the installed memory and obtain an excellent copy image, error diffusion processing is employed, which is one of the
pseudo-intermediate processing methods.
17.1.9 Compression
To store more image data, data is stored temporarily in the image memory after the images has been compressed.
17.1.10 Storage of image data

The image/setting of the originals read by the scanner or the images sent from the IC can be stored as a file in the hard disk in the main body.
(option)
17.2 Image processing in the write section
A. Rotation/elongation
B. Frequency conversion
C. PWM
(1) Rotation/elongation
Rotate the image in the direction of 90 degrees and 180 degrees as necessary.
When outputting images from the memory, expand the compressed data to restore them to their original state.
(2) Frequency conversion

Write in the memory once the data after the PWM conversion and read it in accord with the write clock signal of the printer.
(3) PWM
The period of time the laser is turned ON is changed by changing the pulse width.
O-51
bizhub 501/421/361 O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 501/421/361 > 18. OTHERS
18. OTHERS
18.1 Fan control
18.1.1 Composition
[9] [10] [11]
[8]
[7]
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
50gat2c029nb
[1] Exhaust fan /Rr (FM9) [2] Exhaust fan /Fr (FM3)
[3] CPU cooling fan (FM11) [4] Conveyance suction fan (FM5)
[5] Drum cooling fan (FM4) [6] Developing suction fan (FM6)
[7] Fusing cooling fan /Fr (FM2) [8] Fusing cooling fan /Rr (FM8)
[9] Power supply cooling fan (FM1) [10] Overall control board cooling fan (FM10)
[11] Developing cooling fan (FM7) -
18.1.2 Operation
(1) Power supply cooling fan (FM1) control
(a) Purpose
Cool down the DC power supply (DCPS) and the high voltage unit (HV2) with suction air.
(b) ON timing
• It turns ON a specified period of time after the drum motor (M1) turns ON.
• While in the auto toner supply mode and the TCR adjustment mode, it turns ON in synch with the turn-ON of M1.
• While in the low power mode and the stand-by condition, it turns ON in synch with the turn-ON of the drum cooling fan (FM4).
(c) OFF timing

• While in the initial charging mode, the auto toner supply mode and the TCR adjustment mode, it turns OFF in synch with the turn-OFF
of the drum motor (M1).
• In cases other than the above, it turns OFF a specified period of time after M1 turns OFF.
• While in the low power mode and the stand-by condition, it turns OFF in synch with the turn-OFF of FM4.
(2) Fusing cooling fan /Fr (FM2) and /Rr (FM8) control
(a) Purpose
• While in the continuous print of small size paper (paper width: 200 mm or less), cool down both edges of the fusing roller to suppress a
temperature rise on the section of the fusing roller through which no paper passes.
• Suppress a temperature rise when printing large size paper (paper width: 201 mm or more).
• Suppress a fusing overshoot caused by an emergency stop when a jam occurs.
O-52
(b) ON timing
• While in the print of small size paper, they turn ON when the fusing exit sensor detects the first job paper.
• While in the print of large size paper, they turn ON when the thermistor /2 (TH2) goes over the prescribed temperature.
• They turn ON when the print operation is stopped by a jam.
(c) OFF timing

• While in the print of small size paper, they turn OFF in synch with the turn-OFF of the fusing motor (M11).
• While in the print of large size paper, they turn OFF when TH2 detects a temperature lower than the prescribed temperature.
• They turn OFF a specified period of time after it turns ON by a jam.
(3) Exhaust fan /Fr (FM3) and /Rr (FM9) control

(a) Purpose
With exhaust air, cool down paper conveyed and remove heat around the reverse section in the machine.
(b) ON timing
• They turn ON in synch with the turn-ON of the drum motor (M1).
(c) OFF timing

• While in the initial charging mode and the TCR adjustment mode, they turn OFF in synch with the turn-OFF of M1.
• In cases other than the above, they turn OFF a specified period of time after the turn-OFF of M1.
(4) Drum cooling fan (FM4) control

(a) Purpose
Cool around the drum and the toner bottle with suction air.
(b) ON timing
• After completion of the print, it turns ON a specified period of time after the drum motor (M1) turns OFF.
• It turns ON when the machine inside temperature goes over the prescribed temperature.
(c) OFF timing

• It turns OFF a specified period of time after it turns ON after completion of the print.
• While it turns ON after completion of the print, it turns OFF the moment M1 turns ON.
• It turns OFF when the machine inside temperature goes down below the prescribed temperature.
(5) Conveyance suction fan (FM5) control

(a) Purpose
Exhaust by sucking air around the conveyance path between the drum and the fusing unit, and stabilize the conveyability of paper and
remove exhaust heat and ozone at the same time.
(b) ON timing
• It turns ON in synch with the turn-ON of the drum motor (M1).
• While in the low power mode and the stand-by condition, it turns ON in synch with the turn-ON of the drum cooling fan (FM4).
(c) OFF timing

• While in the initial charging and the TCR adjustment mode, it turns OFF in synch with the turn-OFF of M1.
• In cases other than the above, it turns OFF a specified period of time after M1 turns OFF.
• While in the low power mode and the stand-by condition, it turns OFF in synch with the turn-OFF of FM4.
(6) Developing suction fan (FM6) control

(a) Purpose
Suck air from the underside of the developing unit to prevent the splash of toner and exhaust air.
(b) ON timing
• It turns ON in synch with the turn-ON of the developing motor (M3).
(c) OFF timing

• It turns OFF a specified period of time after M3 turns OFF.
• While in the TCR adjustment mode, it turns OFF in synch with the turn-OFF of M3.
(7) Developing cooling fan (FM7)

(a) Purpose
Take in fresh air to cool down the developing motor (M3).
(b) ON timing
• After completion of the print, it turns ON a specified period of time after M3 turns OFF.
• While in the auto toner supply mode, it turns ON in synch with the turn-ON of M3.
O-53
• It turns ON when the machine inside temperature goes over the prescribed temperature.
(c) OFF timing

• After completion of the print, it turns OFF a specified period of time after it turns ON.
• While in the auto toner supply mode, it turns OFF in synch with the turn-OFF of M3.
• It turns OFF when the machine temperature goes down below the prescribed temperature.
(8) Overall control board cooling fan (FM10) control

(a) Purpose
Cool down the overall control board (OACB) with suction air.
(b) ON timing
• It turns ON when the power switch (SW2) turns ON.
(c) OFF timing

• It turns OFF when SW2 turns OFF.
(9) CPU cooling fan (FM11)

(a) Purpose
Blow fresh air on the heat sink and cool down CPU.
(b) ON timing
• It turns ON in synch with the turn-ON of the main power switch (SW1).
(c) OFF timing

• Setting HDD, FAX and the network: Does not turn OFF.
• Not Setting HDD, FAX and the network: Turns OFF only while the sleep mode.
18.2 Counter control

18.2.1 Composition
[2] [1]
CN1000 CN35 CN36

CN939
OACB PRCB CN30 TCT
PWB1 CN936
SDB CN64
3 6 KCT
LCDB
50gat2c030nb
[1] Coin vendor /2 [2] Copy Vender
18.2.2 Operation
(1) Paper exit counter
Item Specifications/mechanism
Total counter (TCT) • Display accumulated number of prints in all print modes.
• Counts up by a paper exit signal.
Electronic counter • Display accumulated number of prints on the touch panel.
• Data collection *1
• Counts up by a paper exit signal.
Key counter (KCT), optional • Counting the designated number of prints allows no further copy
operation (can be removed).
*1 For data collected, See “10.6 Counter” in Field service bizhub 501/421/361 Main body.
O-54
[2] [1]
50gat2c031nb
[1] CN936 (KCT connecting connector) [2] Total counter (TCT)
(2) Coin vendor/2 (Parallel)

The following shows the specifications of the connecting connector
Connector Pin No. Signal name Description Output timing Type of signal
36 1 M1 signal Output from the start key L output while in the print Open collector
being turned ON up to operation output
the completion of paper
exit
2 Paper feed signal Output each time paper L output each time paper
is supplied is supplied from each tray
3 Paper size signal (0) Signal output by paper When the paper size is
sizes *1 changed
4 Paper size signal (1)
7 Double sided print Signal output while in the While in the selection of
selection signal double sided print the double sided print
8 CPF signal (0) Signal output by CPF While in the selection of
modes the CPF mode
9 CPF signal (1)
10 P.GND Ground - -
*1 Output signals by paper sizes
Size Paper size signal
(3) (2) (1) (0)
A3 L L H L
B4 L L L L
A4 L H H L
A4S H L H L
B5 L H L L
B5S H L L L
Special L H L H
11 x 17 L L H H
81/2 x 14 L L L H
81/2 x 11 L H H H
81/2 x 11S H L H H
51/2 x 81/2 / A5 L L H L
8 x 13, 81/8 x 131/4, 81/4 x 13, 81/2 x 13 H L L H
O-55
18.3 Parts that operate when the power switch is turned ON

18.3.1 Parts that operate when the main power switch (SW1) is turned ON
(1) Composition
SW2
SW1 PWB4
PWB1
DCPS
5VDC
IC
12VDC
DCPS
CBR NF OACB FK
section
HD
24VDC SC
PC LU PRCB
50gat2c032nb
(2) Operation
Turning ON the main power switch (SW1) supplies an AC power source to DC power supply (DCPS).
In this way, each power source of 12V DC and 5V DC is supplied to the overall control board (OACB).
OACB supplies 12V DC and 5V DC to the operation board /1 (PWB1) to be placed in the condition of standing by for the turn-ON of the power
switch (SW2).
When equipped optionally with the FAX kit (FK-502) and the hard disk (HD-509), each power source of 12V DC and 5V DC (FK-502) and 5V
DC (HD509) is supplied through OACB.
18.3.2 Parts that operate when the power switch (SW2) is turned ON
(1) Composition
SW2
PWB4
PWB1
SW1
OACB
24VDC
DCPS
RL1
CBR NF
section
RL2
L2, L3
AC drive
section
DCPS
50gat2c033nb
(2) Operation
Turning ON the power switch (SW2) transmits an ON signal of SW2 to the overall control board (OACB) through the operation board /1
(PWB1). In this way, OACB sends out a control signal to the DC power supply (DCPS) and DCPS supplies each power source of 12V DC and
5V DC to all boards and optional devices, including the printer control board (PRCB).
After that, OACB sends out to DCPS a control signal that generates a 24V DC power source, which is supplied to all drive boards and
optional devices. And when the main relay (RL1) and the sub relay (RL2) turn ON, an AC power source is supplied to the fusing heater
lamps /1 (L2) and /2 (L3) to start the initial operation of this machine.
18.4 Authentication unit

18.4.1 Authentication unit (Biometric type) (AU-101)
• A finger vein pattern is used for personal identification.
O-56
• Vein patterns are inside the body and cannot be visually recognized. This makes vein patterns extremely difficult to forge or falsify. The vein
pattern authentication system can provide high security.
• With ultra-red LED radiation, a finger vein pattern is captured by camera and its image is created. The vein pattern image is registered and a
person can be identified if the person's vein pattern matches the registered one at the time of user authentication.
[2]
Vein image
Camera
[1]
Authentication unit (AU-101) A00JT2C256AA
[1] Vein [2] Ultra-red LED
18.4.2 Authentication unit (IC card type: AU-201)

• A non-contact IC card, such as an employee ID card, is used for personal identification.
• The system supports the communications protocol in compliance with Type A, Type B, and Felica (Type C) of ISO14443.
• Only Felica and Type A cards can be used for bizhub 501/421/361 machines.
• Simply placing the IC card on the authentication unit will let the unit read the data from the card.
Abcde Fgdhi
ABCDE_Co.
Non-contact IC card
Authentication unit (AU-201) A00HT2C302AA
O-57
bizhub 501/421/361 PA THEORY OF OPERATION DF-613 > 1. PAPER PATH
PA THEORY OF OPERATION DF-613

1. PAPER PATH
1.1 In 1-sided mode
[3] [2] [1]

16eat1c001na
[1] Exit [2] Conveyance and turnover

[3] Feed (Scanning the 1st side) -
1.2 In 2-sided mode
[3] [2] [1]

16eat1c002na
[1] Exit [2] Conveyance and switchback

[3] Feed (Scanning the 1st side) -
Conveyance and turnover (Scanning the 2nd side)
Conveyance
PA-1
bizhub 501/421/361 PA THEORY OF OPERATION DF-613 > 2. COMPOSITION
2. COMPOSITION
[4]
[3] [2] [1] 16eat2c001na
[1] Document exit section [2] Switchback section

[3] Conveyance section [4] Document feed section
PA-2
bizhub 501/421/361 PA THEORY OF OPERATION DF-613 > 3. DRIVE
3. DRIVE
[1]
[2]
16eat2c002na
[1] Original Feed Motor (M1) [2] Original Conveyance Motor (M2)
PA-3
bizhub 501/421/361 PA THEORY OF OPERATION DF-613 > 4. OPERATION
4. OPERATION
4.1 Document pick-up mechanism
• The Document Pick-Up Section consists of the Pick-Up Rollers, Feed Roller and Separation Roller, and this section is driven by the Original
Feed Motor (M1).
4.1.1 Pick-up operation

• When the Start key is pressed, the Original Feed Motor (M1) [3] starts rotating backward, causing the Pick-Up Roller [4] to lower and start
rotating at the same time. At the same time, the Feed Roller [2] starts rotating.
• The Pick-Up Rollers are in the raised position when in the standby state and in the lowered position during feeding.
[3]
[4]
[2]
[1] 16eat2c003na
[1] Separation Roller [2] Feed Roller

[3] Original Feed Motor (M1) [4] Pick-Up Roller
4.2 Document feed/conveyance mechanism

• When the original reaches the Registration Sensor, the Original Feed Motor (M1) [5] starts rotating forward and, at the same time that the
Pickup Roller goes up, drive is then supplied to the Registration Roller [3].
• When the Original Conveyance Motor (M2) [4] starts rotating forward, the two Conveyance Rollers [2] and the Exit/Turnover Roller [1] feed
the document toward the exit direction.
Direction of
Parts Details
Rotation
Backward
The Pickup Rollers lower and start rotating and the Feed Roller rotates.
rotation
M1
Forward
The Registration Roller rotates.
rotation
Backward The Conveyance Roller and Exit/Turnover Roller rotate in the direction to turn
rotation over the original.
M2
Forward The Conveyance Roller and Exit/Turnover Roller rotate in the direction to feed
rotation the original out.
[5]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
16eat2c004na
[1] Exit/Turnover Roller [2] Conveyance Roller

[3] Registration Roller [4] Original Conveyance Motor (M2)
[5] Original Feed Motor (M1) -
PA-4
(1) Operation flow in the 1-sided mode

[4]
[1]
[3] [2] 16eat2c005na
[1] Exit [2] Original Exit Sensor (PS10)

[3] Scanning the 1st side [4] Original Detection Sensor (PS8)
1. When the Start key is pressed, the Original Feed Motor (M1) starts rotating backward, causing the Pick-Up Roller to lower and start a
paper take-up sequence.
2. A specified period of time after the leading edge of the original turns ON PS8 [4], the scanning of the 1st side of the original starts.
3. The original is conveyed for a given period of time after the trailing edge of the last page of the document has deactivated the PS10 [2]. It
is then fed into [1] the Exit Tray and the Original Conveyance Motor (M2) is deenergized.
(2) Operation flow in the 2-sided mode

1. When the Start key is pressed, the Original Feed Motor (M1) starts turning backward, causing the Pick-Up Roller to lower and start
feeding the 1st page of the document.
A specified period of time after the leading edge of the original turns ON the Original Detection Sensor (PS8) [4], the scanning of the 1st
side of the original starts.
The Original Conveyance Motor (M2) is deenergized to stop [1] the original after the lapse of a given period of time after the trailing edge
of the 1st page has deactivated the Original Exit Sensor (PS10) [2].
[4]
[1]
[3] [2] 16eat2c006na
[1] Stop [2] Original Exit Sensor (PS10)

[3] Scanning the 1st side [4] Original Detection Sensor (PS8)
2. M2 is turned backward to turn over [3] the original. After the Registration Roller, M2 is turned forward to allow the Scanner to scan the
backside of the 1st page.
3. After the conveyance sequence for turnover has been started, the Pressure Roller Release Solenoid (SD1) is energized so that the Exit/
Turnover Roller is retracted.
[3]
[1]
[2] 16eat2c007na
[1] Stop [2] Scanning the 2nd side

[3] Turnover -
4. To ensure that pages of the document are in the proper order, the page is turned over [3] again before being ejected [1] into the Exit Tray.
[3]
[1]
[2] 16eat2c008na
[1] Exit [2] Scanning the 2nd side

[3] Turnover -
PA-5
4.3 Raised/lowered position detecting mechanism

4.3.1 DF 15° open/close detection mechanism
• When DF is closed down to about 15? or less, the Original Cover Angle Detection Lever of the main body is pressed down to turn ON the
APS Timing Sensor (PS31).
4.3.2 DF open/close detection mechanism

• A magnet is provided so that the open/close of DF can be detected on the main body side.
• When DF is closed, the DF Open/Close Switch (SW3) of the main body is turned ON by the magnet.
[1]
a0ret2c001ca
[1] DF Open/Close Switch (SW3) -
PA-6
bizhub 501/421/361 PB THEORY OF OPERATION PC-206 > 1. PAPER PATH
PB THEORY OF OPERATION PC-206

1. PAPER PATH
[4]
[1]
[2]
[3]
4061t1c001na
[1] Convey to the main body [2] Vertical conveyance through PC

[3] Tray 4 paper feed [4] Tray 3 paper feed
PB-1
bizhub 501/421/361 PB THEORY OF OPERATION PC-206 > 2. COMPOSITION
2. COMPOSITION
[3]
[1]
[2]
4061t2c001na
[1] Paper Feed Section [2] Tray 4

[3] Tray 3 -
PB-2
bizhub 501/421/361 PB THEORY OF OPERATION PC-206 > 3. DRIVE
3. DRIVE
[4] [1]
[3]
[2]
4061t2c002na
[1] Vertical Conveyance Motor /3 (M120) [2] Paper Feed Motor /4 (M123)
[3] Vertical Conveyance Motor /4 (M121) [4] Paper Feed Motor /3 (M122)
PB-3
bizhub 501/421/361 PB THEORY OF OPERATION PC-206 > 4. OPERATIONS
4. OPERATIONS
4.1 Paper Feed Section
4.1.1 Paper feed mechanism
• The Paper Feed Motor (M122, M123) drives the Pick-up Roller [8] and Feed Roller [6] to take up and feed a sheet of paper into the main
body.
• Then, the Vertical Conveyance Motor /3, /4 (M120, M121) transports the paper through the vertical conveyance section.
• The Pick-up Roller takes up sheet of paper and the Feed Roller and Separation Roller [5] ensure that only one sheet of paper is separated
and fed into the main body.
• When the Tray is slid in, the lever [7] is pushed to lower the Pick-up Roller.
• The Upper Limit Sensor /3, /4 (PS114, PS123) [9] then detects the upper limit position when the paper lifting plate is raised.
• The Paper Empty Sensor /3, /4 (PS115, PS124) [1] detects when paper in the Tray runs out.
[7] [8] [9]
[6] [5] [2] [1]
[4] [3]
4061t2c003na
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
[5] [6]
[7] [8]
[9] [10]
4.1.2 Paper lifting motion

• When the Tray is slid into the main body and the Tray Set Sensor /3, /4 (PS112, PS121) is activated, the Paper Lift Motor /3, /4 (M124,
M125) starts rotating to raise the Lifting Plate [3].
• The paper stack of the Tray pushes up the Pick-up Roller [1]. When the upper limit position is detected by the Upper Limit Sensor /3, /4
(PS114, PS123) [4], it stops raising the lifting plate.
• As paper is consumed during the print cycle and the Pick-up Roller is lowered, M124, M125 is energized until PS114, PS123 is blocked
again.
(1) When the Tray is slid in

1. The lifting plate [3] goes up and the top surface of the paper stack pushes up the roller [1].
2. The lifting motion stops as soon as the Upper Limit Sensor /3, /4 (PS114, PS123) detects the upper limit position.
[4] [1]
[3] [2] 4061t2c004na
[1] Pick-up Roller [2] Lift-up Arm

[3] Lifting Plate [4] Upper Limit Sensor /3, /4 (PS114, PS123)
(2) During a print cycle

1. As the paper is consumed, the Upper Limit Sensor /3, /4 (PS114, PS123) [1] is unblocked.
2. The lifting plate goes up.
PB-4
[1]
4061t2c005na
[1] Upper Limit Sensor /3, /4 (PS114, PS123) -
4.2 Tray Section

4.2.1 Paper size detection
• Moving the Sub Scan Direction Restriction Plate of the Tray rotates the Circular Plate [1] provided on the bottom of the Tray.
• The length of paper in the sub scan direction is detected by the Paper Size Detection Switch [8] provided on the Paper Size Detect Boards /
3 and /4 (PSDB3, PSDB49) [7] that is driven by the Lever interlocked with the Circular Plate.
• The detection of the length of paper in the main scan direction is made by detecting a notch on the Lever of the Main Scan Direction
Restriction Plate by the Paper Size Sensors /Rr3,
/Fr3 (PS118, PS119) [2] or /Rr4, /Fr4 (PS127, PS128) [3].
• The paper size is determined by the combination of the 4 Paper Size Detection Switches and the 2 Paper Size Sensors.
• The setting of the Tray is detected by the Tray Set Sensors /3, /4 (PS112, PS121) [6].
[9]
[7] [8] [1]

[5] [6]
[4] [3] [2]

4061t2c006na
[1] Circular Plate [2] Paper Size Sensor /Rr3, /Rr4 (PS118, PS127)
[3] Paper Size Sensor /Fr3, /Fr4 (PS119, PS128) [4] Paper Lift Motor /3, /4 (M124, M125)
[5] Main scan direction size detection [6] Tray Set Sensor /3, /4 (PS112, PS121)
[7] Paper Size Detect Board /3, /4 (PSDB3, PSDB4) [8] Paper Size Detection Switch
[9] Sub scan direction size detection -
4.2.2 Paper level indicator mechanism

• All Trays are universal paper size tray.
• There is a window in the front cover of the Tray that serves as the Paper Level Indicator [3] showing the amount of paper that is still
available for use.
• A red lever [1] is attached to the bottom plate [5] of the Tray and as the lifting plate [4] raises, the red lever becomes visible in the window.
• The more the red lever is visible, the lesser the amount of paper will be available for use.
PB-5
[5]
[4] [1]
[3] [2]
4061t2c007nb
[1] Lever [2] Operated by the Lifting Plate

[3] Paper Level Indicator [4] Lifting Plate
[5] Tray Bottom Plate -
PB-6
bizhub 501/421/361 PC THEORY OF OPERATION PC-407 > 1. PAPER PATH
PC THEORY OF OPERATION PC-407

1. PAPER PATH
[1]
[2]
[5] [4] [3]

4061t1c201na
[1] Convey to the main body [2] Tray paper feed

[3] Main Tray [4] From the Sub Tray to Main Tray
[5] Sub Tray -
PC-1
bizhub 501/421/361 PC THEORY OF OPERATION PC-407 > 2. COMPOSITION
2. COMPOSITION
[4] [1]
[3] [2]
4061t2c201na
[1] Paper Feed Section [2] Main Tray

[3] Sub Tray [4] Tray Section
PC-2
bizhub 501/421/361 PC THEORY OF OPERATION PC-407 > 3. DRIVE
3. DRIVE
[7] [8] [9] [10]
[1]
[2]
[6]
[3]
[5] [4]
4061t2c202na
[1] Paper Lift Motor (M5) [2] Paper Lift Drive Section
[3] Shifter Drive Section [4] Shift Motor (M4)
[5] Shift Gate Motor (M3) [6] Shift Gate Drive Section
[7] Tray Lock Solenoid (SD1) [8] Paper Feed Motor (M1)
[9] Vertical Conveyance Motor (M2) [10] Vertical Conveyance Drive Section
PC-3
bizhub 501/421/361 PC THEORY OF OPERATION PC-407 > 4. OPERATIONS
4. OPERATIONS
4.1 Paper Feed Section
4.1.1 Paper feed mechanism
• The Paper Feed Motor (M1) drives the Pick-up Roller [8] and Feed Roller [6] to take up and feed a sheet of paper into the main body.
• Then, the Vertical Conveyance Motor (M2) transports the paper through the vertical conveyance section.
• The Pick-up Roller takes up sheet of paper and the Feed and Separation Rollers [5] ensure that only one sheet of paper is separated and
fed into the main body.
• When the Tray is slid in, the lever [7] is pushed to lower the Pick-up Roller.
• The Upper Limit Sensor (PS4) [9] then detects the upper limit position when the paper lifting plate is raised.
• The Paper Empty Sensor (PS3) [1] detects when paper in the Main Tray runs out.
[7] [8] [9]
[6] [5] [2] [1]
[4] [3]
4061t2c203na
[1] Paper Empty Sensor (PS3) [2] Actuator

[3] Pick-up Roller Feed Position [4] Pick-up Roller Home Position
[5] Separation Roller [6] Feed Roller
[7] Lever [8] Pick-up Roller
[9] Upper limit Sensor (PS4) -
4.2 Tray Section

4.2.1 Up/down mechanism
• The Main Tray [3] is suspended by the cables [1] at the front and rear.
• As the Paper Lift Motor (M5) [5] turns forward or backward, the cables are wound to raise or lower the Main Tray.
• The Lower Limit Sensor (PS13) [2] detects the Main Tray at its lower limit position.
PC-4
[1]
[5] [2]
[3]
[4]
4061t2c204na
[1] [2]
[3] [4]
[5] [6]
4.2.2 Shift Gate drive mechanism

• If the Main Tray runs out of paper, while the Sub Tray is loaded with paper, the paper stack on the Sub Tray is moved to the Main Tray [2].
• At this time, the Shift Gate Motor (M3) [4] is energized to retract the front and rear Shift Gates [1].
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1] 4061t2c205na
[1] Shift Gate move to outside [2] Shifter move

[3] Shifter [4] Shift Gate Motor (M3)
4.2.3 Shifter drive mechanism

• After completion of the evacuation of the Shift Gate, starts the movement of the Shifter [2].
• The movement of paper from the Sub Tray to the Main Tray is made by the Shifter that is driven by the Shift Motor (M4) [1].
• The stopping of the movement of the Shifter to the Main Tray side is made by the Shift Position Sensor (PS11) [4].
• The movement to the home position starts when the Tray Release Key is pressed.
• The stopping of the movement of the Shifter to the home position is made by the Shift Home Sensor (PS12) [3].
PC-5
[3]
[2]
[2]
[4]
[1] [1]
4061t2c206na
[1] Shift Motor (M4) [2] Shifter

[3] Shift Home Sensor (PS12) [4] Shift Position Sensor (PS11)
4.2.4 Paper empty detection

• Paper empty detection of Main Tray is performed by Main Tray Empty Board (MEB) [2].
• Paper empty detection of Sub Tray is performed by Sub Tray Empty Sensor (PS9) [3].
[4] [1]
[3] [2]
4061t2c207na
[1] Main Tray [2] Main Tray Empty Board (MEB)

[3] Sub Tray Empty Sensor (PS9) [4] Sub Tray
PC-6
bizhub 501/421/361 PD THEORY OF OPERATION LU-203 > 1. PAPER PATH
PD THEORY OF OPERATION LU-203

1. PAPER PATH
[3] [4] [5] [1]
[2]
16aat1c001na
[1] Lift plate [2] Separation roller

[3] Conveyance roller [4] Feed roller
[5] Pick-up roller -
PD-1
bizhub 501/421/361 PD THEORY OF OPERATION LU-203 > 2. COMPOSITION
2. COMPOSITION
[2] [1]
16aat2c001na
[1] Tray section [2] Paper feed section
PD-2
bizhub 501/421/361 PD THEORY OF OPERATION LU-203 > 3. PAPER FEED SECTION
3. PAPER FEED SECTION

3.1 Drive
(1) Front side drive
[3] [4] [1]
[2]
16aat2c002na
[1] Pick-up solenoid (SD151) [2] Conveyance roller

[3] Feed roller [4] Pick-up roller
(2) Rear side drive

[3]
[2]
[1]
16aat2c007na
[1] Feed motor (M150) [2] Conveyance roller

[3] Feed clutch (CL151) -
3.2 Operation
(1) Pick-up mechanism
(a) Drive transmission
The driving force of the feed motor (M150) is transmitted to the paper feed gear /3 [4] through various gears. The paper feed gear /3 is
connected with the pick-up solenoid (SD151) [1] through the claw [2]. When SD151 is turned OFF, the coupling between the paper feed
gear /3 and the paper feed coupling gear /B [3] provided on the front stage is disengaged and the paper feed gear /3 does not rotate. When
SD151 turns ON, the claw is released to engage the paper feed gear /3 to the paper feed coupling gear /B. In this way, the paper feed
gear /3 rotates and the driving force is transmitted to the paper feed roller unit [6] through the paper feed gear [5] to pick up paper.
PD-3
[3] [4] [5] [6]
[2] [1]
16aat2c003na
[1] Pick-up solenoid (SD151) [2] Claw

[3] Paper feed coupling gear /B [4] Paper feed gear /3
[5] Paper feed gear [6] Paper feed roller unit
(b) Paper feed roller unit up/down mechanism

On the inside of the paper feed gear /3 [2], the cam [3] is provided. While in the standby, the cam pushes the lift-up shaft [1]. The lift-up
shaft is in contact with the paper feed roller unit [5] and it lifts up the paper feed roller unit while it is being pushed by the cam. When the
paper feed gear /3 rotates, the pressure by the cam on the lift-up shaft is released and the paper feed roller unit goes down. In this way, the
paper feed roller unit goes up and down while the paper feed gear /3 is rotating a full turn to pick up paper.
[2] [3] [4] [5]
[1] [1]
16aat2c004na
[1] Lift-up shaft [2] Paper feed gear /3

[3] Cam [4] Paper feed gear
[5] Paper feed roller unit -
(2) Paper feed operation

A specified period of time after a start signal from the main body turns ON, the feed motor (M150), the feed clutch (CL151) and the pick-up
solenoid (SD151) turn ON to pick up paper from the tray. SD151 turns OFF a specified period of time after that. However, it turns ON and
OFF according to the paper feed request signal to pick up the second and succeeding sheets of paper. Paper thus picked up is conveyed to
the PC by the conveyance roller to be further conveyed to the registration section of the main body through the vertical conveyance roller in
the PC.
The conveyance roller is provided with CL151 and, when the registration sensor (PS1) of the main body detects the leading edge of paper
and turns ON, it turns OFF a specified period of time after that to stop the conveyance roller and the paper feed roller unit. At this time, the
registration section of the main body stops temporarily to control the registration and all the rollers that are positioned upstream of the
registration roller also stop. In this way, paper thus supplied is put in the standby condition in each position of the registration section, the
conveyance path and the LU exit section.
When a print signal is received, a specified period of time after that, each roller in the conveyance path and CL151 turn ON to resume the
conveyance of paper.
3.2.2 Remaining paper detection control

As paper in the tray gets reduced, the lift plate goes up gradually. The actuator [1] provided on the rear side of LU rotates in interlock with the
up/down operation of the lift plate. The actuator is provided with the remaining paper sensors /1 (PS154) [3] and /2 (PS151) [2] and the
remaining paper is detected by the combination of the ON/OFF of these sensors. And the no paper detection in the tray is made by the paper
empty sensor (PS153) [5].
Remaining paper quantity PS151 PS154
Full quantity OFF ON
Medium quantity ON ON
Small quantity ON OFF
PD-4
[5]
[4]
[3]
[1]
[2]
16aat2c005na
[1] Actuator [2] Remaining paper sensor /2 (PS151)

[3] Remaining paper sensor /1 (PS154) [4] Direction of rotation when the tray goes up
[5] Paper empty sensor (PS153) -
PD-5
bizhub 501/421/361 PD THEORY OF OPERATION LU-203 > 4. TRAY SECTION
4. TRAY SECTION
4.1 Drive
[8]
[1]
[2]
[7]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[5]
16aat2c006na
[1] Actuator [2] Wire

[3] Coupling [4] Parallel pin
[5] Lift plate [6] Wire
[7] Spring [8] Paper lift motor (M151)
4.2 Operation
4.2.1 Tray lift control
When the upper door is closed, a parallel pin for the up drive of the lift plate is pushed out to be coupled to the coupling of the paper lift motor
(M151). Closing the upper door also turn ON the upper door interlock switch (MS151) to supply a 24V DC to the load of the drive system. In this
way, M151 turns ON to bring up the lift plate.
When the lift plate goes up and the upper limit sensor (PS152) detects the upper surface of paper, M151 turns OFF to stop the up drive of the lift
plate. When PS152 turns OFF by the paper feed operation, M151 turns ON again to keep on bringing up the lift plate until PS152 turns ON.
When the upper door is opened, the wire is pulled to release the coupling for the up drive of the lift plate. In this way, the lift plate goes down up
to the position in which a balance is kept between the weight of paper and the spring tension.
[4] [1]
[3] [2]
16aat2c008na
[1] Feed roller [2] Lift plate

[3] Pick-up roller [4] Upper limit sensor (PS152)
PD-6
PE THEORY OF OPERATION FS-522/PU-501/OT-602 > 1. PAPER
bizhub 501/421/361 PATH
PE THEORY OF OPERATION FS-522/PU-501/OT-602

1. PAPER PATH
1.1 Exiting Paper to the Tray /1
[2] [1]
[3]
4349t1c003na
[1] From the main body [2] Convey to the Tray /1

[3] Exiting paper to the Tray /1
1.2 Exiting Paper to the Tray /2
[2] [1]
[3]
4349t1c002na
[1] From the main body [2] Convey to the Tray /2

[3] Exiting paper to the Tray /2
PE-1
PE THEORY OF OPERATION FS-522/PU-501/OT-602 > 1. PAPER
bizhub 501/421/361 PATH
1.3 Exiting Paper to OT
[2] [1]
[3]
4349t1c001na
[1] From the main body [2] Convey to OT

[3] [3] Exiting paper to the Tray /1
PE-2
PE THEORY OF OPERATION FS-522/PU-501/
bizhub 501/421/361 OT-602 > 2. COMPOSITION
2. COMPOSITION
[4]
[5] [1]
[3]
[2]
4349t2c001na
[1] Conveyance Section [2] Staple Section

[3] OT [4] Up/down Section
[5] PU -
PE-3
bizhub 501/421/361 PE THEORY OF OPERATION FS-522/PU-501/OT-602 > 3. DRIVE
3. DRIVE
3.1 FS-522
[5] [6]
[4] [7]
[1]
[3]
[2]
4349t2c002na
[1] Stapler Drive Section [2] Exit Drive Section

[3] Up/down Drive Section [4] Shutter Drive Section
[5] Paper Exit Opening Drive Section [6] Conveyance/Alignment Drive Section
[7] Entrance Drive Section
3.2 PU-501
[1]
4512t2c001na
[1] Punch Drive Section -
PE-4
bizhub 501/421/361 OT-602 > 4. OPERATIONS
4. OPERATIONS
4.1 Conveyance Section
4.1.1 Configuration
• The Conveyance Section is divided into the entrance conveyance section [3], intermediate conveyance section [1], and the exit conveyance
section [2]. It controls to convey the paper fed from the main body, stop the paper at the punching and folding positions, and drive the paper
for feeding into the exit section.
[3]
[1]
[2]
4349t2c003na
[1] Intermediate Conveyance Section [2] Exit Conveyance Section

[3] Entrance Conveyance Section -
4.1.2 Entrance/Conveyance section

• A paper [5] fed from the main body is conveyed to the intermediate conveyance section.
• The Entrance Motor (M3) [3] provides the drive for conveying a paper.
• When the M3 is energized, the Entrance Roller [1] and Registration Roller [2] are driven to rotate.
• The Entrance Sensor (PS4) [4] detects a paper in the conveyance section.
[4]
[5]
[1]
[3]
[2]
4349t2c004na
[1] Entrance Roller [2] Registration Roller

[3] Entrance motor (M3) [4] Entrance sensor (PS4)
[5] Paper -
4.1.3 Intermediate Conveyance Section

• A paper conveyed from the entrance conveyance section is brought to a stop at the punching and folding position.
• A paper is also conveyed to the exit conveyance section.
• Drive for the intermediate conveyance section is provided by the Conveyance Motor (M2) [3]. Drive of the Intermediate Conveyance Roller /
1 [4] and Intermediate Conveyance Roller /2 [2] is controlled.
• The Conveyance Sensor (PS5) [1] detects paper in the intermediate conveyance section.
PE-5
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
4349t2c005na
[1] Conveyance Sensor (PS5) [2] Intermediate Conveyance Roller /2

[3] Conveyance Motor (M2) [4] Intermediate Conveyance Roller /1
4.1.4 Exit Conveyance Section

• The paper is exited onto each of the trays.
• The Exit Motor (M1) [1] provides drive for the Exit Roller [3], Stacker Paddle [5], and Exit Paddle [2].
[4]
[5]
[3]
[2] [1]
4349t2c006na
[1] Exit motor (M1) [2] Exit Paddle

[3] Exit Roller [4] Exit roller release motor (M6)
[5] Stacker Paddle -
4.2 Up/down Section

4.2.1 Up/down mechanism
• The Up/down mechanism is operated to select a specific tray, thereby feeding the paper exit onto a specific tray.
[1]
4349t2c007na
[1] Tray Lift Motor (M11) [2] -
PE-6
4.2.2 Tray Up/Down operation

1. The Tray is moved up or down by the Tray Lift Motor (M11) that turns forward or backward to drive the front and rear belts.
2. The Lower Limit Sensor (PS14) [1] detects the Tray at its lower limit position.
3. The Tray Overrun Switch (SW3) [2] is provided for protection when the trays overruns normal position.
[2]
[1]
4349t2c008na
[1] Lower Limit Sensor (PS14) [2] Tray Overrun Switch (SW3)
4.2.3 Tray Upper Limit Position Detection Mechanism

• Each of the Tray moves up or down according to the amount of paper fed onto it.
• When the Upper Limit Sensor (PS15) [1] turns ON for each exit of paper, bring down once the Lift Tray until PS15 turns OFF so that the
upper surface of paper on the Tray is kept at the same level at all times while in the paper exit.
• Bring up again the Tray until PS15 turns ON.
[1]
4349t2c009na
[1] Upper Limit Sensor (PS15) -
(1) Tray Position Detection

• Tray position detection is controlled according to the number of times the Tray Position Sensor (PS3) [1] is activated after the Lower Limit
Sensor (PS14) [2] has been activated.
(a) Tray position detection operation

1. During the initial operation sequence, the Tray is subjected to a descent motion until the Lower Limit Sensor (PS14) is activated.
PE-7
[2] [1]
4349t2c010na
[1] Tray Position Sensor (PS3) [2] Lower Limit Sensor (PS14)
2. After PS14 has been activated, the Up/Down Section is subjected to an ascent motion.
3. When PS3 [1] is activated a first time after the ascent motion of the Up/Down Section has been started, it is determined that the Up/
Down Section is now located at the paper exit opening for the Tray /1.
[1]
4349t2c011na
[1] Tray Position Sensor (PS3) -
4. When PS3 is activated a second time after the ascent motion of the Up/Down Section has been started, it is determined that the Up/
Down Section is now located at the paper exit opening for the Tray /2.
5. Drive is stopped when PS3 is activated with Upper Limit Sensor (PS15) of the target tray in the activated position.
* If OT is installed, OT is at the exit port when the position sensor is activated twice and the Tray /2 is at the exit port when the position
sensor is activated three times.
(2) Paper Full Detection

• When the Tray Position Sensor (PS3) changes from the activated to deactivated state with the Upper Limit Sensor (PS15) in the activated
state, a paper full condition is detected and the corresponding message will appear on the operation panel.
4.2.4 Shutter Open/Close Mechanism

1. The paper exit section is provided with the Shutter [3] and this Shutter is normally in the up condition (the condition in which the Paper Exit
Opening is opened). However, when the Tray goes up and down, the Paper Exit Opening is closed to prevent an accident such as hands
getting caught in the Paper Exit Opening.
2. The Shutter is opened or closed by the Shutter Motor (M12) [2] that turns a gear train for raising or lowering the Shutter.
3. The Shutter Home Sensor (PS16) [4] detects the position of the gear, thereby determining the position of the Shutter.
4. When the Shutter does not close while in the Tray up/down operation, the Shutter Switch (SW2) [1] turns OFF to shut off a 24V DC and stop
the up/down of the Tray at once.
PE-8
[4]
[1]
[3] [2]
4349t2c012na
[1] Shutter Switch (SW2) [2] Shutter Motor (M12)

[3] Shutter [4] Shutter Home Sensor (PS16)
4.3 Stacker section

4.3.1 Paper aligning mechanism (sub scan direction)
• Sheets of paper are aligned properly and stapled together inside the stacker section before being fed out onto the corresponding tray.
• In the Sort, Group, Staple, or Half Fold/Fold & Staple mode, each copy set is stored in the Stacker with the Upper Exit Roller separated from
the Lower Exit Roller.
• The Stacker Sensor (PS8) detects paper in the Stacker.
• The Stacker Paddle and Aligning Belt are driven when the Exit Motor (M1) is rotated in reverse.
(1) Operation
1. The paper fed out from the main body is held downward by the Drop Lever [7] and dropped down into the Stacker by the Intermediate
Conveyance Roller /2 [4].
2. The paper dropped into the Stacker is pressed against the Paper Stopper [5] by the Paddle [3] and Aligning Belt [1] so that it is aligned
properly in the sub scan direction.
[3] [7] [3] [7] [1]
[5]
[4]
[6]
[1]
[3]
[2]
4349t2c013na
[1] Tray Position Sensor (PS3) [2] Lower Limit Sensor (PS14)
PE-9
[3] Stacker Paddle [4] Intermediate Conveyance Roller /2

[5] Paper Stopper [6] Stacker sensor (PS8)
[7] Drop Lever -
4.3.2 Paper aligning mechanism (main scan direction)

• Aligning Plates are moved and the Paddle is rotated so as to align the paper at the stapling position.
• The paper in the Stacker is aligned in the main scan direction by two Alignment Motors and aligning plates.
(1) Aligning plates

• The aligning plates [6] are moved to the front or rear in accordance with the paper size.
• The Alignment Sensor /Rr (PS6) [4], /Fr (PS7) [1] detects the position of each aligning plate.
[6]
[5]
[7]
[4]
[3]
[2]
[1]
4349t2c014na
[1] Alignment sensor /Fr (PS7) [2] Alignment motor /Fr (M5)
[3] Alignment motor /Rr (M4) [4] Alignment sensor /Rr (PS6)
[5] Paper Aligning Portion [6] Aligning Plate
[7] Paper Stoppers -
(2) Paper aligning sequence

• In normal print and staple mode, the paper is fed into the tray at its center position.
• If no stapling is involved in the Sort or Group Print mode, the aligning plate shifts 15 mm to the front or rear from the center. This stacks
papers in a saw tooth manner, each being offset by about 30 mm with respect to the others.
This shifting motion is not performed when papers are fed into the MT or the SD.
[5]
[1]
[2]
[4] [3]
4349t2c015na
[1] 30mm [2] Center

[3] Shift (Sort/Group) [4] Normal/Staple
[5] Aligning Plate -
4.3.3 Exit mechanism

• The paper exit roller section is provided with the Paper Holding Paddle [3] to hold the paper exited onto the Tray while in the sort mode so
that the paper does not have an uneven edge.
• The subsequent copy set is fed out with the copy sets previously resident on the tray being held down by the paper holding paddle.
• The Exit Paddle Home Sensor (PS11) [1], Spring Clutch [4], and Exit Paddle Solenoid (SD2) [2] control the retracted position and paper
holding position of the paper holding paddle.
PE-10
[4] [1]
[3] [2]
4349t2c016na
[1] Exit Paddle Home Sensor (PS11) [2] Exit Paddle Solenoid (SD2)
[3] Paper Holding Paddle [4] Spring Clutch
(1) Exit Roller up/down mechanism

• While in the sort mode and the staple mode, the Exit Roller /Up is pressed to the Exit Roller /Lw after the paper is stacked in the Stacker.
• The press/release of the Exit Roller /Up is driven by the Exit Roller Release Motor (M6) [3].
• The Exit Roller Home Sensor (PS12) [4] detects the position of the Exit Roller /Up, whether it is in the released or pressed position.
[4]
[3] [2] [1]
4349t2c017na
[1] Unblocked (Released) [2] Blocked (Pressed)

[3] Exit Roller Release Motor (M6) [4] Exit Roller Home Sensor (PS12)
4.4 Stapling
4.4.1 Stapling mechanism
• Stapling is performed by the Stapling Unit.
• When the Stapling Motor [1] is rotated, the Clinch Arm [3] lowers. The Stapler [2] thereafter goes up to drive a staple in the paper.
• Five different types of stapling are available: parallel front one point, parallel rear one point, slant front one point, slant rear one point and
parallel two points.
PE-11
[3]
[1]
[2]
4349t2c018na
[1] Stapling Motor [2] Stapler

[3] Clinch Arm -
4.4.2 Stapling Unit moving mechanism

• The Stapling Unit is moved by the Stapler Movement Motor (M7) [3].
• M7 drives the belt so that the Stapling Unit is moved to the corresponding stapling position.
• The stapling stop position is controlled by the period of time during which the M7 is kept energized, as counted from the time when the
Stapler Home Sensor (PS10) [4] has been activated.
[1]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
4349t2c019na
[1] Home [2] Staple change position

[3] Stapler Movement Motor (M7) [4] Stapler Home Sensor (PS10)
[5] Stapling Unit -
4.4.3 Stapling Position

• A single stapling unit is moved to perform 2-point stapling.
[3] [2] [1]
4349t2c020na
[1] Parallel two points [2] Slant one point

[3] Parallel one point -
4.4.4 Staple empty detection

• Staple Empty Sensor [2] detect whether or not there are staples still left.
• When the number of staples left in the staple cartridge becomes about 20, a staple sheet empty condition results, causing a corresponding
empty message to appear on the operation panel.
• When the empty condition is detected, the corresponding empty indication is given on the operation panel. At the same time, the Stapling
Unit moves to the front.
• When a new staple cartridge is loaded, the stapling motor is energized until the Stapler Ready Sensor [1] detects a staple, which results in
the staple to be fed up to the stapling position.
PE-12
[1]
[2]
4349t2c021na
[1] Stapler Ready Sensor [2] Staple Empty Sensor
PE-13
bizhub 501/421/361 PE THEORY OF OPERATION FS-522/PU-501/OT-602 > 5. PU-501
5. PU-501
5.1 Composition
4512t2c002na
5.2 Operation
5.2.1 Registration mechanism
• For punch and holding operations, a loop is formed in the paper at the Registration Roller [2] to correct skew of the paper.
• The Entrance Sensor (PS4) [1] detects the leading edge of the paper and the Registration Roller forms a loop in the paper.
• The Registration Clutch (CL1) is then energized after a given period of time after the PS4 is activated by the leading edge of the paper, this
causes the Registration Roller to start turning.
[2]
[1]
4512t2c003na
[1] Entrance Sensor (PS4) [2] Registration Roller
5.2.2 Punch mechanism

• After a given period of time after the Entrance Sensor (PS4) [3] has detected the trailing edge of the paper, the Conveyance Motor (M2) of
FS is deenergized and a punch hole operation is made at the trailing edge portion in each sheet of paper.
• Punch holes are made when the slide cam [1] makes a reciprocating motion, as driven by the drive cam which is rotated by the Punch Motor
(M1) [2] provided in the punch unit.
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
4512t2c004na
[1] Slide Cam [2] Punch Motor (M1)

[3] Entrance Sensor (PS4) [4] Puncher
5.2.3 Punch status detection

• The punch status is detected by using the Punch Position Sensor /1 (PS2) [1], /2 (PS3) [2] and the Encoder Sensor (PS4) [3].
PE-14
bizhub 501/421/361 PE THEORY OF OPERATION FS-522/PU-501/OT-602 > 5. PU-501
[1] [2]
[3]
4512t2c005na
[1] Punch Position Sensor /1 (PS2) [2] Punch Position Sensor /2 (PS3)
[3] Encoder Sensor (PS4) -
5.2.4 Punch Scraps Box full detection mechanism

• Punch scraps produced as a result of punching operation is stored in the Punch Scraps Box.
• The Punch Scraps Box is provided with the Punch Scraps Full Sensor (PS1) [1]. When a punch waste is detected, the corresponding
message is displayed on the operation panel.
• PS1 is a reflector type sensor that detects height of the punch scraps.
• PS1 also detects whether a Punch Scraps Box is loaded.
[1]
4512t2c006na
[1] Punch Scraps Full Sensor (PS1) -
PE-15
bizhub 501/421/361 PE THEORY OF OPERATION FS-522/PU-501/OT-602 > 6. OT-602
6. OT-602
6.1 Composition
4625t2c001na
6.2 Operation
6.2.1 Overview
• Mounting the optional OT provides a total of three trays.
• The OT is attached at different positions depending on whether options SD or MT is mounted or not.
The capacity of each tray is different depending on the position of the OT is attached.
• When the short-circuit connector shipped with OT is mounted, the machine determines that OT has been mounted.
[5] [6]
[4] [7]
[3] [8]
[2] [1]
4625t2c002na
[1] When MT/SD is installed [2] FS only

[3] 500 sheets [4] 200 sheets
PE-16
PF THEORY OF OPERATION FS-523/RU-507THEORY OF
bizhub 501/421/361 OPERATION DF-613 > 1. P...
PF THEORY OF OPERATION FS-523/RU-507THEORY OF OPERATION

DF-613
1. PAPER PATH
1.1 Non-sort mode (sub tray paper exit)
[4] [5] [6] [7]
[1]
[3] [2]
4521t1c004na
[1] Paper exit roller (main body) [2] Bypass gate

[3] Main gate [4] Sub tray
[5] FS-523 [6] Punch
[7] RU-507 -
Note
• Even when mixed with the punch mode, the paper path is the same.
1.2 Non-sort/sort/group mode

[3] [4] [5] [6] [7]
[1]
[2]
4521t1c005na

[3] Main tray [4] FS-523
[5] Main gate [6] Punch
[7] RU-507 -
Note
• Even when mixed with the punch mode, the paper path is the same.
1.3 Staple mode

[6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
[1]
[5] [4] [3] [2]
4521t1c006na
PF-1
bizhub 501/421/361 OPERATION DF-613 > 1. P...
[3] Paper path for the 1st paper of the 2nd and succeeding [4] Stapler
copies
[5] Handling tray [6] Main tray
[7] Paper path for other than the 1st paper of the 2nd and [8] FS-523
succeeding copies.
[9] Main gate [10] Punch
[11] RU-507 -
Note
• Even when the A, B or C mode mentioned above is mixed with the punch mode, the paper path is the same.
PF-2
bizhub 501/421/361 OPERATION DF-613 > 2. C...
2. COMPOSITION
[4] [5] [6] [1]
[3]
[2]
4521t2c001na
[1] RU-507 [2] Staple section

[3] Main tray section [4] Sub tray
[5] Conveyance section [6] Punch section
PF-3
bizhub 501/421/361 OPERATION DF-613 > 3. D...
3. DRIVE
3.1 FS-523
[12] [13] [14]
[11]
[10]
[9]
[8] [1]
[7] [2]
[6]
[5]
[3]
[4]
4521t2e001na
[1] Paddle motor /Lw (M9) [2] Hole punch selector motor (M14) (for inch area)
[3] Tray lift motor (M7) [4] Shift motor (M8)
[5] Stapler moving motor (M6) [6] Alignment motor (M5)
[7] Intermediate conveyance roller release motor (M12) [8] Paper exit motor (M3)
[9] Paddle motor /Up (M15) [10] Paper exit roller release motor (M13)
[11] Conveyance motor /Lw (M2) [12] Conveyance motor /Up (M4)
[13] Entrance conveyance motor (M1) [14] Punch motor (M11)
3.2 RU-507
[3] [4] [5]
[2]
[1]
16fat2c001na
[1] Main body - fusing motor (M11) [2] Entrance conveyance roller (FS-523)
[3] Belt [4] Conveyance roller
[5] Coupling gear -
PF-4
bizhub 501/421/361 OPERATION DF-613 > 4. O...
4. OPERATION
4.1 RU conveyance section
4.1.1 Conveyance mechanism
• The driving force from the fusing motor (M11) is transmitted through the coupling gear [2] to rotate the conveyance roller [5].
• Paper conveyed from the paper exit roller [1] on the main body side is conveyed by the conveyance roller to the entrance roller [3] on the FS
side.
• A jam is detected by the path sensor (PS2) [4].
[4] [5]
[1]
[3]
[2]
16fat2c003na
[1] Paper exit roller (main body) [2] Coupling gear

[3] Entrance roller (FS-523) [4] Path sensor (PS2)
[5] Conveyance roller -
4.2 FS conveyance section

4.2.1 FS conveyance section
• The conveyance section is made up of the entrance conveyance mechanism [6] that conducts the conveyance drive, the main route
conveyance mechanism [2], the sub tray conveyance mechanism [5], the handling/paper exit conveyance mechanism [3], the gate
mechanism [1] that switches the paper path and the roller separation mechanism [4] that conducts the pressure/release of the roller.
[4] [5] [6]
[3]
[2] [1] 4521t2c004na
[1] Gate mechanism [2] Main route conveyance mechanism

[3] Main tray/handling tray conveyance mechanism [4] Roller separation mechanism
[5] Sub tray conveyance mechanism [6] Entrance conveyance mechanism
4.2.2 Entrance conveyance mechanism

• The driving force of the entrance conveyance motor (M1) [4] rotates the entrance roller [1] to convey [3] paper [2] into FS.
PF-5
[4]
[1]
[3] [2]
4521t2c005na
[1] Entrance roller [2] Paper

[3] Paper conveyance direction [4] Entrance conveyance motor (M1)
(1) Control
(a) Sub tray paper exit
• When the FS start signal turns ON, the entrance conveyance motor (M1) turns ON. And it turns OFF a specified period of time after the
sub tray exit sensor (PS1) detects the trailing edge of the last paper.
(b) Sort/staple
• When the FS start signal turns ON, M1 turns ON. And it turns OFF a specified period of time after the intermediate conveyance sensor
(PS3) detects the trailing edge of the last paper.
4.2.3 Gate mechanism

• On the conveyance path, the following 2 types of gates are provided: the bypass gate [6] and the main gate [3].
• The bypass gate is driven by the bypass gate solenoid (SD1) [5].
• The main gate is driven by the main gate solenoid (SD2) [2].
[6]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2]
4521t2c006na
[1] Paper [2] Main gate solenoid (SD2)

[3] Main gate [4] Paper conveyance direction when the bypass gate
solenoid (SD1) turns ON and the main gate solenoid
(SD2) turns ON.
[5] Bypass gate solenoid (SD1) [6] Bypass gate
(1) Operation
• The paper conveyance path of the bypass gate [1] is switched over in the bypass route direction [2] when the bypass gate solenoid (SD1)
turns OFF and switched over in the main gate direction [10] when it turns ON.
• The paper conveyance path of the main gate [9] is switched over in the main route direction [4] when the main gate solenoid (SD2) turns
OFF and switched over in the sub tray route direction [8] when SD2 turns ON.
• The paper conveyance to the bypass route is used when conveying each of the 1st sheets of paper of the 2nd and succeeding copies in
the staple mode to increase the handling capacity of paper even while in the stapling operation.
Conveyance path SD1 SD2
Sub tray ON ON
Main tray ON OFF
Bypass route OFF -
PF-6
[5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10]
[4] [3] [2] [1]
4521t2c007na
[1] Bypass gate [2] Bypass route

[3] Bypass route conveyance sensor (PS2) [4] Main route
[5] Intermediate conveyance sensor (PS3) [6] Main route conveyance sensor (PS4)
[7] Sub tray exit sensor (PS1) [8] Sub tray route
[9] Main gate [10] Main gate direction conveyance path
(2) Control
(a) Sub tray paper exit
• A specified period of time after the fusing exit sensor (PS3) of the main body turns ON and detects the leading edge of paper, the
bypass gate solenoid (SD1) turns ON and the main gate solenoid (SD2) also turns ON to switch over the conveyance path to the sub
tray route.
• A specified period of time after the sub tray exit sensor (PS1) turns ON with the trailing edge of paper detected, SD1 and SD2 turn OFF.
4.2.4 Sub tray conveyance mechanism

• The paper conveyance to the sub tray is made while in the non-sort mode.
• The conveyance motor /Up (M4) [5] drives the conveyance roller /Up [1] and the sub tray paper exit roller [2] to convey [3] paper [4] to the
sub tray.
[5]
[1]
[4]
[3]
[2]
4521t2c008na
[1] Conveyance roller /Up [2] Sub tray paper exit roller
[3] Paper conveyance direction [4] Paper
[5] Conveyance motor /Up (M4) -
(1) Control
(a) Sub tray paper exit (with no punch)
• A specified period of time after the FS start signal turns ON, the conveyance motor /Up (M4) turns ON. And it turns OFF a specified
period of time after the sub tray exit sensor (PS1) turns OFF with the trailing edge of paper detected.
(b) Sub tray paper exit (punch mode)

• When the FS start signal turns ON, M4 turns ON. However it stops while in the punch operation. M4 turns ON again after completion of
the punch and it turns OFF a specified period of time after PS1 turns OFF.
4.2.5 Main tray/handling tray conveyance mechanism

• The conveyance motor /Lw (M2) [7] drives the conveyance roller /Lw [1] and the intermediate conveyance roller [9] to convey paper in the
main tray direction [4]. When rotating M2 in the reverse direction, paper is switched back [10].
PF-7
• The switch back is made for the 1st paper of each of the 2nd and succeeding copies when printing continuously 2 or more copies in the
staple mode to convey the 1st and the 2nd sheets of paper overlapped each other.
• The paper exit motor (M3) [6] drives the paper exit roller [2] to convey paper in the main tray direction. When rotating M3 in the reverse
direction, paper is conveyed [3] to the handling tray [8].
• The paper conveyance to the handling tray is made while in the staple mode.
[7]
[8] [9] [10]
[6]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3] [2]
4521t2c009na
[1] Conveyance roller /Lw [2] Paper exit roller

[3] Conveyance to the handling tray [4] Main tray paper exit direction
[5] Paper [6] Paper exit motor (M3)
[7] Conveyance motor /Lw (M2) [8] Handling tray
[9] Intermediate conveyance roller [10] Switch back direction
(1) Switch back control

1. When the FS start signal turns ON, the conveyance motor /Lw (M2) rotates in the normal direction. And when the bypass route
conveyance sensor (PS2) [3] detects the trailing edge of the 1st paper [1] of the 2nd copy that has been conveyed to the bypass route,
M2 turns OFF.
2. A specified period of time after M2 turns OFF, M2 rotates in the reverse direction to switch back the conveyance [2]. And a specified
period of time after that, M2 stops to stand by for the 2nd paper.
3. A specified period of time after the main route conveyance sensor (PS4) [7] detects the leading edge of the 2nd paper [8] that has been
conveyed through the main route by the conveyance motor /Up (M4), M2 rotates again in the normal direction to convey the 1st and the
2nd sheets of paper overlapped each other.
4. A specified period of time after the intermediate conveyance sensor (PS3) [6] detects the trailing edge of the last paper, M2 turns OFF.
[5] [6] [7] [8]
[1]
[4] [3] [2]

4521t2c010na
[1] 1st paper of the 2nd copy [2] Switch back

[3] Bypass route conveyance sensor (PS2) [4] Handling tray
[5] Paper of the 1st copy [6] Intermediate conveyance sensor (PS3)
[7] Main route conveyance sensor (PS4) [8] 2nd paper of the 2nd copy
(2) Handling tray conveyance operation

(a) Sort mode
• When the FS start signal turns ON, the paper exit motor (M3) rotates in the normal direction to convey paper to the main tray. M3 turns
OFF a specified period of time after the intermediate conveyance sensor (PS3) detects the trailing edge of the last paper.
(b) Staple mode

1. When the FS start signal turns ON, M3 rotates in the normal direction. It stops a specified period of time after PS3 [3] detects the trailing
edge of paper.
2. A specified period of time after the stop, M3 rotates in the reverse direction to convey [1] paper to the handling tray [2].
PF-8
3. After completion of the stapling operation, M3 rotates in the normal direction to exit [6] the stapled paper [5] to the main tray. At this
time, the 1st [4] and the 2nd [7] sheets of paper of the next copy are also conveyed to the main tray simultaneously.
4. A specified period of time after PS3 detects the trailing edge of the 1st and the 2nd sheets of paper of the next copy, M3 stops and
rotates again in the reverse direction to convey paper to the handling tray.
[3] [6] [7]
[2] [1] [5] [4] 4521t2c011na
[1] Paper stack [2] Handling tray

[3] Intermediate conveyance sensor (PS3) [4] 1st paper of the next copy
[5] Paper that has been stapled [6] Paper exit to main tray
[7] 2nd paper of the next copy -
4.2.6 Roller separation mechanism

• The intermediate conveyance roller and the paper exit roller are provided with a separation mechanism that releases the pressure from the
roller.
• The intermediate conveyance roller release motor (M12) [1] drives the cam [5] to pressure/release the intermediate conveyance roller [2].
The home position is detected by the roller release home sensor (PS12) [4].
• The paper exit roller release motor (M13) [8] drives the crank [7] to pressure/release the paper exit roller [3]. The home position is detected
by the paper exit roller home sensor (PS13) [6].
[8]
[7]
[1]
[6]
[2]
[5]
[4]
[3]
4521t2c012na
[1] Intermediate conveyance roller release motor (M12) [2] Intermediate conveyance roller
[3] Paper exit roller [4] Roller release home sensor (PS12)
[5] Cam [6] Paper exit roller home sensor (PS13)
[7] Crank [8] Paper exit roller release motor (M13)
(1) Intermediate conveyance roller separation control

1. When printing continuously a large size paper (217 mm or larger) in the staple mode, the leading edge of the 2nd paper [4] gets to the
intermediate conveyance roller [2] while in the switch back [1] of the 1st paper of the 2nd and succeeding copies. To prevent this, release
the pressure of the intermediate conveyance roller and separate [3] the roller to get the 2 sheets of paper overlapped each other.
2. When the 2nd paper stops, the intermediate conveyance roller is pressured to convey the 2 sheets of paper overlapped each other to the
handling tray.
PF-9
[2] [3] [4]
[1]
4521t2c013na
[1] 1st paper of the 2nd copy [2] Intermediate conveyance roller
[3] Separation [4] 2nd paper of the 2nd copy
(2) Paper exit roller separation control

1. To stack [1] paper in the handling tray [2] while in the staple mode, FS start signal turns ON, and the paper exit roller release motor (M13)
turns ON. After the pressure of the paper exit roller [3] is released and the paper exit roller is separated [4], M13 turns OFF.
2. After completion of the stapling operation, M13 turns ON again when the fusing exit sensor (PS3) of the main body detects the trailing
edge of the 2nd paper of the next copy. M13 pressures [7] the paper exit roller to nip the paper [5], then M13 stops and the paper exits.
[3] [4] [6] [7]
[2] [1] [5] 4521t2c014na
[1] Conveyance to the handling tray [2] Handling tray

[3] Paper exit roller [4] Release the pressure of the paper exit roller
[5] Paper [6] Paper exit
[7] Pressure -
4.2.7 Conveyance operation

(1) Continuous copy in the staple mode (in case of A4S, 3 originals, and 2 copies)
1. The 1st paper [2], the 2nd paper [3] and the 3rd paper [4] of the 1st copy are conveyed to the handling tray [1].
2. While in the conveyance of the last paper [7] of the 1st copy, the 1st paper of the 2nd copy is conveyed [6] to the bypass route.
[2] [3] [4] [5] [7] [6]
[1] 4521t2c015na
[1] Handling tray [2] 1st paper of the 1st copy

[3] 2nd paper of the 1st copy [4] 3rd paper of the 1st copy
[5] 1st paper of the 2nd copy [6] 1st paper of the 2nd copy
[7] 3rd paper of the 1st copy -
3. The 1st paper [1] of the 2nd copy thus conveyed to the bypass route is switched back by the conveyance roller /Lw [2] and the storage
roller [3], and then it stops.
4. The 1st paper [4] of the 2nd copy is overlapped with the 2nd paper [5] of the 2nd copy to be conveyed.
[3] [5]
[2] [1] [4]

4521t2c016na
PF-10
[1] 1st paper of the 2nd copy [2] Conveyance roller /Lw
[3] Storage roller [4] 1st paper of the 2nd copy
[5] 2nd paper of the 2nd copy -
5. After completion of the stapling operation of the paper [1] of the 1st copy, the paper exit roller [2] is pressured to exit the paper of the 1st
copy. At this time, the moment the paper of the 1st copy is exited, the 1st and the 2nd sheets of paper [3] of the 2nd copy are also
conveyed in the main tray direction.
6. After completion of the exit of the paper [6] of the 1st copy, the pressure of the paper exit roller is released [7] and the paper exit roller [5]
rotates in the reverse direction to convey the 1st and the 2nd sheets of paper [4] of the 2nd copy to the handling tray.
[2] [3] [6] [7]
[1] [5] [4] 4521t2c017na
[1] Paper of the 1st copy [2] Pressure the paper exit roller
[3] 1st and the 2nd sheets of paper of the 2nd copy [4] 1st and the 2nd sheets of paper of the 2nd copy
[5] Paper exit roller [6] Paper of the 1st copy
[7] Separation of the paper exit roller -
4.3 Main tray section

4.3.1 Main tray up/down mechanism
• The up/down of the main tray is made by the normal/reverse rotation of the tray lift motor (M7) [2].
[5]
[4]
[1]
[3]
[2]
4521t2c018na
[1] Main tray upper limit LED (LED19) [2] Tray lift motor (M7)
[3] Main tray [4] Main tray upper limit sensor (PS19)
[5] Main tray reset sensor (PS8) -
(1) Control
(a) While in the print operation
• While in the paper exit, when the main tray upper limit sensor (PS19) turns ON, the tray lift motor (M7) rotates in the reverse direction to
bring down the main tray. And M7 turns OFF when PS19 turns OFF. This operation is repeated and stopped when the tray gets to the
bottom according to the amount of paper exited.
(b) Paper removal control

• When paper loaded on the main tray is removed with the main tray reset sensor (PS8) OFF, M7 rotates in the normal direction to bring
up the main tray, and when PS8 turns ON, M7 turns OFF.
(c) Paper full detection

• For the main tray, when the main tray full sensor (PS7) turns ON, this is detected as the tray being full of paper and M7 turns OFF.
• When the main tray goes up and the current of M7 is in excess of a prescribed value, this is detected as the tray being full of paper and
M7 turns OFF.
PF-11
4.3.2 Main tray shift mechanism

• While in the sort/group mode, the shift motor (M8) [4] is driven to shift the main tray [5] 30 mm in the main scan direction through the shift
plate [3].
• The home position is detected by the shift home sensor (PS10) [2].
[1]
[5]
[4]
[2]
[3]
4521t2c019na
[1] Shift encoder sensor (PS11) [2] Shift home sensor (PS10)
[3] Shift plate [4] Shift motor (M8)
[5] Main tray -
(1) Control
(a) Sort mode
• A specified period of time after the intermediate conveyance sensor (PS3) detects the trailing edge of the last paper of the copy, the
shift motor (M8) turns ON to start the shift operation, and when the shift home sensor (PS10) detects the shift position, M8 turn OFF.
(b) Staple mode

• A specified period of time after the paper exit roller release motor (M13) turns ON to start the pressure operation, M8 turns ON to start
the shift operation, and when PS10 detects the shift position, M8 turns OFF.
4.4 Punch section

4.4.1 Punch mechanism
• For the punch, a hole is punched on the rear side of paper for each paper.
• The driving force from the punch motor (M11) [5] is transmitted to the eccentric cam [6] by the punch clutch (CL1) [4]. And when the
eccentric cam makes a full turn, the cam holder [3] makes a round trip to punch a hole.
• The position of the reciprocating operation of the punch is detected by the punch encoder sensor (PS15).
[6]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2] 4521t2c020na
PF-12
[1] Entrance roller [2] Punch blade

[3] Cam holder [4] Punch clutch (CL1)
[5] Punch motor (M11) [6] Eccentric cam
(1) Operation
1. A specified period of time after the path sensor (PS2) of the RU detects the trailing edge of paper, the conveyance motor /Up (M4) or
conveyance motor /Lw (M2) turns OFF to stop at the prescribed punch position.
2. The punch clutch (CL1) turns ON to punch a hole.
3. M4 or M2 turns ON to convey paper.
4.4.2 Punch hole switchover mechanism (for inch area)

• The hole punch selector motor (M14) [5] and the hole punch position switch (SW4) [4] are employed to move the lock holder [2] as
necessary to select the hole positions (2 or 3 holes [1][6]).
[1]
[2] [3]
S4
[4]
[5]
[6]
S4 [7]
4521t2e002na
[1] 2 holes [2] Lock holder

[3] Punch bars in locked position [4] Hole punch position switch (SW4)
[5] Hole punch selector motor (M14) [6] 3 holes
[7] Punch bars in locked position -
4.5 Staple section

4.5.1 Alignment mechanism
• While in the staple mode, paper is conveyed to the handling tray for alignment operation.
• The alignment in the main scan direction is made by the movement of the alignment plate, and the alignment in the sub scan direction is
made by the rotation of the paddle.
(1) Alignment plate

• The movement of the alignment plates /Fr [5] and /Rr [1] is made by the normal/reverse drive of the alignment motor (M5) [2].
• The alignment plates /Fr and /Rr move with the position at the center of paper as a reference and the home position is detected by the
alignment home sensor (PS9) [4].
• The distance of movement of the alignment plate is variable according to the paper size.
• The alignment operation is made each time paper is conveyed to the handling tray.
PF-13
[6]
[1]
[5]
[4]
[3]
[2] 4521t2c020na
[1] Alignment plate /Rr [2] Alignment motor (M5)

[3] Handling tray [4] Alignment home sensor (PS9)
[5] Alignment plate /Fr [6] Paper exit roller
(a) Control
1. When the intermediate conveyance sensor (PS3) detects the leading edge of the 1st paper of the job, M5 rotates in the normal direction
to conduct a size movement.
2. A specified period of time after PS3 detects the trailing edge of paper, M5 rotates in the normal direction to conduct the paper
alignment. And it rotates in the reverse direction to return to the size standby position.
(2) Paddle
• The paddle /Up [3] and /Lw [6] hit paper against the stopper to conduct the alignment in the sub scan direction.
• The drive of the paddle /Up is made by the paddle motor /Up (M15) [5] and the paddle solenoid (SD3) [4].
• The drive of the paddle /Lw is made by the paddle motor /Lw (M9) [1].
[4] [5]
[6]
[1]
[3]
[2]
4521t2c022na
[1] Paddle motor /Lw (M9) [2] Paper exit roller

[3] Paddle /Up [4] Paddle solenoid (SD3)
[5] Paddle motor /Up (M15) [6] Paddle /Lw
(a) Control
1. When the FS start signal turns ON, M15 and M9 also turn ON.
2. A specified period of time after the intermediate conveyance sensor (PS3) detects the leading edge of paper, SD3 turns ON while a
3. A specified period of time after PS3 detects the trailing edge of the last paper of the copy, M15 and M9 turn OFF.
4. In case of the last copy, the moment the paper exit motor (M3) turns OFF, M15 and M9 turn OFF.
PF-14
4.5.2 Stapler movement mechanism

• The movement/rotation of the staplers /Fr [4] and /Rr [1] are made by the stapler moving motor (M6) [3].
• The home position is detected by the stapler home sensor (PS14) [2] and the position is decided according to the drive amount of M6.
• The 1 stapling at the front corner is made by the stapler /Fr, the 1 stapling at the rear corner made by the stapler /Rr, and the 2 stapling
operations are made by the staplers /Fr and /Rr.
[4] [3] [2] [1] 4521t2c023na
[1] Stapler /Rr [2] PS14

[3] Stapler moving motor (M6) [4] Stapler /Fr
(1) Control
• When the FS start signal turns ON, the stapler moving motor (M6) turns ON, and it stops at the stapling position.
• After completion of the job, the moment the paper exit motor (M3) turns OFF, it returns to the home position.
4.5.3 Stapling mechanism

• The stapling operation is made by the stapler.
• When the stapler motors /Rr (M16) and /Fr (M17) [1] are driven, the clinch arm [3] goes down to drive the staple blade [2] and hit in a staple.
[3]
[1]
[2]
4521t2c024na
[1] Stapler motors /Rr, /Fr (M16, M17) [2] Staple blade
[3] Clinch arm -
(1) Control
• A specified period of time after the intermediate conveyance sensor (PS3) detects the trailing edge of the last paper of the copy, the
stapler motors /Rr (M16) and /Fr (M17) turn ON. After completion of the stapling operation, the motors stop.
4.5.4 Staple sheet empty control

(1) Detection mechanism
• The detection of the staple sheet [6] is made by the staple empty sensors /Rr (PS20) and /Fr (PS23) [4].
• The detection of the staple ready is made by the staple ready sensors /Rr (PS21) and /Fr (PS24) [2].
PF-15
[5] [6]
[4] [2]
[3] [1] 4521t2c025na
[1] No staple condition [2] Stapler ready sensors /Rr, /Fr (PS21, PS24)
[3] Staple set condition [4] Staple empty sensors /Rr, /Fr (PS20, PS23)
[5] Stapler cartridge [6] Staples
(2) Empty detection control

• When the remaining staples get reduced to about 20, the staple empty sensors /Rr (PS20) and /Fr (PS23) turn ON with a message
displayed on the main body LCD.
• In the middle of the stapling operation, when an empty condition is detected, the empty display is shown after completion of a series of
operations.
(3) Staple ready detection control

• After replacing (installing) a staple cartridge, the stapler motors /Rr (M16) and /Fr (17) drive until the stapler ready sensors /Rr (PS21)
and /Fr (PS24) turn ON, and then send staples to the stapling position.
PF-16
bizhub 501/421/361 PG THEORY OF OPERATION SD-507 > 1. PAPER PATH
PG THEORY OF OPERATION SD-507

1. PAPER PATH
4511t1c001na
PG-1
bizhub 501/421/361 PG THEORY OF OPERATION SD-507 > 2. COMPOSITION
2. COMPOSITION
4511t1c001na
PG-2
bizhub 501/421/361 PG THEORY OF OPERATION SD-507 > 3. DRIVE
3. DRIVE
3.1 Half-fold section
[3]
[2]
[1]
4511t2c013na
[1] Folding Roller [2] Folding Motor (M10)

[3] Half-folding Blade -
3.2 Saddle Stitching Section
[3]
[1]
[2]
4511t2c003na
[1] Conveyance Roller /Up [2] Conveyance Motor (M8)

[3] Exit Open/Close Motor (M9) -
PG-3
bizhub 501/421/361 PG THEORY OF OPERATION SD-507 > 4. OPERATIONS
4. OPERATIONS
4.1 Paper Conveyance mechanism
• Paper is conveyed by the Exit Rollers of FS and Conveyance Roller /Up [5], /Lw [2].
• The Conveyance Motor (M8) [3] provides the drive for the Conveyance Roller /Lw [2].
• If a center stapling operation is made with a bundle papers stored in the Stacker, a bundle papers is conveyed to the center stapling
position, through a pulse control of the Exit Roller of FS.
• A bundle papers is thereafter fed out by the Conveyance Roller /Up and /Lw.
[5]
[1]
[4]
[2]
[3]
4511t2c004na
[1] Exit Rollers of FS [2] Conveyance Roller /Lw

[3] Conveyance Motor (M8) [4] Exit Open/Close Motor (M9)
[5] Conveyance Roller /Up -
4.2 Conveyance roller pressure/release

4.2.1 Pressure/release mechanism
• The Conveyance Roller /Up [1] is moved away from, or pressed up against, the Conveyance Roller /Lw [2], when the paper is fed out as a
bundle of papers.
• The Saddle Exit Home Sensor (PS18) [3] is used to control the pressure/release position of the Conveyance Roller /Up.
[1]
[3] [2]
4511t2c005na
[1] Conveyance Roller /Up [2] Conveyance Roller /Lw

[3] Saddle Exit Home Sensor (PS18) -
4.2.2 Operation
1. The Conveyance Roller /Up [5] is moved up or down by the cams which are driven by the Exit Open/Close Motor (M9) [6].
PG-4
2. When a bundle papers moves past the Conveyance Roller /Up and /Lw, the motor is energized to press the Conveyance Roller /Up up
against the Conveyance Roller /Lw, thereby feeding a bundle papers out into the tray.
[6]
[1]
[1]
[5]
[4] [3] [2]

4511t2c006na
[1] Cam [2] Cams are rotated. + The Conveyance Roller /Up is moved
downward (pressing).
[3] The Conveyance Roller /Up is moved upward (retraction). [4] Cams are rotated.
[5] Conveyance Roller /Up [6] Exit Open/Close Motor (M9)
4.3 Stapling mechanism

• The Staple units [2] position are fixed.
• Since the unit are for center stapling only, it is made up of the upper clincher portion [1] and the lower stapling portion. A bundle papers
moves through the space between the upper and lower portions of the staplers.
• When stapling, the clincher portion moves downward to perform the stapling operation.
[3]
[1]
[2]
4511t2c007na
[1] Clincher Portion [2] Staple Unit

[3] Clincher Unit -
4.4 Staple guide

• The Staple Guide is used to guide the leading edge of the first sheet of paper when the first sheet of paper is stored, thereby preventing the
leading edge from contacting the Stapling Unit and jamming.
4.4.1 Staple guide mechanism

• The Staple Guide Motor (M14) [3] turns the cams at the front and rear, thereby moving the Staple Guide up or down.
• The Staple Guide Home Sensor (PS26) [2] detects the position of the Staple Guide.
PG-5
[3]
[2] [1]
4511t2c008na
[1] Cam [2] Staple Guide Home Sensor (PS26)

[3] Staple Guide Motor (M14) -
4.4.2 Operation timing

1. Raising the Staple Guide
(power ON, Sleep cancelled, error reset, paper removed from tray)
2. Lowering the Staple Guide
(When the conveyance of a bundle papers to the center stapling position is completed)
3. Raising the Staple Guide
(When the trailing edge of a bundle papers deactivates the Exit Sensor (PS20))
4.5 Half-folding mechanism

• The Entrance Sensor (PS4) [2] of FS detects the trailing edge of the paper.
• The paper feed amount is determined for each paper size as counted from the timing when the trailing edge is detected. Half-folding is
effected as follows. Specifically, the paper undergoes a switchback operation and is conveyed to the half-folding position as the motor is
turned backward.
• The Half-Folding Blade [3] is lowered and the center of the paper is pinched between the Folding Rollers and this creates a crease in the
paper.
• After the half-folding, the paper is conveyed by the Conveyance Roller [7] and then the Registration Roller [1] as they are driven in that
order.
[7] [1]
[3]
[6] [2]
[5]
[3]
[4]
4511t2c009na
[1] Cam [2] Staple Guide Home Sensor (PS26)

[3] Staple Guide Motor (M14) [4] Folding Roller Home Sensor (PS22)
[5] Folding Motor (M10) [6] Conveyance Sensor (PS5)
[7] Conveyance Roller -
4.5.1 Operation
• When the Folding Motor (M10) is energized for one cycle of operation, the Conveyance Guides /Lw [2] are retracted to the right and left and
the Half-folding Blade [3] makes one up-and-down reciprocating motion. In synchronism with the sequence of these operations, the Folding
Roller [1] turns one complete turn to pull the paper downward at its center.
• At the same time that the Conveyance Guides /Lw returns to their original position, the Halffolding Blade goes up.
PG-6
[1]
[3]
[2]
4511t2c010na
[1] Folding Roller [2] Conveyance Guides /Lw

[3] Half-folding Blade -
4.6 Paper guide

• When a bundle papers is fed onto the tray, the Paper Guide supports the leading edge of the paper of a large size so as to prevent it from
pushing the trailing edge of the paper that has previously been fed out.
• The Paper Guide is driven only when paper with a length of 257 mm or more will be stored.
• The Paper Guide advances when the Entrance Sensor (PS4) of FS is OFF and retracts when the trailing edge of the paper passes the Exit
Sensor (PS20).
4.6.1 Paper guide mechanism

• The Paper Guide Motor (M13) [3] drives the Paper Guide [2].
• The Paper Guide Home Sensor (PS23) [1] is used to control the home position of the Paper Guide.
[3]
[2]
[2] [1]
4511t2c011na
[1] Paper Guide Home Sensor (PS23) [2] Paper Guide

[3] Paper Guide Motor (M13) -
4.7 Tray paper detection

• When paper is fed onto the tray, it pushes the actuator, which causes the Tray Empty Sensor (PS21) [1] to detect the paper.
PG-7
[1]
4511t2c012na
[1] Tray Empty Sensor (PS21) -
PG-8
bizhub 501/421/361 PH THEORY OF OPERATION MT-502 > 1. PAPER PATH
PH THEORY OF OPERATION MT-502

1. PAPER PATH
4510t1c001na
PH-1
bizhub 501/421/361 PH THEORY OF OPERATION MT-502 > 2. COMPOSITION
2. COMPOSITION
4510t2c001nb
PH-2
bizhub 501/421/361 PH THEORY OF OPERATION MT-502 > 3. DRIVE
3. DRIVE
[3]
[1]
[2]
4510t2c003na
[1] Conveyance Roller [2] Exit Roller

[3] Conveyance Motor (M1) -
PH-3
bizhub 501/421/361 PH THEORY OF OPERATION MT-502 > 4. OPERATIONS
4. OPERATIONS
4.1 Paper conveyance mechanism
• When the Mailbin is selected as the exit source, paper is fed off from the Finisher (FS-522) and toward the Mailbin.
• Drive for the Conveyance Rollers [2] of the Mailbin is transmitted from the Conveyance Motor (M1) [1] by way of a belt.
• As each of the Conveyance Rollers is driven, paper fed off from the Finisher is conveyed into the Mailbin.
[1]
[2]
4510t2c004na
[1] Conveyance Motor (M1) [2] Conveyance Roller
4.2 Paper path selection mechanism

• The Gate Solenoid /1, /2, /3 (SD1, SD2, SD3) [1] are energized or deenergized to direct paper fed from the Finisher into a specific tray.
• There are SD1, SD2, SD3 provided that will be energized or deenergized to operate the corresponding Gate [2], thereby selecting a specific
paper path into a specific tray.
[1]
[2]
4510t2c005na
[1] Gate Solenoid /1, /2, /3 (SD1, SD2, SD3) [2] Gate
4.3 Paper detection

• The Paper Detection Sensor /1, /2, /3, /4 (PS1, PS2, PS3, PS4) [2] detects any sheet of paper that is fed into the tray, causing the LED to
light up blue steadily to inform the user that a sheet of paper has been fed into the tray.
• As the paper stacks up and eventually deactivates the Paper Full Sensor /1, /2, /3, /4 (PS5, PS6, PS7, PS8) [1], at which time a paper full
condition is detected.
PH-4
bizhub 501/421/361 PH THEORY OF OPERATION MT-502 > 4. OPERATIONS
[1]
[2]
4510t2c006na
[1] Paper Full Sensor /1, /2, /3, /4 (PS5, PS6, PS7, PS8) [2] Paper Detection Sensor /1, /2, /3, /4 (PS1, PS2, PS3,
PS4)
PH-5
bizhub 501/421/361 PI THEORY OF OPERATION JS-502 > 1. PAPER PATH
PI THEORY OF OPERATION JS-502

1. PAPER PATH
[1]
4347t1c001na
[1] Conveyance from the main body -
PI-1
bizhub 501/421/361 PI THEORY OF OPERATION JS-502 > 2. COMPOSITION
2. COMPOSITION
[2] [1]
4347t2c001na
[1] Switchback Unit section [2] Job Separator section
PI-2
bizhub 501/421/361 PI THEORY OF OPERATION JS-502 > 3. OPERATIONS
3. OPERATIONS
3.1 Job Tray Conveyance/Exit
• The Switchback Unit functions to convey paper through, and feed it out from, the Job Tray.
• The paper sensor section of the Job Tray is mounted to the Switchback Unit, thereby detecting paper.
• When paper stacks up on the Tray [3], the actuator [2] is pushed up by the paper, indicating that there is paper at the exit port.
[1]
[3]
[2]
4347t2c002na
[1] Paper Full Sensor (PS1) [2] Actuator

[3] Tray -
PI-3
© 2008 KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
CCA0R5-M-FE2-0000
Use of this manual should be strictly supervised to avoid
disclosure of confidential information.

Bizhub361 421 501ServiceManual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Bizhub361 421 501ServiceManual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SERVICE MANUAL

L PARTS/CONNECTOR LAYOUT DRAWING..................................................................................L-1

O THEORY OF OPERATION bizhub 501/421/361...........................................................................O-1

PA THEORY OF OPERATION DF-613..........................................................................................PA-1

PB THEORY OF OPERATION PC-206..........................................................................................PB-1

PC THEORY OF OPERATION PC-407..........................................................................................PC-1

PD THEORY OF OPERATION LU-203..........................................................................................PD-1

PE THEORY OF OPERATION FS-522/PU-501/OT-602................................................................PE-1

PF THEORY OF OPERATION FS-523/RU-507THEORY OF OPERATION DF-613.....................PF-1

PG THEORY OF OPERATION SD-507.........................................................................................PG-1

PH THEORY OF OPERATION MT-502..........................................................................................PH-1

PI THEORY OF OPERATION JS-502..............................................................................................PI-1

A SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

2. DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING

DANGER : Action having a high possibility of suffering

WARNING : Action having a possibility of suffering death

: Action having a possibility of suffering a slight

2.2 Description items for safety and important warning items

3.1.1 Actions requiring special attention

• Do not use any part not specified by KMBT.

• Do not use any power cord or power plug not

• Use only the protective fuses specified by

3.2 POWER PLUG SELECTION

3.2.1 Power Cord Set or Power Plug

Marked with "E", "PE" or " "

3.3 CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE

3.3.1 Power Supply

and the product and another electrical

(2) Ground Connection

(3) Power Plug and Cord

3.3.2 Installation Requirements

(2) When not Using the Product for a long time

3.3.3 After Service

(2) Work Performed with the Product Powered On

(3) Safety Checkpoints

(4) Handling of Consumables

(5) Handling of Service Materials

3.5 Used Batteries Precautions

3.5.5 Finland, Sweden

4. WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE

4.1 Warning indications inside the machine

4.2 Warning indications on the boards

5. MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT

B NOTATION OF THE CONTENTS

3.2 OWN TRADEMARKS

4. ELECTRICAL PARTS AND SIGNALS

PG, P.GND Power ground

5. PAPER FEED DIRECTION

Serial port (USB TypeB) *1, RJ-11 *2

1.3 Type of paper

*2 Special paper/recommended paper

1.5 Machine data

1.6 Operating environment

1.7 Note for the Specifications

2.3 Paper type

2.4 Paper feed prohibited originals

2.5 Paper feed not guaranteed originals

Paper immediately after paper Take-up failure, conveyance failure

2.6 Mixed original feed chart

2.8 Machine data

2.9 Operating environment

2.10 Note for the Specifications

3.2 Paper type

Serial port (USB TypeB) 1, RJ-11 2